JP6446713B2 - Game console - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), or an enclosed game machine.

  Conventionally, a game console provided with display means is known (Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in display.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game console characterized by a display.

The above purpose is
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
First operation means provided at a position operable by the player ;
Second operation means provided at a position operable by the player;
A game console equipped with
The second operation means is an operation means different from the first operation means,
Wherein one of the plurality of display is a first animation display relating to the first operating means,
Wherein one of the plurality of display is a second animation display relating to said second operating means,
One of the plurality of displays is a third animation display relating to the operating means of both the first operating means and the second operating means,
The first animation display, the display of image simulating said first operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first display".) Is an animation display including,
The first animation display is an animation display not including a display of an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The second animation is animation display including the second display,
The second animation display is an animation display not including the first display,
The third animation display is an animation display including the first display,
The third animation display is an animation display including the second display,
Wherein the second display in the third animation is configured to be performed later than the previous SL first display,
An operation by the first operation means is received in at least a partial period (hereinafter, referred to as a “first period”) in a period in which the first animation display is displayed,
The operation by the second operation means is received in at least a partial period (hereinafter referred to as a “second period”) in the period in which the second animation display is displayed,
While the first display in the third animation display is being displayed, the operation by the first operation means is not accepted,
An operation by the second operation means is received in at least a partial period (hereinafter, referred to as a “third period”) in a period in which the second display in the third animation display is displayed. ,
It is achieved by the game stand characterized by.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by display.

It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st embodiment of the present invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the back side. FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of a special figure, (b) shows an example of a decoration symbol, c) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) shows it. The flow of the 1st sub control part command reception interruption processing is shown, (c) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part timer interruption processing, (d) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part image processing . It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of 2nd sub control part main processing, (b) shows it. The flow of 2nd secondary control part command reception interruption processing is shown, (c) shows the flow of 2nd secondary control part timer interruption processing. It is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) is an example of the success / failure determination table used at high probability. FIG. 7B shows an example of a success / failure determination table used at low probability. It is a figure which shows the table for special figure determination memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows an example of the table for special figure 1 determination, (B) shows an example of the special view 2 determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending | holding change lottery table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the reserve display of the special figure change game of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows the reserve display mode without change, (b) shows reserve A. The pending display mode is shown, and (c) shows the pending display mode of the pending B. It is a figure which shows an example of the board | substrate lamp pre-reading lottery table memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice lottery table 1 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice lottery table 2 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of notice lottery table 3 memorized by ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of a character image of a notice notification of a notice of success or failure determination of a special figure change game in progress being executed in a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention. (B) shows the character image of "Sabohani" as "character B", and (c) shows the character image of "hime" as "character C". Is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice lottery table 4 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the image of the chance button of the alerting | reporting of the alerting | reporting displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in the special figure change game currently performed in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the button aspect of the chance button 136 in the special figure fluctuation game currently performed in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice lottery table 5 memorize | stored in ROM406 of the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the character image of the advance notice of the notice result of the success / failure determination after the reach of the special figure change game in progress in the pachinko machine 100 in accordance with the first embodiment of the present invention. (B) shows the character image of "boxer" as "character E", and (c) shows the character image of "bancho" as "character F". Is shown. It is an example of the flowchart (the 1) which shows the flow of the special figure pre-reading processing in the main control part main processing of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the flowchart (the 2) which shows the flow of the special figure pre-reading process in the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub control part prefetch notice execution process at the time of start information acquisition in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st secondary control part look-ahead notice execution processing at the time of the special figure change game start in the 1st secondary control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the regular notice lottery process in the 1st sub control part at the time of the special figure change game in the 1st sub control part of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 3) explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 4) explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 5) explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 6) explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 31 is a schematic front view of a slot machine as a game console according to a modification of the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a figure which shows the game console by the modification of the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows casino machine 2000, (b) is provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement this invention. (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data embodying the present invention, and (d) a storage unit for storing electronic data embodying the present invention. , And (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the example of the button image by Example 14 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the specific example of the gauge image (effective period image) by Example 15 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game performance in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd embodiment of the present invention, and (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows the stop display symbol of the special figure 2 An example is shown, (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure pre-reading process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. (B)-(d) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result storage part for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention was equipped is there. It is a figure which shows the table for the pass / fail determination for common drawing in the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention, and an example of symbol distribution and hit operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the table for pass / fail determination for special figures in the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol allocation table for special figures 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention, and a big hit time operation | movement. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol allocation table for special figures 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention, and a big hit time operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows the flow of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. It is a figure explaining the electric Chuo Long open presentation performed by the production control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric Chu-long opening effect, (b) shows an example of the electric Chu-long opening effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the second secondary control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second secondary control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure showing the flow of the button production control processing performed by the production control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. (A) shows the flow of the button effect control process, and (b) shows the flow of the automatic button mode setting process executed in the button effect control process. It is a figure which shows the flow of the chance button control processing of the main processing in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The various settings of the auto button mode of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention are shown. The setting method of mode 1 of auto-button mode of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention is shown. The setting method of mode 4 of automatic button mode of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of the rendition in Example 1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the rendition in Example 2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the rendition in Example 3 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The chance button 700 with which the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention is provided is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of the rendition in Example 5 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The timing chart which shows the state of the chance button sensor 426 in Example 5 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention, an auto button process determination result, and a button reception flag is shown. It is a figure which shows the example of the rendition in Example 6 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the presentation in Example 7 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 31 is a schematic front view of a slot machine as a game console according to a modification of the third embodiment of the present invention, as viewed from the front. FIG. 21 is a view showing a game console according to a modification of the third embodiment of the present invention, wherein (a) shows a casino machine 2000 and (b) comprises a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 comprising a storage unit for storing electronic data embodying the present invention, and (d) a storage unit for storing electronic data embodying the present invention. , And (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. It is an external appearance perspective view which looked at a Pachinko machine concerning a 4th embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at a game board from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. (B) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. (C) It is an example of the stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol. (D) It shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a special figure pre-reading process. This is an example of a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process. (A) It is an example of the table used for the pass / fail determination of the special figure 1 when the special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. (B) It is an example of the table used for the pass / fail determination of the special figure 1 in the case where the special figure probability is the special figure high probability state. (C) It is an example of the table used for the pass / fail determination of the special figure 2 when the special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. (D) It is an example of the table used for the pass / fail determination of the special figure 2 when the special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. (A) Special figure 1 It is an example of a special figure determination table in a change game. (B) It is an example of a table for special figure determination in special figure 2 change game. It is an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time decision table which is used in order to decide the fluctuation time of special figure 1 It is an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time decision table which is used in order to decide the fluctuation time of special figure 2. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit. (D) A flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main processing which CPU of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) A flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit. (C) A flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second secondary control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an operation means image display process. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of notice lottery processing. It is an example of a notice lottery table. (A)-(d) It is an example of a notice table. (A)-(b) It is an example of a notice table. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the first embodiment in time series. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the second embodiment in time series. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the third embodiment in time series. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the fourth embodiment in time series. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the fifth embodiment in time series. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the sixth embodiment in time series. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the seventh embodiment in time series. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the image display of the operation means of the eighth embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 9 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 10 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 11 in time series. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the image display of the operation means of the twelfth embodiment in time series. FIG. 21 is a view showing operation means image display of the modification of the twelfth embodiment in time series. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the thirteenth embodiment in time series. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the thirteenth embodiment in time series. FIG. 21 is a view showing operation means image display of the modification of the thirteenth embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 14 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 15 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 16 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 17 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 18 in time series. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the nineteenth embodiment in chronological order. It is the figure which showed the modification of the operation means image, the elapsed time alerting | reporting image, and the remaining time alerting | reporting image. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is the schematic indication front view which looked at the game board concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol aspect which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure, (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a decorative symbol (c ) Shows an example of a stop symbol aspect of a normal symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of the main-control part which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the main-control part which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the 1st sub control part which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) is a flowchart of main processing, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interruption processing, (c) is timer division. A flowchart of the loading process, and (d) is a flowchart of the image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the 2nd sub control part which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) is a flowchart of main processing, (b) is a flowchart of command reception interruption processing, (c) is timer division. It is a flowchart of a loading process. It is a fluctuation time determination table used by the special figure related lottery process of the main control part concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows a notice lottery process of the 1st sub control part concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a notification mode determination table used by the notice lottery process concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. They are a button reception period of Example 1 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period, and a time chart which shows the time change of a notice. It is a schematic diagram which shows the presentation image displayed on a decorative symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. They are a button reception period of Example 2 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period, and a time chart which shows the time change of a notice. FIG. 160 is a schematic view showing an effect image displayed on the decorative symbol display device at each time point of FIG. 159. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button acceptance period of Example 3 of the notice mode of the remaining time of the present invention, and the notice mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decorative symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button acceptance period of Example 4 of the notice mode of the remaining time of the present invention, and the notice mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decorative symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button acceptance period of Example 5 of the notice mode of the remaining time of the present invention, and the notice mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decorative symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button acceptance period of Example 6 of the notice mode of the remaining time of the present invention, and the notice mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period. It is a schematic diagram which shows the presentation image displayed on a decorative symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button acceptance period of Example 7 of a notice mode of the remaining time of the present invention, and the notice mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period. FIG. 169 is a schematic view showing an effect image displayed on the decorative symbol display device at each time point of FIG. 169. It is a table used in the seventh embodiment of the notification mode of the remaining time of the present invention to determine the contents of the effect according to the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the notice performed before and after the button reception period. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button acceptance period of Example 8 of the notice mode of the remaining time of the present invention, and the notice mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period. FIG. 172 is a schematic view showing an effect image displayed on the decorative symbol display device when the chance button is not operated at each time point in FIG. 172. It is a schematic diagram which shows the presentation image after the time of (j) of FIG. 172 displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus, when the chance button is operated at the time of (j) and (k) of FIG. It is a table which determines the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of each button reception period used in Example 8 of the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of this invention. It is a figure based on Example 9 of the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of this invention, Comprising: It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on a decorative symbol display apparatus at each time. FIG. 12 is a schematic front view showing an example in which the game console of the present invention is a slot machine. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on 1st Example of 6th Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. FIG. 6 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front side (player side). It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (second symbol aspect) of the special figure, and (b) is a table in which the characteristics of the special figure shown in (a) are summarized. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of a common figure, (b) shows an example of a common figure decorative symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. (A) is a figure which put together the table | surface which put together the operation mode of the common drawing motor combination 252, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for common drawing equivalence determination, (c) is for common drawing equivalence judgment It is a figure which shows a high probability table. (A) is a diagram showing a low probability per common table fluctuation period determination table, (b) is a diagram showing a low probability failure table for common diagram fluctuation period determination, (c) is for generality chart fluctuation period determination It is a figure which shows a loss table per high probability, and (d) is a figure which shows the high probability loss table for common drawing fluctuation period determination. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability table for special figure conformance determination, (b) is a figure which shows the high probability table for special figure conformance determination, (c) is a figure which shows the table for big hit special figure determination It is. (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining a regular drawing high probability special figure fluctuation period determination, (b) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining a general drawing low probability special figure fluctuation period, and (c) is a diagram It is a figure which shows the loss table for general drawing high probability special figure fluctuation period determination, and (d) is a figure which shows the loss table for general drawing low probability special figure fluctuation period determination. (A) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of effect control processing shown in (a) of the figure, (c) FIG. 10 is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400, and (d) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart showing a part of the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 100. It is a figure which shows the screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus in the flow of the game shown in FIG. 191 in steps. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the flow of the game shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the screen of the decorative symbol display apparatus in case the first hit was a big hit without a definite variation in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the additional opportunity shown in FIG. 194 (c). It is a time chart of a common pattern symbol variation production and a prize ball payment production. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a common-design figure fluctuation production | presentation and a prize ball | stream payout presentation. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a common drawing reservation increase production and a prize ball delivery production in the state in which a common design symbol variation production is performed. It is a time chart in which common-design symbol variation production changes to winning a ball payout presentation. It is a figure which shows the specific example which changes from a common-design figure fluctuation production | presentation to a prize ball | stream payout production | presentation. It is a figure which shows the specific example from which a common drawing reserve increase production changes in the state in which a common drawing symbol variation production is performed. It is a figure which shows the example which returns to a common drawing reservation increase presentation, after an effect changes from a common drawing reservation increase presentation to a prize ball payout presentation. It is a figure which shows the example in which a game ball delivery effect is started a little behind from the timing that the game ball passed the center general winning a prize mouth 226. It is the schematic view front view which looked at the game board 200 of 2nd Example from the front. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (second symbol aspect) of the special figure, (b) shows an example of the decorative symbol of the special figure, (c) shows the common figure An example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect) of is shown, and (d) shows an example of the decoration symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process in 2nd Example. (A) is a flow chart showing the flow of the special view prefetching process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, (b) is a diagram showing the special view adequacy judgment table, and (c) is a special It is a figure which shows the table for prior determination of figures. (A) is a figure which shows the table set selection table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300, (b) is a figure which shows the table for timer number determination memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300. (C) is a figure which shows the relationship between a timer number and symbol fluctuation display time. (A) is a figure which shows the common drawing probability determination table stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300, (b) is a figure which shows the common drawing determination table stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300. It is. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a common-design figure fluctuation production, a special-design pattern fluctuation production, and a prefetch notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a common-design figure change production | presentation and advance notice production | presentation production. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a common-design figure fluctuation production and a special figure reservation increase production. It is a figure which shows the specific example from which a common-design figure fluctuation production itself changes. It is the schematic view front view which looked at the game board 200 of 3rd Example from the front. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (second symbol aspect) of the special view to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of symbols in the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the decorative symbol of the special figure, and (c) is a schematic diagram of the ordinary symbol displayed in the ordinary symbol display device 210 after the variable display of the symbol. It is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect), and (d) is the figure which showed the stop symbol aspect of the decoration symbol of a common figure. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability table for commonplace judging, (b) is a figure which shows the high probability table for commonplace judging, (c) shows the low probability table for common drawing determination. It is a figure and (d) is a figure showing a high probability table for common drawing determination. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the opening-and-closing pattern of electric chow in the pachinko machine of the 3rd example, (b) is a drawing of the common drawing effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the 3rd example. It is a figure for demonstrating several examples. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a common drawing production determination process. (A) is a figure which shows the high probability table for success / failure determination of a special figure, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for success / failure determination of a special figure, (c) is ROM306 of the main control part 300 It is a figure which shows the table for small hit determination memorize | stored, (d) is a figure which shows the table for special figure determination memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300. FIG. It is a figure showing 1/5 part of the example of the production | presentation in 3rd Example. It is a figure showing 2/5 part of the example of the production | presentation in 3rd Example. It is a figure showing 3/5 part of the example of the production | presentation in 3rd Example. It is a figure showing 4/5 part of the example of the production | presentation in 3rd Example. It is a figure showing 5/5 part of the example of the production | presentation in 3rd Example. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the production which mixed the look-ahead production in a 3rd example. It is a figure showing gradually an example of the production which the big hit notice was mixed with the popular figure production in a 3rd example. FIG. 217B is a diagram showing in a step-by-step manner an example in which a common drawing effect of the variable display pattern shown in (f) of FIG. 217 (b) is performed. It is a figure showing the example of other production. (A) is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table of the special figure 1 in 4th Example, the figure (b) is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table of the special figure 2. (A) is a figure which shows the table for special figure 1 prior judgment which is used when prefetching the start information of the special figure 1 and making a priori determination, (b) shows the start information of the special figure 2 It is a figure which shows the table for special figure 2 success / failure determination used when prefetching and performing prior determination, and (c) is a figure which shows the table for special figure prior determination. (A) is a diagram showing a common drawing probability determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, (b) is a drawing showing a common drawing determination table, (c) is a common drawing determination table It is a figure which shows a figure timer table. (A) is a figure which shows the table for the common drawing prior decision whether it is used when pre-reading start information of a common drawing and making a priori determination, (b) is a figure which shows the table for the common drawing prior judgment It is. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the popular figure production determination processing in 4th Example, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the predetermined area | region notice production determination processing in 4th Example. It is a time chart showing a flow in an example of an effect in a 4th example. FIG. 234 is a diagram showing the appearance of the decorative symbol display device and the like for each essential point in the time chart shown in FIG. 234. It is a time chart showing the flow of the continuation of the example shown in FIG. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the appearance of the decorative symbol display device etc. for each essential point in the time chart shown in FIG. 236. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the second popular drawing effect. It is a time chart which shows an example when a predetermined condition is changed from an established state to an unestablished state. It is a figure which shows an example of a 図 figure prior notice. It is a figure which shows the example which performs big hit notice production of a special figure in the common drawing effect area | region 283 of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which performs the advance notice production | presentation to the specific effect of a special figure in the common drawing effect area | region 283 of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the common drawing effect area | region 283 of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 functions as a display area | region of a pending | prescribed digestive effect. FIG. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. It is a figure which shows the symbol aspect which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2, (C) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol, and (d) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the ordinary symbol. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 20 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 21 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 22 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 23 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 24 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 25 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 26 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 27 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 28 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 29 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 30 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 31 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 31 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 32 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 33 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 34 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 35 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 36 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 37 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 37 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 38 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 39 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 40 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 41 which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 7th Embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 7th Embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 7th Embodiment in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of 7th Embodiment in time series. It is a schematic diagram explaining the example of a display of the 2nd display of a 7th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram explaining the example of a display of the 2nd display of a 7th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram explaining the 1st state of a 7th embodiment, and the 2nd state. It is a figure which shows the modification of the meter display of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a table explaining the state of the operation means in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 2) explaining the production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 14 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 15 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 18 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation by the pachinko machine 100 by Example 19 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 20 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 21 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the presentation with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 22 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of command transmission in presentation control with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 23 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of command transmission in presentation control with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 23 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of command transmission in presentation control with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 23 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of command transmission in presentation control with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 23 of the 8th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 42 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 according to Example 24 of the eighth embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining effects in the slot machine 1000 according to Example 24 of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining effects in the slot machine 1000 according to Example 24 of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining effects in the slot machine 1000 according to Example 24 of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining effects in the slot machine 1000 according to Example 24 of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55 is a view for explaining effects in the slot machine 1000 according to Example 25 of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55 is a view for explaining effects in the slot machine 1000 according to Example 25 of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining effects in the slot machine 1000 according to Example 26 of the eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the effect (the 1) displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect (the 2) displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect (the 3) displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the temporal operation | movement in Example 1 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 1 (the 1) of the effect displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 1 (the 2) of the effect displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time operation | movement in Example 2 of the pachinko machine 100 by 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 1) of the effect displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 2) of the effect displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 3) of the effect displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 2 (the 4) of the effect displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 3 of the effect displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of Example 3 of the production | presentation displayed by the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 4 of the effect displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 5 of the effect displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 6 of the effect displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 7 of the effect displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 8 of the effect displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 9 of the effect displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows Example 10 of the effect displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 by the 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is an appearance perspective view which looked at Pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 337 from the back side. FIG. 2 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by 10th Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 (C) shows an example of the stop symbol of a decorative symbol, (d) shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main-control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure prefetch process. (A)-(c) is the figure which illustrated the state by which the prefetch result information etc. were memorize | stored in the prefetch result memory | storage part in RAM308. (A)-(c) shows an example of the table for the pass / fail judgment used in the pass / fail judgment processing of the special view 1 or the special view 2 in the special view 1 or the special view 2 related lottery process of the main control unit timer interrupt process FIG. (A), (b) is the figure which showed the table for special figure determination used in order to determine the symbol by which stop display is carried out after symbol variation end. It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time decision table which decides the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation indication in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. It is the figure which showed an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time decision table which decides the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display in the special figure 2 fluctuation game. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. (B) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first secondary control unit 400. (C) is a flowchart of timer variable update interruption processing of the first sub control unit 400. (D) is a flowchart of an image control process of the first sub control unit 400. (A) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. (B) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. (C) is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500. (A)-(o) is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect by the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in order. (P)-(D) are figures which show the example of the effect by the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in order following FIG. 352 (a)-(o). (E)-(H) are figures which show the example of the effect by the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in order following FIG. 353 (p)-(D). (C) '-(J)' is a figure which shows the example of the effect by the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in order following on FIG. 353 (B). (T) ′ ′ to (H) ′ ′ are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in order following FIG. 353 (s). (I) '' is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation by the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 following FIG. 356 (H) ''. (E) ′ ′ ′ to (G) ′ ′ ′ are diagrams showing a specific example of effects by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in order following FIG. 356 (D) ′ ′. (T)-(B) are figures which show the example of the effect by the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in order following on FIG. 353 (s). (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the presentation by the chance button 136 in order. (A)-(e) is a figure which shows the specific example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the presentation by the chance button 136 in order. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the presentation by the chance button 136 in order. (G) is a figure showing an example of an effect at the time of accepting a button operation from the beginning until a state in which the chance button 136 can not be operated is started from a period of accepting a button operation. (G) 'is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a button operation is accepted after the state in which the chance button 136 can not be operated is ended within the period of accepting the button operation until the end. (A)-(h) is a figure which shows the specific example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the presentation by the chance button 136 in order. (E) 'to (f)' are diagrams showing a specific example of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect by the chance button 136 in order following FIG. 363 (d). (F) ′ ′ to (g) ′ ′ are diagrams showing a specific example of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect by the chance button 136 in order following FIG. 364 (e) ′. (A)-(i) is a figure which shows the specific example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the presentation by the chance button 136 in order following FIG. 356 (z) ''. (F) 'to (l)' are diagrams showing a specific example of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect by the chance button 136 in order following FIG. 365 (e). (C)-(g) is a figure which shows the specific example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the presentation by the chance button 136 in order following FIG. 365 (b). (D) 'to (f)' are diagrams showing a specific example of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect by the chance button 136 in order following FIG. 367 (c). (G) 'is a figure which shows the example in the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the effect by the chance button 136 following FIG. 367 (f). It is a front view which shows the example of operation | movement of the operation means and 1st components which concern on this invention, Comprising: (a)-(b) is an example which shows the order of a movement of each component at the time of pushing an operation means. It is a front view which shows the example of operation | movement of the operation means and 1st components which concern on this invention, Comprising: (a)-(c) is an example which shows the order of a movement of operation means and 1st components. It is a front view showing an example of operation of the operation means and the first part concerning the present invention, and (a1) to (a6), (b1) to (b13), (c1) to (a6) are parts of each part It is an example which shows the order of movement. Here, an example is shown in which the first part 1702 returns to its original position after movement. It is a front view which shows the example of operation | movement of the operation means which concerns on this invention, Comprising: (a1)-(a6), (b1)-(b3) are examples which show the order of a movement of an operation means. It is a front view which shows the example of operation | movement of the operation means which concerns on this invention, Comprising: (a1)-(a6), (b1)-(b3) are examples which show the order of a movement of an operation means. It is a disassembled perspective view of the chance button 136 which concerns on this invention. FIG. 373 is a perspective view of the chance button unit 700 shown in FIG. It is the side view which looked at each state of chance button unit 700 from the side, and (a) shows the state (default state) which is not performing button operation (operation by a player) and button drive (motor drive). It is a figure, (b) is a figure which shows the state which the player pressed the button, (c) is a figure which shows the state which lowered the button to the lowest position by button drive. It is the side view which looked at each state of chance button unit 700 from the side, and is a figure showing the state where shaft part 709a was rotated a little from the default state, (b) is a figure from (a) It is a figure which shows the state which further rotated, (c) is a figure which shows the state further rotated from (b), (d) is a figure which shows the state which lowered the button to the lowest position by button drive. . It is sectional drawing of the chance button unit 700, (a) is AA sectional drawing of FIG. 375 (a), (b) is BB sectional drawing of FIG. 376 (a), (c) is It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. 376 (b), (d) is DD sectional drawing of FIG. 376 (d). It is a figure explaining arrangement | positioning of a harness, (a) is the side view which looked at the chance button unit 700 of a button in a default state from the harness side, (b) is EE sectional drawing of (a) (C) is a figure equivalent to (b) in the state where the button was lowered. FIG. 18 is a view for explaining a mechanism for rotationally driving the shaft portion 709a, and is a plan cross-sectional view of a pedestal member 709. FIG. It is a figure explaining arrangement of LED706a provided in LED board 706, (a) is a top view in the state where LED board 706 was fixed to base member 707, (b) is a top view of LED board 706 7C is a bottom view of the state in which the LED substrate 706 is fixed to the base member 707, and FIG. 7D is a bottom view of the LED substrate 706. It is a perspective view which shows a mode that the base member 707 and the to-be-driven member 708 are combined. It is a sectional side view explaining the relation between penetration hole 707b and screw 708b1, (a) is a figure showing a default state, (b) is a figure showing the state where a button was lowered by button drive. FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing the chance button unit 700 being accommodated in the chance button attachment unit 701. FIG. 10 is a side view of the chance button mounting unit 701. FIG. 17 is a plan view looking at a bottom 715a of the chance button mounting unit 701. It is a plane sectional view explaining the mechanism which fixes chance button unit 700 accommodated in chance button attachment unit 701, (a) is a figure showing a non-fixed state, and (b) is a figure showing a fixed state. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the upper part of the chance button attachment unit 701. FIG. FIG. 384 is a side view as viewed from the right. It is a figure showing another example concerning the present invention, (a) is an outline side sectional view, (b) is an outline top sectional view of the 2nd article 2702 of (a). It is a schematic sectional side view which shows another Example concerning this invention. It is a figure explaining an example of the slot machine which can apply the present invention. It is a time chart showing the start timing and the end timing of the big hit game of the pachinko machine 100 in a 9th embodiment of the present invention.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 1. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110 and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured like a frame Is a door member having an opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 by the operation of the player, and a cha for emitting the chance button 136. An operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return operation button for instructing to return the balance of the player to the card unit And 142, a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, and is located below the ball tank 150 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. The outer rail 202 extends from the top to the right of the rendering device 206 so that the game ball can fly to the right playing area 124 of the gaming board 200 through the space between the top of the rendering device 206 and the outer rail 202. ing. That is, the game area 124 holds the first lower path on the left side across the rendering device 206 as a decoration member as a path through which the released game balls flow down, and the decoration member as a path through which the shot game balls flow down And a second down flow path on the right side. In the following, hitting the gaming ball on the first lower route may be referred to as "left hitting", and hitting the game ball on the second flowing route may be referred to as "right hitting".

  In the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary symbol A holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, and a second special symbol holding lamp 220 are provided. Also, the rendering device 206 operates the panel lamp 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure", a special symbol as "special symbol", a first special symbol as "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol as "special symbol 2".

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and in the present embodiment, are configured by 7-segment LEDs.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of reserved special figure change games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of special figure change games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening around the rendering device 206. There are 234.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entering the general winning openings 226 (the general winning opening 226 is winning). When it is determined that the dispensing device 152 is driven, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are referred to as balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "prize balls") and balls to be lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as "rental balls" There is) and.

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 230 is disposed at the lower center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the special opening 1 start opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven to eject a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as the award balls to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure fluctuation game by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. The ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The special figure 2 start opening 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed below the common view start opening 228. In addition, it can also be said that the special figure 2 starting opening 232 is arrange | positioned in the electric chow. The special figure 2 starting opening 232 has the feather component 232a which can be opened and closed from side to side, and the ball can not enter during closing of the feather component 232a, and it is elected for common drawing fluctuation game, common drawing display device 210 When the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the special opening 2 start opening 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 2 display device 214 is started. In addition, the ball entering the special view 2 start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. Since the general drawing start port 228 and the special drawing 2 start port 232 below it are within the second flow-down path on the right side across the rendering device 206, they proceed to the first-class lower path on the left side across the rendering device 206 The game ball does not pass through the general drawing start opening 228 or enter the special drawing 2 start opening 232. In addition, since the special figure 1 starting opening 230 is in the first class lower route on the left side across the rendering device 206, the gaming ball advanced to the second down flow path on the right side across the rendering device 206 is the special figure 1 There is no possibility of entering the starting opening 230.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed between the special view 1 start opening 230 and the special view 2 start opening 232 below the game board 200. . The variable winning opening 234 has a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. A ball can not be inserted while the door member 234a is closed. The door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  A plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in a substantially straight line at an interval narrower than the diameter of the game ball in a region from the special figure 1 start opening 230 to the left end of the variable winning opening 234. Therefore, during a big hit, the player strikes the right (how to hit the game ball to the right play area 124 of the game board 200 through the space between the upper part of the effect device 206 and the outer rail 202), The game ball does not win in the variable winning opening 234 unless the ball is allowed to fly.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with the strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening You get a prize in (Special figure 1 start opening 230, special figure 2 start opening 232) or reach out opening 240 without passing through any winning opening or start opening, or only by passing through the general drawing start opening 228 Do.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. Warp device 242 and stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the rendering device 206, and four floral patterns are vertically arranged in the non-rollable area of the game ball of the board lamp 224. The panel lamps 224b are arranged in line with each other, and the panel lamps 224a consisting of a plurality of (in this example, ten) circular lamps arranged along the outer rails 202 on which game balls can be rolled on the right side of the panel are arranged.

  The board surface lamp 224a is configured to perform lighting and blinking in a predetermined right-handed notification lighting pattern when performing notification to prompt right-handed driving. Using the lighting pattern for right-handed notification, for example, the light emission luminance of 10 circular lamps is sequentially changed downward from above to perform right-handed notification, or two or three adjacent circular lights are grouped together By making the light emission luminance of the lamp group different from the luminance of the remaining circular lamp groups and performing gradation control such that the group of circular lamp groups sequentially move from the upper side to the lower side, the light follows the right-handed direction It is possible to give a right-handed notice to make the driver visually recognize to flow down.

  Further, the board lamp 224a can be lighted or blinked in a predetermined reading notice notification lighting pattern when giving notice of the reading notice. For example, if the odd numbered and the even numbered of the 10 circular lamps are lit alternately in the normal effect, in the pre-reading advance notice, all 10 circular lamps are lit and so on. A lighting pattern different from the normal effect or the right-handed notification can be used.

  The board surface lamp 224b is configured to perform lighting and blinking in a predetermined right-handed notification lighting pattern when performing notification to prompt right-handed driving. If the lighting pattern for right-handed notification is used, for example, the light emission luminances of the four petal-like lamps are sequentially changed downward from above to give a right-handed notification, and the petals flow down along the right-handed direction It is possible to give a right-hand notice to make

Further, the board lamp 224b can be lighted or blinked in a predetermined reading notice notification lighting pattern when giving notice of the reading notice. For example, if the lighting mode is such that the odd number and the even number of the four petal lamps are alternately lit in the normal effect, the petal lamps for the number of holdings are sequentially lit from the bottom in the advance notice While notifying, it is possible to use a soot lighting pattern to be lit with a specific light emission color for the petal-like lamp corresponding to the hold related to the pre-reading notification.
In addition, the board surface lamp 224 is configured to be able to execute a predetermined normal lighting effect when right-handed notification, pre-reading advance notice, etc. are not performed.

  Further, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the board lamp 224. The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center part of the stage 244 is to the special figure 1 start opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the ball.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means has its inner end portions overlapping and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player does not easily see it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  At the lower right of the game board 200, a status notification lamp 222 is provided. The status notification lamp 222 is composed of four lamps (for example, LEDs) aligned in a straight line in the horizontal direction. The respective lamps of the status notification lamp 222 function as a right-handed lamp, a big hit middle lamp, a non-electric support lamp, and a power support lamp in this order from the left. The right-turn lamp lights up when the player should hit the right and turns off otherwise. During the big hit the lamp is lit during the big hit game and is otherwise turned off. The non-electric support lamp lights up during the non-electric support state and turns off otherwise. The power supply lamp lights up during the power supply state and turns off otherwise.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this also applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit 318 (this circuit is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Two counters are built in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the open sensor and the bottom plate full sensor and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Symbol display devices, such as a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, eg, Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of common drawing display device 210, various state display unit 328 (for example, common drawing holding lamp 216, special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, status notification lamp 222, etc. To control various solenoids 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the special figure 2 start port 232 and the door members 234a of the variable winning opening 234 and the like. Drive circuit 334 is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when receiving a signal indicating that the ball has won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232.

  Furthermore, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. Output 100 game information (for example, gaming state).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. The pachinko machine 100 is not limited to one-way communication from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600, and may be different from the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. It may be configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands bi-directionally.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the whole of the first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by receiving a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 402 further includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138 and the panel lamp 224). A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, A sensor circuit 428 outputting a detection signal from the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data, image data stored in the ROM 406 based on signals from the CPU 404, etc. Read out the work area of VRAM 436 And it generates a display image by use to display an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. Is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 502 includes a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, a ROM 506 storing data for displaying an image, and the like, and control for the game board lamp 532. Between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 for controlling the game stand frame lamp 542, between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540 And a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (c). The types of figures and figures will be described. Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the fact that the ball has entered the special figure 2 starting opening 232 (2) Special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the special figure 2 display 214 does “the fluctuation indication of the special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all the segments of 7 segments and lighting of one center segment . These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variation display of the symbol said in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time in this embodiment) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time in this embodiment) elapses, the special view 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation display in the present embodiment, and after this "variation display of the special figure 1 or 2" is started, the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol variation display. As will be described later, the symbol variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 5A, ten types of special views from "special view A" to "special view J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is the difference in whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game started after the end of the big hit game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game and after the end of the 15R big hit game, it shifts to the power support state (sometimes referred to as a short time state). The power support state will be described in detail later, but the state transitioning to the power support state is referred to as a map-high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the power-sap state is referred to as a map-low probability state. "Special figure A" which is 15R special big hit design is special figure high probability spread figure high probability state, "special figure B" which is 15R big hit design is special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols whose degree of advantage to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R big hit design called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit design called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R. “Special figure E” is a 2R big hit design called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit design which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special drawing E" and the "special drawing F" are both 2R and are in a state not to shift to the power support state. The "special drawing E" and the "special drawing F" are both 2R and are in a state not to shift to the power support state. Note that when the special view E or the special view F is stopped and displayed in the special view variation game in the special view high probability regular drawing high probability state, the power support state is maintained. Further, when the special view E or the special view F is stopped and displayed in the special view variation game in the special view low probability regular drawing high probability state, the power support 100 times is granted again.

  “Special figure G” is a first small hit symbol, and “special figure H” is a second small hit symbol, each being a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The small hit referred to here corresponds to the same thing as a 2R electric support none big hit. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different between the two, even in the same state. By providing G "," Special figure H "and" Special figure F ", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, which is a symbol that the degree of advantage to the player becomes relatively small. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than “Special Figure A” is also prepared as the 15R special big hit symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R big hit symbol.

  Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss in the pass / fail judgment, and thereafter, based on the result of the pass / fail judgment It is configured to determine which one of “Special drawing A” to “Special drawing J” is to be stopped and displayed on the special drawing 1 or the special drawing 2 display device 212 or 214 after the symbol variation display. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped after the symbol variation display, thereby determining the number of rounds of big hit games and the profit status after the big hit games The presence or absence of the power supply condition is automatically determined. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to this, and may be configured to determine the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game by lottery separately from the determination of the stop symbol, for example. Further, the pachinko machine 100 automatically determines the number of rounds of the big hit game, for example, when the stop symbol is determined, but determines the profit status after the big hit game by lottery, the stop symbol, the number of rounds and the number of rounds The profit state may be appropriately associated and configured.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, "deterioration" is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... Perform “variable display of symbols”.

  And when notifying 15R special big hit of "special figure A" or 15R big hit of "special figure B", the symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1- Stop display of decoration 1-decoration 1 "and" decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2 "etc. In the case of explicitly notifying the 15R special big hit of “Special figure A”, a pattern combination in which three same odd decorative patterns are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7 -Display the decoration 7 "etc.) stop.

  In addition, the 2R big hit, which is referred to as "special figure E" hidden probability change, the 2R big hit, which is usually called "special figure F", or the first small hit of "special figure G", is "special figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when reporting 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R big hit called sudden shortness of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5 (b) in symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of a common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a detached symbol. Based on the fact that the above-described gate sensor detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5C, the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Perform operation permission and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. If the voltage is less than 9 V (in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109 following step S107, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before power shutoff (before power interruption) is restored, and when the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 In the case of the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when a game clerk or the like operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is on (indicating that an operation has been made), that is, It is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step S115 following step S113, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, when it is determined to be a big hit by the success or failure judgment whether it is a big hit or not, a random value for special figure determination for hit is used for lottery to determine the stop symbol in the special figure fluctuation game. A random number counter for generating an initial value for generating an initial value of a random number counter for determining a winning special figure (hereinafter, referred to as "a random number counter for generating an initial value corresponding to a random number counter for determining a special figure for winning". Update). Further, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a common drawing win random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number used for judging success or failure of common drawing fluctuation game (hereinafter, "corresponding to common drawing win random number counter Update the initial value generation random number counter. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as a random value for determining special hit for special occasions is 0 to 99, the value is stored from the random value counter storage area for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for special occasions determination The acquired value is added with 1 and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the common drawing winning random number counter is similarly updated. It should be noted that the random number counter for the winning special purpose drawing determination random number counter and the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the common drawing winning random number counter are also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is set so that the WDT interrupt does not occur because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). Periodically (in this embodiment, once in about 2 ms, which is a cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt), restart is performed.

  In step S205 following step S203, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal last before, presence of previous detection signal, present detection signal) If there is a match with the information indicating that there is an entry into the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special view 1 starting opening 230, and the special view 2 starting opening 232, or the passing of the common drawing starting opening 228 It is determined that there is. That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 following step S205 and in step S209 following it, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value update process of step S207, the random number counter for initial value generation and the random number counter corresponding to the general drawing win random number counter, respectively, are updated in step S115. In the basic random number update process of step S209, the random number counter for special-purpose drawing determination and the common-drawing winning random number counter used by the main control unit 300 are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as a random value for determining a special figure for hit is 0 to 99, a random number counter for determining a special figure for hit provided in the RAM 308 to generate a random value for determining special figure for hit. Is acquired, and 1 is added to the acquired value, and then stored in the original random number counter for on-the-day special drawing determination. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter for determining the special feature for hit. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter for special-purpose special chart determination goes around, the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special-purpose special chart determination random number counter Acquire the value of and set it to the random number counter for special figure determination for hit. For example, a value is acquired from the random number counter for use for special drawing determination that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special case determination special number determination random number counter. The initial value set at this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for winning use special figure determination next turns one round while setting it in the figure determination random number counter. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for winning special-purpose chart determination has made one turn next, an initial value for determining that the common-diagram random number counter has made one turn A storage area is provided in the RAM 308. The random number counter for special drawing determination for hit may be separately provided with a counter for acquiring a random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring a random number value for special figure 2 or the same. The following counters may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the special figure fluctuation time determination random number counter for generating the special figure fluctuation time determination random value for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the special figure fluctuation game is updated. In addition, the common drawing fluctuation time determination random number counter for generating the common drawing fluctuation time determination random value for determining the symbol fluctuation time in the common drawing fluctuation game is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the special drawing 1 display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for special, 2 special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined The various timers are updated, including timers for clocking the closing time, predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215 following step S213, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  In addition, in step S217 following step S215, a winning reception process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not special drawing 1 start opening 230, special drawing 2 start opening 232, common drawing start opening 228 and variable winning combination opening 234 have been won. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When a special figure 1 start opening 230 has a prize, and the corresponding special figure 1 reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserve number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit (Hard random number circuit) The random determination value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230 of the (hard random number circuit) 318 is provided in the RAM 308 A random number for hitting special-image determination is obtained from the random number counter for winning-time special-figure determination and stored in the order of acquisition in the special-figure 1 random-number storage area. A combination of a random number for hit determination and a random value for hitting special drawing determination in the special figure 1 random number storage area (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 1 set of random values” or “special figure 1 start information” Is stored as many as the special figure 1 pending number stored in the special figure 1 pending number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number value storage area, each time the number of special figure 1 reservations decreases, the data of the set of special figure 1 random number values with the highest priority (first and most stored) is At the same time, the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number value set is processed so as to increase by one each time it is erased. In addition, every time the number of the Special Figure 1 suspension increases, the data of the new Special Figure 1 random number value pair is in the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 random number value pair with the lowest retention order (last). Will be written.

  When there is a prize in special figure 2 starting opening 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 reserve number storage area provided in RAM 308 is not full (in this example, it will be full with reserve number 4), random number value generation circuit The random number value for hit determination generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232 of 318 is acquired, and the special feature for hit time provided in the RAM 308 A random number for hitting special-purpose chart determination is acquired from the figure-determining random number counter and stored in the order of acquisition in the special-figure 2 random number storage area. A combination of a random number for hit determination and a random value for hitting special drawing determination in the special figure 2 random number storage area (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 2 set of random values” or “special figure 2 start information” Is stored as many as the special figure 2 pending number stored in the special figure 2 pending number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number value storage area, every time the number of special figure 2 reservations decreases, the data of the special figure 2 random number value pair of the highest retention order is erased and the remaining special figure 2 random number values It is processed so that the holding order of the data of the set is advanced by one. Also, every time the number of special drawing 2 reservations increases, data of a new special drawing 2 random number value pair is written in the next holding order of the data of the special drawing 2 random number value pair of the lowest holding order.

  When the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding number of storage areas provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the common drawing selection random number value generation random number counter is obtained as a common drawing selection random number value Store in the common map random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 following step S219, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the common drawing display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the common drawing display device 210 performs variable display of common drawing (common drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the common drawing hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is turned on / off to control the common view display mode, and when the common view hit flag is off, the common view display so as to become the display mode of the out-of-round symbol The on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the common-diagram display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common-diagram A shown in FIG. 5 (c) and the dislocated symbol (a common-diagram B shown in FIG. 5 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 milliseconds (ms)). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while the general drawing operation is being set, the predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the opening and closing solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) of the blade member 232a of the special view 2 start port 232 A signal for holding 232 a in an open state is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is lost, the common drawing hit flag is turned off as described later. When the flag for the drawing is off, the drawing state updating process is also performed at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the special drawing 2 start / stop control of the starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the common drawing is not in operation), and the number of common drawing fluctuation games held. If the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area The hit determination is performed, and if it is determined that the player wins, the flag for the map drawing provided in the RAM 308 is set to on. In the case of failure to win, the flag per common drawing is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224 following step S223, a special drawing prefetch process is performed. In the special view prefetching process, when there is a prize in the special view 1 start port 230 or the special view 2 start port 232, the start information relating to the suspension increased by the prize is prefetched, and the success or failure result of the special view fluctuation game according to the suspension It decides beforehand beforehand the stop design and the fluctuation time and the like which are based on the special design related lottery processing before the decision of success or failure. The flow of the special view prefetch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one of the following plural (in this example, nine) processes is performed according to the special view 2 state.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing of the special figure 2 change start, the special figure 2 value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 reserve number stored in the special figure 2 reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 Restore in the pending count storage area. At the same time, turning on / off of the special view 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, assuming that the four LEDs of the special view 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 3 are LED numbers 1-4 sequentially from left to right in the figure, the LEDs for the special view 2 holding number are for example red in order from the smaller LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is lit and Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special feature probability variation flag, and Flags for each of the probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has passed (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special drawing A shown in FIG. 5A, the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is on. The special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the common figure When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure E, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. Probability fluctuation flag is off, 普If the rate fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, if the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, if the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, the first off flag is on In such a case, the 7-segment LED constituting the display 2 for the special view 2 is turned on / off to control the special view I and the special view J when the second out-of-focus flag is on. In the setting area of, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display 214 has a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure A), a 15R big hit symbol (special figure B), a sudden odd symbol (special figure C), a sudden short time symbol (special figure D) ), Hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first missing symbol (special figure I ), And the second out-of-place symbol (special figure J), one of the symbols is displayed. Thereafter, in order to maintain the predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the number of times of power assistance stored in the number of times of power assistance (details will be described later) stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of power assistance and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0 If it is not during the special map probability fluctuation (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the solenoid for driving the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), until the variable winning opening 234 detects a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) of winning balls A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 and a timer for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating a closed period is set in the storage area. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening / closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the number of times of power support (for example, 100 times) is set in the number of times of power support stored in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game. Turn on the short time flag provided in. If the common drawing probability change flag is set to OFF, the number of power support times is not set in the power support frequency storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. Here, the power support state means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. At this time, when the short flag is set to on, the drawing is in a high probability state (general drawing probability change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 tends to be long (electric Chu open and spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. A game state by these common drawing definite change, common drawing change short, electric Chu open spread is put together, and it is called electric support (starting hole prize support by electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 start port 232 until the game ball enters the ball However, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and this is to solve this. Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is a disconnection, as described later, a disconnection flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is larger than 0, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. The notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 starting opening 232 It is carried out prior to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the starting port 230 in FIG.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S 229), the special figure 2 random number value set is acquired from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, and acquired Refer to the hit / fail judgment table shown in FIG. 10 (a) or FIG. 10 (b) for the hit judgment random number in the special figure 2 random number value set, and make a big hit or a small hit. Make a decision on whether or not to lose. Next, when the determination result of the success or failure is a big hit or a small hit, the main control unit 300 compares the acquired special figure 2 random number value storage area with the random number value for determining the special occasion special figure shown in FIG. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special view 2 is determined with reference to the table for determination in FIG. Although the details will be described later, when the result of the determination is disapproval, a random value for determination of dislocated symbol is separately acquired, and the reference is made to the table for determination of special figure 2 shown in FIG. Determine the pattern.

  After extracting the set of the special figure 2 random number values from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, the storage of the set of the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number value storage area is cleared and Subtract 1 from the number of reservations. At this time, the set of the special figure 2 random number values is stored in a temporary area (an example of the second start information storage means) provided in the RAM 308 with the special figure 2 random number value set extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area. The above-described determination may be performed based on the set of the special figure 2 random number values stored in the temporary area.

  The special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is also similar to the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) except that the special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. I omit it.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, prefetch result information command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information which can specify the type of command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. Further, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the special figure related In the case of the symbol change stop command, it includes the values of the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc. in the case of the symbol change stop command. In the case of the command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag or the like is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, or the like is included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning in special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning in special figure 2 starting opening 232, presence or absence of winning in variable prize opening 234, etc. including.

  In addition, in the pre-reading result information command, information of pre-reading result (predetermined stop symbol and fluctuation time information) stored in the pre-reading result storage section in the command data and the number of stop symbols that are pre-read are held And pending number information indicating whether it corresponds to. The information on the prefetch result in the prefetch result information command and the information on the number of reservations may be only an increase or may include information on the results on prefetch for all the reservations and information on the number of reservations.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 relation stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the special figure fluctuation time selected in the lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are pending etc Set the information indicating. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game etc pending Set the information indicating. Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special view 2 start port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the common view display device 210 and the special view 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special view 2 display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer variable update interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step S303 following step S301, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. . In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S307 following step S305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309 following step S307, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S311 following step S309, when pressing of the chance button is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data according to the pressing of the chance button.

  In step S313 following step S311, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315 following step S313, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317 following step S315, when there is an instruction to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S319 following step S317, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321 following step S319, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, the setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303. .

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. 8A. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 following step S501, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S321 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400, update processing of other effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603 following step S601, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise transfer end division Wait for incoming signal to be input. In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607 following step S605, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S609 following step S607, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise Waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  The process of the second auxiliary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S701 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. . In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S 707 following step S 705, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S709 following step S707, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step S711 following step S709, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S713 following step S711, when there is an instruction from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 is provided with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step S901 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second auxiliary control unit main process shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Accordingly, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S 903 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, an update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, the special figure change game and the like in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 10 to FIG. First, a table for judging whether to apply or not used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The data table shown in FIG. 10 is stored, for example, in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. 10 (a) and 10 (b) correspond to the special view 2 or the special view 1 in the special view 2 or the special view 1 in the special view 2 related to the main control unit timer interrupt process (steps S229 and S231). An example of a success / failure determination table to be used is shown. FIG. 10 (a) shows a table used during the special figure high probability, and FIG. 10 (b) shows a table used during the special figure low probability.

  In the qualification table shown in FIG. 10 (a) and FIG. 10 (b), the first column from the left has the items “probability of special view”, the second column the “random number range”, and the third column the “results” item. It consists of The “high probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 10A indicates that the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination is the special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates the numerical range (0 to 65535) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number for hit determination. The “random number range” is divided into four values of numbers 0 to 10000, numbers 10001 to 11638, numbers 11639 to 11940, and numbers 11941 to 65535. In the third column, "Eligibility result" is assigned "High probability" and "Displacement" corresponding to numerical values 0 to 10000, numerical values 11941 to 65535, and "big hit" corresponding to numerical values 10001 to 11638, "Small hits" are assigned corresponding to the numbers 11639-11940.

  The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 10B indicates that the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination is the special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates the numerical range (0 to 65535) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number for hit determination. The “random number range” is divided into four values of 0 to 10000, values of 10001 to 10162, values of 10163 to 10464, and values of 10465 to 65535. In the third column, “Eligibility result” is assigned “Lost” corresponding to “Low probability” and numerical values 0 to 10000, numerical values 10465 to 65535, and “big hit” allocated to numerical values 10001 to 10162, "Small hits" are assigned corresponding to the numbers 10163 to 10464.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is used to determine whether to acquire the result of the variable game of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 as a winning (hit) or a non-winning (not playing). With reference to the randomness determination table, the randomness value is judged to be acceptable. For example, when the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination is the special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads out the high probability table for success or failure determination shown in FIG. In the case of the low probability state in the figure, the low probability table for success or failure determination shown in FIG. 10B is read out from the ROM 306 and referred to.

  FIG. 11 shows a special drawing determination table used to determine a symbol to be displayed in a stopped state after the variation of the symbol. FIG. 11 (a) shows a special view 1 determination table, and FIG. 11 (b) shows a special view 2 determination table. The special figure 1 determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a) and the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 11 (b) are from the left row of "approval result", "range of symbol random number", and "stop symbol" It consists of items. The "pass / fail judgment results" in the left column are classified into "big hit", "small hit" and "deterioration". "Big hit" shows the case where it is judged as "big hit" as a result of adequacy judgment using the table for adjudication determination shown in FIG. 10 (a) or FIG. 10 (b), and "small hit" is a special hit or not. As a result of the propriety determination using the determination table, it shows the case where it is determined as "small hit", and the "disapproval" shows the case where it is determined as "disapproval" as a result of the propriety determination using the special drawing suitability determination table It shows.

  The item “range of symbol random numbers” in the middle row of the table shown in FIG. 11 (a) indicates the obtained random number for determining special pattern 1 for winning or the range of random numbers to be compared with the random number for out symbol selection There is. "Range of symbol random numbers" corresponds to the item "big hit" in the left column "yes or no judgment result", the numerical value 0 to 49, the numerical value 50 to 69, the numerical value 70 to 77, the numerical value 78 to 83, the numerical value 84 to 91 and It is divided into six numbers 92 to 99, and it is divided into two numbers 0 to 49 and 50 to 99 corresponding to "small hits", and numbers 0 to 49 and numbers corresponding to "out". It is divided into two of 50-99.

  The item "stop symbol" in the right column of the table shown in FIG. 11A represents the stop symbol in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. "Stop symbol" corresponds to "big hit" and the range of symbol random numbers corresponds to the numbers 0 to 49, "special figure A", to the numbers 50 to 69, "special figure B", to the numbers 70 to 77 Stop the "special figure F" corresponding to the "special figure D" corresponding to the numerical value 78 to 83, the "special figure E" corresponding to the numerical value 84 to 91, and the numerical value 92 to 99 The symbol modes are respectively assigned. In addition, "stop design" is "small hit" and the range of design random number corresponds to the numerical value 0 to 49, "stopper pattern form of the" special figure H "corresponding to the numerical value 50 to 99. Each is assigned. Furthermore, the "stop symbol" is "off" and the symbol random number range corresponds to the numerical value 0 to 49, the special symbol I corresponds to the numerical value 50 to 99, and the special symbol J corresponds to the numerical value 50 to 99, respectively. It is assigned.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 sets the special figure 1 display device 212 to the special figure A to the special figure 1 when the result of the success or failure judgment based on entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is a big hit. It is determined with reference to the special figure 1 determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for special figure determination for the winning case which one of the stop symbol aspects of F ′ ′ is to be displayed in a stopped manner.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 sets the special figure G display 212 and the special figure H to the special figure 1 display device 212 when the result of the pass / fail judgment based on entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is a small hit. It is determined with reference to the special figure 1 determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for special figure determination for the winning case which stop symbol aspect is to be stopped and displayed.

  In addition, basic circuit 302 of main control section 300, when the decision result based on the winning a prize figure in special figure 1 starting opening 230 is disapproval, either stop figure of special figure I and special figure J in special figure 1 display 212 It is determined with reference to the special drawing 1 determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for losing symbol determination whether the aspect is to be stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the random value for determining the off symbol is obtained from the random number counter for determining off symbol provided in the RAM 308 when determining the stopping symbol for off.

  The item “range of symbol random numbers” in the middle column of the table shown in FIG. 11 (b) shows the numerical value range of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number for determining special figure 2 for winning or the symbol for random determination There is. "The range of symbol random numbers" is divided into two numbers of 0 to 65 and 66 to 99 corresponding to the item "big hit" in the left column "pass / fail judgment result", and corresponds to "small hit", It is divided into two of the numbers 0 to 49 and the numbers 50 to 99, and is divided into two of the numbers 0 to 49 and 50 to 99, corresponding to "outside".

  The item “stop symbol” in the right column of the table shown in FIG. The "stop symbol" is assigned a "big hit" and the symbol pattern range of "special figure B" corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 65 corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 65, and the special figure B corresponding to the numerical value 66 to 99, respectively. ing. In addition, "stop design" is "small hit" and the range of design random number corresponds to the numerical value 0 to 49, "stopper pattern form of the" special figure H "corresponding to the numerical value 50 to 99. Each is assigned. Furthermore, the "stop symbol" is "off" and the symbol random number range corresponds to the numerical value 0 to 49, the special symbol I corresponds to the numerical value 50 to 99, and the special symbol J corresponds to the numerical value 50 to 99, respectively. It is assigned.

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines that the special view 2 display device 214 displays “special view A” and “special view” when the determination result based on entering the special view 2 start opening 232 is a big hit. It is determined with reference to the special figure 2 determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for special figure determination for winning, which stop symbol aspect of B "is to be displayed for stop. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), the random number value in the "range of symbol random numbers" when the "decision result" is "big hit", the "stop symbol" is "special figure A" or "special figure It is distributed to "B" only. Therefore, in the special figure 2 variation game, the stop symbol when the success or failure judgment result is a big hit is determined to either "special figure A" or "special figure B", and "special figure C" ~ "special figure "F" is not selected. Therefore, the big hit game of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is advantageously set to the player in comparison with the big hit game of the special figure 1 fluctuation game.

  In addition, when the result of the pass / fail judgment based on entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is a small hit, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 displays "special figure G" and "special figure H" on the special figure 2 display device 214. It is determined with reference to the special figure 2 determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for special figure determination for the winning case which stop symbol aspect is to be stopped and displayed.

  In addition, basic circuit 302 of main control section 300, when the decision result based on winning in special figure 2 starting opening 232 is disapproval, either stop figure of special figure I and special figure J in special figure 2 display 214 It is determined with reference to the special figure 2 special figure determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for losing symbol determination whether it makes the stop display of the mode display. It should be noted that the random value for determining the off symbol is obtained from the random number counter for determining off symbol provided in the RAM 308 when determining the stopping symbol for off.

  FIG. 12 shows an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display in the special drawing 1 fluctuation game. The special view 1 variation display time determination table is used in the special view 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 12 is stored, for example, in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure 1 variation display time determination table includes “stop symbol”, “table”, “random number selection range”, “variation time”, and “effect mode with decorative symbol display device” from the left column It consists of 5 items.

  "Stop symbol" in the left column is the stop symbol determined using the special figure 1 determination table of Fig. 11 (a), and "special figure A · special figure B (common with or without electric support)", "Special figure C ~ Special figure H (common with or without power support)", "Special figure I · Special figure J (without voltage support: Hold 3)", and "Special figure I · Special figure J (without power support: Hold) It is divided into four of 0-2 or electric support existence: hold 0-3). If the "stop symbol" is "special figure A · special figure B", whether the gaming state at the time of the variable time determination is the power support state (whether the power support or not) and the number of special figures 1 fluctuation game pending Instead, table "1" is selected. Further, when the “stop symbol” is “special figure C to special figure H”, the table “2” is selected regardless of the presence / absence of power support at the time of determination of the variation time and the number of reserved special figures 1 variation games.

  When "stop symbol" is "special figure I · special figure J", table "3" or table "4" is selected according to the presence / absence of power support at the time of fluctuation time determination and the number of pending special game 1 fluctuation games. It is supposed to be If there is no power support and the number of reserved special game 1 floating games is three, the table "3" is selected as the stop symbol and there is no power support and there is no power support and the corresponding hold is not. When the number is 0 to 2, or when there is power support and the number of reservations is 0 to 3, the table "4" is selected.

  The “random number selection range” on the right of the “table” in the drawing indicates the numerical range (0 to 65535) of the random number to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining the special pattern fluctuation time. For example, the random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination is acquired simultaneously with acquisition of the start information of special drawing 1, is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308, and is read out from the predetermined storage area when special drawing 1 fluctuation display time is determined. It has become. In the table “1”, “random number selection range” is divided into three values of numbers 0 to 1000, numbers 1001 to 20000, and numbers 20001 to 65535. In the table "2", the "random number selection range" is divided into one of all numerical values 0 to 65535. In the table “3”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four values of 0 to 65000, 6501 to 65400, 65401 to 65500, and 65501 to 65535. In the table "4", the "random number selection range" is divided into four values of 0 to 50000, 50001 to 60000, 60001 to 65000, and 65001 to 65535.

  The "variation time" on the right of the "random number selection range" in the figure indicates the variation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. The "variation time" is the table "1" and the random number selection range is "15000 ms" corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 1000, "45000 ms" corresponding to the numerical value 1001 to 20000, and "65000 ms" corresponding to the numerical value 20001 to 65535. Are respectively assigned. Further, “1 2000 ms” is allocated to the “variation time” corresponding to the table “2” and the random number selection range corresponding to the whole numerical value 0 to 65535. "Variation time" corresponds to the table "3" and "3000 ms" corresponding to the random number selection range of 0 to 65000, "10000 ms" corresponding to the numeric values 65001 to 65400, and corresponding to the numeric values 65401 to 65500 "60000 ms" is allocated corresponding to "40000 ms" and numerical values 65501 to 65535, respectively. Furthermore, “variation time” corresponds to the table “4” and “8000 ms” corresponding to the random number selection range of the numbers 0 to 50000, “10000 ms” corresponding to the numbers 50001 to 60000, corresponding to the numbers 60001 to 65000 "60000 ms" is allocated corresponding to "40000 ms" and numerical values 6500 to 65535, respectively.

  The "Demonstrate mode with the decorative symbol display device" on the right of the "variation time" in the figure is the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special figure 1 variation game corresponding to the combination of the "stop symbol" and the selected "variation time". Shows an effect mode to be executed. "The effect pattern in the decorative symbol display device" corresponds to "per normal reach" and "45000 ms" for "stop symbol" corresponding to "special figure A · special figure B" and fluctuation time "1500 ms". Thus, "per reach B" is allocated corresponding to "per reach A" and fluctuation time "65000 ms". Further, in the "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device", "all chances stop" is assigned corresponding to "stop symbol" corresponding to "special figure C to special figure H" and fluctuation time "12000 ms". In addition, in "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device", "stop symbol" is "special figure I · special figure J" and "shortening out" corresponding to fluctuation time "3000 ms", fluctuation time "8000 ms" Correspondingly, "Attach", "Normal reach out" corresponding to fluctuation time "10000 ms", "Leach A out" corresponding to fluctuation time "40000 ms", "Leach B out" corresponding to fluctuation time "60000 ms" Are each assigned.

  FIG. 13 shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display in the special figure 2 fluctuation game. The special view 2 variation display time determination table is used in the special view 2 related lottery process (step S229) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 13 is stored, for example, in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 13, the special figure 2 variation display time determination table includes “stop symbol”, “table”, “random number selection range”, “variation time”, and “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” from the left column. It consists of 5 items.

  "Stop symbol" in the left row is the stop symbol determined using the special figure 2 determination table in FIG. 11 (b), and "special figure A · special figure B (common with or without electric support)", "Special figure G · Special figure H (common with or without charge support)", "Special figure I · Special figure J (with charge support: Withholding 1 to 3)", "Special figure I with special view J (with charge support): It is divided into five of "pending 0)", and "special figure I · special figure J (without power support: pending 0-3)". The table "5" corresponds to the "special figure A · special figure B" of the "stop symbol", and the table "6" corresponds to the "special figure G · special figure H". When the "stop symbol" is "special figure A · special figure B", the table "5" is selected regardless of the presence / absence of power support at the time of determination of the variation time and the number of reserved special figures 2 variation games. Also, when the "stop symbol" is "special figure G · special figure H", the table "6" is selected regardless of the presence or absence of power support at the time of determination of the fluctuation time and the number of reserved special game 2 fluctuation games. .

  If the "stop symbol" is "special figure I · special figure J", any of the tables "7" to "9" according to the presence or absence of power support at the time of the fluctuation time determination and the number of pending special game 2 fluctuation games. Is to be selected. If the special symbol I or the special image J is decided as the stop symbol, and there is a power support and the number of reserved special game 2 variable games is 1 to 3, the table "7" is selected, there is a power support When the number of reservations is 0, the table "8" is selected, and when there is no power support and the number of reservations is 0 to 3, the table "9" is selected.

  The “random number selection range” on the right of the “table” in the drawing indicates the numerical range (0 to 65535) of the random number to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining the special pattern fluctuation time. For example, the random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination is acquired simultaneously with acquisition of the start information of special drawing 2, is stored in a predetermined storage area of RAM 308, and read out from the predetermined storage area when special drawing 2 fluctuation display time is determined. It has become. In the table “5”, the “random number selection range” is divided into three values of numbers 0 to 1000, numbers 1001 to 20000, and numbers 20001 to 65535. In each of the tables "6" to "8", the "random number selection range" is divided into one of all numerical values 0 to 65535. In the table "9", the "random number selection range" is divided into four values of 0 to 50000, 50001 to 60000, 60001 to 65000, and 65001 to 65535.

  The "variation time" on the right of the "random number selection range" in the figure indicates the variation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation game. The "variation time" is the table "5" and the random number selection range is "15000 ms" corresponding to the numbers 0 to 1000, "45000 ms" corresponding to the numbers 1001 to 20000, "65000 ms corresponding to the numbers 20001 to 65535. Are respectively assigned. In addition, “1 2000 ms” is allocated to the “variation time” corresponding to the table “6” and the random number selection range corresponding to the whole numerical value 0 to 65535. In addition, “1500 ms” is allocated to the “variation time” corresponding to the table “7” and the random number selection range corresponding to the whole numerical value 0 to 65535. In addition, “8000 ms” is assigned to the “variation time” corresponding to the table “8” and the random number selection range corresponding to all numerical values from 0 to 65535. Furthermore, “variation time” corresponds to the table “9” and “8000 ms” corresponding to the random number selection range from the numerical value 0 to 50000, “10000 ms” corresponding to the numerical value 50001 to 60000, and the numerical value 60001 to 65000 "60000 ms" is allocated corresponding to "40000 ms" and numerical values 6500 to 65535, respectively.

  The "Demonstrate mode with the decorative symbol display device" on the right of the "fluctuating time" in the figure is the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special figure 2 fluctuating game corresponding to the combination of the "stop symbol" and the selected "fluctuating time". Shows an effect mode to be executed. “The effect pattern on the decorative symbol display device” is “Stop A” corresponding to “Special figure A / Special figure B” and “per normal reach” corresponding to fluctuation time 15000 ms, “reach A corresponding to fluctuation time 45000 ms” “Per reach B” is allocated corresponding to the fluctuation time of 65000 ms. In addition, in the "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device", "stop all chances" is assigned to "stop symbol" corresponding to "special figure G · special figure H" and fluctuation time 12000 ms. In the special figure 2 change game of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since the stop symbols of "special figure C" to "special figure F" are not selected, "special figure G" or "special figure G" Only when any of the special figure H is selected, "all chances stop" is selected as the "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device". For this reason, when the effect is executed in the effect mode of "all chance eyes stop", a small hit is determined. In addition, as for "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device", "stop symbol" corresponds to "special figure I · special figure J" and corresponds to fluctuation time of 1500 ms, "super shortening out of phase", corresponding to fluctuation time of 8000 ms "Launch", "Normal reach slip" corresponding to fluctuation time 10000 ms, "Leach A slip" corresponding to fluctuation time 40000 ms, and "Leach B slip" corresponding to fluctuation time 60000 ms.

  Next, when making a lottery whether or not to change the display mode of the hold display image (details will be described later) displayed in the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 hold display areas 208d1 and 208d2 of the decorative symbol display device 208 The hold change lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 shows a pending change lottery table (predictive notice: starting opening prize winning time) to be referred to in the pending change lottery in which whether to change the display mode of the pending display image is drawn. The hold change lottery table is used in step S1205 in the first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution process at the time of acquisition of start information described later. The hold change lottery table is stored, for example, in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400.

  The hold change lottery table shown in FIG. 14 is divided into five from the left row into “variation time”, “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “no change”, “hold A” and “hold B” There is. The "variation time" is the "variation time" determined using the special view 1 or special view 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13, and main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process at step S233, the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six of “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms” and “65000 ms”.

  The "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device" on the right of the "variation time" in the drawing indicates the presentation mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special figure fluctuation game. “The effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “varying time” in the special view 1 or special image 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13 and the “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000 ms" is "normal reach out", "40000 ms" is "reach A out", "60000 ms" is "reach B out", "15000 ms" is "per normal reach", "45000 ms" is "per reach A In "65000 ms", it becomes "per reach B".

  “No change” on the right of the “Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device” in the figure is the default display without changing the display mode of the hold display image shown as “normal hold” in FIG. It indicates that the suspension of the special feature variation game is displayed with (the circle suspension display filled in a predetermined color, for example) being displayed, and the “pending A” on the right of that is shown in FIG. The display mode of the character image of "bad merchant Echigoya" shown as "pending A" indicates that prefetching advance notice of special figure variation game is to be executed, and "pending B" on the right side thereof is shown in FIG. In the display mode of the character image of "Yoshimune" shown as "Hold B", it is shown that the advance notice of the special figure change game is executed. "No change", "hold A" and "hold B" are respectively divided by the numerical range (0 to 99) of the random numbers to be compared with the hold change random number value corresponding to the "variation time". The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to acquire the random number value for holding change lottery from the random number counter for holding change lottery provided in the RAM 408, for example.

  When the "variation time" is "10000 ms", the numbers "0" to "89" are assigned to "no change", the numbers 90 to 99 are assigned to "pending A", and no value is assigned to "pending B" . When the "variation time" is "40000 ms", the numbers 0 to 39 are assigned to "no change", the numbers 40 to 79 are assigned to "pending A", and the values 80 to 99 are assigned to "pending B". It is done. When the "variation time" is "60000 ms", the numbers 0 to 29 are assigned to "no change", the numbers 30 to 79 are assigned to "pending A", and the values 80 to 99 are assigned to "pending B". It is done. If the "variation time" is "15000 ms", the numbers "0" to "69" are assigned to "no change", the numbers 70 to 95 are assigned to "pending A", and the values 96 to 99 are assigned to "pending B". It is done. When the "variation time" is "45000 ms", the numbers 0 to 29 are assigned to "no change", the numbers 30 to 69 are assigned to "pending A", and the values 70 to 99 are assigned to "pending B". It is done. When the "variation time" is "65000 ms", the numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to "no change", the numbers 20 to 49 are assigned to "pending A", and the values 50 to 99 are assigned to "pending B". It is done. In the tables shown in FIG. 14 and later, “-” is displayed in places where numerical values are not assigned.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of suggesting a degree of reliability which is high or low of the possibility of deriving a specific result of judgment of yes or no (for example, a hit) in the pre-reading advance notice effect by holding change. . Although a detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the advance notice effect by the hold change is the probability of winning or falling, the probability that a predetermined reach effect is selected, the probability that a predetermined holding mode is selected, etc. It is determined based on In this embodiment, "Pending A" and "Pending B" are compared with "No change" so that "Pending A" and "Pending B" are more reliable than "No change". If the distribution of random numbers shown in FIG. 14 is a hit effect (“per normal reach”, “per reach A” and “per reach B”), the out-of-reach reach effect (“normal reach out”) or “reach A out of range” And "reach B is off" is set to be less. Furthermore, in order to make "Pending B" more reliable than "Pending A", "Pending B" is different from "Pending A", and the distribution of random numbers is a hit effect per hit ("Normal reach In the case of “per reach A” and “per reach B”, it is set to be less in the case of out-of-reach reach (“normal reach out”, “reach A out” and “reach B out”) There is.

  Since the reliability of "hold B" is set higher than the reliability of "hold A", the pachinko machine 100 performs the "hold B" rather than the execution of the "hold A" is a big hit The player can be expected to win the "Pending A" and "Pending B" are designed to be able to indicate the highs and lows of expectations for winning a big hit, that is, the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 15 shows an example of the display mode of the suspension display of the special figure change game. The pachinko machine 100 has, for example, three display modes as a hold display of the special figure change game. FIG. 15A shows the display mode of the hold display image when “no change” is selected in the hold change advance lottery (when the player is not elected in the hold change lottery). As shown in FIG. 15A, the display mode of the suspension display image in "no change" is, for example, a display mode representing a circular pattern filled in with a predetermined color. The display mode of the hold display image shown in FIG. 15 (a) is a display mode in the default display when the display mode of the hold display of the special figure fluctuation game is not changed. Therefore, the hold display image when the hold change lottery is not executed is also the display mode shown in FIG. The pending display mode of "no change" corresponds to the normal display mode. FIG. 15 (b) shows the display mode of the suspension display image in the case of winning the "pending A" in the pending change notice lottery. As shown in FIG. 15 (b), the hold display image in the case of winning the "hold A" is a display mode representing the character of "the evil merchant Echigoya". FIG. 15C shows the display mode of the hold display image when the “hold B” is won in the hold change notice lottery. As shown in FIG. 15C, the hold display image in the case of winning the “hold B” is a display mode representing the character “Yoshimune”. The display mode of "pending A" or "pending B" corresponds to a special display mode different from the normal display mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, a description will be given of the board lamp look-ahead lottery table to be referred to when drawing whether to change the lighting mode of the board lamps 224 a and 224 b to execute the pre-read notification effect. FIG. 16 shows a board lamp look-ahead lottery table (pre-notice notice: starting opening winning game winning) to be referred to in the case of a board lamp look-ahead lottery for drawing whether or not to change the lighting mode of the board lamp 224a. The board lamp look-ahead lottery table is used in step S1207 in the first sub-control section pre-read notice execution process at the time of acquisition of start information described later. The board lamp look-ahead lottery table is stored, for example, in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400.

  The board lamp pre-reading lottery table shown in FIG. 16 includes, from the left column, “variation time”, “effect mode on the decorative symbol display device”, “no change”, “lighting (blue)”, “flashing (blue)” and It is divided into six of "Fast Flashing (Red)". The "variation time" is the "variation time" determined using the special view 1 or special view 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13, and main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process at step S233, the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six of “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms” and “65000 ms”.

  The "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device" on the right of the "variation time" in the drawing indicates the presentation mode in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the special figure fluctuation game. “The effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “varying time” in the special view 1 or special image 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13 and the “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000 ms" is "normal reach out", "40000 ms" is "reach A out", "60000 ms" is "reach B out", "15000 ms" is "per normal reach", "45000 ms" is "per reach A In "65000 ms", it becomes "per reach B".

  "No change" on the right of the "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" in the figure indicates that the board lamp 224a is the default lighting (predetermined lighting and blinking mode determined in advance) in the normal performance, "Lighting (blue)" next to the right turns on all 10 circular lamps of the board lamp 224a in blue to indicate that the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and "flashing (blue)" next to the right Indicates that at least a part of the board lamp 224a blinks in blue to execute the advance notice announcement effect, and “High-speed blink (red)” next to the right makes at least a part of the board lamp 224a in red It blinks to indicate that the pre-reading notice effect is to be executed. "No change", "lighting (blue)", "flashing (blue)" and "fast blink (red)" correspond to "variation time" and are random numbers to be compared with the random values for the board lamp pre-reading lottery It is divided into ranges (0 to 99). The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to obtain, for example, a board lamp look-ahead lottery random number value from a board lamp look-ahead lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408.

  When the lighting mode of the board lamp 224a is "lighting (blue)", "flashing (blue)" or "high speed flashing (red)", the board lamp 224b is also synchronized with it. Execute preview advance notice effect. Four petals of the lamp are arranged on the board lamp 224b, and the number of petals of the lamp is the same as the number of reservations for the special view 1 or the special view 2 according to the advance notice. For example, the lamps are lighted in order from the bottom, and the flower-patterned lamp corresponding to the hold according to the advance notice is lighted in a different color from the other lamps.

  When the "variation time" is "10000 ms", the numbers 0 to 99 are assigned to "no change", and the values for "light (blue)", "flashing (blue)" and "fast blink (red)" Not assigned When the "variation time" is "40000 ms", the value 0 to 39 is assigned to "no change", the value 40 to 89 is assigned to "light (blue)", and the value 90 is "flashing (blue)". .About.98 are assigned, and the value "99" is assigned to "fast blink (red)". When the "variation time" is "60000 ms", the numerical value 0 to 29 is assigned to "no change", the numerical value 30 to 95 is assigned to "lighting (blue)", and the numerical value 96 for "flashing (blue)" .About.98 are assigned, and the value "99" is assigned to "fast blink (red)". When the "variation time" is "15000 ms", the value 0 to 96 is assigned to "no change", the value 97 is assigned to "lighting (blue)", and the value 98 is assigned to "flashing (blue)" And the value "99" is assigned to "fast blink (red)". When the "variation time" is "45000 ms", the numerical value 0 to 29 is assigned to "no change", the numerical value 30 to 69 is assigned to "lighting (blue)", and the value 70 for "flashing (blue)" .About.84 are assigned, and "fast blink (red)" is assigned a numerical value 85-99. When the "variation time" is "65000 ms", the numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to "no change", the numbers 20 to 49 are assigned to "light (blue)", and the number 50 is "flash (blue) .About.69 are assigned, and the numerical value 70 to 99 is assigned to "fast blink (red)".

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of suggesting the reliability of the possibility of deriving a specific determination result (for example, a hit) in the preview advance notice effect by the board lamps 224a and 224b. It has become. Although the detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the advance notice effect by the board lamps 224a and 224b is the probability of hitting or falling, the probability that a predetermined reach effect is selected, the predetermined holding mode is selected. It is determined based on the probability of In the present embodiment, “lighting (blue)”, “lighting (blue)”, “flashing (blue)” and “fast blink (red)” have higher reliability than “no change”. "Blinking (blue)" and "high-speed blinking (red)" are compared with "no change", and the distribution of random numbers shown in FIG. 16 is a hit effect per hit ("per normal reach", "per reach A" and "reach") In the case of “per B”, it is set so as to be less in the case of out-of-reach reach effects (“normal reach out”, “reach A out” and “reach B out”). Furthermore, "fast blink (red)" is a random number compared to "flash (blue)" so that "fast blink (red)" is more reliable than "flash (blue)". The distribution is set to be less in the case of reach effect of hitting, and in the case of reach effect of outlying in many cases. In addition, "flashing (blue)" is different from "lighting (blue)", so that "flashing (blue)" has higher reliability than "lighting (blue)", the distribution of random numbers is In the case of hit reach production, it is set to be less in the case of outlying reach production.

  The reliability of "flashing (blue)" is higher than the reliability of "lighting (blue)", and the reliability of "fast blink (red)" is higher than the reliability of "flashing (blue)" Because the pachinko machine 100 is set to be high, it is better to execute "flashing (blue)" than to execute "lighting (blue)" rather than executing "flashing (blue)". It is possible to make the player expect that the player who executes “(red)” wins the big hit. "Lighting (blue)", "flashing (blue)" and "fast blinking (red)" are designed to indicate the level of expectation of winning a big hit, that is, the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 17 to FIG. 25 show an example of a regular notice lottery table or the like used in step S1311 in the first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution process at the start of the special figure change game described later. The "normal notice" of the normal notice lottery means the notice of the judgment result of the special figure fluctuation game starting from now. The normal notice lottery table is stored, for example, in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400. The normal notice lottery table is used to determine whether or not to execute a normal notice effect for giving notice of the success or failure judgment result of the special drawing fluctuation game to be started from now. Also, the normal advance notice effect based on the normal advance notice lottery table is to be executed before and after the reach formation. The normal notice lottery table is used commonly to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  The normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 17 is used for notice effects before reaching, and from the left row, "variation time", "effect mode with the decoration symbol display device", "buttonless system", and "button system" It is divided into four. The "variation time" is the "variation time" determined using the special view 1 or special view 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13, and main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process at step S233, the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six of “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms” and “65000 ms”.

  The “representation aspect in the decorative symbol display device” on the right of the “variation time” in the drawing shows the special presentation aspect of the special figure fluctuation game in the decorative symbol display device 208. “The effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “varying time” in the special view 1 or special image 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13 and the “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000 ms" is "normal reach out", "40000 ms" is "reach A out", "60000 ms" is "reach B out", "15000 ms" is "per normal reach", "45000 ms" is "per reach A In "65000 ms", it becomes "per reach B".

  The "No button system" on the right of the "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" shows the advance notice without the effect using the chance button 136 etc. as the operation means, and the "button on the right" “System” indicates that the advance notice including the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 etc. is executed. “No button system” and “button system” are respectively divided by the numerical value range (0 to 99) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired first random number value for regular announcement execution determination, corresponding to “variation time” 6 Divided into three. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to acquire a first random number value for normal advance notice determination from the first random number value counter for normal notice execution decision provided in the RAM 408, for example.

  When "variation time" is "10000 ms", numbers 0 to 99 are assigned to "No button system" and numbers are assigned to "Button system" as a numerical value range of random numbers to be compared with the notice execution judgment random number value It is not done. When the "variation time" is "40000 ms", the numerical value 0 to 89 is assigned to the "no button system" and the numerical value 90 to 99 is assigned to the "button system" as the numerical value range. When the "variation time" is "60000 ms", the numerical values 0 to 94 are assigned to the "no button system" and the numerical values 95 to 99 are assigned to the "button system" as the numerical value range. When the "variation time" is "15000 ms", the numerical value 0 to 98 is assigned to the "no button system" and the numerical value 99 is assigned to the "button system" as the numerical value range. When the "variation time" is "45000 ms", the numbers 0 to 49 are assigned to the "buttonless system" and the values 50 to 99 are assigned to the "buttonless system" as the numerical value range. When the "variation time" is "65000 ms", the numerical values 0 to 29 are assigned to the "no button system" and the numerical values 30 to 99 are assigned to the "button system" as the numerical value range.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a reliability that is high or low of the possibility of deriving a specific determination result (for example, a hit) in the pre-reach advance notice effect by the “buttonless system” and the “buttoned system”. It can be suggested. Although a detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach advance notice effect by the “without a button system” and the “with a button system” has a probability of winning or falling, a probability of selecting a predetermined reach effect, It is determined based on the probability that a predetermined button effect is selected. In the present embodiment, “button-with type” is a random number shown in FIG. 17 as compared with “button-with type” so that “button-with type” has higher reliability than “button without type”. When the distribution is per reach reach production ("per normal reach", "per reach A" and "per reach B"), the far out reach production ("normal reach out", "reach A out", and "reach B out") It is set to be less in the case of.

  Since the reliability of the "with button" is set higher than the reliability of the "without button", the pachinko machine 100 executes the "with button" rather than executing the "without button". It is possible for the player to expect the player to win the big hit. "Button-less type" and "Button-type type" can indicate high or low expectation of winning a jackpot, that is, an expected degree.

  The normal notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 18 is used when a system without effect button is selected based on the normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. In the regular notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 18, from the left row, "variation time", "representation mode in the decoration symbol display device", "none", "character A", "character B", and "character C It is divided into six of "). The "variation time" is the "variation time" determined using the special view 1 or special view 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13, and main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process at step S233, the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six of “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms” and “65000 ms”.

  The “representation aspect in the decorative symbol display device” on the right of the “variation time” in the drawing shows the special presentation aspect of the special figure fluctuation game in the decorative symbol display device 208. “The effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “varying time” in the special view 1 or special image 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13 and the “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000 ms" is "normal reach out", "40000 ms" is "reach A out", "60000 ms" is "reach B out", "15000 ms" is "per normal reach", "45000 ms" is "per reach A In "65000 ms", it becomes "per reach B".

  "None" on the right of the "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" in the figure indicates that no advance notice effect is performed, and the "character A" on the right is "A" shown in FIG. In the display mode of the character image of "Panda" shown as "Character A", it is shown that the special advance notice effect of the special figure change game is executed, and the "Chara B" next to the right is shown in FIG. In the display mode of the character image of "Sabo Hani" shown as "character B", it is shown that the special advance notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed, and the "character C (to be sure)" next to the right is shown in FIG. In the display mode of the character image of “Hime” shown as “Chara C”, it is shown that the normal advance notice effect of the special figure fluctuation game is executed. "None", "Chara A", "Chara B", and "Chara C (to be sure)" correspond to "variation time", and are random numbers to be compared with the second random number value for determining normal notice execution obtained Each is divided by the range (0 to 99), and is divided into six corresponding to the "variation time". The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to obtain a second random number value for normal notice execution determination from, for example, a second random number value counter for normal notice execution determination provided in the RAM 408.

  When the "variation time" is "10000 ms", the numerical value 0 to 84 is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range of the random number to be compared with the second random number value for regular announcement execution determination, and the numerical value 85 to 96 is assigned, the numbers 97 to 99 are assigned to the "character B", and the numbers are not assigned to the "character C (to be sure)". If the "variation time" is "40000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 89 is allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 90 to 99 is "numerical B". It is assigned, and a numerical value is not assigned to "character C (to be sure)". When the "variation time" is "60000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 94 is allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 95 to 99 is "numerical B". It is assigned, and a numerical value is not assigned to "character C (to be sure)". When the "variation time" is "15000 ms", the numerical value 0 to 96 is assigned to "none", the numerical value 97 is allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 98 is allocated to "character B" as the numerical value range. , A value 99 is assigned to the "character C (for sure)". When the "variation time" is "45000 ms", the numerical value 0 is assigned to "none", the numerical value 1 to 49 is allocated to "character A", and the value 50 to 97 is allocated to "character B". The numbers 98 to 99 are assigned to the "character C (to be sure)". When the "variation time" is "65000 ms", the numerical values 0 to 4 are assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical values 5 to 39 are allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 40 to "character B" 94 is assigned, and the numbers 95 to 99 are assigned to "character C (to be sure)".

  As shown in FIG. 18, in the case where “the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is “normal reach out”, “reach A out”, or “reach B out”, the display mode of “character C (for sure)” Is not selected. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the display mode of "character C (for sure)" is displayed in the notice effect before reaching, the success / failure determination result of the special figure fluctuation game becomes a hit determination.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can suggest a reliability that is high or low of the possibility of deriving a specific yes / no determination result (for example, a hit) in the pre-reach notice effect of “buttonless system”. It has become. Although a detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach advance notice effect is based on the probability of winning or falling, the probability of a predetermined reach effect being selected, the probability of a predetermined character image being selected, etc. Is determined. In the present embodiment, “Chara A”, “Chara B”, and “Chara A”, “Chara B”, and “Chara B” have higher reliability than “None”. As compared with “None,” the character C (most likely) is far from the case in which the random number distribution shown in FIG. 18 is per reach effect (“per normal reach, per reach A” and “per reach B”). It is set so that it will decrease in the case of the reach production of ("normal reach out", "reach A out", and "reach B out"). Furthermore, "Chara B" is more likely to be distributed by random numbers compared to "Chara A" so that "Chara B" has higher reliability than "Chara A". It is set to be less in the case of out-of-reach reach effects. In addition, in order for "Chara C (to be sure)" to have higher reliability than "Chara B", "Chara C (to be sure)" is more likely to have random numbers distributed than "Chara B". In the case of reach production, it is set so as to be less in the case of outlying reach production.

  Since the reliability of "Chara B" is set higher than the reliability of "Chara A", pachinko machine 100 is more likely to perform "Chara B" than the execution of "Chara A". The player can be expected to win the In addition, since the reliability of "Chara C (to be sure)" is set higher than the reliability of "Chara B", the pachinko machine 100 executes "Chara C (T The player can be made to expect the player to win the jackpot if the player executes the "Chara A", "Chara B", or "Chara C (to be sure)" can also indicate high or low expectation of winning a big hit, that is, an expected degree.

  The normal notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 19 is used when a system with effect button is selected based on the normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. The normal notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 19 includes “variation time”, “representation mode on the decoration symbol display device”, “none”, “character A”, “character B”, and “character C (from the left row) It is divided into six of "). The "variation time" is the "variation time" determined using the special view 1 or special view 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13, and main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process at step S233, the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six of “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms” and “65000 ms”.

  The “representation aspect in the decorative symbol display device” on the right of the “variation time” in the drawing shows the special presentation aspect of the special figure fluctuation game in the decorative symbol display device 208. “The effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “varying time” in the special view 1 or special image 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13 and the “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000 ms" is "normal reach out", "40000 ms" is "reach A out", "60000 ms" is "reach B out", "15000 ms" is "per normal reach", "45000 ms" is "per reach A In "65000 ms", it becomes "per reach B".

  "None" on the right of the "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" in the figure indicates that no advance notice effect is performed, and the "character A" on the right is "A" shown in FIG. In the display mode of the character image of "Panda" shown as "Character A", it is shown that the special advance notice effect of the special figure change game is executed, and the "Chara B" next to the right is shown in FIG. In the display mode of the character image of "Sabo Hani" shown as "character B", it is shown that the special advance notice effect of the special figure variation game is executed, and the "character C (to be sure)" next to the right is shown in FIG. In the display mode of the character image of “Hime” shown as “Chara C”, it is shown that the normal advance notice effect of the special figure fluctuation game is executed. "None", "Chara A", "Chara B", and "Chara C (to be sure)" correspond to "variation time", and are random numbers to be compared with the second random number value for determining normal notice execution obtained Each is divided by the range (0 to 99), and is divided into six corresponding to the "variation time". The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to obtain a third random number value for normal notice execution determination from, for example, a third random number value counter for normal notice execution determination provided in the RAM 408.

  When the "variation time" is "10000 ms", the numerical value 0 to 89 is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range of the random number to be compared with the third random number for normal notice execution determination, and the numerical value 90 to "character A" 94 is assigned, the numerical value 95 to 99 is assigned to "character B", and the numerical value is not assigned to "character C (to be sure)". If the "variation time" is "40000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "None" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 69 is allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 70 to 99 is "character B". It is assigned, and a numerical value is not assigned to "character C (to be sure)". When the "variation time" is "60000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 69 is allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 70 to 99 is "numerical B". It is assigned, and a numerical value is not assigned to "character C (to be sure)". When the "variation time" is "15000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 49 is allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 50 to 89 is "character B". It is allocated and the numerical value 90-99 is allocated to the "character C (this confirmation)." When the "variation time" is "45000 ms", the numerical value 0 is assigned to "none", the numerical value 1 to 39 is allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 40 to 89 is allocated to "character B". It is allocated and the numerical value 90-99 is allocated to the "character C (this confirmation)." When the "variation time" is "65000 ms", the numerical values 0 to 4 are assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical values 5 to 39 are allocated to "character A", and the numerical value 40 to "character B" 89 are assigned, and numerals 90 to 99 are assigned to "character C (for sure)".

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the case where the "effect mode in the decorative symbol display device" is "normal reach out", "reach A out", or "reach B out", the display mode of "character C (for sure)" Is not selected. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the display mode of "character C (for sure)" is displayed in the notice effect before reaching, the success / failure determination result of the special figure fluctuation game becomes a hit determination.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can suggest a reliability that is high or low of the possibility of deriving a specific yes / no determination result (for example, a hit) in the pre-reach advance notice effect of the “button system”. It has become. Although a detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach advance notice effect is based on the probability of winning or falling, the probability of a predetermined reach effect being selected, the probability of a predetermined character image being selected, etc. Is determined. In the present embodiment, “Chara A”, “Chara B”, and “Chara A”, “Chara B”, and “Chara B” have higher reliability than “None”. As compared with “None,” the character C (most likely) is more likely to fall off when the distribution of random numbers shown in FIG. 19 is per reach effect (“per normal reach, per reach A” and “per reach B”). It is set so that it will decrease in the case of the reach production of ("normal reach out", "reach A out", and "reach B out"). Furthermore, "Chara B" is more likely to be distributed by random numbers compared to "Chara A" so that "Chara B" has higher reliability than "Chara A". It is set to be less in the case of out-of-reach reach effects. In addition, in order for "Chara C (to be sure)" to have higher reliability than "Chara B", "Chara C (to be sure)" is more likely to have random numbers distributed than "Chara B". In the case of reach production, it is set so as to be less in the case of outlying reach production.

  Since the reliability of "Chara B" is set higher than the reliability of "Chara A", pachinko machine 100 is more likely to perform "Chara B" than the execution of "Chara A". The player can be expected to win the In addition, since the reliability of "Chara C (to be sure)" is set higher than the reliability of "Chara B", the pachinko machine 100 executes "Chara C (T The player can be made to expect the player to win the jackpot if the player executes the "Chara A", "Chara B", or "Chara C (to be sure)" can also indicate high or low expectation of winning a big hit, that is, an expected degree.

  FIG. 20 shows an example of a character image used in a normal advance notice effect before reaching. FIG. 20 (a) shows a character image representing "panda" displayed at the time of the normal advance presentation of "character A", and FIG. 20 (b) is shown at the time of the advance announcement of "character B". A character image representing "Sabohani" (a character having a cactus and a lotus ring motif) is shown, and in FIG. It is shown. These character images are displayed, for example, in the effect display area 208d in an area overlapping with any of the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time of normal advance notice effect execution.

  In the normal notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 21, a system with effect button is selected based on the normal notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 17, and further, based on the normal notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. It is used when either "B" or "character C (to be sure)" is selected. The normal notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 21 is divided into four from the left row into “display mode / button mode”, “character A”, “character B”, and “character C”. “Display mode / button mode” indicates a combination of the display mode and the button mode shown in FIGS. 22 and 23. Here, the display mode and the button mode will be described using FIG. 22 and FIG.

  FIG. 22 shows a display mode of an image imitating the chance button 136, which can be displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 22A, the chance button image imitating the chance button 136 in the normal state in which the display mode is "normal" and does not vibrate or rotate is arranged at the center, and the character "PUSH" is displayed at the top A row is arranged, and an effective period image showing an operation effective period for accepting pressing (operation) of the chance button 136 is arranged at the lower part thereof. The effective period image in this example has a horizontally long frame shape, and initially shows the entire period of the effective period in a rod shape of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and the rod portion of the predetermined color It will be displayed so as to become shorter gradually. FIG. 22B is a display mode in which the display mode is "vibration" and the central chance button image is visually recognized as vibrating. The other display modes are the same as “normal”. FIG. 22C is a display mode in which the display mode is “vibration + rotation” and the image of the central chance button is visually recognized as it is rotating while vibrating. The other display modes are the same as “normal”. In FIG. 22D, the display mode is “vibration + rotation”, and the chance button image and the valid period image are displayed larger than the image of FIG. 22C. In addition, the character string "PUSH" and the validity period image may not be displayed. The display mode shown in FIG. 22 (d) is hereinafter also referred to as "deca-button display".

  FIG. 23 shows the operation mode (button mode) of the chance button 136. FIG. 23A shows the chance button 136 in the normal state in which the button mode is “normal” and vibration or rotation is not performed. FIG. 23B shows a state in which the button mode is “vibration” and the chance button 136 is vibrating. In FIG. 23C, the button mode is "vibration + rotation", and it is assumed that the chance button lamp 138 for emitting light in the chance button 136 is rotated and the chance button 136 is rotated while the chance button 136 is vibrating. This is an aspect that makes

  Now, returning to FIG. 21, “display mode / button mode” displays the display mode of the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the image. Shows a combination of the actual chance button 136 and the button mode of the button. In “normal / normal”, the operation request image prompting to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208 d in the “normal” display mode, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “normal”. . In the "normal / vibration", the operation request image for prompting to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in the "normal" display mode, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is "vibration". . In “normal / vibration + rotation”, the operation request image prompting to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208 d in the “normal” display mode, and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is “vibration + rotation”. It has become. In "Vibration / Normal", an operation request image prompting to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in a display mode of "Vibration", and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is "Normal" . In "vibration / vibration", an operation request image prompting to press the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in a display mode of "vibration", and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is "vibration". . In "vibration + rotation / vibration", an operation request image for pressing the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in a display mode of "vibration + rotation", and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is "vibration". It has become. In "deca button display / vibration + rotation", an operation request image for pressing the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d in a display mode of "deca button display", and the button mode of the chance button 136 at that time is "vibration + It is "rotation".

  "Character A" on the right of the "Display mode / Button mode" in the figure is the display acquired when "Chara A" is selected in the lottery result performed using the advance lottery table 3 shown in FIG. The numerical value range (0-99) of the random number compared with the random value for aspect / button aspect determination is shown. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to obtain a display mode / button mode determination random number value from, for example, a display mode / button mode determination random number value counter provided in the RAM 408.

  In the case of "character A", numbers 0 to 89 are assigned to "normal / normal" as a numerical value range of random numbers to be compared with the display mode / random number for button mode determination, and "normal / vibration", "normal / vibration" Values are not assigned to + rotation and vibration / normal, numbers 90 to 99 are assigned to vibration / vibration, and vibration / rotation / vibration and deca-button display / vibration + rotation No numerical value is assigned to.

  "Chara B" on the right of "Chara A" in the figure is the display mode / button acquired when "Chara B" is selected in the lottery result performed using the notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. The numerical range (0 to 99) of the random number to be compared with the aspect determination random value is shown.

  In the case of "character B", numbers 0 to 49 are assigned to "normal / normal" and numbers 50 to 54 to "normal / oscillation" as a numerical range of random numbers to be compared with the display mode / random number for button mode determination. Is assigned, “normal / vibration + rotation” is assigned the numbers 55 to 59, “vibration / normal” is assigned the values 60 to 64, and “vibration / vibration” is assigned the values 65 to 89, “ The numerical values 90 to 94 are assigned to the vibration + rotation / vibration, and the numerical values 95 to 99 are assigned to the “decabutton display / vibration + rotation”.

  "Chara C" on the right of "Chara B" in the figure is the display mode / button acquired when "Chara C" is selected in the lottery result performed using the notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. The numerical range (0 to 99) of the random number to be compared with the aspect determination random value is shown.

  In the case of "character C", no numerical value is assigned to "normal / normal" as a numerical value range of the random number to be compared with the display mode / random number value for button mode determination, and the numerical value 0 to 19 in "normal / vibration" Is assigned, “normal / vibration + rotation” is assigned the numbers 20 to 39, “vibration / normal” is assigned the values 40 to 59, and “vibration / vibration” is assigned the number, “ Numerical values 60 to 79 are assigned to vibration + rotation / vibration, and numerical values 80 to 99 are assigned to “deca-button display / vibration + rotation”.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the case of "character A", "display mode / button mode" other than "normal / normal" and "vibration / vibration" is not selected. On the other hand, in the case of "character C", only "display mode / button mode" other than "normal / normal" and "vibration / vibration" are selected. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when effects of "display mode / button mode" other than "normal / normal" and "vibration / vibration" are executed in the notice effect before reaching, the special figure fluctuation There is a high possibility that the result of the game will be hit.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can suggest a reliability that is high or low of the possibility of deriving a specific yes / no determination result (for example, a hit) in the pre-reach advance notice effect of the “button system”. It has become. Although a detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the pre-reach advance notice effect is based on the probability of winning or falling, the probability of a predetermined reach effect being selected, the probability of a predetermined character image being selected, etc. Is determined. In the present embodiment, “display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” is more reliable than “display mode / button mode” of “normal / normal” or “vibration / vibration”. The “display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” is a random number shown in FIG. 21 in comparison with “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” so that the degree becomes higher. In the case of the distribution of "character C", it is set so as to decrease in the case of "character A".

  The reliability of "display mode / button mode" other than "normal / normal" and "vibration / vibration" is better than the reliability of "display mode / button mode" of "normal / normal" and "vibration / vibration" Since it is set high, the pachinko machine 100 performs “display mode / button mode” other than “normal / normal” and “vibration / vibration” than performing “normal / normal” or “vibration / vibration”. It is possible for the player to expect the player to win the jackpot if the player executes the game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation request image can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the same display mode as the button mode of the chance button 136. Furthermore, the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a plurality of types of display effects as display effects related to the chance button 136 being operated, and one of the plurality of types of display effects is the first For example, "Chara A" display of a system with effect button as a display effect, and one of a plurality of display effects is "Chara C" display of a system with a display button, for example, as a second display effect The first operation in which the reliability of the big hit is higher when the display effect of "Chara C" is executed than the display effect of "Chara A", and the display mode is the same as the button mode of the chance button 136 A second operation request image (for example, “normal / vibration”, “vibration /”, which is a display mode different from the button mode of the chance button 136 than the request image (for example, “normal / normal”, “vibration / vibration”) Through ", Those of" normal / vibration + rotation ", etc.), display effect of" character C "is so easy to be carried out.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, it may be possible to function as a notice of whether or not the second display effect with high reliability of the big hit is performed. As a result, the operation request image itself may be able to function as a notice.

  The regular notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. 24 is used for the after-reach notice lottery for the after-reach notice effect (cut-in notice) performed after the reach effect in the special figure variation game is started. In the regular notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. 24, from the left column, "variation time", "representation mode on the decoration symbol display device", "none", "character D", "character E", and "character F It is divided into six of "). The "variation time" is the "variation time" determined using the special view 1 or special view 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13, and main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the command transmission setting process at step S233, the fluctuation time transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 is shown. The “variation time” is divided into six of “10000 ms”, “40000 ms”, “60000 ms”, “15000 ms”, “45000 ms” and “65000 ms”.

  The “representation aspect in the decorative symbol display device” on the right of the “variation time” in the drawing shows the special presentation aspect of the special figure fluctuation game in the decorative symbol display device 208. “The effect mode in the decorative symbol display device” is the “varying time” in the special view 1 or special image 2 variable display time determination table shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 13 and the “effect mode in the decorative symbol display device”. It is associated with "variation time" so as to be the same as the association. "10000 ms" is "normal reach out", "40000 ms" is "reach A out", "60000 ms" is "reach B out", "15000 ms" is "per normal reach", "45000 ms" is "per reach A In "65000 ms", it becomes "per reach B".

  "None" on the right of the "Demonstration mode on the decorative symbol display device" in the figure indicates that the after-reach advance notice effect (which can also be regarded as part of the normal advance notice effect) is not executed. The character D "indicates that the after-reach notice effect of the special figure change game is executed in the display mode of the character image of" 爺 "shown as" character D "in FIG. "Chara E" indicates that the after-reach notice effect of the special figure fluctuation game is executed in the display mode of the character image of "Boxer" shown as "Chara E" in FIG. "Chara F (for sure)" indicates that the special character of the "bancho" character image shown as "Chara F" in FIG. ing. “None”, “Chara D”, “Chara E”, and “Chara F (for sure)” correspond to “variation time”, and the numerical range of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired after-reach notice execution random number value They are each classified by (0 to 99), and are divided into six corresponding to the "variation time". The first sub-control unit 400 is configured to obtain, for example, the after-reach notice execution determination random number value from the after-reach notice execution determination random number value counter provided in the RAM 408.

  When the "variation time" is "10000 ms", "None", "Chara D", "Chara E", "Chara F (for sure)" as the numerical value range of the random number to be compared with the after-reach notice execution judgment random value. No value is assigned to any of. That is, when the "variation time" is "10000 ms", since there is no time scale for inserting the cut-in notice, the after-reach notice effect is not performed. When the "variation time" is "40000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 89 is allocated to "character D", and the numerical value 90 to 99 is allocated to "character E". It is assigned, and a numerical value is not assigned to "character F (for sure)". When the "variation time" is "60000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 94 is allocated to "character D", and the numerical value 95 to 99 is specified for "character E". It is assigned, and a numerical value is not assigned to "character F (for sure)". When the "variation time" is "15000 ms", "None", "Chara D", "Chara E", "Chara F (for sure)" as a numerical value range of the random number to be compared with the after-reach notice execution judgment random value. No value is assigned to any of. That is, when the "variation time" is "15000 ms", since there is no time scale for inserting the cut-in notice, the after-reach notice effect is not executed. If the "variation time" is "45000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "None" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 39 is allocated to "character D", and the numerical value 40 to 94 is assigned to "character E". The numbers 95 to 99 are assigned to the "character F (for sure)". When the "variation time" is "60000 ms", no numerical value is assigned to "none" as the numerical value range, the numerical value 0 to 29 is assigned to "character D", and the numerical value 30 to 94 is assigned to "character E". The numbers 95 to 99 are assigned to the "character F (for sure)".

  As shown in FIG. 24, when the "mode of effect on the decorative symbol display device" is "normal reach out", "reach A out", or "reach B out", the display mode of "character F (for sure)" Is not selected. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the display mode of "Chara F (for sure)" is displayed in the notice effect after reaching, the success / failure determination result of the special view fluctuation game is per reach A or reach B It will be determined.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of suggesting a reliability that is high or low of the possibility of deriving a specific yes / no determination result (for example, a hit) in the after-reach advance notice effect. Although a detailed description is omitted, the reliability based on the after-reach advance notice effect is based on the probability of winning or falling, the probability of a predetermined reach effect being selected, the probability of a predetermined character image being selected, etc. Is determined. In the present embodiment, “Chara D”, “Chara E”, and “Chara E”, and “Chara E”, and “Chara E” and “Chara F” are higher than “None”. In the case of the distribution of the random numbers shown in FIG. 24 being a hit effect (“per reach A” and “per reach B”) of “character F (for sure)” compared to “none”, the out-of-reach reach effect (“per reach A” and “per reach B” In the case of “reach A off” and “reach B off”, it is set to be less. Furthermore, in order for "Chara E" to have higher reliability than "Chara D", "Chara E" is more likely to be hit by random distribution compared to "Chara D". In the case of "hit" and "reach B", it is set so as to be less in the case of outlying reach effects ("reach A" and "reach B"). In addition, as for "Chara F (to be sure)" is higher in reliability than "Chara E", "Chara F (to be sure)" is more likely to be distributed by random numbers than "Chara E". In the case of reach production ("per reach A" and "per reach B"), it is set so as to be less in the case of outlying reach production ("reach A off" and "reach B off").

  Since the reliability of "Chara E" is set higher than the reliability of "Chara D", the pachinko machine 100 executes "Chara E" rather than executing "Chara D" as a big hit The player can be expected to win the In addition, since the reliability of "Chara F (for sure)" is set higher than the reliability of "Chara E", the pachinko machine 100 does not execute "Chara E". The player can be made to expect the player to win the jackpot if the player executes the "Chara D", "Chara E", or "Chara F (to be sure)" can also indicate the degree of expectation of winning a big hit, that is, the degree of expectation.

  FIG. 25 shows an example of a character image used in the normal advance presentation effect after reaching. FIG. 25 (a) shows a character image representing "爺" displayed at the time of normal advance notice at the time of reach effect of "Chara D", and at the time of reach effect of "Chara E" in FIG. 25 (b). A character image representing a "boxer" displayed at the time of the normal advance presentation effect of the character is shown, and a character showing a "bancho" displayed at the time of the normal advance presentation effect at the time of the reach effect of "Chara F" is shown in FIG. An image is shown. These character images are displayed, for example, in the effect display area 208d in an area overlapping with any of the decorative symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time of executing the advance notice effect after reaching in the normal advance effect.

  Next, the special view prefetching process will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. FIGS. 26 and 27 are flowcharts showing the flow of the special drawing prefetch process (step S224) in the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the special view prefetch process, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the power support mode (step S1000). In step S1000, for example, main control unit 300 determines whether or not the time saving flag is in the on state, and if it is determined that power saving is in the on state, processing proceeds to step S1001 and the time saving flag is in the off state If it is determined that power is not being supplied, the process proceeds to step S1101.
The pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is configured to make a left strike as you do. For this reason, the winning of the special figure 1 start port 230 at the time of power support and the winning of the special figure 2 start port 232 at the time of non-power support are irregular. It is excluded from the target of processing.

  In step S1001 following step S1000, it is determined whether there is a winning on the special figure 2 start port 232 or not. The determination as to whether or not the prize has been made is, for example, the number of special figure 2 reservations stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area, and the number of special figure 2 prefetches stored in the special figure 2 prefetching number storage area described later. Compare and do. For example, the main control unit 300 compares the special view 2 reserve count and the special view 2 look-ahead count, and when the special view 2 reserve count is greater than the special view 2 reserve count, the special view 2 start opening 232 has a prize. The process proceeds to step S1003. On the other hand, when the special drawing 2 reservation number is equal to the special drawing 2 pre-reading number, the main control unit 300 determines that there is no winning at the special drawing 2 start opening 232, and performs processing of steps S1003 to S1013 described later The special drawing prefetching process is ended without.

  In step S1003 following step S1001, the start information related to the suspension increased by the winning is pre-readed, and it is determined in advance whether the special figure 2 fluctuation game related to the suspension is appropriate or not, and it is determined whether the result is a big hit or not. . For example, when the main control unit 300 determines that the success or failure result by the preliminary determination is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1005, and when it is determined that the success or failure result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1007.

  In step S1005 following step S1003, a jackpot symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 11 (b) with respect to the random number value for the special figure determination for hit which is read beforehand. The stop symbol) is determined in advance, and the process moves to step S1013.

  On the other hand, if the preliminary determination result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1007, and it is determined whether the true or false result is a small hit. For example, if the main control unit 300 determines that the success or failure result is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S1009, and if determined that the success or failure result is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step S1011.

  If the pre-decision result is a small hit, a small hit symbol is determined in step S1009. For example, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. 11 (b) with respect to the random number value for special figure determination for hit when pre-reading, and stops the stop symbol after special figure 2 fluctuation game in advance. It determines and transfers to step S1013.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the success or failure result determined in advance in step S1007 is not a small hit but an off, the process proceeds to step S1011, and an off symbol is determined. For example, the main control unit 300 prefetches the random value for symbol design determination stored in the RAM 308, and changes the special figure 2 with reference to the special figure 2 determination table shown in FIG. The stop symbol after the game is determined in advance, and the process proceeds to step S1013.

  In step S1013 following step S1005, S1009, or S1011, a lottery of fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is performed based on the stop symbol determined in advance in these steps. For example, the main control unit 300 determines the variation time of the special figure 2 variation game using the stop symbol, the special figure variation time determination random number value, and the special figure 2 variation display time determination table shown in FIG. The special view prefetching process is ended.

  Further, in step S1013, for example, the main control unit 300 determines the success / failure result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game related to the suspension for which special figure 2 prefetch processing is executed and the special figure fluctuation time previously determined in step S1013 as the special figure 2 prefetch result. Is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit (not shown) provided in the RAM 308 of FIG. The main control unit 300 stores the stop symbol of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing fluctuation time which are determined beforehand as the special drawing 2 pre-reading result, in the first vacant area of the special drawing 2 pre-reading result storage part There is. In the present embodiment, the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit can store, for example, up to four special view 2 prefetch results.

  Further, in the RAM 308, a special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing the number of special figure 2 pre-reading results stored in the special figure 2 pre-reading result storage unit as the special figure 2 pre-reading number is provided. The main control unit 300 writes information of the new special view 2 prefetch result in the next order of the information of the special view 2 prefetch result of the lowest rank (last) every time the number of special view 2 prefetch is increased. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading process is performed for the increase of the hold, but the special view pre-reading process may be performed for all the hold each time.

  In step S1000, for example, when the main control unit 300 determines that the time saving flag is in the OFF state and not in the power support state, the process proceeds to step S1101 shown in FIG. Each process performed in steps S1101 to S1113 shown in FIG. 27 is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the contents of steps S1001 to S1013 described with reference to FIG. 26 is replaced with “special figure 1”. The description is omitted. Moreover, the special figure prefetch process shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27 is performed, when the number of pending storages of the special figure fluctuation game of the object which performs the said process is in an upper limit range.

  While the special-figure prefetching process in FIGS. 26 and 27 is executed by referring to the pass / fail determination table and the special-figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail determination, a special determination table may be used for the prefetching process.

  Next, the first sub-control unit prefetching notice execution process when the game ball enters the special view 1 or 2 start opening 230, 232 and the start information is acquired will be described using FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of first sub-control unit prefetch notice execution processing at the time of start information acquisition performed in, for example, the effect control processing (step S309) shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first secondary control unit 400 controls the RAM 408 and the like by the CPU 404 to obtain first secondary control unit prefetch notice execution processing at the time of acquisition of start information and the start of the special feature change game described later. The first sub-control unit pre-read notice execution process is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 28, in the first secondary control unit look-ahead notice execution process at the time of start winning (when start information is acquired), it is first determined whether or not the advance notice notification effect is being executed at present (step S1201). . The first sub control unit 400 reads out the value of the flag under pre-reading execution stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and if the value indicates the on state, the pre-reading advance notice notification effect is under execution. Then, the process proceeds to step S1215. If the value indicates the off state, it is determined that the prefetch notice notification effect is not being executed, and the process proceeds to step S1203.

  In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the change time included in the prefetch result information command sent to the first sub control unit 400 by the command setting transmission process (step S233) of the main control unit 300 is a predetermined change time. to decide. The predetermined fluctuation time of the present embodiment is six of 10000 ms, 15000 ms, 40000 ms, 45000 ms, 60000 ms and 65000 ms. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the fluctuation time included in the prefetch result information command is a predetermined fluctuation time, the process proceeds to step S1205, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time is not a predetermined fluctuation time, It transfers to step S1215, without performing.

In step S1205, the lottery process 1 of holding change is executed. The first sub control unit 400 acquires the random number value for holding change lottery from the random number counter for holding change lottery provided, for example, in the RAM 408, and uses the holding change lottery table shown in FIG. Obtain a lottery result of either “A” or “pending B”.
More specifically, the first sub control unit 400 is provided in the change time selection table included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the hold change lottery table shown in FIG. The lottery process 1 of the pending change is executed using the pending change lottery random number value acquired from the pending change lottery random number counter. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the lottery process 1 of the holding change in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

In step S1207 following step S1205, the lottery process 2 of the pending change is executed. For example, the first sub control unit 400 obtains a random number value for the panel lamp prefetch lottery from the panel lamp random number counter provided in the RAM 408, and uses the panel lamp prefetch lottery table shown in FIG. , "Lighting (blue)", "flashing (blue)", or "fast blinking (red)" to obtain a lottery result.
More specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 adds the variation time included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the board lamp pre-reading lottery table shown in FIG. The lottery process 2 of the holding change is executed using the board surface lamp look-ahead lottery random number value acquired from the provided board surface lamp look-ahead lottery random number counter. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the lottery process 2 of the holding change in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S1209 following step S1207, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is other than "no change", that is, at least one of the lottery process 1 of the hold change or the lottery process 2 of the hold change. The first sub-control unit 400 reads the lottery result of the lottery process 1 of the holding change stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the drawing result is either "pending A" or "pending B". And determine that the lottery was won. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 reads the lottery result of the lottery process 2 of the pending change stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and the lottery result is “lighting (blue)”, “flashing (blue) It is determined that the lottery has been won if it is either "or" high speed flashing (red) ". If at least one of the lottery process of holding change or the lottery process of holding change 2 selects the lottery result, the process proceeds to step S1211, and both the lottery results of the lottery process 1 of holding change and the lottery process 2 of holding change “No change”, that is, in the case of non-winning, the processing proceeds to step S1215 without executing steps S1211 and S1213 described later.

  In step S1211 subsequent to step S1209, the number of executions of the pre-reading advance notice is set. The number of executions of the advance notice before notification is set on the basis of the number of to-be-held special views. When the first secondary control unit 400 is won in the lottery process 1 or 2 for holding change, the first subsidiary control unit 400 acquires the number-of-holdings information included in the prefetch result information command sent from the main control unit 300 and provides it in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 It stores in the pre-reading advance notice execution frequency storage section. If the special view type included in the prefetch result information command is the special view 2, the same number as the number of pending in the special view 2 included in the command is stored in the prefetch notice execution frequency storage unit and included in the prefetch result information command When the special drawing type to be executed is the special drawing 1, the same number as the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 included in the command is stored in the prefetch notice execution count storage unit. For example, the lottery process 1 and 2 (steps S1205 and S1207) of the hold change is executed for the second hold of the special drawing 1 (the special view type of the prefetch result information command is "1" and the hold number information is "2") In this case, the first secondary control unit 400 sets “2” as the prefetch notice execution count in the prefetch notice execution count storage unit of the RAM 408. In addition, the lottery process 1 and 2 (Steps S1205 and S1207) of the hold change is executed for the third hold of the special view 2 (the special view type of the prefetch result information command is "2" and the hold number information is "3") In this case, the first secondary control unit 400 sets “3” in the prefetch notice execution count storage unit of the RAM 408 as the prefetch notice execution count. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to change the display mode of the hold display image as many as the number of prefetch notice execution times based on the winning contents of the hold change lottery.

  In step S1213 subsequent to step S1211, the first secondary control unit 400 sets the prefetching in progress flag stored in the RAM 408 to the on state, to indicate that the prefetch notice notification effect is being executed. The first sub-control unit 400 sets, for example, “1” as a value of the flag to a predetermined value in order to set the flag in advance of pre-reading advance notice in progress indicating that whether pre-reading advance notice is being executed. Store in the area. As a result, the pre-reading advance notice is set during execution. When the first preliminary control notification is not in execution of the preliminary announcement notice, the first secondary control unit 400 stores “0” as a value of the flag in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 and turns the preliminary announcement execution flag off. Set to state. If the first preliminary control unit 400 sets the pre-reading advance notice executing flag to the on state, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1215 following step S1213, the output process of the hold command based on the lottery result of the lottery process 1 of the hold change is executed. When the lottery result of the lottery process 1 of the holding change is not winning, the first sub control unit 400 decorates the holding command including the information for setting the holding display image according to the winning start information as the default display of "no change". It is output to the symbol display device 208, and the first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process at the time of acquisition of the start information is ended. As a result, the suspension display image according to the display mode of the circular suspension display filled in a predetermined color is displayed at a predetermined location of the special view 1 and the special view 2 suspension display region 208d1 and d2 of the effect display region 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed.

  In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery process 1 of holding change is winning, the first sub-control unit 400 holds "Holding A" or "Holding" based on the holding change lottery result on the holding display image according to the winning start information. The suspension command including information on the suspension display mode corresponding to any one of “B” and the number of suspension information is output to the decorative symbol display device 208, and the first sub-control prefetching notice execution process at the time of acquisition of the start information is ended. . Thereby, the special display 1 and the special drawing of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the holding display image according to the display mode of either "Hold A" of "bad merchant Echigoya" or "Hold B" of "Yoshimune" [2] Displayed in a predetermined place of the hold display area 208d1 and d2.

  In addition, the first sub control unit 400 executes the output processing of the hold command based on the lottery result of the lottery process 2 of the hold change. When the lottery result of the lottery process 2 of the holding change is not selected, a holding command including information to make the lighting state of the board lamps 224a and 224b the default state of "no change" is outputted to the board lamps 224a and 224b The first secondary control unit prefetching notice execution processing at the time of information acquisition is ended. As a result, the panel lamps 224a and 224b emit light in the default display mode.

  In addition, when the lottery result of the lottery process 2 of the holding change is a win, the first sub-control unit 400 "lights (blue)", "flickers (blue)", or "rapidly blinks" the lighting state of the board lamp 224a. (Red) ”is output to the panel lamp 224a, and a predetermined lighting mode corresponding to the suspension command of the panel lamp 224a is specified and output to the panel lamp 224b to obtain start information The first sub-control unit pre-reading notice execution process ends. As a result, the board lamp 224a lights in the lighting mode of "lighting (blue)", "flashing (blue)" or "high speed flashing (red)", and the board lamp 224b emits light in a predetermined lighting mode in synchronization therewith. .

  According to the present embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 wins both the lottery process 1 (step S1205) for the hold change and the lottery process 2 (step S1207) for the hold change, the special view in the main control unit 300 Notification of the information on the number of reservations can be made at three locations including one of the one suspension lamp 218 and the special view 2 suspension lamp 220. By doing this, since it is possible to notify three or more places to one of the information regarding the game, the interest of the game may be able to be improved. In addition, there may be a case where it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation or superiority by performing a plurality of notifications for one piece of game information.

  In this embodiment, the lottery process 1 of the pending change in step S1205 and the lottery process 2 of the pending change in step S1207 are performed independently of each other, but for example, the lottery was won in the lottery process 1 of the pending change It is also possible to execute the lottery process 2 of the hold change only in the case of the hold change. Further, the lottery process 2 of the pending change may be executed first, and the lottery process 1 of the pending change may be executed only when the lottery is won in the lottery process 2.

  Next, first secondary control unit prefetch notice execution processing at the start of the special figure change game will be described using FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the first sub-control prefetching notice execution process at the start of the special view fluctuation game performed in the effect control process (step S309) shown in FIG. 8, for example. This processing is executed once for one special figure changing game.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the first sub-control section prefetch notice execution process at the start of the special figure change game, first, it is judged whether or not the prefetch notice in-progress execution flag is on (step S1301). For example, the first secondary control unit 400 reads out the value of the flag under execution of pre-reading notice stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, and if the value is “1”, the flag under execution of pre-reading notice is in the on state The process proceeds to step S1303. If the value is “0”, it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice in progress flag is off, and step S1301 to step S1309 which will be described later are not executed. Migrate to

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, either “hold A” or “hold B” is won in the hold change lottery process 1 in step S1205, or “light (blue)”, “on” in the hold change lottery process 2 in step S1207. When the player wins "flashing (blue)" or "high speed flashing (red)" (Yes in step S1209), the number of prefetch notice execution times is set (step S1211), and the prefetching in-progress flag is set to on ( Step S1213).
In step S1303, the first secondary control unit 400 reduces the number of prefetch notice execution times by “1”. For example, the first sub control unit 400 reads the value of the number of prefetch execution times stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408, subtracts “1” from the read value, and proceeds to step S1305.

  In step S1305 following step S1303, it is determined whether or not the number of prefetch notice execution times decremented by “1” in step S1303 is “0”. For example, when the first secondary control unit 400 stores the value obtained by subtracting the number of prefetch notice execution times in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 and determines that the number of prefetch notice execution times after subtraction is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1307 If it is determined that the number of pre-read advance notice execution times after subtraction is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1311.

  In step S1307 following step S1305, output processing of a change command according to the type of notice is performed. The first sub-control unit 400 outputs a change command for which the on-hold display mode is normally on hold to the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 outputs a change command for setting the lighting mode of the panel lamps 224a and 224b to the normal state to the drive circuit 420 of the panel lamps 224a and 224b. As a result, the panel lamps 224a and 224b perform lighting display in a normal display mode that is neither "lighting (blue)", "flashing (blue)", or "fast blinking (red)".

  In step S1309 following step S1307, a flag is set to the OFF state during pre-reading advance notice execution. For example, the first auxiliary control unit 400 sets the flag in the predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 to “0” in order to indicate that the prefetch notice notification has been finished by setting the prefetch notice in progress flag to the OFF state and indicating that the prefetch notice notification has ended. Is stored, and the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, a lottery process for normal notice is executed, and the first sub control unit prefetch notice execution process at the start of the special figure change game is ended.

  Next, the normal notice lottery process in step S1311 of the first sub control pre-read notice execution process at the start of the special view fluctuation game shown in FIG. 29 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In step S1401, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time included in the prefetch result information command sent to the first sub-control unit 400 by the command setting transmission process (step S233) of the main control unit 300 has a predetermined time. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation time. The predetermined fluctuation time of the present embodiment is six of 10000 ms, 15000 ms, 40000 ms, 45000 ms, 60000 ms and 65000 ms. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the fluctuation time included in the prefetch result information command is the predetermined fluctuation time, the process proceeds to step S1403, and if it is determined that the fluctuation time is not the predetermined fluctuation time, the normal advance lottery process is ended. .

In step S1403, the notice lottery 1 is executed. The first sub control unit 400 acquires the random number value for holding change lottery from the random number counter for holding change lottery provided, for example, in the RAM 408, and uses the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. Get one of the lottery results for "with buttons".
More specifically, the first secondary control unit 400 is provided in the random time table included in the prefetch result information command sent from the main control unit 300, the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. The notice lottery 1 process is executed using the first random number value for determining normal notice execution obtained from the first random number value counter for normal notice execution determination. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the advance notice lottery 1 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  In step S1405 following step S1403, the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether the lottery result of the advance lottery 1 process is "type with button", and if it is determined not to be "type with button", the process proceeds to step S1407. If it is determined that the system is in the "button system", the process proceeds to step S1409.

If it is determined that the type is not "type with button" and the process proceeds to step S1407, the notice lottery 2 is executed. The first sub control unit 400 acquires the second random number value for normal advance notice determination from the second random number value counter for normal notice execution determination, for example, provided in the RAM 408, and uses the advance notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. The lottery result of any one of "none", "character A", "character B", or "character C (for sure)" is obtained.
More specifically, the first secondary control unit 400 is provided in the random time table included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. The advance notice lottery 2 process is executed using the normal random number for executing the preliminary judgment 2nd random number value acquired from the second random number value counter for normal forecoming performance judgment. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the advance notice lottery 2 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

If it is determined that it is a "button present system" and the process proceeds to step S1409, the notice lottery 3 is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 acquires the third random number for normal advance notice determination from the third random number counter for normal notice execution decision, for example, provided in the RAM 408, and uses the advance notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. The lottery result of any one of "none", "character A", "character B", or "character C (for sure)" is obtained.
More specifically, the first secondary control unit 400 is provided in the random time table included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. An advance notice lottery 3 process is executed using the third random number for regular announcement execution judgment acquired from the third random number value counter for regular announcement execution judgment. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the advance notice lottery 3 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

In step S1411 following step S1409, the notice lottery 4 is executed. The first sub-control unit 400 acquires the fourth random number value for normal advance notice determination from the fourth random number value counter for normal notice execution decision, for example, provided in the RAM 408, and uses the advance notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. "Normal / Normal", "Normal / Vibration", "Normal / Vibration + Rotation", "Vibration / Normal", "Vibration / Vibration", "Vibration + Rotation / Vibration", or "Deca Button Display / Vibration + Rotation" Get any lottery result.
More specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the result of the notice lottery 3, the notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 21 read from the ROM 406, and the fourth random number value counter for the normal notice execution judgment provided in the RAM 408. The notice lottery 4 process is executed using the fourth random number value for determining normal notice execution obtained from the above. Further, the first sub control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the advance notice lottery 4 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408.

  When the advance notice lottery 2 process in step S1407 or the advance notice lottery 4 process in step S1411 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1413. In step S1413, it is determined whether the variation time of the special figure variation game is equal to the variation time including the normal reach effect (in this example, "10000 ms" and "15000 ms"). This judgment does not give a notice after reach when normal reach effect is executed, since normal reach effect can not execute cut-in notice after start of reach effect because the effect execution time is shorter than other reach effects. To handle. Therefore, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation game is a fluctuation time including normal reach effect, the normal notice lottery processing is ended, and when it is judged that the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation game is not a fluctuation time including normal reach effect The processing moves to step S1415 where processing is performed.

In step S1415, the notice lottery 5 is executed. The first sub control unit 400 acquires a display mode / button mode determination random number value from, for example, a display mode / button mode determination random number counter provided in the RAM 408, and uses the notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. , “Chara D”, “Chara E”, or “Chara F (to be sure)” lottery results are obtained.
More specifically, the first sub control unit 400 is provided in the random time table included in the prefetch result information command transmitted from the main control unit 300, the notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. The notice lottery 5 processing is executed using the after-reach notice execution determination random number value acquired from the after-reach notice execution determination random number value counter. In addition, the first secondary control unit 400 stores the lottery result of the advance lottery 5 process in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408. After the processing in step S1415 is executed, the normal notice lottery processing is ended.

  Next, the game effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be more specifically described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 43. 31 to 43 show a decorative symbol display device 208 which constitutes a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 and the board lamps 224 (224a, 224b), and the lower part thereof is schematically shown in particular. FIG. 1 shows a display 212, a special view 2 display 214, a special view 1 reserve lamp 218 and a special view 2 reserve lamp 220. First, the special figure change game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated using FIGS. 31-33. FIGS. 31 (a) to 33 (c) show, in this order, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  In FIG. 31 (a), the "special figure I" of the first out-of-space symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, respectively. Further, three LEDs are turned on in the special view 1 reserve lamp 218, which indicates that there are three reservations in the special figure 1. The special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off, indicating that no special figure 2 is reserved. "Decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 1" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special-pattern variation game is out. In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 100 at the present time is a non-power support state which is not a power support state, and is a special figure low probability state.

  A special view 1 reservation display area 208d1 is provided on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The special view 1 reserve display area 208d1 notifies the player of the number of special figure 1 random number value pairs stored in the special figure 1 random number storage area as the special figure 1 reserve number (special figure 1 start information reserve number) It is possible. Since three special figure 1 fluctuation games are reserved at the time shown in FIG. 31 (a), the suspension display image corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation game reserved for the first one in the special figure 1 suspension display area 208d1. a1 is displayed, the hold display image a2 corresponding to the second drawing of the special drawing 1 floating game is displayed, and the third holding display image a3 corresponding to the special drawing 1 floating game is displayed. It is notified that three special figure 1 fluctuation games are suspended. The hold display images a1 to a3 are all the display modes of normal hold shown in FIG.

  In the lower right of the effect display area 208d, a special figure 2 reserve display area 208d2 is provided to display a reserve related to the special figure 2 change game. The special view reserve display area 208d2 has the same function as that of the special view 1 reserve display area 208d1 except for displaying the special view 2 change game reserve, so detailed description will be omitted. In the present example, the special view 2 change game is not held, so no hold display image is displayed in the special view 2 hold display area 208 d 2.

  The board lamps 224a and 224b are controlled by normal lighting control according to a predetermined effect procedure from the end of the special view change game as shown in FIG. 31A to the start of the next special view change game. Lighting or blinking is performed. In this example, the normal effect with the board surface lamp 224a is executed in a lighting mode in which the odd-numbered and the even-numbered ones of the ten circular lamps blink alternately. Further, the normal effect with the board surface lamp 224b is performed in a lighting mode in which the upper two and lower two groups of the four petal shaped lamps are alternately blinked.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (a), shown in FIG. 31 (b) after a predetermined time has elapsed since “decoration 4-decoration 3-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c. As such, the next special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 31 (b), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values stored first in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, and executes a propriety determination relating to the special figure fluctuation game started from now on, The acquired special figure 1 random number value pair is erased and the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number value pair is carried forward by one, and the special figure 1 reservation number is further decremented by one. When the main control unit 300 erases the data of the special figure 1 random number value group of the special figure 1 random number value storage area at the same time, the special figure 1 prefetching of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage section simultaneously. While erasing the information of the result, the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area is decremented by one. Further, in the same processing, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determination of a special figure fluctuation time, and determines a fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In this example, for example, the result of determination of acceptance is out (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure I”), the variation time of special figure 1 fluctuation game becomes 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special view 1 change game in the special view 1 display device 212, turns on the LED lighting of the special view 1 hold lamp 218, and further includes the result of the success / failure determination and the special view change time. The command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. In the special figure 1 or special figure 2 display devices 212 and 214 in the special figure variation game in FIG. 31 (b) and subsequent figures, the horizontal side of the center of the 7 segments shown in the special figure 1 display device 212 of FIG. Indicates that special symbol pattern variation is being performed with a black bar and the other white display.

  In addition, the first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes a first secondary control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in progress flag is off (No in step S1301), and shifts to the normal notice lottery processing (step S1311), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. Therefore, it is determined that the normal advance notice effect is not to be executed (step S1401), and the first sub-control unit prefetching advance notice execution process at the start of the special figure change game is ended.

  When the above process is completed, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the decorative symbol is displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by a thick arrow pointing downward in the drawing. Special figure 1 fluctuation game of the effect which moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub control unit 400 receives a command including information in which the number of reservations for special view 1 decreases by 1, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the suspension display image a3 is erased and two are displayed. The hold display image a1, a2 of the normal hold display mode of the normal hold.

  As shown in FIG. 31C, for example, the special figure 1 display device 212 is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 31C, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure change game (e.g. “Special figure I” is stopped and displayed, and “decoration 8-decoration 5-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b and 208c, and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is off. Is notified.

  In the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation game shown in FIGS. 31 (b) to 31 (c), the panel lamps 224a and 224b are lighted or blinked under normal lighting control in accordance with a predetermined rendering procedure.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (c), shown in FIG. 31 (d) after a predetermined time has elapsed since “decoration 8-decoration 5-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c. As such, the next special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 31 (d), the same process as the process executed prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 31 (b) described above is executed.

The main control unit 300 acquires the first set of special figure 1 random number values and executes the yes / no decision regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation game, for example, the good or bad decision result is removed (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure The variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special view 1 change game in the special view 1 display device 212, turns on the LED lighting of the special view 1 hold lamp 218, and further includes the result of the success / failure determination and the special view change time. The command is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.
The first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes a first secondary control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure change game. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in progress flag is off (No in step S1301), and shifts to the normal notice lottery processing (step S1311), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. Therefore, it is determined that the normal advance notice effect is not to be executed (step S1401), and the first sub-control unit prefetching advance notice execution process at the start of the special figure change game is ended.

  When the above process is completed, as shown in FIG. 31 (d), in each of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol is displayed as indicated by a thick arrow pointing downward in the figure. Special figure 1 fluctuation game of the effect which moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 receives a command including information in which the number of reserved special views 1 is decreased by one, as shown in FIG. 31 (d), the pending display image a2 is erased and one is displayed. Only the hold display image a1 of the hold display mode of normal hold is displayed.

  When one gaming ball wins the special view 1 start port 230 during the special view 1 change game, the following process is executed during the execution of the special view change game. The main control unit 300 turns on two of the four LEDs of the special view 1 suspension lamp 218 in the special view 1 state update process of step S227 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Indicates that there are two pending. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special drawing prefetch process shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 for the derived special drawing 1 start information. The main control unit 300 first determines that the current gaming state is not in the power support mode (No in step S1000), and then determines that it is a winning on the special view 1 start port 230 (Yes in step S1101). Based on the special figure 1 start information, it refers to the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 10 (b) and determines that the preliminary determination result is out (No in step S1103 and No in step S1107), Refer to the special figure 1 determination table shown in (a) and determine the stop symbol as, for example, "special figure I" (step S1111), and refer to the special figure 1 variation display time determination table shown in FIG. Is determined as, for example, 40000 ms (step S1113), and the special drawing prefetch process is ended. The command (pre-read command) including the information of the preliminary determination result is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 by the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  The first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command including the information of the preliminary determination results executes the first secondary control unit prefetch notification execution process at the time of acquisition of the start information shown in FIG. For example, the first secondary control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in-progress flag is in the off state (No in step S1201), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 40000 ms, and thus corresponds to a predetermined variation time. It judges (step S1203), executes lottery process 1 of the pending change with reference to the pending change lottery table shown in FIG. 14, and determines that it is elected as “pending A” (step S1205), the board lamp shown in FIG. With reference to the pre-reading lottery table, the lottery process 2 of the pending change is executed and it is determined that "no change" is selected (step S1207). Furthermore, since "pending A" is won, one lottery is selected. It is determined that the player has won (step S1209), and "2" is set as the number of prefetch notice execution times (step S1211), and the prefetch in progress flag is set to the on state. Step S1213), and outputs the read-ahead notice command including a display mode of the hold display image a2 decorative pattern display unit 208 (step S1215). As a result, as shown in FIG. 31 (e), the hold display image a2 is a hold display area 208d1 with a character image representing "the evil merchant, Echigoya" in the display mode corresponding to "hold A" shown in FIG. 15 (b). Is displayed on. In addition, since "no change" is selected in the lottery process 2 of the hold change, the panel lamps 224a and 224b are shown in Figs. 31 (b) to 31 (c) while they are shown in Figs. 31 (e) to 33 (c). As in the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation game shown in), lighting, blinking and the like are executed by normal lighting control according to a predetermined rendering procedure.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (f) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this special view 1 change game, "special view I" is stopped and displayed on the special view 1 display device 212 and the left middle right symbol display area 208a , 208b, and 208c, "decoration 0-decoration 7-decoration 6" is stopped and displayed, and it is informed that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (f), shown in FIG. 32 (a) after a predetermined time has elapsed since “decoration 0-decoration 7-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c. As such, the next special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 32A, for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values stored first in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, and executes a propriety determination relating to the special figure fluctuation game started from now on, The acquired special figure 1 random number value pair is erased and the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number value pair is carried forward by one, and the special figure 1 reservation number is further decremented by one. When the main control unit 300 erases the data of the special figure 1 random number value group of the special figure 1 random number value storage area at the same time, the special figure 1 prefetching of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage section simultaneously. While erasing the information of the result, the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area is decremented by one. Further, in the same processing, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determination of a special figure fluctuation time, and determines a fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In this example, for example, the result of judgment of acceptance is out (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure I”), the fluctuation time of special figure 1 fluctuation game becomes 10000ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special view 1 change game in the special view 1 display device 212 and transmits a command including the information on the result of determination of success or failure and the special view change time to the first sub-control unit 400. Further, the main control unit 300 turns on one of the four LEDs of the special view 1 suspension lamp 218 in the special view 1 status update process of step S227 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Indicates that 1 has been suspended.

In addition, the first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes a first secondary control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in progress flag is in the on state (Yes in step S1301), subtracts one from the number of prefetch notice executions (= 2), and stores it in the prefetch notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 1 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether the current prefetch advance notice execution number (= 1) is 0 or not, and it is determined that the prefetch advance notice execution frequency is not 0 (No in step S1305), and the process proceeds to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal advance lottery process, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 floating game is 10000 ms, and thus determines that it corresponds to a predetermined change time, and executes the advance lottery 1 process (step S1403). In step S1403, the first secondary control unit 400 executes a notice lottery 1 process of selecting the presence / absence of use of the effect button (eg, the chance button 136) with reference to the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. In this example, "no button system" is selected. In the case of a non-button system (No in step S1405), the first sub control unit 400 executes the advance notice lottery 2 process (step S1407). In step S1407, the first secondary control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 18 and executes a lottery for notice before the reach. In the present example, "none" is selected. Next, in step S1413, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that it is the normal reach fluctuation time (No in step S1413) since the fluctuation time of the special view 1 fluctuation game is 10000 ms (No in step S1413). 5 The normal notice lottery process is ended without executing the process.
With the above processing, in the special figure 1 variable game, reach effect of normal reach is executed, and neither pre-reach advance notice effect nor post-reach notice effect prior to the normal reach effect is performed.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 32A, the decorative symbol is displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by a thick arrow pointing downward in the drawing. Special figure 1 fluctuation game of the effect which moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub control unit 400 receives a command including information in which the number of special drawing 1 holdings is decreased by one, as shown in FIG. 32A, the holding display image a2 is deleted and holding A The hold display image a1 is displayed.

  FIG. 32 (b) shows a state in which reach effect is being executed from the middle of the special figure 1 change game. The reach type in this example is normal reach, and "decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, an effect of rotating the decorative symbol is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (c), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this special feature variation game (for example, after 10000 ms have been started since the symbol variation display has been started), "I" is stopped and displayed, and "decoration 8-decoration 4-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b and 208c, and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is released. It is informed.

  In the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation game shown in FIGS. 32A to 32C, the panel lamps 224a and 224b are lighted or blinked under normal lighting control according to a predetermined rendering procedure.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (c), shown in FIG. 32 (d) after a predetermined time has elapsed since “decoration 8-decoration 4-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c. As such, the next special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 32 (d), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values stored first in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, and executes a propriety determination relating to the special figure fluctuation game started from now on, The acquired special figure 1 random number value pair is erased and the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number value pair is carried forward by one, and the special figure 1 reservation number is further decremented by one. When the main control unit 300 erases the data of the special figure 1 random number value group of the special figure 1 random number value storage area at the same time, the special figure 1 prefetching of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage section simultaneously. While erasing the information of the result, the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area is decremented by one. Further, in the same processing, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determination of a special figure fluctuation time, and determines a fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In this example, for example, the result of judgment of acceptance is out (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure I”), the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game becomes 40000ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special view 1 change game on the special view 1 display device 212 and turns off all the LEDs of the special view 1 hold lamp 218, and further includes a command including judgment result and special view change time information. Are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

In addition, the first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes a first secondary control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the prefetching execution flag is in the on state (Yes in step S1301), subtracts one from the number of prefetch notice executions (= 1), and stores it in the prefetch notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 0 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether the number of prefetch advance notice execution times (= 0) at the current time is 0 or not, and it is determined that the number of prefetch notice execution times is 0 (Yes in step S1305). Output processing of change command according to the type of notice. Run. The first sub-control unit 400 outputs a change command for which the on-hold display mode is normally on hold to the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 outputs a change command for setting the lighting mode of the panel lamps 224a and 224b to the normal state to the drive circuit 420 of the panel lamps 224a and 224b. Furthermore, the first auxiliary control unit 400 sets the flag in advance of preview advance notice to the off state (step S1309), and shifts to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal advance notice lottery process, the first sub control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 change game is 40000 ms, and thus determines that it corresponds to a predetermined change time, and executes the advance notice lottery 1 process (step S1403). In step S1403, the first secondary control unit 400 executes a notice lottery 1 process of selecting the presence / absence of use of the effect button (eg, the chance button 136) with reference to the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. In the present example, a "with button" system is selected. In the case of a system with a button (Yes at step S1405), the first sub control unit 400 executes the advance notice lottery 3 process (step S1409). In step S1409, the first secondary control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 19 and executes a lottery for notice before reach. In the present example, "character A" is selected. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 21 and executes a lottery relating to the button mode and the display mode of the chance button 136 in advance notice before reaching. In this example, “normal / normal” is selected as the “display mode / button mode”. Next, in step S1413, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special view 1 variation game is 40000 ms, and therefore determines that it is not the normal reach but the variation time of reach A (Yes in step S1413). The notice lottery 5 process of S1415 is executed. In step S1415, the first secondary control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. In the present example, "character D" is selected.
By the above processing, in the special figure 1 fluctuation game, reach production of reach A is executed, and prior to the reach A production, a notice presentation before reach of “system with button” is performed. Here, with regard to the presentation of “the system with a button”, the presentation of “normal / normal” in “display mode / button mode” is performed for the chance button 136, and the presentation by “character A” is subsequently performed. Also, following the reach A effect, a notice effect after reach by "Chara D" is performed.

  When the above process is completed, as shown in FIG. 32D, the decorative symbol is displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by a thick arrow pointing downward in the drawing. Special figure 1 fluctuation game of the effect which moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 receives a command including information in which the number of reserved special views 1 decreased by 1, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the pending display image a1 is erased and the special view The hold display image is not displayed in the 1 hold display area 208d1.

  FIG. 32 (e) schematically shows the chance button 136 in the lower right of the figure, in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 32 (d). FIG. 32E shows a state in which an operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 as the pre-reach advance notice effect is displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 is displayed is “normal” shown in FIG. 23A, and the display mode of the operation request image prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 22A is also “normal” shown in FIG.

  FIG. 32 (f) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 and "Chara A" of the pre-reach advance notice effect is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player schematically shows a state where the finger of the player is placed on the chance button 136 in the figure.

  Fig.33 (a) has shown the state in which reach production is performed from the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. The reach type in this example is reach A, "decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, an effect of rotating the decorative symbol is performed.

  FIG. 33 (b) shows a state in which “Chara D” is displayed as the after-reach advance notice effect. Next, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 variation game was started (after 40000 ms have elapsed since the symbol variation display was started), the special figure 1 display device 212 The special figure I is stopped and displayed, and "decorative 8-decorative 7-decorative 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is an off Is notified.

  In the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation game shown in FIGS. 33A to 33C, the panel lamps 224a and 224b are lighted or blinked under normal lighting control according to a predetermined rendering procedure.

  Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. FIG. 34 (a)-FIG.35 (f) have shown the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example by a time series in this order. FIG. 34 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being performed. In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 100 at the present time is a non-power support state which is not a power support state, and is a special figure low probability state.

  In (a) of FIG. 34, the special view 1 display device 212 starts variable display, and the special view 2 display device 214 stops and displays the first special symbol “special view I”. In addition, one LED is turned on in the special view 1 reserve lamp 218, which indicates that there is one reserve of the special view 1. The special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off, indicating that no special figure 2 is reserved. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game, processing similar to the process executed prior to the start of the special view 1 change game described in the first embodiment is executed.

The main control unit 300 acquires the set of the first special figure 1 random number values and executes the determination of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. For example, this success or failure determination result is out (for example, the stop symbol is "special figure I"), the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special view 1 change game in the special view 1 display device 212 and transmits a command including the information on the result of determination of success or failure and the special view change time to the first sub-control unit 400.
The first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes a first secondary control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure change game. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in progress flag is off (No in step S1301), and shifts to the normal notice lottery processing (step S1311), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 8000 ms. Therefore, it is determined that the normal advance notice effect is not to be executed (step S1401), and the first sub-control unit prefetching advance notice execution process at the start of the special figure change game is ended.

  When the above process is completed, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), the decorative symbol is displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by a thick arrow pointing downward in the drawing. Special figure 1 fluctuation game of the effect which moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  In addition, since the first sub control unit 400 receives a command including information on the special drawing 1 hold count, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), a hold display image of one normal hold hold display mode Display a1.

  When one gaming ball wins the special view 1 start port 230 during the special view 1 change game, the following process is executed during the execution of the special view change game. The main control unit 300 turns on two of the four LEDs of the special view 1 suspension lamp 218 in the special view 1 state update process of step S227 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Indicates that there are two pending. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special drawing prefetch process shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 for the derived special drawing 1 start information. The main control unit 300 first determines that the current gaming state is not in the power support mode (No in step S1000), and then determines that it is a winning on the special view 1 start port 230 (Yes in step S1101). Based on the special figure 1 start information, it refers to the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 10 (b) and determines that the preliminary determination result is a hit (No in step S1103 and No in step S1107), (A) Refers to the special figure 1 determination table shown in (a), for example, decides the stop symbol as "special figure A" (step S1111), and refers to the special figure 1 variation display time determination table shown in FIG. Is determined as, for example, 45000 ms (step S1113), and the special view prefetching process is ended. The command (pre-read command) including the information of the preliminary determination result is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 by the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  The first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command including the information of the preliminary determination results executes the first secondary control unit prefetch notification execution process at the time of acquisition of the start information shown in FIG. For example, the first secondary control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in-progress flag is in the off state (No in step S1201), and the variation time of the special view 1 variation game is 45000 ms, which corresponds to a predetermined variation time. It judges (step S1203), executes lottery processing 1 of suspension change with reference to the suspension change lottery table shown in FIG. 14, and determines that it is elected as “retention B” (step S1205), the board lamp shown in FIG. The lottery process 2 of holding change is executed with reference to the pre-reading lottery table, and it is determined that "lighting (blue)" is selected (step S1207), and "hold B" and "lighting (blue)" are won. Therefore, it is determined that one of the lottery has been won (step S1209), and "2" is set as the number of prefetch notice execution times (step S1211). Set grayed ON state (step S1213), the look-ahead warning command including a display mode of the display mode and the board lamp 224 of the hold display image a2 and outputs the decoration pattern display unit 208 (step S1215). As a result, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the hold display image a2 is displayed in the hold display area 208d1 with a character image representing "Yoshimune" of the display mode corresponding to "hold B" shown in FIG. 15 (b). Be done. In addition, since "lighting (blue)" is selected in the lottery process 2 of the hold change, the board lamp 224a is displayed during two consecutive special figure fluctuation games shown in FIGS. 34 (b) to 34 (e). All the ten circular lamps corresponding to "lighting (blue)" are lighted in blue, and pre-reading notice effect is performed. In addition, in synchronization with the pre-reading advance notice effect of the board surface lamp 224a, the board surface lamp 224b sequentially turns on the two petal-like lamps for the number of pending objects from the lower side to notify the number of pending items, and The second petal shaped lamp is turned on with a specific luminescent color to give the player a sense of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (c) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this special view 1 variation game, "special view I" is stopped and displayed on the special view 1 display device 212 and the left middle right symbol display area 208a , 208 b and 208 c, “decoration 8-decoration 5-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the special view 1 fluctuation game is out.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (c), shown in FIG. 34 (d) after a predetermined time has elapsed since “decoration 8-decoration 5-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c. As such, the next special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 34 (d), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values stored first in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, and executes a propriety determination relating to the special figure fluctuation game started from now on, The acquired special figure 1 random number value pair is erased and the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number value pair is carried forward by one, and the special figure 1 reservation number is further decremented by one. When the main control unit 300 erases the data of the special figure 1 random number value group of the special figure 1 random number value storage area at the same time, the special figure 1 prefetching of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage section simultaneously. While erasing the information of the result, the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area is decremented by one. Further, in the same processing, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determination of a special figure fluctuation time, and determines a fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In this example, for example, the result of determination of acceptance is out (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure I”), the variation time of special figure 1 fluctuation game becomes 8000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special view 1 change game on the special view 1 display device 212, turns on the LED of the special view 1 hold lamp 218 to one, and further determines the result of the success / failure determination and the special view change time. The command to be included is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In addition, the first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes a first secondary control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the prefetching in progress flag is in the on state (Yes in step S1301), subtracts one from the number of prefetch notice executions (= 2), and stores it in the prefetch notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 1 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether the current prefetch advance notice execution number (= 1) is 0 or not, and it is determined that the prefetch advance notice execution frequency is not 0 (No in step S1305), and the process proceeds to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal notice lottery process, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is 8000 ms, and thus determines that it does not correspond to the predetermined fluctuation time, and ends the normal notice lottery process.

  When the above process is completed, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), the decorative symbol is displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by the downward thick arrow in the figure. Special figure 1 fluctuation game of the effect which moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 receives a command including information in which the number of reserved special views 1 is decreased by one, as shown in FIG. The hold display image a1 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (e), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of this special view 1 change game, as shown in (e) of FIG. "Special figure I" is stopped and displayed, and "decorative 0-decorative 7-decorative 6" is halted and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and the special figure 1 fluctuation game concerned is an off Is notified.

  In the midst of the special figure 1 fluctuation game which is shown in figure 34 (b)-(e), as for board face lamp 224a, pre-reading advance notice display is executed with lighting control which follows the production procedure of lighting (blue). In synchronization with the lighting control of the board lamp 224a, in the board lamp 224b, the number of petal pattern lamps that are equal to the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 are lit, and the petal pattern lamp showing suspension for preliminary notice Light.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 as notification means capable of notifying the information of the number of reservations as game information regarding the game are provided, and the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit With the control of 400, with respect to the information of the number of reservations, the lighting mode of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the display mode in the special figure 1 holding display area 208d1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lighting mode of the board lamp 224b. Notification of the number of reservations can be performed at three locations. According to the present embodiment, since it is possible to notify three or more places for one of the information regarding the game, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, there may be a case where it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation or superiority by performing a plurality of notifications for one piece of game information. Note that the notification means may be a single effect means or a plurality of effect means.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, as a plurality of effect means that can at least execute effects relating to the game, for example, special figure 1 holding lamp 218, board surface lamps 224a, 224b, and decorative symbol display device 208 are provided. As a rendering means, for example, a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208, the panel lamp 224, and the special view 1 suspension lamp 218 can be used to notify of the information on the number of reservations at three or more locations. As described above, notification may be made noticeable by notifying using a plurality of effect means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 as a main control means capable of executing at least a main control unit timer interrupt process, which is control processing relating to a game, and the special control, for example, sent from the main control unit 300 A first sub-control unit 400 as a sub-control means capable of executing at least a first sub-control main process which is a control process related to a game upon receiving a command and a pre-reading result information command is provided. Then, the special view 1 holding lamp 218 as at least one of the plurality of effect means is controlled by the main control unit 300. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 controlled by the main control unit 300 and having high reliability of the information of the number of holdings is used for one of the plurality of effect means.

  In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 reserve of the decorative symbol display device 208 among the notification of the number of reservations to be executed at the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218, the panel lamps 224a and 224b, and the decorative symbol display device 208 Notification of the number of reservations by at least two by turning on the display area 208d1 and the board surface lamp 224b is performed, for example, including at least the same period such as a period from increase of the number of reservations to decrease of the number of reservations. According to the present embodiment, the interest of the game may be improved by executing at least two notice effects during the same period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one of the plurality of effect means is the decorative symbol display device 208 as an image display means, and the decorative symbol display device 208 can execute notification of the number of holdings as at least one notification. According to this embodiment, it may be possible to execute notification at a portion where the player is most likely to look at.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game information is a start hold display indicating the number of holds of the symbol variation display. A plurality of effect means are provided with a special figure 1 hold lamp 218 as a hold display means indicating the number of hold times and board lamps 224a and 224b as lamp notification means, and notification by start hold display is a hold display means At least three of the display means and the lamp notification means can be implemented.

  According to the present embodiment, the symbol variation display is an important effect of informing the player whether or not the jackpot advantageous to the player is given, and the number of pending of the important effect is notified to the player in a plurality of places so as to be easy to understand There is a possibility.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at least one notification of the notification by the start suspension display can be functioned as a prefetch notice. According to this embodiment, there may be a case where reliable notification can be performed while raising the expectation to the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (e), shown in FIG. 34 (f) after a predetermined time has elapsed since “decorative 0-decorative 7-decorative 6” is stopped and displayed in the left middle right graphic display area 208a, 208b, 208c. As such, the next special figure 1 fluctuation game is started. Prior to the start of the special view 1 change game shown in FIG. 34 (f), for example, the following processing is executed. First, the main control unit 300 acquires a set of special figure 1 random number values stored first in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, and executes a propriety determination relating to the special figure fluctuation game started from now on, The acquired special figure 1 random number value pair is erased and the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number value pair is carried forward by one, and the special figure 1 reservation number is further decremented by one. When the main control unit 300 erases the data of the special figure 1 random number value group of the special figure 1 random number value storage area at the same time, the special figure 1 prefetching of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage section simultaneously. While erasing the information of the result, the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area is decremented by one. Further, in the same processing, the main control unit 300 acquires a random number value for determination of a special figure fluctuation time, and determines a fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In this example, for example, the result of success or failure determination is hit (for example, the stop symbol is “special figure A”), and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation game is 45000 ms. The main control unit 300 starts the special view 1 change game on the special view 1 display device 212 and turns off all the LEDs of the special view 1 hold lamp 218, and further includes a command including judgment result and special view change time information. Are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

In addition, the first secondary control unit 400 that has received the command from the main control unit 300 executes a first secondary control unit side notice execution process at the start of the special figure variation game. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the prefetching execution flag is in the on state (Yes in step S1301), subtracts one from the number of prefetch notice executions (= 1), and stores it in the prefetch notice execution count storage area of the RAM 408. 0 is stored (step S1303). Next, it is determined whether the number of prefetch advance notice execution times (= 0) at the current time is 0 or not, and it is determined that the number of prefetch notice execution times is 0 (Yes in step S1305). Output processing of change command according to the type of notice. Run. The first sub-control unit 400 outputs a change command for which the on-hold display mode is normally on hold to the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 outputs a change command for setting the lighting mode of the panel lamps 224a and 224b to the normal state to the drive circuit 420 of the panel lamps 224a and 224b. Furthermore, the first auxiliary control unit 400 sets the flag in advance of preview advance notice to the off state (step S1309), and shifts to the normal notice lottery process (step S1311). In step S1401 of the normal notice lottery process, the first sub control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special figure 1 change game is 45000 ms, and thus determines that it corresponds to a predetermined change time, and executes the notice lottery 1 process (step S1403). In step S1403, the first secondary control unit 400 executes a notice lottery 1 process of selecting the presence / absence of use of the effect button (eg, the chance button 136) with reference to the notice lottery table 1 shown in FIG. In the present example, a "with button" system is selected. In the case of a system with a button (Yes at step S1405), the first sub control unit 400 executes the advance notice lottery 3 process (step S1409). In step S1409, the first secondary control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 3 shown in FIG. 19 and executes a lottery for notice before reach. In the present example, "character B" is selected. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 4 shown in FIG. 21 and executes a lottery relating to the button mode and the display mode of the chance button 136 in advance notice before reaching. In this example, “vibration + rotation / vibration” is selected as the “display mode / button mode”. Next, in step S1413, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the variation time of the special view 1 variation game is 45000 ms, and thus determines that it is not the normal reach but the variation time of reach A (Yes in step S1413). The notice lottery 5 process of S1415 is executed. In step S1415, the first secondary control unit 400 refers to the notice lottery table 5 shown in FIG. In the present example, "character F" is selected.
By the above processing, in the special figure 1 fluctuation game, reach production of reach A is executed, and prior to the reach A production, a notice presentation before reach of “system with button” is performed. Here, the effect of “system with button” is the effect of “display mode / button mode” being “vibration + rotation / vibration” for the chance button 136, and the effect by “character B” is subsequently performed. Also, following the reach A effect, a notice effect after reach by "Chara F" is performed.

  When the above process is completed, as shown in FIG. 34 (f), the decorative symbol is displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as indicated by a thick arrow pointing downward in the drawing. Special figure 1 fluctuation game of the effect which moves (rotates) from top to bottom is started.

  Further, since the first sub-control unit 400 receives a command including information in which the number of reserved special views is decreased by 1, as shown in FIG. 34 (f), the pending display image a1 is erased and the special view The hold display image is not displayed in the 1 hold display area 208d1.

  FIG. 35 (a) schematically shows the chance button 136 at the lower right of the figure in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 34 (f). FIG. 35A shows a state in which an operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136 as the pre-reach advance notice effect is displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image for prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 is displayed is "vibration" shown in FIG. 23B, and the display mode of the operation request image for prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 Is “vibration + rotation” shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, the first sub-control unit 400 including the chance button 136 as the operation means and the image display means, for example, the decorative symbol display device The effect means includes an effect button (chance button 136) as an operation means operable by the player, and the decorative symbol display device 208 requests an operation request image for requesting a press operation of the chance button 136. The image of the chance button 136 can be displayed, and the operation request image includes an image of the shape of the chance button 136 so that the chance button 136 can be identified, and the operation request image is a display of the operation request image A display mode (in the present example, “shake”) different from the button mode (in the present example, “vibration”) of the chance button 136 in + Can be displayed in rotation ").

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the operation request image display different from the appearance is performed on the rendering means, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, there are cases where it can be made to pay attention to the rendering means. In addition, the operation request image may be able to function as a notice or a notice. Further, even when the image display is simplified, it may be possible to convey necessary information to the player.

  FIG. 35B shows a state in which the display effect by the “character B” of the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed in the effect display area 208 d in relation to the player pressing the chance button 136.

  FIG.35 (c) has shown the state in which reach production is performed from the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. The reach type in this example is reach A, and "decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, an effect of rotating the decorative symbol is performed.

  FIG. 35 (d) shows a state in which “Chara F” is displayed as the after-reach advance notice effect. Next, as shown in FIG. 35 (e), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 variation game was started (after 45000 ms have passed since the symbol variation display was started), the special figure 1 display device 212 "Special 7 A" is stopped and displayed, and "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208 b, 208 c, and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit Is notified.

  In the middle of the special figure 1 change game shown in FIG. 34 (f) to FIG. 35 (e), the board lamps 224a and 224b are lighted or blinked under the normal lighting control according to the predetermined rendering procedure. .

  FIG. 35F shows a state in which an effect of notifying that the jackpot has been won is performed. A big hit effect is started in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a big hit effect in which all the lamps are lit at the maximum brightness is performed on the panel lamp 224a and the panel lamp 224b.

  Next, the big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.36 (a)-FIG.36 (e) have shown the big hit start production in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example by a time series in this order. In addition to the structure shown to FIG. 31 etc., the state alerting | reporting lamp 222 is shown typically in Fig.36 (a)-FIG.36 (e). FIGS. 36 (a) to 36 (d) show an example of a jackpot start effect to be performed before the 1R (first round) of the jackpot game is started by winning the jackpot as a result of the special figure fluctuation game . Although illustration is omitted, prior to the start of this jackpot start effect, processing for a right-handed command is executed.

  If the main control unit 300 determines that the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a big hit, it controls the drive circuit 330 after the special figure fluctuation game ends, and among the state notification lamps 222, the right-handed lamp and the big hit medium lamp Lights up, and turns off the non-electric support lamp and the electric support lamp. Next, the information on the status notification lamp 222 is included in the big hit start command and the command is sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  The first sub control unit 400 having received the command from the main control unit 300 performs an image simulating the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 with respect to the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the first sub control unit main processing. And an image showing that the player's hand is turning the ball firing handle 134 to the right, an arrow indicating that the gaming ball should fly to the right, and a character string of “right strike”. Control processing of

  Further, in the first sub-control unit main processing, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control to sequentially change the light emission luminances of the ten circular lamps of the panel lamp 224a from the top to the bottom. For example, the emission brightness of the first and second top circular lamps is made higher than that of the remaining circular lamps, and then the emission brightness of the third to fifth circular lamps is higher than that of the remaining circular lamps. Make the luminous intensity of the sixth to eighth circular lamps higher than that of the remaining circular lamps, then increase the luminous brightness of the ninth and tenth circular lamps to that of the remaining circular lamps. Control is made to be higher than the luminance. In addition, in the first sub-control unit main processing, the first sub-control unit 400 performs control to sequentially change the light emission luminances of the four petal-like lamps of the board surface lamp 224b from the top to the bottom.

  When the above processing is completed, the gradation control is performed so that a group of circular lamps moves sequentially from the upper side to the lower side by the board surface lamp 224a during the big hit start effect shown in FIGS. 36 (a) to (d). To make a right-handed notification that the light is viewed as flowing down along the right-handed direction. In addition, a right-handed notification is provided by the board lamp 224b so that the petals may flow and fall along the right-handed direction. Further, notification of a right-handed instruction is also performed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. On the other hand, under the control of the main control unit 300, the right-handed lamp is turned on also in the status display lamp 222, and right-handed notification is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 as notification means capable of notifying the right-handed information as the game information regarding the game are provided, and the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit With control of 400, with respect to right-handed information, the lighting mode of the status display lamp 222, the display mode in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the lighting mode of the panel lamps 224a and 224b Right-handed notification can be performed. According to the present embodiment, since it is possible to notify three or more places for one of the information regarding the game, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, there may be a case where it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation or superiority by performing a plurality of notifications for one piece of game information. Note that the notification means may be a single effect means or a plurality of effect means.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as a plurality of effect means capable of at least executing effects relating to a game, for example, a state display lamp 222, board surface lamps 224a and 224b, and a decorative symbol display device 208 are provided. As, for example, using a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208, the panel lamp 224, and the status display lamp 222, notification of right-handed information can be performed at three or more locations. As described above, notification may be made noticeable by notifying using a plurality of effect means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 as a main control means capable of executing at least a main control unit timer interrupt process which is control processing relating to a game, and a big hit start command etc. sent from the main control unit 300. And a first sub-control unit 400 as a sub-control means capable of executing at least a first sub-control unit main process that is control processing relating to a game. The state display lamp 222 as at least one of the plurality of effect means is controlled by the main control unit 300. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the state display lamp 222 controlled by the main control unit 300 and having high reliability of right-handed information is used as one of the plurality of effect means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at least two of the notification of right-handed driving performed at three or more positions of the status display lamp 222, the panel lamps 224a and 224b, and the decorative symbol display device 208 at least two by lighting the panel lamps 224a and 224b. Notification of right-handed by is performed for the same period. According to the present embodiment, the interest of the game may be improved by executing at least two notice effects during the same period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one of the plurality of effect means is the decorative symbol display device 208 as an image display means, and the decorative symbol display device 208 can execute, for example, notification of right-handed as at least one notification. According to this embodiment, it may be possible to execute notification at a portion where the player is most likely to look at.

  FIG. 36 (e) shows the state in which the first round of the big hit game has been started. When the big hit game is started, the right-handed notification at three or more places by the plurality of effect means ends, and the big hit effect of the first round is started. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, a display for notifying that the round is 1R is performed together with an effect that the face of the adolescent man wearing the learning cap is displayed. In addition, the display of the "right strike" of the right strike instruction is also performed. Further, the board lamp 224 performs a lighting operation based on the jackpot effect. Further, it is shown that the special figure 2 start opening 232 has won by right-handling and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 has one reserve.

Next, the big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 (a) shows an example of effect in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 when a ball or an error occurs during the big hit game. If a ball or an error occurs during the big hit game, a display of "a ball or an error clerk is called" is displayed on the effect display area 208d to notify the ball or the error. Also in this case, the “right-handed” display of the right-handed instruction continues in the effect display area 208d.
As described above, in this embodiment, an error notification can be performed when a sphere or an error occurs in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example, as the effect means of at least a part of the plurality of effect means Even when an error notification is given, for example, a right-handed instruction can be continued as notification of at least one game information. According to the present embodiment, even if an error notification is made, the information on the notification of the right-handed command remains, so there may be a case where the player can be given a sense of security. The board lamps 224a and 224b light up in an error notification light emission mode corresponding to the error.

  FIGS. 37 (b) to 37 (f) show, in this order, the effects using the chance button 136 in the big hit game with the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In this embodiment, the player has a chance button 136 as operation means operable by the player, and a decorative symbol display device 208 as image display means capable of displaying an image, and the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 An operation request image prompting to press the chance button 136 can be displayed. The effect display area 208 d can display a plurality of operation request images for the chance button 136, and can perform effects according to a plurality of operations for the player's chance button 136.

  FIG. 37 (b) exemplifies the image in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the start time of the effect using the chance button 136. In the effect display area 208d, the number of rounds (= 8), an image of a right-handed instruction, and the face of the adolescent wearing a school cap are displayed, and further, a character string image of “if positive alignment is definite” is displayed. ing.

Next, FIG. 37C shows a state in which an operation request image for pressing the chance button 136 as an effect during a big hit is displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button 136 is schematically shown at the lower right of the figure.
Three operation request images are arranged in the lateral direction. The display mode of the operation request image on the left side and the middle side is "normal" shown in FIG. 22A, and the display mode of the operation request image on the right side is "vibration + rotation" shown in FIG. At the lower part of each operation request image, an effective period image showing an operation effective period for accepting pressing (operation) of the chance button 136 is displayed. Further, an area for displaying the result of pressing the chance button 136 by the player is provided below each operation request image, and a downward arrow is displayed before the result is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37C, the button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image for pressing the chance button 136 is displayed is “normal” shown in FIG.

  FIG. 37 (d) shows a state where the player presses the chance button 136 once and the operation request image on the left side disappears and an image of "o" is displayed below it. As described above, in this embodiment, each time the player presses the chance button 136, the operation request image disappears sequentially from the left. The valid period images of the middle and right operation request images both indicate that a certain amount of time has elapsed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37E, the button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image for pressing the chance button 136 is displayed is “normal”. In addition, the player further presses the chance button 136, and the operation request image on the middle side disappears, and the state of the image of “o” is displayed below it. The valid period image of the operation request image on the right side further indicates that the operation valid period has elapsed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37F, the button mode of the chance button 136 when the operation request image for pressing the chance button 136 is displayed is “vibration + rotation”. That is, the button mode changes in accordance with the display mode of the operation request image. Thus, the chance button 136 can operate in a mode in which the operation request image is displayed. Since the operation of the aspect similar to the aspect which the operation request | requirement image shows is possible for the chance button 136, the operation of the chance button 136 may be able to be alert | reported to a player. Further, the player further depresses the chance button 136, and the operation request image on the right side disappears, and a state in which “o” is displayed below the image is shown. Furthermore, a character string of “probable change!” Is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d.

  According to the present embodiment, since it is possible to simultaneously execute a plurality of image displays for prompting an operation to one operation means, the interest of the game may be improved. Also, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to understand that it is necessary to perform at least a plurality of operations. Also, by causing the player to perform a plurality of operations, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, the number of times to be pressed may be easy to understand.

  In the above embodiment, regarding the operation on the operation means of the player, the effective period display image showing one or a plurality of effective periods of operation represents a lapse of time by a display in which the bar portion gradually shortens. Instead, for example, a countdown of numbers may be displayed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the valid period display image is provided for each of the plurality of operation request images. By doing this, it may be possible to inform the player of the effective period for each operation in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in order to avoid complicated display, it is of course possible to display a smaller number (for example, one) of effective periods with respect to a plurality of operation request images.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the operation valid period is common to a plurality of operations of the chance button 136, and one valid period display image can be displayed for a plurality of operation request images. By doing this, it may be possible to notify that the valid period is common to a plurality of operations of the chance button 136 in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the above embodiment, the display mode of the third operation request image of the plurality of operation request images is "vibration + rotation" and the display mode of the other operation request images on the left side and the middle side is "normal And different. By doing this, the display mode of the operation request image may be able to function as a predetermined advance notice. In this example, the display mode of the third operation request image on the right side functions as a notice of a probability change.

  Further, in the above embodiment, one operation request image is made to disappear in response to one operation of the chance button 136. By doing this, it may be possible to notify the number of remaining operations to be operated by the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in some cases, it may be easy to understand whether or not the operation of the operation means is effective.

Further, in the above embodiment, the operation request image which is a display mode different from the other is adapted to correspond to the last operation among the plurality of operations of the chance button 136. By doing this, a display mode different from the others may be able to function as a notice. And, by setting the operation corresponding to the different display mode as the last of a plurality of times, there are cases where it can contribute to causing the player to positively perform the necessary number of operations.
It should be noted that when the effective period of the operation request image has expired, a predetermined effect may be automatically executed even without pressing the chance button 136.

  Next, a big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 (a) shows an example in which when seven or more big hit games are seven or more consecutive homes, it is notified that it is seven or more consecutive homes as gaming information at three places.

  In (a) of FIG. 38, a special music for notifying that it is seven or more consecutive units is output from the speaker 120, and in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, notification using the character string of "in eight consecutive units!" Is displayed, and lighting is performed in a special lighting mode informing that the board surface lamp 224b indicates seven or more consecutive homes, and a total of three places are notified that the current big hit game is seven or more consecutive homes . According to the present embodiment, since it is possible to notify three or more places in response to being one or more seven consecutive units, which is one of the information regarding the game, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, there may be a case where it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation or superiority by performing a plurality of notifications for one piece of game information. In the effect display area 208d, the current number of consecutive houses is displayed as a number, but with the speaker 120, the board lamp 224, etc., the same effect is executed regardless of the number of consecutive houses with seven or more consecutive suites.

  FIG.38 (b)-(d) has shown the modification of the presentation using the operation request | requirement image which urges | pushes-down the chance button 136 shown to FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 37 (c) to 37 (f), the operation request image disappears in the order of left, middle and right every time the player presses the chance button 136, but in this modification, the player However, after pressing the chance button 136 three times, the three operation request images disappear simultaneously.

  FIG. 38 (b) shows the same state as FIG. 37 (c). FIG. 38C shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 three times and the images of “o” are displayed below the operation request images on the left, middle and right sides. FIG. 38D shows a state in which three operation request images disappear simultaneously after the player presses the chance button 136 three times.

  Also according to this modification, since it is possible to simultaneously execute a plurality of image displays for prompting an operation to one operation means, there may be cases where the interest of the game can be improved. Also, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to understand that it is necessary to perform at least a plurality of operations. Also, by causing the player to perform a plurality of operations, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, the number of times to be pressed may be easy to understand.

  Next, a big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39A shows a modified example of the effect using the operation request image prompting the user to press the chance button 136. Although a character string “press more than 5 times!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d, only two operation request images are displayed. In addition, the effective period is not displayed. As described above, the number of pressing requests of the chance button 136 and the number of operation request images do not have to match. As in this example, it may be an extent that the player can recognize that a plurality of operations are required.

  FIG. 39B shows the case where the display mode of the operation request image is “vibration + rotation” and the button mode of the chance button 136 is “vibration”. Thus, the display mode of the operation request image may be more flashy than the button mode of the chance button 136. Further, FIG. 39C shows the case where the display mode of the operation request image is “normal” and the button mode of the chance button 136 is “vibration”. Thus, the display mode of the operation request image may be more plain than the button mode of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 39D shows a case where the display mode of the operation request image is “deca-button display (vibration + rotation)” and the button mode of the chance button 136 is “vibration + rotation”. Also in the “display mode / button mode”, the operation request image is included in a display mode different from the button mode of the chance button 136 during display of the operation request image.

  Next, a big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 (a) shows a state in which one common effective period display image is used for a plurality of operation request images. By doing this, it may be possible to notify that the valid period is common to multiple operations of the chance button 136 in an easy-to-understand manner. As described above, the number of valid period displays does not have to be the same as the number of operation requests. For example, two valid period display images may be displayed for three operation requests. By doing this, the number of display of the effective period may be set in accordance with the display area of the image display means, which contributes to the improvement of the interest to the effect.

  FIG.40 (b) has shown the case where several operation request images have the same display mode. Of course, such an effect may be used. FIG. 40C shows the case where the pachinko machine 100 has the sub liquid crystal display device 209 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub liquid crystal display device 209 displays “2” indicating the number of reservations. As described above, the number of reservations may be notified at three locations of the special view 1 suspension lamp by the main control, the decorative symbol display device 208 by the sub control, and the sub liquid crystal display device 209.

  Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above embodiment, among the plurality of operation request images, the display mode is different with respect to the operation request image in which the display mode of the last operation request image disappears before that, but the present invention is not limited to this. Of course, as shown in a), the display mode of the operation request image other than the last operation request image may be different from the display mode of the other operation request image. In FIG. 41 (a), the second operation request image is displayed in a display mode different from that of the other operation request images.

  FIGS. 41 (b) to 41 (d) show the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment. 32 (d) to 32 (f) of the above embodiment show an example in which one operation request image is displayed and the pressing of the chance button 136 is requested in the symbol variation game, but FIG. 41 (c) shows As shown, a plurality of operation request images may be displayed during the special figure variation game to perform an effect of requesting pressing of the chance button 136 a plurality of times.

  Further, for example, 10 seconds is set as the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the operation request image as at least a part of the operation valid period, for example, in the first 5 seconds. The operation request image includes, for example, a display in which the rod-like portion is shortened with the passage of time as the operation request image indicates information on the operation effective period, and the operation period image of the operation request image on the left side and the center side is As shown in FIG. 41C, as the first effective period image, for example, the bar portion is blue-displayed, and the effective period image of the operation request image on the left side has the rod portion as the second effective period image. The first and second valid period images can be displayed in the same operation valid period, and the first operation request image includes the first valid period image, and the first and second valid period images are displayed in red. The operation requests an image may be included a second lifetime image. By doing this, the valid period image may be able to function as a notice.

  Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present modification includes a direction key 137 in addition to the chance button 136 as an operation means. The direction key 137 is used when selecting a desired option by a selection effect or the like displayed in the effect display area 208d. 42 (a) to 42 (c) according to the modification correspond to FIGS. 32 (d) to 32 (f) of the above embodiment. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), not only the chance button 136 but also the direction key 137 can be used as the operation means. In this example, even when the direction key 137 having a plurality of effect buttons and different from the chance button 136 indicated by the operation request image is operated, the operation becomes effective, and the display effect is displayed as shown in FIG. To be executed. In this case, depending on the type of the effect button operated, the display effect of "character A" is executed when the chance button 136 is pressed, and when "Chara C" is effect displayed when the direction key 137 is operated. The display effect may be changed, the lottery ratio may be changed, or the display effect itself may be different.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (d), when the direction key 137 is provided in addition to the chance button 136 as the operation means, the effect of using the chance button 136 and the direction key 137 in parallel is also used for the operation request image. May be

  Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 (a) shows an image of a right-handed instruction displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 43 (b) shows a simplified image of the image of the right-handed instruction shown in FIG. 42 (a). A horizontally long rectangular frame portion indicating a variable winning opening with a simplified image is displayed in a mode different from the display mode of the variable winning opening 234 shown in the image of the right-handed instruction in FIG. 43 (a).

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 43 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 by this embodiment is:
A game provided with informing means (for example, an informing control mechanism for informing using at least one effect means) that at least the execution of informing of game information (for example, information on the number of reservations, information on right strike) related to the game Stand,
The notification means notifies the game information of the same type at three or more locations (for example, when the game information is the number of reservations, the notification of the number of reservations by the special view 1 suspension lamp 218, decoration The notification of the number of reservations is made at a total of three locations of the symbol display device 208 and the panel lamps 224a and 224b, the notification of the number of reservations by the sub liquid crystal display device 209, and It is characterized in that at least notification of the number of holdings at a location or more, a combination thereof, and the like can be performed at least.

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, notification of three or more places can be made with respect to one of the information regarding the game, so the interest of the game may be able to be improved. In addition, there may be a case where it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation or superiority by performing a plurality of notifications for one piece of game information.
Note that the notification means may be a single effect means or a plurality of effect means.

(2) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
It is equipped with a plurality of effect means (for example, special figure 1 hold lamp 218, board lamp 224a, 224b, decorative symbol display device 208, sub liquid crystal display device 209) capable of at least executing effects related to games,
The notification means can execute notification of the same type of game information at three or more locations using the plurality of effect means (for example, a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208, the panel lamp, and the special view holding lamp) It is characterized by being.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the said structure, alerting | reporting may be able to be made conspicuous by alerting | reporting using several presentation means.

(3) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
Main control means (e.g., main control unit 300) capable of at least executing control (e.g., main control unit timer interrupt processing) relating to the progress of the game;
Sub-control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least executing control (for example, first sub-control unit main processing) relating to the effects of the game;
At least one of the plurality of effect means (for example, the special view 1 reserve lamp 218) is controlled by the main control means.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the said structure, the reliability of the information of the presentation means (notification means) controlled by the main control means may be high.

(4) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The notification means is a notification of the same type of game information to be executed at the three or more locations (for example, notification of the number of reservations by special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, board lamp 224a, and decorative symbol display device 208, or 1 At least two notification (for example, the special figure 1 suspension lamp 218 and the number of reservations by the decoration symbol display device 208) of the reservation lamp 218, the decoration symbol display device 208, and notification of the number of reservations by the sub liquid crystal display device 209, etc. Notification, notification of the number of reservations by special display 1 suspension lamp 218 and board lamp 224a, or notification of the number of reservations at two places in the decorative symbol display device 208, etc., for the same period (eg, suspension after increase of the number of reservations) It is characterized in that it is practicable including at least a pre-reading notification period) during the period until the number reduction.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the interest of the game may be improved by executing at least two notice effects during the same period.

(5) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the notification may be executable at a portion where the player's line of sight is most likely to go.

(6) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
It is characterized in that it comprises symbol display means capable of at least executing symbol variation display, and the same type of game information is information on the number of holding times regarding the execution of the symbol variation display.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the symbol variation display is an important effect for informing the player whether or not the jackpot advantageous to the player is given, and the number of pending important effects is played at a plurality of places. In some cases, it may be possible to inform the

(7) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
It is characterized in that at least one of the notification of the number of holding times can be notified as a pre-reading advance notice. According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, there are cases where reliable notification can be performed while raising the expectation to the big hit.

(8) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
At least one of the plurality of rendering means is a second rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The notification means can at least execute the error notification using the first rendering means when an error (for example, a ball or an error) occurs.
The notification means is capable of continuing notification (for example, a right-handed instruction) of the same type of game information using the second effect means even when the error occurs. I assume.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since the information of the notification remains even if the error notification is performed, the player may be given a sense of security.

(9) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is:
A game console provided with a plurality of notification means capable of at least notifying of game information,
At least one informing means of the plurality of informing means is a first informing means (for example, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218),
At least one informing means of the plurality of informing means is a second informing means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
At least one informing means of the plurality of informing means is a third informing means (for example, a board lamp 224a),
The game information is information including at least information related to a game (for example, information on the number of reservations),
The first notification means can execute at least notification of the first game information (for example, information on the number of reservations) in a first period (for example, one operation valid period among a plurality of operation valid periods). And
The second notification means is capable of at least executing a notification regarding the first game information in a second period (for example, one operation valid period of a plurality of operation valid periods),
The third informing means is capable of at least executing informing about the first game information in a third period (for example, one operation valid period among a plurality of operation valid periods),
The first period and the second period are at least partially overlapping periods,
The first period and the third period are at least partially overlapping periods,
The second period and the third period are at least partially overlapping periods,
It is characterized by

(10) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is:
Operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and image display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least displaying an image;
Rendering means capable of at least performing rendering (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
The image display means can display at least a first image (for example, an operation request image);
The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of the operation valid period of the operation means,
The effect means is capable of at least executing the effect (for example, effect for displaying a predetermined image (eg, a character or the like) at each operation) according to the number of times the operation means is operated.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, since it is possible to simultaneously execute a plurality of image displays for prompting an operation to one operation means, the interest of the game may be improved. Also, in some cases, it may be possible for the player to understand that it is necessary to perform at least a plurality of operations. Also, by causing the player to perform a plurality of operations, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, the number of times to be pressed may be easy to understand.

(11) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least a second image (for example, a display image for a valid period),
The second image is an image including at least an image (for example, a display for shortening a bar, a countdown of numbers, etc.) indicating an operation valid period of the operation means,
The image display means is capable of at least displaying one or more of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed.
It is characterized by

(12) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The image display means can display one of the second images with respect to one of the first images.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, there are cases where it is possible to inform the player of the effective period for each operation in an easy-to-understand manner.

(13) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The operation valid period is a period that can be set at least as a common valid period for a plurality of operations of the operation means,
The image display means is capable of displaying one of the second images when a plurality of first images (for example, a display prompting to press a plurality of chance buttons) is displayed. It features.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, in some cases, it may be possible to easily notify that the effective period is common to a plurality of operations of the operation means.

(14) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The image display means can display one of the first images in response to one operation request of the operation means.

(15) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The image display means is characterized in that the first image can be erased in response to one operation of the operation means.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, there are cases where it is possible to easily notify the remaining number of operations that the player should operate. In addition, in some cases, it may be easy to understand whether or not the operation of the operation means is effective.

(16) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The image display means may display at least one display mode (for example, vibration on the chance button) of the plurality of first images (for example, a display prompting pressing of the plurality of chance buttons). It is characterized in that it can be displayed at least in a display mode different from the display mode of the image (for example, no vibration on the chance button).

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the display mode of the operation request image may be able to function as a notice.

(17) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The first image displayed in the different display mode is an image corresponding to the last operation of the operation means.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, a display mode different from the others may be able to function as a notice. And, by setting the operation corresponding to the different display mode as the last of a plurality of times, there are cases where it can contribute to causing the player to positively perform the necessary number of operations.

(18) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is:
Operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
An image display means capable of displaying at least an image (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
Rendering means (for example, the first sub control unit 400) capable of at least performing rendering in response to the operation means being operated;
A game console equipped with
The operation means is at least capable of taking a first state (e.g., a button mode in which the chance button 136 is neither vibrating nor rotating)
The operation means is at least capable of taking a second state (for example, a display mode in which the chance button 136 is both vibrating and rotating),
The first state and the second state are states in which at least a part of the operation means is different,
The image display means can display at least a first image (for example, an operation request image requesting an operation of the operation means),
The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of a period in which the operation means can operate (for example, an operation request period),
The first image is an image including at least an image that can indicate that the operation means is in the first state (for example, the same display mode as a button mode in the first state),
The image display means can display at least a second image (for example, an operation request image requesting an operation of the operation means),
The second image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of a period in which the operation means can operate.
The second image is an image including at least an image (for example, the same display mode as the button mode in the second state) capable of suggesting that the operation means is in the second state,
When the first condition (for example, one lottery result in the notice lottery 4 in step S1141 of the normal notice lottery processing shown in FIG. 30) is satisfied when the operation means is in the first state, the image display means Is capable of displaying at least the first image,
When the second condition (for example, another lottery result in the notice lottery 4 in step S1141 of the normal notice lottery processing shown in FIG. 30) is satisfied when the operation means is in the first state, the image display means Is capable of at least displaying the second image,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the operation request image display different from the appearance is performed on the rendering means, the interest of the game may be improved. In addition, there are cases where it can be made to pay attention to the rendering means. In addition, the operation request image may be able to function as a notice or a notice. Further, even when the image display is simplified, it may be possible to convey necessary information to the player.

(19) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The image display means can display at least the operation request image (for example, the image of the chance button 136) in the same mode as the mode of the operation means (for example, the button mode in which the chance button 136 is neither vibrating nor rotating) It is characterized by being.
further,
The effect means can at least execute a plurality of effects.
At least one of the plurality of types of display effects is a first effect (for example, "character A" display in a system with effect buttons),
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, "character C" display of a system with effect buttons),
If the second effect is executed rather than the first effect, it is more likely to be connected to the big hit (for example, the reliability of the big hit is higher),
When the effect means executes the second effect, the second condition is more easily established than the first condition.

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, it may be possible to function as a notice as to whether or not the second effect with high reliability of the big hit is performed. As a result, the operation request image itself may be able to function as a notice.
In the first state, the button mode of the operation means may be relatively rough compared to the display mode (for example, the display mode may be vibration or rotation, and the button mode may not be vibration or rotation). In this case, the so-called button mode may be in a state where the so-called broken law becomes hot. That is, the button mode is plain and the display mode is brighter than the case where the button mode is plain and the display mode is plain.
In the first state, the button mode of the operation means may be relatively bright as compared to the display mode (for example, the button mode may be vibration or rotation, and the display mode may not be vibration or rotation). In this case, if the button mode is flashy, so-called breaking of the law may become hot. In other words, the button mode is flashy and the display mode is more sober than the case where the button mode is flashy and the display mode is flashy. Alternatively, in the case where the button mode is flashy and the display mode is flashy, the button mode may be flashy and the display mode may be in a state where the lawlessness is hotter.

(20) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
It further comprises another operation means (for example, direction key 137) different from the operation means (for example, chance button 136),
The other operation means is at least operable by the player,
The presentation means is characterized in that the presentation can be performed even when the other operation means is operated.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, there are cases where it is possible to selectively use the effect button according to the player's preference.

(21) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least a third image (for example, a bar display in which the effective period image indicating the operation effective period is blue) indicating the operable period of the operation means,
The image display means is capable of displaying at least a fourth image (for example, a bar display in which the effective period image indicating the operation effective period is red) showing the operable period of the operation means,
The third image is an image that can be displayed at least according to the first image,
The fourth image is an image that can be displayed at least corresponding to the second image,
The third image and the fourth image are different images.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, there is a case where the valid period image can also be functioned as a notice.

(22) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The image display means can display at least the first image when the operable period of the operation means is the first period,
The image display means can display at least the second image when the operable period of the operation means is the first period.

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the operation means may be capable of performing the same operation as the operation request image, so the player may be notified of the operation of the rendering means. .
Note that either the first condition or the second condition can be satisfied when the operation effective period of the operation means is the same.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.
The pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment is a game console installed on an island facility, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the pachinko machine 100 is an enclosed type game stand, the same effect as the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment can be obtained.

  Moreover, in the example of the said embodiment, although the alerting | reporting performed by three or more places is altogether started by the substantially same timing, the alerting | reporting performed by three or more places may be started at a different timing altogether. In addition, any two broadcasts may be started at substantially the same timing, while the remaining broadcasts may be started at different timings.

  Moreover, in the example of the said embodiment, although the alerting | reporting performed by three or more places all is complete | finished by substantially the same timing, you may complete | finish the alerting | reporting performed by three or more places altogether by different timing. Also, any two reports may end at substantially the same timing, while the remaining reports may end at different timings.

  Moreover, although the Example using the said embodiment demonstrates alerting | reporting using several rendering means, you may make it alert | report in three or more places in one rendering means. In addition, at normal times, notification may be made at predetermined locations with two places, and notification may be made at three or more places only when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the number of notifications may be reduced at a predetermined timing of symbol variation display. The presentation means controlled by at least the main control means may continue the notification when the predetermined opportunity is established. In addition, at least one of the rendering means (for example, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220) may always be notified. Further, any of the plurality of hold notifications controlled by the sub control may be able to execute the advance notice.

  Moreover, the modification in case predetermined | prescribed game information is suspension is demonstrated below. As a combination of notification performed at three or more places when game information is on hold, for example, the special view 1 stop lamp 218 or the special view 2 stop lamp 220 by the main control, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the board lamp 224 It may be a combination of In addition, the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220, combination of two places inside the decoration design indicator 208 or the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220, the decoration design indicator A combination of the liquid crystal display 208 and the sub liquid crystal display device 209 is possible.

  In addition, the advance notice may be given by the on-hold display of the panel lamp 224, various lamps, the decorative symbol display device 208, or the sub liquid crystal display device 209. For example, the lamp may be rendered as a function different from the advance notice in a predetermined period (for example, symbol variation display of special reach determination) or the like. Under normal conditions, the on-hold display function may be provided when a predetermined condition is satisfied while performing effects as a decorative function.

  In addition, it is not necessary for one informing means to correspond to informing one pending number. Three or more points may be displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, the number of alerting | reportings may be reduced at predetermined | prescribed opportunity (for example, special reach start time) during alerting | reporting in three or more places (only alerting | reporting by main control is left and alerting | reporting by sub control is extinguished) may be sufficient.

  In addition, even if at least one notification means (for example, special figure 1 hold lamp 218 by main control) indicates accurate hold number information, other effect means may be used for other effects (for example, advance notice, pseudo hold, etc.) Good.

  Indirect notification is also included in the notification of the present embodiment. For example, in the case where a notice effect or a decorative symbol variation display that appears only in three or more reservations is performed, it is included as one notification of "three or more reservations".

  In addition, a modified example in the case where predetermined game information is continuous big hit (so-called consecutive home) will be described below. In the case of combination of notification performed in three or more places when the game information is continuous information, for example, 7 consecutive display or special background display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the middle of a big hit or in the power support It is possible to use a combination of the panel lamp 224 emitting light in a row or more, and a special music or the like flowing from the speaker 120 above the consecutive house.

  It is not necessary that the notification of the continuous information be completely coincident with all the presentation means. The notification in the 7 consecutive villas and the notification in 7 or more consecutive villas may be the same. In some cases, it may be possible to prevent the notification from being overwhelmed to the player. In addition, as an example of indirect notification, for example, when display of around 10000 is performed with specifications that can obtain about 2000 game balls in one big hit, it is included as a notification of 5 consecutive houses. It is also good.

  In addition, a modification in the case where the predetermined game information is a right-handed instruction will be described below. As a combination of notification performed at three or more places when the game information is a right-handed instruction, for example, the right-handed lamp of the status notification lamp 222 by the main control, the light emission gradation control of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the board surface lamp 224 A combination such as an audio output of a right-handed instruction by the speaker 120 is possible.

  The notification once ended may be re-executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, when the player performs a left strike while the notification display of the right strike lamp of the status notification lamp 222 by the main control and the notice display on the decorative symbol display device 208 by the sub control, to prompt the right strike of the alert. In addition, those which perform the notification sound with the speaker 120 and the notification lighting with the board surface lamp 224 are included.

  Moreover, although the alerting | reporting in three places was mainly shown in the said Example, the alerting | reporting of four or more places may be sufficient.

  The contents of the notification may be configured to perform notification on other game information, including at least notification on predetermined game information as well as notification on only predetermined game information. For example, the game information such as the probability change may be notified by the light emission color of the right-handed notification board lamp 224. In addition, as long as symbol variation display is in progress, notification regarding predetermined game information may be configured to function as advance notice or big hit advance notice. By doing this, there are cases where it is possible to have diversity as well as the function as a mere notification.

  The plurality of effect means may all be controlled by the main control means, or all may be controlled by the sub control means. Further, the configuration may be controlled by a plurality of sub control means. If controlled by the main control means, the certainty of notification is maintained, and if controlled by the sub control means, there is an effect of reducing the burden on the main control means.

  The configuration may be such that at least one notification is performed during a period different from the other. The configuration may be such that at least one notification is executed based on a condition different from the execution condition of the other notification. Moreover, the structure provided with multiple execution conditions of alerting | reporting may be sufficient. By doing this, it may be possible to effectively notify the establishment itself of different conditions such as, for example, right-handed attention.

  The start timing and the end timing of the plurality of notifications may all be the same. Also, only the start time may be the same and the end time may be different, or the start time may be different and the end time may be the same. By doing this, there are cases where it is possible to give diversity to the notification depending on the combination of the start timing and the end timing of the notification.

  The notification of the number of start pending operations by the start pending display can be notified by various combinations. For example, it is possible to give two notices by the decorative symbol display device 208 and further combine the notices by the main control means. In the case where a plurality of suspension displays are performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, there are cases where it is possible to provide diversity in pre-reading notices such as suspension pre-reading. Further, two or more notifications may be performed on the main control means side.

  With regard to the notification of the number of start pendings by the start pending display, there is no need to perform one start pending display for all the start pendings. For example, the lamp device may be configured to perform one display in response to one start reservation, and to directly notify the start reservation number by a number in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. By broadcasting in different patterns, diversity may be increased. Further, there may be a case where it is possible to execute a combination of notifications that can be easily understood by the player by the effect on the game.

  As notification of the predetermined game information, notification regarding the suspension of the common drawing may be used. For example, with regard to the electric chew that can be opened for a relatively long time or the one that has a benefit by winning the effect of the popular drawing, the amusement display of the game may be improved by performing the hold display at three or more places.

  In the above embodiment, the operation effective period in the operation of the plurality of operation means is common. In some cases, it may be possible to inform the player that the continuous operation of the operation means is necessary. There are cases where it is possible to reduce the risk of disabling the operation of the operating means multiple times.

  In addition, the operation of the operation means may be settable during at least one symbol variation display. If the configuration is performed by a plurality of times of symbol variation display, for example, the player may be able to expect a player across multiple variations by performing an operation related to the operation means in association with the preview notice.

  A plurality of modes of the operation means are provided, and the operation mode and the operation request image are associated with each other, and the display mode (only) different from the others may be such that the operation request image different from the association is displayed. . In some cases, it is possible to emphasize the function as a notice.

  A plurality of modes of the operation means may be provided, and the operation mode and the operation request image may be associated with each other. Then, one operation request image may be deleted by performing the operation of the operation means one or more times. Further, the operation mode of the operation means may be changed in accordance with the display mode of the operation request image corresponding to the next operation, and may be changed when it is different from the previous operation mode. By doing this, the operation request image may be able to function as a change notice of the operation mode.

  The operation valid periods in the plurality of operation means may not be common, and may be configured to be individually set. By doing this, there is a case where it is possible to prevent the player from being flooded by setting the effective period individually while urging the player to operate the operation means a plurality of times. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to equally assign the operation of the operation means a plurality of times to the effect time (mainly, the operation effective period) of the symbol variation display. Therefore, in some cases, the player's dissatisfaction can be alleviated due to excessive operation validity period.

  The above embodiment is also applicable to a game console having a plurality of operation means. At least one of the plurality of operation means may have the contents of the above embodiment. Further, the operation request image and the effective period display image corresponding to the plurality of operation means may be displayed at the same time.

  Moreover, the operation valid period may be configured to be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. By doing this, it may function as a prefetch notice.

  In the above embodiment, one valid period display image is erased by one operation of the operation means, but one valid period displayed image is erased by performing a predetermined number of operations twice or more. The configuration may be different. Further, the display of all valid period display images may be continued until the required number of operations for operating the operating means is performed. By doing this, for example, it may be possible to emphasize that the plurality of valid period displays prompt the operation by leaving all the valid period displays even when the remaining valid period is reduced.

  In addition, the correspondence between the operation mode of the operation means and the relationship of the operation request image may be partially different. By doing this, it may be possible to cause the so-called “breaking of the law (correspondence (law))” to break down, which can function as a notice of a big hit decision or a notice that enhances the expectation of the big hit.

  Further, the condition as to whether or not the operation of the operation means is valid can be arbitrarily set. It may be configured to become effective (effects to operations are executed) by performing lottery by winning once or a plurality of operations, which becomes effective in one or a plurality of operations. By doing this, the number of operations may be able to be adjusted in accordance with the presentation time and the like.

  Further, in the case of having a plurality of operation means, even if the operation request image is common (even if it is an image display prompting the operation of any operation means), the operation of other operation means is validated. It may be. By doing this, there may be a case where the amount of data can be reduced by sharing the operation request image.

  Also, the operation of the other operation means may be valid or invalid. In some cases, the same effect as the above-mentioned "break in the law" can be achieved.

  In the above embodiment, the operation means may be attached to the frame side of the pachinko machine 100. For example, in the process of developing a game console, it may be assumed that the design of the rendering means itself is changed due to the design change of the frame. Then, even when the image display and the effect means are different, the purpose of the important notification (such as pushing the effect button or hitting the right) may be maintained to the player.

  In the above embodiment, the effect button is set to the operation effective period, and the image display means executes at least the display effect after the end of the effective period when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. It may be possible. By doing this, the display effect may be performed even when the button is not operated.

  In the above embodiment, the effect button is set to the operation effective period, and the image display means does not execute the display effect when the operation means is not operated during the operation effective period. It is also good.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the reference is set to the second display effect, so when the second display effect is performed, the second operation request image is easily output. Further, the operation request image related to the effect button may be displayable during at least a part of the operation valid period of the effect button.

  In the above embodiment, as an example of the case where the operation request image is displayed in a mode different from the mode of the operation means during display of the operation request image, the color of the effect button or the logo combination, the operation request image is the first. There is an indication indicating the position, the effect button and the logo feature are in the second position, and so on.

  Further, the rendering means is at least operable in the first aspect and the second aspect in which a new aspect is added to the first aspect, and the image display means is configured to When the display corresponding to the aspect of is performed, the rendering means may be at least operable in the second aspect. By doing this, when the effect means (operation means) is brighter, it may be possible to notice when the player operates the operation means.

  Alternatively, the rendering means is at least operable in the first aspect and the second aspect in which a new aspect is added to the first aspect, and the image display means is configured to When the display corresponding to the second aspect is performed, the rendering means may be at least operable in the first aspect. By doing this, when the operation request image is brighter, the player can look at the operation request image first to increase the expectation and operate the operation means to give a sense of incongruity. There are cases where it can be enhanced.

  The operation request image may have not only an aspect different from the aspect of the rendering means but also a pattern of the same aspect. By doing this, it may be possible to function as a notification or a notice by properly using the same aspect and a different aspect. For example, there are cases where it can be used for a notice that the symbol variation display will be a big hit, a pre-reading notice, a notification of the number of reservations, and a notice of consecutive units, etc.

  The operation request image may be performed only in a mode different from the mode of the rendering means in one trigger (for example, a button effect performed during symbol variation display), or may be performed only in the same mode. By doing this, the player may easily recognize the trigger by associating the operation request image with each trigger.

  About the operation request image, the operation request in at least a different mode in any of a plurality of triggers corresponding to one effect means (for example, a button effect performed before reach during symbol fluctuation display and a button effect performed after reach) It may be any configuration that can display an image.

  The operation means that can be operated by the player include not only the effect button and the operation button used in the service in which the game console and the mobile site are linked, but also the ball firing handle 134. As an example, there is a case where an image display is performed to notify of a right-handed hit at the time of a big hit start or a power support start. At this time, a content such as displaying on the image display means a display obtained by twisting the ball emission handle 134 to the right is also included in the present embodiment. At this time, as an example of an aspect different from the aspect of the rendering means, there is an image display in which the display of the ball emission handle 134 itself is deformed. In this case, even if there is a change in the design of the ball emission handle 134, it may be possible to reliably perform the most important notification on the game feature of right-handed notification.

  As an example of the effect means, it may be winning means provided on the game board, such as an attacker. By doing this, there are cases where it is possible to cope with design changes.

  In the above embodiment, when two effect buttons are used, the two effect buttons do not have to be effective for all the operations of the effect buttons, and both effect buttons are effective only at the time of predetermined effects. Good. Further, the player may or may not be notified as to whether or not the operation of the second effect button is effective when the first effect button is displayed as the operation request image. . By doing this, the number of effect buttons that are activated may be able to function as a notice. And, as an effect when not notifying the player whether or not the second effect button is effective, the player can have an expectation when the display effect is performed by operating the second effect button. The player can be made to select whether or not to operate the second effect button.

  The correspondence between the operation request image and the valid period image is that the first valid period image corresponds to the first operation request image, and the second valid period image corresponds to the second operation request image. It does not have to be. For example, by changing a part of the combinations, the player may feel discomfort and may function as a notice.

  In addition, the operation request image or the validity period image (and the combination thereof) may be changed according to conditions such as the gaming state. By doing this, it may be possible to increase the variation of the effect.

  Further, with regard to the button operation of the chance button 136 in each example of the above embodiment, even when the player does not operate the button during the effective period of the button operation, it is equivalent to the case where the button operation is performed. The presentation may be configured to be executable. Hereinafter, this is referred to as an auto button and will be described in detail below.

  First, the setting method of the auto button may be configured to be arbitrarily set by the player, or may be set according to the gaming state or the like. As an example which can be arbitrarily set by the player, it is possible for all players to set by operation of other operation means such as the chance button 136 or the direction key 137 or other cross keys during demonstration effect etc. The game is set under predetermined conditions, such as an original mode in which customization of the game stand and game history can be accumulated for each player, on condition that the player inputs unique information such as a password, etc. Possible configurations are mentioned. The configuration that is set according to the gaming state is, for example, the presence or absence of the power support state, the same gaming state, and an automatic button when the same gaming state and rendering mode continue for a predetermined period or a predetermined number of times. In some cases, it is possible to reduce the complexity of the operation for continuous operation.

  The notification that the button is an auto button may be always notified by the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub liquid crystal display device 209, etc., or may be notified only when the auto button is set. Further, even when the setting of the auto button is released, the notification may be made or the notification may not be made at all.

  Further, with regard to the display in the auto button, the image of the button and the effective period may be displayed in the same manner as in the non-auto button, or a part of the images may not be displayed. Not displaying a part of the image may in some cases be a notification that the above-mentioned auto button is in progress. In addition, as an example of a configuration in which a part of the image is not displayed, if only the button display is displayed and the effective period display is not performed, the notification that there is a button effect originally is not extremely annoying display effect. There is a case. In addition, the display may not be performed at all.

  The operation timing of the auto button may be any timing during the effective period. For example, if it is the beginning of the effective period, it is possible to perform presentation accompanying the button operation without giving the player the fear that presentation of the auto button may not be performed. If it is in the middle of the effective period, there is a possibility that balance can be taken without extension between before and after the effect accompanying the button operation. At the end of the term of validity, it may lead to an improvement in interest by teasing the player. However, in the case where the effect accompanying the button operation appears at the end of the effective period, there is a risk that the visual effect may be the same as the case where the effect is forcibly output at the expiration of the non-auto button. In this case, for example, when the auto button is used, an application according to the reliability is applied, and in the case of the non-auto button valid period expired, the lowest reliability operation is forcibly caused to appear regardless of the status. It is also possible to put out.

  As an example of the game for the auto button, when the auto button is set as described above, all button effects may be set to automatic, or some button effects may be set to automatic. As an example of the partial auto, for example, the advance notice before reaching may be automatic, the non-automatic after reaching may be performed, or the non-automatic (desired to be operated by the player) may be performed only during intense heat production. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to give diversity to effects by combining auto and non-auto. For example, there is a case where the effect of changing the holding icon may be set to a valid period over a plurality of symbol variation displays in response to a button effect in the pre-reading hold notice and the button operation. During this time, when the button effect is produced in the symbol variation display, the button effect may be duplicated, and the player may be confused. Therefore, there are cases where it is possible to give variety to the rendering while solving the problem by making one of the button renderings automatic. In addition, it is also possible to make individual settings for each device, such as making only the button effect of the sub liquid crystal automatic.

  With regard to the auto of the button effect requiring a plurality of button operations, a predetermined number of times determined for each effect, a number of times installed according to the number of operations of the player at the non-auto button, etc. are assumed. Generally, the effective period of the effect that requires multiple button operations is slightly longer. Therefore, there is a limit (the parameter does not advance any more) when the parameter display or the like accompanying the button effect is determined according to the acceptance determination. In such a case, if the number of times of auto is increased, there is a risk that the parameter display does not progress even though the effective period remains, and the player is discouraged. Therefore, it may be preferable to perform a predetermined number of automatic operations in consideration of the effective period. In addition, only a part of multiple operations may be performed, such as only part of the operation. In some cases, it may be possible to use an auto button function as a configuration for prompting a button operation.

  Also, when the auto button is set, a command may be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the control system of the decorative symbol display device 208, and after that, the display control on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be taken care of. The command may be sent at the same timing as the non-auto button.

  In addition, when an accidental condition is established, an auto button may be used. For example, when there is an error such as a bottom hit during a big hit, both hands may be used by the discharge operation of the game ball and the launch of the game ball. In such a case, the configuration may be such that an automatic button is automatically provided. Further, even during the auto button, if the player operates the button before the (automatic) button operation, effects may be provided. The auto button may be released (non-auto) when the player operates the button during the auto button.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game console, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.
The gaming machine according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 44 and corresponds to “a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel Provided to stop the rotation of the reel individually, and based on the lottery result of the lottery means (lottery lottery internal lottery) to determine the success or failure of the internal winning of multiple types of winning combination by lottery Reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination Determination means for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination (prize determination processing), and when the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined prize mode, it corresponds to the predetermined prize mode Game medium is dispensed, and in addition to the payout control means (the medal payout process 1008) for performing the game medium payout process, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launcher 1014 for launching a ball into the game area 1012 of the game, a winning opening 1016 configured to be capable of entering a ball launched from the launching device, and a detection means 1018 for detecting a sphere entering the winning opening 1016; Dispensing means 1020 for dispensing a ball when detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And the movable body 1026 operating in the predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is designed with the game ball entering the winning opening for winning. And the stopped displayed After moving, are also suitable for the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention shown in FIG. 45 (a) inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes a lottery based on the bet 2004 and the start 2006 operation, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008 At the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cash out 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 2010 " It may be

  Furthermore, as shown in (b) of the figure, a portable telephone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in (c) of the figure, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing a home video game console 5000 and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile telephone line, and data related to the acquired game (this And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data on a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data on the acquired game (this invention) And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in (d) of the figure shows an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data related to the acquired game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown to the figure (e), you may apply to the data server 6000 which stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. There are cases where electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program which executes the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine in a pseudo manner for a home-use game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disc), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, the present invention has exemplified pachinko machines and slot machines as gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, baseball game machines, smart balls and the like.

  The above embodiments can be combined with each other.

The gaming machine of the above embodiment is expressed, for example, as follows.
(Appendix A1)
A game console provided with notification means capable of at least notifying of game information related to a game,
The notification means is capable of at least executing notification of the game information at three or more places with respect to the same type of the game information.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note A1,
Equipped with a plurality of effect means capable of at least effect effects relating to a game,
The notification means can execute notification of the same type of game information at the three or more locations using the plurality of effect means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A3)
It is a game console described in Appendix A2,
Main control means capable of at least control over the progress of the game;
And sub control means capable of at least executing control relating to a game presentation,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is controlled by the main control means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A4)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note A2 or A3, wherein
The notification means is capable of executing at least two of the notifications of the same type of game information performed at the three or more locations, including at least the same period.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A5)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A2 to A4,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is an image display means,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A5, wherein
It has symbol display means capable of at least performing symbol variation display,
The gaming machine according to the present invention, wherein the same type of game information is information on the number of holding times regarding execution of the symbol variation display.
(Appendix A7)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A6,
At least one notification of the notification of the number of holding times can also be notified as a prefetch notice.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A2 to A7, wherein
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a first effect means,
At least one of the plurality of effect means is a second effect means,
The notification means can at least execute the error notification using the first effect means when an error occurs.
The notification means is capable of continuing the notification of the same type of game information using the second effect means even when the error occurs.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A9)
A game console provided with a plurality of notification means capable of at least notifying of game information,
At least one informing means of the plurality of informing means is a first informing means,
At least one informing means of the plurality of informing means is a second informing means,
At least one of the plurality of informing means is a third informing means,
The gaming information is information including at least information on gaming,
The first informing means is capable of at least executing informing for the first game information in a first period,
The second notification means is capable of at least executing a notification regarding the first game information in a second period,
The third notification means is capable of at least executing a notification on the first game information in a third period,
The first period and the second period are at least partially overlapping periods,
The first period and the third period are at least partially overlapping periods,
The second period and the third period are at least partially overlapping periods,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A10)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
An image display means capable of at least displaying an image;
At least the effect means that can perform effects,
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
The image display means can display at least a first image,
The image display means can display a plurality of the first images,
The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of the operation valid period of the operation means,
The effect means can at least execute the effect according to the number of times the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A11)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A10,
The image display means can display at least a second image,
The second image is an image including at least an image indicating an operation valid period of the operation means,
The image display means is capable of at least displaying one or more of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A12)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note A11,
The image display means can display one of the second images with respect to one of the first images.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A13)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note A11,
The operation valid period is a period that can be set at least as a common valid period for a plurality of operations of the operation means,
The image display means can display one of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A14)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A10 to A13, wherein
The image display means can display one of the first images in response to a single operation request of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A10 to A14, wherein
The image display means is capable of erasing the first image in response to one operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A10 to A15, wherein
The image display means can display at least one of the plurality of first images in a display manner different from the display manner of the other first images.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A17)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A16,
The first image displayed in the different display mode is an image corresponding to the last operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A18)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
An image display means capable of at least displaying an image;
Rendering means capable of at least performing rendering in response to the operating means being operated;
A game console equipped with
The operating means is at least capable of taking a first state,
The operating means is at least capable of taking a second state,
The first state and the second state are states in which at least a part of the operation means is different,
The image display means can display at least a first image,
The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of a period in which the operation means can operate.
The first image is an image including at least an image capable of suggesting that the operation means is in the first state,
The image display means can display at least a second image,
The second image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of a period in which the operation means can operate.
The second image is an image including at least an image capable of suggesting that the operation means is in the second state,
The image display means can display at least the first image when the first condition is satisfied in the first state of the operation means,
The image display means can display at least the second image when a second condition is satisfied in the first state of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A19)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A18,
The effect means can at least execute a plurality of effects.
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
If the second effect is executed rather than the first effect, it is easier to connect to the jackpot,
When the effect means executes the second effect, the second condition is more easily established than the first condition,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A20)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A18 or A19,
It further comprises an operating means different from the operating means,
The other operation means is at least operable by the player,
The effect means can execute the effect even when the other operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A21)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A18 to A20, wherein
The image display means can display at least a third image indicating a period in which the operation means can be operated;
The image display means can display at least a fourth image indicating a period in which the operation means can be operated;
The third image is an image that can be displayed at least according to the first image,
The fourth image is an image that can be displayed at least corresponding to the second image,
The third image and the fourth image are different images,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A22)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A18 to A21, wherein
The image display means can display at least the first image when the operable period of the operation means is the first period,
The image display means can display at least the second image when the operable period of the operation means is the first period.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A23)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
An image display means capable of at least displaying an image;
At least the effect means that can perform effects,
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
The image display means can display at least a first image,
The image display means can display a plurality of the first images,
The first image is an image that can be displayed during at least a part of the operation valid period of the operation means,
The effect means can at least execute the effect according to the number of times the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A24)
The game console described in Appendix A23,
The image display means can display at least a second image,
The second image is an image including at least an image indicating an operation valid period of the operation means,
The image display means is capable of at least displaying one or more of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A25)
It is a game console described in Appendix A24,
The image display means can display one of the second images with respect to one of the first images.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A26)
It is a game console described in Appendix A24,
The operation valid period is a period that can be set at least as a common valid period for a plurality of operations of the operation means,
The image display means can display one of the second images when a plurality of the first images are displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A27)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A23 to A26,
The image display means can display one of the first images in response to a single operation request of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A28)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A23 to A27,
The image display means is capable of erasing the first image in response to one operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A29)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A23 to A28,
The image display means can display at least one of the plurality of first images in a display manner different from the display manner of the other first images.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A30)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A29,
The first image displayed in the different display mode is an image corresponding to the last operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A31)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Image display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of images;
Rendering means capable of at least carrying out the first rendering;
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The first image at least includes an image suggesting the operation means,
The second image includes at least an image indicating a period during which the operation of the operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as “third period”),
The first image can at least start to be displayed in a first period,
The second image can at least start display in a second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The image display means can display at least the first image as the first number,
The first number is two or more,
The first effect is at least executable when the number of operations of the operation means in the third period reaches the first number.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A32)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A31,
The image display means can display at least a second number of the second image,
The second number is the same number as the first number,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A33)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note A31 or A32,
The image display means is capable of erasing one of the first images in response to one operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A34)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A31 to A33, wherein
The rendering means is at least capable of performing a second rendering,
The second effect is an effect that can be performed for each operation of the operation means,
The first number is three,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A35)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A31 to A34, wherein
Equipped with a means of notice that can carry out notices,
The first image can be displayed at least in a plurality of modes,
At least one of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
At least one of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect,
The second aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
The notice means is capable of executing the notice by displaying the first image according to the second aspect on the image display means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A36)
The gaming machine described in Appendix A35,
The first image according to the second aspect is an image corresponding to the last operation of the operations of the operation means to be the first number,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A37)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A35 or A36, wherein
The operating means is at least capable of being in a plurality of states,
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state,
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state,
The first aspect is an aspect that can at least suggest that the operation means is in the first state,
The second aspect is an aspect capable of at least suggesting that the operation means is in the second state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A38)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Image display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of images;
At least the effect means that can perform effects,
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The first image at least includes an image suggesting the operation means,
The second image at least includes an image suggesting a period during which the operation by the operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as “third period”),
The first image can at least start to be displayed in a first period,
The second image can at least start display in a second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The image display means can display at least the first image as the first number,
The first number is two or more,
The image display means can display at least a second number of the second image,
The second number is one,
The effect is at least executable when the number of operations of the operation means in the third period reaches the first number.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A 39)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Image display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of images;
An effect means capable of at least a plurality of effects.
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
At least one of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The first image is an image including at least an image suggesting the operation means,
The second image is an image including at least an image suggesting a period during which acceptance of the operation of the operation means is valid (hereinafter, referred to as “third period”),
The first image is an image that can at least start display in a first period,
The second image is an image that can at least start display in a second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first image to be the first number,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is at least an effect that can be performed when the number of times of reception of the operation of the operation means in the third period reaches the first number,
The second effect is an effect to be executed each time the operation of the operation means is received,
The first number is three,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A40)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note A39,
The image display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second image as a second number,
The second number is three,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A41)
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A39 or A40,
The image display means is means capable of erasing one of the first images in response to acceptance of one operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A42)
The game console according to any one of appendices A39 to A41, wherein
The image display means can start displaying at least one of the first images in a fourth period,
The fourth period is a period different from the third period as a period in which acceptance of the operation of the operation means is effective.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A43)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A39 to A42,
The first image is a button image,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A44)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices A39 to A43,
The second image is a gauge image,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix A45)
The game console according to any one of appendices A39 to A44, wherein
The effect means is means including at least the image display means.
A game stand characterized by

Second Embodiment
Next, the game effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration shown in each of FIGS. 46 to 70 (excluding FIGS. 65 and 66) will be described.

  In each figure, as shown in FIG. 46 (a), a decorative symbol display device 208 which constitutes a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 3, a special figure 1 display 212 and a special figure 2 display A device 214, a special view 1 holding lamp 218 and a special view 2 holding lamp 220 are schematically shown. The special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the special view 1 hold lamp 218, and the special view 2 hold lamp 220 are shown below the decorative symbol display unit 208, and the special view 2 display 214 is special view 1 The special view 1 retention lamp 218 is shown on the right side of the display 212, the special view 1 display 212 is shown on the upper side, and the special view 2 reserve lamp 220 is shown on the upper side of the special view 2 display 214. Also, the off portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218, and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lit part is shown in black. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 is displayed in white in this embodiment, but in fact, the special figure change is in progress by repeating the blinking of the segments in a predetermined order. It can be recognized.

  In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display area is provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left side in the fourth symbol display area is a fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1 and the right side is a fourth symbol display area t2 for special figure 2. When the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a release, an image representing "x" is displayed as a fourth symbol, and in the case of a hit, an image representing "A" is displayed. In addition, during execution of the special figure fluctuation game, the picture which displays “-” as a 4th design is displayed.

  A special view 1 reserved icon display area is provided on the lower left side in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the special figure 1 pending icon display area, a number of special figure 1 pending icons corresponding to the number of pendings are displayed. In addition, whether the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game related to the hold is notified or not can be notified (predictive notice) with a predetermined reliability by the display mode of the special figure 1 reserve icon. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four special drawing 1 holding icons can be displayed in the special drawing 1 holding icon display area. The plurality of special view 1 hold icons are displayed in order from left to right in the special view 1 hold icon display area as the hold order becomes lower. In this example, only the special view 1 suspension icon display area is displayed, but the special view 2 suspension icon display area may be displayed together as a matter of course.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 46B, the state in which all the segments are shown in white on the special view 1 display device 212 indicates that the special view 1 variation display is being performed. The same applies to the special view 2 display device 214.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), the variation display of each decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c during the special figure variation game is represented by a downward arrow.

  In addition, the special figure fluctuation game shown by each example of this embodiment is executed by the same control operation as what was explained in the first embodiment. In the example of the present embodiment, the effects to be performed in the special figure change game are specifically described, and the control operation is also referred to only when the necessity arises.

(Example 2-1)
First, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47. Fig.46 (a)-FIG.47 (e) have shown the special figure change game in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example by a time series in this order. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 46 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is ended. The special figure I display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 both stop and display the first special symbol "special figure I". An “x” image is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special drawing 1 indicating that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t2 for special drawing 2 An "x" image is displayed indicating that the result of the game is out. "Decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 6" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure fluctuation game is lost.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 46 (b) to (g) show the start and end of the special figure 1 variation game. FIG. 46 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. A special figure variation display is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that a special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. For example, at the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, the variation display is first started in the left symbol display area 208a, then the variation display is started in the middle symbol display area 208b, and then the variation display is started in the right symbol display area 208c . Of course, the variable display may be simultaneously started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  (C) to (f) of FIG. 46 show a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. Fig. 46 (d) shows that the symbols are changing in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. FIG. 46 (e) shows that the symbols are changing in the middle right symbol display area 208b, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. 46F, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Shows the condition. The decorative symbol at the temporary stop is not in a stationary state, but is in a swinging fluctuation state in which it slightly vibrates in the vertical direction, for example.

  FIG. 46 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first special symbol "special figure I" in a stop state. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "x" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is off . The special figure 1 fluctuation game shown in Drawing 46 (a)-(g) is a basic pattern of a usual fluctuation state. In the following description, the description of the detailed operation order is omitted for the special figure fluctuation game of the normal fluctuation state.

  FIG. 46 (h) shows a state in which the next special view 1 change game is started and the special view 1 change game is being executed. The special view variation display is being executed in the special view 1 display device 212, and it is informed that the special view 1 variation game is being executed in the fourth special symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

  Further, with the start of the special figure 1 change game, the reserve is digested, and all LEDs of the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned off, and it is informed that the special figure 1 is not reserve. The special figure 1 reserve icon is not displayed in the special figure 1 reserve icon display area.

  FIG. 46 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a during execution of the special view 1 change game.

  In FIG. 46 (j), while "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c during execution of the special figure 1 change game, the characters "reach" are displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and reach effect is displayed. It shows the started condition.

  FIG. 46 (k) to FIG. 47 (c) show a state in which the button effect of this embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In the button effect of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for the button effect prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects for prompting the player to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, the case where the button effect is performed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 46 (k) shows a state in which the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in a row substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d. In the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, the text "3 sets of SP reach development!" Is displayed, and in the upper part, the text "Ready" is displayed. In the following description, "the state in which the button effect is started" indicates that the reception of the button operation is not activated yet, and the "state in which the button effect is started" is a button It indicates that the reception of the operation has become effective. Further, "during the execution of the button effect" indicates that the reception of the button operation is in a valid state.

  FIG. 46 (l) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “button images”) in a display form imitating the chance button 136 are arranged in a row in almost the center of the effect display area 208 d. Is displayed. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed at the top. Below the three button images, one common effective period image is displayed for the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero.

  FIG. 46 (m) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 while the button effect is being executed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 46 (n) shows a state in which a button image deletion animation (hereinafter, sometimes abbreviated as “button deletion animation”) is being performed during execution of a button effect. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 46 (o) shows that the button effect is being performed and the effect to be executed next to the button erasing animation (the effect may be referred to as a "second effect" with respect to the "first effect" described later) Is shown. As a second effect, an image of the panda (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “panda image”) is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the central button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 46 (p) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is displayed in a reduced size and the reduced size display of the panda image makes it possible to visually recognize all the central button image and the valid period image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 46 (q) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 a second time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 46 (r) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the central button image is erased by the button erasure animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 47 (a) shows a state in which the second effect is performed after the button deletion animation following FIG. 46 (r). As a second effect, a character image of the "bad merchant Echigoya" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "Echigoya image") is displayed at the position where the central button image was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 47 (b) shows the execution state of the second effect in the button effect. Since an Echigoya image different from the panda image corresponding to the button image on the left side is displayed at the position of the button image in the center, it is displayed in the explanation display of the button effect regardless of the presence or absence of the third depression of the chance button 136 by the player. The condition of "three sets and SP reach development!" Is not satisfied. Therefore, the second effect is executed in which the button image on the right side is erased and the Echigoya image is displayed instead without waiting for the player to press the chance button 136 even if the operation valid period remains.

  FIG. 47C shows a first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In this example, as a first effect, the Echigoya image is largely displayed on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and the character string "Sorry!" Is displayed on the center right side. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect has not been developed into the SP (super) reach. As described above, the first effect may be performed with the number of pressings (two in this example) less than the number of displayed button images (three in this example). In the first effect, the button image, the valid period image, and the image displayed in the second effect are not displayed. The effect mode of the first effect is determined by the combination (matching method) of the panda image and the Echigoya image displayed in place of the button image in the second effect.

  "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b of the left middle symbol display areas 208a to 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display In the areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed temporarily.

  FIG. 47 (b ′) shows a modified example of the execution state of the second effect in the button effect. In FIG. 47 (b '), the Echigoya image of a pattern different from the panda image for the button image on the left side is displayed at the position of the button image in the center, and the condition where three images are aligned is not satisfied This shows a state where the operation valid period has been lost without the third pressing of the chance button 136 by the player being performed. In this case, the second effect on the button image on the right side is not performed.

  FIG. 47 (c ′) continuing from FIG. 47 (b ′) shows a state in which the first effect is not executed after the end of the second effect, and instead the ineffective period notification animation is being executed. As described above, in the case where the operation effective period is lost in the state where the pressing of the chance button 136 is less than the predetermined number of times, the first effect or the second effect may not be performed. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b of the left middle symbol display areas 208a to 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display In the areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed temporarily.

  47 (c) or FIG. 47 (d) continuing from FIG. 47 (c '), the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is enlarged from the reduction display to the central part of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 It shows the state normally displayed. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 47 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first special symbol "special figure I" in a stop state. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "x" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is off .

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above includes a chance button 136 as an operation means provided at a position where the player can operate, and a presentation display area 208 d as a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. And a decorative symbol display device 208 as effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. One of the plurality of types of displays is a display of a button image as a first display, and the display of the button image is a display including a display that suggests the chance button 136. One of the plurality of types of display is the display of the effective period image as the second display, and the effective period image is an operation effective period as a third period in which acceptance of pressing of the chance button 136 is effective. Is displayed. The display of the button image is a display that can be started in the first period, and the first period is a period including a part of the operation valid period. The display of the valid period image is a display that can start in a second period, and the second period is a period including a part of the operation valid period. The decorative symbol display device 208 can display, for example, three button images as the first number (two or more). One of a plurality of types of effects is an effect to be executed after the button deletion animation as the second effect, for example, an effect that causes a predetermined image to appear at the position at which the deleted button image was displayed It is. In addition, one of a plurality of types of effects is an effect of notifying a result of button operation performed after the second effect as the first effect. The first effect can be executed when the number of times the chance button 136 is operated in the operation effective period is, for example, twice as the second number (two or more). In addition, the second effect is an effect that may be executed while hiding a part of the three button images.

  The second effect is an effect to be executed each time the operation of the chance button 136 is received. Since the second effect is an effect performed for each button operation, the first effect may be expected by performing the second effect before the first effect is performed.

  Further, the second effect is an effect to be executed for each operation of the chance button 136, but the display of the button image and the display of the gauge image are hidden in all of the second effects performed for each operation. Alternatively, the display of the button image or the gauge image may be hidden only by the second effect which is performed by a part of the operation and started.

(Example 2-2)
Next, the special figure change game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of this embodiment is explained using FIG. In the present embodiment, the effects up to the button effect are the same as those up to FIG. 46 (j) of Example 2-1, so the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 48 (a) continues from FIG. 46 (j). 48 (a)-FIG. 48 (p) have shown the state in which the button effect of this embodiment was performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In the button effect of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for the button effect prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects for prompting the player to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, the case where the button effect is performed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 48A shows a state in which button effect is started during reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in a row substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d. In the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, the text "3 sets of SP reach development!" Is displayed, and in the upper part, the text "Ready" is displayed.

  FIG. 48 (b) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed at the top. Below the three button images, one common effective period image is displayed for the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the right. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero.

  FIG. 48C shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 while the button effect is being performed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 48D shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 48E shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the central button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 48F shows the state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is displayed in a reduced size and the reduced size display of the panda image makes it possible to visually recognize all the central button image and the valid period image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 48G shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 a second time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 48H shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the central button image is erased by the button erasure animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 48 (i) shows a state in which the second effect is performed after the button deletion animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the center button image was displayed. The panda image is displayed with a size that hides a part of the panda image adjacent to the left and a part of the valid period image. In this way, the second effect may hide another second effect. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported. As described above, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the gauge of the effective period image decreases and the direction in which the button images are erased are the same.

  FIG. 48 (j) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the central panda image is reduced and displayed, and the panda image on the left side and the effective period image are all visible by reduced display of the panda image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  In (k) of FIG. 48, the display mode of the button image on the right side in the effect display area 208d changes from “normal” to “vibration + rotation” to give notice of the result of the change. As described above, the display mode of the button image may change in the middle of the operation valid period. In addition, the button mode may be changed according to the change in the display mode of the button image.

  FIG. 48 (l) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 48 (m) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the third chance button 136 is pressed, the button image on the right side is erased by the button erasing animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Also, for the gauge display, an effective period image erasing animation is performed. The gauge display is a display that can be erased when the pressing of the chance button 136 by the player reaches a predetermined number of times, even if the operation valid period remains. In the effective period image erasing animation, an empty frame image without a gauge portion indicating that the remaining period of the gauge display is 0 is displayed as the third display. After the empty frame image is displayed for a predetermined time, the gauge display is erased. By performing an animation display of 0 with the display of the length of the gauge, it may be possible to easily notify that the button operation corresponding to the gauge display to be deleted or the button display has been accepted.

  Further, in the button deletion animation shown in FIG. 48 (m), since the button image having the display mode of "vibration + rotation" is displayed, the button display animation of which the display mode is "normal" is displayed as the button deletion animation The effect image is displayed that is larger than the effect image. As described above, in the button rendition of the present embodiment, button images can be displayed in a plurality of animation modes, and a button image having a display mode of “vibration + rotation” is used as the first animation mode, or the first animation As a second animation mode different from the mode, a button image whose display mode is "normal" can be used. By doing this, it may be possible to cause the button display and the animation display of the button deletion to function as a notice depending on the difference in the animation mode of the button display.

  FIG. 48 (n) shows a state in which the second effect is performed after the button deletion animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the button image on the right side was displayed. The panda image is displayed so as to hide a part of the central panda image. In this way, the second effect may hide another second effect. If the button image is erased by the last button operation and there is no button image in the display area, the effect of hiding the button image is not performed. Since the operation effective period has passed, the effective period image is not displayed.

  FIG. 48 (o) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being performed. In the second effect, the panda image on the right side is reduced and displayed, and it is informed that three panda images of the same size are aligned in a single horizontal row and the condition of “3 sets of SP reach development!” Is satisfied. It is done.

  FIG. 48 (p) shows the first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In this example, as the first effect, the same panda image as the character A shown in FIG. 20A is displayed large on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and the character “SP development” is displayed on the center right side. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach.

  FIG.48 (q)-FIG.49 (e) have shown SP reach presentation. FIG. 48 (q) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . At the top of the effect display area 208d, a character string of "punitive reach" is displayed. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image in which two warriors face each other is displayed. FIG. 49 (a) following FIG. 48 (q) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. In this button effect, there is one button image, and the display of the effective period image is not performed. Deca-button display is provided with a function as a notice to make a player expect by being different from a normal button display. Therefore, there is a case where it is possible to prompt the player to perform the button operation by making the effect not to display the effective period. Further, it can be said that the deca-button display itself is an effect that urges the player to perform the button operation more strongly. In FIG. 49 (b), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach effect proceeds to the next scene, and an image in which the warrior shouts "Just!" Is displayed. FIG. 49 (c) shows that the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed at the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who won the right and the figure of the warrior who lost it are displayed on the left. At the top of the screen, the word "win" is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right design display area 208a to 208c is enlarged from the reduction display to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative design display device 208 and displayed normally. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 49 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure "special figure A" of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "A" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit .

(Example 2-3)
Next, special figure fluctuation game in pachinko machine 100 by example 3 of this embodiment is explained using FIG. In the present embodiment, the effects up to the button effect are the same as those up to FIG.

  FIG. 50 (a) continues from FIG. 46 (k). FIG. 50 (a) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed at the top. Below the three button images, one common effective period image is displayed for the three button images. The valid period image of this example is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero.

  FIG. 50 (b) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 while executing the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 50C shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 a second time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 50 (d) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the second pressing of the chance button 136 is accepted, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 50E shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the central button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  In the button effects shown in FIGS. 50A to 50E, one button image is erased by a plurality of (two in this example) button operations, and a second effect is started. By thus changing the number of button operations to execute the button image erase animation or executing the button image erase animation for each button operation, the player can enjoy the button effect more There are times when you can.

  FIG. 50 (a ') continues from FIG. 46 (k). FIG. 50 (a ') shows the start of the button effect similar to that of FIG. 50 (a), and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 50 (b ′) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure.

  FIG. 50 (c ′) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left as well as the button image in the center are also erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erase animation, the effect image is displayed at each display position in place of the left and center button images.

  FIG. 50 (d ') shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the left button image was displayed and the position where the center button image was displayed.

  In the button effects shown in (a ′) to (d ′) in FIG. 50, a plurality of (two in this example) button images are erased by one button operation, and respective second effects are started. As described above, by changing the number of button images to be deleted in one button operation to execute the button image deletion animation, it may be possible for the player to enjoy the button effect more.

  FIG. 50 (a ′ ′) continues from FIG. 46 (k). FIG. 50 (a ′ ′) is an image of a display mode in which the button image on the left simulates the light emission state of the chance button 136 with respect to the button effect shown in FIG. 50 (a) and FIG. 50 (a ′) It has a feature in Since the other points are the same, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 50 (b ′ ′) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The button image on the left side is displayed so as to stand out with higher brightness than the other button images. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure.

  FIG. 50 (c ′ ′) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side imitating the light emitting state of the button is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erase animation, the effect image is displayed at each display position in place of the left and center button images.

  FIG. 50 (d ′ ′) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed.

  In the button effects shown in FIGS. 50 (a ′ ′) to (d ′ ′), as an example in which the display modes of the three button images aligned in a single horizontal row are different, even if only the portion simulating light emission is different. , And different display modes. In this example, the effect portion corresponding to the first button operation is suggested by making the light emission mode different from other button images.

(Example 2-4)
Next, special figure fluctuation game in pachinko machine 100 by example 4 of this embodiment is explained using FIG. 51 (a), while "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c during execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the letter of "reach" is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and reach effect is displayed. It shows the started condition.

  FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. ing.

  51C to 51E show effects from immediately after the start of the animation relating to the button image. FIG. 51C shows a state in which a relatively small button image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. FIG. 51D shows a state in which an animation in which the button image is gradually enlarged is being executed. FIG. 51 (e) shows a state in which three button images are displayed in a horizontal row, and the size of the central button image is larger than the size of the left and right button images. In this example, button display is performed by animation, and the case where the display of the button image of a decabutton display and the display of a normal display is mixed is shown. Also in this example, the display mode of the button image in the center of the deca-button display is different from the display mode of the normal button images on the left and right.

  51 (a ') to (d') show effects from immediately after the start of the animation relating to the button image. In this example, an effect movable body imitating an arm is disposed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect movable body can be driven to move to the front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that a part of the image displayed in the image display area can be hidden. FIG. 51 (a ') shows a state in which most of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the effect display area 208d. Three button images are displayed in a row in the center of the effect display area 208d. An effective period image is displayed occupying an area of about 1/3 of the lower side of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 51 (b ′) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. In the valid period image, the gauge portion is shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is shortened is notified.

  FIG. 51 (c ′) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erase animation, the effect image is displayed at each display position in place of the left and center button images.

  FIG. 51 (d ′) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, the arm of the effect movable body extends to the front of the image display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and hides a part of the button image on the right side and the effective period image.

  In the button effects shown in FIGS. 51A to 51D, the gauge image is an image (decagauge image) larger than normal, and the second effect is the effect by the operation of the effect movable body, and the effect movable body Hide part of button images and gauge images. The deca gauge image may be configured to function as a preview on its own. For example, there are cases where it is possible to make a player expect a big hit etc. by displaying a large gauge image at the timing when a normal gauge image appears. In this case, even if it is a deca gauge image, it is desirable to have the same effective period as a normal gauge image, but for example, time is adjusted by swing fluctuation (temporary stop) etc. (special pattern fluctuation time and fluctuation pattern of decorative pattern And (d) may be different from each other because it is possible to The first effect may also be performed by the effect movable body.

(Example 2-5)
Next, special figure fluctuation game in pachinko machine 100 by example 5 of this embodiment will be described using FIG. The present embodiment describes a case where the same reach effect (the same change time is also applied) as that of the embodiment 2-2 (see FIGS. 48 and 49) is performed but no button effect is performed.

  The special figure variation game shown in FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (d) is the same as that shown in FIGS. In addition, since the special figure fluctuation game (including the SP reach effect) shown in FIGS. 52 (i) to 52 (n) is the same as that shown in FIGS. 48 (q) to 49 (e), the description thereof is omitted.

  FIGS. 52 (e) to 52 (h) show effects from the start of reach effect to development to SP reach effect. The second effect is not related to the operation of the operation means (for example, step-up notice, advance notice, cut-in notice, notice such as popular drawing effect, etc.) It may be information related to the game such as time saving, latency mode, etc.). In this example, the case of performing a cut-in effect (step-up) after reaching is described as a second effect. FIG. 52 (e) shows a cut-in effect to be executed during reach effect. In the middle symbol display area 208b, a face image of a character image of "bancho" is displayed as a cut-in effect. Next, in FIG. 52 (f), the whole-body image of the character image of "bancho" is displayed as a cut-in effect in the middle symbol display area 208b, and is displayed as a step-up notice. Next, in FIG. 52 (g), the image of character F shown in FIG. 25 (c) is displayed as a cut-in effect in the middle symbol display area 208b, and is displayed as a step-up notice.

  FIG. 52 (i) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area and the effect display area 208d is enlarged to the center of the display area ing.

  As described above, even if the button effect is not performed at the time of the reach effect execution, the second effect is, for example, an advance notice such as a step-up notice, a pre-reading notice, a cut-in notice, a press drawing effect, etc. Or, it can be performed in association with game information such as the number of winning balls and the number of consecutive villas, the probability change, the time saving, and the latent mode.

(Example 2-6)
Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the effects up to the button effect are the same as those up to FIG. 46 (j) of Example 2-1, so the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 53 (a) continues from FIG. 46 (j). FIG. 53 (a)-FIG. 53 (l) have shown the state in which the button effect of this embodiment was performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In the button effect of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for the button effect prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects for prompting the player to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, the case where the button effect is performed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 53 (a) shows a state in which the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, tutorial display of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, one image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed substantially at the center of the effect display area 208d. The image imitating the chance button 136 is the same display mode as the button image whose display mode is "vibration + rotation". The upper left of the image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed with the string “3 sets of SP reach development! Three press”, and the upper portion with the string “Ready”.

  FIG. 53 (b) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, one operation request image (button image) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 is displayed substantially at the center of the effect display area 208d. The display mode of the button image is "vibration + rotation". At the top of the button image, the text “3 sets and SP reach development! Press three times” is displayed, and the top “Go” is displayed. At the bottom of the button image, one valid period image is displayed. The valid period image of this example has a relatively long elongated rectangular frame shape (long gauge), and initially, the entire period of the valid period in the frame shape is indicated by a bar of a predetermined color, and The bar-like portion of the predetermined color is displayed to be gradually shortened to the right with the passage of time. More specifically, the display of the valid period image is a long gauge display, and the long gauge display is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by performing an animation for reducing the length of the long gauge. . The display of the long gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the long gauge is zero. In addition, a long gauge can also be functioned as a notice like a deca gauge image. In order to make the lifetime of the normal gauge image and that of the button the same, the rate at which the gauge in the long gauge decreases can be made faster than the rate at which the gauge in the normal gauge image decreases. As described above, by using a plurality of display modes in which the number of button displays and the mode of the gauge display are different, it may be possible to use for the notice of the variation.

  FIG. 53C shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 while the button effect is being performed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 53 (d) shows a second effect that is executed while the button effect is being performed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed on the right side of the display of the central button image. In the present embodiment, at the first press of the chance button 136, the button image delete animation for deleting the button image is not executed. When the acceptance of the first depression of the chance button 136 is received, then the second rendering is started. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 53 (e) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. Above the display of the button image in the center and the panda image of the second effect, a string of "two more times" is displayed on the right side of the string of "three aligned in SP reach development!" On the other hand, it is informed that the remaining number of operations is two. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 53F shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 a second time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 53 (g) shows a second effect performed during execution of a button effect. As a second effect, another panda image is displayed to the right of the panda image on the right of the center button image. In the present embodiment, when the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the button delete animation for deleting the button image is not executed. When the second depression of the chance button 136 is received, the second effect is started. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 53 (h) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. The character string of "last" is displayed on the right side of the character string of "3 sets and SP reach development!" On the upper side of the display of the central button image and the two panda images of the second effect. The user is informed that the remaining number of operations is one. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 53F shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time during execution of the button effect. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 53 (j) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the third chance button 136 is pressed, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In this embodiment, an animation of button display elimination is performed only for the last button operation.

  FIG. 53 (k) exemplifies the case where no effective period image deletion animation is performed for gauge display. The gauge display is a display that can be erased when the pressing of the chance button 136 by the player reaches a predetermined number of times, even if the operation valid period remains. In this example, an empty frame image without a gauge portion indicating that the remaining period of the gauge display as shown in FIG. 48 (m) is 0 is not displayed. In addition, on the right side of the effect display area 208d, the three panda images arranged at the positions of the vertices of the inverted triangle are displayed as the second effect, respectively, and the condition of "three sets in SP reach development!" It reports that it has been satisfied.

  FIG. 53 (l) shows a first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In this example, as a first effect, three panda images having the same shape and the same size are displayed in a row in the center of the effect display area 208d, and the characters "SP reach confirmed" are displayed below them. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach. After the state shown in FIG. 53 (l), the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 48 (q) to 49 (e) is executed.

  According to the present embodiment, when it is determined by the button effect whether or not to develop to the SP reach during the reach effect, by preparing a plurality of effect patterns different in the number of button display and the aspect of the gauge display, It is also possible to perform advance notice by button effect, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example 2-7)
Next, the special figure change game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the effects up to the button effect are the same as those up to FIG.

  FIG. 54 (a) continues from FIG. 46 (k). 54 (a)-FIG. 54 (l) have shown the state in which the button effect of this embodiment was performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In the button effect of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for the button effect prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects for prompting the player to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, the case where the button effect is performed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 54 (a) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed at the top. Below the three button images, one common effective period image is displayed for the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the right. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero.

  FIG. 54 (b) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 while the button effect is being executed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 54C shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 54 (d) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, an image of the head of the adolescent is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 54E shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 a second time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 54F shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the central button image is erased by the button erasure animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, an effect change animation (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "effect change animation") is executed in which the image of the head of the young man on the left is erased and a large effect image is displayed in parallel with the button erase animation. It is done. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 54 (g) shows a state in which the second effect is performed after the button deletion animation and the effect change animation. As a second effect, a standing image of the adolescent is displayed near the position where the left and center button images were displayed. The standing image is displayed in a size that hides a part of the valid period image. As described above, in the present embodiment, the character image of the same type (youth) is changed and displayed for each button operation. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported. In the present embodiment, the decreasing direction of the gauge of the effective period image and the direction of the erasing order of the button images are the same.

  FIG. 54H shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 54 (i) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the third chance button 136 is pressed, the button image on the right side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. Further, in parallel with the button deletion animation, a presentation change animation in which a standing image of a youth is deleted and a large effect image is displayed is executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 54 (j) shows a state in which the second effect is performed after the button deletion animation and the effect change animation. As a second effect, a standing image of a young man similar to the character F of FIG. 25C is displayed in the vicinity of the position where the left and center button images are displayed. The standing image is displayed in a size that hides a part of the valid period image. As described above, in the present embodiment, the character image of the same type (youth) is changed and displayed for each button operation. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 54 (k) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the fourth time during execution of the button effect. This button operation is a condition for generating the first effect. In this example, there are three button displays, and the effect of performing the button operation for each button display requires three button operations, and further, the fourth button operation is necessary to generate the first effect. It has become. That is, four button operations (depression) are required to generate the first effect. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 54 (l) shows the first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In this example, as the first effect, the character image of the adolescent is largely displayed on the center right side of the effect display area 208d, and the character string of "super heat! SP reach!" Is displayed on the left side. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach. After the state shown in FIG. 54 (l), the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 48 (q) to 49 (e) is executed.

(Example 2-8)
Next, special figure fluctuation gaming in a pachinko machine 100 according to Example 8 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 55 (a)-FIG. 55 (q) have shown the special figure change game in time series in this order. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 55 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first special symbol "special figure I" in a stop state. In the special figure 1 and the fourth figure display area t1, t2 for special figure 2, the "x" picture which shows that the result of special figure change game is out is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variation game is out.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG.

  FIG. 55 (b) shows a state in which the next special view 1 change game is started and the special view 1 change game is being executed. The special view variation display is being executed in the special view 1 display device 212, and it is informed that the special view 1 variation game is being executed in the fourth special symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 55 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a during execution of the special view 1 change game.

  In FIG. 55 (d), during the execution of the special figure 1 variation game, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of "reach" is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. It shows the started condition.

  FIG. 55 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. ing.

  FIG. 55 (f) to FIG. 55 (k) show a state in which the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In the button effect of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for the button effect prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects for prompting the player to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, the case is shown where the continuous hit effect animation is executed as a button effect after the start of the reach effect.

  FIG. 55 (f) shows a state in which the continuous hitting effect animation has been started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, an operation request image of a circular display mode in which the character of “push” is displayed inside as an image suggesting the chance button 136 as the operation means slightly right of the effect display area 208 d , And one "push" button image is displayed. In the upper left corner of the "push" button image, a character string of "drop continuously" is displayed. One valid period image is displayed below the "push" button image. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the right. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge display, and the gauge display is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The gauge display is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero.

  FIG. 55 (g) shows a state in which the continuous hit presentation animation is being executed. The display of the “push” button image increases as the operation effective period elapses. At least one of the display of the plurality of "push" button images hides a part of the gauge display. Also, only one gauge image is displayed for display of a plurality of “push” button images. Informing the player that the common operation valid period is easy to understand by setting the gauge display to one while plural button operations are requested by displaying a plurality of "push" button images. There are times when you can. The gauge display may be plural. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 55 (h) shows a state in which the continuous hit presentation animation is being executed. In the effect display area 208 d, one “push” button image of the deca-button display is displayed as a first animation mode among the display of a plurality of “push” button images. The first animation mode of the deca-button display is an image larger than the second animation mode which is a button display mode other than the deca-button display. In addition, the button display mode other than the deca-button display is displaying a black "press" character on a white background, but the button display mode of the deca-button display is displaying a black "push" character on a green background. There are cases where it is possible to cause the button display itself to function as a notice such as the change due to the difference in the animation mode of the button display. Also, among button display modes other than the deca-button display, there are button display modes in which a red "push" character is displayed on a white background, for example, in addition to the black "push" character display on the white background May be There are also cases where the button display itself can be functioned as a notice of the change or the like depending on the difference in the button display mode. In addition, part of the hold icon and part of the gauge display are hidden by the "push" button image.

  Further, FIG. 55 (h) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  Further, FIG. 55 (h) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. Every time there is an acceptance of pressing of the chance button 136, the button image is erased by the button erasure animation. In the middle of the erase animation, instead of the display of the button image as the first display, the display of the effect image as the third display is performed. The effect image is a button erased image and is included in the button erased animation. The display of the button image is an erasable display in association with the operation of the chance button 136, and the display of the button-deleted image is an executable display when the display of the button image is erased. The display of the button-deleted image is a display that can be started in association with the chance button 136 being pressed (operated). As described above, since the button deletion animation display can be performed in association with the button operation, it may be possible to prompt the player to perform the button operation. Note that the display of the button-deleted image may be a display that is executed regardless of the operation of the operation unit. By executing the deletion animation of the button display, it may be possible to notify that the player has accepted the pressing of the chance button.

  Furthermore, after the disappearance of the effect image, as a second effect, an image of the character with the button image of "excellent" (hereinafter may be referred to as an "excellent" image) or an image of the character of "good" (hereinafter, "good" image The effect that changes to) may be executed. An effect that changes to an "excellent" image or a "good" image is an effect that can be started in conjunction with the chance button 136 being pressed. The effect that the button image changes to the "excellent" image or the "good" image is an effect that can be started after the button deletion animation is performed. Since the second effect is an effect that can be started after the deletion animation of the button display, the second effect may be made noticeable. Also, the second effect may be an effect that can be started during execution of the button delete animation or before the start of the button delete animation. Note that it is not necessary to always execute the button deletion animation every time the acceptance of the pressing of the chance button 136, and it may be executed for some or all of the plurality of button images.

  FIG. 55 (i) shows a state in which the player continuously hit the chance button 136 during execution of the hit sequence animation. By the player's continuous hit of the chance button 136, an effect is performed in which a plurality of "push" button images change from effect display to button display of "excellent" images or "good" images by button deletion animation. Notice that the "push" button image of the Deca button display is also changed to an image of the character "" (hereinafter, may be referred to as "the" image) through the effect display and there is a high possibility of development to SP reach. doing. In addition, the lower part of FIG. 55 (i) shows a pattern imitating a speaker and a character string "Keen", and a sound that indicates a high possibility of SP reach entry from the speaker 120 is used as a sound effect for an image preview effect. Synchronized and running. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is greatly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is reduced is notified.

  FIG. 55 (j) shows a state where the operation effective period is lost while the player is continuously hitting the chance button 136 and the continuous hitting effect animation is ended. When the operation effective period disappears, the effective period image deletion animation is started. In the effective period image deletion animation, instead of the display of the effective period image as the second display, the effect image as the third display is displayed. The effect image is an effective period image deletion image and is included in the effective period image deletion animation.

  FIG. 55 (k) shows a first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of the button continuous hitting operation. In the present example, as the first effect, the image of the character F shown in FIG. 25C is displayed large on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and the character “I” is displayed on the center right side. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach.

  FIG. 55 (l) to (o) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 55 (l) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . At the top of the effect display area 208d, a character string of "punitive reach" is displayed. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image in which two warriors face each other is displayed. FIG. 55 (m) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. In FIG. 55 (n), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach effect proceeds to the next scene, and an image in which the warrior shouts "It's a game!" Is displayed. FIG. 55 (o) shows that the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed at the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who won the right and the figure of the warrior who lost it are displayed on the left. At the top of the screen, the word "win" is displayed.

  FIG. 55 (p) shows a state in which the left middle right design display area 208 a to 208 c is displayed enlarged from the reduction display to the central part of the image display area of the decorative design display device 208. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 55 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure "special figure A" of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "A" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit .

(Example 2-9)
Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. 56 (a) to 57 (c) show the special figure changing game in this order in time series. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 56 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 stop and display the first special figure "special figure I". In the special figure 1 and the fourth figure display area t1, t2 for special figure 2, the "x" picture which shows that the result of special figure change game is out is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variation game is out.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG.

  FIG. 56 (b) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variation game is started and the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The special view variation display is being executed in the special view 1 display device 212, and it is informed that the special view 1 variation game is being executed in the fourth special symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 56 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced and displayed from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. ing.

  FIG. 56 (d) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images imitating the chance button 136 are arranged substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d in a horizontal row, and further, the direction key 137 is displayed on the right side. The character string "PUSH" is displayed on the top of each of the images imitating two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 arranged in a row, and on the top of these, the characters "Stop symbol by button operation" A column is displayed, and the text "Ready" is displayed at the top.

  FIG. 56 (e) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, two operation request images (button images) in a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and are displayed adjacent to the right An operation request image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) of a display mode imitating the direction key 137 is displayed. The character string "PUSH" is displayed at the top of each of two button images and one direction key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one direction key image is displayed above them. An image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero. The text "Go" is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  FIG. 56F shows a state in which the player first presses the direction key 137 instead of the chance button 136 during execution of the button effect. The depression of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 56 (g) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the direction key 137 is first pressed and received, the button image on the right (direction key image) is erased by the button erasing animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. This makes it easy to understand that the required number of operations has decreased once. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 56 (h) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c when the direction key 137 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the direction key image on the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 56 (i) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 as the second button operation during execution of the button effect. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 56 (j) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 56 (k) shows a second rendering to be performed next to the button deletion animation while the button rendering is being performed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 56 (l) shows a special effect that is performed during execution of the second effect in the middle of the operation valid period. In the effect, although the display mode of the button image displayed at the center of the effect display area 208 b is “normal”, it is changed to “vibration + rotation”. Moreover, what the color of a gauge was "blue" as a display mode of a gauge display is changing to "yellow". In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported. As described above, it may be possible to give notice of the change by changing the display mode of the button image or the gauge image.

  FIG. 56 (m) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 as the third button operation during execution of the button effect. The button mode of the chance button 136 is the same as the display mode of the button image displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 56 (n) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the third chance button 136 is pressed, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. Also, in parallel with the button deletion animation, a gauge image deletion animation is executed in which the effect image is also deleted after the effect image is displayed instead of the gauge display.

  FIG. 56 (o) shows the first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In the present example, as a first effect, the character string “SP” is largely displayed between two “decorations 3” displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach.

  56 (p) to 57 (a) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 56 (p) shows a state in which SP reach effect has been started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . At the top of the effect display area 208d, a character string of "punitive reach" is displayed. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image in which two warriors face each other is displayed. FIG. 56 (q) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. In FIG. 56 (r), when the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach effect proceeds to the next scene, and an image in which the warrior shouts "Just!" Is displayed. In this example, while the display mode of the button image is “signal + rotation”, the button mode of the chance button 136 is “normal”. Thus, the display mode of the button image and the button mode of the chance button 136 may be different. FIG. 57 (a) following FIG. 56 (r) shows that the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed at the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who won the right and the figure of the warrior who lost it are displayed on the left. At the top of the screen, the word "win" is displayed.

  FIG. 57 (b) shows a state in which the left middle right design display areas 208a to 208c are displayed enlarged from the reduction display to the central part of the image display area of the decorative design display device 208. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 57 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure "special figure A" of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "A" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit .

(Example 2-10)
Next, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, characteristic effects performed from the start of the button effect to the start of the first first effect will be described. FIG. 58 (a) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed at the top. Below the three button images, one common effective period image is displayed for the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the right. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero.

  FIG. 58B shows a state in which the player presses the direction key 137 instead of the chance button 136 while the button effect is being performed. The depression of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 58C shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the pressing of the direction key 137 is accepted instead of the chance button 136, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 58D shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, an image of the head of the adolescent is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the right direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second effect is performed even when the direction key 137 other than the chance button 136 is pressed while the image simulating the chance button 136 is displayed as the button image. It has become.

(Example 2-11)
Next, special figure fluctuation game in pachinko machine 100 by example 11 of this embodiment will be described using FIG. 59 (a) to 59 (r) show the special figure changing game in this order in time series. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. In the special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214, the first special symbol "special view I" is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 1 and the fourth figure display area t1, t2 for special figure 2, the "x" picture which shows that the result of special figure change game is out is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variation game is out.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG.

  FIG. 59 (b) shows a state in which the next special view 1 change game is started and the special view 1 change game is being executed. The special view variation display is being executed in the special view 1 display device 212, and it is informed that the special view 1 variation game is being executed in the fourth special symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 59 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. ing.

  FIG. 59 (d) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images imitating the chance button 136 are arranged substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d in a horizontal row, and further, the direction key 137 is displayed on the right side. The character string "PUSH" is displayed on the top of each of the images imitating two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 arranged in a row, and on the top of these, the characters "Stop symbol by button operation" A column is displayed, and the text "Ready" is displayed at the top.

  FIG. 59 (e) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, two operation request images (button images) in a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and are displayed adjacent to the right An operation request image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) of a display mode imitating the direction key 137 is displayed. The character string "PUSH" is displayed at the top of each of two button images and one direction key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one direction key image is displayed above them. An image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero. The text "Go" is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  FIG. 59 (f) shows a state in which the player first presses the chance button 136 instead of the direction key 137 while executing the button effect. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 59G shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the chance button 136 is first pressed and accepted, the button image on the left is erased by the button erasure animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. This makes it easy to understand that the required number of operations has decreased once. Further, the hold icon a1 is partially hidden by the effect image instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 59 (h) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 59 (i) shows a state in which the rod portion of the effective period image is further shortened in the left direction to notify that the operation effective period during execution of the button effect is reduced to about half. ing.

  FIG. 59 (j) shows a state where the operation effective period has expired and the remaining period of the gauge display is 0 as an empty frame image without a gauge portion.

  In (k) of FIG. 59, the button deletion animation starts when the next button operation is not performed within the operation valid period after the first chance button 136 is pressed, and the operation valid period has expired. It shows the condition that has been In the button deletion animation, the button image displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d and the direction key image displayed on the right side thereof are deleted. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. Thus, the display mode of the button deletion animation may be changed depending on the presence or absence of the button operation during the operation valid period.

  FIG. 59 (l) shows a third effect (for example, corresponding to the first effect of Example 2-1) executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. In the third effect of this example, forced display of a decorative symbol is performed. As a third effect, the "decoration 3" stop display is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c among the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. Since "decoration 3" is displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, reach effect is started from this time. In addition, an image imitating "decoration 3" is displayed in the area where the button image on the left of the effect display area 208d was displayed, and an image imitating "decoration 3" in the area where the direction key image on the right is displayed. Is displayed, and in the area where the button image at the center was displayed, an image simulating the variable display of the decorative symbol is animated. In this example, when the number of button operations within the operation effective period is smaller than the number of button images displayed in the effect display area 208d, the variation display of the decorative symbol is simulated as a third effect in the effect display area 208d. The displayed image is displayed. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach.

  FIGS. 59 (m) to 59 (p) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 59 (m) shows a state in which the SP reach effect is started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . At the top of the effect display area 208d, a character string of "punitive reach" is displayed. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image in which two warriors face each other is displayed. FIG. 59 (n) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. In FIG. 59 (o), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach effect proceeds to the next scene, and an image is displayed in which the samurai shouts "Just!" FIG. 59 (p) shows that the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed at the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who won the right and the figure of the warrior who lost it are displayed on the left. At the top of the screen, the word "win" is displayed.

  FIG. 59 (q) shows a state in which the left middle right design display areas 208a to 208c are displayed enlarged from the reduction display to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative design display device 208. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 59 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure "special figure A" of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "A" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit .

(Example 2-12)
Next, special figure fluctuation gaming in a pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 60 (a) to 60 (n) show the special figure change game in time series in this order. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 60 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. In the special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214, the first special symbol "special view I" is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 1 and the fourth figure display area t1, t2 for special figure 2, the "x" picture which shows that the result of special figure change game is out is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variation game is out.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG.

  FIG. 60 (b) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variation game is started and the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The special view variation display is being executed in the special view 1 display device 212, and it is informed that the special view 1 variation game is being executed in the fourth special symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 60 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. ing.

  FIG. 60 (d) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images imitating the chance button 136 are arranged substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d in a horizontal row, and further, the direction key 137 is displayed on the right side. The character string "PUSH" is displayed on the top of each of the images imitating two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 arranged in a row, and on the top of these, the characters "Stop symbol by button operation" A column is displayed, and the text "Ready" is displayed at the top.

  FIG. 60E shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, two operation request images (button images) in a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and are displayed adjacent to the right An operation request image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) of a display mode imitating the direction key 137 is displayed. The character string "PUSH" is displayed at the top of each of two button images and one direction key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one direction key image is displayed above them. An image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero. The text "Go" is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  FIG. 60F shows a state where the player first presses the chance button 136 instead of the direction key 137 while the button effect is being executed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 60G shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the chance button 136 is first pressed and accepted, the button image on the left is erased by the button erasure animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. This makes it easy to understand that the required number of operations has decreased once. Further, the hold icon a1 is partially hidden by the effect image instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 60H shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 60 (i) shows a state in which the rod portion of the effective period image is further shortened in the left direction to notify that the operation effective period during execution of the button effect is reduced to about half. ing.

  FIG. 60 (j) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. In this example, when the button operation is not performed for a predetermined time within the operation valid period, the button deletion animation is executed as an effect based on the button operation triggered by the elapse of the predetermined time. Thereby, the button image on the right side (direction key image) is erased by the button erasure animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 60 (k) shows a second effect which is forcibly performed after the button deletion animation while the button effect is being performed. In the second effect of this example, forced display of symbols is performed. As a second effect, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c of the left middle symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. Since "decoration 3" is displayed temporarily in the left symbol display area 208a, reach effect is started from this time. Moreover, the image which imitated "decoration 3" is displayed on the area | region where the button image of the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 60 (l) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the second time while the button effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 60 (j), once the button deletion animation is performed without performing the button operation, then the second effect is performed, but if the operation valid period remains, the remaining buttons are performed. A new button operation may be performed on the display of the image to proceed to the effect of the next button deletion animation. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 60 (m) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. Also, in parallel with the button deletion animation, a gauge image deletion animation is executed in which the effect image is also deleted after the effect image is displayed instead of the gauge display.

  FIG. 60 (n) shows the first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In the present example, as a first effect, the character string “SP” is largely displayed between two “decorations 3” displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach.

The following is a summary of the embodiments (2-9) to (2-12) described above.
The pachinko machine 100 has, for example, a chance button 136 and a direction key 137 as a plurality of operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate. At least one of the plurality of operation means is, for example, the chance button 136 as a first operation means, and at least one of the plurality of operation means is, for example, the direction key 137 as a second operation means. is there. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 has, for example, an effect display area 208d as display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays. At least one of the plurality of types of display is, for example, the display of the chance button image as the first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is the display of the direction key image as the second display. It is. The first display is a display of a button image including at least a display suggesting the chance button 136, and the second display is a display including at least a display of a directional key image suggesting the directional key 137. The first display is, for example, a display that can be started at least during the execution of a button effect as a first period, and the second display is also a display that can be started at least in the first period.
In addition, the pachinko machine 100 has, for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 as effect means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of effects. At least one of the plurality of types of effects is, for example, an effect of deleting the button image and displaying another image as the first effect, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is the second As an effect, for example, it is an effect of erasing the direction key image and displaying another image. The first effect is, for example, an effect that can be started at least in association with pressing of the chance button 136, and the second effect can be started, at least, in response to pressing of the direction key 137, for example. It is an effect.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, there are a plurality of operation means, the operation means and the effect are in a corresponding relationship, and the effect order is determined by the operation order of the plurality of operation means. Can provide a game console with Moreover, there are cases where it is possible to select an effect corresponding to the operation means.

  In addition, for example, in the operation valid period, at least the reception of the operation of the chance button 136 is valid as the second period, and the direction key 137 is at least valid as the reception of the operation of the direction key 137 in the operation valid period. Become. The execution period of the button effect is a period including at least a part of the operation effective period. When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 can at least start the effect of erasing the button image and displaying another image, and the direction key 137 is operated during the operation valid period. If so, it is possible to at least start an effect of deleting the direction key image and displaying another image.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the operation effective periods of the plurality of operation means are the same, the interest of the game may be improved by operating the plurality of operation means in one operation effective period.

  In addition, as the first condition, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the direction key image when the chance button 136 is operated before the direction key 137 is operated in the operation effective period as another condition. The effect of deleting the button image and displaying another image can be started earlier than the effect of displaying the image, and the second condition is the direction before the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period. When the key 137 is operated, it is possible to start an effect of erasing the direction key image and displaying another image rather than an effect of erasing the button image and displaying another image.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the effects corresponding to the operation means operated earlier are performed first, there is a case where the player can select the appearance order of the first effect and the second effect. is there.

  When only the chance button 136 is operated prior to the direction key 137 being operated in the operation valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes an effect of erasing the button image and displaying another image. If it is possible and only the direction key 137 is operated before the chance button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, only the effect of erasing the direction key image and displaying another image is executed. It is possible.

  The effect display area 208 d can execute at least the display of the chance button image of, for example, 2 as the first number, and can at least the display of the direction key image of, for example, 1 as the second number. In addition, at least one of a plurality of types of effects is, for example, an effect that forcibly displays a decorative symbol as a third effect (see FIG. 59), and an effect that forcibly displays the decorative symbol is a third condition. This is an effect that can be performed at least when the chance button 136 is operated two times as the first number and the direction key 137 is operated one time as the second number.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, there is a third effect as effects appearing in multiple operations, and there are a plurality of operation means, so the need for the first operation means and the second operation means In some cases, notification can be made in an easy-to-understand manner by matching the number of operation times with the number of displays.

  The third condition may be satisfied when the operation effective period ends. A third effect may occur at the end of the operation effective period. The third effect may not be performed when the third condition is not satisfied at the end of the operation effective period.

  The chance button 136 can at least take, for example, a plurality of button modes (“normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, “light emission”, etc.) as a plurality of states, and among the plurality of states In at least one of the first states, for example, the button mode is "normal", and in the at least one of the plurality of states, for example, the button mode is "vibration" as the second state; The second state is a state different from the first state. The display of the chance button image can be displayed at least in, for example, “normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, “decabutton display”, etc., as a plurality of display modes, and at least one of the plurality of display modes One is, for example, "normal" as the first display mode, at least one of the plurality of display modes is, for example, "vibration" as the second display mode, and the second display mode is This is a display mode different from the first display mode. The first display mode is a display mode corresponding at least to the first state, and the second display mode is a display mode at least corresponding to the second state.

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, variations may be increased between the button state and the display mode depending on the display mode according to the state of the first operation means.
The first operation means is a chance button 136 capable of rotation, vibration and light emission, and the second operation means may be the direction key 137 or a combination of other operation means. The operation means may be arbitrarily combined, and both the first operation means and the second operation means may be configured to be capable of taking a plurality of states.
Further, the first display mode may be configured to correspond to the second state, and the second display mode may be configured to correspond to the first state.

At least one of the plurality of types of displays is, for example, a display of the effective period image as the third display, and the display of the effective period image can at least suggest the operation effective period,
The effect display symbol 208d can execute at least the display of the effective period image which is, for example, 1 as the third number.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player can recognize the common operation effective period by making one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (a plurality of button operation requests). There are cases where it can be easily reported. The third display may be plural.

(Example 2-13)
Next, special figure fluctuation gaming in a pachinko machine 100 according to a thirteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figs. FIGS. 61 (a) to 64 (c) show, in this order, the special figure variation game with the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment and the subsequent big hit game in time series. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game and the following big hit game in time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game is ended. The special figure I display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 both stop and display the first special symbol "special figure I". An “x” image is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special drawing 1 indicating that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t2 for special drawing 2 An "x" image is displayed indicating that the result of the game is out. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure fluctuation game is out.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG.

  61 (b) to (f) show the start and end of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. FIG. 61 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. A special figure variation display is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that a special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 61 (c) shows a state in which the game ball enters the special view 1 start opening 230 during execution of the special view 1 change game, and the suspension of the special view 1 is increased by one. Two LEDs from the left are turned on in the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and it is notified that the special figure 1 has two holdings. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 on the left side, corresponding to the increase in reserve. The special figure 1 reserve icon a2 related to the reserve of the second special figure 1 is displayed not as a normal display but as an image imitating the chance button 136 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “button reserve icon”) In the predetermined reliability, the advance notice for warning that indicates the jackpot of the special figure 1 fluctuation game related to the hold is performed. The button hold icon is also an image display for prompting the player to press the chance button 136, and the appearance of the image causes an effect by the button hold icon to be started. In the effect by the button holding icon, the display of the operation effective period using the gauge display etc. is not performed. As long as the chance button 136 is not pressed, the effective period of operation in the effect by the button hold icon is ended with the start of the special view fluctuation game according to the button hold icon.

  FIG. 61 (d) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 while the special figure 1 change game is being executed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. At the time of pressing the chance button 136, no other button effect is started, so the acceptance of the pressing is used for the effect by the button hold icon.

  FIG. 61E shows a state in which the display mode of the special view 1 hold icon a2 has been changed from the button hold icon image to the normal display image, triggered by the reception of the pressing of the chance button 136. The effect by the button holding icon here is an effect that it is changed from the button holding icon image to the normal display image and it becomes clear that the advance notice is a false notification.

  FIG. 61 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is ended. The special figure I display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 both stop and display the first special symbol "special figure I". In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "x" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost. "Decoration 8-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stop-displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure fluctuation game is out.

  FIG. 61 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. A special figure variation display is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that a special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 61 (h) shows a state in which the game ball enters the special view 1 start opening 230 during execution of the special view 1 change game, and the suspension of the special view 1 is increased by one. Two LEDs from the left are turned on in the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and it is notified that the special figure 1 has two holdings. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 on the left side, corresponding to the increase in reserve. The special figure 1 reserve icon a2 pertaining to the reserve of the second special figure 1 is a display mode that is not a normal display but is displayed as a button reserve icon, and the special figure 1 variation game pertaining to the reserve with a predetermined reliability We give advance notices that suggest a big hit. Moreover, the effect by the button hold icon is started earlier than the button effect. In the effect by the button hold icon, the effective period image is not displayed. The operation effective period of the effect by the button holding icon ends, for example, before the special map change game relating to the holding is started.

  FIG. 61 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c, variation display of the decoration symbol is continued.

  In FIG. 61 (j), with "decoration 3" temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and in the middle symbol display area 208b The variable display continues, and the character string "reach" is displayed in the center, indicating that the reach effect has been started.

  FIGS. 61 (k) to 62 (c) show a state in which the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In the button effect of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for the button effect prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects for prompting the player to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, the case where the button effect is performed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 61 (k) shows a state in which the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in a row substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d. In the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, the text "3 sets of SP reach development!" Is displayed, and in the upper part, the text "Ready" is displayed.

  FIG. 61 (l) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed at the top. Below the three button images, one common effective period image is displayed for the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero. From the state shown in FIG. 61 (l) to the state shown in FIG. 62 (c), the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect overlap.

  FIG. 61 (m) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 in a state where the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are being executed in an overlapping manner. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 61 (n) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In this example, when the depression by the chance button 136 is received when the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are being executed in an overlapping manner, the button effect is preferentially processed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 61 (o) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the central button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 61 (p) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is displayed in a reduced size and the reduced size display of the panda image makes it possible to visually recognize all the central button image and the valid period image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 61 (q) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 a second time while the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 61 (r) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being executed while the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are being performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the central button image is erased by the button erasure animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 62 (a) shows a state in which the second effect is performed after the button deletion animation following FIG. 61 (r). As a second effect, the Echigoya image is displayed at the position where the central button image was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 62 (b) shows the execution state of the second effect in the button effect. Since the Echigoya image different from the panda image for the button image on the left side is displayed at the position of the button image in the center, the three displayed in the button effect description display regardless of the presence or absence of the third depression of the chance button 136 by the player. The condition of “SP reach development!” Is not satisfied. Therefore, the second effect is executed in which the button image on the right side is erased and the Echigoya image is displayed instead without waiting for the player to press the chance button 136 even if the operation valid period remains.

  FIG. 62 (c) shows the first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In this example, as a first effect, the Echigoya image is largely displayed on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and the character string "Sorry!" Is displayed on the center right side. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect has not been developed into the SP (super) reach. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b of the left middle symbol display areas 208a to 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display In the areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is displayed temporarily.

  FIG. 62 (d) continuing from FIG. 62 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is enlarged from the reduction display to the central part of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed normally. ing. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 62 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first special symbol "special figure I" in a stop state. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "x" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is off .

  (F) to (j) of FIG. 62 show the start and end of the special figure 1 change game. FIG. 62 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. A special figure variation display is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that a special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special view 1 reserve icon display area, the special view 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in response to the saving of the reserve, and the button reserve icon image next to the right moves to the left and is displayed as the special view 1 reserve icon a1. Be done. The presentation by the button hold icon is ongoing.

  FIG. 62 (g) shows a state in which the game ball enters the special view 1 start opening 230 during execution of the special view 1 change game, and the suspension of the special view 1 is increased by one. Two LEDs from the left are turned on in the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and it is notified that the special figure 1 has two holdings. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 on the left side, corresponding to the increase in reserve. In this example, the second special view 1 hold icon a2 is restricted because the button hold icon is already displayed on the first hold even if the button hold icon is scheduled to appear in the pre-reading notice lottery. , Is a display mode of normal display.

  FIG. 62 (h) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 while the special figure 1 change game is being executed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. At the time of pressing the chance button 136, no other button effect is started, so the acceptance of the pressing is used for the effect by the button hold icon.

  FIG. 62 (i) shows a state in which the display mode of the special view 1 hold icon a1 has been changed from the button hold icon image to an image resembling the head of a youth, triggered by acceptance of pressing of the chance button 136. The effect by the button hold icon in this example is changed from the button hold icon image to an image imitating the head of the adolescent, and a predetermined advance notice is given.

  FIG. 62 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is ended. The special figure I display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 both stop and display the first special symbol "special figure I". In the special figure 1 and the fourth figure display area t1, t2 for special figure 2, the "x" picture which shows that the result of special figure change game is out is displayed. "Decoration 8-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stop-displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure fluctuation game is out.

  FIG. 62 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. A special figure variation display is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that a special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area t1 for special figure 1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 62 (l) shows a state in which the game ball enters the special view 1 start opening 230 during execution of the special view 1 change game, and the suspension of the special view 1 is increased by one. Two LEDs from the left are turned on in the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and it is notified that the special figure 1 has two holdings. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon a2 is displayed on the right side of the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 on the left side, corresponding to the increase in reserve. The special figure 1 reserve icon a2 pertaining to the reserve of the second special figure 1 is a display mode that is not a normal display but is displayed as a button reserve icon, and the special figure 1 variation game pertaining to the reserve with a predetermined reliability We give advance notices that suggest a big hit. Also, the effect by the button hold icon is started.

  FIG. 62 (m) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, and in the middle right symbol display areas 208b and 208c, fluctuation display of the decoration symbol is continued.

  In FIG. 62 (n), with "decoration 3" temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" temporarily stops in the right symbol display area 208c, and in the middle symbol display area 208b The variable display continues, and the character string "reach" is displayed in the center, indicating that the reach effect has been started.

  62 (o) to 63 (n) show the state in which the button effect of the present embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In the button effect of the present embodiment, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for the button effect prior to the start of the special figure variation game, and various effects for prompting the player to press the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, the case where the button effect is performed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 62 (o) shows a state in which the button effect is started during the reach effect. In the button effect of this example, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, three images imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a line in a row substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d. In the upper part of the image simulating the three chance buttons 136, the text "3 sets of SP reach development!" Is displayed, and in the upper part, the text "Ready" is displayed.

  FIG. 62 (p) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect in the present embodiment, three operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. The character string "PUSH!" Is displayed at the top of the three button images, and the character string "Go" is displayed at the top. Below the three button images, one common effective period image is displayed for the three button images. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero. From the state shown in FIG. 62 (p) to the state shown in FIG. 63 (r), the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect overlap.

  FIG. 62 (q) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 in a state where the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are being executed in an overlapping manner. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 62 (r) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. The figure shows a state in which the display mode of the special view 1 hold icon a2 has been changed from the button hold icon image to an image resembling the head of a youth, triggered by the reception of the first press of the chance button 136. The effect by the button hold icon in this example is changed from the button hold icon image to an image imitating the head of the adolescent, and a predetermined advance notice is given. In this example, when the depression by the chance button 136 is received when the effect by the button hold icon and the button effect are executed in duplicate, the effect by the button hold icon is processed with priority. There is. In the effective period image of the button effect, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation effective period is further shortened is notified.

  FIG. 63 (a) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 while the button effect is being executed. The pressing of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 63 (b) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the first pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 63C shows the second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the button image on the left side was displayed. In the second effect, a part of the central button image and a part of the effective period image are hidden by the panda image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 63D shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image is displayed in a reduced size and the reduced size display of the panda image makes it possible to visually recognize all the central button image and the valid period image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 63E shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 a second time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 63F shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed for the second time, the central button image is erased by the button erasure animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 63G shows a state in which the second effect is performed after the button deletion animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the center button image was displayed. The panda image is displayed with a size that hides a part of the panda image adjacent to the left and a part of the valid period image. In this way, the second effect may hide another second effect. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 63 (h) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the central panda image is reduced and displayed, and the panda image on the left side and the effective period image are all visible by reduced display of the panda image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 63I shows a state in which the display mode of the button image on the right side in the effect display area 208d has changed from “normal” to “vibration + rotation”. As described above, the display mode of the button image may change in the middle of the operation valid period. In addition, the button mode may be changed according to the change in the display mode of the button image. In some cases, it is possible to give notice of the change.

  FIG. 63 (j) shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 for the third time while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 63 (k) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the third chance button 136 is pressed, the button image on the right side is erased by the button erasing animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  Further, in the button deletion animation shown in FIG. 63 (k), since the button image having the display mode of "vibration + rotation" is displayed, the button display animation of which the display mode is "normal" is displayed as the button deletion animation The effect image is displayed that is larger than the effect image. As described above, in the button rendition of the present embodiment, button images can be displayed in a plurality of animation modes, and a button image having a display mode of “vibration + rotation” is used as the first animation mode, or the first animation As a second animation mode different from the mode, a button image whose display mode is "normal" can be used. By doing this, the button display itself may be able to function as a notice due to the difference in the animation mode of the button display.

  FIG. 63 (l) shows a state in which the second effect is performed after the button deletion animation. As a second effect, a panda image is displayed at the position where the button image on the right side was displayed. The panda image is displayed so as to hide a part of the central panda image. In this way, the second effect may hide another second effect. Since the operation effective period has passed, the effective period image is not displayed.

  FIG. 63 (m) shows a state in which the second effect in the button effect is being executed. In the second effect, the panda image on the right side is reduced and displayed, and it is informed that three panda images of the same size are aligned in a single horizontal row and the condition of “3 sets of SP reach development!” Is satisfied. It is done.

  FIG. 63 (n) shows the first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In this example, as the first effect, the same panda image as the character A shown in FIG. 20A is displayed large on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and the character “SP development” is displayed on the center right side. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach. Moreover, in this example, the image of the holding icon is erased and not displayed until the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 63 (o) to FIG. 63 (r) is finished after the first effect.

  FIG. 63 (o) to FIG. 63 (r) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 63 (o) shows a state in which SP reach effect is started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . At the top of the effect display area 208d, a character string of "punitive reach" is displayed. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image in which two warriors face each other is displayed. FIG. 63 (p) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during the SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. In FIG. 63 (q), the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach effect proceeds to the next scene, and an image in which the warrior shouts "It's a game!" Is displayed. FIG. 63 (r) shows that the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed at the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who won the right and the figure of the warrior who lost it are displayed on the left. At the top of the screen, the word "win" is displayed.

  FIG. 64 (a) shows a state in which the left middle right design display area 208a to 208c is enlarged from the reduction display to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative design display device 208 and displayed normally. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 64 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure "special figure A" of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "A" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit . After this, the 15R special big hit game is started.

  FIG. 64 (c) shows the big hit game end effect that the 15R special big hit game is finished. After the big hit game, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed again in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character string of "probable change: right strike" It is displayed. As for the special figure 1 hold, since the big hit game has passed, the display mode of all the hold icons is the default normal display.

The following is a summary of the embodiment (2-13) described above.
The pachinko machine 100 has, for example, a chance button 136 as an operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and a plurality of effect display areas 208d as a display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays. For example, a decorative symbol display device 208 as effect means capable of at least performing various types of effects is provided. At least one of the plurality of types of display is, for example, the display of the chance button image as the first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of display is, for example, the button hold as the second display. It is a display of an icon. The display of the chance button image is a display including at least a display suggesting the chance button 136, and a display of the button hold icon is also a display including at least a display suggesting the chance button 136.
The effect display area 208d can at least display the first number (for example, three) of the chance button images. The display of the chance button image can be started at least during, for example, the period of the special feature variation game as a first period, and the display of the button holding icon is as a second period, for example, during the special feature variation game period It can at least start. The chance button 136 is controlled such that acceptance of the operation becomes effective in a plurality of periods, and at least one of the plurality of periods is, for example, an operation effective period in the button effect as a first effective period. The at least one of the plurality of periods is, for example, a second effective period, which is an operation effective period in the effect by the button hold icon. The first period is a period including at least a part of the operation effective period in the button effect, and the second period is a period including at least a portion of the operation effective period in the effect by the button hold icon.
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is, for example, an effect of informing the result of the button operation as the first effect, and at least one of the plurality of types of effects is, for example, the second effect. It is an advance notice announcement effect by the hold icon. The effect of notifying the result of the button operation is an effect performed at least in relation to the display of the chance button image, and the pre-read notice effect by the hold icon is an effect performed at least in relation to the display of the button hold icon. The effect of notifying the result of the button operation is at least an effect that can be performed when the number of times the chance button 136 is operated during the operation effective period of the button effect reaches a second number (for example, three). The first number is two or more, the second number is two or more, and the second period is a period that may overlap with the first period.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a button display relating to another second effect appears in addition to a plurality of button displays corresponding to the first effect, so that the game console having a feature in the display means is provided. Can be provided. In addition, variations of button effects may be able to be increased.

  In addition, the effect display area 208d can at least display an effective period image, for example, as a third display capable of suggesting an operation effective period in the button effect, and the effect display means 208d can display the effect by the button hold icon. It does not display that can suggest the operation effective period. In the button effect, the effective period is displayed, and in the effect by the button hold icon, the effective period is not displayed, so the interest of the game may be improved.

  Moreover, the operation effective period in the effect by the button hold icon is a period longer than the operation effective period in the button effect. Since the effective period of operation in the effect by the button hold icon with no effective period display is longer than the effective period of operation with the button effect with effective period display, the button operation for the effect of notifying the result of the button operation by the effective period display It may be possible to prompt.

  In addition, for example, the first sub-control unit 400 as an advance notice means capable of at least executing a preliminary announcement for the special figure variation game and a preliminary announcement for the special figure variation game relating to suspension, for example, as a preliminary notice. For example, the first sub-control unit 400 as at least a pre-read advance notice means that can be executed, and the notice means causes the effect display area 208 d to notify the result of the button operation to the special figure change game The advance notice means can execute at least the advance notice by causing the effect display area 208d to perform the advance notice effect by the hold icon.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the button effect includes notification of the notice of the change, and the effect by the button hold icon includes notification of the advance notice, so the combination of the display type of the button and the type of notice In some cases, it is possible to increase the variation of the presentation.

  Further, for example, a special display area 208d defining a special view 1 reserve display area as a reserve display means capable of displaying at least special figure 1 reserve icons a1 and a2) as a plurality of types of reserve icons is provided. At 208d, it is possible to at least notify the number of reservations regarding the execution of the symbol variation display by the number of suspension icons displayed. At least one of the plurality of types of holding icons is, for example, a button holding icon as a first holding icon, and at least one of the plurality of types of holding icons is, for example, a second holding icon. It is a holding icon of the image imitating the head of the adolescent. The display of the button hold icon is a button hold icon. The pre-read notice effect by the hold icon includes at least an effect of changing the button hold icon into a hold icon of an image imitating the head of a youth in association with the operation of the chance button 136.

  Since the effect by the button hold icon includes the pre-reading notice of the hold icon, the hold icon is a display that is erased in relation to the start of the symbol variation display, and the display of the effective period regarding the second effective period is not performed. In some cases, it may be possible for the player to recognize.

  Further, the effect display area 208d does not display a new button hold icon during a period in which the button hold icon is displayed. Since a plurality of button holding icons are not displayed, it may be possible to prevent the button rendering from becoming too complicated.

  In addition, the pre-read notice effect by the hold icon is at least an effect that can be performed when the number of times the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period in the effect by the button hold icon becomes the third number, and the third The number is a number smaller than the second number. The number of button operations for performing the second effect is smaller than the number of button operations for performing the first effect.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208, when the operation effective period in the button effect and the operation effective period in the effect by the button hold icon overlap, pre-read advance notice effect by the hold icon rather than the effect of notifying the result of the button operation It is feasible first. In the button operation when the effective periods overlap, priority is given to the pre-reading advance notice effect by the hold icon, so by performing the pre-reading advance notice effect by the hold icon not suggesting the effective period first, the operation effect in the button effect is effective In some cases, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the button in order to perform both the advance notice effect by the hold icon and the effect of notifying the result of the button operation during the period.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208, when the operation effective period in the button effect and the operation effective period in the effect by the button hold icon overlap, the effect of notifying the result of the button operation rather than the advance notice effect by the hold icon It is feasible first.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, in the button operation in the case where the effective periods overlap, priority is given to the effect of notifying the result of the button operation, so the effect by the operation effect in the button effect and the effect by the button hold icon Even when the effective period of the operation overlaps, by giving priority to one of the effects, it may be possible to continue the button operation until the other effect is performed.

  Further, the effect display area 208d can display at least the display of the fourth number effective period image, and the fourth number is one. By setting the gauge display to one for a plurality of button displays (a plurality of button operation requests), it may be possible to inform the player of the common operation valid period in an easy-to-understand manner. The second display may be plural.

  Also, the second number may be the same as the first number. By doing this, since the button display and the number of button operations for performing the first effect are the same, it may be possible to easily inform the player of the number of button operations necessary to execute the first effect.

(Example 2-14)
Next, a specific example of the button image according to Example 14 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. Although a display mode of a plurality of button images is shown in FIG. 22 of the first embodiment, a button image of a display mode when the chance button 136 is viewed from obliquely above as shown in FIG. It may be In the button image shown in (a) of the figure, the character of “push” is displayed in the area indicating the pressed surface. The button image shown in FIG. 6B has the same outline as that of the button image shown in FIG. 6A, but the display color is different. Moreover, the character string "PUSH" is displayed on the area | region which shows a pressing surface. In this manner, it is possible to notify the advance notice of the success or failure of the change by changing the display of the color or the pressed surface with the same outline. The figure (c) is a button image of the display mode of the state which looked at the vertically long chance button 136 from diagonally upward, and the character image is added to the button side and a pressing surface. If at least a notification prompting a button operation is included, it can be recognized as a button, and the button image may include a character image or the like.

(Example 2-15)
Next, a specific example of a gauge image (effective period image) according to a fifteenth example of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 66 shows a specific example of a gauge image which can be displayed in place of the gauge image shown in, for example, FIG. In the gauge image shown in FIG. 66 (a), a character image is displayed in the gauge. It may be a gauge with a pattern or a pattern outside the character image. In the gauge image shown in FIG. 66 (b), the button image is displayed integrally with the gauge image. In this example, three button images are displayed in one horizontal row, but one or more button images may be used. The gauge image shown in FIG. 66 (c) includes an image suggesting the timing of button operation within the operation valid period. In this example, the display mode is such that three button images are respectively arranged at positions of times at which button operations in the gauge are to be performed. In the same figure (c-1), when the operation effective period has passed a little, the rod-like portion of the gauge image becomes somewhat short in the right direction, and a state in which the operation effective period becomes a little short is reported. The same figure (c-2) has shown the state which the rod-shaped part of a gauge image becomes short rightward, and the tip of a stick has overlapped with the button image on the left side after the operation effective period passes further. It indicates that this display is the timing when the chance button 136 is pressed first. The figure (c-3) has shown the state which the rod-shaped part of a gauge image becomes short rightward, and the tip of a stick has overlapped with the 2nd button image from the left after the operation effective period passes further. . It indicates that this display is the timing for pressing the chance button 136 for the second time.

(Example 2-16)
Next, special figure fluctuation gaming in a pachinko machine 100 according to a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 (a)-(f), 67 (a ')-(f'), and 67 (a '')-(f '') are each in this order in particular in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Figure fluctuation game is shown in time series. 68 (a)-(f), 68 (a ')-(f') and 68 (a '')-(f ''), respectively, in this order, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Figure fluctuation game is shown in time series. 68 (a) continues from FIG. 67 (f), FIG. 68 (a ′) continues from FIG. 67 (f ′), and FIG. 68 (a ′ ′) corresponds to FIG. Continued from f ′ ′). 69 (a)-(f), 69 (a ')-(f') and 69 (a '')-(f ''), respectively, in this order, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Figure fluctuation game is shown in time series. 69 (a) continues from FIG. 68 (f), FIG. 69 (a ′) continues from FIG. 68 (f ′), and FIG. 69 (a ′ ′) corresponds to FIG. Continued from f ′ ′). Further, FIGS. 69 (d) to 69 (i) show, in this order, the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Further, FIG. 69 (d) continues from FIG. 69 (c), FIG. 69 (c ') and FIG. 69 (c''). In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game and the following big hit game in time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIGS. 67 (a) to 69 (c) show the special figure changing game in the non-auto button mode in time series. FIG. 67 (a ')-FIG. 69 (c') have shown the special figure fluctuation game in 1st auto button mode in time series. FIG. 67 (a '')-FIG. 69 (c '') have shown the special figure fluctuation game in 2nd auto button mode in time series.

  Each of FIG. 67 (a), (a '), and (a' ') has shown the state in which the special figure fluctuation game was complete | finished. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 stop and display the first special figure "special figure I". In the special figure 1 and the fourth figure display area t1, t2 for special figure 2, the "x" picture which shows that the result of special figure change game is out is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variation game is out.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG.

  FIG. 67 (a) shows the state in the non-auto button mode. FIG. 67 (a ') shows the state in the first auto button mode. In the first auto button mode, the display mode is the same as the non-auto button mode, and it is difficult for the player to know that the auto button mode is currently in progress. FIG. 67 (a ′ ′) shows the state in the second auto button mode. In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and the player is notified that the current mode is the auto button mode.

  Each of FIG. 67 (b), (b ') and (b' ') shows a state in which the following special figure 1 variation game is started and the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The special view variation display is being executed in the special view 1 display device 212, and it is informed that the special view 1 variation game is being executed in the fourth special symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. In the second auto button mode of FIG. 67 (b ′ ′), the character string “Auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208 d.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 67 (b '), the player sees that the display mode is the same as the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. 67 (b) and the player is currently in the auto button mode. It is in a difficult state. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 67 (b ′ ′), the character string “Auto in progress” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208 d to inform the player that the current mode is the auto button mode. It is done.

  In each of FIGS. 67 (c), (c ') and (c' '), the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced and displayed from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area. A state 208d indicates that the display area is enlarged at the center.

  The first auto button mode shown in FIG. 67 (c ') is displayed in the same display mode as the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. 67 (c), and the player knows that the auto button mode is currently in progress. It is in a difficult state. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 67 (c ′ ′), the character string “Auto in progress” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d to inform the player that the current mode is the auto button mode. It is done.

  FIG. 67 (d) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images imitating the chance button 136 are arranged substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d in a horizontal row, and further, the direction key 137 is displayed on the right side. The character string "PUSH" is displayed on the top of each of the images imitating two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 arranged in a row, and on the top of these, the characters "Stop symbol by button operation" A column is displayed, and the text "Ready" is displayed at the top.

  Although the explanatory display of the button effect is performed even in the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 67 (d ′), the button operation during the button effect is performed automatically, so the display mode of the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. Is displayed in a display mode in which the character string "PUSH" is deleted. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 67 (d ′ ′), no button effect is performed. For this reason, the explanation display of the button effect is not executed. In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 67E shows a state in which the button effect has been started. In the button effect, two operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction key 137 is displayed on the right An operation request image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) of the display mode is displayed. The character string "PUSH" is displayed at the top of each of two button images and one direction key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one direction key image is displayed above them. An image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero. The text "Go" is displayed at the top of the gauge image.

  The display mode of the start of the button effect in the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 67 (e ') and the character string "PUSH" shown in FIG. 67 (e) are also deleted. Is displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 67 (e ′ ′), only the character string “in auto” is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, but the button effect is not started. Therefore, no button display or gauge display is performed.

  FIG. 67 (f) shows a state in which the player first presses the direction key 137 instead of the chance button 136 while executing the button effect. The depression of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 67 (f '), the button effect is executed in a display mode in which the character string "PUSH" shown in FIG. 67 (f) is deleted. Moreover, the effective period image which shows the operation effective period of button production is displayed. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 67 (f ′ ′), another effect different from the button effect is executed. In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 68 (a) shows a state in which a button image delete animation (button delete animation) is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the direction key 137 is first pressed and received, the button image on the right (direction key image) is erased by the button erasing animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. This makes it easy to understand that the required number of operations has decreased once. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 68 (a ′), the button image on the left side is automatically deleted even though no button operation is performed. The character string "PUSH" is not displayed in the first auto button mode. Also, the button deletion animation shown in FIG. 68 (a) is not executed in the first auto button mode. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 68 (a ′ ′). In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 68 (b) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c when the direction key 137 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the direction key image on the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  Also in the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 68 (b '), the second effect to be executed next to the button deletion is shown while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a in response to the automatic button operation. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported. The character string "PUSH" is not displayed in the first auto button mode. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 68 (b ''). In another effect, the character string "3 on the left" is displayed to notify the left symbol display area 208a that "decoration 3" has been temporarily stopped. In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 68C shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 as the second button operation while the button effect is being executed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 68 (c '), the button operation is automatically performed. The character string "PUSH" is not displayed in the first auto button mode. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 68 (c ′ ′). In another effect, an image imitating "decoration 3" is displayed on the left side. In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 68 (d) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the pressing of the chance button 136 is received, the button image on the left side is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 68 (d '), the button image on the right side is automatically deleted even though no button operation is performed. The character string "PUSH" is not displayed in the first auto button mode. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 68 (d ′ ′). In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 68 (e) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a when the chance button 136 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the button image on the left side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  Also in the first automatic button mode shown in FIG. 68 (e '), in the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a triggered by an automatic button operation. There is. In the second effect, an image imitating “decoration 3” is displayed in the area where the button image on the right side of the effect display area 208 d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported. The character string "PUSH" is not displayed in the first auto button mode. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 68 (e ′ ′). In another effect, a character string "3 on the right" is displayed to notify the right symbol display area 208c that "decoration 3" has been temporarily stopped. In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 68 (f) shows a special effect that is performed during execution of the second effect in the middle of the operation valid period. In the effect, although the display mode of the button image displayed at the center of the effect display area 208b is "normal", it is changed to "vibration + rotation" to give notice of the change. Further, as the display mode of the gauge display, for example, the one in which the color of the gauge is "blue" changes to "yellow" to give notice of the change. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  Even if the display mode of the button image displayed at the center of the effect display area 208b in the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 68 (f ') is "normal", it changes to "vibration + rotation", We have indicated the change. In the first auto button mode, even if the button mode of the chance button 136 is not changed, it is possible to notify the player of the change in advance by button display. In addition, the button mode may be changed to give advance notice. Further, as the display mode of the gauge display, for example, the one in which the color of the gauge is "blue" changes to "yellow" to give notice of the change. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported. The character string "PUSH" is not displayed in the first auto button mode. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 68 (f ′ ′). In another effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed on the right. In the second auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 69A shows a state in which the player has pressed the chance button 136 as the third button operation during execution of the button effect. The button mode of the chance button 136 is the same as the display mode of the button image displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 69 (a ′), button operations are automatically performed. The character string "PUSH" is not displayed in the first auto button mode. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 68 (c ′ ′). In the second auto button mode, the character string "Auto" in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d is deleted.

  FIG. 69 (b) shows a state in which the button deletion animation is being performed while the button effect is being performed. When the third chance button 136 is pressed, the central button image is erased by the button erasing animation. In the middle of the erased animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. Also, in parallel with the button deletion animation, a gauge image deletion animation is executed in which the effect image is also deleted after the effect image is displayed instead of the gauge display.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 69 (b '), the button deletion animation is executed in the same display mode as the non-auto button mode shown in FIG. 69 (b). Thus, the button deletion animation may be executed in the first auto button mode, or the button deletion animation may or may not be performed for each button operation. Another effect is executed in the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 69 (b ′ ′).

  FIG. 69C shows a first effect to be executed after the second effect while the button effect is being executed. The first effect reports the result of button operation. In the present example, as a first effect, the character string “SP” is largely displayed between two “decorations 3” displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach.

  In the first auto button mode shown in FIG. 69 (c '), the same first effect as that shown in FIG. 69 (c) is executed. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach. In the second auto button mode shown in FIG. 69 (c ′ ′), as another effect, the same image as the character F shown in FIG. 25 (c) between two “decorations 3” displayed at the center of the effect display area 208 d Is displayed, and the text "It's SP reach" is displayed at the top of it. As a result, the player is notified that the reach effect is developed to the SP (super) reach.

  69 (d) to 69 (i) show the SP reach effect. FIG. 69 (d) shows a state in which the SP reach effect has been started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . At the top of the effect display area 208d, a character string of "punitive reach" is displayed. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image in which two warriors face each other is displayed. FIG. 69 (e) shows a state in which the deca button is displayed during the SP reach effect and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. In (f) of FIG. 69, the chance button 136 is pressed, the SP reach effect proceeds to the next scene, and an image in which the warrior shouts "It's a game!" Is displayed. FIG. 69 (g) shows that the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed at the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who won the right and the figure of the warrior who lost it are displayed on the left. At the top of the screen, the word "win" is displayed.

  FIG. 69 (h) shows a state in which the left middle right design display area 208a to 208c is displayed enlarged from the reduction display to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative design display device 208. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 69 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure "special figure A" of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "A" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit .

(Example 2-17)
Next, special figure fluctuation gaming in a pachinko machine 100 according to a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 stop and display the first special figure "special figure I". In the special figure 1 and the fourth figure display area t1, t2 for special figure 2, the "x" picture which shows that the result of special figure change game is out is displayed. "Decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stop-displayed in the left middle-right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the special figure variation game is out.

  Further, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that there are two reservations of the special view 1. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon display area displays the special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place pending, and the special figure 1 pending icon a2 corresponding to the second pending place on the right side thereof. It is displayed. Each of the special figure 1 suspension icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal suspension shown in FIG.

  FIG. 70 (a) shows the state in the third auto button mode. In the third auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d, and the player is notified that the current mode is the auto button mode.

  FIG. 70 (b) shows a state in which the next special view 1 change game is started and the special view 1 change game is being executed. The special view variation display is being executed in the special view 1 display device 212, and it is informed that the special view 1 variation game is being executed in the fourth special symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. In the third auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the reserve with the first place in the retention order is digested, and only one LED at the left end lights up in the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 1 is reserved. It is informed that it is one. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area, the special figure 1 reserve icon on the left disappears in correspondence with the saving of the reserve, and the special figure 1 reserve icon next to the right moves to the left as a special figure 1 reserve icon a1. Is displayed.

  FIG. 70 (c) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. ing. In the third auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 70 (d) shows a state where the button effect in the third auto button mode is started. In this example, the button effect is started before the reach effect is started. In the button effect, first, an explanatory display (tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. In the explanation display of the button effect, two images imitating the chance button 136 are arranged substantially in the center of the effect display area 208d in a horizontal row, and further, the direction key 137 is displayed on the right side. The character string "PUSH" is displayed on the top of each of the images imitating two chance buttons 136 and one direction key 137 arranged in a row, and on the top of these, the characters "Stop symbol by button operation" A column is displayed, and the text "Ready" is displayed at the top. In the third auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 70 (e) shows a state in which the button effect in the third auto button mode is started. In the button effect, two operation request images (button images) having a display form imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in a row in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d, and the direction key 137 is displayed on the right An operation request image (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “direction key image” or “button image”) of the display mode is displayed. The character string "PUSH" is displayed at the top of each of two button images and one direction key image, and one valid period common to the two button images and one direction key image is displayed above them. An image is displayed. The effective period image of this example has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and at the beginning, the entire period of the effective period is shown as a rod of a predetermined color in the frame shape, and a rod portion of the predetermined color It is displayed so as to be gradually shortened to the left. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero. The text "Go" is displayed at the top of the gauge image. In the third auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 70 (f) shows a state in which the player first presses the direction key 137 instead of the chance button 136 while executing the button effect in the third auto button mode. The depression of the direction key 137 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the direction key 137 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported. In the third auto button mode, a character string of "auto" is displayed in the lower right corner of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 70 (g) shows that the button operation performed by the player is effective during execution of the button effect in the third auto button mode, and a button image erasing animation (button erasing animation) is being executed. When the direction key 137 is pressed first and there is a button acceptance, the button image on the right side (direction key image) is erased by the button erasing animation. During the button deletion animation, an effect image is displayed instead of the button image. In addition, the character string "PUSH" at the top of the button image to be erased changes to an effect image in the middle of the button erase animation and then disappears. This makes it easy to understand that the required number of operations has decreased once. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 70 (h) shows a second effect to be executed next to the button deletion animation while the button effect is being executed in the third auto button mode. In the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c when the direction key 137 is pressed. In the second effect, an image imitating "decor 3" is displayed in the area where the direction key image on the right side of the effect display area 208d was displayed. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is further shortened is reported.

  FIG. 70 (e ') shows a modified example of the effect shown in FIG. 70 (e). This modification shows that the number of button images may be smaller than the number of button images in the non-automatic button effect. In the auto button state, since the button operation is automatically performed, it is sufficient for the player to recognize that the effect is the button effect, and therefore, the button display may be one.

  As described above, the button effect in the auto button mode can be performed in the same display mode as the button effect in the non-auto button mode. Further, in the auto button mode of this embodiment, the button operation by the player is also effectively accepted to perform a predetermined effect.

The following is a summary of the embodiments (2-16 to 17) described above.
The pachinko machine 100 has, for example, a chance button 136 as an operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and a presentation display area 208d as a display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays. For example, the decorative symbol display device 208 as an effect means capable of at least executing an effect notifying the result of a button operation as one effect, and a mode control means capable of at least executing switching control of a plurality of types of modes. For example, the first sub control unit 400 is provided. At least one of the plurality of types of modes is, for example, a non-auto button mode as a first mode, and at least one of the plurality of types of modes is, for example, an auto button mode as a second mode It is. The non-auto button mode is a mode in which the chance button 136 is not automatically operated, and the auto button mode is a mode in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated.
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a display of a button image including, for example, a character string of "PUSH" as the first display, and at least one of the plurality of types of displays is the second For example, it is display of a button image not including the characters “PUSH” or display of the button image as a display. The display of the button image containing the character string "PUSH" is a display corresponding at least to the non-auto button mode, and the display of the button image not containing the characters "PUSH" is a display corresponding at least to the auto button mode . The display of the button image including the character string "PUSH" can be started at least, for example, in the execution period of the special figure variation game as the first period, and the display of the button image not including the characters "PUSH" is It is possible to start at least in the execution period of the special figure change game. The display of the button image including the character string “PUSH” is a display including at least a display suggesting the chance button 136. The execution period of the special feature variation game is, for example, a period including at least a part of the operation effective period as the third period of the period during which the reception regarding the operation of the chance button 136 is effective.
The effect display area 208 d can at least display a display of a button image including a character string “PUSH” which is the first number (for example, 3). The effect of notifying the result of the button operation can be performed at least when the number of times the chance button 136 has been operated in the operation valid period becomes a second number (for example, 2). The first number is two or more, and the second number is two or more. The display of the button image not including the characters “PUSH” is at least partially different from the display of the button image including the character string “PUSH”.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the display of the button effect differs between the auto button mode and the non-auto button mode, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the display means. In addition, there are cases where the mode can be easily recognized due to the difference between the first display and the second display.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, an effect display area 208d as decorative symbol display means capable of at least performing decorative symbol variation display. The effect display area 208d can at least execute, for example, the fluctuation display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right pattern display regions 208a to 208c as the first decorative symbol fluctuation display. The display of the button image including the character string "PUSH" can be started at least during the execution period of the special figure variation game of the variation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the non-auto button mode, The display of the button image not including the characters "PUSH" can be started at least during the execution period of the special figure variation game of the variation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the auto button mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it may be easy to recognize whether or not the operation of the button is necessary by clarifying the part where the display is different depending on the mode in the same kind of decorative symbol variation display. .

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with, for example, the first sub-control unit 400 as a notice means capable of at least executing, for example, a notice of whether or not to develop the special game with the special map change game. ing. The display of the button image including the character string of "PUSH" is a display that is at least a part of the notice of the success or failure of the special figure variation game, and the display of the button image not including the characters of "PUSH" is the special figure variation It is a display that becomes at least a part of the notice of the game. The display of the button image including the character string of "PUSH" may not be started during the execution period of the special figure variation game in the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and the characters of "PUSH" The display of the button image not including may not be started during the execution period of the special figure fluctuation game in the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c.

  Further, the effect display area 208d can at least execute the variable display of another decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display region 208a to 208c as the second decorative symbol variable display. The display of the button image including the character string "PUSH" is, for example, another special view change game execution period as another special view change game execution period of another decorative symbol change display in the non-auto button mode. The display of the button image that can be started at least and does not include the character string "PUSH" can be started at least during the execution period of another special-pattern variation game of the variation display of another decoration symbol in the auto button mode. By doing this, it is possible to execute the button effect even in another decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of the button image including the character string "PUSH" is a display including at least the display of the operation period image as a display capable of suggesting the operation valid period, and a button not including the character string "PUSH" The display of the image is a display not including at least a display capable of suggesting the operation effective period.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the display of the effective period is not performed in the auto button mode. In the auto button mode, since the button operation is automatically performed, it is not necessary to display the effective period, and there is a case where it is possible to reduce the risk of the player making a false recognition (a false recognition that the button operation is necessary). .

  The display of the button image not including the characters "PUSH" is a display including at least the display suggesting the chance button 136, and the effect display area 208d is a character of "PUSH" which is a third number (for example, 0) And the third number is a number smaller than the first number. According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the number of button displays in the auto button mode is smaller than the number of displays in the non-auto button mode.

  Also, when the third number is one, the button display in the auto button mode is one, so the player recognizes that the button effect has been made in the non-auto button mode while thinning out the number of button displays. There are cases where you can Further, the number of displayed buttons in the auto button mode may be larger than the first number, or may be the same. Moreover, the button display may not be performed in the auto button mode. In this case, if manual button operation is enabled, it may be possible to function as a hidden button effect.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 can at least execute, as a second effect, an effect of replacing the display of the button image with the display of another image. The effect of replacing the display of the button image with the display of another image is at least executable each time the chance button 136 is operated in the non-auto button mode, and the effect of replacing the display of the button image with the display of another image is It is characterized in that the effect is at least executable in the operation valid period in the auto button mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effect is an effect performed for each operation of the operation means (an effect performed during the operation valid period in the automatic button mode), the second effect is performed in the non-automatic button mode. The effect that can be performed for each operation may also be able to be performed at a timing that causes no trouble in the auto button mode.

  When the chance button 136 is operated during the operation effective period in the auto button mode, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the effect of replacing the display of the button image with the display of another image in relation to the operation of the chance button 136 Is at least feasible. According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effect can be executed even by the button operation in the auto button mode, the player may be able to impart a sense of accomplishment by the button operation.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 70 again.
(1-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is:
Operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means (for example, effect display area 208d) capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
Rendering means capable of at least a plurality of types of rendering (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a button image),
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of an effective period image),
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The second display is displayed at least in a period in which the reception of the operation of the operation means (for example, depression of the chance button 136) is valid (hereinafter referred to as "third period (for example, operation effective period)"). And
The first indication is an indication that can at least start in a first period,
The second display is a display that can be at least initiated in a second time period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display having a first number (for example, 3);
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect of notifying a result of button operation (see FIG. 47C)).
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect in which a panda image appears at the position of the erased button image (see FIG. 46 (o))).
The first effect is at least executable when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number (for example, 2).
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The second effect may be executed by concealing at least a part of the first display as the first number (for example, an effect of concealing a part of three button images) Is
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, at least a part of the plurality of button displays is concealed by the second effect, so it is possible to provide a game console having a feature in the display means. In addition, the appearance of the second effect may be able to improve the interest of the game even during the effective period of the button operation. Also, there are cases where the second effect can be made more prominent than the button display.
In addition, the above-mentioned “the effect that the second effect may be executed by concealing at least a part of the first display to be the first number” is “the second effect is It may be an effect that may hide at least a part of one of the first indications of the first indication which is the first number, or “the second effect is the first indication of the first number” It may be an effect that may hide at least a part of each of the plurality of first displays of the one display.
In addition, “the second effect may be an effect to be executed by always hiding at least a part of the first display to be the first number”, or “the second effect may be the first effect. The effect may be that the display must at least partially hide at least a part of the first display of the first display that is the number of It may be an effect that always hides at least a part of each of the plurality of first displays.

(1-2) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The second effect is at least an effect that can be performed for each reception of the operation of the operation means.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effect is an effect performed for each button operation, it is possible to perform the first effect by performing the second effect before the first effect is performed. There are cases where it can be expected in the production of.

The second effect is an effect performed for each operation of the operation means, but the first display may be hidden by all the second effects performed for each operation, or a part of The configuration may be such that the first display is hidden only by the second effect performed by the operation and started.
The second effect is not related to the operation of the operation means (for example, step-up notice, advance notice, cut-in notice, notice such as popular drawing effect, etc.) It may be information related to the game such as time saving, latency mode, etc.).
Even when the second effect is performed, there may be an effect (such as the fourth symbol) that is not necessarily hidden.

The above pachinko machine 100,
The second effect is characterized in that the first display can be started after the display is started.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effect is an effect started after the display of the button display is started, even if the button display is hidden by the second effect, the button display is displayed. Since the second effect is started after the start, it may be possible for the player not to miss the button display. Note that the second effect may be an effect that can be started earlier than when the first display is started.

(1-3) It is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The display means can erase at least one of the first display (for example, display of a button image on the left side) in response to acceptance of one operation of the operation means (for example, first press of the chance button 136) Means,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed while hiding at least a part of another first display (for example, display of a central button image) whose display is continued.
The thing is special.

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, it is possible to hide a part of the button display still displayed after the button display is erased. Further, there are cases where the area where the button display is erased can be effectively used as an execution area of the second effect.
Note that the second effect may be a configuration in which the display of a plurality of buttons may be erased by receiving an operation of a single operation means, or a configuration in which a button display of one is erased by receiving a plurality of operations. Alternatively, a plurality of button displays may be erased by receiving a plurality of operations.

  The second effect may not hide the first display even if the first display is continued even after the first display is erased. For example, the second effect is an effect that causes one of a plurality of types of notices to appear, and the first notice can hide the first display, and the second notice can indicate the first display. May not be hidden. Also, even if the second effect of the same type (for example, the third notice) is hidden or not hidden due to, for example, a difference in the number of button operations (first operation and second operation) There may be.

The above pachinko machine 100,
The second effect hides the first display when there is no first display whose display is continued after the first display is erased (in response to the reception of the operation means) It is characterized by no effect.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, when there is no button display after erasing the button display, the button display may not be hidden.

(1-4) It is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display of the third number,
The third number is one,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player can recognize the common operation effective period by making one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (a plurality of button operation requests). There are cases where it can be easily reported. The second display may be plural.

(1-5) It is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The second effect is an effect that may hide at least a part of the second display.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the second effect may hide the gauge display, so the second effect may be made more noticeable.
Note that the second effect may be configured to hide at least a part of the second display, may be configured to hide only the first display, or is configured to hide only the second display. It may be. When a plurality of second displays are displayed, one of them may be hidden, or the other may be hidden. Also, the second effect may not hide the second display.

(1-6) It is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a button display,
The second display is a gauge display,
The third number is one,
The display means is a means capable of arranging at least a plurality of the button displays in a first direction and displaying them.
The gauge display is a display capable of at least suggesting the remaining period of the third period by reducing the length of the gauge.
The gauge display is a display in which the length of the gauge decreases in a second direction,
The second direction is the same as the first direction,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the direction in which the button display is erased and the direction in which the gauge decreases are the same direction, so even if the second display hides the second display, the gauge In some cases, it may be possible to inform the player of the remainder of (the remaining period of the effective period) in an easy-to-understand manner. The first direction and the second direction may be different directions.

(1-7) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The second number is the same number as the first number,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the button display and the number of button operations for executing the first effect are the same, the player is required to operate the button necessary for executing the first effect. In some cases, it may be easy to understand.
The second number may be different from the first number. If the second number is greater than the first number, it may be possible to indicate that multiple button operations are necessary by displaying a plurality of buttons, and the second number is less than the first number. Since the first effect is executed before the player performs the button operation by the number of button displays, the first effect may be able to be surely executed.
In addition, it is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The first number is three,
It is characterized by

(1-8) It is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of modes,
At least one of the plurality of aspects is the first aspect (for example, the button display aspect is “normal”),
At least one of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect (for example, the button display aspect is "vibration"),
The second aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, the button display itself may be able to function as a notice depending on the difference in the mode of the button display.
When the button display functions as a notice, the modes do not have to be different for all button effects. In addition, the third aspect may be provided.

(1-9) It is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
It is characterized by

  The effect means may be configured not to include the display means. For example, the effect means may be a movable body that is at least movable in front of the display means.

(1-10) It is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The second effect is an effect not at least related to the operation of the operation means,
The second effect is a notice,
It is characterized by

  The notice includes not only a notice about the change game but also a advance notice (such as an effect including at least a hold icon and an effect relating to the advance notice).

(1-11) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The first display is an animation display,
The second display is an animation display,
It is characterized by

The above pachinko machine 100,
At least in front of the display means is movable movable means,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed by hiding at least a part of the first display by the operation of the movable means.
It is characterized by

(2-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is:
Operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means (for example, effect display area 208d) capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
Rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least executing a first effect (for example, an effect notifying a result of a button operation);
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a button image),
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of an effective period image),
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The second display is displayed at least in a period (hereinafter, referred to as a “third period” (for example, an operation valid period)) in which acceptance of the operation of the operation means (for example, depression of the chance button 136) is valid. And
The first display is at least an animation display (for example, button animation),
The second display is at least an animation display (e.g., an end-of-life animation),
The first indication is an indication that can at least start in a first period,
The second display is a display that can be at least initiated in a second time period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display having a first number (for example, 3);
The first effect is at least executable when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number (for example, 2).
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The thing is special.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it is possible to execute animation display related to the first display, and to perform animation display with respect to a plurality of button displays. Can provide Also, in some cases, it is possible to prompt the button operation in comparison with the still image display by the animation display.

(2-2) It is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, a button-deleted image),
The third display is animation display (for example, button deletion animation or valid period image deletion animation),
The third display is at least a display that can be started in connection with the operation means being operated.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since animation display can be performed in association with the button operation, it may be possible to prompt the button operation.
Also, the third display may be a display that is executed without being related to the operation of the operating means.

(2-3) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The first display is at least an erasable display in relation to the operation of the operation means,
The third display is an erasing animation (hereinafter, referred to as a “first erasing animation (for example, button erasing animation)”) that can be performed when the first display is erased.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it may be possible to notify that the pressing of the chance button by the player has been accepted by executing the deletion animation of the button display.

(2-4) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The effect means is means capable of at least executing a second effect (for example, an effect (see FIG. 55H) in which the button image changes to the display of the “excellent” image or the display of the “good” image)
The second effect is at least a startable effect related to the operation of the operation means,
The second effect is at least a startable effect after the first erasing animation is performed.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effect is an effect that can be started after the deletion animation of the button display, the second effect may be able to be highlighted.
Also, the second effect may be an effect that can be started during the execution of the first deletion animation or before the start of the first deletion animation.

(2-5) It is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The second display is at least an erasable display in association with the operation of the operation means,
The third display is an erasing animation (hereinafter, referred to as “second erasing animation (for example, valid period image erasing animation)”) that can be performed when the second display is erased.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, it is possible to execute the deletion animation of the gauge display.

(2-6) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The second display is a gauge display (for example, an image in the shape of a long rectangular frame),
The gauge display is a display capable of at least suggesting a remaining period of the third period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced.
The gauge display is a display capable of at least notifying that the third period ends when the length of the gauge becomes 0,
The second erasing animation is an animation in which the length of the gauge is 0 even when the length of the gauge remains in relation to the operation of the operation means in the third period. An animation that at least includes
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, by displaying an animation of 0 by displaying the length of the gauge, it is easily informed that the button operation corresponding to the gauge display to be erased or the button display has been accepted. There is a possibility.

(2-7) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of animation modes,
At least one of the plurality of animation modes is a first animation mode (for example, deca-button display),
At least one of the plurality of animation modes is a second animation mode (for example, a button display mode other than a deca-button display),
The second animation mode is an animation mode different from the first animation mode.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, the button display itself may be able to function as a notice due to the difference in the animation mode of the button display.

(2-8) It is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display of the third number,
The third number is one,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player can recognize the common operation effective period by making one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (a plurality of button operation requests). There are cases where it can be easily reported. The second display may be plural.

(2-9) It is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The second number is the same number as the first number,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the button display and the number of button operations for executing the first effect are the same, the player can know the number of times the button is operated to perform the first effect. It may be easy to notify.
The second number may be different from the first number. If the second number is greater than the first number, it may be possible to indicate that multiple button operations are necessary by displaying a plurality of buttons, and the second number is less than the first number. Since the first effect is executed before the player performs the button operation by the number of button displays, the first effect may be able to be surely executed.
In addition, it is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The first number is three,
It is characterized by

(2-10) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
It is characterized by

  The effect means may be configured not to include the display means. For example, the effect means may be a movable body that is at least movable in front of the display means.

(3-1) A pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is:
A plurality of operating means (for example, chance button 136, direction key 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means (for example, effect display area 208d) capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
Rendering means capable of at least a plurality of types of rendering (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (e.g., chance button 136),
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, direction key 137),
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a chance button image),
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of a direction key image),
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the first operation means,
The second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the second operation means,
The first display is a display that can be started at least in a first period (for example, an execution period of a button effect),
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect of erasing a button image and displaying another image),
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (for example, an effect of erasing the direction key image and displaying another image).
The first effect is at least a startable effect related to the operation of the first operation means (e.g., depression of the chance button 136),
The second effect is at least a startable effect related to the operation of the second operation means (for example, depression of the direction key 137).
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, there are a plurality of operation means, the operation means and the effect are in correspondence, and the order of effects is determined by the operation order of the plurality of operation means Can provide a game console with Moreover, there are cases where it is possible to select an effect corresponding to the operation means.
The correspondence between the first display and the first operation means and the second display and the second operation means may not be unique. For example, the first display may correspond to the second operation means, or any operation means is effective regardless of the type of the first display or the second display. May be

(3-2) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The first operation means is means for which at least the reception of the operation of the first operation means is effective in a second period (for example, an operation effective period),
The second operation means is means for which at least the reception of the operation of the second operation means is effective during the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the second period,
The effect means is a means capable of at least starting the first effect when the first operation means is operated in the second period,
The effect means is a means capable of at least starting the second effect when the second operation means is operated during the second period.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the operation effective periods of the plurality of operation means are the same, the interest of the game may be improved by operating the plurality of operation means in one operation effective period.

(3-3) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The effect means is a means capable of starting the first effect earlier than the second effect when the first condition is established,
The effect means is means capable of starting the second effect earlier than the first effect when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition established when the first operation means is operated prior to the second operation means being operated in the second period,
The second condition is a condition that holds when the second operation means is operated prior to the first operation means being operated during the second period.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the effects corresponding to the operation means operated earlier are performed first, there is a case where the player can select the appearance order of the first effect and the second effect. is there.

The above pachinko machine 100,
The rendering means is means capable of performing only the first rendering when only the first condition is satisfied in the second period,
The effect means is a means capable of executing only the second effect when only the second condition is satisfied in the second period.
It is characterized by

  Here, "only the first effect" or "only the second effect" may be only one of the first effect and the second effect. In addition, “only the first effect” or “only the second effect” may be only one of the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect described below.

(3-4) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The display means is means capable of at least performing the first display to be a first number (for example, 2);
The display means is a means capable of at least performing the second display of a second number (for example, 1),
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect (for example, an effect of forcibly displaying a decorative symbol (see FIG. 59)),
The third effect is at least executable when the third condition is established,
The third condition is satisfied at least when the first operation means is operated the number of times to be the first number, and the second operation means is operated the number of times to be the second number. Is the condition,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, there is a third effect as effects appearing in multiple operations, and there are a plurality of operation means, so the need for the first operation means and the second operation means In some cases, notification can be made in an easy-to-understand manner by matching the number of operation times with the number of displays.

The above pachinko machine 100,
The third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the second period ends.

  A third effect may occur at the end of the operation effective period. The third effect may not be performed when the third condition is not satisfied at the end of the operation effective period.

(3-5) It is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The first operation means is a means capable of at least taking a plurality of states (for example, a plurality of button modes (“normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, “light emission”, etc.));
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state (for example, the button mode is “normal”),
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state (for example, the button mode is "vibration"),
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The first display can be displayed at least in a plurality of display modes (for example, “normal”, “vibration”, “vibration + rotation”, “deca-button display”, etc.),
At least one of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode (for example, "normal"),
At least one of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode (for example, "vibration"),
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode at least corresponding to the first state,
The second display mode is a display mode corresponding at least to the second state.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, variations may be increased between the button state and the display mode depending on the display mode according to the state of the first operation means.
The first operation means is a chance button 136 capable of rotation, vibration and light emission, and the second operation means may be the direction key 137 or a combination of other operation means. The operation means may be arbitrarily combined, and both the first operation means and the second operation means may be configured to be capable of taking a plurality of states.
Further, the first display mode may be configured to correspond to the second state, and the second display mode may be configured to correspond to the first state.

(3-6) It is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, display of an effective period image),
The third display is a display capable of at least suggesting the second period,
The display means is a means capable of at least performing the third display of the third number,
The third number is one,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player can recognize the common operation effective period by making one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (a plurality of button operation requests). There are cases where it can be easily reported. The third display may be plural.
In addition, it is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The sum of the first number and the second number is three,
It is characterized by

(3-7) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
It is characterized by

  The effect means may be configured not to include the display means. For example, the effect means may be a movable body that is at least movable in front of the display means.

(4-1) A pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is:
Operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means (for example, effect display area 208d) capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
Rendering means capable of at least a plurality of types of rendering (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game console equipped with
The reception regarding the operation of the operation means is at least valid in a first valid period (for example, a valid period of operation with a button effect),
The reception regarding the operation of the operation means is at least valid in a second valid period (for example, a valid period of operation in effect by a button hold icon),
The second valid period is a valid period that is at least partially different from the first valid period,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a chance button image),
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of a button hold icon);
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display having a first number (for example, three);
The first display is a display that can be started at least during a first period (for example, during a special map variation game period),
The second display is a display that can be started at least during a second period (for example, during a special map variation game period),
The first period is a period including at least a part of the first effective period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the second effective period,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect of notifying the user of the result of the button operation),
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (e.g., advance notice effect with a hold icon),
The first effect is an effect to be performed at least in association with the first display,
The second effect is an effect performed at least in relation to the second display,
The first effect is at least executable when the number of times the operating means is operated in the first effective period reaches a second number (for example, three).
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The second period is a period that may overlap with the first period,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a button display relating to another second effect appears in addition to a plurality of button displays corresponding to the first effect, so that the game console having a feature in the display means is provided. Can be provided. In addition, variations of button effects may be able to be increased. Also, the second period may not overlap with the first period. For example, when the second effect is the effect by the button holding icon, since the display timing of the button holding icon (due to the winning timing to the start winning opening of the gaming ball) is irregular, the two periods overlap In this case, any configuration may be used as long as the above content is at least satisfied. In addition, you may further provide the 3rd display which suggests an operation means.

(4-2) It is the above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a display capable of suggesting the first effective period (hereinafter, referred to as “third display (for example, display of effective period image)”).
The display means is a means which does not perform display capable of suggesting the second effective period.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the effective period display is performed in the button effect and the effective period display is not performed in the effect by the button holding icon, the interest of the game may be improved.

The above pachinko machine 100,
The second effective period is a period longer than the first effective period,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effective period without the effective period display is longer than the first effective period with the effective period display, the button operation for the first effect is performed by the effective period display. May be able to
Also, the display means may provide a display capable of suggesting a second effective period, or there is one display capable of suggesting a period in both the first effective period and the second effective period. May be
Also, the second valid period may be a shorter valid period than the first valid period. For example, in the example of the button hold icon, when the display of the button hold icon is hold 1 (erased in relation to the start of the next symbol variation display), the operation effective period corresponding to the button hold is It may be shorter than the effective period of

(4-3) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
At least a notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least executing a notice (for example, a notice of success or failure of the special figure change game);
(E.g., a first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least advance preview notice (e.g., advance notice of special game variation game related to suspension).
The notice means is means capable of at least executing the notice by causing the effect means to perform the first effect,
The pre-reading advance notice means is means capable of at least executing the pre-reading advance notice by causing the effect means to perform the second effect.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the button effect includes notification of the notice of the change, and the effect by the button hold icon includes notification of the advance notice, so the combination of the display type of the button and the type of notice In some cases, it is possible to increase the variation of the presentation.
In addition, the first effect may be the advance notice and the second effect may be the notice, or both effects may be notices, and both effects may be advance notice.

(4-4) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
Hold display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of hold icons (for example, special figure 1 hold icons a1 and a2) (for example, effect display area 208d defining a special figure 1 hold display area);
The holding display means is a means capable of at least informing the number of holdings regarding the execution of the symbol variation display by the number of the holding icons to be displayed,
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon (e.g., a button hold icon);
At least one of the plurality of types of pending icons is a second pending icon (e.g., a pending icon indicating a predetermined big hit reliability),
The second display is the first hold icon,
The first hold icon is a button hold icon,
The second effect is an effect including at least an effect of changing the button hold icon to the second hold icon in relation to the operation of the operation means.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the effect by the button hold icon includes the advance notice of the hold icon, so the hold icon is a display that is erased in relation to the start of the symbol variation display, the second There is a case where the player can be made to recognize even without displaying the term of validity regarding the term of validity of.

(4-5) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The hold display means is means for not displaying a new button hold icon while the button hold icon is displayed.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, a plurality of button hold icons are not displayed, so that it may be possible to prevent the button effect from becoming too complicated.
In addition, even when the first hold icon is displayed, a new first hold icon may be displayed.

(4-6) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The second effect is at least executable when the number of times the operating means has been operated in the second effective period becomes a third number,
The third number is a number smaller than the second number,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the number of button operations for performing the second effect is smaller than the number of button operations for performing the first effect.
The third number may be one or two or more. In another effect, the third number may be larger than the second number.

(4-7) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
When the first effective period and the second effective period overlap, the effect means is a means capable of executing the second effect earlier than the first effect.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the second effect is prioritized in the button operation in the case where the effective periods overlap, so that the second effect in which the effective period is not suggested should be executed first. Thus, in some cases, it may be possible to prompt a button operation to perform both the second presentation and the first presentation during the first effective period.

(4-8) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
When the first effective period and the second effective period overlap, the effect means is means capable of executing the first effect earlier than the second effect.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, in the button operation in the case where the effective periods overlap, priority is given to the first effect, so even in the case where the first effective period and the second effective period overlap. By giving priority to the effect of the button operation may be able to be continued until the other effect is performed.
In addition to the operation means, it is possible to select whether to execute the first effect first or the second effect first by the operation of the second operation means (for example, the direction key 137). Good.
Moreover, the structure which performs the presentation corresponding to the button presentation which generate | occur | produced previously may be sufficient.

(4-9) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the third display having a fourth number,
The fourth number is one,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, the player can recognize the common operation effective period by making one gauge display for a plurality of button displays (a plurality of button operation requests). There are cases where it can be easily reported. The second display may be plural.

(4-10) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The second number is the same number as the first number,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the button display and the number of button operations for executing the first effect are the same, the player can know the number of times the button is operated to perform the first effect. It may be easy to notify.
The second number may be different from the first number. If the second number is greater than the first number, it may be possible to indicate that multiple button operations are necessary by displaying a plurality of buttons, and the second number is less than the first number. Since the first effect is executed before the player performs the button operation by the number of button displays, the first effect may be able to be surely executed.
The above pachinko machine 100,
The first number is three,
It is characterized by

(4-11) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 provided with the configuration, the effect means may not include the display means. For example, the effect means may be a movable body that is at least movable in front of the display means.

(4-12) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is:
A plurality of operating means (for example, chance button 136, direction key 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means (for example, effect display area 208d) capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
Rendering means capable of at least a plurality of types of rendering (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a chance button image),
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of a button hold icon);
The first display is a display including at least a display indicating a first operation means (for example, the chance button 136),
The second display is a display including at least a display indicating a second operation means (for example, the direction key 137),
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display having a first number (for example, three);
The first display is a display that can be started at least during a first period (for example, during a special map variation game period),
The second display is a display that can be started at least during a second period (for example, during a special map variation game period),
The first period is a period including at least a part of a period (for example, an operation effective period with a button effect) in which acceptance regarding the operation of the first operation means is valid,
The second period is a period including at least a part of a period during which the reception regarding the operation of the second operation means is valid (e.g., an operation valid period for effect by a button hold icon),
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect (for example, an effect of notifying the user of the result of the button operation),
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect (e.g., advance notice effect with a hold icon),
The first effect is an effect to be performed at least in association with the first display,
The second effect is an effect performed at least in relation to the second display,
The first effect is at least executable when the number of times the first operation means is operated in the first period reaches a second number (for example, three).
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The second period is a period that may overlap with the first period,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a button display relating to another second effect appears in addition to a plurality of button displays corresponding to the first effect, so that the game console having a feature in the display means is provided. Can be provided. In addition, variations of button effects may be able to be increased.

(5-1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is:
Operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means (for example, effect display area 208d) capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
Rendering means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A game console equipped with
The effect means is means capable of at least executing a first effect (for example, an effect of notifying a result of button operation),
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, display of a button image including a character string of "PUSH"),
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, display of a button image not including the characters “PUSH” or non-display of a button image).
The first display is a display at least corresponding to a first mode (for example, non-auto button mode),
The second display is a display at least corresponding to a second mode (for example, an auto button mode),
The first mode is a mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated.
The second mode is a mode in which the operation means is operated automatically,
The first display is a display that can be started at least in a first period (for example, a special drawing variation game execution period),
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The first period is a period including at least a part of a period (hereinafter, referred to as a “third period (for example, operation effective period)”) in which acceptance regarding the operation of the operation means is effective.
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display having a first number (for example, 3);
The first effect is at least executable when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number (for example, 2).
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The second display is a display at least partially different from the first display.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the display of the button effect differs between the auto button mode and the non-auto button mode, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by the display means. In addition, there are cases where the mode can be easily recognized due to the difference between the first display and the second display.
In addition, notification means for notifying whether it is the first mode or the second mode may be separately provided. In addition, the second display may be absent (no display may be the second display).

(5-2) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
A decorative symbol display unit (for example, effect display area 208d) capable of performing at least decorative symbol variation display;
The decorative symbol display means is a means capable of at least executing the first decorative symbol variation display (for example, the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c),
The first display is a display that can be started at least during the first period of the first decorative symbol variation display in the first mode,
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period of the first decorative symbol variation display in the second mode.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it may be easy to recognize whether or not the operation of the button is necessary by clarifying the part where the display is different depending on the mode in the same kind of decorative symbol variation display. .

The above pachinko machine 100,
It comprises a notice means (for example, the first sub control unit 400) capable of at least executing notices (for example, notice of success or failure of the special figure change game, notice of whether to develop to SP reach),
The first display is a display to be at least a part of the notice,
The second display is a display to be at least a part of the notice,
The first display is a display that may not be started during the first period in the first decorative symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that may not be started in the first period in the first decorative symbol variation display,
It is characterized by

The above pachinko machine 100,
The decorative symbol display means is means capable of at least executing a second decorative symbol variation display (for example, variation display of another decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c),
The first display is a display that can be started at least in a second period of the second decorative symbol variation display in the first mode (for example, an execution period of another special pattern variation game),
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the second period of the second decorative symbol variation display in the second mode.
It is characterized by
By doing this, it is possible to execute the button effect even in another decorative symbol variation display.

(5-3) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a display including at least a display capable of suggesting the third period (for example, a display of an operation period image),
The second display is a display not including at least a display capable of suggesting the third period.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the display of the effective period is not performed in the auto button mode. In the auto button mode, since the button operation is automatically performed, it is not necessary to display the effective period, and there is a case where it is possible to reduce the risk of the player making a false recognition (a false recognition that the button operation is necessary). .

(5-4) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display having a third number (for example, 0),
The third number is a number smaller than the first number,
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, the number of button displays in the auto button mode is smaller than the number of displays in the non-auto button mode.

The above pachinko machine 100,
The third number is one,
It is characterized by

Since the button display in the auto button mode is one, the player may be able to recognize that the button effect has been made in the non-auto button mode while thinning out the number of button displays.
Further, the number of displayed buttons in the auto button mode may be larger than the first number, or may be the same. Moreover, the button display may not be performed in the auto button mode. In this case, if manual button operation is enabled, it may be possible to function as a hidden button effect.

(5-5) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The effect means is means capable of at least executing a second effect (for example, an effect of replacing the display of a button image with another image),
The second effect is at least an effect that can be performed each time the operation means is operated in the first mode,
The second effect is an effect that can be performed at least in the third period in the second mode.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effect is an effect performed for each operation of the operation means (an effect performed during the operation valid period in the automatic button mode), the second effect is performed in the non-automatic button mode. The effect that can be performed for each operation may also be able to be performed at a timing that causes no trouble in the auto button mode.

(5-6) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
When the operation means is operated during the third period in the second mode, the effect means can perform at least the second effect in relation to the operation of the operation means. Is
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, since the second effect can be executed even by the button operation in the auto button mode, the player may be able to impart a sense of accomplishment by the button operation.

(5-7) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
It is characterized by

The effect means may be configured not to include the display means. For example, the effect means may be a movable body that is at least movable in front of the display means.
The auto button mode can be set by operating the direction key 137, the chance button 136 or the like while the demonstration screen in the non-game state is displayed. Further, the release of the audio button mode can be released in the same manner as the above setting, or can be released by a button operation in the automatic button mode. In the case of the latter, it may be possible to release only during the effect, or may be continued to the non-auto button mode thereafter.
The above pachinko machine 100,
The first number is three,
It is characterized by

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.
For example, in the embodiment 2-1, the second effect is executed after the button operation is accepted, and the next second effect is executed after the next button operation is accepted. When the second effect occurs, the next button operation may be performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, an aspect in which no effect or display is performed when there is a possibility that an effect or display may be performed is interpreted as an effect or display of "no effect" or "not displayed" is executed. Do.

  Further, the effective period of the button operation in the above embodiment is an example, and when the button effect appears at another trigger, an individual effective period of operation is naturally set. As the button effect, the display of a plurality of buttons need not necessarily be performed, and there may be a case where a single button operation may be performed at another trigger, or although one operation is required, it is A button display and one gauge display may be performed. Moreover, even if it is button effects performed at the same timing or timing, it may be performed by a combination of these. By doing this, it may be possible to function as a notice even with the number of button displays and gauge displays.

  Even when a plurality of button displays are simultaneously displayed, at least a part of the operation valid periods may be different from each other. As an example, at least one of the displayed button displays may be configured to start being displayed in a period other than the operation valid period. For example, displaying the button display before the operation valid period may notify in advance that it is necessary to perform a plurality of button operations.

  Although the button display is the same in that one of the multiple button displays is different from the other, for example, one (button display related to the most recent button operation) is illuminated by an effect or the like, and the other button display is darkened A mode (displayed relatively dark) or the like is included in one of the button displays different from the other.

  The contents described in relation to the button display may be appropriately applied to the gauge display as long as there is no trouble, and the contents described in relation to the gauge display may be appropriately displayed on the button display as long as no trouble occurs. It may apply. The various effects are configured to be started in association with the button operation, but may be configured to be started by another condition. For example, the start time of the effect may be determined in advance, and the button operation may not be performed during that time, or the operation may be performed by an operation of an operation means other than the button.

  The operation means is not limited to the button, and a touch sensor type operation means, a liquid crystal touch panel, a lever type operation means, an operation means by a proximity sensor, and the like can be appropriately used.

  For example, in Example 2-1, the second effect is an effect performed for each button operation, but when the number of button operations at which the first effect is performed reaches the second effect It may be configured to execute both of the first effects, or may be configured to perform only the first effects.

  In addition, a plurality of operation means may be provided, and button effects may be performed using the plurality of operation means. For example, the configuration may be such that one operation is selected from a plurality of options using a touch panel, and the selection made by the effect button is determined.

  The presentation according to the button operation may be performed at another opportunity not to perform the button operation (for example, completely different opportunity different from the timing of automatically appearing at the expiration of the operation valid period).

  The first effect appearing by a plurality of button operations may be configured to appear before the plurality of operations are performed. In this case, before the plurality of operations are performed, for example, the case where the number of button operations does not meet the predetermined number of operations or the case where the valid period ends before the specified number of button operations are performed is equivalent. Do.

  The second effect performed for each button operation may be an effect in which one display changes for each button operation. For example, the character A may appear in the first button operation, and the character A may increase in size and color may change in the second and subsequent button operations, or may be trusted in the second and subsequent operations. It may be configured to change to another character B or character C with a high degree.

  The configuration may be related to the combination of the result of the second effect performed for each button operation and the result of the first effect performed thereafter. For example, the configuration may be such that the SP reach development, the jackpot notification, and the like are performed by the combination of the second effect results.

  In addition, the embodiments described above and the embodiments described thereafter are also applicable to an enclosed type game machine which cyclically uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. It is possible to combine the matters described in the above and the following detailed description, in particular the matters described in the embodiment and the modification.

The gaming machine of the above embodiment is expressed, for example, as follows.
(Appendix B1)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
An effect means capable of at least a plurality of effects.
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The second display is displayed at least in a period (hereinafter, referred to as “third period”) in which the reception regarding the operation of the operation means is valid.
The first indication is an indication that can at least start in a first period,
The second display is a display that can be at least initiated in a second time period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display to be the first number,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is at least executable when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number,
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed while hiding at least a part of the first display to be the first number.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note B1,
A game console characterized in that the second effect is at least an effect that can be performed each time an operation of the operation means is received.
(Appendix B3)
It is a game console according to Supplementary Note B1 or 2,
The display means is a means capable of at least erasing one of the first display in response to acceptance of one operation of the operation means,
The second effect is an effect that may be executed while hiding at least a part of the other first displays whose display is continued.
The game stand which makes a special thing.
(Appendix B4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B3, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display of the third number,
The third number is one,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B5)
The gaming machine described in Appendix B4,
The second effect is an effect that may hide at least a part of the second display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B6)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note B4 or B5,
The first display is a button display,
The second display is a gauge display,
The third number is one,
The display means is a means capable of arranging at least a plurality of the button displays in a first direction and displaying them.
The gauge display is a display capable of at least suggesting the remaining period of the third period by reducing the length of the gauge.
The gauge display is a display in which the length of the gauge decreases in a second direction,
The second direction is the same as the first direction,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B6, wherein
The second number is the same number as the first number,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B7, wherein
The first number is three,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B8, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of modes,
At least one of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
At least one of the plurality of aspects is the second aspect,
The second aspect is an aspect different from the first aspect,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B9, wherein
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B10, wherein
The second effect is an effect not at least related to the operation of the operation means,
The second effect is a notice,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B11, wherein
The first display is an animation display,
The second display is an animation display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B12, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix B14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B12, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix C1)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
Rendering means capable of at least carrying out the first rendering;
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The second display is displayed at least in a period (hereinafter, referred to as “third period”) in which the reception regarding the operation of the operation means is valid.
The first display is at least an animation display,
The second display is at least an animation display,
The first indication is an indication that can at least start in a first period,
The second display is a display that can be at least initiated in a second time period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the third period,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display to be the first number,
The first effect is at least executable when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number,
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The game stand which makes a special thing.
(Appendix C2)
The game console described in Appendix C1,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an animation display,
The third display is at least a display that can be started in connection with the operation means being operated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C3)
The game console described in Appendix C2,
The first display is at least an erasable display in relation to the operation of the operation means,
The third display is an erasing animation (hereinafter, referred to as “first erasing animation”) that can be performed when the first display is erased.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix C3,
The effect means is means capable of at least performing a second effect,
The second effect is at least a startable effect related to the operation of the operation means,
The second effect is at least a startable effect after the first erasing animation is performed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C2 to C4, wherein
The second display is at least an erasable display in association with the operation of the operation means,
The third display is an erasing animation (hereinafter referred to as a “second erasing animation”) that can be performed when the second display is erased.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C6)
The gaming machine described in Appendix C5,
The second display is a gauge display,
The gauge display is a display capable of at least suggesting a remaining period of the third period by performing an animation in which the length of the gauge is reduced.
The gauge display is a display capable of at least notifying that the third period ends when the length of the gauge becomes 0,
The second erasing animation is an animation in which the length of the gauge is 0 even when the length of the gauge remains in relation to the operation of the operation means in the third period. An animation that at least includes
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C6, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in a plurality of animation modes,
At least one of the plurality of animation modes is a first animation mode,
At least one of the plurality of animation modes is a second animation mode,
The second animation mode is an animation mode different from the first animation mode.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C7, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display of the third number,
The third number is one,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C9)
The game console according to any one of appendices C1 to C8, wherein
The second number is the same number as the first number,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C10)
The game console according to any one of appendices C1 to C9, wherein
The first number is three,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C10, wherein
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C11, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix C13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C11, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix D1)
A plurality of operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
An effect means capable of at least a plurality of effects.
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means,
At least one of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the first operation means,
The second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the second operation means,
The first indication is an indication that can at least start in a first period,
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is at least a startable effect related to the operation of the first operation means,
The second effect is at least a startable effect related to the operation of the second operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix D1,
The first operation means is means for which at least the reception of the operation of the first operation means is effective in a second period,
The second operation means is means for which at least the reception of the operation of the second operation means is effective during the second period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the second period,
The effect means is a means capable of at least starting the first effect when the first operation means is operated in the second period,
The effect means is a means capable of at least starting the second effect when the second operation means is operated during the second period.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D3)
The gaming machine described in Appendix D2,
The effect means is a means capable of starting the first effect earlier than the second effect when the first condition is established,
The effect means is means capable of starting the second effect earlier than the first effect when the second condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition established when the first operation means is operated prior to the second operation means being operated in the second period,
The second condition is a condition that holds when the second operation means is operated prior to the first operation means being operated during the second period.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D4)
The game console described in Appendix D2 or D3,
The display means is means capable of at least performing the first display to be the first number,
The display means is a means capable of at least performing the second display of a second number,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is at least executable when the third condition is established,
The third condition is satisfied at least when the first operation means is operated the number of times to be the first number, and the second operation means is operated the number of times to be the second number. Is the condition,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D5)
The game console described in Appendix D4,
The first operation means is a means capable of at least taking a plurality of states;
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state,
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The first display can be displayed at least in a plurality of display modes,
At least one of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode,
At least one of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode,
The second display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The first display mode is a display mode at least corresponding to the first state,
The second display mode is a display mode corresponding at least to the second state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D6)
It is a game console described in Supplementary Note D4 or D5,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a display capable of at least suggesting the second period,
The display means is a means capable of at least performing the third display of the third number,
The third number is one,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D7)
Appendices D4 to D6, wherein the game console according to any one of
The sum of the first number and the second number is three,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D7, wherein
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D8, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix D10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D8, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix E1)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
An effect means capable of at least a plurality of effects.
A game console equipped with
The reception regarding the operation of the operation means is at least valid during the first validity period,
The reception regarding the operation of the operation means is at least valid in the second valid period,
The second valid period is a valid period that is at least partially different from the first valid period,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display to be the first number,
The first indication is an indication that can at least start in a first period,
The second display is a display that can be at least initiated in a second time period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of the first effective period,
The second period is a period including at least a part of the second effective period,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect to be performed at least in association with the first display,
The second effect is an effect performed at least in relation to the second display,
The first effect is at least an effect that can be performed when the number of times the operating means is operated in the first effective period becomes a second number,
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The second period is a period that may overlap with the first period,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E2)
The gaming machine described in Appendix E1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a display capable of suggesting the first effective period (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”),
The display means is a means which does not perform display capable of suggesting the second effective period.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E3)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note E1 or E2, and
At least a means for making a notice that can be performed,
Providing a prefetch notice means capable of at least executing a prefetch notice;
The notice means is means capable of at least executing the notice by causing the effect means to perform the first effect,
The pre-reading advance notice means is means capable of at least executing the pre-reading advance notice by causing the effect means to perform the second effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E3, wherein
Hold display means capable of displaying at least multiple types of hold icons,
The holding display means is a means capable of at least informing the number of holdings regarding the execution of the symbol variation display by the number of the holding icons to be displayed,
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The second display is the first hold icon,
The first hold icon is a button hold icon,
The second effect is an effect including at least an effect of changing the button hold icon to the second hold icon in relation to the operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E5)
The gaming machine described in Appendix E4,
The hold display means is means for not displaying a new button hold icon while the button hold icon is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E5, wherein
The second effect is at least executable when the number of times the operating means has been operated in the second effective period becomes a third number,
The third number is a number smaller than the second number,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E6, wherein
When the first effective period and the second effective period overlap, the effect means is a means capable of executing the second effect earlier than the first effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E7, wherein
When the first effective period and the second effective period overlap, the effect means is means capable of executing the first effect earlier than the second effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E9)
The gaming machine described in Appendix E2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the third display having a fourth number,
The fourth number is one,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E9, wherein
The second number is the same number as the first number,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E10, wherein
The first number is three,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E11, wherein
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E12, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E12, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix E15)
A plurality of operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
An effect means capable of at least a plurality of effects.
A game console equipped with
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting a first operation means,
The second display is a display including at least a display indicating a second operation means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display to be the first number,
The first indication is an indication that can at least start in a first period,
The second display is a display that can be at least initiated in a second time period,
The first period is a period including at least a part of a period during which the reception regarding the operation of the first operation means is valid,
The second period is a period including at least a part of a period during which the reception for the operation of the second operation means is valid,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect to be performed at least in association with the first display,
The second effect is an effect performed at least in relation to the second display,
The first effect is at least an effect that can be performed when the number of times the first operation means is operated in the first period reaches a second number,
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The second period is a period that may overlap with the first period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix F1)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of at least displaying a plurality of types of displays;
Means of presentation,
A game console equipped with
The effect means is means capable of at least performing a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display corresponding at least to the first mode,
The second display is a display corresponding at least to the second mode,
The first mode is a mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated.
The second mode is a mode in which the operation means is operated automatically,
The first indication is an indication that can at least start in a first period,
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period,
The first display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The first period is a period including at least a part of a period (hereinafter, referred to as “third period”) in which the reception regarding the operation of the operation means is effective.
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display to be the first number,
The first effect is at least executable when the number of times the operation means is operated in the third period becomes a second number,
The first number is two or more,
The second number is two or more,
The second display is a display at least partially different from the first display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note F1,
A decorative symbol display means capable of at least performing decorative symbol variation display;
The decorative symbol display means is means capable of at least performing the first decorative symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started at least during the first period of the first decorative symbol variation display in the first mode,
The second display is a display that can be started at least during the first period of the first decorative symbol variation display in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F3)
The game console according to appendix F1 or F2, wherein the first display is a display including at least a display capable of suggesting the third period,
The second display is a display not including at least a display capable of suggesting the third period.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F4)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F3, wherein
The second display is a display including at least a display suggesting the operation means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display of the third number,
The third number is a number smaller than the first number,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F5)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F4, wherein
The effect means is means capable of at least performing a second effect,
The second effect is at least an effect that can be performed each time the operation means is operated in the first mode,
The second effect is an effect that can be performed at least in the third period in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F6)
It is a game stand as described in Appendix F5,
When the operation means is operated during the third period in the second mode, the effect means can perform at least the second effect in relation to the operation of the operation means. Is
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices F1 to F6,
The effect means is means including at least the display means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F8)
The game console according to any one of appendices F1 to F7, wherein
The first number is three,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F8, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix F10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F8, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by

Third Embodiment
Hereinafter, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described using the drawings. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 71 to 100 are basically used only for the description of the third embodiment, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, this embodiment can be used. In the description of FIG. 71, the symbols shown in FIG.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launch device 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via the hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and configured in a frame shape by being configured in a frame shape Is a door member having an opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  In addition, the front frame door 106 is a passage which can store a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “ball”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guides the gaming balls to the launch device 110 The upper plate 126 provided with the lower plate 128, the lower plate 128 storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the operation of the player are discharged to the lower plate 128 A ball extraction button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player to the gaming ball collecting container (commonly called a dollar box), and the firing device 110 by the operation of the player And a ball emission handle 134 for launching the guided game ball into the game area 124 of the game board 200, and a player for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 71) by the operation of the player. With respect to a card unit (CR unit) and a setting operation unit 137 in which various settings can be made by the operation of a setter (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), a chance button lamp 138 for emitting a button 136 and a chance button 136 A ball rental operation button 140 for instructing a ball rental, a return operation button 142 for instructing a card unit to return the player's balance, a ball rental display unit for displaying the player's balance and the status of the card unit Not shown). Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and the confirmation (OK) button, the upper button located above the confirmation button, the lower button located below the confirmation button, and the confirmation It has a right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 also includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and an operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 73) by the operation of the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 72 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 71 viewed from the back side. A ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls is provided at the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, and is located below the ball tank 150 and formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed into the payout device 152 after passing through the tank rail 154 and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, and the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 74). The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and effects related to processing based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 A first sub-board housing a first sub-board 160 that comprises a first sub-control unit 400 that performs control processing and a rotary-type volume adjustment switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of a game clerk A second sub-board case 166 for housing a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control part 500 that performs control processing relating to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-control part 400 and a substrate case 162; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls and that releases an error by an operation of a game clerk 68. A payout substrate case 172 housing the payout substrate 170, a launch substrate case 176 housing the launch substrate 174 constituting the launch control unit 630 for performing control processing on launch of the game ball, and various electric gaming machines And a RWM clear switch 180 for outputting an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 accommodating the power supply board 182, a CR interface section 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control section 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like. 156 and the first sub substrate 160 etc. and the hall computer etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, etc. are provided on the back of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the firing board 174, the power board 182 etc. It is provided in the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

  FIG. 73 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined. At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center. The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The game board 200 of this example is a so-called game board for a right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, the falling path of the gaming ball is divided into the right path on the right side of the rendering device 206 and the left path on the left side of the rendering device 206 by changing the launch strength of the gaming ball by operating the ball emission handle 134 be able to. In this example, to the normal symbol starting opening 228, the normal symbol starting opening 229, the first special symbol starting opening 230, the second special symbol starting opening 232 (opened state), the variable winning opening 234, 235 (opened state) etc. The ease of entering the ball is different between the game ball falling on the right path and the game ball falling on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol starting opening 229, the second special symbol starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235, the normal symbol starting opening 229, the second special symbol starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 235 are arranged on the right path Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter the game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, with respect to each of the normal symbol starting opening 228, the first special symbol starting opening 230 and the variable winning opening 234, the game of falling on the left path by the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nail 238 and the warp device 242 etc. Entry of balls is relatively easy, and entry of gaming balls falling on the right path is relatively difficult. Although the right-handed machine is described as an example in the present embodiment, it may be other than the right-handed machine.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying a decorative symbol and various images (moving images or still images) used for effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, a fourth symbol display area 208e, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a. The middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the fourth symbol display area 208e displays a fourth symbol, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d and 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 73, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208e is fixed to the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 73, one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (one in total) is provided, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. Only one common fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to both of the special symbols may be provided. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In the lower part of the game area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol display device 210, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, and a second special symbol holding lamp 220 The normal symbol hold lamp 216 and the high-probability middle lamp 222 are disposed. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure", a special symbol as "special symbol", a first special symbol as "special symbol 1", and a second special symbol as "special symbol 2".

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a 7-segment LED. The special view 1 display device 212 and the special view 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special view, and in the present embodiment, are configured by 7 segment LEDs.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later) pending, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number (for example, four) of common drawing fluctuation games are displayed. It is possible to put on hold. The special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of reserved special figure variation games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, the special figure variation game is specified It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, around the rendering device 206, predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, 229, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, a special drawing 2 starting opening 232, and variable The winning openings 234 and 235 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry of balls into the general winning openings 226 (general winning openings 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are referred to as balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "winning balls") and balls to be lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as "rented balls" There are cases) and.

  The general drawing start port 228 and the general drawing start port 229 are devices, which are called gates and through chuckers, for determining whether or not the ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and the present embodiment In the embodiment, one common drawing start port 228 is disposed on the left side path of the game board 200, and one common drawing start port 229 is disposed on the right side path. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the general drawing start port 228 or the general drawing start port 229 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228 or the drawing start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special opening 1 start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the special opening 1 start opening 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as an award ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 1 display device 212 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "the special view 1 variation game") is started. The ball entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The special figure 2 starting opening 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed on the right path. The special figure 2 start opening 232 has a pair of wing members 232a which can be opened and closed from side to side, and while the wing members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and win a common drawing fluctuation game, and a common drawing display device When the symbol 210 is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the special opening 2 start opening 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The special view variation game by the special view 2 display device 214 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "the special view 2 variation game") is started. In addition, the ball entering the special view 2 start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right route. There is only one in the house. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 respectively include openable and closable door members, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door members are closed. For example, when the special figure display device wins the special figure variation game and the special figure display device stops and displays the symbol, one of the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 has a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing) Open and close a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for 1.5 seconds). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. The ball entering the variable winning openings 234 and 235 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Further, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball which did not win in any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the 146 and the firing rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234, 235) Won the start opening (special figure 1 start opening 230, special figure 2 start opening 232) or without winning any winning opening or start opening, or just out of passing the common drawing start opening 228, 229 The mouth 240 is reached.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. Warp devices 242 (242a and 242b) and a front stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect device 206, and the effect movable body 224 is arranged in the non-rollable area of the game ball. It is arranged. Further, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, from the warp outlet 242b to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206. The front stage 244 is capable of rolling balls etc. that are run over by the balls discharged from the warp outlet 242 b and the nails of the game board 200 etc. In the central part of the front stage 244, the passed balls are special opening 1 start opening There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter 230.

  The effect movable body 224 in this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name and the like of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is vertically movable in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown).

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208 e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be visually recognized regardless of the open / close state of the shielding device 246.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command sent from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main according to the command that the main control unit 300 sends. And a power control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and time. A counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and the same applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) which is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit has two built-in counters), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, and front frame door opening A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a bottom flat sensor, and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, such as the special view 1 display device 212 or the special view 2 display device 214, and a predetermined view A display device, for example, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common view display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the common view hold lamp 216, special view 1 hold lamp 218, special view 2 hold lamp 220, high Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, etc. And a drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332. Although the crystal oscillator 316 a and the random value generation circuit 318 are separately provided in this example, the crystal oscillator 316 a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when receiving a signal indicating that the ball has won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinko to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by two-way communication.

  Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, in the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driver circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136, and output from the speaker 120 The volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 74) for adjusting the volume to be set, the operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors A sensor circuit 428 to output to the basic circuit 402 and an image stored in the ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208 generates display image using a work area of the reading data, etc. VRAM436, connects the.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a winning ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output by the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout of. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 from the outside into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from power supply control unit 660 to payout control unit 600 and second sub-control unit 500, and main control unit 300, second sub-control unit 500, and firing control from payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

  Next, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the common view display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. 75 (a) to 75 (d). The types of figures and figures will be described. FIG. 75 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 1, and FIG. 75 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 2. As shown in FIG. Special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the fact that the ball has entered the special figure 2 starting opening 232 (2) Special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 fluctuation game is started, the special figure 2 display 214 does “the fluctuation indication of the special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all the segments of 7 segments and lighting of one center segment . These "variation display of the special figure 1" and "variation display of the special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variation display of the symbol said in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When it passes, the special figure 2 display 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 The process until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol change stop display according to the present embodiment, and the stop symbol form of the special view 1 or 2 is displayed after the start of the “variable view of the special view 1 or 2”. A series of display until it is done is called symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 75 (a), seven types of special views of "special view A" to "special view G" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display of the special view 1. In FIG. 75 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "special figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "special figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is performed by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether or not a special big hit and the number of rounds are performed by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is a difference in whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game after the end of the big hit game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the big hit is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "special figure definite change" or simply "positive change"), and the state in which the probability is low is special figure It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game, after the end of the 7R special big hit game and after the end of the 7R big hit game, all transition to the time saving state (power support state). The time saving state will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a map view high probability state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "flat map probability variation"), and the state not a time saving state is referred to as a map view low probability state. 15R special big hit symbol "Special figure A" and 7R special big hit symbol "Special figure B" is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game and is 7R big hit symbol "Special figure C" is a symbol which becomes a special figure low probability common figure high probability state after the end of a big hit game. These "special drawing A", "special drawing B", and "special drawing C" are symbols whose advantage relative to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, and it is a symbol which becomes special figure high probability popular figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R, and "special figure B" which is 7R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R big hit design called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when "special view E" is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability regular view low probability state, the special view high probability regular view low probability state (so-called so-called high probability game after the open time 100 ms × 2 R) Transition to the latent probability change state, and when “Special figure E” is stopped and displayed in a state other than the special figure low probability regularity figure low probability state, the special figure high probability regularity popularity after the big hit game (opening time 29000ms × 2R) ends It shifts to the figure high probability state (see FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b)). That is, the "special figure E" is an operation during the big hit game and the gaming state which is shifted thereafter by the gaming state when the stop display is displayed (in this example, whether it is the special figure low probability general drawing low probability state) It is a different pattern.

  "Special figure F" is a small hit design, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. In addition, “special figure G” is a removal symbol, and is a symbol that the degree of advantage to the player becomes relatively small.

  In FIG. 75 (b), four types of special views, "special view a" to "special view d", are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display of the special view 2. "Special figure a" is a 15R special jackpot symbol, "special figure b" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, "special figure c" is a 7R jackpot symbol, and "special figure d" is a detached symbol. In the present embodiment, as the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, while seven special figures (of which five are the big hit) of "special figure A" to "special figure G" are used, As the stop symbol form of the four special figures of “special figure a” to “special figure d” (of which three kinds are big hit) are used. By configuring in this way, it may be possible to make a difference in the degree of advantage of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of becoming a big hit and the probability of becoming a definite change in the big hit. In this example, the jackpot of Toku-zu 1 contains a sudden definite change or latent definite change which can hardly be obtained, while the jackpot of Toku-zu 2 does not contain a definite change or latent definite change. The advantage of the special figure 2 is higher than the advantage of the special figure 1.

  FIG. 75 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. “Decoration 1” to “decoration 9” and “decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, “decoration” is switched in the order of “decoration 1” “decoration 2” “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. Perform “variable display of symbols”.

  And 15R special jackpot of "special figure A", 7R special jackpot of "special figure B", 7R jackpot of "special figure C", 15R special jackpot of "special figure a", 7R special jackpot of "special figure b" When notifying the 7R big hit of "special figure c", the symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1" or "decor 2-" Stop display of decoration 2-decoration 2 etc.). When explicitly notifying 15R special big hit of "Special figure A" or 15R special big hit of "Special figure a", the symbol combination (for example, "decor 3-decor 3- Stop display of decoration 3 "and" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 "and the like.

  In addition, when notifying a 2R big hit called "Tokuku E" (hidden probability change) or a small hit of "Toku F", "Decoration 1-Decor 2-Decor 3" is stopped and displayed. Do. In the case of notifying 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of “special figure D”, “decoration 1 – decoration 3 – decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the release of "special figure G" and "special figure d", the symbol display areas 208a to 208c stop and display symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 75 (c).

  FIG. 75 (d) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common figure. There are three types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" and "general drawing B" which are hit symbols, and "common drawing C" which is a detached pattern. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228 and the drawing start port 229, the drawing display device 210 displays all the seven segments and the central one. Repeat the lighting of the segment of the "general display of the fluctuation display". And, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general diagram A" or the "special figure B" is stopped and displayed, and when the notification of the spread diagram fluctuating game is notified, the "general diagram C" is stopped and displayed. Do. Also in FIG. 75 (d), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be extinguished, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Perform operation permission and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, it is determined whether the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. If it is less than (in this example, 9 V), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109 following step S107, a determination is made as to whether or not the state before power shutoff (before power interruption) is restored, and when the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 In the case of the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 is ON (indicating that there is an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. If the power supply status information is not information indicating suspension, the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the basic circuit 302. If the power supply status information is information indicating suspension, all 1 byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to the 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100.

  In step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a transmission information storage area is provided. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command representing that the power has been restored, and is described later. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The normal recovery command is a command that indicates that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S115 following step S113, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, initial values of four random number counters for generating a common drawing win random value, a common drawing random value, a special drawing 1 random value, and a special drawing 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating the random number value for determining the common drawing fluctuation time and the random value for determining the special drawing fluctuation time are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a random value for determining a common drawing fluctuation time is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for common drawing fluctuation time determination provided in the RAM 308 1 is added to the above value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated by a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

  Next, main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this example), and the main control unit timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Start at a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT is periodically set so that the WDT interrupt does not occur (the process abnormality is not detected) because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this example). In this case (in this example, restart is performed once in about 2 ms which is a cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 following step S203, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal). In step S205, information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last, detection signal from last time, presence of current detection signal) Information to indicate that the general prize opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, 235, the special view 1 start opening 230, and the special view 2 start opening 232, or the common view start opening 228 , 229 is determined to have been passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234, and 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, and 229. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

  Further, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal immediately before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 following step S205, basic random number initial value updating processing is performed, and in the next step S209, basic random number updating processing is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process and the basic random number updating process, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value and the general drawing are used in the main control unit 300. The four random number counters for generating the random number value, the special figure 1 random value value, and the special figure 2 random value value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter Set to

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round is next next while setting it in the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. Also, apart from the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value next makes one round, the random number counter for generating the common drawing random value, Special figure 1 random number value generation The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the random number counter for and the random number counter for generating a special number 2 random number value has made one rotation. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random number value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random number value are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the special drawing 1 display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for special, 2 special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined The various timers are updated, including timers for clocking the closing time, predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215 following step S213, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234, 235 and starting openings 230, 232, 228, 229 are awarded, the winning balls provided in RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening are provided. The value of the number storage area is read out, 1 is added, and the value is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning reception process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not special drawing 1 start opening 230, special drawing 2 start opening 232, common drawing start openings 228 and 229, and variable winning openings 234 and 235 have been won. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When there is a prize in the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 start opening 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 The special figure 1 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 1 from the special figure 1 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 (1) Obtain a random number value and store it in the special order 1 random number value storage area in order of acquisition. A set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area is stored by the same number as the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number value storage area, each time the number of special figure 1 holdings decreases, the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair of the holding order is the highest (first) is deleted. And the holding order of the data of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value value set is processed to be advanced by one each. In addition, every time the number of special figure 1 reservations increases, the special order 1 is new to the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair in the lowest order (last). Data of a combination of the winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value is written.

  When there is a prize in special drawing 2 starting opening 232 and the corresponding special drawing 2 reservation number storage area provided in RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to special drawing 2 starting opening 232 of random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number value generating random number counter provided in the RAM 308 Then, it is stored in the acquisition order in the special figure 2 random value storage area. A set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the special figure 2 holding number stored in the special figure 2 holding number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number value storage area, the special order 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value pair data are deleted each time the number of special figure 2 holding numbers decreases by one, and the remaining data It is processed such that the holding order of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value set is advanced by one each. In addition, every time the number of special figure 2 reservations increases, the special figure 2 winning random number value is new to the next pending order of the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value with the lowest pending order. And, the data of the special figure 2 random number value set is written.

  In addition, special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number and special figure 1 random number value) or special figure 2 start information (set of special figure 2 winning random number and special figure 2 random value) was newly acquired. In the case, the special drawing prefetch process is executed using the start information. Details of the special view prefetching process will be described later.

  If the common drawing start port 228 or the common drawing start port 229 has a prize, and the corresponding common drawing reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the common drawing selection random number value generating random number counter The random number value is acquired as a winning random number value, and the common-mode random number value is acquired from the random number counter for general-purpose random number value generation provided in the RAM 308, and stored in the general-purpose random number storage area in the order of acquisition. A set of the common drawing win random number value and the common drawing random number value in the common drawing random number storage area is stored by the same number as the common drawing reservation number stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area. In the common drawing random number storage area, every time the common drawing reservation number decreases by one, the data of the combination of the common drawing random number and the common drawing random value of the highest rank (first) is erased and It is processed such that the holding order of the data of the common drawing win random number value and the common drawing random value set is incremented by one. In addition, whenever the number of popular drawing reservations increases by one, a new common drawing winning random value and the next pending order of the data of the combination of the lowest drawing (last) common drawing winning random value and the common drawing random value Data of a set of common-mode random number values is written. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening 234. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 235, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 235 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221 following step S219, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the common drawing display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the common drawing display device 210 performs variable display of common drawing (common drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the common drawing hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is turned on / off to control the common view display mode, and when the common view hit flag is off, the common view display so as to become the display mode of the out-of-round symbol The on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the common-diagram display device 210 is any one of a hit symbol (a common figure A or a common figure B shown in FIG. 75 (d) and a dislocated symbol (a common figure C shown in FIG. 75 (d)). Make a final display of the symbol of. After that, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for maintaining a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Also, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while the general drawing operation is being set, the predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the opening and closing solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) of the blade member 232a of the special view 2 start port 232 A signal for holding 232 a in an open state is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms) A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing driving solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is lost, the common drawing hit flag is turned off. When the flag for the drawing is off, the drawing state updating process is also performed at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the special drawing 2 start / stop control of the starting port 232 is not performed (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the number of common drawing fluctuation games held It is executed using the combination of the first common drawing win random value and the common drawing random value in the common drawing random number storage area as a start condition that is 1 or more.

  The main control unit 300 acquires common drawing start information (a pair of common drawing win random value and common drawing random value) from the earliest (most stored) reservation position in the common drawing random value storage area, A table for deciding on a pass / fail judgment stored in the ROM 306 based on the common drawing win random number value in the common drawing start information acquired and the value of the common drawing probability fluctuation flag in the RAM 308 (FIGS. 79A and 79B described later) Use the reference) to decide whether to win or lose. Next, main control unit 300 determines the common drawing determination table (FIG. 79 (c) shown in FIG. 79C) stored in ROM 306 based on the common drawing random number value in the acquired common drawing start information and the determined success or failure determination result. Use the hour movement table (see table) to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the variable display of the common drawing. Next, the main control unit 300 uses, for example, various tables (for example, timer number selection not shown) stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, and the acquired random number value for common drawing fluctuation time determination. The variable display time (timer number) of the common drawing is determined using the table), and the variable display time is stored in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the common drawing fluctuation display time.

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first drawing-up start information from the drawing random number storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the first drawing-general drawing start information from the drawing random number storage area and stores the common drawing reserve number. Subtract 1 from the number of general drawing reservations for the area. At this time, the general drawing start information extracted from the general drawing random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the general drawing start information stored in the temporary area. It is also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets a common drawing per shot flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON if the result of judgment is hit (winning), and sets a common drawing per shot flag to off when the result of judgment is non-winning.

  Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special view 2 state update process, one process out of the next plurality of processes is performed according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on and off Repeat the on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as 15R big hit flag, 7R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, out flag, special figure probability change flag, and common drawing probability change flag. . These flags are set to on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on 75B shows the special figure a, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability change flag is on, the special figure b, 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability change flag is off. If the special figure c, the off flag is on, the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on / off drive control so as to become the respective special figure d modes, Fig. 2 Make settings to indicate that stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs finalized display of any one of the special view a to special view d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display of the predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If not, the short time flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Further, if the number of probability variations stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of probability variations, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability fluctuation flag Turn off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of special figure 2 fluctuation game is big hit, big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 In order to set a special figure 2 in action in the area and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit In the storage area of the special view 2 waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or Solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235 (until the game ball of predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234, 235) A signal for holding the door member in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to the solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235, and a timer for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating a closed period is set in the storage area. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening and closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2 in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1). In the special figure 2 state update process which starts at the timing, it waits for the period which is displaying the image which notifies the player that the big hit by the decoration symbol display device 208 is finished In the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating an effect waiting period is set. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the time saving number (for example, 100 times) is set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308 Turn on the short time flag. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not set on.

  The term "time saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time saving flag is set to ON, it is a common drawing high probability state (common drawing definite change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 tends to be long (electric Chu open and spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. The state in which any of these common drawing positive change, common drawing change short, and electric Chu diversion is set is called electric support (starting hole winning support by electric tulip).

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234, 235 during the big hit game, a lot of special figure 2 start hole 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be obtained during a big hit as game balls enter and there is a large number of game balls and the euphorism is increased, and this is to solve this.

  In addition, if the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to on, simultaneously with the end of the big hit game, the number of probability variations (for example, 10000) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium.

  Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol form of the special figure 2, the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the timing shown is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 status update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 7R big hit flag shown in FIG. If the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, 7R big hit flag is on, if the special figure probability change flag is off, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, When the chart probability change flag is on, the special view D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special view probability change flag is on, the common view probability change flag is off, the special view E, the small hit flag is on In the special figure F, when the off flag is on, the 7 segment LED which configures the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to turn on / off the control so that it becomes each aspect of the special figure G, the setting area of the RAM 308 To special figure 1 stop To set indicating that it is an Informational codes. By performing this control in the special view 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special view 1 display device 212 performs final display of any one of the special view A to special view G symbols. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). The special figure 2 related lottery process does not perform the variable game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 2 is pending. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both in a non-operation state, and the special figure 1 is suspended. It is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, with the number of the variable game being one or more as a start condition.

  With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 1 or more, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 start opening 232 is The priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 1 start port 230. In the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 2 fluctuation game in this example) with high degree of advantage is performed prior to the special figure fluctuation game (special figure 1 fluctuation game in this example) with low degree of advantage. . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference to the degree of advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process of step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area. Figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 (random number value pair) is acquired, ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in RAM 308 etc Using the hit / fail determination table (see FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (d) described later) stored in the table as a big hit or a small hit (in the present example, a small hit can be selected only in the special view 1) Make a decision (whether or not to accept or reject). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 start information acquired and the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (FIG. 81 (a), Determination of the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special view 2 is performed using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 82 (a)). Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 reserved at the time of the success / failure determination, the acquired random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination, etc. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  After the main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, it deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random number value storage area and Fig. 2 Special number of reserved numbers storage area 2 The number of reserved numbers in the storage area is decremented by one. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variation game with a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variation game with a low degree of advantage, and the reserve of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reserve of the special figure 1 Although the special figure 2 priority change was mentioned as an example, the special figure 1 change game with a low degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 2 change game with a high degree of priority, and the suspension of the special figure 1 is special figure 2 It may be a special figure 1 preferential variation that is digested prior to holding. In addition, without prioritizing any of Special figure 2 fluctuation game and Special figure 1 fluctuation game, starting mouth winning a prize which starts special figure fluctuation game which depends on the special figure 1 and special figure 2 each reservation in starting point the winning opening It may be forward variation. In the start-up opening winning order variation, the upper limit number of reservations is 8 regardless of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 and therefore, it is compared with the priority variation in which the upper limit number of reservations is 4 in each of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 And you may be able to raise the practical upper limit of the number of reservations.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that the lottery process and the fluctuation game for holding the other special drawing are not performed according to the state of one special drawing, it is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special drawing state update The processing and the special drawing related lottery processing may be performed independently in each of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, so that a plurality of special drawings may be simultaneously changed. In addition, when changing a plurality of special figures at this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of the respective special figures, or the lottery results of the respective special figures are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display each lottery result separately, or may be configured to display a plurality of special drawing lottery results in one area. Moreover, when the change regarding several special figures is performed simultaneously, you may influence the lottery result of the special figure which stops a fluctuation | variation by the lottery result of the special drawing which stopped the fluctuation | variation previously.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In the command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in the present embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Etc. and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, as a command type, a symbol fluctuation start command and a symbol fluctuation stop command concerning a common drawing are also included.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. Also, if the command type is a special figure start symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlying flags, values such as special figure probability change flags, special drawing related lottery processing In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it contains information indicating the timer number etc. selected in and includes various jackpot flags, small hit flags, outliers flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of the start command and end effect start command, information including the value of the special figure probability variation flag etc., and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. I have included it. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device information in the command data, presence or absence of winning to special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to special figure 2 starting opening 232, winning of variable winning openings 234, 235 It includes information indicating presence or absence. In the case of the pre-reading result information command, command data indicating the types of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the pre-reading number stored in the pre-reading number storage area described later, the stop symbol etc stored in the pre-reading result storage unit Included in

  If the command type is a symbol drawing start (rotation start) command of a common drawing, the command data is a per common drawing flag, a common drawing departure flag, a common drawing probability fluctuation flag, etc., and a common drawing related lottery process. Information including the information on the determined stop symbol and fluctuation time, and in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command of the common drawing, information indicating the value of the common drawing per-flag, the common drawing deviation flag, the common drawing probability fluctuation flag, etc. To be included.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, various big hit flags, small hit flags, lost flags, values of special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 as command data, special figure 1 related lottery process and special value 2 setting information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are held. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating various jackpot flags, small hit flags, lost flags, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, and the like stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game held in the command data Set the information to indicate etc.

  Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 following step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. . When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 start opening 232 and the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and the common view display device 210 and special figure 1 display through the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special view 2 display device 214, the various status display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 76 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special view prefetching process executed in the winning a prize accepting process (step S217). In the special view pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information (newly acquired start information) increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The determination is made, and the preliminary determination result (the special-figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit (see (b) to (d) in FIG. 78) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether the start information of the special view 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 has increased is, for example, the special view 2 pending number stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and the special view 2 reserved count count storage area. Figure 2 compare with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 has increased when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is equal to the special view 2 look-ahead count It is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the success / failure determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special view determination table used at the time of pass / fail determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 prefetch result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information of the special view 1 has increased. The determination as to whether the start information of the special view 1 has increased is, as in the case of the special view 2, for example, the special view 1 reserve count stored in the special view 1 reserve count storage area and the special view 1 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit timer division is completed. The processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the loading process.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state, the process proceeds to step S311, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state (it is in the power support), the process proceeds to step S315. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not non-power-supply is in progress, it may be determined in step S309 whether the execution condition of the special view 1 advance warning notification is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S311, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) prior to the acceptance determination process. Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, without pre-reading the special figure 1 start information which has been increased, "not determined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-read, instead of the stop symbol information, special figure 1 read-ahead result storage in RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the processing returns to the winning reception process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-read result storage. All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, prefetching is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 2, and pre-reading is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 1 except during power supply. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 that have been increased. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-read result.

  FIGS. 78 (b) to 78 (d) illustrate a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. FIG. 78 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special view 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 78 (b), the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of the special view 1 fluctuation game . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 78 (b), "special figure G" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and "special figure G" as the stopping symbol information in the storage area "pending 2". Is stored, and "special figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 3", and "special figure A" as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 78C shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 78 (c), the special view 2 look-ahead result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 2 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 78 (c), “Special figure d” (displaced) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and stop symbols in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” Information is not stored. In addition, in FIG. 78 (c), the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 78 (d) shows an example of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit in power support. As shown in FIG. 78 (d), "not determined" information is stored in the storage area "pending 1" instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

  In the above description, only the stop symbol is determined in advance, and only the stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, the determination result of the pass / fail and the change timer number (change time) are determined in advance. The information may be stored in the prefetch result storage unit and may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, various tables used by the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. The various tables shown in FIGS. 79 to 82 are stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b) show an example of a success / failure determination table used when performing a success / failure determination in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success or failure determination table shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b) is composed of the items of “general drawing probability”, “random number range”, and “success or failure result”. The item “common drawing probability” indicates a common drawing probability (common drawing low probability or common drawing high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item "random number range" indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired common drawing winning random value. Here, the possible range of the common drawing winning random value of this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 79 (a) is a success / failure determination table for common use, which is used when the common drawing probability at the time of the success / failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 79 (a), when this validity determination table is used, the probability of hitting is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 79 (b) is a success / failure determination table for general drawing, which is used when the drawing probability at the time of the success / failure determination is a high probability. As shown in FIG. 79 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of hitting is approximately 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of losing is 0%. Comparing this success / failure determination table with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 79A, the probability of hitting is 100 times. As described above, it may be designed such that only the hit is selected in the general drawing high probability state (during time reduction operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% in the short-time operation, but in the short-time operation, the probability that the hit is selected is higher than that in the short-time non-operation state (generally low probability state).

  FIG. 79 (c) shows a table of symbol distribution and hit operation for drawing. The numerical value in the "sorting" column in the table is compared with the common drawing random number value when determining the stop symbol in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223), the distribution ratio of random number range for each design (ie Shows the selection probability). As shown in FIG. 79 (c), when the success or failure determination result of the common drawing variation game is a hit, the distribution ratio of the respective symbols is 50% for the common drawing A and 50% for the common drawing B. The common drawings A and B are symbols for which the electric thu open operation is executed after the common drawing fluctuation game. In addition, since the disappointing symbol selected when the success or failure judgment result is disassembly is only one of the map C, the map C is selected with a probability of 100% in the case of the disassembly. When the drawing C is selected, the electric chow opening operation is not executed after the drawing fluctuation game.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (c), the opening operation of the special view 2 start port (electric chew) 232 is executed after the normal view A is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the stop display of the drawing A is not active, the wing member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. Do. When the gaming state at the stop display of the drawing A is a short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for only 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for only 1800 ms, and then It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1800 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 79 (c), the opening operation of the special figure 2 start port (electric chew) 232 is executed after the ordinary figure B is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the time of the stop display in the general view B is not short, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is opened only for 100 ms only once. When the gaming state at the stop display of the common figure B is short time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened for only 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, and then opened for only 1450 ms, again It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (d) show examples of the table for determining whether or not the special determination is performed in the special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special drawing 1 related lottery process (step S231). There is. The success or failure determination table shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (d) is configured by the items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “success or failure determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates the special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of the success or failure determination. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible ranges of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 1 winning random number value of this example are 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65,536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 80 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special view 1 used when the special view probability at the time of the success / failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/299 (= 219/65536) and the probability of small hit is about 1/399 (= 165 /). 65536).

  The success or failure determination table shown in FIG. 80 (b) is a success or failure determination table for special view 1 used when the special view probability at the time of the success or failure determination is a high probability. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the probability of small hit is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 80 (a), the probability of the big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of the small hit is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 80 (c) is a success / failure determination table for special view 2 used when the special view probability at the time of the success / failure determination is a low probability. As shown in FIG. 80 (c), when this qualification table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/299, and the probability of small hit is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 80 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special view 2 used when the special view probability at the time of the success / failure determination is a high probability. As shown in FIG. 80 (d), when this probability table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of a small hit is zero. When this success or failure judgment table is compared with the success or failure judgment table shown in FIG. 80 (c), the probability of the big hit is about 10 times.

  FIG. 81 (a) shows a symbol sorting table for Special Figure 1. The numerical values in the "sorting" column in the table are compared with the special figure 1 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), the distribution ratio of random number range for each pattern (ie each Shows the selection probability of the symbol). As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit, the special figure A (15R special big hit) is 30%, and the special figure B 25% for (7R special big hit), 25% for special figure C (7R big hit), 10% for special figure D (sudden probability variation big hit), 10% for special figure E (latency probability variation big hit) is there. Special views A, B, D, E excluding special view C are symbols for which positive change is activated after the end of the big hit game. The ratio of the probability variation big hits (special figures A, B, D, E) in the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, that is, the probability of probability variation is 75%.

  The special figures A, B and D indicate the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, spread figure high probability (during time reduction operation), spread figure low probability (due time not working) at the time of success / failure determination (when symbol stop display) Regardless of time)), it is a symbol that the time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the end of the big hit game. The special view C is a symbol in which time saving (100 times saving time) is activated after the end of the big hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination. The special view E is a symbol in which time saving is activated after the end of the big hit game only when the gaming state at the time of success or failure determination is the special figure high probability state or the general drawing high probability state. That is, when the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state, time saving does not operate after the end of the big hit game. For example, when the special figure E is displayed several times in succession as a big hit symbol from the special figure low probability common figure low probability state, time saving does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability common figure) However, after the second and subsequent stop display, the time saving function is activated (it is a special drawing high probability general drawing high probability state). The probability that time saving is given in the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is 90% in the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state, 100% in the other game state.

  In this example, the small hit symbol and the detached symbol in the special figure 1 fluctuation game are only one type each. Therefore, when the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value, and the success judgment result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is In the case of outliers, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value. However, a small hit symbol or an off symbol may be provided in a plurality of types similarly to the large hit symbol, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 1 random value.

  FIG. 81 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special view 1. As shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the big hit game after the special view A is stopped and displayed, the attacker opens 15R with 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the big hit game after special image B or special image C is stopped and displayed, 7R is performed with 29000 ms per 1R, and in big hit game after special image D is displayed and stopped, the open of attacker Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for the special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the gaming state at the time of symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state, the attacker is opened for 2Rs in 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter the game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the gaming state other than the special view low probability general view low probability state, 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, since the opening time is relatively long, it is easy to enter the game ball.

  In the small hit game after the special view F is stopped and displayed, 100 ms of attacker opening is performed twice in one opening opportunity. That is, in the big hit game after the special view E is stopped and displayed in the special view low probability general view low probability state and the small hit game after the special view F is stopped and displayed, the attacker operates in the same manner.

  FIG. 82 (a) shows a symbol sorting table for Special Figure 2. FIG. The numerical value in the "sorting" column in the table is the sorting percentage of the random number range for each symbol (ie, each is compared with the special figure 2 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) Shows the selection probability of the symbol). As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol in the case where the success or failure judgment result of the special figure 2 variation game is a big hit, the special figure a (15R special big hit) is 70%, and the special figure b. (7R special jackpot) is 5%, and special figure c (7R jackpot) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which positive change is activated after the big hit game is over. The ratio of the probability change big hit (Toku figure a, b) in the big hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, that is, the probability change probability is the same 75% as the probability change probability of the special figure 1 fluctuation game.

  The special figures a and b show the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, spread figure high probability (time reduction operation time), spread figure low probability (time reduction time not active) at the time of success / failure determination (when symbol stop display) Regardless of), it is a symbol that the time saving (no time saving setting) is activated after the end of the big hit game. The special view c is a symbol in which time saving (100 times saving time) is activated after the end of the big hit game regardless of the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination. The probability that time saving is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of out pattern in the special figure 2 fluctuation game. Therefore, when the success or failure determination result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a loss, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random number value. However, a plurality of types of off symbols may be provided similarly to the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 2 random number value.

  FIG. 82 (b) shows an example of the big hit operation in each symbol of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), in the big hit game after the special view a is stopped and displayed, the attacker opens 15R for 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special view b or the special view c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, 7Rs are performed with 29000 ms per 1R to open the attacker.

  As shown in FIG. 81 and FIG. 82, Special Figure 2 has a high probability that time reduction is given compared to Special Figure 1, and the release time of the attacker is long (or the number of R is large). Therefore, it can be considered that Special Figure 2 has a higher degree of advantage than Special Figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIGS. 83 and 84. FIG. FIG. 83 (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, various initial settings are performed in step S401 in FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S401, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric power long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, chance button control processing is performed. In the chance button control process, when pressing of the chance button 136 has been detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S409 into effect data corresponding to pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 following step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S409, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, when there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S409, the control command is set to be output. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 83 (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of a first secondary control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process performed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 83C is a flowchart showing the flow of a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S601 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S403, it is every 20 ms (2 ms × 10) that the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more.

  In step S603 following step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S421), and other processing for updating random numbers for effect Etc.

  FIG. 83 (d) is a flowchart showing a flow of image control processing (step S413) of the first sub control unit main processing. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 has been input or not. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705, otherwise transfer end ratio Wait for incoming signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S 701, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S 707 following step S 705, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, otherwise Waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  FIG. 84 (a) shows the flow of electric power long open effect processing that is executed in the effect control processing of the main processing in the first auxiliary control unit 400. FIG. 84 (b) shows an example of the electric tuong open effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric Chu Long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during the common drawing fluctuation game, and the special drawing 2 starting opening (electric Chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times for a common drawing fluctuation game and won , It may be referred to as long open)) It is an effect to ask whether or not to. It should be noted that, even after the regular drawing fluctuation stop, the electric tune long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as "during the electric cheer opening!") May be continued based on the regular drawing stop symbol.

  In the electric chulong open effect processing shown in FIG. 84 (a), the main control unit 300 starts symbol fluctuation start from the main control unit 300 in the command processing (step S407) of the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 in FIG. (Start of rotation) It is executed when a command is received.

  The first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether the power-on long open effect execution regulation flag that restricts the execution of the power-on long open effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the power-long open effect execution regulation flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408, and determines whether the execution of the power-long open effect is restricted. For example, during the dark display where the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is completely black, the player can not visually recognize the effect even if the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of the effect of electric power Tyuulong is not obtained . Therefore, in such a case, the electric power long open effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display dark rotation. In addition, if the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not darkened, and the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric Chu-long opening effect, the game It is possible to carry out an electric Chu-long opening effect that can entertain people. Therefore, in such a case, the electric power long long open effect execution regulation flag is turned off based on the effect based on the success or failure determination result of the special figure change game and the demonstration effect.

  In step S801, when the electric Chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the electric Chu-long opening effect is restricted, and for the restriction of the electric Chu-long opening effect. Other control processing is executed to end the present processing, and the process returns to the effect control processing (step S409) of the main processing.

  In step S801, if the power-on long open effect execution restriction flag is off, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the power-on long open effect can be performed, and proceeds to step S803 to start symbol variation (start of rotation) It is determined from the command data of the command whether or not the success / failure determination result of the general drawing fluctuation game is hit with reference to the information regarding the common drawing per game flag and the general drawing disengaging flag.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the success / failure determination result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the process proceeds to step S805, and the common drawing is generated from the command data of the symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information on the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the common drawing change game is the common drawing A.

  If the first sub control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the common drawing fluctuating game is the common drawing A, the process proceeds to step S807, the effect type selects the effect of "success pattern", and the power is open Set as an effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809 to execute other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “success pattern”, and ends this processing to effect control of the main process. It returns to a process (step S409).

  If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the stop symbol of the common drawing fluctuating game is not the common drawing A in step S805, the processing proceeds to step S811, and the effect type selects the effect of "failure pattern A" Set as an effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809, executes other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “failure pattern A”, terminates the present processing, and performs the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If it is determined in step S803 that the regularity determination result of the general drawing fluctuation game is not a hit, the first sub control unit 400 proceeds to step S815, and executes electric power long open false (gasse) effect execution lottery processing. In the electric chew long opening false effect execution lottery process, the electric chew long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 by taking out a random number value from the random number counter for the electric tune long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408 It is judged whether or not the random number value corresponds to a hit using

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric power long open false effect based on the result of the determination of success or failure in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines to execute the electric power long open false effect in step S817, the process proceeds to step S817, selects an effect whose effect type is "failure pattern B", and sets it as electric power long open effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S 809, executes other control processing for the electric tune long opening effect based on the “failure pattern B”, terminates the present processing, and performs the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 not to execute the electric power long open false effect, it executes other control processing for not executing the electric power long open effect, and ends the present processing to execute the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the processing of the electric chulong opening effect shown in FIG. 84, when the electric chulong opening effect execution regulation flag is off, the electric chulong opening effect is always performed if it is a hit, but it is a hit An execution lottery may be performed in the same manner as at the time of moat-off, and the effect may be executed only when the lottery is won. Moreover, in this example, the effect of "failure pattern A" is set in the hit (open view B) when the turn off is open for a short time (short open), and the turn off does not open the turn off (outline C). Although the effect of "B" is set, the same effect may be performed with a hit (general view B) and a shift (general view C).

  FIG. 84 (b) shows an example of the electric tuong open effect. FIG. 84 (b) shows display effects being executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named "land stage" is executed. At the front of the background effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol in which "decoration 0" to "decoration 9" sequentially move from the top to the bottom in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) Is running. A fluctuation icon display area a is disposed on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a fluctuation icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the variation icon display area a, a special view reserve display area c for displaying a reserve for special view is arranged, and a reserve icon b of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. At the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, a power long open effect area d is disposed. The common drawing change game is started by the common drawing display device 210 (not shown), and the execution of the electric Chu-long opening effect is not regulated, and the electric Chu-long opening effect is executed in the electric Chu-long opening effect area d. An image of a samurai character operating a lottery machine is displayed together with the display of "during a helping chance lottery" as an electric Chu-long opening effect, and the special drawing 2 starting port 232 A scruffy effect is being performed which causes the player to expect that the game may be released long. As shown in FIG. 84 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the effect of opening electric power long. In addition, the right side area of the special view hold display area c is also partially hidden. Thus, if there is a case that the electric Chu-long opening effect makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol makes at least a part of the electric Chu-long opening effect difficult to confirm There may be.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 85A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. First, various initial settings are performed in step S901 in FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S901, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S 903 following step S 901, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S 905. . In step S905, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S 907 following step S 905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first secondary control unit 400 or not.

  In step S909 following step S907, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 907, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, movable body control processing is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first auxiliary control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 85B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first secondary control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  FIG. 85C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second secondary control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt process. Execute in a cycle. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, processing for updating the effect random number value is performed.

  Next, effects and the like of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 98. FIG. FIG. 86A shows a flow of button effect control processing executed in the effect control processing of the main processing in the first sub control unit 400. In the button effect control process, first, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the button effect flag in-progress flag is on (step S1201). The button effect flag is turned on within a period in which the operation of the player's chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is validated (within the operation valid period). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button effect flag is “1”, the button effect flag is in the on state It judges and transfers to the process of step S1203, when the value of a button effect flag is "0", it judges that a button effect flag is an OFF state, and transfers to the process of step S1211.

  In step S1203, the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether the button reception flag is in the on state. The button reception flag is turned on when each button of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is operated. The first sub control unit 400 refers to the value of the button acceptance flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button acceptance flag is “1”, the button acceptance flag is in the on state. If it is determined that the button reception flag is “0”, it is determined that the button reception flag is off, and the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1205, the first secondary control unit 400 executes button reception control processing. In the button reception execution process, control is performed to execute an effect to be performed based on an operation of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137.

  In step S1207 following step S1205, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a button effect end condition is satisfied. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times within the operation valid period, when each button of the setting operation unit 137 is operated in a predetermined order, or when the operation valid period ends, the button effect end condition is To establish. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1209, and if the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect end condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1209, the first sub control unit 400 turns off the button rendering in-progress flag. Since the first sub control unit 400 determines that the operation effective period has ended in step S1207, the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408 is overwritten with “0”, and the button effect flag under execution flag Turn off.

  On the other hand, in step S1211 when it is determined in step S1201 that the button effect executing flag is off, it is determined whether the button effect executing condition is satisfied. The button effect execution condition is satisfied when the player has won the execution of the effect to be the operation valid period of the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 in the predetermined lottery process. If the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1213. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the button effect execution condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1213, the button effect executing flag is turned on. Since the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the effect of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is effective and the button effect execution condition is satisfied, the button effect is executed. The button effect executing flag indicating that is turned on. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408.

  In step S1215, the first sub control unit 400 executes an auto button mode setting process. The auto button mode setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  In step S1217 following step S1215, other button effect control processing is performed. For example, a lottery process or the like is performed to determine the presence or absence of the effect with the operation effective period. After completing the other button effect control process, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the button effect control process, and returns to the effect control process (step S409) of the main process.

  FIG. 86 (b) shows the flow of the automatic button mode setting process executed in step S1215 of the button effect control process. In the auto button mode setting process, first, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the auto button mode setting flag is off (step S1301). The auto button mode is an effect mode in which the chance button 136 and each button of the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set, the auto button mode setting flag is turned on. The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the auto button mode setting flag is “0”, the auto button mode is set. It is determined that the in-setting flag is in the off state, and the process proceeds to step S1303. If the value of the in-auto button mode in-progress flag is "1", it is determined that the in-auto button mode in-progress flag is on. Then, the process proceeds to step S1309.

  In step S1303, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the auto button mode setting condition is satisfied. The auto button mode setting condition is satisfied when the auto button mode setting is called in a user mode (menu) which can be called by the player while the special figure variation game is not being executed. In addition, the auto button mode setting condition may be established when a predetermined lottery is won, or when the number of big hits since the power is turned on reaches a predetermined number. In addition, the automatic button mode setting condition may be forcibly established when the predetermined condition is satisfied, or the player may arbitrarily set the automatic button mode as the automatic button mode setting condition.

  In step S1305 following step S1303, auto button mode setting is performed. In the present embodiment, four types of auto button modes of modes 1 to 4 can be set by the operation of the player. Details of each mode of the auto button mode will be described later.

  In step S1307, the first sub control unit 400 turns on the auto button mode setting flag. Since the auto button mode is set in step S1305, the first sub control unit 400 turns on an auto button mode setting flag indicating that the auto button mode is set. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the auto button mode setting flag is turned on, the first sub control unit 400 ends the auto button mode setting process, and shifts to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  On the other hand, in the next step S1309 when it is determined in step S1301 that the button effect in-progress flag is off, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied. The auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied when the player cancels the auto button mode. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1309. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is not satisfied, the auto button mode setting process is ended. Then, the process shifts to another button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  In step S1311 following step S1309, the flag during the setting of the auto button mode is turned off. Since the first sub control unit 400 determines that the auto button mode setting cancellation condition is satisfied, the first sub control unit 400 turns off an auto button mode setting flag indicating that the auto button mode is set. The first sub control unit 400 overwrites “0” in the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the auto button mode under-setting flag is turned off, the first sub control unit 400 ends the auto button mode setting process, and shifts to other button effect control process (step S1217) of the button effect control process.

  FIG. 87 shows the flow of processing of the chance button control processing (S411) of the main processing in the first sub control unit 400. In the chance button control process, first, the first sub control unit 400 turns off the button reception flag (step S1401). As described above, each time the chance button control process is executed, the button acceptance flag is once turned off. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites “0” in the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, turns off the button reception flag, and shifts to the process of step S1403.

  In step S1403, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the button effect flag in-progress flag is on. The button effect flag is turned on within a period in which the operation of the player's chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is validated (within the operation valid period). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the button effect flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the button effect flag is “1”, the button effect flag is in the on state It judges and shifts to processing of Step S1405, when value of a button production flag is "0", it judges that a button production flag is OFF state, and ends chance button control processing.

  In step S1405, the first sub control unit 400 determines whether the auto button mode setting flag is in the on state. The auto button mode is an effect mode in which the chance button 136 and each button of the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set, the auto button mode setting flag is turned on. The first sub control unit 400 refers to the value of the auto button mode setting flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408, and when the value of the auto button mode setting flag is “1”, the first sub control unit 400 performs the auto button mode. It is determined that the in-setting flag is in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S1407. If the value in the in-auto button mode setting flag is "0", it is determined that the in-automatic button mode in-progress flag is off Then, the process proceeds to step S1411.

  In step S1407, the first secondary control unit 400 performs auto button processing. When the auto button process is performed, the chance button 136 and each button of the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated.

  In step S1409 following step S1407, the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether to accept a button operation. If it is determined that the first sub control unit 400 receives a button operation, the process proceeds to step S1413. If it is determined that the first sub control unit 400 does not receive a button operation, the first sub control unit 400 ends the chance button control process.

  On the other hand, in step S1411 when it is determined in step S1405 that the auto button mode setting flag is off, it is determined whether the detection result of the chance button sensor 426 or the setting operation unit sensor is on. The first sub control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 is operated when the detection result of the chance button sensor 426 is on, and the setting operation unit 137 is operated when the detection result of the setting operation unit sensor is on to decide. If the first sub control unit 400 determines that the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S1413, and if it is determined that the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 have not been operated finish.

  In step S1413, the button reception flag is turned off. Since the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is operated automatically or manually, the first sub control unit 400 turns on a button acceptance flag indicating that the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 has been operated. The first sub-control unit 400 overwrites “1” on the button reception flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. When the button acceptance flag is turned on, the first sub control unit 400 ends the chance button control process.

  FIG. 88 shows various settings of the auto button mode. In the present embodiment, four types of auto button modes of mode 1 to mode 4 are provided. Mode 1 is for beginners and there is no settable condition. Therefore, mode 1 can be set by any player. Mode 2 is for middle-class players and can be set by players who have reached level 50 with Daitomo (membership service). Mode 3 is for advanced users, and can be set by a player who has reached level 100 in Daitomo (membership service). Mode 4 is for all players, but can not be set unless a predetermined opening date is reached.

  In each mode, it is determined at which timing of the operation valid period the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated. As shown in the column of "sex" in the figure, "loosely" is set in mode 1, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at the end of the operation valid period. Further, in mode 2, "impossible" is set, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated in the early stage of the operation valid period. Further, in the mode 3, the "mood shop" is set, and the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 are automatically operated at random timing within the operation effective period. Further, in mode 4, the player can be arbitrarily set to any one of “slow”, “sick” or “feeling”.

  Further, the continuous hitting speed indicating the number of times of operation per unit time of the chance button 136 is set to "low speed" in mode 1, "medium speed" in mode 2, and "high speed" in mode 3. In mode 1 and mode 3, the player performs a continuous hit without operating the chance button 136, but in mode 2, the player performs a continuous hit only when the player keeps pressing the chance button 136. It has become. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set any one of "low speed", "medium speed" and "high speed".

  In addition, in the effect (for example, princess dance SP reach described later) in which the operation timing of the chance button 136 is adjusted, the operation timing is set to “GOOD” of the allowable range in mode 1 and the operation timing is slightly deviated in mode 2 “GREAT Mode 3 is set to "PERFECT" in which the operation timing is perfectly matched. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set one of “GOOD”, “GREAT” or “PERFECT”.

  In addition, in the setting of the “back button” that does not perform operation promotion leaving for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated in mode 1 during the operation valid period, In mode 2, the chance button 136 is automatically operated, and in mode 3, the chance button 136 is automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not to automatically operate.

  In addition, when the holding icon indicating the number of holdings of the special figure variation game is displayed as a pattern imitating the chance button 136 and “button hold” for promoting the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed, the operation valid period is displayed. In mode 1, chance button 136 is automatically operated, in mode 2, chance button 136 is not automatically operated, and in mode 3, chance button 136 is not automatically operated. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not to automatically operate. When the chance button 136 is operated while the "button hold" is displayed, the display mode of the "button hold" hold icon is changed.

  In addition, the cross key (command input of the cross key) for operating the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 in a predetermined order is set to be operated automatically in mode 1, and is set to be operated automatically in mode 2. , Mode 3 is set not to be operated automatically. In mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not to automatically operate.

  In addition, mode 1 is set to "indecision" in which the option is not decided immediately, and mode 2 is set to "immediately in prompt decision" in which the option is immediately decided in the selected effect for making the player draw an object etc. Is set to "default" where the choice is determined as the initial choice. In the mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set one of "indecision", "immediate decision and decision", and "default".

  In addition, it is possible that the player's chance button 136 and the button operation of the setting operation unit 137 being set to each mode are effectively accepted in mode 1, accepted in mode 2 and not accepted in mode 3 It has become. In the mode 4, the player can arbitrarily set whether or not the player can effectively receive the button operation of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137.

  In addition, as described in the “remarks” column in the figure, mode 1 is an auto button setting screen displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during non-execution (non-playing) of special figure variation game, or special figure The on / off setting is possible by the cross key command input during the variable game (during game). In mode 2, when the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is actually operated by the player in the auto button mode on state, the auto button mode is switched to the off state. Mode 3 is designed to be continuously hit at a speed that can not be achieved when the hit button 136 is physically operated (directly by the player). In addition, an effect is provided that appears only when the operation timing is "PERFECT".

  FIG. 89 shows a method of setting mode 1 in the auto button mode in chronological order. Mode 1 is a mode that can be set even by a player who plays the pachinko machine 100 for the first time.

  FIG. 89 (a) shows the display content of the decorative symbol display device 208 during the demonstration effect which is performed during non-execution of the special figure variation game. In the symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 6", which is the nearest stop symbol, is displayed. In addition, in the effect display area 208d, “Call menu with chance button” is displayed, and by operating the chance button 136, it is informed that the menu screen is called (displayed).

  FIG. 89 (b) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated during the demonstration effect, and the menu screen at the time of login of Daitomo (when password is not entered) is displayed. The player operates the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to move the cursor e to select an item, and operates the chance button 136 to decide on the selected item. In addition, a tutorial display composed of a whistle character displayed in the effect display area 208 d and a balloon message “Determine selecting an item” is displayed. The menu of this example is provided with "member registration", "password input", "QR code (registered trademark) issuance", "data clear", "volume and light amount adjustment", and "auto button mode". “Issue QR code” and “clear data” are menus that can be selected only when logging in to Daitomo. In FIG. 89, since “log in to QR code” and “clear data” are displayed darker than the other menus (indicated by hatching upward in the figure) and can not be selected because they are not logged in to Daitomo. It is shown.

  FIG. 89 (c) shows a state in which "auto button mode" is selected on the menu screen. At the time shown in 19 (c), the cursor e1 is located in "mode 1" and "mode 1" is selected. In the effect display area 208d, the explanation of the mode being selected is made by the tutorial display including the princess character and the balloon message "mode 1 is recommended for beginners". Also, mode 2 and mode 3 are modes that can be selected only while logging in to Daitomo, and the open date of "mode 4" has not arrived. Therefore, "mode 2", "mode 3" and "mode 4" are not selectable. Also, when "return" is selected and determined, the menu screen shown in FIG. 89 (b) is returned.

  FIG. 89 (d) shows the state determined to be mode 1. The item “mode 1” is displayed to light up (indicated by a dotted frame in the drawing), and the princess balloon message “decide on mode 1!” Is displayed. In addition, "mode 1" is displayed on the lower left of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the auto button mode under setting is displayed.

  FIG. 89 (e) shows a state in which mode 1 is selected and the menu screen is returned. When "end" of the menu item is selected, a brow character and a balloon message "I will do my best!" Are displayed, and as shown in FIG. 89 (f), the demonstration effect is resumed. Further, as shown in FIG. 89 (e), the display of “mode 1” at the lower left may be hidden by a display (eg, “end” of the menu item) different from the display related to the auto button mode, As shown in FIG. 89 (f), the display of "mode 1" at the lower left may hide a display different from the display related to the auto button mode (for example, a frame of "menu call by chance button").

  FIG. 90 shows the method of setting the mode 4 in the auto button mode in chronological order. FIG. 90 (a) shows a state where “input password” is selected on the menu screen shown in FIG. 89 (b). The player operates the setting operation unit 137 to input a 4-digit password and can log in to the Daitomo.

  FIG. 90 (b) shows a state where the password has been successfully input. After “A password input accepted” is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, a menu screen shown in FIG. 90 (c) is displayed. Since login to Daitomo, the menu item "QR code issue" and "data clear" can be selected. In the effect display area 208d, a tutorial display is displayed, which is composed of a broom character and a balloon message "Select an item and decide". Further, "Level: 250" is displayed on the upper right of the effect display area 208d, and the Daitomo level of the player who has logged in is shown. Since the title corresponding to each level is provided and the title of level 250 is a general, it is displayed as "title: general" below "level: 250".

  In this state, when the player operates the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to select the "auto button" of the menu item and operates the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), the auto button mode is set. The screen is displayed. The cursor e1 is located in "mode 4", and "mode 4" is selected. In the effect display area 208d, the explanation of the mode being selected is made by the tutorial display configured by the princess character and the balloon message "mode 4 can customize all functions". In addition, since the user is logging in to Daitomo and the Daitomo level is 250, "Mode 2" and "Mode 3" can be selected. Further, since the opening date of "mode 4" has arrived, "mode 4" is also selectable.

  FIG. 90 (e) shows the state after the mode 4 is selected and determined. The player operates the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to select a function to be set, and operates the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to set each function. The selection item of each function selected by the player is displayed brighter (indicated by dot hatching in the drawing) than the item of non-selection. When the "decision" shown below the effect display area 208d is selected and determined, the setting (customization) of mode 4 is finished, and when the "cancel" is selected and determined, the auto button mode screen shown in FIG. 90 (d) It is supposed to go back to

  FIG. 90 (f) shows a state in which “decision” is selected and determined, and setting of mode 4 of the auto button is completed. In the lower left of the effect display area 208d, "mode 4" is displayed, and the mode being set is displayed. Also, instead of the “mode 4”, the setting status of each function that can be individually set by the player may be notified individually.

  Next, a specific example of the effects performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

Example 1
FIG. 91 shows an example of effect display in the example 1 of the present embodiment in time series. In FIG. 91 and each of the drawings described later, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is indicated by a downward thick arrow. In FIG. 91 and each figure to be described later, the relative arrangement relationship between the decorative symbol display device 208, the special view 1 holding lamp 218, the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 holding lamp 220 and the special view 2 display 214 Are shown differently to the illustration of FIG. In FIG. 91 and each figure described later, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 1 display 212 are shown on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 and the special figure 2 are displayed on the right Device 214 is shown. Also, the off portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218 and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lit part is shown in black. Further, the state in which all the segments are shown in white on the special view 1 display device 212 or the special view 2 display device 214 indicates that the variable display of the special view 1 or the special view 2 is performed. Also, illustration of the fourth symbol is omitted. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the like are shown on the left side of FIG. 91, and the chance button 136 seen from the player is shown on the left side.

  FIG. 91 (a) shows a state in which super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a sword-austral showdown where the fender f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 91 (a), since the operation effective period of the chance button 136 has not been started, the operation promotion notification is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button lamp 138 is not lighted. .

  FIG. 91 (b) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. At the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string "PUSH!" Are displayed, and the operation valid period is below the image. The meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, and the white portion increases with the passage of time, and the whole is displayed in white when the operation effective period ends. In addition, during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 emits light (shown by cross hatching in the drawing) to prompt the operation of the chance button 136.

  In the present embodiment, the auto button mode is not set. Therefore, the chance button 136 is not automatically operated during the operation effective period. As shown in FIG. 91 (c), when the chance button 136 is operated by the player within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), a cut-in effect in which the face of the lord f1 is displayed in the up position. Is executed. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the cut-in effect is not performed. When the chance button 136 is pressed, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off as shown in FIGS. 91 (c) and 91 (d).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the first effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 by the player within the operation effective period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects.

(Example 2)
FIG. 92 shows an example of effect display in the example 2 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 92 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a sword-austral showdown where the fender f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 92 (a), since the operation effective period of the chance button 136 has not been started, the operation promotion notification is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button lamp 138 is not lighted. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, "mode 3" is displayed on the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 92 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. At the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string "PUSH!" Are displayed, and the operation valid period is below the image. The meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, and the white portion increases with the passage of time, and the whole is displayed in white when the operation effective period ends. In addition, during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 emits light (shown by cross hatching in the drawing) to prompt the operation of the chance button 136. Further, during the setting of the auto button mode, at least one of the image imitating the chance button 136, the three arrows, and the plurality of operation promptings of the character string "PUSH!" May not be displayed.

  FIG. 92C shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 88, the “sex part” in mode 3 is the “feeling store”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the end of the operation effective period as in the case of the “loosely”. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. The timing of the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in mode 3 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may be regular.

  FIG. 92 (d) shows a state in which a cut-in effect has been performed based on automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 92 (d), a cut-in effect is performed in which the face of the temple f1 is displayed in an up state. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect (see FIG. 91D) when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation effective period. Also, different cut-in effects may be performed depending on whether the chance button 136 is manually operated or automatically operated. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the cut-in effect is not performed. The display content of the cut-in effect may be changed according to the setting state of the auto button mode. In particular, as long as the auto button mode is not set, there may be an aspect or the like which is not displayed, or vice versa.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the second effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 (not by the player) in the auto button mode within the operation effective period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects. In the present embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, while the chance button 136 is lit during the operation valid period, the meter image showing the operation valid period is displayed. However, when the auto button mode is not set, a meter image indicating the operation valid period is displayed while the chance button 136 is lit, and when the auto button mode is set, either one or either It is not necessary to execute both.

(Example 3)
FIG. 93 shows an example of effect display in the third example of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 93 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a sword-austral showdown where the fender f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 93 (a), since the operation effective period of the chance button 136 has not been started, the operation promotion notification is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button lamp 138 is not lit .

  Further, in the present embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, "mode 3" is displayed on the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 93 (b) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. At the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string "PUSH!" Are displayed, and the operation valid period is below the image. The meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, and the white portion increases with the passage of time, and the whole is displayed in white when the operation effective period ends. In addition, during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, the chance button lamp 138 emits light (shown by cross hatching in the drawing) to prompt the operation of the chance button 136. Further, during the setting of the auto button mode, at least one of the image imitating the chance button 136, the three arrows, and the plurality of operation promptings of the character string "PUSH!" May not be displayed.

  FIG. 93C shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 88, the "sex part" in mode 3 is the "feeling person", and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the early stage of the operation effective period as in the case of the "sick side". When the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. The timing of the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in mode 3 may be determined by lottery or the like, or may be regular.

  FIG. 93 (d) shows a state in which a cut-in effect has been executed based on the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 93 (d), a cut-in effect is performed in which the face of the temple f1 is displayed in the up position. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect (see FIG. 91D) when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation effective period. If the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the cut-in effect is not performed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the cut-in effect as the second effect based on the operation of the chance button 136 (not by the player) in the auto button mode within the operation effective period. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects.

(Example 4)
FIG. 94 shows a chance button 700 provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a chance button 700 instead of the chance button 136 or in addition to the chance button 136. The chance button 700 is provided at a position where the player can operate, and is configured to be depressible. Also, the chance button 700 has the same shape and structure as the rotating light. In the chance button 700, a rotatable lamp 700a is disposed.

  FIGS. 94 (a) to 94 (d) show an example where the chance button 700 is manually operated by the player. FIG. 94 (a) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 700 is not started and the chance button 700 is on standby. While the chance button 700 is on standby, the lamp 700 a is turned off without being rotated.

  FIG. 94 (b) shows a state in which the operation acceptance of the chance button 700 has been started (the operation valid period has been started). As an operation promotion notification of the chance button 700, the lamp 700a is turned on without being rotated.

  FIG. 94 (c) shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 700. FIG. When the chance button 700 is operated, as shown in FIGS. 94 (c) and (d), the lamp 700a is turned on while being rotated. As described above, when the chance button 700 is operated, an effect of turning on the lamp 700 a while rotating is started. However, if the player holds the hand on the chance button 700 after operating the chance button 700, the rotation and lighting of the lamp 700a may be hidden by hand.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 94 (e) to (g) show an example in which the chance button 700 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. FIG. 94 (e) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 700 has not started and the chance button 700 is on standby. While the chance button 700 is on standby, the lamp 700 a is turned off without being rotated.

  FIG. 94F shows a state in which the operation acceptance of the chance button 700 has been started (the operation valid period has been started). As an operation promotion notification of the chance button 700, the lamp 700a is turned on without being rotated.

  FIG. 94 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 700 is operated in the auto button mode. When the chance button 700 is operated, the lamp 700a is turned on while being rotated. As described above, at the time of setting the auto button mode, even if the player does not actually operate the auto button, the lamp 700a is turned on and turned on based on the automatic operation. Since the player does not operate the chance button 700, it is possible to prevent the player 700 from lowering the visibility of the lamp 700a.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a case (for example, the lamp 700a) is moved by operating the chance button 700 while sacrificing visibility depending on whether or not the auto button mode is set, and the chance button The player can select the case of securing the visibility of the bonus while sacrificing the operation of 700.

(Example 5)
FIG. 95 shows an example of the effect according to the fifth example of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 95 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach effect of the present embodiment, a shooting reach is performed in which the f1 defeats the Echigo f3 with a beam.

  In the shooting reach of the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is validated, and the beam is emitted from the sword of the f1 number of times the number of times the chance button 136 is operated. In order to notify of this, at the start of shooting reach, a string of "shooting reach ~ defeat Echigoya with a button hit ~" is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, mode 1 of the auto button mode is set. "Mode 1" is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 95 (b) shows a state where shooting reach has been started. The effective period of operation of the chance button 136 starts with the start of shooting reach, and in the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and "PUSH!" A character string is displayed, a meter image indicating an operation effective period is displayed below the image, and operation promotion notification is performed.

  The continuous hitting speed in mode 1 of the auto button mode is "slow" as shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 95 (b) and 95 (c), the chance button 136 is automatically operated at a low speed, so the number of beams emitted from the sword of the temple f1 is reduced.

  FIG. 95 (d) shows a state where the player has started to hit the chance button 136 by himself. In mode 1 of the auto button mode, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player is also validated. For this reason, more beams are emitted from the sword of the lord f1 than when the chance button 136 is operated automatically.

  FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing the state of the chance button sensor 426 at the time of effect execution shown in FIG. 95, the result of the automatic button processing determination (steps S1407 and S1409), and the button acceptance flag. FIG. 96 shows the on / off state of the chance button sensor 426, the on / off state of the auto button determination processing result (determination in step S1409 from step S1407), and the on / off state of the button reception flag in order from the top. The horizontal axis in FIG. 96 indicates time. The chance button sensor 426 is turned on only when the player actually operates the chance button 136. The auto button determination processing result is turned on only when the chance button 136 is operated in the auto button mode. The button acceptance flag is turned on both when the player actually operates the chance button 136 and when the chance button 136 is operated in the auto button mode.

  Time t1 of FIG. 96 is the time shown in FIG. 95 (b). When the auto button determination process is turned on at time t1 (Yes in step S1409 from step S1407), the button reception flag is turned on. Since the operation of the chance button 136 at time t1 is an automatic operation in the auto button mode, the chance button sensor 426 remains off at time t1.

  Time t2 of FIG. 96 is the time shown in FIG. 95 (c). When the auto button determination process is turned on at time t2 (Yes in step S1409 from step S1407), the button reception flag is turned on. Since the operation of the chance button 136 at time t2 is automatic operation in the auto button mode, the chance button sensor 426 remains off at time t2. In addition, the operation of the chance button 136 at time t3 to t4 is also automatic operation in the automatic button mode. The automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode is performed at equal intervals. The automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode may be performed randomly or may be performed in a pattern with a different cycle.

  An operation of the chance button 136 by the player is started from time t5. Therefore, at times t5 and t6, the chance button sensor 426 is turned on, and the button acceptance flag is also turned on.

  At time t7, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode overlap. In this case, only one of the player's operation of the chance button 136 and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode is effective, and the chance button 136 is operated only once. Although not illustrated, when the manual operation and the automatic operation of the chance button 136 overlap, it may be determined that both are valid. For example, even when the chance button 136 pressed at time t6 is maintained as it is, the result of the automatic button processing determination result at time t7 and time t10 may be ON, or conversely, the chance button 136 If it is maintained in the ON state, the button reception flag may be turned OFF without being turned ON even when the automatic button processing determination result is ON.

  At time t8, the player operates the chance button 136. At time t9, the player operates the chance button 136. Further, time t9 is the time shown in FIG. 95 (d).

  Although the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode at time t10, the button reception flag is not turned on at time t10. Therefore, the automatic operation of the chance button 136 at time t10 is invalidated. In this manner, the automatic operation of the chance button 136 may be invalidated for a predetermined period after the player operates the chance button 136. After that, the chance button 136 is operated by the player at time t11.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, the operation of the chance button 136 by the player is validated. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the auto button mode is set, by accepting the operation of the chance button 136 by the player, it is possible to cope with the player who suddenly wants to operate the chance button 136 . In addition to the operation performed automatically, there are cases where it is possible to easily capture continuous hit effects and the like (for example, shooting reach) by operating the chance button 136 manually.
Here, the configuration may be such that the result of the automatic button processing determination processing is turned ON at the same time as the reception period of the chance button 136 is started. When the player presses the chance button 136, it is difficult to operate the chance button 136 simultaneously with the start of the period even when waiting for the start of the acceptance period of the chance button 136. Therefore, the chance button It takes time from the start of the reception period of 136 to the execution of the effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136. In that respect, when the auto button mode is set, the effect based on the pressing of the chance button 136 is executed almost simultaneously with the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, so it may be possible to see the effect faster is there.

(Example 6)
FIG. 97 shows an example of effect display in the sixth example of the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (d) show an example in which the auto button mode is activated. FIG. 97 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach production of the present embodiment, an animation of a sword-austral showdown where the fender f1 and the swordsman f2 confront each other is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. Therefore, "mode 3" is displayed on the lower left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 97 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. At the center of the effect display area 208d, an image imitating the chance button 136, three arrows above the image, and a character string "PUSH!" Are displayed, and the operation valid period is below the image. The meter image showing is displayed. These displays are an example of the operation promotion notification. The meter image is initially displayed in a color other than white, and the white portion increases with the passage of time, and the whole is displayed in white when the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 97 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 88, the “sex part” in mode 3 is the “feeling man”, and in this example, the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the middle of the operation effective period.

  FIG. 97 (d) shows a state in which the cut-in effect is performed based on the automatic operation of the chance button 136 in the auto button mode. As shown in FIG. 97 (d), a cut-in effect is performed in which the face of the temple f1 is displayed in the up position. This cut-in effect is the same as the cut-in effect (see FIG. 91D) when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation effective period.

  FIGS. 97 (e) to 97 (h) show an example in which the auto button mode is not activated. FIG. 97 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) is executed. Further, since mode 3 of the auto button mode is set, "mode 3" is displayed on the upper left of the effect display area 208d. The position of the display showing that the auto button mode is being set is at the lower left when executing the super reach effect, and the position of the display showing that the auto button mode is being set is not active at the non effect of the super reach effect It has become. Thus, the position of the display indicating that the auto button mode is being set may be changed depending on the state.

  In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower left area is a variation icon display area a. In the variation icon display area a, one variation icon can be displayed, and it is possible to give notice of the success or failure of the variation with a predetermined reliability (notice of the variation) by the display mode of the variation icon. In the variation icon display area a, a variation icon a1 is displayed in a white circular (default) display mode.

  In addition, a horizontally long area adjacent to the right side of the variation icon display area a, which is a lower part of the effect display area 208d, is a special view reserve display area (hold icon display area) c. In the special view hold display area c, one or more hold icons can be displayed. In the special figure reserve display area c, it is possible to notify the number of reserve for special figure fluctuation game by the number of reserve icons, and notify the propriety of the reserve with predetermined reliability by the display mode of each reserve icon (prefetching It is possible to give notice. Further, in the special view reserve display area c of the present example, a reserve icon indicating the hold of reserve orders 1 to 4 is displayed in order from the variable icon display area a side. Since the number of reservations for the current special drawing 1 variation game is two, as shown in FIG. 97 (e), the two special icons b1 and b2 have white circles (default) in the special drawing suspension display area c. It is displayed in the form.

  FIG. 97 (f) shows a state in which one game ball is won in the special view 1 start port 230 during execution of the special view 1 change game, and the number of reserved special view 1 change games is increased by one. . A reserve icon b3 is newly displayed in the special view reserve display area c.

  The hold icon b3 is a button hold displayed in a display mode of a pattern imitating the chance button 136. The button hold is displayed as a prefetch notice. While the button hold is displayed, the operation period of the chance button 136 is valid. When the chance button 136 is operated manually or automatically while the button hold is displayed, the display mode of the button hold is changed. In addition, when multiple buttons are displayed while the auto button mode (except mode 3) is set, only the display mode of the previously displayed buttons is displayed when the auto button mode is activated. Alternatively, only the display mode of the button hold displayed later may be changed. Moreover, in that case, the display modes of both button hold may not be changed, and the display modes of both button hold may be changed simultaneously. Also, these controls may be different or the same in the setting of the auto button mode and the other states. In addition, the display mode after the change may be different between the change of the display mode by the operation of the auto button mode and the change of the display mode based on the actual pressing of the chance button 136, or even the same. Good. In addition, there may be an aspect or the like that is displayed only when one of the conditions is satisfied.

  In this example, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set, but in mode 3, as shown in FIG. 88, automatic operation at the time of button hold display is not performed, and operation by the player is not validated. Therefore, when mode 3 is set, the display mode of the button hold does not change.

  FIG. 97 (g) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game has been started, which has been indicated by the hold icon b3. The button hold pending icon b3 is a variation icon a2 with the display mode unchanged. The fluctuation icon a2 gradually moves toward the fluctuation icon display area a.

  FIG. 97 (h) shows a state where the fluctuation icon a2 has moved to the fluctuation icon display area a. The display mode of the fluctuation icon a2 changes after the movement to the fluctuation icon display area a is completed. For example, the change icon a2 changes to a display mode of a pattern drawn as “heat” in a circle of red (indicated by cross hatching in the figure), and a notice display of a special figure 1 change game being executed ( It has become a notice of the change).

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) to (d) of this embodiment, the automatic button mode may be activated during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 may be automatically operated. As shown in FIGS. 97 (e) to 97 (h), the automatic button mode may not be activated during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136 so that the chance button 136 is not automatically operated. When cut-in effect is executed when the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode may be activated, or when the button hold changes when the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode May operate. Further, when cut-in effect is executed when the chance button 136 is operated, the auto button mode does not have to be activated, or when the button hold changes when the chance button 136 is operated, The auto button mode may not operate.

(Example 7)
FIG. 98 shows an example of effect display in the seventh example of the present embodiment in time series. The left side of FIG. 98 shows the decorative symbol display device 208 etc., and the right side shows the chance button 136 seen from the player.

  FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which the super reach effect is being executed during execution of the special view 1 change game. "Decoration 7" is displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variation of the decorative symbol is reached. In the super reach production of this embodiment, a princess dance super reach is performed where the princess dances.

  In the princess dance super reach of the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is validated, and the effect of operating the chance button 136 in a timely manner is executed. In order to notify of this, at the start of the princess dance super reach, a character string of "hime princess SP reach ~ press flowing buttons with good timing! ~" Is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, mode 3 of the auto button mode is set. "Mode 3" is displayed at the lower left of the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 98 (b) shows a state in which the princess dance super reach has been started. The activation period of the chance button 136 is started with the start of the princess dance super reach. When the operation valid period starts, the chance button lamp 138 lights up.

  Further, in the effect display area 208d, the image of the princess, the chance button image g, and the aiming frame h are displayed. In this embodiment, a plurality of chance button images g are displayed so as to flow from the top toward the aiming frame h in accordance with the BGM being reproduced. When the chance button 136 is operated manually or automatically at timing when the chance button image g overlaps the aiming frame h, evaluations of “PERFECT”, “GREAT”, and “GOOD” are obtained in order of good timing.

  FIG. 98 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode. In the present embodiment, the chance button 136 is movable by drive means such as a motor or a solenoid. At the timing when the chance button 136 is automatically operated, it is retracted as if the chance button 136 is pressed. When the chance button 136 is automatically operated, the chance button 136 may be operated to protrude upward. Also, when the chance button 136 is operated, the chance button lamp 138 is turned off. Furthermore, when the chance button 136 is provided with a driving means, the chance button 136 may not be physically pressed by operating the driving means according to the setting of the auto button mode. For example, the chance button 136 may not be pressed by driving the drive means so that the player does not press the chance button 136 based on the auto button mode being set to ON. For example, the chance button 136 can be pressed by applying a force from the inside to the outside from the inside of the chance button 136 to fix the chance button 136 so as not to move or retracting the chance button 136 and fixing the chance button 136 in the retracted state. You may lose it.

  Thus, when automatically operating the chance button 136 in the auto button mode, the chance button 136 is operated as if it were actually operated. This is not limited to the movement of the chance button 136 by the driving means, and the appearance may be the same when the chance button 136 is operated by the player and when the chance button 136 is automatically operated. For example, when the chance button lamp 138 lights up during the operation effective period and the chance button lamp 138 is turned off when the player operates the chance button 136, the chance button 136 is automatically operated by the operation of the auto button mode. By turning off the chance button lamp 138 based on the operation, it may be possible to make the player illusion as if the chance button 136 is actually operated.

  In addition, when the chance button 136 is actually operated and the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, in order to make the player illusion as if the chance button 136 is actually operated. The appearance of the chance button 136 should be common. In this case, when the chance button 136 is actually operated and when the chance button 136 is automatically operated in the auto button mode, the lighting condition of the chance button lamp 138 (for example, presence / absence of issuance, light emission color, brightness) At least one element among a plurality of elements such as the posture and the state of movement may be made common.

  FIG. 98 (d) shows the state after the chance button 136 has been operated automatically. As shown in FIG. 88, in mode 3 of the auto button mode, the chance button 136 is automatically operated at the timing when all become “PERFECT”. For this reason, after the chance button 136 is automatically operated, an effect image including the character string "PERFECT" is displayed so as to overlap the aiming frame h.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the same effect as when the chance button 136 is actually operated is played without operating the chance button 136 even for the player who feels that the operation of the chance button 136 is troublesome. May be shown to

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 71 to 98.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 by this embodiment is:
Operation means (for example, chance buttons 136 and 700, setting operation unit 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
At least one of a plurality of effects (for example, cut-in effect, button hold, shooting reach, princess dance SP reach effect) at least one of the effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) that can be executed;
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect (e.g., a cut-in effect, change in button hold, etc.),
At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect (for example, cut-in effect, button hold),
The rendering means can at least execute the first rendering (for example, cut-in rendering (see FIG. 91)) when the first condition is established.
The effect means is capable of at least executing the second effect (for example, change of button hold in mode 3) when the second condition is satisfied.
The first effect is at least a different effect from the second effect,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by the player,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by the player.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by executing various effects.
In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, it is possible to show the same effect as in the case of operating the operating means without operating the operating means even to the player who feels that the operation of the operating means is troublesome. There is a case. Further, by providing an effect that can be visually recognized by not operating the operation means, there are cases in which a new way of enjoying the game can be performed in which the operation means is not daringly operated.

(2) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
A game console comprising presentation mode control means capable of at least switching control of a plurality of presentation modes,
At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a first effect mode (for example, non-setting of an auto button mode),
At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a second effect mode (for example, an auto button button mode),
The first effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,
The second effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,
The first effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated.
The second effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is automatically operated.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, a player who does not want to operate the operation means does not operate the operation means by providing the effect to be performed only in the effect mode in which the operation of the operation means is automatically performed. In some cases there is no loss. Conversely, there are also cases where a player who does not want to operate the operating means does not operate the operating means.

(3) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The effect means can at least execute an operation promotion notification (for example, an image imitating the chance button 136, a meter image),
When the effect mode is the first effect mode, the effect means can at least execute the operation promotion notification.
When the effect mode is the second effect mode, the effect means can at least execute the operation promotion notification,
The operation promotion notification is a notification to urge the player to operate the operation means.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the configuration, even if the effect mode in which the operation on the operation means is automatically performed, the operation is promoted by executing the operation promotion notification for prompting the operation of the operation means to automate the operation. It may be possible to rescue a player who is feeling backwards. In addition, it may be difficult to understand that the second effect mode (for example, the auto button mode) is set by another player. In addition, since control can be made common in a plurality of effect modes, control load can be reduced and the number of steps of design work can be reduced.

(4) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a third effect (for example, a cut-in effect),
The rendering means is capable of at least executing the third rendering when the third condition is established.
The third effect is at least the same effect as the first effect,
The third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated by the player.
It is characterized by

(5) The above-mentioned pachinko machine 100,
The third effect is an effect to be executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,
The first effect is an effect to be executed when the effect mode is the second effect mode.
It is characterized by

  According to the pachinko machine 100 having the above configuration, a game in which the player suddenly wants to operate the operation means by accepting the operation of the operation means by the player even in the effect mode in which the operation of the operation means is automatically performed. It can cope with the Moreover, in addition to the operation performed automatically, there are cases where it is possible to easily capture continuous hit effects etc. by operating the operation means manually.

(6) The above game console,
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
It is characterized by

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.
For example, the above-described embodiment is also applicable to an enclosed type gaming machine that cyclically uses gaming balls enclosed in a gaming machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and uses the enclosed sphere in circulation in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The dispensing of the ball may be performed by an electronic display.

  It is possible to combine the matters described in the above detailed description, in particular the matters described in the embodiment and the modification.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game console, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.
The gaming machine according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 99 and corresponds to “a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel Provided to stop the rotation of the reel individually, and based on the lottery result of the lottery means (lottery lottery internal lottery) to determine the success or failure of the internal winning of multiple types of winning combination by lottery Reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination Determination means for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination (prize determination processing), and when the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined prize mode, it corresponds to the predetermined prize mode Game medium is dispensed, and in addition to the payout control means (the medal payout process 1008) for performing the game medium payout process, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launcher 1014 for launching a ball into the game area 1012 of the game, a winning opening 1016 configured to be capable of entering a ball launched from the launching device, and a detection means 1018 for detecting a sphere entering the winning opening 1016; Dispensing means 1020 for dispensing a ball when detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And the movable body 1026 operating in the predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is designed with the game ball entering the winning opening for winning. And the stopped displayed After moving, are also suitable for the slot machine 1000 "it is a representation section 1010, so as to produce a game.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention shown in FIG. 100 (a) inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes a lottery based on the bet 2004 and the start 2006 operation, and displays the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008 At the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cash out 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 2010 " It may be

  Furthermore, as shown in (b) of the figure, a portable telephone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in (c) of the figure, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing a home video game console 5000 and a home video game console 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 6B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game through the mobile telephone line, and data related to the acquired game (this And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data on a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD, etc.), and data on the acquired game (this invention) And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game console 5000 in (d) of the figure shows an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data related to the acquired game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown to the figure (e), you may apply to the data server 6000 which stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention. There are cases where electronic data for implementing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game console 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program which executes the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine in a pseudo manner for a home-use game machine. In that case, as a recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disc), or any other recording medium can be used.

  Furthermore, the present invention has exemplified pachinko machines and slot machines as gaming machines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to arrange ball game machines, baseball game machines, smart balls and the like.

  In conventional gaming machines, there was an effect that would not be executed unless the player operated the operation means. Also, in the conventional gaming machine, depending on conditions such as time-up of the operation effective period of the operation means, even when the player does not operate the operation means, the same effect as when the operation means is operated may be executed. there were. For this reason, in the conventional gaming machine, the effect to be executed based on the operation of the operation means is likely to be monotonous, and the predetermined effect is executed at the determined timing, so the player is started. There is a problem that it is easy to predict the contents of the presentation and it is easy to get bored with the presentation.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment makes various effects to be performed based on the operation of the operation means, and randomizes the timing of effect execution, thereby providing effects to be started by the player. This makes it difficult to predict the contents of the game, and can be used to create timeless effects.

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix G1)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
At least one of a plurality of effects, and at least one effect means that can be performed;
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The rendering means is capable of at least performing the first rendering when the first condition is established.
The rendering means is at least capable of executing the second rendering when the second condition is established.
The first effect is at least a different effect from the second effect,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by the player,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is not operated by the player.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G2)
The gaming machine described in appendix G1,
A game console comprising presentation mode control means capable of at least switching control of a plurality of presentation modes,
At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a first effect mode,
At least one of the plurality of effect modes is a second effect mode,
The first effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,
The second effect is an effect that is not executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,
The first effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is not automatically operated.
The second effect mode is an effect mode in which the operation means is automatically operated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G3)
The game console described in Appendix G2,
The rendering means is at least capable of executing an operation promotion notification.
When the effect mode is the first effect mode, the effect means can at least execute the operation promotion notification.
When the effect mode is the second effect mode, the effect means can at least execute the operation promotion notification,
The operation promotion notification is a notification to urge the player to operate the operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix G2 or G3,
At least one of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The rendering means is capable of at least executing the third rendering when the third condition is established.
The third effect is at least the same effect as the first effect,
The third condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the operation means is operated by the player.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G5)
The gaming machine described in Appendix G4,
The third effect is an effect to be executed when the effect mode is the first effect mode,
The first effect is an effect to be executed when the effect mode is the second effect mode.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix G6)
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendices G1 to G5, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by

  Fourth Embodiment

Hereinafter, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail using the drawings. Note that the symbols shown in FIG. 101 to FIG. 144 are basically used only in the description of the fourth embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in FIGS. 101 to 144 have priority.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape to form an inner side thereof. It is a door member which made the opening part. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. In addition, when the front frame door 106 is opened, the front frame door open sensor 109 is provided to detect the opening of the front frame door 106.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 can store a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as "balls"), and is provided with a door-side ball passage unit for guiding the gaming balls to the launcher. The upper tray 126, the lower tray 128 for storing gaming balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 126, and the ball extraction button 130 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 126 by the operation of the player to the lower tray 128 The ball discharging lever 132 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the gaming ball collecting container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation of the player, and the game guided to the launching device 110 by the operation of the player A ball emission handle 134 for emitting a ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 by the operation of the player, and a chance button 136 are emitted. Provided that the chance button lamp 138, a. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch which can be pressed by a setter (for example, a player), and the confirmation (OK) button, the upper button located above the confirmation button, and the lower side of the confirmation button And a right button located to the right of the enter button, a left button located to the left of the enter button, and a cancel (C) button located to the right of the right button. There is. Further, the setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor 427 (see FIG. 104) that detects the pressing operation of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of the present embodiment has a unit structure in which each button and an operation unit sensor are integrated. Note that at least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 may have a function similar to that of the above-described chance button 136.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And. The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.
<Back side of pachinko machine>

  FIG. 102 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 101 viewed from the back side. At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls, and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150 A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.
<Front of the game board>

  FIG. 103 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special view fluctuation game It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A variable winning hole 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize balls", and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "lending balls". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general drawing start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special drawing start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper tray 126. The first special figure display device 212 starts a special figure change game. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special drawing start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed immediately below the first special drawing start port 230. The second special view start port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the wing member 232a is closed, and wins a common game variation game, and a common game display device When the symbol 210 is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes an openable door member 234a, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member 234a is closed, and the special view display is stopped with a big hit symbol winning the special view variable game. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball that has not won a prize to any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.
<Rendering device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means has its inner end portions overlapping and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player does not easily see it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.
<Control unit>

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 (two circuits in this circuit) which are used as hardware random number counters that change numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. It is assumed that a counter is built in), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the lower-side full-tank sensor and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, eg, Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of common drawing display device 210, various state display unit 328 (for example, common drawing holding lamp 216, first special drawing holding lamp 218, second special drawing holding lamp 220, high confidence) Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the second special view starting port 232 and the door members 234a of the variable winning opening 234 and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the signal is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view starting opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the counter circuit 318. The counter circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in the register for Also, even when a signal indicating that the ball is won is received at second special view start opening 232, counter circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to second special view start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, time and number of times etc. The counter timer 412 of The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246 Driving circuit 432 for performing drive control, shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of shielding device 246, chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting pressing of chance button 136, and pressing of each button of setting operation unit 137 An operation unit sensor 427 for detecting an operation, a sensor circuit 428 for outputting a detection signal from the shielding device sensor 430, the chance button detection sensor 426 and the operation unit sensor 427 to the basic circuit 402, and a ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404. Read out stored image data etc. and work on VRAM 436 It is connected to generate a display image using the rear for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 a (video display processor), a.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.
<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of symbol>

  Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped using FIGS. 105 (a) to (c). The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described. The same figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention.

  Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol change stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the same figure (a), ten types of special drawings from "special drawing A" to "special drawing F" and "special drawing a" to "special drawing d" are shown as stop symbol modes in symbol fluctuation stop display The white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game and after the end of the 15R big hit game, it shifts to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is 15R special big hit design is special figure high probability spread figure high probability state, "special figure B" which is 15R big hit design is special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure a" is 16R special big hit symbol, "special figure b" is 8R special big hit symbol, and all are special figure high probability spread figure high probability states. In addition, “special figure c” is an 8R big hit design, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. In addition, "special figure C" is a 2R big hit symbol called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit design called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R. "Special figure E" is a small hit design, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. In addition, “special figure F” and “special figure d” are out symbols, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "special image A" is also prepared as the 15R special big hit symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R big hit symbol.

  FIG. 105 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "display of variation of decoration pattern".

  For example, when notifying 15R big hit of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R big hit corresponding to 15R big hit in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In the case of notifying 15R special big hit of “Special figure A”, a pattern combination in which the same three odd decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 To stop. On the other hand, when notifying of the exfoliation of "special figure F" and "special figure d", symbol display other than the symbol combination shown in the figure (b) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 105 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common drawing. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a disjointed pattern. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), monitor whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the robot 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer Update two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically (this processing is not abnormal) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt is not generated (the processing abnormality is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 104, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of

  That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random value counter for initial value generation performed in the above-mentioned step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value used in the main control unit 300 The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value respectively are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the first special view start port 230, the second special view start port 232, the common drawing start port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 random number value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. The value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a winning on the second special view start port 232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is the special figure 2 random number value The value is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 2 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding storage number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a common drawing selection random value from a random number counter for common drawing selection random number generation. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that it becomes an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to become the display pattern of the detached symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 105 (c) and the distracted symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 105 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing fluctuation game is out, the common drawing deviation flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for drawing out is set to ON, the normal drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224, the special drawing prefetch process is performed for each of special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 (details will be described later). Next, special figure status update processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 status update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). This special view 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the special view 2 state. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  In addition, after the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 performs the on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214, the determination of the special view 2 is performed using the second special symbol display device 214 Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If it is not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the door member 234a is opened until the game winning of the predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234 And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the storage period of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is closed. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Further, this door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state update process started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. Further, if the common drawing probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, 100 time saving times are set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 Turn on. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. The term "time-saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a common drawing high probability state. It is highly possible that the common drawing change game will be a big hit in the common drawing high probability state compared to the common drawing low probability state. In addition, in the case of the common drawing high probability state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation game are shorter than in the common drawing low probability state. Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be long. In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a regular game high probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 during the big hit game, a lot of games in the second special view starting port 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the ball enters the ball and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and it is for solving this. Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is off, as described later, the off flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the 1st sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 However, priority is given to notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. Also, if the command type is the symbol variation start command, the command data includes the value of the big hit flag or the small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure stop symbol selected in the special figure related lottery process, timer number It includes information indicating (special figure fluctuation time) etc., and in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, it includes the value of the big hit flag or small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. In the case of the command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag or the like is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, or the like is included. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-described rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the big hit flag and the small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the number of the timer number selected in the process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the big hit flag and the small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special view reserve increase processing, special view identification information (information indicating special view 1 or special view 2) stored in command data in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, notice information (previous notice information, false) Set prior advance notice information or any prior notice nothing information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 106 is performed. Return to

On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process described above.
<Special drawing prefetch processing>

  FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special view look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and determines in advance the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The figure prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 109A to 109C) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as the pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether the start information in the special view 2 is increasing (step S251). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 is increased is stored, for example, in the special view 2 pending count stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and in the special view 2 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special figure 2 pre-reading number. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is the special view 2 look-ahead count and If equal, it is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S252. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 is not increased, the process proceeds to step S254.

  In step S252, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is compared with the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the success / failure determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special view determination table used at the time of pass / fail determination, for example, the stop symbol of the special view 2 variation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S253 following step S252, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S254.

  In step S254, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information in the special view 1 is increasing. As in the case of, for example, the special figure 2, the determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 is increased is the special figure 1 pending number stored in the special figure 1 pending number storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S255. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 is not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended and the main control unit Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S255, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power-supply mode, the process proceeds to step S256, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power-supply mode (that is, it is in the power support mode), the process proceeds to step S258. Although it is determined in the present example whether or not power is not being supplied, it may be determined whether the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance warning notification are satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step S256, the special figure 1 start information (the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is displayed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step S 257 following step S 256, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained by the prior determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S258, without pre-reading the special view 1 start information that has been increased, “not determined” information indicating that the start information is not read ahead is replaced with the stop symbol information and the special view 1 read-ahead result storage in the RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. Thereafter, the special view prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the special-purpose 1 and special-purpose 2 pre-read result storage. All the pre-read results in the unit may be sent to the first sub control unit 400.

In addition, pre-reading is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 2, and pre-reading is always performed on the increased startup information except for during power support. And, whether or not to preread the start information of the special figure 2 may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, and the pre-reading The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to perform the lottery and the effect using the pre-reading result. Furthermore, even if the start information and the prefetch result storage unit of one start information and the prefetch result storage unit are configured to store the start information and the prefetch result of each of the special views without providing an area for storing the start information and the prefetch result for each special view. good.
<Pre-reading result information>

  FIG. 109 exemplifies a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. The same figure (a) has shown an example of the state by which the special figure 1 prefetch result information was memorize | stored in the special view 1 prefetch result storage part. As shown in FIG. 6A, the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 1 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in (a) of the figure, "special figure E" (displaced) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "pending 1", and "special figure E" as the stopping symbol information in the storage area "pending 2". (Defect) is stored, and "special figure D" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 3", and "special figure A" as stop symbol information in storage area "hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  The figure (b) has shown an example of the state by which the special figure 2 prefetch result information was memorize | stored in the special view 2 prefetch result memory | storage part. As shown in FIG. 6B, the special view 2 pre-fetching result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 2 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in (b) of the figure, "special figure d" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and stop symbols in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". Information is not stored. In addition, in the figure (b), the state which stop symbol information is not memorize | stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  The same figure (c) has shown the example of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage section in power support. As shown in FIG. 6C, in the storage area "pending 1", "not determined" information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. In the storage areas "pending 2" to "pending 4", neither stop symbol information nor "not determined" information is stored.

In the above description, only the stop symbol is determined in advance, and only the stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, the success / failure determination result, the change timer number (change time), the timer group described later, etc. The determination may be made, and the information may be stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as prefetch result information.
<Special figure 1 related lottery process>

  Next, a special figure 1 related lottery process in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process.

  In step S 281, it is determined whether the special symbol or the special electric combination is in operation, that is, whether the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the big hit is in progress, and the processing is ended if applicable. If not, the process proceeds to step S282. In step S282, it is determined whether there is a reserve of special figure 1 change game or not. If there is no reserve of special figure 1 change game, the processing is ended, and if there is a reserve, the process proceeds to step S283.

  In step S283, it is determined whether the above-mentioned special figure probability change flag is ON or OFF, and when the special figure probability change flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S284, and a high probability table for success determination described later The big hit judgment (big hit judgment) and the small hit judgment (small hit judgment) are performed using the lottery data of [], and when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S 285, which will be described later. A big hit determination (big hit success or failure determination) and a small hit determination (small hit or not determination) are performed using the lottery data of the low probability table for determination [special figure 1].

  In step S286, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination result of the big hit is a big hit, and if so, the process proceeds to step S287, and if not, the process proceeds to step S288. In step S287, the symbol lottery is performed based on the jackpot success / failure determination result and the symbol random number value, and the jackpot symbol (in the present embodiment, in the case of the special view 1, any of the special view A to special view D, the special view 2 In the case of (1), the special figure a to special figure c) is determined, and then the process proceeds to step S291.

  In step S288, it is determined whether the small hit success or failure determination result is a small hit, and if so, the process proceeds to step S289, and if not, the process proceeds to step S290. In step S289, the symbol lottery is performed based on the above-mentioned small hit success / failure determination result and the symbol random number value, and the small hit symbol (in the present embodiment, special figure E in the case of special figure 1, special figure 2 is small hit After determining “none”, the process proceeds to step S291.

  In step S290, a symbol lottery is performed based on symbol random number values, and after an out symbol (in the present embodiment, special figure F in the case of special figure 1 and special figure d in the case of special figure 2) is determined, The process proceeds to step S291. In step S291, a fluctuation type lottery is performed based on the type of the special drawing stop symbol determined in steps S286 to S290 and the number of pending memories currently (at the start of fluctuation of special drawing 2), and the fluctuation pattern and the special drawing fluctuation time are determined. Do.

In the special figure 2 related lottery process described above, the lottery process for the special figure 2 is performed, but in the special figure 1 related lottery process shown in FIG. The table [Special figure 1] is replaced with a high probability table for success or failure judgment [special figure 2], and the low probability table for success or failure judgment [special figure 1] is read into a low probability table for success or failure judgment [special figure 2]. Since the process is the same as the process without the determination, the description thereof is omitted.
<Data table of main control unit>

Next, the data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.
<Table for judging the success or failure>

  FIG. 111 (a) shows a low probability table for winning determination [special view 1] is an example of a table used for the success or failure determination of the special view 1 when the special view probability is in the special view low probability state. It is the table which linked | related and stored the range of a numerical value, and the success / failure result of the special figure 1. In addition, the high probability table for success / fail judgment [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 6B is an example of a table used for the success / failure determination of Special Figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the range of a winning random number value, and the pass / fail result of the special figure 1.

  When the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the low probability table for special decision [special figure 1], and based on the acquired special figure winning random value. Judgment as to whether special figure 1 fluctuation game is elected (big hit), special figure 1 fluctuation game is elected (small hit) or not elected (missed) (big hit judgment or small hit judgment of special figure 1 If the special figure 1 is in the special figure high probability state, the high probability table for special decision [special figure 1] is referred to, and the special figure is selected based on the acquired special figure winning random number value (details will be described later). The big hit judgment or the small hit judgment of FIG. 1 is performed.

  For example, in the case where the special figure probability is the special figure low probability state, when the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219, it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is won (big hit) Information indicating a big hit is set in the flag storage area (hereinafter, setting big hit information in the big hit flag storage area is referred to as “set big hit flag on”).

  In the case where the special figure probability is the special figure low probability state, when the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10220 to 10383, it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is won (small hit) and provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating small hit is set in the small hit flag storage area (hereinafter, setting small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as "set small hit flag ON").

  In addition, when the special figure probability is the special figure low probability state, when the special figure winning random number value which is acquired is 0-10000, or 10384-65535, it decides with special figure 1 fluctuation game off, it mentions Information indicating that the storage area for the big hit flag and the small hit flag is shifted (hereinafter, setting the information for the shift area for the stored area of the big hit flag is referred to as "set the big hit flag off," Setting deviation information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as "set the small hit flag off").

  The low probability table [Special figure 2] for success / failure determination shown in the same figure (c) is an example of a table used for the success / failure decision of the special figure 2 when the special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. It is the table which linked | related and stored the range of a numerical value, and the success or failure result of the special figure 2. Further, the high probability table for success / fail determination [Special Figure 2] shown in FIG. 6D is an example of a table used for the success / failure determination of Special Figure 2 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the range of a winning random number value, and the pass / fail result of the special figure 2.

The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the low probability table for success / fail determination [special figure 2] when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, and acquires the special figure winning random number value (details will be described later) Based on), it is determined whether the special figure 2 fluctuation game is to be elected (big hit) or not elected (missing) (big hit determination of special figure 2), special figure 2 is special figure high probability state In the case, the big hit determination of the special figure 2 is performed based on the acquired special figure winning random number value (details will be described later) with reference to the high probability table for special decision [special figure 2]. In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation game, it is constituted so that it does not win in the small hitting.
<Table for special drawing determination>

  The special drawing determination table [special drawing 1] and the special drawing determination table [special drawing 2] shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) are the above-mentioned big hit flag and small hit flag (relevant judgment result), and symbols It is a data table which linked and stored a random number value and the kind of special figure stop symbol by the 1st, 2nd Special figure display 212, 214.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 includes the special drawing determination table, the above-described big hit determination result (big hit flag value), the small hit determination result (small hit flag value), and the acquired symbol random number value. Based on the special drawing symbol lottery that determines the type of special drawing stop symbol. In addition, when the big hit flag is on, the obtained big hit symbol random number value is used as a symbol random number value, and when the small hit flag is on, the small hit symbol generated from the above-mentioned special figure winning random number value The random number value is used as the symbol random number value, and when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit determination result and the small hit determination result are disconnected), the obtained out-of-lot symbol random number value is used as the symbol random number value Do.

  In this embodiment, in the special figure 1 fluctuation game, referring to the special figure determination table [special figure 1] of the figure (a), when the big hit flag is on (when the result of the judgment is big hit), Special figure A is acquired with probability 25/100 when acquired symbol random number value is 0-24, and special figure B is acquired with probability of 25/49 when acquired symbol random number value is 25-49. The special figure C is selected at a probability of 5/100 when the symbol is 50 to 54, and the special figure D is selected at a probability of 45/100 when the acquired symbol random number value is 55 to 99. Also, if the small hit flag is on (if the judgment result is a small hit), special figure E (small hit) is selected with 100% probability regardless of the symbol random number value, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag If it is off (if the result of the determination is the removal), the special figure F (the removal) is selected with a probability of 100/100 (100%) regardless of the symbol random number value.

In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation game, when the big hit flag is on (when the decision result is big hit), the special figure a with probability of 70/100 when the acquired symbol random number value is 0-69 The special figure b is selected at a probability of 5/100 when the acquired symbol random number value is 70 to 74, and the special figure c is selected at a probability of 25/100 when the acquired symbol random number value is 75 to 99. In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation game, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the decision result of the decision is the removal) special figure d (off) is selected with 100% probability regardless of the symbol random number value Do. In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation game, unlike the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the probability that the small hit is selected is set to 0%.
<Variable display time determination table>

  FIG. 113 is an example of a special view 1 variation display time determination table used to determine the variation time of the special view 1, and FIG. 114 is a special view 2 variation used to determine the variation time of the special view 2 It is an example of a display time determination table.

  The variable display time determination table is a table in which the type of the special figure stop symbol described above, the special figure variation time, and the effect performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 at the special figure variation time are stored in association with random number values. It is. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs a fluctuation pattern lottery that determines the fluctuation time of the special figure and the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the fluctuation display time determination table and the acquired random number value.

For example, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is determined, the special figure 1 stop display is made with reference to the special figure A or the special figure B with reference to the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. When the numerical range is 1001 to 20000, 45000 ms is selected as the variation time, and per super reach A is selected as the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is decided, the kind of special figure stop design referring to the special figure 2 fluctuation indication time decision table which is shown in Figure 114, the special figure a-the special figure c, the disorder which is acquired When the numerical range is 20001 to 65535, 65000 ms is selected as the variation time, and per super reach B is selected as the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208.
<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. In step S311, when depression of the operation means such as the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data according to the depression of the operation means. In step S313, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

  In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt processing, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.
<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S701 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step S701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S 707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed. In step S711, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 is provided with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

In step S901 of the second secondary control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second secondary control unit main processing, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Do. Accordingly, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S 903 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, an update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed.
<Operation means image display processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the operation means image display process executed in the image control process (step S313) of the above-mentioned first sub control unit main process will be described in detail. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of an operation means image display process.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the reception period of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137) has arrived, and if it corresponds, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if it does not correspond, the step It progresses to S1004. The operation means according to the present invention is not limited to the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137, and may be, for example, a ball emission handle 134 etc., as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the “reception period of the operation means” is a period in which the operation is determined to be valid when the operation of the operation means is detected, and a process corresponding to the operation can be executed.

  Further, the condition for determining that "the start timing of the reception period of the operation means has arrived" is not particularly limited, but for example, when winning a big hit or small hit of the special figure fluctuation game in the special figure prefetching process, a predetermined number of games When the balls are paid out, if the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state advantageous to the player (or the third gaming state disadvantageous to the player), after the big hit game When a special figure change game is performed a predetermined number of times, when a predetermined lottery is won, etc. may be mentioned.

  In step S1002, the effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read out from the ROM 406 in order to display the operation means image (for example, an image imitating the chance button 136, which will be described in detail later) on the decorative symbol display device 208. And so on, and the process advances to step S1003. In step S1003, an elapsed time notification image for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation means (including an elapsed time notification image also serving as an operation means image described later and an elapsed time notification image accompanied with display of the operation means image. In order to display the same on the decorative symbol display device 208, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to the elapsed time notification image from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data update processing To finish the process.

  For example, when an elapsed time notification image (an operation means image capable of grasping that some operation is necessary to the operation means; for example, an progress information notification image simulating the operation means) is displayed, for example, A process such as reading out effect data corresponding to the elapsed time notification image from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, an effect data updating process is performed. In addition, an elapsed time notification image (an elapsed time notification image in which it is not possible to determine that the operation of the operation unit is necessary, for example, an elapsed time notification image consisting of only numbers representing elapsed time) is displayed. If it is present, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to the operation means image from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed. In this embodiment, although an example in which an elapsed time notification image (for example, an image of a scale of a meter) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown in each embodiment described later, the elapsed time notification image is not displayed. May be If not displayed, the process ends without performing the process of step S1003.

  In step S1004, it is determined whether or not an operation means image is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. If it is not being displayed, the process is ended. If it is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1005. In this step S1005, it is determined whether or not the operation of the operation means corresponding to the operation means image (for example, the chance button 136 in the case of the image of the operation means imitating the chance button 136) is accepted and the operation is accepted. In the case, the process proceeds to step S1007. If the operation is not accepted, the process proceeds to step S1006.

  In step S1006, it is determined whether or not the display end timing of the operation means image has arrived, and if so, the process proceeds to step S1007. If not, the process proceeds to step S1008. Here, the condition for determining that "the display end timing of the operation means image has arrived" is not particularly limited. For example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the operation means in step S1002, the gaming state is different. The case where it shifts to the game state etc is listed.

  In step S1007, the operation means image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (including the operation means image also serving as the elapsed time notification image and the operation means image accompanied with the display of the elapsed time notification image. The same applies hereinafter) The display of the operation means image is ended. In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means matches a predetermined time (T seconds) determined in advance. If it does, the process proceeds to step S1009. If it does not, the process proceeds to step S1010. move on.

  In step S1009, in order to switch the operation means image to a specific image triggered by the fact that the elapsed time of the operation means acceptance period matches the predetermined time (T seconds) determined in advance, effect data corresponding to the specific image is selected. Processing such as reading from the ROM 406 is performed. On the other hand, in step S1010, in order to continue the display of the operation means image, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to the operation means image is performed from the ROM 406, etc. I do.

For example, an operation means image (also an operation means image capable of grasping an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation means) serving as an elapsed time notification image. For example, a display mode (color, size, shape, font of characters according to the elapsed time) If an operation means image (for example) changes) is displayed, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to the operation means image from the ROM 406 is performed to continue the display of the operation means image. When the data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In addition, an operation means image (an operation means image which can not grasp an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation means, for example, an operation means image consisting only of an image imitating the operation means, or an operation means When an operation means image consisting only of character information representing a name (for example, a chance button) is displayed, the effect data corresponding to the operation means image is stored in the ROM 406 in order to continue the display of the operation means image. The processing such as reading out from is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated.
<Preliminary lottery process>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the advance notice lottery process executed in the image control process (step S313) of the above-mentioned first sub control unit main process will be described in detail. The figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the advance lottery process.

  In step S1101, the value of the big hit flag included in the command (for example, the symbol variation start command) received from the main control unit 300 is referred to, and when the value of the big hit flag is on, it is determined that the big hit is won and step S1102 If the value of the jackpot flag is off, it is determined that the jackpot has not been won, and the process advances to step S1103. In step S1102, after performing a notice lottery using a lottery value corresponding to "big hit (15R system)", "big hit (sudden probability change)", or "big hit (latency change)" of a notice lottery table to be described later, step S1106 Go to

In step S1103, the value of the small hit flag included in the command (for example, the symbol variation start command) received from the main control unit 300 is referred to, and when the value of the small hit flag is on, it is determined that the small hit is won. The flow advances to step S1104, and if the value of the small hit flag is off, it is determined that the small hit is not won, and the flow advances to step S1105. In step S1104, after performing a notice lottery using a lottery value corresponding to "small hit" of a notice lottery table described later, the process proceeds to step S1106. Further, in step S1105, after performing a notice lottery using a lottery value corresponding to "losing" of a notice lottery table described later, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, the process is ended after transmitting a command including information on the lottery result of the preliminary lottery to the second sub control unit 500.
<Data table of first sub control unit>

Next, the data table stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. FIG.
<Notice lottery table>

  The notice lottery table shown in FIG. 119 is an example of a table used for the notice lottery performed in the above-mentioned notice lottery processing, and the symbol types (results of the test) of the special drawing, the variation time of the special drawing, the notice table number, and the drawing value It is a table in which numerical ranges are associated and stored.

  When the jackpot flag is on, the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 has the item "symbol type" in the notice lottery table as "big hit (15R system)", "big hit (sudden probability change)", or "big hit ( The lottery value corresponding to “certainty change” is referred to, and a lottery for selecting any one of the notice tables 1 to 5 is performed based on the acquired random number value for the notice lottery.

  For example, when the big hit flag is on, the special symbol 1 special symbol A is special drawing A or special symbol B, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time is 15000 ms, the item "symbol type" in the notice lottery table is "big hit (15R System), the item "variation time" refers to the lottery value corresponding to "15000 ms", and when the acquired random number value for the advance lottery is 0 to 9, select the announcement table 2 and obtain the acquired announcement random deviation When the numerical value is 10-29, notice table 3 is selected. When the obtained random number for notice lottery is 30-94, notice table 4 is selected, and when the obtained random number for notice lottery is 95-99, The notice table 5 is selected.

In the present embodiment, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (displaced), and the variation time of the special figure is 1500 ms, 3000 ms, or 8000 ms, the notice table 1 is displayed regardless of the random value for the notice lottery. select. In addition, the notice table 5 is selected when the big hit flag is on, and the symbol type of the special figure 1 is special figure A or special figure B (or the special symbol 2 is special figure a to special figure c). It is only the case. Further, the lottery value when the big hit flag is on and the symbol type of the special figure 1 is special view D (latency probability change) and the lottery value when the small hit flag is on are set identically. In the present embodiment, the notice lottery is performed on the small hit table for the small hit, but the advance lottery may be performed on the same table as the big hit table.
<Notice table>

  The notice table shown in FIG. 120 (a) is an example of the notice table 4 among the notice tables described above, and is a table in which the notice mode and the numerical value range of the lottery value are associated and stored.

  When the notice table 4 is selected in the notice lottery described above, the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table 4 and determines the notice mode of the notice table 4 based on the acquired random number value. Make a notice mode lottery. For example, when the acquired random number value is 0 to 9, "button pressed (once) advance notice" is selected, the acquired mode is determined, and when the acquired random number value is 10 to 24, "button pushed (twice) ) "Notice" is selected, and when the acquired random number value is 25 to 39, "conversation notice" is selected, and when the acquired random number is 40 to 59, "door opening notice" is selected, and acquired irregularity If the numerical value is 60 to 74, select "treasure box selection advance notice", if the acquired random number value is 75 to 89, select "step-up advance notice", and if the acquired random value is 90 to 99, "title Select "Notice".

  FIGS. 120 (b) to 120 (d) and FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (b) are subdivisions of the contents of "previous door open notice", for example, the first notice When "Open Door" is selected in the form lottery, the table corresponding to "Open Door" is shown in FIG. 120 (b), and the meter color is selected based on the acquired random number value. The second notice mode lottery to be decided is performed. Next, in the second notice mode lottery, for example, when "meter color blue → red" is selected, the table corresponding to "meter color blue → red" shown in FIG. 120 (c) is referred to. Then, based on the acquired random number value, a third notice mode lottery to determine the mode of the character (princess) is performed.

Next, in the third notice mode lottery, for example, when "Hime" Chance! "Is selected, the table corresponding to" Hime "Chance!" Shown in FIG. On the basis of the random number value, the fourth notice mode lottery to determine the next notice mode is performed. Next, in the fourth notice mode lottery, for example, when “signboard“ reach is ”” is selected, the table shown in FIG. 121 (a) corresponding to “signboard“ reach is ”” is referenced and acquired. On the basis of the random number value, the fifth notice mode lottery to determine the next notice mode is performed. Next, in the fifth notice mode lottery, for example, when “Hime no Fan (Hanamaru)” is selected, a table corresponding to “Hime no Fan (Hanamaru)” shown in FIG. 121 (b) is displayed. Based on the acquired random number value, a sixth notice mode lottery is performed to determine the next notice mode.
<Example 1 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a first embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 1 in time series.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered when the start timing of the reception period (6 seconds in this example) of the first operation of the chance button 136 arrives. The first operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) is displayed on the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is decorated at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. It is displayed in the right side display area of the display device 208.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the start timing of the acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the second operation of the chance button 136 has not arrived, but two operations for the chance button 136 are performed. In order to urge the player, the second operation means image BG2 is displayed at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, and the display of the character information "Press the chance button!" doing.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1). An image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed below the first operation means image BG1.

  Although the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has not arrived at the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the same image TG2 'as the initial image of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is , And is displayed below the second operation means image BG2.

  In the timing shown in (b) of the figure, a predetermined time (two seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure, and the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. It shows the timing. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (two seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed.

  Further, at this timing, since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived, the image TG2 ′ displayed below the second operation means image BG2 at the timing shown in FIG. The second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, it is adjusted to the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 The image has been switched to an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, a moving image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed . In addition, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (two seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed as a second elapsed time notification image TG2 There is.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (five seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 5 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 1 second) is displayed. In addition, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 3 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds) is displayed. There is.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (six seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Further, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed as a second elapsed time notification image TG2 There is.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure indicates the timing at which a predetermined time (eight seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the same. At this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are used. It is erased. In addition, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds) is displayed There is. In this example, although the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased at the timing of FIG. 7F, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time are deleted. The display of the notification image TG1 may be continued.

  According to the operation means image display according to the first embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the timing shown in FIG. 6A is the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 (6 seconds in this example), and FIG. The timing shown in) is an example in which the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The timing shown in a) is the start timing of the reception period (for example, 6 seconds) of the first operation of the chance button 136 and the start timing of the reception period (for example, 8 seconds) of the second operation of the chance button 136 It may be That is, the start timing of the acceptance period of the Nth (N is a positive integer) operation of the operation means may be the same timing (the same applies to the other embodiments).

In addition, when the start timing of the reception period (for example, 6 seconds) of the first operation of the chance button 136 and the start timing of the reception period (for example, 8 seconds) of the second operation of the chance button 136 are the same timing. Even when there is a difference in the reception time of each reception time, the notification start timing of the elapsed time may be made different. In this example, after 2 seconds have passed from the start of the operation reception, the reception time of the second operation of the chance button 136 The elapsed time of may be notified.
<Example 2 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, a second embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 2 in time series. In addition, since the display shown to the figure (a)-the figure (f) is the same as the example of a display shown to said FIG. 122 (a)-(f), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 123 (g) shows the state shown in FIGS. 123 (a) to (d), that is, the state before a predetermined time (six seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. , Indicates the timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and instead of the image display, the decorative symbol display device A character image (表示) is displayed in the left display area 208.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure indicates the timing at which a predetermined time (eight seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the same. At this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. Is notified that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds) as a second elapsed time notification image TG2 Image is displayed.

The timing shown in (i) of the figure indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (b) of the figure. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are used. It is erased. When a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 7J, the second operation means image BG2 and the second operation means image BG2 are displayed. The character image (爺) may be displayed instead of the display of the elapsed time notification image TG2. When the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in the example, (g) in the example) Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 7J, the character image (爺) may be displayed in place of the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2.
The timing shown in (k) of the figure shows the timing when the second operation of the chance button 136 is received immediately after a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. There is. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are used. Since it is deleted and the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the character image (爺) is displayed instead of the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 doing. When the chance button 136 is operated during the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, the same figure (g)) while the first operation of the chance button 136 is not performed. Alternatively, as shown in (j) of the figure, instead of the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2, a character image (a mochi and a mochi) may be displayed.

  The timing shown in (l) of the figure shows the timing immediately after a predetermined time (in this example, 8 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. At this timing, a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and the first and second operations of the chance button 136 are not performed, The second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are deleted.

According to the operation means image display according to the second embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.
<Example 3 of Display of Operation Means Image>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, a third example of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 3 in time series.

  In the third embodiment, a third elapsed time notification image TG3 is applied in place of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in the first embodiment. The third progress information notification image TG3 is an image indicating the success or failure result of the special view fluctuation game in addition to being an image notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 . With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the progress information notification image, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  In this example, although the result of the pass / fail judgment is suggested using an elapsed time notification image for notifying an elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, in addition to this (or to this Alternatively, the result of the pass / fail judgment may be suggested using an elapsed time notification image to notify the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, or three or more progress information notification images may be used. In this case, at least one progress information notification image may be used to indicate the result of the pass / fail determination.

  Further, in addition to suggesting the result of the pass / fail determination using the progress information notification image, the other display area may be configured to suggest the result of the pass / fail determination. Further, in this example, the display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 is started when the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 arrives, but the display is performed at another timing For example, the display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 may be started at the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed (for example, the timing when the first or second operation is performed).

According to the operation means image display according to the third embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.
<Example 4 of Display of Operation Means Image>

  Next, a fourth example of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 4 in time series.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the reception period of the first and second operations of the chance button 136. Means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) and a second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 at the same timing It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification for notifying an elapsed time (6 seconds in this example) of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The image TG1 (in this example, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136) is the image of the first operation means image BG1. It is displayed below.

  In addition, a second elapsed time notification for notifying an elapsed time (in this example, six seconds) of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the second operation means image BG2 The image TG2 (in this example, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136) is the image of the second operation means image BG2. It is displayed below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B indicates the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed.

  In addition, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is also continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed as a second elapsed time notification image TG2 There is.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (six seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed.

  In addition, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds) is displayed There is.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (eight seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, so the predetermined time from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 Immediately after (6 seconds) has elapsed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and the state is continued.

  In addition, since the predetermined time (eight seconds) has passed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 at this timing, the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Immediately after the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, and the state is continued.

  FIG. 6E shows the state shown in FIG. 5B, that is, the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the first and second operations of the chance button 136. The timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed is shown. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the image display is changed to the decorative symbol display. A character image is displayed in the left display area of the device 208.

  The figure (f) shows the situation shown in the figure (e), that is, the situation before the predetermined time (six seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Indicates the timing at which the second operation was performed. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, and then the image display is changed to the decorative symbol display. In the right side display area of the device 208, a character image (表示) different from the character image (殿) is displayed. Note that even if a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation without the second operation of the chance button 136 in the state shown in FIG. The display shown in f) may be performed.

  FIG. 11G shows a timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation without the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed. At this timing, the second operation means image BG2 and the second operation means image BG2 are displayed because a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation without the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed. The elapsed time notification image TG2 is deleted.

According to the operation means image display according to the fourth embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.
<Example 5 of Display of Operation Means Image>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a fifth example of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 5 in time series.

  In the fifth embodiment, a fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 is applied in place of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 in the fourth embodiment. The fourth progress information notification image TG4 is an image indicating the success or failure result of the special view fluctuation game in addition to being an image notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 . With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the progress information notification image, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  In this example, although the result of the pass / fail judgment is suggested using an elapsed time notification image for notifying an elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, in addition to this (or to this Alternatively, the result of the pass / fail judgment may be suggested using an elapsed time notification image to notify the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, or three or more progress information notification images may be used. In this case, at least one progress information notification image may be used to indicate the result of the pass / fail determination.

  Further, in addition to suggesting the result of the pass / fail determination using the progress information notification image, the other display area may be configured to suggest the result of the pass / fail determination. Further, in this example, the display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 is started when the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 arrives, but the display is performed at another timing For example, the display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 may be started at the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed (for example, the timing when the first or second operation is performed).

According to the operation means image display according to the fifth embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.
<Operational Means Image Display Embodiment 6>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, a sixth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 6 in time series.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the display of the operation means image, the notice effect by the above-mentioned notice lottery processing is performed. For example, when the special pattern stop symbol of the special figure 1 is determined to be the special figure A in the special pattern symbol lottery, and the fluctuation time of the special figure is determined to be 45000 ms in the variation pattern lottery. The 1 sub-control unit 400 is based on the fact that the value of the big hit flag is on, the special figure stop symbol is the special figure A, and the special figure fluctuation time has received a command including information of 45000 ms from the main control unit 300 above. A notice lottery is performed using a lottery value corresponding to a fluctuation time of 45000 ms of “big hit (15R system)” of the notice lottery table shown in 119. Assuming that the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 30 to 94 in this advance notice lottery, the advance notice table 4 is selected.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table 4 shown in FIG. 120 (a) and determines the notice manner of the notice table 4 based on the acquired random number value. Although it is performed, for example, assuming that the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 40 to 59, "a door open notice" will be selected. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table corresponding to the "door opening advance notice" shown in FIG. 120 (b) and determines the color of the meter a second time based on the acquired random number value. For example, assuming that the acquired random number value is in the range of 50 to 64, "meter color blue → red" will be selected.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table corresponding to “meter color blue → red” shown in FIG. 120 (c), and the mode of the character (hime) based on the acquired random value. For example, assuming that the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 30 to 59, the princess "chance!" Is selected. In the sixth embodiment, the notice effect is executed in accordance with the notice effect mode determined by the notice lottery and the notice mode lottery.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 127 (a), the first operation means corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the operation of the chance button 136. An image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed on the right side display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In order to urge the player to operate the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the display of character information "Open the door !!!" is displayed above the left display area.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, the opportunity for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1). The first operation means image BG1 in the first color (in this example, blue) with the first color (blue in this example) of the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreasing in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the button 136 operation. Is displayed below.

  In addition, an image corresponding to the notice effect of the above-mentioned "Please open the door notice" at the same timing as the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, the letter "Open the door !!!" A display and an image simulating a door are displayed on the right side display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, a first elapsed time notification for notifying a part of the image of the advance notice effect (in this example, an image imitating a door) an elapsed time of a reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 It doubles as image TG1-2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B indicates the timing when a predetermined time (one second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image is displayed to notify that one second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is five seconds). On the other hand, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2, which also serves as the advance notice effect, is not changed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, and thus the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image is displayed to notify that 1 second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds). In addition, at this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is set to the first color (in this example, blue) as an image corresponding to the above-mentioned "meter color (blue → red)" preview effect. ) To a second color (in this example, red).

  Further, at this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is changed, and the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is changed from the third color (white in this example) to the third color. It is changed to 4 colors (in this example, red). With such a configuration, the player may be strongly urged to operate.

  Here, by changing the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the color of the second elapsed time notification image TG1-2, the predetermined time from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 Although it has been informed that (4 seconds) has elapsed, the change of the color may indicate, for example, the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image is displayed to notify that 6 seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds). On the other hand, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2, which also serves as the advance notice effect, is not changed.

  FIG. 6E shows the timing at which the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the operation of the chance button 136 is performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification images TG1-1 and TG-2 are erased, the above-mentioned princess "chance!" The image corresponding to the preview effect of (in this example, the character display of “chance!” And the character image (princess) are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that this advance notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed.

  The figure (f) has shown the timing to which predetermined time (6 second) passed from the start timing of the reception period of operation, without operation of the chance button 136 being performed. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation without the operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification are notified. After erasing the images TG1-1 and TG-2, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display may be performed after the display shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 6 (g) is a view showing an example of reach display in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the reach display is performed after the state shown in FIG. 6 (d), (e) or (f). Is displayed.

According to the operation means image display according to the sixth embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved. In the case of the present embodiment, the lottery is also performed for the display (the color of the meter) of the elapsed time notification image in the notice table, but the lottery may not be performed in the notice table for the elapsed time notification image. In this case, the elapsed time notification image notifies only the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means, and changes the display mode after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, the color of the meter changes when T seconds elapse). It may be. In addition, the elapsed time notification image may notify only the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means, and may not change the display mode (color, size, shape, font of characters, etc.) with the passage of time. .
<Operational Means Image Display Embodiment 7>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128, a seventh embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 7 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the display of the operation means image, the notice effect by the above-mentioned notice lottery processing is performed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the first corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the operation of the chance button 136. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) is displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, the opportunity for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1). The first operation means image BG1 in the first color (in this example, blue) with the first color (blue in this example) of the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreasing in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the button 136 operation. Is displayed below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B indicates the timing when a predetermined time (one second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image is displayed to notify that one second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is five seconds).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image is displayed to notify that the reception period of 3 seconds has elapsed. Further, at this timing, the remaining time notification image TG1-2 (this one for notifying the remaining time (3 seconds in this example) of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 above the first operation means image BG1) In the example, an image of numerical information is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image is displayed to notify that 5 seconds have elapsed. Further, at this timing, an image notifying that the remaining time of the operation of the chance button 136 is one second is displayed as the remaining time notification image TG1-2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image is displayed to notify that 6 seconds have elapsed. Moreover, at this timing, the remaining time of the operation of the chance button 136 is 0 seconds as the remaining time notification image TG1-2 (a predetermined time (6 seconds from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136) ) Is displayed.

  In addition, the figure (f) is the figure which showed an example of the omission display in case the success or failure result of a special figure change game is a removal, and the figure (g) shows the big hit when the success result of a special figure change game is a big hit. It is the figure which showed an example. In these state of the off display or the big hit display, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state (during the period of receiving the operation) before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button If the predetermined time (six seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed, the display is displayed.

According to the operation means image display according to the seventh embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.
<Operational Means Image Display Embodiment 8>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, an eighth example of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 8 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the display of the operation means image, the notice effect by the above-mentioned notice lottery processing is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the right of the setting operation unit 137 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the reception period (6 seconds in this example) of operations of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. The first operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a treasure box, white) corresponding to the operation of the button is displayed on the right side display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of the left button of the setting operation unit 137 A corresponding second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating a treasure box, white) is displayed in the left display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, in order to prompt the player to operate the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the display of the character information "Select a treasure box to open with the direction key!" It is displayed above the area.

  Also, for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation unit image BG1 and the second operation unit image BG2. First elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases according to the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137) Are displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a first color (in this example, blue).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B indicates the timing when a predetermined time (one second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (one second) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button 137 has passed one second (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button 137 has passed one second (the remaining time of the reception period is two seconds) is displayed. In addition, at this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is changed from the first color (in this example, blue) to the second as an image corresponding to the preview effect of “color of treasure box (blue → red)”. The color of (in this example, red) is changed.

  Further, at this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is changed, and the color of the second operation means image BG2 is changed from the third color (white in this example) to the fourth color. (In this example, it is changed to red). Here, by changing the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the color of the second operation means image BG2, from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 Although it has been notified that the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed, for example, it may be configured to indicate the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button 137 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the second operation means image BG2 which also serves as the advance notice effect is not changed.

  In the same figure (e), in the state before a predetermined time (six seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the operation of the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is It shows the timing that was done. At this timing, since the right button of the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are deleted, An image corresponding to the next notice effect (in this example, an image showing how a book pops out of a treasure box) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, in the same figure (f), in the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, It indicates when the operation was performed. At this timing, since the left button of the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, An image corresponding to the next notice effect (in this example, an image showing how a book pops out of a treasure box) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice effects shown in (e) and (f) of FIG. In addition, when the judgment result of the special figure fluctuation game is the big hit, as shown in the figure (g), it is possible to do the announcement production whose reliability and expectation are higher than the announcement production of the figure (f). It may be configured.

  (H) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (six seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the right button and left button of the setting operation unit 137 being operated. At this timing, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is erased because a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the right button and left button of the setting operation unit 137 being operated. ing. The first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2 may be deleted in accordance with the deletion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

According to the operation means image display according to the seventh embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.
<Example 9 of Display of Operation Means Image>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130, a ninth example of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 9 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the display of the operation means image, the display of the hold icon and the fluctuation icon is performed.

  Here, the hold icon refers to an animation of a texture image representing the number of holdings of the special figure variation game, and as an animation related to the hold icon, for example, when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed. The animation to be executed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "increase animation of hold icon"), the hold order changes due to the previous hold being digested, and the hold icon is displayed at another display position (for example, the position next to the left) Animation to be executed when moving to) (hereinafter referred to as "moving animation of holding icon"), animation to be executed when the display mode of the holding icon changes based on the pre-reading result etc. Change of hold icon), the hold is digested and the hold icon Animation that is executed when it is removed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "deletion icon deletion animation"), when the priority of the special figure on the priority side increases, the reserve icon for the special figure on the non-priority side There is an animation (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “retraction animation of a hold icon”) that is executed when the In addition to the animation described above, the animation is executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase or decrease in the hold or change in the hold icon) Hereinafter, there may be “waiting icon pending animation”. A plurality of animations of increase, movement, change, deletion, evacuation, and standby of the hold icon may be executed in duplicate.

  In addition, after the suspension is digested and the special figure variation game is started, one variation icon corresponding to the special figure variation game may be displayed. The fluctuating icon is, for example, a display mode associated with the display mode of the hold icon, and is displayed as an animation of a texture image in the same manner as the hold icon. The change icon can be notified of the success or failure of the change according to the display mode (the change notification), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the variation icon can be considered as a kind of suspension icon in the sense that notification of the success or failure result of the special figure variation game is suspended.

  As an animation related to both the hold icon and the change icon, the first hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is an area different from the hold icon display area when the hold is digested. Animation to move as a fluctuation icon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "movement animation between hold and change icons") Animation to change the display mode of a hold icon to the display mode of change icons (hereinafter "between hold and change icons" Change animation (in some cases). These animations may be combined and performed simultaneously. If the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, it is possible to omit the execution of the change animation between the hold and change icons.

  As the animation related to the fluctuation icon, an animation executed during the execution of the special drawing fluctuation game (hereinafter, may be referred to as "wait animation of the fluctuation icon"), or the special icon fluctuation game is ended and the fluctuation icon Animation executed when the character is erased (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “animation animation of the fluctuation icon”), animation executed when the display mode of the fluctuation icon is changed halfway (hereinafter, “change of the fluctuation icon” Sometimes referred to as animation). These animations may be performed simultaneously in combination with one another. Also, the waiting animation of the changing icon may be executed simultaneously with the moving animation between the holding and changing icons or the changing animation.

  The figure (a) has shown the timing which the special figure change game ends, and is performing stop display of the decoration symbol. At this timing, by displaying four reserve icons (in this example, circular images) PI1 to PI4 below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that there are four reserves of special figure fluctuation games.

  The same figure (b) shows the timing when the special figure fluctuation game which was put on hold is started, and the hold of the special figure fluctuation game decreases from 4 to 3. At this timing, after performing the change animation to change the first (first) pending icon PI1 displayed in the pending icon display area to the fluctuating icon CI, the fluctuating icon is displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 The CI is displayed stopped. The fluctuation icon CI is a fluctuation icon for suggesting the result of the special drawing fluctuation display corresponding to the first reserved icon PI1. In this example, the character icon "chance" and the star-shaped graphic Configured.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the first operation means corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the operation of the chance button 136. An image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed behind the fluctuation icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered by the fluctuating icon CI, so that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is made invisible or difficult to recognize. .

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. In the first color (in this example, blue), the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation in the first operation means image BG1 below , And is displayed behind the fluctuation icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is made invisible or difficult to recognize. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 3 as a first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to recognize.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to recognize.

  In the case of (f) in the figure, in the state shown in (c) of the figure, that is, in the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 It shows the timing that was done. At this timing, since the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information suggesting a result of the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation (this In the example, the text information "reach!" Is displayed behind the fluctuation icon CI. That is, in this example, a part of the information indicating that the special image fluctuation result is covered by the fluctuation icon CI makes the part of the information invisible or difficult to recognize.

  In addition, when operation of the chance button 136 is performed before predetermined time passes from the start timing of the reception period of operation of the chance button 136, as shown to the figure (g), a 1st operation means image After deleting the BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information indicating the result of the success or failure of the special view change may be displayed in front of the change icon CI. Although not illustrated, even after the fluctuation icon CI is deleted in addition to the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, even if information indicating the result of the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation is displayed Good.

  In addition, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without performing the operation of the chance button 136, the display of (f) or (g) may be performed. Also, FIG. 7 (h) is a view showing an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the variation display is displayed after any of the states of FIG. 5 (e), (f) and (g). It is also good.

According to the operation means image display of the ninth embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.
<Example 10 of image display of operation means>

  Next, a tenth example of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 10 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the display of the operation means image, the display of the hold icon and the notice effect is performed.

  The figure (a) has shown the timing which the special figure change game ends, and is performing stop display of the decoration symbol. At this timing, by displaying four reserve icons (in this example, circular images) PI1 to PI4 below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that there are four reserves of special figure fluctuation games.

  The same figure (b) shows the timing when the special figure fluctuation game which was put on hold is started, and the hold of the special figure fluctuation game decreases from 4 to 3. At this timing, a deletion animation is performed to delete the first pending icon PI1 displayed in the pending icon display area, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, the chance An image resembling a button is displayed.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. In the first color (in this example, blue), the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation in the first operation means image BG1 below It is displayed on.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, based on the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation game, a notice effect is produced (in this example, the upside-down character image (display of an image having a signboard written “Like?” Is displayed)) There is.

  Further, at this timing, since the predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that 3 seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds). However, since all of the first operation means image BG1 and all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are covered by the image of the notice effect, all of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image Everything in TG1 is considered invisible. Note that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 or at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 may be in a state in which the visual recognition is not possible or the visual recognition is difficult.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, so the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 4 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds). However, since all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the image of the notice effect, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state in which it is not visible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds). However, since all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the image of the notice effect, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state in which it is not visible.

  FIG. 6F shows the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information suggesting a result of the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation (this In the example, the text information "super heat !!!" is displayed behind the fluctuation icon CI. That is, in this example, a part of the information that indicates the result of the special feature change is covered by the image of the notice effect, so that the part of the information is in an invisible state.

  In addition, when operation of the chance button 136 is performed before predetermined time passes from the start timing of the reception period of operation of the chance button 136, as shown to the figure (g), a 1st operation means image After deleting the BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the advance notice effect, information suggesting the result of the special figure change may be displayed.

  In addition, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without performing the operation of the chance button 136, the display of (f) or (g) may be performed. Also, FIG. 7 (h) is a view showing an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the variation display is displayed after any of the states of FIG. 5 (e), (f) and (g). It is also good.

According to the operation means image display of the tenth embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.
<Example 11 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132, an eleventh embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. In addition, the same figure is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 11 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, the display of the notice effect based on the regularity determination of the common drawing fluctuation display and the common drawing fluctuation display is configured to be performed.

  The same figure (a) has shown the timing by which the common drawing fluctuation display was started during special drawing fluctuation display, and the presentation accompanying the said common drawing fluctuation display was started. At this timing, a common drawing fluctuation display is started in the common drawing fluctuation display area 208s, and a notice effect is produced based on the judgment of the common drawing fluctuation display, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. (In this example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the success / failure determination of the common drawing change game is performed using the common drawing determination table of FIG. 209 described later, and the common drawing control state is low probability, and the acquired random number is 90 to 99. Since it is a numerical value range of, the example in the case where the symbol 2 per common drawing (general drawing decoration 2 shown in FIG. 205 (d) described later) is selected is shown. Details of the pass / fail determination of the common drawing change game using the common drawing determination table of FIG. 209 will be described in the third example of the sixth embodiment.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. In the first color (in this example, blue), the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation in the first operation means image BG1 below It is displayed on.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B indicates the timing when a predetermined time (one second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a notice effect (in this example, a display in which the character image (princess) appears from the bottom) is performed based on the common drawing change display and the judgment of success or failure of the common drawing change game.

  Further, at this timing, since the predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the period of acceptance of the operation of the chance button 136 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that one second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is five seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible. In addition to (or in place of) this, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 may be in a state where it is not visible or difficult to see (the same applies in the present embodiment).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, while continuing the advance notice effect based on the success or failure result of the common drawing fluctuation game, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 has passed for 3 seconds as the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (the remainder of the acceptance period An image notifying that the time is 3 seconds is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in an invisible state.

  The same figure (e) has shown the timing which performed stop display of the common figure. At this timing, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information (in this example, the character image (Hime) has a fan) indicating the result of the success or failure of the general drawing change. Image is displayed. Further, as described above, since the symbol 2 per common drawing is selected in the common drawing variation game, a common drawing decorative symbol corresponding to "general drawing decoration 2" is displayed in the common drawing variation display area 208s.

  FIG. 6F shows the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information suggesting a result of the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation (this In the example, the text information "is it a chance?" Is displayed. When a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without performing the operation of the chance button 136, the display of (e) or (f) may be performed.

According to the operation means image display of the eleventh embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.
<Example 12 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a twelfth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. The figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the twelfth embodiment in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the display of the operation means image, the display of the hold icon and the notice effect is performed.

  The figure (a) has shown the timing which the special figure change game ends, and is performing stop display of the decoration symbol. At this timing, by displaying the three suspension icons PI1 to PI3 below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that there are three suspension of special figure variation games. Note that, in this example, displaying the character image (Sabohani) as the third reserve icon PI3 suggests the result of the success or failure of the third special figure change game pre-reading.

  The same figure (b) shows the timing when the special figure fluctuation game which was suspended is started, and the suspension of the special figure fluctuation game decreases from 3 to 2. At this timing, a deletion animation is performed to delete the first hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area, and the second hold icon PI2 and the third hold icon PI3 are placed at the positions of the adjacent hold icons. There are moving animations to move to.

  The timing shown to the same figure (c) has shown the timing to which the movement animation of pending | holding icon PI2 and PI3 was complete | finished. At this timing, a first operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. In the first color (in this example, blue), the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation in the first operation means image BG1 below It is displayed on. However, in order to display the first operation means image BG1 behind the reserve icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the reserve icon PI3 and is in an invisible state. In addition to (or in place of) this, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 may be made invisible or hard to recognize with the hold icon PI3 (the same applies in the present embodiment).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D indicates the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 3 as a first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  In (f) of the figure, in the state shown in (b) of the figure, that is, in the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, the operation of the chance button 136 is It shows the timing that was done. At this timing, since the operation of the chance button 136 is performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the special figure fluctuation after the special figure fluctuation (in this example, , And a notice (in this example, text information "That's hot after 2 revolutions!") Which indicates the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation after 2 revolutions. The notice is an example of “prefetch notice” that indicates the success or failure result of the special figure fluctuation after the special figure fluctuation.

  In this example, the display of the reserve icons PI2 and PI3 is not deleted, but may be deleted simultaneously with the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Further, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of FIG. Further, FIG. 7 (g) is a view showing an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the variation display may be displayed after any state of FIG. 6 (e) or (f).

  According to the operation means image display of the twelfth embodiment, it may be possible to further urge the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.

  FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the modification of the twelfth embodiment in time series. In this example, as shown in (c) to (e) of the figure, since the first operation means image BG1 is displayed in front of the hold icon PI3, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is a hold icon PI3. It is considered to be visible without being covered by

According to the operation means image display of the modification of the twelfth embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.
<Example 13 of image display of operation means>

  Next, a thirteenth example of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 135 to 136 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the thirteenth embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, a part of one of the two operation means images is configured to be covered with a variation icon.

  FIG. 135 (a) shows the timing at which the special figure variation game is ended and the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed. At this timing, by displaying four reserve icons (in this example, circular images) PI1 to PI4 below the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that there are four reserves of special figure fluctuation games.

  The same figure (b) shows the timing when the special figure fluctuation game which was put on hold is started, and the hold of the special figure fluctuation game decreases from 4 to 3. At this timing, after performing a change animation to change the first (first) pending icon PI1 displayed in the pending icon display area to the fluctuating icon CI, the fluctuating icon is displayed on the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 The CI is displayed stopped. The fluctuation icon CI is a fluctuation icon for suggesting the result of the special drawing fluctuation display corresponding to the first reserved icon PI1. In this example, the character icon "chance" and the star-shaped graphic Configured.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the first corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the reception period (6 seconds in this example) of the first operation of the chance button 136. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating the chance button) is displayed behind the fluctuation icon CI in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered by the fluctuating icon CI, so that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is made invisible or difficult to recognize. .

  In addition, a second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is decorated at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. It is displayed in the right side display area of the display device 208. In this example, the second operation means image BG2 is not covered by the fluctuation icon CI, and all the second operation means image BG2 can be viewed.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. In the first color (in this example, blue), the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation in the first operation means image BG1 below , And is displayed behind the back of the fluctuation icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is made invisible or difficult to recognize. ing.

  At this timing, the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has not arrived, but the second operation means is the same image TG2 ′ as the initial image of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. It is displayed below the image BG2.

  In the timing shown in (d) of the figure, a predetermined time (two seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the figure, and the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. It shows the timing. At this timing, since a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is 2 as a first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image is displayed to notify that seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to recognize.

  Further, at this timing, the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived, so the still image TG2 displayed below the second operation means image BG2 at the timing shown in FIG. Second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying an elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, an elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 In addition, it has switched to the image of the meter scale (filling part) gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6E indicates the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to recognize.

  In addition, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (two seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed as a second elapsed time notification image TG2 There is.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure indicates the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the same. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since the predetermined time (six seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image notifying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to recognize.

  Further, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed as a second elapsed time notification image TG2 There is.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (eight seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the same. At this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are used. It is erased. In addition, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds) is displayed There is.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the same. At this timing, a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, so the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG1 are used. It is erased.

  FIG. 136 (i) shows the timing when the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. It shows. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the image display is changed to the decorative symbol display. A character image is displayed in the left display area of the device 208. However, since a part of the character image (殿) is covered by the fluctuation icon CI, a part of the character image (殿) is in an invisible or hard-to-see state. (J) to (k) show the chance button before the predetermined time (six seconds) elapses from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 after the display of the figure (i). The example of a display when the 2nd operation of 136 is not performed is shown.

  (L) in the same figure shows the timing when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. It shows. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, and then the image display is changed to the decorative symbol display. A character image (爺) is displayed in the right side display area of the device 208. Even when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation without the second operation of the chance button 136, the display shown in FIG. Good. Note that (m) of the figure shows a display example after the character image (() is deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of (l) of the figure.

  FIG. 137 is a diagram chronologically showing an operation means image display of the modification of the thirteenth embodiment. In this example, as in the fourth embodiment, the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the reception period of the first and second operations of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. The first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the first operation and the second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same timing.

  In addition, with the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at the same timing as the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2. A second elapsed time notification image TG2 for displaying an elapsed time of a reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is displayed. Then, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is configured to be covered with the fluctuation icon CI.

  That is, one of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the same elapsed time (in this example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is changed by the fluctuation icon CI. Since it is covered, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state where it is not visible or difficult to see.

  According to the operation means image display of the thirteenth embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.

  The position where the fluctuation icon CI is displayed is not limited to the above, and at least one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. May be displayed at a position covered by the variation icon, and only one image of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. May be displayed at a position covered by the fluctuation icon, and at least two or more of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. The image of may be displayed at a position covered by the fluctuation icon.

  Moreover, even if only two images among the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image are displayed at the position covered by the fluctuation icon Preferably, at least one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed at a position not covered by the fluctuation icon. Preferably, only one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed at a position not covered by the fluctuation icon. The first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image may be displayed at a position covered by the variation icon.

In addition, the image displayed in the position covered by the variation icon may be at least partially covered, may be partially covered, or may be entirely covered. .
<Example 14 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 138, a fourteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. The figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the fourteenth embodiment in time series.

In this embodiment, one of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 127) (in this example, the first image By covering the elapsed time notification image TG1-1) with the image of the notice effect shown in (b) to (d) of FIG. It is configured to be in an invisible or hard-to-see state. Further, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is covered with the character image (殿) at the timing shown in FIG. 6 (b), and the character image (hime) is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is covered. Further, in the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described sixth embodiment (see FIG. 127), the advance lottery process using FIGS. 119 to 21 is performed. The other displays are the same as in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 127), and thus the description thereof is omitted.
<Example 15 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, a fifteenth example of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. The figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the embodiment 15 in time series.

In this embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the remaining time notification TG1-2 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 128) and the first operation means image BG1 are all shown in FIG. By covering with the image of the advance notice effect shown in (d), all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the remaining time notification TG1-2 and the first operation means image BG1 can not be visually recognized or visually recognized. It is configured to be in a difficult state. The other displays are the same as in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 128), and the description thereof will be omitted.
<Example 16 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, a sixteenth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. The figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the sixteenth embodiment in time series.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. (B) to (h), a part of the first elapsed time informing image TG1 in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 129) is a judgment result of success or failure of the common view fluctuation display. The first elapsed time notification image TG1 is configured so as to be in a state in which a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible or difficult to be recognized by covering the image with a notice effect effect indicating the. The other displays are the same as in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 129), and the description thereof will be omitted.
<Example 17 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 141, a seventeenth embodiment of display of an operation means image performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. The figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the seventeenth embodiment in time series.

  The present embodiment corresponds to the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 triggered by the arrival of the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) is displayed above the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 6B, a part of the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is partially Is displayed so as to overlap on the operation means image BG1. That is, in the present embodiment, by covering a part of the first operation means image BG1 with the second operation means image BG2, the first operation means image BG1 is in a state in which a part of the first operation means image BG1 is invisible or difficult to view It was constructed in

  Also, in the state shown in FIG. 6B, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without performing the first and second operations of the chance button 136, the same figure. When the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in (c) is performed and the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, as shown in (d) of the figure, it is changed to the first operation means image BG1. When the character image (殿) is displayed and the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the character image (図) is changed to the second operation means image BG2 as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which two operation means images the same as the number of times of operation are displayed when prompting for two operations, for example, when the operation of three or more times is urged, the operation The same number of operation means images as the number may be displayed. Moreover, when prompting for one operation, the number of operation means images may be displayed more than the number of times of the operation. In this case, the player may be strongly urged to perform one operation.
<Example 18 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 142, a eighteenth example of the operation means image display performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. The figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the eighteenth embodiment in time series.

  At the timing shown in the figure (d), in response to the occurrence of a new hold of the special figure fluctuation game, while performing the increase animation of the hold icon, the second hold icon PI2 after increase (in this example, the chance A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a part of the adjacent first retention icon PI1 are configured to be covered by the icon combining the image simulating the button 136 and the star-shaped figure). . That is, in the present embodiment, by partially covering the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the hold icon PI1 with the hold icon PI2, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the hold icon PI1 can not be viewed or It is configured to be in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize.

  With such a configuration, the player can draw attention to the elapsed time notification image or the hold icon, which has become invisible or difficult to recognize, so that the player can urge to operate the operation means. In order to concentrate on the game than before, there are cases where it is possible to increase the operation rate of the game console.

  Further, the hold icon PI2 doubles as an operation means image corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136, and when the chance button 136 is operated within a predetermined reception time, as shown in FIG. An image indicating the result of success or failure of the special figure fluctuation game corresponding to the hold icon PI2 from the operation icon image (an icon obtained by combining the image simulating the chance button 136 and the star-shaped figure) with the display mode of the hold icon PI2 In this example, it is configured to change to a character image (Sabohani) that suggests that the success or failure result of the special image variation game pre-reading is a big hit.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to obtain game information by means of the holding icon changing by the operation of the operation means, so that it is possible to further promote the operation on the operation means and to enhance the interest of the game. is there.

  In this example, the first of the images before change of the reserve icon PI 2 (an icon obtained by combining the image simulating the chance button 136 and the star-shaped figure) and the image after change (character image (Sabohani)) Although it is configured to cover a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1, the changed image may be configured not to cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  With such a configuration, the second operation of the operating means can be reliably performed after prompting the first operation of the operating means, and there may be cases where it is possible to prevent a decline in the game intention.

Also, in the first operation of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 6 (f), a notice effect on the variation is started, and in the second operation of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. By changing the display mode of the hold icon, the display related to the change may be displayed with priority over the display related to the hold. In this case, the roles of the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 may be reversed. In addition, at least one of the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 may be changed to an operation by another operation unit (for example, the setting operation unit 137). Alternatively, by operating the chance button 136 once, both of the notice effect relating to the change and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.
<Example 19 of image display of operation means>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 143, a nineteenth embodiment of display of an operation means image performed by the operation means image display processing described above will be described. The figure is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the nineteenth embodiment in time series.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol display region 208e and the special symbol 2 fourth symbol display region 208f are displayed in the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is provided. The special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e displays the success or failure result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208f is an area for displaying the success / failure result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, For example, during the special figure variation game (during special figure variation), a diamond-shaped figure is displayed in a blinking manner.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C indicates the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception start timing of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. At this timing, the right door 246b of the shielding device 246 is moved in the closing direction, and the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a part of the hold icon and the fluctuation display are moved by the right door 246b. By covering all the decorative symbols in, the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, a part of the holding icon, and all of the changing decorative symbols are invisible or hard to see It is configured to be in the state.

  With such a configuration, the player's attention can be drawn to the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, the hold icon, and the decoration pattern that are not visible or difficult to see, and therefore the user is urged to operate the operation means. In addition, since the player will be more concentrated in the game than in the past, it may be possible to increase the operating rate of the game console. Note that the shielding device 246 may cover all of the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the hold icon, or may cover a part of the decorative symbol in change. It is also good.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6D, the display position of the decorative symbol may be changed to a visible position in conjunction with the movement of the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, or the shielding device A notch may be formed in a part of 246, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208f may be visible through the notch. .

  With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably grasp gaming information important to the player, such as the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol, and therefore, it may be possible to prevent a decline in gaming intention.

  <Modification of operation means image, elapsed time notification image, and remaining time notification image>

  FIG. 144 is a view showing a modification of the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, and the remaining time notification image. In the figure, as an example of the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, and the remaining time notification image, an image for reception start displayed when the reception start timing of the operation means comes, and a half of the reception time of the operation means The image for the acceptance period half progress displayed which is displayed when it passes, and the image for acceptance completion displayed when the acceptance end timing of an operation means comes are shown.

  In the same figure (a), an image imitating the design of the operation means is adopted as the operation means image, and an elapsed time notification image (or a remaining time notification image) is metered according to the elapsed time of the operation reception period. An image is adopted in which the scale of the mark (filled portion) gradually decreases. Further, in the same figure (b), an image obtained by simplifying the operation means is adopted as the operation means image, and an elapsed time notification image (or a remaining time notification image) is used according to the elapsed time of the operation reception period. An image is used in which the divisions (filled parts) of the meter divided into multiple sections gradually decrease. Further, in FIG. 6C, an image obtained by simplifying the operation means is adopted as the operation means image, and an elapsed time notification image (or a remaining time notification image) is used according to the elapsed time of the operation reception period. An image is used that shows how lamps (including those by means of light emitting means such as LEDs and those by means of display means such as LCDs) are gradually turned off.

  The figure (d) is comprised so that the remaining time of the reception period of operation may be counted down as a remaining time alerting | reporting image, and the figure (e) may be an elapsed time alerting | reporting image (or remaining time alerting | reporting image). The color of the image is gradually reduced according to the elapsed time (or the remaining time) of the operation reception period, and the image is erased immediately before the reception period, and FIG. The notification image (or the remaining time notification image) is configured to gradually darken the color of the image in accordance with the elapsed time (or the remaining time) of the reception period of the operation. These operation means image, elapsed time notification image, and remaining time notification image may be applied to any of the above embodiments.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100) is provided with operation means (for example, the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate. And at least one display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first sub control unit 400) capable of executing a plurality of displays, wherein at least one of the plurality of displays is displayed. Is a first display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 shown in FIGS. 128 (a) to 128 (e)), and at least one of the plurality of displays is a second display (For example, remaining time notification image TG1-2 shown in FIGS. 128 (c) to 128 (e)), the first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, a reception period of the operation of the chance button 136) The passage of The second display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, the remaining time notification for notifying the remaining time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136). The display means is capable of displaying at least the second display while the first display is displayed, and the display means is configured to display at least one of the plurality of displays. The display mode of can be changed (for example, the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 that displays an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases according to the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 Related to the operation means by counting down the remaining time of the display (display on the operation means, advance notice, symbol variation display of the common drawing, hold icon, etc.) Shows at least a portion hiding) ones, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming table of the fourth embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, the first display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for receiving the operation of the operation means (for example, the scale of the meter according to the elapsed time for the reception period for the operation of the chance button 136 And at least the second display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period (for example, the operation of the chance button 136). At least the remaining time of the reception period may be counted down).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.

  Further, at least one of the first and second displays changes to a different display mode when a specific time has elapsed since the reception of the operation of the operation means is started (for example, FIG. 127). As shown in (c), the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 may be changed from the first color (blue) to the second color (red).

  With such a configuration, a variety of displays can be performed, and it may be possible to prevent the player from getting bored. In addition, since the player can determine the operation timing by looking at the display, the player may be able to easily participate in the game.

  In addition, the first display (for example, a meter) may be a display mode different from the second display (for example, a number).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to more strongly prompt the player to operate the operation means by the notification by various displays. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to entertain the player by notification by various displays.

  In addition, the first and second displays may end (for example, delete an elapsed time notification image or a remaining time notification image) when at least the reception period is completed.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from missing the operation timing of the operation means and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by increasing the player's choice, the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, it is provided with a propriety determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, common drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the propriety determination when there is a formation of a qualification determination condition, and at least one of the first and second displays One of them may be one that suggests the result of the pass / fail determination (for example, the third elapsed time notification image TG3 illustrated in FIG. 124).

  With such a configuration, various displays may be able to be performed. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the choice of how to play by the player.

  In addition, a third display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 (chance button shown in FIGS. 128 (a) to (e) is displayed to notify that it is a reception period of the operation of the operation means on the plurality of displays). And the third display does not report an elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for receiving the operation of the operation means, and the third display is during the reception period, It may be at least executable during execution of at least one of the first and second displays.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game caused by prompting the player to perform the operation more than necessary. Also, in some cases, the display can be sharpened to make the player more entertaining.

  In addition, the 3rd display which only alert | reports that it is an acceptance period of operation of an operation means may be displayed, and even if the 3rd display which alert | reports that it is an acceptance period of operation of an operation means at least is displayed. Good.

  In addition, the third display may not notify only the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period during the reception period, or at least the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period during the reception period. The notification may not be performed, or at least the elapsed time after a specific time after the start of the reception period may be notified, or only the elapsed time after a specific time after the start of the reception period may be notified. It may be one.

  Also, the third display may be at least executable during the execution of the first display, or may be at least executable during the execution of the first display, or It may be at least executable during the execution of the second display or may be at least executable during the execution of the second display. Also, the third display may be at least feasible during the execution of both the first and second displays, or only during the execution of both the first and second displays. It may be executable.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed on at least one of the display of at least one of the first and the second display and the reception period of the operation at least partially (or only partially or completely) when the reception period of the operation overlaps. Alternatively, the acceptance result of the operation may be reflected on only one display or both displays.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed on at least the third display when at least a part (or only a part or all) of the display of at least one of the first and the second display and the reception period of the operation overlap. The acceptance result of the operation may be reflected on (or only the third display or all the first to third displays).

  In addition, the plurality of displays include a fourth display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 shown in FIG. 127 (c)) displayed when a specific time has elapsed, and the fourth Is displayed according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period (for example, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is changed from the third color (white) to the fourth color (red) ) May be performed at least. With such a configuration, the player may be strongly urged to operate.

  In addition, the fourth display may perform only notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period, or at least give (or only give an advance notice) a notification indicating the result of the pass / fail judgment. It may be that which does not give at least (or only a notice) a notice that indicates the result of the pass / fail judgment.

  In addition, the game console (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the fourth embodiment includes a plurality of operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137) provided at a position at which the player can operate at least A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least executing a display of at least one of the plurality of displays, At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display, and the first display is a display relating to the operation means (a first operation means image BG1, a second operation means Image BG2, elapsed time notification images TG1, TG2, TG1-1.TG1-2), and the display unit displays the third display (for example, the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 130). The display means can display at least a part of an elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying an excess time, and the display means at least a fourth display (for example, a part of the fluctuation icon CI shown in FIG. 130). When the display position of the third display matches the display position of the fourth display, the display means can display the fourth display more than the third display. Preferably, the third display is at least a part of one of the first display and the second display, and the fourth display The display is at least a part of the display of the other of the first display and the second display.

  According to the gaming table of the fourth embodiment, it may be possible to further urge the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.

  In addition, the first display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for receiving the operation of the operation means (for example, the scale of the meter according to the elapsed time for the reception period for the operation of the chance button 136 An image may be displayed at least) in which the filled portion gradually decreases.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.

  Further, the third display (for example, a part or all of the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 130, the first operation shown in FIG. Means image BG1 (part or all of the image simulating the chance button) is at least part of the first display, and the fourth display (for example, the fluctuation icon CI shown in FIG. 130, FIG. 141) A part or all of the second operation means image BG2 (image imitating the chance button) to be shown may be at least a part of the second display.

  With such a configuration, it may be difficult to notice the reception period and it may be possible to further prompt the player's operation.

  Further, the fifth display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 (chance button shown in FIG. 130) is displayed when a specific time period has elapsed since the reception of the operation of the operation means is started. The display means is capable of displaying at least the imitation image), and when the display position of the fourth display matches the display position of the fifth display, the display means The fourth display is also displayed preferentially (for example, displayed in the foreground), and the fifth display is at least a part of one of the first display and the second display. It may be

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the display mode hidden and to concentrate on the game.

Further, the third display (for example, the elapsed time notification image TG1 shown in FIG. 130) may be a display mode different from the fourth display (for example, the fluctuation icon CI shown in FIG. 130).
Note that different display modes may indicate different shapes, different transmittances, different colors, or different sizes. In addition, a part of the third display (shape, color, transparency, size, etc. may be used so that different display modes may be used as long as they have the same shape or different colors. Different display modes may be used as long as one or more of the fourth displays (at least one of the shape, the color, the transmittance, the size, and the like) are different.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to make the player pay attention to the hidden display mode and concentrate on the game.

  In addition, a part of the third display (at least one of shape, color, transparency, size, etc.) so that colors may be different or shapes may be the same and the same display mode may be used. And a part of the fourth display (at least one of the shape, the color, the transmittance, the size, etc., which matches the part of the third display), The display mode may be the same.

  Further, the third display (for example, an elapsed time notification image TG1 shown in FIG. 130 for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation of the chance button 136) is at least a part of the second display. The fourth display (for example, the fluctuation icon CI illustrated in FIG. 130) may be at least a part of the first display.

  With this configuration, the notification of the reception period may be easily viewed, and the player may be able to reliably perform the operation. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to burn the player and urge to press a button. Also, in some cases, it is possible to concentrate on the game and prevent the player from getting bored.

  (A) In addition, the second display (for example, the advance notice) is provided with a propriety determination unit (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, common drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the propriety determination when there is a satisfaction determination condition. The indication of the effect) may be a notice that suggests the result of the pass / fail judgment.

  With such a configuration, various displays may be able to be performed. Further, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the reception period of the operation means.

  (B) In addition, the first display (related to the operation means) is provided with a propriety determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, common drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the propriety determination when there is establishment of the success or failure determination condition. Display) may be a notice that indicates the result of the pass / fail judgment.

  With such a configuration, various displays may be able to be performed. Also, there are cases where the player can be made to pay more attention to the advance notice.

  In the case of the above (A) and (B), at least one of the first display and the second display (or only one display or both displays) implies the result of the judgment of yes or no. The notice may be included, and the first indication and the second indication may be a notice indicating the same (or different) result of the pass / fail judgment. For example, both may be the success / failure determination results of the special drawing, and both may be the success / failure determination results of the common drawing. In addition, one may be the success or failure judgment result of the special drawing, and the other may be the success or failure judgment result of the common drawing, and the other is the result of the judgment of success or failure next time It may be pre-read) or both may be different judgment result of the change (pre-reading of special figure / general drawing).

  (C) In addition, when at least a part of at least one of the first, second and third displays is made to be hidden by a plurality of other displays, the hidden display is made to draw more attention There are times when you can. Note that only part (or all) of at least one of the first, second and third displays may be hidden by a plurality of other displays.

  (D) In addition, if at least one of the first, second, and third displays hides a plurality of other displays, it may be possible to make the hidden display more noticeable. Also, hidden displays may be able to draw more attention. Note that one of the plurality of other displays is at least partially (or partially or completely) hidden by the one display, and the other is at least partially displayed by the one display. Or, only part or all may be hidden.

In the case of the above (C) and (D), the third indication may at least give a notice that suggests the result of the yes / no determination (or only a notice that indicates the result of the yes / no determination), The third display may be at least an announcement of the reception period of the operation means (or only an announcement of the reception period of the operation means), or a notice of the result of the determination of acceptance or rejection and a reception period of the operation means At least one of the notifications (or only one or both, or at least both, or both) may be performed. The display means may be a notification means, and the display may be a notification.
Fifth Embodiment

Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 145 to 177 are basically used only for the description of the fifth embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in FIGS. 145 to 177 have priority.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game arcade installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a member called an inner frame, provided inside the outer frame 102, and is a member serving as a vertically rectangular game pedestal base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. Moreover, when the main body 104 is open | released, the inner frame open sensor not shown which detects opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape to form an inner side thereof. It is a door member which made the opening part. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200. Moreover, when the front frame door 106 is open | released, the front frame door open sensor (not shown) which detects opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board A ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 for changing the rendering mode of the various rendering devices 206 by the operation of the player, and a cha for emitting the chance button 136. An operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade, and a return operation button for instructing to return the balance of the player to the card unit And 142, a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. Further, the lower tray 128 is provided with a lower tray full sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower tray 128 is full.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 146 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls, and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150 A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The gaming ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) to reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The player pays out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 accommodating a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing.

  FIG. 147 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol". The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special view fluctuation game It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, and a second special drawing starting opening 232, around the rendering device 206, A variable winning hole 234 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize balls", and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "lending balls". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general drawing start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special drawing start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 described later is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper tray 126. The first special figure display device 212 starts a special figure change game. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special drawing start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed immediately below the first special drawing start port 230. The second special view start port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the wing member 232a is closed, and wins a common game variation game, and a common game display device When the symbol 210 is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one is provided below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes an openable door member 234a, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member 234a is closed, and the special view display is stopped with a big hit symbol winning the special view variable game. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and predetermined times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding the ball that has not won a prize to any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with the strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches the launch rod 146 Then, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launch rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.
<Rendering device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball on the game board 200, etc., and the ball passed through the center of the stage 244 is the first special view starting opening 230 There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to enter the

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm, and the upper arm motor and the elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means has its inner end portions overlapping and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player does not easily see it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 (two circuits in this circuit) which are used as hardware random number counters that change numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. It is assumed that a counter is built in), a predetermined ball detection sensor such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the lower-side full-tank sensor and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, eg, Drive circuit 326 for performing display control of common drawing display device 210, various state display unit 328 (for example, common drawing holding lamp 216, first special drawing holding lamp 218, second special drawing holding lamp 220, high confidence) Drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members, for example, the blade members 232a of the second special view starting port 232 and the door members 234a of the variable winning opening 234 and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the signal is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the first special view starting opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the counter circuit 318. The counter circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the first special view start port 230, and the latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the first special view start port 230. Store in the register for Also, even when a signal indicating that the ball is won is received at second special view start opening 232, counter circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to second special view start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to second special view start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 A low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302 when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.
<First sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. , ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effect data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, time and number of times etc. The counter timer 412 of The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

In the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246 Drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of shielding device 246, chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of chance button 136, shielding device sensor 430 and chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 which outputs a detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read to generate a display image using the work area of the VRAM 436 VDP 434 (displaying an image on the symbol display device 208) Are connected Oh and display processor), the.
<Second sub control unit>

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It carries 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and operates to control the whole of the second sub control unit 500, data and image display A ROM 506 in which data and the like are stored is provided.

Further, in the basic circuit 502, a drive circuit 516 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, and detection signals from the effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532 and a game board lamp drive for controlling the game board lamp 542 A circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 for performing lighting control by serial communication are connected between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.
<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of symbol>

  Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped using FIGS. 149 (a) to (c). The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described. The same figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention. Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol change stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the same figure (a), ten types of special figures from "Special figure A" to "Special figure J" are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation stop display, and the white parts in the figure turn off The locations of the segments to be displayed are indicated, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  "Special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game and after the end of the 15R big hit game, it shifts to the time saving state. Although the time saving will be described in detail later, the state transitioning to the time saving state is referred to as a common drawing high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time shortening state is referred to as a common drawing low probability state. "Special figure A" which is 15R special big hit design is special figure high probability spread figure high probability state, "special figure B" which is 15R big hit design is special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R big hit design called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R. "Special figure D" is a 2R big hit design called sudden time, and is a special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure D" differs in 2R compared with "special figure B" which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R big hit design called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit design which is suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure E" and the "special figure F" are both 2R and are in a state of not transitioning to the time saving state.

  “Special figure G” is a first small hit symbol, and “special figure H” is a second small hit symbol, each being a special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The small hit referred to here corresponds to the same thing as 2R time short no hit big hit. That is, although the "special figure G" and the "special figure H" are in the same state as the "special figure F", the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different between the two, even in the same state. By providing G "," Special figure H "and" Special figure F ", the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special figure I” is a first out-of-order symbol, and “special figure J” is a second out-of-pattern, and the amount of profit given to the player is a relatively small amount of profit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "special image A" is also prepared as the 15R special big hit symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R big hit symbol.

  FIG. 149 (b) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "display of variation of decoration pattern". And when notifying 15R big hit of "special figure B", the symbol combination corresponding to 15R big hit corresponding to 15R big hit in the symbol display area 208a-208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration") Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In the case of notifying 15R special big hit of “Special figure A”, a pattern combination in which the same three odd decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 To stop.

  In addition, the 2R big hit, which is referred to as "special figure E" hidden probability change, the 2R big hit, which is usually called "special figure F", or the first small hit of "special figure G", is "special figure H" When notifying the second small hit, "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when reporting 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of "special figure C" or 2R big hit called sudden shortness of "special figure D", "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first out of "special figure I" and the second out of "special figure J", stop the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in the same figure (b) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

Fig. 149 (c) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a detached symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (c), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts by a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 150 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment). If it is less than 9 v), monitor whether or not it outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped. When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, whether a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game arcade operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is ON (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the robot 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating initial values of a common drawing win random number counter and a special drawing random number counter, a common drawing timer random number value, and a special drawing timer Update two random number counters to generate each random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as a common drawing timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing timer random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and the random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically (this processing is not abnormal) so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and the WDT interrupt is not generated (the processing abnormality is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 148, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no detection signal for the last two times, detection signal for last time, presence of current detection signal) Entry to the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special view starting opening 230, and the second special drawing starting opening 232, or the common view starting opening 228 It is determined that there was a passage of That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random value counter for initial value generation performed in the above-mentioned step S115 is updated, and then the common control winning random value used in the main control unit 300 The two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value respectively are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical value range which can be taken as a common drawing win random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the common drawing win random number provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number value which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and 1 is added to the acquired value and the result is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), a value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for the common drawing win random number value generation. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the common random number for making a round next turns while setting it to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the common drawing win random number value has made one revolution next, it is determined that the random number counter for special figure random number generation has made one revolution. An initial value storage area for the purpose is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 1 and the counter for acquiring the random number value of Special Figure 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time for normal symbol display device 210 to change / stop display the symbol, and a time for the first special symbol display device 212 to measure the fluctuation / stop display Special figure 1 display symbol update timer to do, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the variation and stop display on the second special figure display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time And various timers including a timer for counting a predetermined closing time, a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the first special view start port 230, the second special view start port 232, the common drawing start port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When there is a winning on the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 random number value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. The value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 1 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a winning on the second special view start port 232 and the corresponding hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 is the special figure 2 random number value The value is acquired as a special figure 2 random number value from the random number counter for special figure 2 random number value generation and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding storage number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a common drawing selection random value from a random number counter for common drawing selection random number generation. Store in the corresponding random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is lit repeatedly Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs the fluctuation display of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display pattern of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off drive control so that the normal symbol display device 210 is turned off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to become the display pattern of the off symbol. The 7 segment LED is on / off drive control. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common figure A shown in FIG. 149 (c) and the detached symbol (a common figure B shown in FIG. 149 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while setting the general drawing operation, the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special drawing start port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds) , And outputs information indicating an open period in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is out, the common drawing out flag is turned on as described later. When the out-of-normal-pattern deviation flag is on, even in the common-diagram state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the in-use drawing suspension time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the second special drawing start opening 232 are not controlled (the state of the common drawing is not in operation) and the holding of the common drawing fluctuation game When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by the random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area. In the case of winning, the hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of failure to win, the hit flag is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  Next, in step S225 and step S227, the special figure status update process is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but first, the special figure status update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed. Perform (step S225). This special view 2 state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the special view 2 state. For example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting of the 7 segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (the special view 2 change game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first missed flag, a second missed flag, a special feature probability variation flag, and Flags for each of the probability fluctuation flags are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation time passes (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag Also, when the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special drawing A shown in FIG. 149A shown in FIG. 149 (a), the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is on Special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, if general drawing probability fluctuation flag is also on, special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, common probability When the variation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is also on, the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability Fluctuation flag is off. If the rate fluctuation flag is also off, the special figure F, if the first small hit flag is on, the special figure G, if the second small hit flag is on, the special figure H, the first off flag is on In such a case, the special segment I and the second outlier flag are on so that the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on and off so that the respective special symbol I is configured, In the setting area of the RAM 308, setting is performed to indicate that the special view 2 stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 is a 15R special big hit symbol (special figure A), 15R big hit symbol (special figure B), a sudden odd symbol (special figure C), a sudden short time symbol (special figure) D), hidden probability variation symbol (special figure E), sudden normal symbol (special figure F), first small hitting symbol (special figure G), second small hitting symbol (special figure H), first missing symbol (special figure) I), and the second out-of-place design (special figure J) the fixed display of any one of the design is done. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the time saving number stored in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time saving number, and if the subtraction result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability is fluctuating If it is not (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off.

  Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning a prize setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the door member 234a is opened until the game winning of the predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234 And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234, and the storage period of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is closed. Set the information indicating. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Further, this door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), and in the special figure 2 state update process started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. Further, if the common drawing probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, 100 time saving times are set in the time saving number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time saving flag provided in the RAM 308 Turn on. If the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the time saving number is not set in the time saving number storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. The term "time-saving" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a common drawing high probability state. It is highly possible that the common drawing change game will be a big hit in the common drawing high probability state compared to the common drawing low probability state. In addition, in the case of the common drawing high probability state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game and the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation game are shorter than in the common drawing low probability state. Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be long. In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a regular game high probability state during the big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 during the big hit game, a lot of games in the second special view starting port 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the ball enters the ball and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and it is for solving this.

  Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is a disconnection, as described later, a disconnection flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step S227). In the special view 1 state update process, each process described in the special view 2 state update process described above is performed according to the state of the special view 1. Each process performed in this special view 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” of the content described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”, so I omit it. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed as step S229 and step S231. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step S231). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure fluctuation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is done by the 1st sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the 2nd special figure starting opening 232 However, priority is given to notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230. The special drawing related lottery process will be described in detail later.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, specify the type of command such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command Possible information) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to a command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. Also, if the command type is a symbol variation start command, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, etc. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R big hit flag or the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability change flag, etc., and in the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, In the case of the jackpot round number designation command, the value of the probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included in the case of the jackpot round number designation command. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning to the first special view starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning to the second special view starting opening 232, winning of the variable winning opening 234 Including presence or absence.

  Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the values of the 15R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 relation stored in the command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of the 15R big hit flag and the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game, etc. which are held is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. In the special winning opening closing setting transmission process described above, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the first special figure fluctuation game or the second special figure fluctuation game of pending Set the information that shows the number etc. Further, in step S233, general command special view hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is set as command data.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special view starting opening 232 and the variable winning opening 234, or through the display circuits 324, 326, 330, the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and the interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 150 is performed. Return to

On the other hand, in step S243, the power saving process such as initialization of the input / output port is performed by saving a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure at power recovery as recovery data. The process then returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.
<Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>

The process of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer variable interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.
<First sub control unit main processing>

  First, in step S301 of the main processing of the first sub control unit 400, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed.

In step S311, the chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting pressing of the chance button 136 is monitored, and when pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is used as effect data according to pressing of the chance button 136. Perform processing to change. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a button reception period is provided which enables reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 136 during the variable display of the special figure and the decorative symbol. This button acceptance period shall begin counting when a predetermined time has elapsed from changes initiated (e.g., when the t ₀ seconds have elapsed in FIG. 157 (b)).

  Further, at the start of the button reception period, effect data for notifying the player that the pressing operation of the chance button 136 can be received is prepared, and in the image control processing described later, for example, FIG. The notification (in this example, display of an image imitating the chance button 136) as shown in FIG. Also, when pressing of the chance button 136 is detected during the button acceptance period, effect data for giving a notice is prepared, and as shown in the right side of FIG. Make a notice (in this example, the text "It's very hot !!" is displayed). Then, while the timing is ended after the button acceptance period (for example, 6 seconds) has elapsed, a process for deleting the notification or notice of the button acceptance period is performed.

  In step S313, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 among the effect data read out in the step S309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317, when there is an instruction to various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S321, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S309, setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S303.
<First sub control unit command reception interrupt processing>

Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.
<First sub control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

In step S501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. 152 (a). In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In the following step S503, transmission of a control command to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, update processing of effect random number values, and the like are performed.
<First Sub Control Unit Image Control Processing>

  Next, the image control processing of step S313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605, otherwise the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for

  In step S605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611, otherwise the generation end interrupt signal Wait for the input. In step S611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.
<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>

The process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.
<Second sub control unit main processing>

  First, in step S701 of the main process of the second sub control unit 500, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, first, in step S701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10. If the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S 707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S 707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

In step S711, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.
<Second sub control unit command reception interrupt process>

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.
<Second sub control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 is provided with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of

In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main processing shown in FIG. In the timer variable storage area of Accordingly, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S 903 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, an update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed.
<Data table of main control unit 300>

  Next, a data table stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 and a special drawing related lottery process will be described.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and a special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 . The special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table and the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table are the stop symbol of the special figure, the fluctuation time of the special figure, the random number selection range, the presentation mode in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the table It is a data table in which numbers are associated and stored.

  The main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 1 change time determination table in the special figure 1 related lottery process described above, and selects a table number based on the special result judgment result of the special figure 1 change game. For example, when the success or failure determination result of the special figure 1 variation game is a big hit, when the special figure A or the special figure B is selected as the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the table 1 is selected as the table number. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 selects a specific fluctuation time from among one or more fluctuation times corresponding to the selected table by lottery using a random number value. For example, when the table number is Table 1 and the acquired random number is 500, a fluctuation time 15000 ms (per normal reach) corresponding to the random number selection range 0 to 1000 is selected.

Further, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 2 change time determination table in the special figure 2 related lottery process described above, and selects a table number based on the special figure 2 change game success / failure determination result. For example, when special drawing I or special drawing J is selected as a stop symbol of special drawing 2 because the success or failure determination result of special drawing 2 fluctuation game is out, for example, table 9 is selected as a table number. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 selects a specific fluctuation time from among one or more fluctuation times corresponding to the selected table by lottery using a random number value. For example, when the table number is the table 9 and the acquired random number value is 55000, the fluctuation time 10000 ms (normal reach is lost) corresponding to the random number selection range 50001 to 60000 is selected.
<Advance notice effect>

  Next, details of the effects (a series of notice effects related to the notice) displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the determination result of the special drawing-related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) described above will be described. This effect includes a predetermined effect (hereinafter, also referred to as "preliminary notice") that suggests the player the result of the determination of yes / no during the change display of the decorative symbol. Further, the effect includes a predetermined effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “informing”) for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 to give the above-mentioned advance notice. That is, in the series of notice effects displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect (notification) prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed first, and the symbol is displayed when the player operates the chance button 136. While the variable display is being performed, it is changed to an effect (preliminary notice) that suggests the player the result of the judgment of yes or no. At this time, the effect (notification) for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 may also be set according to the result of the determination of success or failure, and may play a function (preliminary function) to suggest the result of determination of success or failure to the player. The chance button 136 is set to be effective when it is operated within a predetermined reception period, and the player is notified of the button reception period in various notification modes.

  More specifically, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on in the special drawing-related lottery process (steps S229 and S231). If the big hit flag is on, one of the multiple big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, special figures A to F) is determined. If the big hit flag is not on, it is determined whether the small hit flag is on. When the small hit flag is on, one of the plurality of small hit symbols (in the present embodiment, special figure G to special figure F) is determined. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is on, one symbol is determined from among a plurality of missing symbols (in the present embodiment, special figures I to J in this embodiment). When the stop symbol of the special drawing is determined, the fluctuation time is determined according to the above-mentioned special drawing change time determination table (see FIG. 154) according to the stop symbol. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), a symbol change start command including at least information on the result of determination of success or failure (stop symbol of the special figure) and fluctuation time is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400.

  The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines, in the above-mentioned effect control process (step S309), the result of determination of success or failure included in the symbol change start command received from the main control unit 300 (stop symbol of special view) and the change time. The advance lottery process is executed based on the notification pattern determination table stored in advance for each stop symbol and fluctuation time of the special view in the ROM 406 and the random number value acquired from the predetermined random number counter.

  For example, when the main control unit 300 receives a 15R big hit symbol (special figure B) and a variation time per super reach A (45000 ms), the main control unit 300 receives table number 2 from a plurality of notification mode determination tables shown in FIG. A notification mode determination table for per super reach A is selected, and a notice lottery process is executed. Then, using the selected notification mode determination table, it is determined which effect is to be performed by random number lottery. For example, if the random number value is 29 in the notification mode determination table for per super reach A, a notification mode in which the mode changes to notification B → D is selected. Also, for example, when the first out-of-shape symbol (special figure I) and the change time for super reach A (40000 ms) are received from the main control unit 300, a table is selected from a plurality of notification mode determination tables shown in FIG. The notification mode determination table for number 12 Super Reach A is selected, and the notice lottery process is executed. Then, using the selected notification mode determination table, it is determined which effect is to be performed by random number lottery. For example, if the random number value is 29 in the notification mode determination table for Super Reach A shift, the notification mode in which the mode of notification F continues and the mode does not change halfway is selected.

  Specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a notice lottery processing as shown in FIG. 155, for example, at the start of variation of the special drawing and the decorative symbol. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether the success or failure determination result acquired from the main control unit 300 is a big hit (whether the stop symbol is a special figure A to F). If it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1003. If not, the process proceeds to step S1005.

In step S1003, a lottery of the notification mode is performed based on the big hit table among the notification mode determination tables. The notification mode determination table is determined based on the jackpot symbol received from the main control unit 300 and the fluctuation time. For example, the jackpot table of table number 2 in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 156 is a notification mode determination table for per super reach A selected in the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table in FIG. Although the details are not shown in the case of the reach, a notification mode determination table is similarly prepared. Further, in step S1003, based on the notification form determination table for per super reach A of FIG. That is, in the case of a big hit via Super Reach A, if the random number is 0 to 4, select "Attack F continued mode (mode in which the notification does not change)" as the notification mode, and the random number is 5 to 19 In the case, select "mode to switch from notification A to notification E", select "mode to switch from notification B to notification D" if the random number is 20 to 49, and "notify if the random value is 50 to 99 selecting a mode "switching from C ₁ to notification _{C 2.} In the present embodiment, since the numerical value range of the random number is set to 0 to 99, for example, the probability of selecting “a mode for continuing the notification F” as a notification mode is 1/20 (= 5/100). If there is a big hit on the special view, the probability that "the mode of continuing the notification F" is selected most among all the notification modes is low.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether it is a predetermined fluctuation time. If it is a predetermined fluctuation time, it will progress to Step S1007, and if not, it will progress to Step S1009. The predetermined fluctuation time here is a lottery using special drawing result of determination (stop symbol) and a random number value range of 0 to 65535 based on the table shown in FIG. 154 in the special drawing related lottery process. It means the fluctuation time of the special figure determined by. In the present embodiment, the case of drawing the notification mode in the next step S1007 is removed, limited to the case of performing effects relating to the normal reach, super reach A off or super reach B off, and omission of shortening or super shortening is excluded. It is supposed to be In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol of the special drawing is a small hit, the notification mode is determined from the removal table.

In step S1007, a lottery of the notification mode is performed based on the out-of-table of the notification mode determination table. For example, the out-of-table table of table number 12 in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 156 is the notification mode determination table for Super Reach A shift selected in the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table of FIG. Similarly to the case of, in the case of other reach or break, a notification mode determination table for advance notice is prepared similarly. Further, in step S1007, a lottery of the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period for advance notice is performed based on the notification mode determination table for deviation from Super Reach A in FIG. That is, when passing through Super Reach A, if the random number value is 0 to 49, select "Attach mode to continue the notification F" as the notification mode, and if the random number value is 50 to 79, "A notification from the notification A Select the mode to switch to E, and select the mode to switch from notification B to notification D if the random number value is 80 to 94, and change the notification C ₁ to notification C ₂ if the random value is 95 to 99. Select the mode to switch. In addition, the probability of selecting "a mode to switch from a notice C ₁ to a notice C ₂ " as a notice mode is 1/20 (= 5/100), and when the judgment result of the special view is not a big hit, "the notice C ₁ There is a low probability that the mode of “switching from the notification C ₂ to the notification C ₂ ” is selected most among all the notification modes. In step S1009, a command is transmitted to various devices (for example, VDP 434 which control the display image of the decorative symbol display device 208) which performs a notice, and this control flow is ended.

In the above notification modes, in the notification mode in which the notification X is switched to the notification Y, the first notification mode is referred to as a first notification mode, and the notification mode which is switched thereafter is referred to as a second notification mode. Further, at least a notification period is set in each of the modes of the above-mentioned notices A to F. For example, the broadcast A is one second broadcasting period, informing B is broadcast period 2 seconds, the notification C ₁ and C ₂ are broadcasting period is 3 seconds, the notification D is broadcasting period is 4 seconds, the notification E is broadcasting period is 5 seconds The notification F is set such that the notification period is 6 seconds. And when it is elected by the aspect which switches from the 1st informing aspect to the 2nd informing aspect, the informing period according to the 1st informing aspect (hereinafter, also referred to as the 1st informing period) and the informing period according to the 2nd informing aspect (below A period obtained by adding the second notification period and the second notification period) is set to coincide with the button reception period.

Further, although not particularly illustrated, in this notice lottery process, details of the notice are based on the result of determination of acceptance or rejection received from the main control unit 300, a predetermined notice lottery table stored in advance in the ROM 406, and the aforementioned random value. It also determines whether the content is displayed (for example, if the button is pressed, the character display of "super heat!", The character display of "...", Or the like is performed).
<Example 1 of Informing Mode of Remaining Time>

  Example 1 of the notification mode of the remaining time of the reception period of the chance button 136 notified by the decorative symbol display device 208 as a result of the above-mentioned advance lottery process will be described using FIGS. Here, in the case where the success / failure determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A), in the notification mode determination table for per super reach A of table number 2 shown in FIG. A case will be described by way of example in which a notification mode is selected in which the notification B (first notification mode) is switched to "the notification D (second notification mode)" halfway.

  As described above, the operation of the chance button 136 is valid only during a preset period (button reception period). The button reception period is displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a format in which the remaining time is known (here, in the form of a rectangular meter), and the remaining amount of the button reception period is informed Ru. The notification mode can be set in various modes using parameters such as a notification period, the color of the meter, the initial amount of the meter at the start of notification, and the amount of decrease per unit time of the meter (reduction rate).

In the mode of the notification B in the first embodiment, the meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue) during the notification period of T ₂ seconds (for example, 2 seconds). For example, as shown in FIGS. 158 (b) to (d), the meter is displayed in a state of being partially overlapped with the front surface of the changing decorative symbol. Also, for example, as shown in FIG. 158 (b), the meter is displayed full at the start of the notification according to the mode of the notification B, and gradually decreases as time passes. The reduction rate of the meter is set to coincide with the actual decrease rate of the button reception period (the actual decrease rate of the remaining time).

Further, in the mode of notification D, the meter is displayed in a special color (for example, red) during the notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). The meter is displayed so as to partially overlap the front of the moving decorative symbol. At the start of the notification according to the mode of the notification D, the remaining amount of the meter immediately before (at the end of the notification according to the mode of the notification B) is maintained, and gradually decreases as time passes. The rate of decrease of the meter is set to match the actual rate of decrease of the button acceptance period.

  In FIG. 157 and FIG. 158, (a) is the start time of fluctuation of the special drawing and the decorative symbol, (b) is the start time of reception of the button reception period, and (c) is the remaining time of the button reception period. This is the time when the notification mode has changed, and (d) is the time when the reception of the button reception period is completed.

In this example, as the first of the notification manner, during the broadcasting period of T ₂ seconds (e.g. 2 seconds) and displays the meter in the reference color. The meter is displayed so as to partially overlap the front of the moving decorative symbol. At the start of the reception, the meter is full and gradually decreases as time passes. The decrease rate of the meter corresponds to the actual decrease rate of the button acceptance period. That is, for example, in the case where the button acceptance period is 6 seconds, the meter decreases to 2/3 when 2 seconds elapse from the acceptance start.

When the broadcasting period of the first notification manner is completed switched to the second notification manner, during the broadcasting period of the subsequent T ₄ seconds (e.g. 4 seconds) to display the meter in a special color. The rate of decrease of the meter is the same as in the first notification mode. Therefore, the decrease rate is constant over the entire button reception period. However, in the mode of the notification D, since the remaining amount of the meter immediately before the switching is continued, the notification of the remaining time is started from the state where the remaining amount of the meter is 2/3.

  When the button acceptance period is over, the display of the meter disappears, and the state is displayed in which the decorative symbol in change is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the player operates the chance button 136 while notifying the button acceptance period by the meter, the meter is turned off and a notice as shown on the right side of FIG. 158 is displayed. Here, the text "It is super hot !!" which indicates that the success or failure judgment result is a big hit is displayed. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the jackpot by giving a notice of "It's hot!"

  Describing the advance notice, in the first embodiment, when the player operates the chance button 136, one of "...", "super hot ??", and "super hot !!" is displayed. It is set to be For example, when the mode of notification B → D is selected, the case division by the random number value is divided into smaller parts. For example, when the random number value is 20 to 24, "..." is displayed, and the random number value is 25 to 25. In the case of 34, "is it hot ??" is displayed, and when the random number value is 35 to 49, it is such that "the hot is!" Is displayed. The same setting is performed when another notification mode other than the notification B → D is selected.

  According to such a notification mode of the first embodiment, the player can grasp the length of the remaining time of the button reception period, so that the player can press the chance button 136 at a desired timing or not press it. Is possible. In particular, when the notification mode switches along with the passage of time (for example, in the case of a notification mode in which the random number value is 5-99 when the 15R big hit is selected, the notification in which the random value is 50-99 when the out of turn Since there is a mode), as the timing to press the chance button 136, "Press immediately after reception is activated", "Press when notification mode changes", "Press at any timing of the player", "Pressed There is an advantage that the range of choices is broadened, and there are many games. That is, since the execution of the notice corresponds to the operation of the chance button 136 by the player, the range of the game is particularly expanded at this point, and the interest of the game may be enhanced.

  In addition, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by amplifying the expectation of the player to the big hit by switching the notification mode. In addition, the player may be able to reduce the use of the unnecessary chance button 136 and increase the durability of the chance button 136. In addition, if the color of the meter is changed before and after the switching of the notification mode, the range of effects may be expanded, and an effect of prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 may be expected.

Also, as shown in FIG. 156, since the probability of winning each notification mode is set to be different between when the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit and when it is out of place, the player is expected to give the case In the case of a break, it is possible to increase the probability that the feeling of expectation given to the player is lowered, and to make a difference between the two, thereby further enhancing the interest of the game.
<Example 2 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 and 160. In the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, in the advance notice information table shown in FIG. 156, in the notice information determination result, 15 R big hit (special figure B) and fluctuation time 45000 ms (per super reach A) “notify B (No. A case will be described by way of example in which a notification mode is selected in which the notification mode is switched from 1) to “notification D (second notification mode)”. However, in the second embodiment, the notice at the time of pressing the button displayed in the notification period according to the first notification mode (the first notification period) and the notification period according to the second notification manner (the second notification period) is different. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that it is set to

  In FIG. 159 and FIG. 160, (a) is the change start time of the decorative symbol, (b) is the start time of the reception of the button reception period, and (c) is the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period. (D) is the end time of the button reception period.

In this example, as the first of the notification manner, during the broadcasting period of T ₂ seconds (e.g. 2 seconds), and displays the reference color meter (for example, blue). The meter is displayed so as to partially overlap the front of the moving decorative symbol. At the start of the reception, the meter is full and gradually decreases as time passes. The rate of decrease of the meter is set to match the actual rate of decrease of the button acceptance period. That is, for example, in the case where the button acceptance period is 6 seconds, the meter decreases to 2/3 when 2 seconds elapse from the acceptance start. When the chance button 136 is operated during this first notification period, a notice (first notice) of “...” Is displayed. Thereafter, the notice is continued until the end of the button reception period, and the display of the notice disappears at the end of the reception.

If the chance button 136 is not operated during the first notification period, the mode is switched to the second notification mode when the first notification period ends, and the meter is turned on during the subsequent notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). Display in a special color (for example, red). The rate at which the meter decreases is the same as in the first notification mode. When the chance button 136 is operated during this second notification period, a notice (second notice) of "It's intense!" Is displayed. After that, the notice continues until the end of the button reception period, and the notice display disappears at the end.

  If the chance button 136 is not operated even in the second notification period, the display of the meter continues until the end of the button reception period, and the display of the meter disappears when the button reception period ends, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It returns to the state where the decoration design which is fluctuating is displayed in all. That is, if the chance button 136 is not operated over the first and second notification periods, no advance notice is given.

  In addition, the first notice of “...” And the second notice of “high heat !!!” are the above-mentioned notice lottery based on the result of the determination of yes / no obtained from the main control unit 300 and the fluctuation time. It is set by processing. The first notice gives the player a low sense of expectation, while the second notice gives the player a high sense of expectation.

  In detail, in the second embodiment, when the player operates the chance button 136 in the same manner as the first embodiment, “...”, “Super heat??”, “Super heat !! "" Is set to be displayed. For example, when the mode of notification B → D is selected, the case division by the random number values 20 to 49 is further divided finely. For example, when the random number value is 20 to 24, "..." Is displayed when an operation is received at the time of notification B, while "super heat!" Is displayed when an operation is received at notification D. It is set to. If the random number value is 25 to 34, setting is made so that "It is intense?" Is displayed when the operation is accepted at the time of notification B, and "is extremely intense!" Is displayed when the operation is received at the notification D It is done. When the random number value is 35 to 49, when the operation is accepted in both the notification B and the notification D, it is set to display “super heat !!”. The same setting is made even when another notification mode is selected.

  In the second embodiment, in the first notification period, the meter is displayed in the reference color, and the preset notice has a feeling of expectation lower or equal to that of the second notice period. On the other hand, in the second notification period, the meter is displayed in a special color and the preset notice has a higher or equal expectation compared to the notice of the first notification period. As the display color of the meter, the special color has a greater impact on the player than the reference color. That is, in each notification period, the sense of expectation suggested by the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is associated with the sense of expectation suggested by the advance notice. By this, the sense of expectation given to the player can be adjusted by the combination of the notification mode and the advance notice, and there is an advantage that the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

In addition, the player may be able to grasp the contents of the notice without operating the chance button 136 by understanding that the notification mode of the remaining time and the contents of the notice correspond to each other. That is, the player who is in the jackpot may not be able to press the chance button 136 because the player is conscious of paying out the game balls (moving the game balls to the box). There is also a disadvantage such as spilling the balls paid out when the chance button 136 is operated. However, the notification mode of the remaining time also serves as a notice for suggesting a success / failure determination result, and if it becomes possible to recognize the contents of the notice without pressing the chance button 136, the player pays for the game ball. In addition to being able to concentrate, there are cases where it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the next game.
<Example 3 of Notification Mode of Remaining Time>

  A third embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. The third embodiment is an example of a notification mode in which the meter is temporarily stopped, and in the table shown in FIG. 156, in the table shown in FIG. 156, the acceptance judgment result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and fluctuation time 45000 ms (per super reach A). A case will be described by way of example in which a notification mode is selected in which the notification A (first notification mode) is switched to "the notification E (second notification mode)" halfway. The button acceptance period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds). In FIG. 161 and FIG. 162, (a) is the start time of reception of the button reception period, (b) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period changes, (g) is the button reception period End of the

  In the notification A mode, the notification period is 1 second, and a full meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue) and a button reception period (apparent reception period) for notifying the player is an actual button reception period. Half of it (3 seconds here). Here, it is possible to make the player illusion that it is shorter than the normal button reception period by setting the reduction rate of the meter to be twice as fast as the reduction rate of the actual button reception period. As a premise of this, in normal times, the game is repeated by setting the reduction amount per unit time (reduction rate) of the meter that is initially full displayed to match the reduction rate of the actual button acceptance period. Preferably, the player can recognize that the button acceptance period is usually set to a fixed length (here, 6 seconds). The BGM may allow the player to sense that the button reception period is normally about 6 seconds. With such preconditions, even if the actual button acceptance period is set to 6 seconds, the full meter will normally be reduced by 1/6 in 1 second, for example, in 1 second If it is reduced by 1/3, it is possible to make the player illusion that the current button acceptance period is 3 seconds. In addition, if it is decreased by 1/5 at one second, it is possible for the player to illusion that the current button acceptance period is five seconds.

  In the mode of the notification E, the notification period is 5 seconds, and the meter of any remaining amount is displayed in the reference color (for example, blue), and the meter is paused for a predetermined time (here 3 seconds) immediately after the start of the notification. After that, in order to keep the balance, the reduction rate of the meter is reduced at a faster rate (here, the rate decreased by 1/3 for 1 second) than the decrease rate for the normal button acceptance period (1/6 for 1 second). Reduce and report the remaining time.

  That is, first, when the notification is started by the first notification mode, the full meter is displayed in the reference color. Then, during the first notification period, the meter is decreased by 1/3 in one second.

  When the first notification period ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. In the second notification mode, the reduction of the meter is stopped for the first 3 seconds. Therefore, the meter maintains the remaining amount of 2/3 until 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the button reception period. Then, when 4 seconds have elapsed, the meter starts to decrease again and decreases by 1/3 in 1 second. Therefore, when 5 seconds have elapsed, the remaining amount of the meter decreases to 1/3, and when 6 seconds have elapsed, that is, when the button acceptance period ends, the remaining amount of the meter becomes 0. In the third embodiment, in order to compensate for the pause of the meter, the reduction rate of the meter is made faster than the decrease rate of the normal button reception period, particularly in the second notification period.

  Thus, in the third embodiment, the length of the actual remaining time of the button acceptance period and the length of the remaining time suggested by the meter are set differently. Therefore, the reduction of the meter is temporarily stopped by switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, and the player can be made illusion that the remaining time has increased, and the sense of expectation can be amplified, and surprise is also made. In some cases, there is an effect that it can be given to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the notification of the remaining time of the button acceptance period different from the actual one is performed in one of the first and second notification modes, the end can be adjusted in the other notification mode. It is possible to In the third embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, it is preferable that, for example, a notice similar to that of the first embodiment is made.
<Example 4 of Informing Aspect of Remaining Time>

  A fourth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164. Also in the fourth embodiment, similarly to the first and second embodiments, in the notice mode determination table for advance notice shown in FIG. 156, the result of the judgment is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). A case will be described by way of example in which a notification mode is selected in which the notification mode is switched in the middle from "the notification B (the first notification mode)" to "the notification D (the second notification mode)". However, the contents of each of the notices A to F are different from the examples 1 and 2, and the example 4 is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter increases at the time of switching the notice mode. Further, the button acceptance period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds). In FIG. 163 and FIG. 164, (a) is the start time of reception of the button reception period, (c) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period changes, and (g) is the button reception period End of the

  In the notification B mode of the fourth embodiment, the notification period is 2 seconds, and a full meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue) at the start of the notification, and a button reception period for notifying the player Period) is half of the actual button reception period (3 seconds here). Here, as in the third embodiment, the reduction rate of the meter is doubled than the decrease rate of the actual button reception period to make the player feel that the button reception period is shorter than the actual button reception period. It is supposed to be.

  In the notification D mode, the notification period is 4 seconds, and a full meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue) at the start of the notification, and the button acceptance period returns to the original and the meter recovers from the illusion Let Thereafter, the decrease rate of the meter is set to be slower than the decrease rate in the mode of the notification B, and the remaining time is notified.

  That is, first, when the notification is started by the first notification mode, the full meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is decreased by 1/3 in one second. By this, the player is made to recognize that this button acceptance period is 3 seconds. When the first notification period ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, return the meter to full. After that, the full meter is decreased by 1⁄4 per second. This causes the player to recognize that the remaining time of the button acceptance period after switching to the second notification mode has increased to 4 seconds. The remaining amount of the meter becomes 0 at the end of the acceptance of the button acceptance period.

  According to the notification in the notification mode of the fourth embodiment, the remaining amount of the meter increases at the time of switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, and the decrease rate of the meter in the second notification mode is Since it is slower than the reduction rate in the first notification mode, it is possible to make the player illusion that the remaining time of the button reception period has increased, to amplify the sense of expectation, and to give surprises to enhance the interest of the game. Has the effect of

  In addition, since the decrease rate of the button acceptance period is different between the first notification mode and the second notification mode, even if the notification of the button reception period different from the actual one is performed in one of the first and second notification modes. In the other notification mode, it is possible to adjust the balance, and it is possible to give various notices.

In the above example, the display of the meter is returned to full at the time of switching the notification mode, but if the remaining amount of the meter immediately after switching is larger than the remaining amount of the meter immediately before switching The remaining amount of the meter (in other words, the initial amount of the meter in the second notification mode) is not limited to the full tank. In the fourth embodiment, it is preferable that, for example, when the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, a notice similar to that of the first embodiment is given.
<Example 5 of Informing Form of Remaining Time>

  A fifth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. In the fifth embodiment, as in the first, second and fourth embodiments, in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 156, the success / failure determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). A case will be described by way of example in which a notification mode is selected in which the notification mode is switched in the middle from "the notification B (the first notification mode)" to "the notification D (the second notification mode)". However, the contents of each of the notices A to F are different from those of the above-described embodiment, and the fifth embodiment is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter is increased when switching the notification mode and the color is changed and displayed. is there. The button acceptance period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds).

  In FIG. 165 and FIG. 166, (a) is the start time of reception of the button reception period, (c) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period changes, (g) is the button reception period End of the

  In addition, the color of the meter is associated with the expectation to the big hit, and in the case of the reference color (for example, blue), the expectation is low, and in the case of the special color (for example, red), the expectation is high. This point is the same as that of the second embodiment.

  In the mode of the notification B of the fifth embodiment, the notification period is set to 2 seconds, and the full meter is displayed in the reference color at the start of the notification, and then the game is performed while gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter It is set to notify the person of the remaining time of the actual button acceptance period correctly. In this case, the player can correct the actual button acceptance period correctly by setting the reduction rate of the meter equal to the decrease rate of the actual button acceptance period (that is, the rate at which the meter decreases by 1/6 per second). It is made to recognize.

  In the mode of notification D, the notification period is set to 4 seconds, and a full meter is displayed in a special color at the start of the notification, and then the actual button for the player is gradually reduced while the remaining amount of the meter is gradually reduced. It is set to notify the remaining time of the reception period correctly. Also in this case, the remaining time is informed at the same rate as the decrease rate of the actual button acceptance period (that is, the rate at which the meter decreases by 1⁄4 in 1 second).

  That is, at the start of the notification of the first notification mode, the full meter is displayed in the reference color. Then, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is decreased by 1/6 in 1 second. When the notification period of the first notification manner ends, the mode is switched to the second notification manner. At this time, the meter is returned to full and the color of the meter is changed from the reference color to the special color. After that, the full meter is decreased by 1⁄4 per second. Therefore, the remaining amount of the meter becomes 0 at the end of the reception of the button reception period.

  Since the remaining amount of the meter increases at the time of switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode even by the notification as in the fifth embodiment, it is possible for the player to have a momentary illusion when the remaining time of the button reception period increases. As well as being able to amplify the sense of expectation, there is an effect that it is possible to give surprise and enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, since the decrease rate of the button acceptance period is different between the first notification mode and the second notification mode, even if the notification of the button reception period different from the actual one is performed in one of the first and second notification modes. Since it is possible to adjust the balance in the other notification mode, it is possible to give various notices.

  Furthermore, the change in the color of the meter from the reference color to the special color has the effect of increasing the sense of expectation for the big hit.

In the above-mentioned example, the display of the meter is returned to full at the switching of the notification mode, but the remaining amount of the meter immediately after switching increases more than the remaining amount of the meter just before switching as in the fourth embodiment. If it is, the remaining amount of the meter immediately after switching (in other words, the initial amount of the meter in the second notification mode) is not limited to the full. In the fifth embodiment, it is preferable that, for example, when the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, a notice similar to that of the second embodiment is given.
<Example 6 of Notification Mode of Remaining Time>

  A sixth embodiment will be described next with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168. Also in the sixth embodiment, in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 156, “informing B (first notification mode)” with a success / failure determination result of 15R big hit (special figure B) and fluctuation time of 45000 ms (per super reach A) The case where the notification mode is switched to the "informing D (second notification mode)" halfway will be described as an example. The sixth embodiment is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter increases at the time of switching the notification mode, and further, the operation condition of the chance button 136 for displaying a notice in the first notification period and the second notification period is It is set to be different. The contents of each of the notices A to F are preferable as long as they are set in the same manner as in the fourth embodiment, but the invention is not particularly limited thereto.

  Also, in FIG. 167 and FIG. 168, (a) is the change start time of the special drawing and the decorative symbol, (b) is the start time of the reception of the button reception period, and (c) is the remaining time of the button reception period. This is the time when the notification mode has changed, and (d) is the time when the reception of the button reception period is completed.

Aspects of the notification B of Example 6, with the notification period is set to T _B seconds (e.g. 2 seconds), the full meter by the broadcast start time is displayed in the reference color (e.g. blue), then meter It is set so as to properly inform the player of the remaining amount of the actual button acceptance period while gradually reducing the remaining amount of. Here, by making the decrease rate of the meter equal to the decrease rate of the actual button acceptance period, the player is made to correctly recognize the actual button acceptance period.

Aspects of the notification D, together with the notification period is set to T _D s (e.g. 4 seconds), the full meter by the broadcast start time is displayed in the reference color, then, while gradually decreasing the remaining amount of the meter , It is set to properly inform the player of the remaining time of the actual button acceptance period. Here, the remaining time is reported by equalizing the rate of decrease of the meter with the rate of decrease of the actual remaining time.

First, when the notification of the first notification mode is started, the full meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is decreased by a predetermined amount per one second [1 / (T _B + T _D )]. When the notification period of the first notification manner ends, the mode is switched to the second notification manner. At this time, return the meter to full. Thereafter, the full meter is decreased by a predetermined amount (1 / T _D ) in one second, and the remaining amount of the meter is set to 0 at the end of the reception of the button reception period.

  In the first notification period, the operation condition of the chance button 136 is a single one-time operation. If the chance button 136 is not operated even once during the first notification period, the mode is switched to the second notification mode when the first notification period ends, and the meter is displayed in the reference color during the subsequent second notification period. While displaying, the operation condition of the chance button 136 is switched to continuous hitting (a plurality of consecutive operations). The rate of decrease of the meter is faster than the first notification mode. During the second notification mode, the contents of the effect screen are selected in accordance with the number of times the chance button 136 has been operated and the random value. When the operation of the chance button 136 is received and the effect screen is displayed, then the effect screen is continuously displayed until the end of the button reception period. Then, at the end of the button reception period, the state is returned to the state in which the decorative symbol being changed is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  If the selection of the effect screen during the above second notification period is described in detail, for example, the randomness value is 20 to 49 in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. When the numerical value is 20 to 39, when the chance button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times or more (for example, 10 times or more), an effect screen of "Success!" Is displayed, while the chance button 136 is once or more And if it is operated less than the predetermined number of times, the effect screen of "Sorry ..." is displayed. When the random number is 40 to 49, when the chance button 136 is operated one or more times, an effect screen of "Sorry ..." is displayed.

  If the chance button 136 is not operated even during the second notification period, the display of the meter continues until the end of the button reception period, and the display of the meter disappears when the button reception period ends, and the decorative symbol display device It returns to the state where the decorative design in change is displayed on all the screens of 208.

  The notification as in the sixth embodiment also has the effect of momentarily giving the player an illusion that the button acceptance period has increased. In addition, since the operation condition of the chance button 136 changes with the passage of time, there is an advantage that the range of the game is expanded.

Further, since the operation conditions of the chance button 136 differ depending on the passage of time, the range of the game can be expanded, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
<Example 7 of Notification Mode of Remaining Time>

  Seventh Embodiment A seventh embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. The seventh embodiment is an example in which the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is determined in combination with other notices executed before and after the button reception period.

  In the seventh embodiment, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the contents of the notice executed before and after the button reception period are a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 and a random number value acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. It is decided based on.

  For example, in the case where the success or failure judgment result is a big hit and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is a fluctuation time for super reach A, a decorative symbol is displayed using a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. The outline (basic matter) of the contents of the effect relating to the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on the display device 208 and the notice performed before and after the button reception period is determined. For example, when the random number value 27 is acquired by a predetermined random number lottery in the table, the notice C corresponding to the random number selection range “20 to 49” is selected. The notice C includes information for changing the notification mode of the button acceptance period from the notification B mode as the first notification mode to the notification D mode as the second notification mode. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. The same is true for the other tables.

  Then, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 171 (b) and random number values acquired by predetermined random number lottery. The details of the notice (hereinafter, also referred to as "preceding notice") to be made before the button reception period are determined. For example, when the random number value 22 included in the random number selection range “10 to 54” is acquired in the table, the effect screen in which the balloon of “?” Is attached to the character image of the princess is selected. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range.

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above-mentioned table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 171 (c) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. To determine the detailed content of the first notification mode. For example, when the random number value 73 included in the random number selection range “0 to 89” is acquired in the table, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification B. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is easier to select than the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 171 (d) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. To determine the detailed content of the second notification mode. For example, when the random number value 61 included in the random number selection range “20 to 99” is acquired in the table, an aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the aspect of the notification D. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is easier to select than the aspect in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 171 (e) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. The details of a notice (hereinafter, also referred to as “following notice”) to be given after the button reception period are determined. For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “10 to 99” is acquired in the table, the effect screen to be displayed as “super heat !!” is displayed as the letter display notice at the time of reaching after the button acceptance period. Be done. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the effect screen displayed as “super heat !!” is more easily selected than the effect screen displayed as “reach”.

  More specifically, for example, when the success / failure determination result is a big hit, the variation time of the special figure 1 is the variation time per super reach A, and when the notice C is won in the table shown in FIG. A series of effects as shown in FIG.

In the example shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, the period from t _{2 to} t ₄ is set as the button reception period. In the button reception period, the remaining time of the button reception period is notified as in the first embodiment.

First, prior notice is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a period of t ₁ to t ₂ before the button reception period. Here, the contents of this advance notice are such that an effect screen with a balloon of “?” Attached to the character image of the princess is displayed as a notice with a low sense of expectation to the big hit here. Then, the button acceptance period starts. Here, as notification manner of the remaining time of the button acceptance period it has won notification manner of switching from the first notification manner at the time of t ₃ to the second notification manner. Then, in the first notification mode, the full meter is displayed in blue (reference color) with a low sense of expectation for a big hit at the start of the notification, and the meter is gradually reduced as time passes. In the following second notification mode, the meter is displayed in red (special color) with a high sense of expectation for a big hit, and the meter is gradually reduced as time passes.

  When the button acceptance period is over, the display of the meter disappears, and the decoration pattern becomes reachable, at which time the following notice is displayed. The contents of the subsequent notice are displayed here as "super heat !!" as a notice that the expectation to the big hit is high.

  In the first notification mode, since the meter is displayed in the reference color of blue, the expectation of the big hit is low. On the other hand, in the second notification mode, the meter is displayed in a special color of red, so the sense of expectation of the big hit is high. That is, in this example, the first notification mode is easily set to a notification mode with a low expectation, and the second notification mode is an expectation, in association with the expectation of the big hit by the notice before and after the button acceptance period. It is easy to be set to the high notification mode of.

  When the notification mode in the button acceptance period is associated with the notice before and after the button acceptance period, at least the following five patterns can be considered.

  In the first pattern, the notice before the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low) → during the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low → low) → the notice after the button acceptance period is set to be preview (expected feeling; low) . In the second pattern, the notice before the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low) → during the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low → low) → the notice after the button acceptance period is set to be anticipation (expected feeling; high) . In the third pattern, the notice before the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low) → during the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low → high) → it is set to be the notice after the button acceptance period (expected feeling; high) .

  In the fourth pattern, the notice prior to the button acceptance period (expected feeling; high) → during the button acceptance period (expected feeling; high → high) → the advance notice after the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low) is set . In the fifth pattern, the notice prior to the button acceptance period (expected feeling; high) → during the button acceptance period (expected feeling; low → low) → the advance notice after the button acceptance period (expected feeling; high) is set .

  According to the first pattern, it may be possible to lower the player's expectation for the jackpot and to make the difference between when the player's expectation for the jackpot is high is clearer. In addition, in the case of a big hit with a low expectation, the player's pleasure may be amplified. According to the second and third patterns, it may be possible to gradually increase the player's expectation for the jackpot. According to the fourth pattern, the player's expectation for the jackpot may not be raised too much, and it may be possible to reduce the feeling of regret when it is not the jackpot. According to the fifth pattern, since the player's expectation for the jackpot is lowered once and then raised, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be ups and downs, and the expectation can be finally improved. is there.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 169 and 170 of the seventh embodiment, the notice before and after the button reception period is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208, but for example, the effect movable body 224 or any lamp For example, it may be performed by another rendering device. However, in this case as well, the sense of expectation suggested by the notification mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period is associated with the sense of expectation suggested by the advance notice.
<Example 8 of Informing Form of Remaining Time>

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the premise of Example 8 will be explained. When the result of the judgment is 15R special big hit (probable big hit), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops displaying the decorative symbol in the symbol combination showing 15R big hit (usually big hit). After doing, there may be a re-lottery effect of changing to a symbol combination of a decorative symbol showing a special jackpot of 15R (However, internally it is determined whether it is a definite change or a non-determination, so a re-selection is actually made. I'm not going). At this time, the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the decorative symbol is divided into three periods, for example, (1) before the start of reach from reach of change, (2) in reach, (3) in re-lottery. It is possible to set to give separate notices in each of these three periods. Further, with regard to the re-lottery, as shown in FIG. 154, the variation time is set longer per 5000 ms between the hit and the exit of each reach. This is because the fluctuation time of the hit includes the time to perform the re-lottery regardless of the positive or negative change.

  In the eighth embodiment, in the case of notifying the remaining time of the button reception period in any two or more of the respective periods (1) to (3) described above, the notification mode or the notification mode in each of the periods (1) to (3) At least two or more expectations given to the player by the advance notice should be related. Further, in the eighth embodiment, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the contents of the notice executed before and after the button reception period are a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. And based on

  For example, if the success / failure determination result is a big hit and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is the fluctuation time per super reach A (for example, 45000 ms), a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. The outline (basic matter) of the contents of the effect relating to the notification mode of the remaining time of the button acceptance period displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the notice performed before and after the button acceptance period is determined. For example, when the random number value 27 is acquired by a predetermined random number lottery in the table, the notice C corresponding to the random number selection range “20 to 49” is selected. Information for changing the notification mode of the button reception period to the mode of notification b as the first notification mode before reaching the period (1), to the notification b mode as the second notification mode in notice C, period Information to be changed from the mode of the notification c as the first notification mode to the mode of the notification d as the second notification mode during the reach of (2), as a first notification mode during the re-lottery of the period (3) The information to be changed from the mode of the notification e to the mode of the notification f as the second notification mode is included. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Also, although not shown in the figure, a table corresponding to each case such as a table in the case where the success / failure determination result is a big hit and the variation time of Special Figure 1 is variation time for Super Reach B separately Is stored in

  Then, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 175 (b) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. And determine the detailed content of the first notification mode before reaching in period (1). For example, when the random number value 22 included in the random number selection range “0 to 49” is acquired in the table, an aspect in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the aspect of the notification a. In the above table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, in the table, the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected and the probability in which the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected are the same.

  Then, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above-mentioned table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 175 (c) and random number values acquired by predetermined random number lottery. And determine the detailed content of the second notification mode before reaching in period (1). For example, when random number value 13 included in the random number selection range “10 to 39” is acquired in the table, the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) as a mode of notification b and the meter is increased by a predetermined amount It is selected. As the mode of the notification b, the mode of “incrementing the meter by a predetermined amount” is set to have a slightly higher expectation given to the player than the mode of “no increase in meter”. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is easier to select than the aspect in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Then, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 175 (d) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. And determine the detailed content of the first notification mode during the reach of period (2). For example, when the random number value 61 included in the random number selection range “0 to 89” is acquired in the table, an aspect in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the aspect of the notification c. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is easier to select than the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color).

  Then, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 175 (e) and random number values acquired by a predetermined random number lottery. And determine the detailed content of the second notification mode during the reach of period (2). For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “30 to 99” is acquired in the table, an aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as an aspect of the notification d. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is easier to select than the aspect in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Then, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above-mentioned table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. To determine the detailed contents of the first notification mode during the re-lottery of period (3). For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “20 to 99” is acquired in the table, an aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the aspect of the notification e. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is easier to select than the aspect in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Then, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range of the above table, for example, based on the table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 175 (g) and random number values acquired by predetermined random number lottery. And determine the detailed contents of the second notification mode during the re-lottery of period (3). For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “0 to 49” is acquired in the above table, an aspect in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the aspect of the notification f. On the other hand, for example, when the random value 70 included in the random number selection range “50 to 99” is acquired in the table, an aspect in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the aspect of the notification f. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, in the table, the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected and the probability in which the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected are the same.

  More specifically, for example, when the success / failure determination result is a big hit, the variation time of the special figure 1 is the variation time per super reach A, and when the notice C is won in the table shown in FIG. A series of effects as shown in 172 and FIG. 173 are performed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 172 and Fig. 173, the period before 0 to t ₃ seconds reach _(1), t 3 ~t ₇ seconds duration in reach _{(2), t} 7 _{~t 11} seconds redrawing period of (3), t ₁₁ seconds later is set to the period in the jackpot round. And while a button reception period is alerted | reported by all the periods, the feeling of expectation which each is suggested is mutually linked | related and is set. Basically, one game is from the start of the change to the stop of the change and the symbol is determined, but if it is a big hit symbol, one game is taken until the big hit round is over.

  First, during the first button acceptance period before the decorative symbol stops, the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) in the first notification mode, and the color of the meter continues to be blue in the subsequent second notification mode (reference color ) And the remaining amount of meter is increasing. That is, although the expectation level is raised from low to slightly low, the expectation to the jackpot given to the player is still low. If the chance button 136 is operated during this button reception period, for example, a notice of “...” Shown in FIG. 160 is displayed.

In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period of t _{0 to} t ₁ second and when the chance button 136 is operated during the second notification period of t _{1 to} t ₂ seconds The contents of the notice may be different as described in the second embodiment. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period of t _{0 to} t ₁ seconds, “...” Is displayed, and the chance is generated during the second notification period of t _{1 to} t ₂ seconds. When the button 136 is operated, “super heat !!” may be displayed.

In the second button acceptance period in reach, and changes from the first notification manner when t ₅ seconds have elapsed into the second notification manner, the color of the meter changes from blue to red (special color) The expectation to the jackpot shifts from a somewhat low state to a high state. And if the result of the judgment is 15R special big hit (probable variation big hit) or 15R big hit (usually big hit), a combination of a big hit decorative pattern predetermined at t ₇ seconds (for example, “decor 2-decoration 2) stop at the combination of 2) and 2) otherwise stop at the combination of the decorative patterns for the predetermined release (for example, the combination of "decoration 2-decoration 1-decoration 2"). If the result of the determination is the 15R special big hit or the 15R big hit, a re-lottery is performed, and the third button acceptance period starts.

  During the second button reception period, as in the first embodiment, for example, the content of the notice performed when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period and the chance button during the second notification period The content of the notice to be given when 136 is operated may be set to be the same. Alternatively, as in the second embodiment, different contents may be set. In addition, the 15R special jackpot and the 15R jackpot are the result of judgment whether the amount of profit given to the player becomes a relatively large amount of profit.

In the third button reception period, when t ₉ seconds elapse, the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, when the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue is selected as the second notification mode in the table shown in FIG. 175 (g), the display shown in the right side of FIG. 173 (k) is performed. When the mode is displayed in red, the display shown on the left side of FIG. 173 (k) is performed.

  Thereafter, even if any of the modes is selected, if the chance button 136 is not operated during the button reception period, the effect image shown in (l) of FIG. 172 is displayed, and then the 15R special jackpot is won. In the case where the decoration pattern is a 15R special jackpot (eg, a combination of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7"), or a combination of a predetermined pattern showing 15R jackpot (for example, "decoration 2 -Stop at the combination of "decoration 2-decoration 2". On the other hand, if the 15R big hit has been won, it stops at a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") in which the decorative symbol indicates the 15R big hit. Even if the 15R special jackpot has been won, at this point the decorative symbol may not stop in the symbol combination indicating the 15R special jackpot, but may stop in the symbol combination indicating the 15R jackpot. In that case, a special change promotion game rushes into a certain change state of special figure high probability spread high certain as it is after the big hit round without doing definite change promotion production during the big hit round or at the end or without giving definite change promotion effect It is set to

In the redrawing period (3), when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period of t _{8 to} t ₉ seconds, redrawing operation is performed from the time point when the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Until the end of period (3), any combination of decorative symbols (for example, a combination of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" or the like showing 15R special jackpot if 15R special jackpot has been won, or When the 15R jackpot has been won, an effect of stopping and displaying a combination of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” or the like indicating the 15R jackpot is performed (see the left side of FIG. 174 (k)). On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is not operated, as described above, when t ₉ seconds have elapsed, the button reception period is switched from the first to the second notification mode and notified (FIG. 174 (FIG. k) center or right)).

When the chance button 136 is not operated during the first notification period and the chance button 136 is operated during the second notification period of t _{9 to} t ₁₀ seconds, the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted Until the period (3) during the re-lottery is over, any combination of decorative symbols (for example, if you have won 15R special jackpot, you will receive 15R special jackpot "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" etc. When the combination or the 15R big hit is won, the stop display is performed with "combination of decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" or the like indicating 15R big hit.

  Since the time for re-lottery is fixed to 5000 ms as described above, the time when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in any combination is appropriately adjusted according to the timing of the operation of the chance button 136.

  As described above, in the case of notifying a plurality of remaining times in one game, it is possible to variously change the sense of expectation for the jackpot given to the player. In particular, the expectation given to the player can be adjusted in detail by appropriately setting the notification mode of each period or the expectation by the advance notice in association with each other.

  That is, for example, in the case where the announcement is all low expectation for the player, the expectation for the player's big hit (especially the 15R special big hit) is lowered, and the distinction from the high expectation is clarified. There are times when you can. In addition, in the case of a big hit (in particular, a 15R special big hit) in a state of low expectation, the player's pleasure may be amplified more often.

In addition, when the player changes from a low expectation to a high notice, it may be possible to gradually increase the player's expectation for the jackpot (especially the 15R special jackpot). In addition, when the player changes from a high-predictive notice to a low-predictive notice, the player's expectation for the big hit may not be raised too much, and it may be possible to reduce the sense of regret when it is not a big hit. . In addition, in the case where it is a notice with high expectation for all the players, it may be possible to further improve the expectation for the player's big hit (especially the 15R special big hit).
<Others>

  The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that various changes can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention.

  For example, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period may be a notification mode as shown in FIG. In this example (Example 9), first, the full meter is displayed in only the reference color (for example, blue). Go.

  When one second has elapsed from the start of notification, a partial area of the meter is changed to a special color (for example, red). The special area changed to the special color is also moved in position as the meter decreases with the passage of time.

  The player presses the chance button 136 at the timing when the base end of the meter (here, the left end) is the reference color [the timing of (b), (c), (d) and (f) in FIG. In the case where it is determined, a notice of low expectation (for example, a notice “... Shown in FIG. 158) is displayed. On the other hand, when the player presses the chance button 136 at the timing when the base end of the meter is in the special color [timing ((e) in FIG. 176)], the notice with high expectation (for example, FIG. The notice "It's hot!" Is displayed. As described above, there are cases where it is possible to widen the game by setting the notification mode such that if the chance button 136 is not pressed in a timely manner, a notice with high expectation can not be seen.

  In addition, the first aspect which displays a meter only by reference color is called 1st alerting | reporting aspect, and the aspect which displays the meter which has a special area | region of a special color is called 2nd alerting | reporting aspect.

  In this example, as shown in (c-1) or (c-2) of FIG. 176, the size of the special area changed to the special color can be set arbitrarily. Furthermore, as shown in (c-3) of FIG. 176, the position of the special area at the time of changing to the special color can be reset to an arbitrary position. Thus, the timing at which the player presses the chance button 136 can be changed.

  Moreover, it is possible to comprise combining the Examples 1-9 of the alerting | reporting aspect of the above-mentioned remaining time suitably. Further, for example, in Examples 1 to 9 of the notification mode of the above-mentioned remaining time, the height of the sense of expectation for the big hit given to the player is changed by changing the color of the meter, but the meter blinks or does not blink By changing and displaying the blinking manner as described above, the level of expectation to the big hit may be changed. Further, for example, in Examples 1 to 9 of the notification mode of the remaining time described above, the notification is configured to be performed by receiving the operation of the chance button 136, but the operation of the operating means other than the chance button 136 is received. A notice may be given by In addition, as a notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period, a mode may be provided in which the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode, and further to the third notification mode. That is, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period includes at least a pattern in which the notification mode does not change according to the passage of time and a pattern in which the notification mode is switched in two steps of the first and second notification modes. What is necessary is not to exclude the configuration further including a pattern in which the notification mode is switched in three or more steps.

  In addition, although the embodiments 1 to 9 of the notification mode of the remaining time described above explain that the meter is reduced by a predetermined amount per second, it may be reduced by a predetermined amount per unit time, and the unit time is It is not limited to one second. Furthermore, in Examples 1 to 9 of the notification mode of the above-mentioned remaining time, the remaining time of the button acceptance period is expressed by the form of a rectangular meter, for example, a form in which a hand of a clock advances or a form in which sand in an hourglass falls Of course, it may be expressed in other forms.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 177, the gaming machine according to the present invention “a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of symbols and are rotationally driven, and a start lever 1004 for instructing rotation of the reels, respectively. A stop button 1006 for stopping the rotation of the reel individually, and lottery means (winning combination internal lottery) for judging whether or not internal winnings of a plurality of types of winnings are made by lottery, and lottery means Reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control regarding stop of the rotation of the reel based on the lottery result of and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is internally elected Judgment means (prize judgment processing) for judging whether or not it is a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, and the stop mode of the symbol is a predetermined prize mode, it is predetermined In addition to the payout control means (the medal payout process 1008) for performing the game medium payout process for paying out the game medium corresponding to the prize mode, the effect means 1010 for executing the effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A detection means for detecting a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, a launcher 1014 that launches a ball in a predetermined game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be capable of entering a sphere fired from the launching device Move to a position where means 1018, a payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a position for shielding variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 operating in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device is triggered by the game ball entering the winning opening and winning 022 is is stopped and displayed after varying the design, it is also suitable in which the slot machine 1000 "a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

That is, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs at least a judgment of success or failure (for example, the main control unit 300) which makes a judgment of success or failure when a predetermined condition of judgment of acceptance is satisfied, In the case of a determination result (for example, a big hit), the second advantage is a first advantage that is an advantage over the player from a first control state to an advantage higher than the first advantage. Control state transition means (for example, the main control unit 300) for shifting the control state to the second control state, operation means (for example, the chance button 136) which can be operated by the player, and the result of the judgment The notification means (for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for performing effects including a notice, the notification means is effective for the player to receive the operation of the operation means Remaining time notifying means (for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for notifying the remaining time of the reception period in a predetermined notification mode for the additional period, and the operation by the player during the reception period And a specific notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for giving a predetermined notice for suggesting the result of the judgment of acceptance when the operation of the means is received. The notification mode has a first notification mode and a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and the remaining time notification means determines that the remaining time has elapsed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Until the length is reduced, the remaining time is notified by the first notification mode, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, the notification shown in FIG. 156). Aspect determination table If the "notification F" is won, the first notification mode is continued to notify the remaining time, while if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 156) When the notification A → E or the notification B → D or the notification C ₁ → C ₂ is won, the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode to notify the remaining time If it is

  Further, in the above-mentioned game stand, the first notification mode and the second notification mode are set according to the result of the judgment of acceptance or rejection, and function as a notice similarly to the notice given by the specific notice means. Is preferred.

  Further, in the above-mentioned game stand, the remaining time notifying means may set the predetermined time to be notified by each of the first notification mode and the second notification mode according to the result of the determination of the pass / fail. For example, when the determination is made based on the notification mode determination table) and the result of the success / failure determination is the specific success / failure determination result, the remaining time to be notified by each of the first notification mode and the second notification mode It is preferable to determine based on a specific table (for example, a jackpot table of the notification mode determination table) of the predetermined table.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the operation means can receive at least one of a single one-time operation and a plurality of continuous operations by the player, and the specific notice means is the predetermined The notice is given on condition of the reception of the one-time operation until the time of lapse of time passes, and after the lapse of the predetermined time, the notice is notified on condition of reception of the plurality of continuous actions. It is preferred to do.

  In the above-mentioned game stand, the remaining time notification means makes the remaining time to be notified by at least one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode different from the actual remaining time. Is preferred.

  At this time, the remaining time notifying unit sets the predetermined length as a first length, and the predetermined time is decreased when the remaining time to be notified by the first notification mode is reduced to the first length. If the condition is satisfied, the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode, and further, the remaining time to be notified by the second notification mode is longer than the first length. It is preferable to increase the size.

  Further, the remaining time notification means indicates the remaining time by representing the remaining amount of the meter, and the meter reports the decreasing speed of the meter notified by the second notification mode by the first notification mode. It is preferable to make it faster than the decrease rate of

  In the present invention, the big hit in the present invention, the next special figure variation game is special figure high probability figure high definite [for example 15R special big hit (see special figure A in Figure 149 (a)), 2R big hit (suddenly definite variation; Figure 149 (See special drawing C of (a))], special view high probability drawing low certainty [eg 2R big hit (hidden certainty change; see special drawing E in FIG. 149 (a))] special figure low certainty general definition high certainty [eg 149R big hit (see special figure B in Fig. 149 (a)), 2R big hit (see short in Fig. 149 (a) special figure D in Fig. 149 (a)), and special figure low probability figure low certainty [eg 149 (see special drawing F in FIG. 149 (a))].

In addition, in the case of the present invention, the next special pattern variation game is a special figure low probability figure low certainty that does not apply to the above [for example, small hit (see special figure G, H in Figure 149 (a)) Point (refer to the special drawing I, J in FIG. 149 (a))].
Sixth Embodiment

Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 178 to 244 are basically used only in the description of the sixth embodiment, and even in the case where overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, in the description of the present embodiment The codes shown in FIGS. 178 to 244 have priority.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launch device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member provided inside the outer frame 102 and having a locking function and serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside. A clerk of a store (game arcade) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor 1041 is provided for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a locking function, and is configured in a frame shape to be inside Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the game arcade can open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 is also provided to detect that the front frame door 106 is opened. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the description herein, a light source that is an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be capable of opening and closing with a locking function. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pushing an open lever 1081 which can be operated in a state where the front frame door 106 is opened. In addition, a ball storage tray equipped door sensor 1082 is also provided which detects that the ball storage tray equipped door 108 is opened. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 into the game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box) by the operation, and the game balls guided to the launch device 110 by the operation of the player by the game board The ball emission handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of the game, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 180) by the operation of the player, and the effect button 136 Rewarding the balance of the player's balance to the card unit, and the sphere lending operation button 140 for instructing to lend the sphere to the card unit (CR unit) installed in the game arcade. A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball lending display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a lower-plate full-tan detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full by the game balls. Furthermore, the cross key 141 is also provided.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And. While the ball firing handle 134 is continuously fired by the player, the launch device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every lapse of a predetermined launch period (for example, 0.6 seconds). I aim it and shoot it.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104. In FIG. 178, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 179 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 178 as viewed from the rear side. At the top of the back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, and a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing gaming balls, and below the ball tank 150, at the bottom of the ball tank 150 A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The dispensing device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a kind of ball feeding device for giving a driving force to the gaming ball and transporting the gaming ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is not passed, the game ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game ball having passed this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant Based on the establishment of the condition, the game value (game ball) of an amount according to the provision condition is awarded (payout) to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control section 300 (see FIG. 181) that performs control processing of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 A first sub substrate case 162 for housing the first sub substrate 160 constituting the first sub control unit 400 (see FIG. 181) which performs control processing relating to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub control unit 400 Second sub substrate case 166 for storing the second sub substrate 164 that constitutes the second sub control unit 500 (see FIG. 181) that performs control processing relating to the effect, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing relating to the payout of gaming balls A payout substrate case 172 for housing a payout substrate 170 which is provided with an error release switch 168 which configures an error (see FIG. 181) and releases an error by the operation of a game clerk; A launch board case 176 for housing a launch substrate 174 constituting a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 181) which performs control processing relating to the launch of a ball, and a power management section 660 (see FIG. 181) which supplies power to various electric gaming machines. The power supply housing 182 includes a power supply substrate 182 including a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by operation of a game clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 by being operated at power on. A substrate case 184 and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are provided.

  FIG. 180 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 180, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol display device 212, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a high probability middle lamp 222 Are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be called "a common figure" below, and a special symbol may be called a "special figure."

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is an image display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the pachinko machine 100, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, as will be described later, the fourth symbol of the common drawing and the fourth symbol of the special drawing are displayed at the left corner of the effect display area 208d. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the pachinko machine 100, it is configured by a 7-segment LED. The special view display device 212 is a display device for displaying a special view, and in the pachinko machine 100, it is configured by a 7-segment LED. The common view display device 210 and the special view display device 212 correspond to an example of notification means.

  In addition, the display area (here, the size of 7 segments is equivalent) of the common drawing display device 210 and the special drawing display device 212 (notification means) and the display region (here display) of the decorative symbol display device 208 (pattern display means The display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is larger than the screen size. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 100, while the common-diagram display device 210 and the special-image display device 212 can not display moving pictures, the decorative symbol display device 208 can display moving pictures.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (generally called common drawing fluctuation games to be described later) being held, and the pachinko machine 100 has a predetermined number of common drawing fluctuation games. It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

  The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for giving a notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability-in-progress lamp 222 provides notification of the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter is configured not to indicate the current symbol control state There is. Also, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state is restored immediately before the power is shut off.

  Also, around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, two common drawing starting gates 251, 253, a common drawing electric combination 252, a special drawing starting opening 230, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided. doing.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 178, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects entry of the general winning openings 226 (general) When a prize is won in the winning opening 226), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 179 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as a winning ball onto the upper tray 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the pachinko machine 100, the ball to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize ball" and the ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as "rental ball". And call it "ball (game ball)". Among the plurality of general winning openings 226 disposed, only one general winning opening 226 is disposed below the common view starting gate 251. That is, the general winning opening 226 is disposed between the common drawing start gate 251 and the variable winning opening 234 provided at the lower center of the game board. Hereinafter, when the general winning opening 226 is distinguished from other general winning openings 226, it is referred to as a central general winning opening 226. Further, when the common drawing start gate 251 provided at the lower center of the game board is distinguished from the other common drawing start gate 253, it is referred to as a central common drawing start gate 251. Unlike the ball entering the general winning opening 226, the ball passing through the central drawing start gate 251 is not discharged to the gaming island side, and the ball can win the central general winning opening 226. It is. However, even if the game ball passes through the central drawing start gate 251, the winning balls are not paid out. The central spread start gate 251 corresponds to an example of a first entry area, and the central general winning opening 226 below it corresponds to an example of a second entry area.

  Here, the game nature of the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 180 will be briefly described. The pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine that does not make a game ball enter the variable winning opening 234 and earns a ball, but makes a game ball enter a common-use electric symbol 252 and earns a game ball. In the normal state (the special figure low probability normal view low probability state described later), first, aiming at the central common view start gate 251 provided at the lower center of the game board, when the gaming ball enters the central common view start gate 251 , And the generic drawing display device 210 starts variable display. In addition to the variable display of the common view display device 210, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative figure of the common view is performed. That is, the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the common-diagram display device 210 in a form in which the effect is enhanced.

  When the hit is determined by the hit / fail determination of the common drawing, the common drawing display device 210 displays the stop symbol (see FIG. 182 (c)) of the predetermined symbol form corresponding to the hit and the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the stop display of the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the hit. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen instructing to perform a right-handed hit, and the general-purpose electric symbol 252 disposed in the right area of the game area 124 opens for a predetermined time (for example, 5.8 seconds) Do. That is, the general-purpose electric symbol 252 includes a movable member (here, the door member 2521) which can be opened and closed. When the door member 2521 is opened, winning of the special-figure start opening 230 is possible. The door member 2521 is a member for changing the degree of difficulty of winning to the special figure starting port 230. If the door member 2521 is closed, it is impossible to enter the special view starting opening 230, and the closed state in which the door member 2521 is closed is an opening / closing state in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, the state where the door member 2521 is open is an open / close state where winning is easy. Therefore, the special figure starting port 230 has either the small size (corresponding to the first size) or the large size (corresponding to the second size) of the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable, which changes from the size of one to the other. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the common view starting gate 251, 253. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the common view starting gate 251, 253 or less than the size of the entrance of those (251, 253). It should be noted that the closed state of the door member 2521 of the ordinary game electric symbol 252 does not necessarily have to be completely closed, and it may be a state in which the game ball can not enter or is difficult even if it is slightly open. . The closed state of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 corresponds to an example of the first state, and the open state corresponds to an example of the second state. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the special figure start opening 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, seven) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In addition, it can be said that the common drawing electric symbol 252 shown in FIG. 180 is a variable start means and is an electric tulip (electric chew) of an attacker type.

  When the game ball enters the ordinary drawing electric symbol 252 in a state in which the door member 2521 is opened, the special drawing start opening 230 is surely entered. Even if a plurality of gaming balls enter the special drawing start opening 230 by opening the door member 251 once, the determination of the special drawing (lottery) is performed only for the one ball that first enters the ball. That is, in this pachinko machine 100, there is no reservation memory of a special figure. Therefore, the game board 200 is not provided with the special view holding lamp. In addition, a prize lamp 254 is provided in the vicinity (in this example, on the right side) of the common drawing motorized prize 252. The prize lamp 254 emits light (flashes) when there is a prize to the special drawing start port 230. Also, when the door member 2521 is closed, it emits light (flashes). The winning lamp 254 corresponds to an example of a light emitting unit.

  Although the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is opened for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds), a predetermined number of balls (here, 10 balls) enter the general-purpose electric symbol 252 during the predetermined time. In this case, when the predetermined number of balls enter, the door member 2521 is closed without waiting for the predetermined time to elapse. When the game ball enters the ordinary drawing motorized role item 252, the special drawing is subjected to a yes / no determination (lottery), and the special drawing display device 212 starts variable display. Further, in conjunction with the variable display of the special view display device 212, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs effect display. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, the one-time opening of the general-purpose motorized symbol 252 is aimed at acquiring the right of the determination of the one-time special drawing and the increase of the winning balls by the winning of one or more balls. It is a thing.

  If the special figure display device 212 displays the stop symbol of the predetermined symbol form corresponding to the big hit when the big figure is won in the success / failure determination of the special drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 also produces the effect corresponding to the big hit The variable start port 234 is opened for a very short time (for example, 0.1 second) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times or 2 times). Only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200 shown in FIG. The variable winning opening 234 includes a winning opening and a door member 2341 which can open and close the winning opening by a solenoid. The winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The variable winning opening 234 maintains a closed state until a big hit game to be described later is started, and repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state when the big hit game is started. That is, variable winning opening 234 has a predetermined first open / close state (here, closed state) and a second open / close state (here, open state) in which game balls are easier to win than the first open / closed state. It is a variable winning means capable of changing the open / close state from one to the other. Note that the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 does not necessarily have to be completely closed either, and it may be a state in which entering of the gaming ball is impossible or difficult even if it is slightly open. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. However, in the pachinko machine 100 as described above, since the open state at the variable winning opening 234 is a very short time (for example, 0.1 second), payment by entering the variable winning opening 234 can hardly be expected. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  In the normal state (special figure low probability spread figure low probability state), when it is decided that the big hit is made by the judgment of the special figure, it shifts to the electric support state (also called short time state, spread figure high probability state). In the power support state, first, the common view starting gate 253 disposed in the right area of the game area 124 is aimed. Directly below the common view start gate 253, a common view electric symbol 252 is provided. The right side common drawing start gate 253 also corresponds to an example of the first entry area, and the special drawing start opening 230 where the game ball can enter when the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric symbol 252 directly below is opened is also the first It corresponds to an example of the entry area of 2.

  Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the general drawing start gate 253 is not discharged to the gaming island side, and the winning balls are not paid out. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the common drawing start gate 253 on the right side, a judgment of the common drawing is made, and the common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210 is started.

  If the pachinko machine 100 is in the power support state, it is easy to hit by the pass / fail judgment of the common drawing. If the hit determination in the common drawing is made, the door member 2521 of the common drawing motorized symbol 252 is opened again, and if the gaming ball enters the common drawing motorized symbol 252, the success or failure determination in the special drawing is performed. In the pachinko machine 100, in the probability variation state (special figure high probability state) and the non probability variation state (special figure low probability state), although the probability of winning a big hit by the judgment of the special figure changes, the big hit with high probability in any state It is configured to win the The variable winning opening 234 is not opened if the jackpot is not won in the judgment of the special drawing (if it is lost). However, since it is in the power support state, if the gaming ball passes the common drawing start gate 253 on the right side, the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric character 252 is opened with considerable probability. In this way, during the power support state, it is easy to win the jackpot of the special figure several times. In the pachinko machine 100, the duration of the power support state corresponds to the special game state, and a bonus game is produced.

  Generally, it is referred to as winning a jackpot of a special figure repeatedly while the number of balls is not reduced. Therefore, it is sometimes referred to as winning a jackpot of a special figure repeatedly while being in a definite change state even in a non-electric support state, as a continuous block. However, in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 180, there is only one special view start opening, and the special view start opening 230 does not win unless the door member 2521 of the common view electric symbol 252 is opened. Therefore, it is referred to herein as repeatedly opening the door member 2521 of the common-use electric symbol 252 while being in the power support state and repeatedly winning the jackpot with the power support. For example, during the power-sap state, the continuous-scissors is also established when the jackpot with the power-sap with special drawing is won with one or a plurality of cancellations of the special drawing. The jackpot of the special figure is prepared with the jackpot with a definite change and the big hit without a definite turn. Although it is easy to win with a definite change with a big change and a non definite change with a big change, it is the number of times that you can get a big change with a definite change from the electric support state to the non electric support state. There is a limit. Hereinafter, the limitation of the probability variation is referred to as a limiter, and the above number is referred to as a specified number. Here, the prescribed number is 11 times. When the specified number of times is reached, the power supply state is shifted to the non-power support state, and the non-probability state is shifted. That is, it becomes a special figure low probability common figure low probability state which is a normal state. On the other hand, if the special figure wins the non-probable variation big hit before reaching the specified number of times, the limiter is reset and the number of times the big variation with probability variation is won becomes zero.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the configuration described above, the time until the success / failure determination result of the common drawing is derived, that is, a plurality of types of time is prepared as the fluctuation time of the common drawing display device 210. A plurality of types of time are also prepared for the time until derivation, that is, the variation time of the special view display device 212. In the power support state, the fluctuation time of the spread diagram is short, and when the game ball passes the spread diagram starting gate 253 on the right side, the success / failure determination result is notified immediately. When the special figure is a big hit, the variation time of the special figure is less than one opening period (here, 5.8 seconds) of the door member 2521 in the common drawing electric symbol 252, but one opening period It may be longer with a predetermined probability than that.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 180, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction conversion members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are disposed in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening. At the lowermost portion, an out port 240 for discharging to the side of the gaming island after guiding a ball which did not win any of the winning opening and the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 is provided.

The ball contained in the upper tray 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven at a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148 to the game area 124 Launch. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening Whether a prize is made for (general drawing start gates 251, 253, special figure starting port 230) or the winning opening and the starting port are reached without reaching any out winning opening and starting opening.
<Rendering device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the rendering device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the gaming ball. In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  In the stage 244, the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b and the ball run up by the game nail 238 etc can be rolled, etc. A special route 244a that makes it easy to do so is provided.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

The decorative lamp such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180, and the shielding device 246 correspond to rendering means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the symbol display means .
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of this pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is. In the pachinko machine 100, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 are each formed of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be formed by one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be one. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as predetermined control means, and one of the three control units (300, 400, 500) is combined. One can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one that combines the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number generation circuit 318 (two random number generation circuits are incorporated in this circuit) that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. ), And the lower plate 128 detects that the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 179 has become full by the game ball. It receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a full tank detection sensor, ball start sensor provided inside each start opening, entrance of winning opening and variable winning opening, and results of comparison of amplification results and reference voltage are disturbed A sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the numerical value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special view display device 212, and a common view display device 2 A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of 0, a drive circuit 330 for performing display control of various state display units 328 (for example, the common view holding lamp 216, the high probability middle lamp 222, etc.), Drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the door member 2521 of the object 252 and the door member 2341 etc. of the variable winning opening 234, and the drive circuit 335 for performing light emission control of the prize lamp 254 ing. The light emission control of the winning lamp 254 may be performed by the first auxiliary control unit 400 side.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value to be used in the basic circuit 302. The generation of random numbers in the random number generation circuit 318 can be roughly classified into two types, a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value to be counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a random number seed to perform an operation with a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derives this operation result as a random number. In the second method, numerical values are read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical values are derived as random numbers. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on signals input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random number generation circuit 318 uses the thus obtained value as the initial value of the counter to count up (down) in the counter mode, as the seed of the random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. .

  When the ball detection sensor of the various sensors 320 detects that the ball has won the special figure start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball is detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Output. The random number generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the special view start port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random number generation circuit 318. It stores in the random number storage register corresponding to the starting opening 230. In addition, the random number generation circuit 318 similarly receives a signal indicating that the ball has won in the common drawing start gates 251 and 253 (these two common drawing start gates are collectively referred to as a common drawing start area). , The value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the common drawing start area is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random number storage register corresponding to the common drawing start area, which is embedded in the random number generation circuit 318 Do.

  In addition, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a sensor for detecting a ball winning in a predetermined winning opening or starting opening such as the general winning opening 226, the special view starting opening 230, the variable winning opening 234 or , And a sensor for detecting a ball passing through the common gate starting gate 251, 253.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. Game information (for example, information indicating a control state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. This voltage monitoring circuit 338 Is lower than a predetermined value (here, 9 v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the game control means.

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  In addition, the basic circuit 402 detects the depression of the sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), the drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418, and the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 179. The effect button detection sensor 426 is connected to a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from various sensors to the basic circuit 402.

Furthermore, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.
<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power management unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

The power management unit 660 converts an AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500 with a predetermined voltage. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the emission control unit 630 receive supply of a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. Further, the power management unit 660 is a storage circuit (e.g., for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the pachinko machine 100, the power supply management unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and from the payout control unit 600 the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the firing control unit. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.
<Type of symbol>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 182 (a), the types of special views that the special view display device 212 of the pachinko machine 100 stops and displays will be described.

  FIG. 182 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form (second symbol form) of the special view. The door member 2521 of the general-purpose motorized prize 252 is opened, and the special figure fluctuation game is started on condition that the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure start opening 230. When the special figure variation game is started, the special figure display device 212 repeats the "full figure of seven segments" and the lighting of one central segment "special figure variation display" (special figure variation game) Do. Then, when the fluctuation time (first fluctuation time) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special drawing elapses, the special drawing display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special drawing. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “variation display of the special drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of the special drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation stop display of the special drawing. The variable stop display of this special view may be performed several times continuously.

  In FIG. 182 (a), 22 types of special drawings of “special drawing A” to “special drawing W” are shown as stop symbol modes in symbol fluctuation stop display. In FIG. 182 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  In the pachinko machine 100, 20 types of big hit symbols ("special drawing A" to "special drawing T") are prepared as the stop symbol form of the special drawing. Each jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol of a predetermined round (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds).

  The term "round" as used herein means the number of chances of acquiring a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls). In the pachinko machine 100, it represents the number of times of operation of the variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 180, and 15 rounds means one or more opening and closing operations of the variable winning opening 234 one time (one operation), This means that this operation lasts 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / closed state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, this specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round is among the entry of game balls of a predetermined round end condition (for example, a predetermined number of balls (10 balls as an example), acquisition of a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls), and lapse of predetermined time from the start of the round End when one or more of During the predetermined round will be in the jackpot game.

  FIG. 182 (b) is a table summarizing the characteristics of the special view shown in FIG. 182 (a). If the special drawing hits the big game in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal drawing low probability), that is, in the non-power support state, the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric actor 252 repeatedly opens and closes. The probability of being performed is extremely low, and it is indicated in FIG. 182 (b) that it is at the time of releasing the general drawing motor combination (initial). This means one opening of the door member 2521 of the common drawing motor-operated accessory 252 for which the determination on the special drawing is to be made. At the time (initial stage) of releasing the ordinary drawing electric part, the special drawing A to the special drawing P become a big hit with a definite change. If it is a definite change, it will shift to a state in which the probability of winning a big hit is high in the next special figure fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In the pachinko machine 100, during the big hit game, it moves to the special figure low probability state, when it wins to the definite change with the big hit, it moves to the special figure high probability state after the big hit game end. On the other hand, the special figure Q to the special figure T become the jackpot without probability variation.

  In addition, at the time (initial stage) of releasing the ordinary drawing electric part, when the special figure is a big hit, time saving is given. That is, the special figure A to the special figure P become a big hit with time reduction until the next big hit, and the special figure Q to the special figure T is given time reduction while the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special figure is performed 100 times. Even after any big hit game from the special figure A to the special figure T, it shifts to a state with electric power support (power support) (hereinafter referred to as power support state). The power-supply state is one of the control states prepared for the pachinko machine 100, and may be referred to as a time-saving state. The electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition of the end of the big hit game. Strictly speaking, the "power support state" is a state of a general view, and the "time-short state" is a state of a special view or a general view and a special view. The time saving flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state and in the general drawing high probability state. In addition, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-power support state is maintained. It is easier to win the popular map fluctuating game in the popular drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state (general drawing positive change). For example, the winning probability of the common drawing fluctuation game is 1/60 in the common drawing low probability state (non-power support state), but rises to 1 / 1.0003 in the common drawing high probability state (power support state) Do. In addition, in the power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-power support state (general drawing change short). For example, in the non-power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 1.5 seconds in the power support state. The probability of entering the special figure starting opening 230 is increased due to the definite drawing definite variation or the common drawing variation. In the pachinko machine 100, in the power support state (short time state), the expansion and contraction changes and the expansion and contraction are performed, but the electric thaw open period may be extended or the number of electric thw open may be increased. From the above, in the non power saving state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the special view starting opening 230 than in the power saving state. That is, in the non-electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 tends to be closed, and the rate of entry of the gaming ball into the special drawing start port 230 is low. On the other hand, in the power-on state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is easily opened, and the entry rate of the game ball into the special-figure start opening 230 is enhanced. Therefore, the non-power support state corresponds to an example of the non-specific state (corresponding to the normal gaming state), and the power support state corresponds to an example of the specific state (corresponding to the special game state). Further, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game state transition means for transitioning the game state between the normal game state and the special game state.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 100, a limit (limiter) is provided for the number of times that the jackpot can be acquired with certainty between transitioning to the power support state and transitioning to the non-power support state. . The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability change counter for counting the number of times the probability change jackpot can be acquired, and when transitioning from the non-power support state to the power support state, the specified number is set in the probability change counter. Each time you get a jackpot with a probability change, the probability change counter is decremented by one. The probability variation counter corresponds to an example of the specified number counter. When the limiter is set and the specified number of times has not been reached (when the limiter has not reached), that is, until the number of acquisitions of the jackpot with the probability change since transitioning to the power support state reaches the specified number, Then, special figure A-special figure P become a big hit with time change until the next big hit with a definite change. Further, in the special drawing A to the special drawing P, the reset of the probability variation counter is not performed. On the other hand, when the limiter has not reached, the special figure Q to special figure T is a big hit without probability variation, and reset to the specified number of probability variation counters is performed and the symbol variation stop display of the special figure is 100 times Granted while taking place.

  Furthermore, when the probability change counter reaches the specified number of times (here, the counter value becomes 0), that is, when the limiter reaches, the special figure A to the special figure H and the special figure Q, R are big hit without probability change and time saving It is given while symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing is performed 100 times, and reset of a probability change counter is performed. On the other hand, when reaching the limiter, the special image I to the special image P and the special image S and T are big hit with no definite change and no time reduction, and the limiter setting is ended and the normal game state is entered.

  Summarizing the above, from the first hit (at the time of releasing the computer drawing electric symbol (initial)) to the time when the limiter has not reached (during the consecutive villas), the special drawing A to P are special drawing high probability Yes, the special figure Q ~ special figure S is the special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. Then, when the limiter is reached, the special figure A to special figure H and the special figure Q, R are in the special figure low probability general figure high probability state, and the special figure I to special figure P and the special figure S, T Probability It is a low probability state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, the profit given to the player on the basis of the stop symbol form of the special drawing is the gaming state (during initial stage) and at the time the limiter is not reached , Different at the time of reaching the limiter), but has made the stop symbol aspect of the special figure common in different gaming states.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 100, two types of lost designs are prepared. The special view V shown in FIG. 182 (a) is the first loss symbol, and the special view W is the second loss symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 does not open and close. In addition to the big hit symbol and the lost symbol, a small hit symbol may be prepared in which the control state (playing state) does not change before and after the small hit game. The special view display device 212 corresponds to an example of a first symbol display means for notifying of the success / failure determination result (second success / failure determination result) of the special view.

  FIG. 183 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form (first symbol form) of the common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the pachinko machine 100, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a lost design. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that the ball has entered the common drawing start area (the common drawing start gates 251 and 253), the common drawing display device 210 turns on all seven segments. , Repeating the lighting of one central segment, perform "variation display of common drawing" (common drawing fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, either one of the "common figure A" which is a hit symbol and the "general figure B" which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 183 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation stop display of the common drawing. The common-diagram display device 210 corresponds to an example of the second symbol display means for notifying of the success / failure determination result (first success / failure determination result) of the common-diagram.

  FIG. 183 (b) shows an example of a common figure decorative symbol. There are ten kinds of "decorated 1" to "decorated 10" in the common figure decorative pattern of the pachinko machine 100. Each symbol of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the ball has entered the common figure start region (general view start gates 251 and 253). In the display area, "decorative design" to switch the display in the order "decorative 1" → "decorative 2" → "decorative 3" → ... "decorative 9" → "decorative 10" → "decorative 1" → ... Change display of That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol separately from the common drawing display device 210. Then, the stop symbol form which is the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. When notifying a hit of a common figure, a combination of decorative patterns in which three same decorative patterns are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1" or "decorative 2-decorative 2" -Display stop 2) etc.). When a combination of three decorative symbols in which the same decorative symbol is arranged is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric symbol 252 opens for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds). On the other hand, when notifying a loss of a common figure, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c stop and display combinations (for example, broken lines) of decorative symbols other than the combination of decorative symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged. . Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays from the start of the “variation display of the decorative symbol” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol may be referred to as the fluctuation stop display of the decorative symbol.

In addition, the stop symbol form (see FIG. 183 (a)) of the common figure and the stop symbol form of one decorative symbol displayed in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the left middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the same figure) In the case of (b), the decorative pattern (see (b) in the figure) is larger.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 181 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 181 is provided with a special drawing determination random number counter, a special drawing fluctuation time determination random number counter, and a common drawing fluctuation period determination random number counter. Further, the RAM 308 stores the special drawing suitability determination result, the special drawing determination result, the special drawing fluctuation time determination result, the common drawing equivalence determination result, the common drawing fluctuation period determination result, and the common drawing reservation number, respectively. . Furthermore, in the RAM 308, a common drawing reserve storage unit divided into the maximum number (four in this example) of areas that can hold the start of the regular drawing draft determination (lottery drawing) is prepared.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 181 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 184 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Permission of operation and setting of initial value. In the pachinko machine 100, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines the voltage value of the power supplied by the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500. It is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the value of V is less than a predetermined value (here, 9 v). When the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. It progresses to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process of setting in the counter timer 312 a numerical value that determines a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when not returning to the state before power interruption (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the initial state) And the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, the RAM clear signal transmitted when the store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate 182 shown in FIG. If it is determined that the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is specific. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, when the power supply status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the robot 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

In step S115, after the setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value updating process, a random number counter for generating an initial value for a special figure determination random number counter, a special figure variation time determination random number value, and a common figure variation period determination random number value Update two random number counters to generate. For example, assuming that the numerical value range that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. . At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, then 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 185, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 181 includes a counter timer 312 which generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (here, once in about 4 ms). The main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (here, to prevent occurrence of a processing error) so that the WDT interrupt does not occur because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (here, 32.8 ms). The main control unit restarts once every about 2 ms, which is a cycle of the timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 181 including various ball detection sensors are input through the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals. It stores in the signal state storage area provided separately for each sensor 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-preceding detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in the above-described step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal, in consideration of false detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 181, winning determination pattern information (here, information indicating that there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the present detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (here, no detection signal before, detection signal from previous time, detection signal from current) It is determined that there is entry or passage to the general winning opening 226, the common drawing starting gates 251 and 253, the special drawing starting opening 230, and the variable winning opening 234 when they coincide with the information (indicating information). That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226 and 234, the starting opening 230 and the gates 251 and 253 have been won. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (here, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no detection signal from the previous time, and no detection signal this time). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the random value counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the special control signal random number counter used by the main control unit 300 , And the random number counter for determining the special drawing fluctuation time and the random number counter for determining the common fluctuation period. For example, assuming that a numerical value range that can be taken as a random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308 for generating the random number value, and 1 is added to the acquired value. In the random number counter storage area of At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made a round, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a previously obtained initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 as a result of acquiring a value from a random number counter which fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and adding 1 to the acquired value If the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is obtained as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, and is set in the random number counter, and the random number counter next turns In order to determine that, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time for displaying the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and for measuring the time for displaying the fluctuation / stop display for the special drawing Various timers are updated including a special figure display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period, a predetermined closing time, a timer for counting a predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when the winning openings 226 and 234 and the starting opening 230 have a winning, the value of the prize ball number storage area provided for each winning opening etc. is read in the RAM 308 and 1 is added. , Set in the original winning ball number storage area.

  Further, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, there is a prize in the common drawing start area (general drawing start gate 251, 253), and the number of common drawing fluctuation games on hold is less than a predetermined number (here, 4). , Obtain predetermined start-up information. That is, if the number of reservations of the common drawing is less than the predetermined number, the common drawing winning random number value and the common drawing fluctuation period determination random number value are acquired. The common drawing win random number and the common drawing fluctuation period determination random number correspond to an example of the start information according to the present invention. The common drawing win random number value acquired here is a value obtained by processing the hardware random number (the value of the hardware random number + the value of the R register + 1), and the common drawing fluctuation period determination random value is a value obtained by processing the software random number ( Software random number + R register value + 1). The random number value storage register corresponding to the common drawing start area, the common figure fluctuation period determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 which performs random number processing of the random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. Corresponds to an example of the start information generation means (first start information generation means). The random number value (starting information) acquired here is stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the common drawing holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. The common drawing reserve storage unit is capable of storing start information acquired when the game ball enters the common drawing start area (general drawing start gate 251, 253) up to a predetermined upper limit number (here four). It corresponds to storage means. At this time, the start information may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the suspension storage unit of the map. In this case, the temporary area is also used as the start information storage unit. It is also possible to use a reserve storage unit and a temporary area of a common drawing as the start information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the pending count value of the common drawing stored in the RAM 308, and the pending number of the common view increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the holding unit.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 100, there is no reservation memory of a special figure. In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a special figure winning flag is prepared. The special figure winning flag is turned off when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is closed. Therefore, immediately after the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is opened, the special-figure winning flag is in the OFF state. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 acquires predetermined start information when there is a winning at the special view start port 230 and the special view winning flag is in the OFF state. That is, a special drawing win random number value, a special drawing determination random number value, and a special drawing fluctuation time determination random number value are acquired as predetermined start information. The special figure winning random number value acquired here is a value obtained by processing the hardware random number (value of hardware random number + value of R register + 1), and the special figure determination random number value and the special figure fluctuation time determination random number value are It is the value obtained by processing the software random number (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). The random number storage register corresponding to the special view start port 230 of the random number generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 181, the special view fluctuation time determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and the main control unit 300 which performs random number processing Corresponds to an example of the start information deriving means (second start information deriving means). The special figure winning random number value, the special figure determination random number value, and the special figure fluctuation time determination random number value acquired here are stored in the special figure start information storage area provided in the RAM 308 as one set of start information. Ru.

  Furthermore, in this winning reception process, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a winning (entering) to the common drawing start gates 251 and 253, the special drawing start opening 230, or the variable winning opening 234, the first sub In transmission information to be transmitted to the control unit 400, winning reception information indicating the presence or absence of winning (entering) of the common drawing start gates 251 and 253, the special view starting opening 230, and the variable winning opening 234 is set.

  In addition, when the special figure starting opening 230 has a prize, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the prize lamp 254 shown in FIG. 180 to emit light.

  The start information of the common drawing is not acquired if the number of reservations of the common drawing is equal to or more than the predetermined number, and the process proceeds to step S219. Further, the start information of the special view is not acquired if the special view prize flag is in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Output schedule information and payout request information to be output to payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 181 are formed of 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a common drawing state update process is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the common drawing display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the common drawing display device 210 performs variable display of common drawing (common drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update process at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the display of the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off to be an aspect, and when the hit flag is off, the common view display device 210 is configured to be the display mode of the lost symbol. Performs on / off drive control of the 7-segment LED. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the common-diagram display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common symbol A shown in FIG. 183 (a) and the lost symbol (a common symbol B shown in FIG. 183 (b)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game. Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later.

  FIG. 186 (a) is a diagram showing a table in which the operation mode of the common drawing electric symbol 252 is summarized. In the case of the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) when the common drawing hit flag is on, the setting of the RAM 308 is performed. In addition to setting the normal drawing operation in the area, information indicating a predetermined open period is set in the storage area of the door member open period management timer provided in the RAM 308. In the pachinko machine 100, the storage area of the timer for managing the opening period of the door member is 5.8, regardless of whether it is in the power support state (normal state with high probability) or in the non electric support state (normal state with low probability). Set information that indicates the open period of seconds. Therefore, the operation of the drawing electric symbol 252 in the power support state and the movement of the drawing electric symbol 252 in the non-power support state become the same, and the player looks at the operation mode of the drawing electric symbol 252 It can not be determined whether it is in the power support state. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 operates for opening and closing the door member 2521 until the game ball of a predetermined number of balls (10 balls in this case) is detected in the special drawing start port 230 for 5.8 seconds set here. A signal for holding the door member 2521 in the open state is output to the solenoid (332) of FIG. In the pachinko machine 100, since the variable start means (general-purpose motor electric symbol 252) is in the open state (second state) only once during one operation period, this 5.8 seconds is an example of the second period It corresponds to Further, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command power-operated motor-operated product release setting processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233). In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the processing during operation of the general command general drawing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  In addition, in processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door member opening period management timer changes from 1 to 0), the general drawing set in the setting area of the RAM 308 is maintained during operation At the same time, information indicating a predetermined opening period is set in the storage area of the door member closing period management timer provided in the RAM 308. In the pachinko machine 100, in the storage area of the door member closing period management timer, information indicating the closing period of 0.5 seconds is set in the power support state (general drawing high probability state), and the non electric support state (general drawing low) In the probability state), information indicating a closing period of 60 seconds is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 100, 0.5 seconds corresponds to an example of the first period in the power support state (general drawing high probability state), and 60 seconds in the non-electric support state (general drawing low probability state) is the first period. Corresponds to one example. Therefore, the first period is longer in the non-electric support state than in the electric support state. As described above, the power-supply state mentioned here is an example of the specific state, and the non-power-supply state is an example of the non-specific state. Compared with the non-specific state (non-electric support state), the variable start means (general-purpose motorized accessory 252) is more likely to be in the second state (open state) than in the non-specific state (non-electric support state). The entry rate of the game ball to the figure starting opening 230) is high. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs a signal for holding the door member 2521 in the closed state to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 2521 until the closing period set here has elapsed. Further, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command power-operated combination setting closing process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Then, in the process starting at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the door member closing period management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting region of the RAM 308 is set to non-operational state. Further, in order to execute the general command inactivity drawing non-operation process in the command setting transmission process (step S233), a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the normal drawing operation period is the first operation time (here, 6.3 seconds) in the power support state (general drawing high probability state), and the non-electric support state (general drawing low probability state) In the second operation period (here, 65.8 seconds) longer than the first operation period. The RAM 308 is provided with an operation period timer for counting the progress of these operation periods (general operation period), and the setting region of the RAM 308 is set to general operation state, and the storage region of the operation period timer is set. Information indicating a predetermined period may be set. In the pachinko machine 100, the operation period is started based on the satisfaction of the condition that the player has won the round drawing corresponding to an example of the first predetermined condition. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 100, the variable start means (the motor-driven symbol 252) is in the second state (open state) only once in one operation period, but a plurality of the variable start means is in the second state (open state). It may be an aspect of turning. For example, the open state is maintained for 1 second simultaneously with the start of the operation period, and the closed state is a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the open state is maintained for 1.8 seconds, and the closed state is maintained for a predetermined period ( For example, 0.5 seconds may be maintained, and finally, the open state may be maintained for 2 seconds, and the closed state may be maintained for 0.5 seconds in the power support state and for 60 seconds in the non-power support state. In this case, two seconds in which the final second state (open state) is maintained corresponds to an example of the second period. Also, in the non-charging state, the 60 seconds for maintaining the last closed state of one operation period is the longest period longer than the period for maintaining the previous closed state (0.5 seconds in this example) It is.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs the opening and closing control of the door member 2521 in this manner corresponds to an example of the variable start control unit that controls the general-purpose electric symbol 252 that is the variable start unit.

  Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is a loss, the common drawing loss flag is turned on. When the common drawing loss flag is on, even in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the common drawing stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, in step S223, a common drawing related lottery process is executed. First, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines whether the regular drawing variation game is being performed or the opening and closing control of the common drawing motor combination 252 is being performed (the state of the common drawing is in operation), If one of them is being performed, the common drawing related lottery process is ended. On the other hand, if none of the above is performed, it is determined whether or not the number of popular drawing fluctuation games on hold is 1 or more. If it is 0, the common drawing related lottery process is ended, 1 If it is the above, one set of random number values (general drawing winning random number and general drawing fluctuation period determining random number) which is start information stored most in the past is taken out from the common drawing reserve storage unit provided in the RAM 308 The start information (a set of random number values) still stored in the pending storage unit is transferred from the area currently stored to the next area. That is, if the start information stored most recently is taken out from the common drawing reserve storage unit, and further, the start information is stored in the common drawing reserve storage unit, the Nth oldest start information is N-1 in the common drawing reserve storage unit. It will be set as the oldest start information. In addition, the number of reservations of the general drawing stored in the RAM 308 is decremented by one. The main control unit 300 performing processing for taking out one set of random numbers (normal drawing win random number and common drawing fluctuation period determination random value) from the common drawing reserve storage unit of the RAM 308 is a start information acquisition means (first start Corresponds to an example of the information acquisition means). Next, general-purpose charter propriety judgment processing is performed. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a table for determining whether or not the drawing is accepted is stored.

  FIG. 186 (b) is a diagram showing a low probability table for commonplace fitness determination, and FIG. 186 (c) is a diagram showing a high probability table for regularity decision.

  In the regular drawing propriety judgment process, the time reduction flag is referred to, and the judgment is made based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state. If the short time flag is off (in the non-power-supply state), the low probability table shown in FIG. 186 (b) is used to determine whether the general drawing is true or false. If it is in the state), the high probability table shown in FIG. It is determined based on the common drawing win random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the start information extracted from the common drawing reserve storage unit of the RAM 308. The Atari probability of a common figure is 1/60 in the low probability table shown in FIG. 186 (b) and 1 / 1.00003 in the high probability table shown in FIG. 186 (c), which is a fairly high probability. In the non-power support state, the central power on view starting gate 251 is main, and when it is in the power support state, the right pushing is urged and the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is easily opened. The common view starting gate 253 is the main. Therefore, the low probability table shown in FIG. 186 (b) is a table used when winning a prize at the central drawing start gate 251, and the high probability table shown in FIG. 186 (c) is a table used when winning a common drawing start gate 253 at the right. You can say that. Here, deriving "hit" or "loss" is equivalent to a regular drawing suitability determination (lottery drawing), and here the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the regular drawing suitability determination process is the first success or failure determining means. It corresponds to an example. Moreover, the success or failure judgment result of “hit” corresponds to an example of a specific first success or failure judgment result.

  When the execution of the common drawing propriety judgment process is completed, the common drawing fluctuation period in the fluctuation stop display of the common drawing is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a common drawing fluctuation period determination table.

  FIG. 187 (a) is a view showing a low probability loss table for determining a common drawing fluctuation period, and FIG. 187 (b) is a drawing showing a low probability per decision table for a common drawing fluctuation period. FIG. 187 (c) is a diagram showing a high probability loss table for determining a common drawing fluctuation period, and FIG. 187 (d) is a diagram showing a high probability per common table fluctuation period determination table.

  Also in the determination of the spread map fluctuation period, the short time flag is referred to, and the determination of whether to accept or not based on whether the current control state is the power support state is performed. If the short time flag is off (in the non-power-supply state), the spread period fluctuation period is determined using the low probability table shown in FIGS. 187 (a) and (b), and the short time flag Is turned on (in the power-on state), the common drawing fluctuation period is determined using the high probability table shown in FIG. 187 (c) and FIG. 187 (d). Also, based on the above-mentioned common drawing success / failure determination result, if it is a loss, the common drawing fluctuation period is determined using the table at the time of the loss shown in FIG. 187 (b) and FIG. The spread map fluctuation period is determined using the hit time table shown in FIG. 187 (a) and FIG. 187 (c). Further, the determination of the common drawing fluctuation period is performed based on the common drawing fluctuation period determination random value (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the start information extracted from the common drawing reserve storage unit of the RAM 308. In addition, although acquisition timing of the random value for determination of a common drawing fluctuation period is timing which acquires starting information, it may be timing just before the start of common drawing fluctuation. In addition, in the non-power-supporting state, if the regular drawing suitability determination result is a loss, the common drawing fluctuation period is determined based on the number of reservations at that time. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, a hold is made at the timing at which one set of random number values (general drawing win random number and common drawing fluctuation period determination random number) is extracted from the common drawing holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308 From the relation of subtracting 1 from the number, the minimum value of the number of holding balls in the general drawing here is 0, and the maximum value is 3. As shown in FIG. 187 (b), when the random value for determining the common drawing fluctuation period belongs to the range of 0 to 59000, the common drawing fluctuation period of 3 seconds is obtained if the number of pending drawings is three, 0 If it is ~ 2, it will be a fluctuation period of 10 seconds. When the random value for determining the common fluctuation period is 59001 or more, the common fluctuation period is common regardless of the number of reserved general drawings. Further, in the power support state, even if the commonplace drawing judgment result is a loss, the common drawing fluctuation period is common regardless of the number of holdings of the common drawing.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 187 (c) and FIG. (D), in the power support state, the spread fluctuation period is 1.5, regardless of whether the spread judgment result is hit or not. It becomes a very shortened fluctuation period of seconds. The common drawing fluctuation period in the case of the power support state is shorter than the opening period of the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric symbol 252 described later. Moreover, the spread diagram fluctuation period in the case of the power support state is shorter than the spread diagram fluctuation period in the case of the non-power support state.

  Further, in each of the tables of FIGS. 187 (a) to 187 (d), the rendering aspect of the common drawing decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 determined according to the length of the common drawing fluctuation period is shown. The information representing the common drawing fluctuation time determined here is included in the common drawing fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as described later, and the first received the command. Sub control unit 400 specifically determines the rendering mode of the common drawing decorative symbol shown here based on the information indicating the common drawing fluctuation time. Normal reach and super reach are included in the presentation mode of the common figure decorative pattern. With normal reach, in general, two symbol display areas (for example, left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 180) stop and display the same decorative symbol, and one remaining symbol display area (for example, middle symbol display area 208b) If the symbol display area that is variably displayed, ie, the symbol display area that is variably displayed, is stopped and displayed, the combination of predetermined big hit symbols (Figure 183) It is a state which will stop-display the combination of the decorative symbol shown to (b). The Super Reach is a product that improves presentation effects by adding a special variable display etc. to the normal reach (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.). In addition, there is also an aspect called special variation in the effect aspect of the decorative symbol. Special variation includes special multi-line reach, full turn reach, special full turn reach, etc. When simply saying "reach" means a variation pattern of a decorative pattern including normal reach, super reach and special variation. This reach is after the success / failure determination that the result of the determination of the success / failure of the normality in the processing related to the common drawing becomes the specific first success / failure determination result (the predetermined result with a high degree of player's advantage) It is a notice effect in which the player is notified in advance before notifying the result of the success or failure judgment, and whether or not the reach is to be performed is determined after the judgment on the success or failure.

  When the determination of the common drawing fluctuation period is completed, the common drawing related lottery process (step S223) is ended, and then the special drawing state update process is executed (step S225). The special view state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the state of the special view. For example, in the special figure state update process in the middle of the symbol variation stop display of the special figure (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure display device 212 is turned on and off Repeated on / off drive control is performed. By performing this control, the special view display device 212 performs variable display (special view variation game) of the special view.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area in the command setting transmission process (step S233), and then the process is ended.

  In the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, a big hit flag and a lost flag are prepared. In the special figure status update process starting at the timing when the special figure fluctuation display period has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure determination result in special figure related lottery process The 7 segment LED constituting the special view display device 212 is turned on / off drive control based on the stop pattern aspect of the special view), and the setting indicating the special view stop display in the setting area of the RAM 308 is performed. By performing this control, the special view display device 212 is any one of the big hit symbol (special symbol A to special symbol T), the first loss symbol (special symbol V), and the second loss symbol (special symbol W). Make a final display of one symbol. Further, thereafter, in order to maintain the display of a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view displayed in a fixed manner is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view fluctuation game is notified to the player.

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation stop setting transmission process is to be performed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area in the command setting transmission process (step S233) described later, and then the process is ended.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the setting area of the RAM 308 in the special figure state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). The special drawing operation period is set to, and a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period for displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts to make a big hit is waited for the RAM 308 Information indicating a winning presentation effect period is set in the storage area of the special view standby time management timer provided in. In addition, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command prize effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special view status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for special view waiting time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined open period (for example, 0.1 seconds) Or, until the solenoid (332) for opening and closing drive of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is opened, the door member 2341 is opened until the game winning of the predetermined number of balls (for example 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234 And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open period management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command large winning opening opening setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  Also, in the special view state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening period management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1 second) variable winning opening Information indicating a closing period in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 while outputting a signal for holding the door member 2341 in a closed state to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing driving of the door member 2341 234 Set Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure state update process which starts opening / closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds), that is, decorative symbol display Information indicating the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to set to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the device 208 is finished. Set

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a variable winning control means for performing change control of the open / close state of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit gaming state. In addition, the open / close pattern of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the determination of success or failure of the special view fluctuation game from the ROM 306. Get the opening and closing pattern.

  Further, in addition to the time saving flag, a probability change flag is also prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 obtains the stop symbol form represented by the special drawing determination result and the special drawing determination result. At the same time as the end of the jackpot game, based on the gaming state when the start information used for the acquisition (at the time of releasing the general drawing motor combination (initial), at the time the limiter is not reached (during consecutive units), at the time the limiter is reached) , And the ON / OFF flag set in the RAM 308.

  Further, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  In addition, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special area is inactive in the setting area of the RAM 308 Set Furthermore, if the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a loss, the lost flag is turned on. When the lost flag is on, the special chart state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the value of the special view stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is In the setting area, set the special figure non-operational. In the special figure state update process when the special figure is not in operation, the process is shifted to the next process without doing anything.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 is completed, a special figure related lottery process (step S229) is performed this time. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes this special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the second success / failure determination means. In the special figure related lottery process (step S229), execution of the lottery (the first pass / fail judgment), determination of the special figure to be stopped and determination of the variation period (first variation period) in the symbol variation stop display of the special figure . First, it is determined whether the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not the predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not established. Here, it is determined whether the special view display device 212 is in the special view variation display or in the stop display, and if any display is in progress, the special view related lottery process is ended. . On the other hand, if it is not in any display, it is determined whether it is set during special drawing operation or during special drawing non-operation, and if it is set during special drawing operation, special drawing related lottery processing If it is set and the special view is not in operation, it means that the condition is not established, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is established. In this determination, it is determined whether start information is stored in the special view start information storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the start information is not stored, the special drawing-related lottery process is ended, and if the start information is stored, the predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied.

  If the predetermined success or failure judgment condition is satisfied, the start information stored in the special view start information storage area (special figure winning random number value, special figure determination random number value, and special figure fluctuation time determination random number value) Are acquired, and special drawing suitability determination (first success or failure determination) processing is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a success / failure determination table of the special view.

  FIG. 188 (a) is a diagram showing a low probability table for special figure conformance determination, and FIG. 188 (b) is a diagram showing a high probability table for special figure conformance determination.

  In this special drawing suitability determination process, the probability change flag is prepared with reference to the RAM 308, and the determination of propriety is made based on whether the current control state is the special figure definite modification state. If the probability change flag is turned off (if it is in the special condition low probability state), the success / failure judgment of the special figure is performed using the low probability table shown in FIG. 188 (a), and the probability change flag is on (special figure height probability If it is in the state, the high probability table shown in FIG. It is determined based on the special figure winning random number value (possible range: 0 to 65535) of the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100, when reaching the specified number of times (during limiter), the state shifts to the non-probability state (special figure low probability state). In this case, in the special drawing hit or not judgment, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), wins the time reduction without a big hit with a probability of 12.5%, symbol fluctuation stop display of the next special drawing with a probability of 12.5% We will win a big hit that will be time-saving until the symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing is performed 100 times. In the pachinko machine 100, in the non-probability change state, as shown in the table of FIG. 188 (a) for the special figure eligibility determination table, the pachinko machine 100 results in a big hit with the establishment of 25%. As shown in the table of FIG. 188 (b), the result of the big hit is almost reached. This "big hit" special-design result determination result corresponds to an example of a specific second determination result.

  When the execution of the special figure conformance determination process is completed, special figure determination process is performed to determine the stop symbol form of the special figure. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special drawing determination table.

  FIG. 188 (c) is a diagram showing a jackpot special view determination table. The number of times for reaching the limiter is also shown in the table for determining the special hit for making a big hit shown in FIG. 188 (c).

  This special view determination process is performed based on the special view determination random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the start information acquired from the special view start information storage area of the RAM 308. In addition, the special figure stop symbol aspect is decided on the basis of the game state when the starting information which is used when obtaining the special feature suitability decision result is acquired. In other words, if the special drawing propriety judgment result is a big hit at the time of releasing the regular drawing motor combination (when per initial initial drawing), the special drawing A ~ special drawing with a probability of 96% based on the special drawing determination random value. Decide on any special figure of P (with a definite variation and a time-saving big hit until next big hit), and with a probability of 4%, select a special figure Q ~ a special figure T (no definite variation and 100 times with a short hit big hit illustration Determined to be one of the special drawings. In addition, if the number of times to reach the limiter is determined to be any of the special figures A to P, it means that the big hit with definite variation is won once, and the maximum number of gains of big hit with definite variation (11 times)-1 time = 10 times. On the other hand, when it is determined that any one of the special figure Q to the special figure T, it becomes 11 times which is the maximum number of times of acquisition of the jackpot with probability variation. Even when the special drawing hit / not determination result is a big hit when the limiter has not reached (during consecutive residences), the special drawing A to the special drawing P (with definite variation and with a probability of 96% based on the random number value for special drawing determination) Decide on any special figure of the big hit symbol with time reduction until the next big hit, and any of the special figure Q ~ special figure T (no definite variation and 100 big hit symbols with short time mark) with 4% probability Determined to be a special figure. However, if the number of times to reach the limiter is determined to be any of the special figures A to P, it means that the jackpot with definite variation has been acquired once, and it becomes one subtraction. If it is determined that one of the figure Q to the special figure T is selected, it is reset, and 11 times of the specified number of times are set again. If the special drawing suitability determination result is a big hit when reaching the limiter, based on the special drawing determination random number value, the special drawing A ~ special drawing H, special drawing Q, special drawing R with a probability of 53.3% Determined on any of the special drawings of (with no definite variation and 100 time-shortening big-hit symbols), and with a probability of 4%, special drawing I to special drawing P, special drawing S, special drawing T (no definite change and no time reduction) Determined to be one of the special illustrations of the jackpot symbol without). The number of times to reach the limiter in this case is reset if it is determined to be one of Tokusyu A to Toku H, Toku Q, and Toku R, and the specified number of times of 11 is set again. Be done. When it is determined that one of the special drawing I to the special drawing P, the special drawing S, and the special drawing T, it is 0 times.

  That is, the number of times that the probability change jackpot can be acquired between the transition to the power support state and the transition to the non-power support state is 11 times, and the non-probability state changes to the non-probability state (special figure low probability state) When the big hit is pulled, 11 limiter times are set, and when the definite variation big hit is pulled, it becomes 10 times. In addition, the number of limiters is reset when the non-probability variation big hit is pulled during the multi-run so that the specified number of times of 11 is reset and 100 times of short time is given. That is, since the fluctuation of one special figure is allowed in the short time after the non-deterministic variation big hit, the hit is added at this time that the limiter count is reset. Furthermore, when reaching the limiter, even if a definite variation symbol is displayed, it will be treated as a non-positive variation big hit, but if a short time is given at this time, as will be described later in detail, a substantial combination will be added.

  When the execution of the special figure determination process is completed, the special figure variation period in the symbol variation stop display of the special figure is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special drawing fluctuation period determination table.

  FIG. 189 (a) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining a regular drawing high probability special period fluctuation period determination, and FIG. 189 (b) is a drawing showing a jackpot table for determining a regular drawing low probability special period fluctuation period determination condition. The figure (c) is a figure showing the lost table for common drawing high probability special figure fluctuation period determination, and the figure (d) is a figure showing the common table low probability special figure fluctuation period determination loss table.

  In the determination of the special figure fluctuation period, the table shown in FIG. 189 is used based on the above-mentioned special figure appropriateness determination result and the power support state (generally high probability state) or the non power support state (generally low probability state). To determine the fluctuation period of the special map. Furthermore, the determination of the special figure fluctuation period is performed based on the random number value for the special figure fluctuation period determination (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308. In addition, although acquisition timing of the random number value for special drawing fluctuation period determination is timing which acquires starting information, it may be timing just before special drawing fluctuation start. As shown in the table in FIG. 189 (a), in the pachinko machine 100, when the special drawing suitability determination result is a big hit in the power support state, the special drawing fluctuation period is a predetermined short period with a fairly high probability (here Then, it will be a fluctuation period of 1 second). The predetermined short period is shorter than the opening period (5.8 seconds) of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252, and while the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is opened once, During the power support state, the result of the special drawing suitability determination based on winning in the special drawing start port 230 is often notified. In addition, in the power support state, a fluctuation period of 120 seconds and a fluctuation period of 360 seconds are also prepared. The probability of becoming a predetermined short period is higher than the probability of becoming a long period such as 120 seconds or 360 seconds.

  On the other hand, as shown in the table in FIG. 189 (b), when the special drawing suitability determination result is a big hit in the non-electric support state, the special drawing fluctuation period uniformly fluctuates for a predetermined period (60 seconds in this case). become.

  In addition, as shown in the table in FIG. 189 (c), when the special drawing suitability determination result is lost in the power support state, the fluctuation period of the special drawing is uniformly 10 seconds, as shown in FIG. As shown in the table, when the special drawing suitability determination result is lost in the non-power-up state, the fluctuation period of the special drawing is uniformly 60 seconds.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 100, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the special drawing is uniformly 60 seconds. In addition, the period of the symbol variation stop display of the special figure notifying the special figure suitability determination result is made different only when the special figure suitability determination result is a big hit in the power support state, the effect of the bonus game is performed During the special game state to be played, the special feature on / off determination is performed at different intervals.

  The information representing the fluctuation period of the special drawing is included in the symbol fluctuation start command of the special drawing transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 receiving the command In the symbol display device 208, if it is a fluctuation period of 120 seconds, the jackpot effect of Premier A is displayed during the fluctuation period, and if it is a fluctuation period of 360 seconds, the jackpot effect of Premier B during the fluctuation period. Is displayed.

  When the determination of the special figure fluctuation period ends, the special figure related lottery process (step S229) ends, and then, the command setting transmission process (step S233) shown in FIG. 185 is performed, and various commands are the first sub control unit Sent to 400 The output schedule information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are commands. Type (here, basic command, special symbol design variation start command, special design symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, number of rounds specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, general drawing reserve increase Information that can specify the type of command (such as a command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the above-described command transmission process. Further, in the case of the special symbol design variation start command, information representing the special figure stop symbol, information representing the control state (information representing the setting status of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag), and the special figure variation time In the case of the special figure symbol fluctuation stop command, the information is included, and in the case of the special figure symbol fluctuation stop command, the information indicating the special figure stop symbol, the information indicating the control state, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, the presence or absence of a winning on the special view starting port 230, the presence or absence of a winning on the variable winning port 234, and the like.

  Further, in the above-mentioned general command winning effect setting setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, effect control information to be outputted to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, control state Set the information that represents. In the general command end effect setting transmission process described above, the command data represents the effect control information stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect waiting period, Set the information. The first sub control unit 400 that has received the command related to these effects transmits a control command related to the effect to the second sub control unit 500 based on the received command.

  Further, in the above-mentioned general command large winning opening opening setting transmission process, information indicating the number of rounds, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in command data. In the above-mentioned general command large winning opening closed setting transmission process, information indicating the current number of rounds stored in the RAM 308, information indicating a control state, and the like is set in command data.

  Further, in step S233, general command hold drawing increase processing is also performed. In this general command draw increasing process, information representing a control state or the like is set in the command data of the draw increasing command.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 also transmits, as a common drawing related command, a common drawing symbol fluctuation start command indicating that fluctuation display of the common drawing is started (is performed). In the command data of this common figure symbol fluctuation start command, information indicating the common drawing yes / no determination result, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability change flag), information indicating the common drawing change time, probability change The information etc. which show the value of a counter are included. Furthermore, the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, the common drawing fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation display of the common drawing is stopped, and the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric utility 252 is opened. A general-purpose motor combination release command indicating that it has started (to be started), a common-diagram motor combination close command that indicates that the door member 2521 is closed (to do), or the like is transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  Further, in the command setting transmission process, the command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be outputted to the payout control unit 600 are constituted by 1 byte, and the strobe information (in the case of ON, indicates that the data is set) is shown in bit 7, the power on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after the power is turned on), Bits 4 to 5 of this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 after encryption processing It indicates the number of requested payouts.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step 205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of the glass frame opening error or the bottom plate full error, etc. When a full tank error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a glass frame opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. Also, various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 181 are driven to control the opening / closing of the common drawing motor combination 252 and the variable winning opening 234, and the common drawing display device 210 and the special drawing through the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the display device 212, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Also, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S 219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310. Furthermore, when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is closed, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the winning lamp 254 shown in FIG. 180 to emit light. Due to the light emission of the prize lamp 254 at the time of closing the door member 2521, it may be possible for the player to be reminded of the special effect to be described later based on the electric chow prize.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on, in order to determine whether or not the interruption of the power supply has been detected. Then, if the low voltage signal is off (if the power off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. If the low voltage signal is on (if the power off is detected), the process proceeds to step S243.

  In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, and interrupt permission is set, and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 184 is performed. To return.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state upon power failure upon power recovery is saved as recovery data to a predetermined area of RAM 308, and processing upon power failure such as initialization of input / output port And then returns to the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. <Process of First Sub Control Unit 400>

  The process of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step S301 of FIG. When the power is turned on, the initial setting of step S301 is performed. In this initialization, initialization of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 181, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, processing for updating the effect data is performed. The effect control process will be described in detail later.

  In step S311, when it is detected that the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 179 is pressed, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step S309 into effect data according to the effect button 136 being pressed.

  In step S313, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in S309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315, when there is an instruction to the drive circuit 420 of the various lamps 418 among the effect data read out in S309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  The RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a transmission area for setting a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. If a control command is set in this transmission area, the control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 (step S319), and the process returns to step S303.

  FIG. 190 (b) is a flowchart showing a flow of effect control processing shown in FIG. 190 (a).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, in the command setting transmission process (step S233) shown in FIG. 185, the main control unit 300 causes a common drawing operation start command indicating the start of a common drawing operation period; A general-purpose motor-operated combination closing command representing the closing of the door member 2521 in, the symbol variation start command representing the start of variation of the special drawing, and the like are transmitted. The common drawing operation start command includes information representing the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2521 in the common drawing electric symbol 252. Here, as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2521 is a pattern which is opened once and closed once, but the first sub-control unit 400 determines one pattern based on this information. The final closing of the door member 2521 can be recognized during the period of operation of the swing. In other words, it is possible to recognize the closing immediately before the electric chow open end standby time (here, 60 seconds) corresponding to an example of the first period. In the effect control process, the first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether a special effect start condition is satisfied (step S3091). In other words, if the symbol variation start command has not been received at all even after the common drawing operation start command has been received and the common drawing motor combination closing command indicating the final closing has not been received, the special effect is produced. When the start condition is satisfied, a special effect command is set in the transmission area provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 (step S3092), and the process proceeds to step S3093. On the other hand, if the special effect start condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3093 without performing the process of step S3092. In step S3093, other effect control processing is performed, and the effect control processing ends. The special effect command set in step S3092 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process of step S319 shown in FIG. 190 (a). When the second sub-control unit 500 receives the special effect command, it controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the special effect command, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has an image of a predetermined special effect described later. Is displayed.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 190 (c). FIG. 190 (c) is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first secondary control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is set as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and the command reception interrupt process is completed.

  Next, a first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 190 (d). FIG. 190 (d) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (here, once in 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process triggers the predetermined cycle of the timer interrupt process. Run with

In step S341 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. 184 (a). In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S343 of the first auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed, and the timer interrupt process is completed.
<Process of Second Sub Control Unit 500>

  The second sub-control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208. The image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads out pattern information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub control unit 500 based on a signal from the CPU of the second sub control unit 500, and uses the display area (work area) of the VRAM to display a display image An image is generated and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first instructs transfer of image data. Here, first, the designations of the display areas A and B of the VRAM are swapped. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM), VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM), etc. in the attribute register of the GPU based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. When the transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU uses information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM, image size, VRAM coordinates Instructs the GPU (such as placement coordinates). The GPU performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU is not input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Then, drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU.

  When the drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the GPU is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When the generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts the number of images of the scene, is incremented (+1) and the process is ended. Do.

  As described above, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the image display means. The combination of the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 corresponds to an example of the effect control means.

  The second sub control unit 500 also executes control of the shielding device 246 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400.

  Subsequently, the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 191 is a flow chart showing a part of the game flow in the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 192 is a view showing the screens of the decorative symbol display device in the game flow shown in FIG. 191 step by step. In FIG. 192, time elapses in alphabetical order from (a) to (f), and the same applies to the subsequent drawings. Further, at the left corner of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 192, a fourth symbol 217 of a common drawing and a fourth symbol 218 of a special drawing are displayed. In these fourth symbols 217 and 218, a white circle represents a display during variation, a black circle represents a display during suspension, and the same applies to the subsequent drawings.

  In the state where the game is started, it is a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability common figure low probability state). The player aims at the central blowout start gate 251 and makes a left strike. Eventually, the central common drawing start gate 251 wins (step S501), and the common drawing display device 210 starts symbol fluctuation stop display. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 192 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208 which is a liquid crystal display panel, the symbol variation of the decorative symbol of the common figure is started (step S502). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, although the fourth symbol 218 of the special figure is in the stop display, the fourth symbol 217 of the common drawing is in the variation display. In the decorative symbol display device 208, there is also a reach effect using the decorative symbol of the common figure (step S503), but the reach effect is not performed, and the common pattern display device 210 is the lost symbol (see FIG. 183 (a) And stop displaying the combination (for example, loose eyes) of the decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are arranged on the decorative symbol display device 208, and return to step S501 ( Step S504).

  Even when the reach effect (step S503) as shown in FIG. 192 (b) and FIG. 192 (d) is performed, the hit symbol display unit 210 is always hit and stopped (see FIG. 183 (a)). The combination of the decorative symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are arranged is not necessarily stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the process may proceed to step S504. On the other hand, if the result of the common-practice determination is a hit, the common-pattern display device 210 is hit and the symbol (see FIG. 183 (a)) is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. The combination of the decorative symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are lined up at 208 is stopped and displayed (step S505), and the winning of the common drawing fluctuating game is notified. Further, as shown in FIG. 192 (d), at the same time as the common view display device 210 is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol 217 of the common view of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also displayed during stop. A screen for instructing to perform a right strike is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 along with the winning of the common drawing variation game (step S 506), and the common drawing motorized prize 252 disposed in the right area of the game area 124 The door member 2521 is opened for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds) (step S507).

  By opening the door member 2521 of the general-purpose motorized prize 252, it is possible to win a prize in the special chart starting port 230, but if there is no prize return, the process returns to step S501 (step S508). In the special-design pass / fail determination (special-pattern lottery) for one ball that has won a prize (step S509). When the special figure suitability determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 192 (e) and FIG. 192 (f), the bowling chance game is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 (step S510). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, although the fourth symbol 217 of the common figure is in the stop display mode, the fourth symbol 218 of the special figure is in the variable display mode. When the special drawing suitability determination result is a loss, the special symbol display device 212 displays a lost symbol (see FIG. 182 (a)) in a stopped state, and as shown in FIG. 192 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208. The image of the scene where the strike can not be taken is displayed (step S511). Here, the probability that the special drawing suitability determination is lost is 2/65536 (see FIG. 188 (a)). On the other hand, if the special figure propriety judgment result is a big hit, the stop figure (see FIG. 182 (a)) of any of the special figures A to P which is a big hit figure is displayed on the special figure display device 212. As shown in FIG. 192 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image notifying that the strike is released and the bonus game is started (step S512). The probability that the special design hit / not judgment here is a big hit is 65534/65536, which is a fairly high probability (see FIG. 188 (a)). When winning the big hit of the special figure, it always shifts from the non-power support state (generally low drawing probability state) to the power support state (general drawing high probability state). Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 192 (g) and (h), the special view display device 212 stops and displays, and at the same time, the fourth symbol 218 of the special view of the decorative symbol display device 208 also becomes a stop display.

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the game flow shown in FIG. 191, and FIG. 194 is a diagram step by step showing the screen of the decorative symbol display device when the first hit is a big hit without definite variation.

  The probability of winning a big hit with a definite change in the special figure variation game here is 96%, and the probability of winning a big hit without a definite change is 4% (see FIG. 188 (c)). If a jackpot with no probability change is won, a value of 11 is set in the probability change counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 in the big hit game is displayed. The "remaining 11 times" is displayed as the remaining number of times that the jackpot with probability change can be acquired before the transition to the non-electric support state (step S513). In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 at this time, there is also a display of "during 1 consecutive loafing" from the fact that the door member 2521 of the common figure electric symbol 252 is opened once first (step S507 shown in FIG. 191). Ru. On the other hand, when the big hit with the probability change is won, the value of the probability change counter is set to 10 (step S514).

  Since the control state has shifted to the power support state, the pass / fail judgment of the common drawing is likely to be won, and the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric jack 252 is easy to open. For this reason, the propriety judgment of the special drawing is easy to be carried out, and in the pachinko machine 100, the qualification judgment of the special drawing is won by a big hit with a probability of 25% in the non-probability changing state, and a considerably high probability in the probability changing state. To win a big hit. The probability of winning a big hit with a probability change and time-shortening until the next big hit is 96% when the number of remaining times that can win a big hit with a definite change before transition to the non-electric support state is two or more. There is a 4% probability of winning in a jackpot with no odds and 100 short timed hits (see FIG. 188 (c)). For example, if you win a big hit with a probability change with the remaining count of 11 times and a time reduction until the next big hit, the value of the probability change counter is set to a value of 10 minus one from the value of 11 that has been set so far. As shown in 194 (b), "remaining 10 times" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the big hit game. In addition, on the decorative symbol display device 208 at this time, a display of "during two consecutive lines" is also made.

  On the other hand, when winning a jackpot with no odds and 100 short-time hits, the odds counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is reset, and the jackpot with definite odds is acquired before shifting to the non-electric support state. The number of remaining can be increased. The reset of the probability change counter is advantageous for the player, but is performed with a probability of 4% as described above.

  FIG. 194 (c) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the jackpot game when the number of remaining times is two. On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (c), "2 remaining" and "10 consecutive houses" are displayed, and a display such as "add bonus when taking extra chance strike" is also performed. . Then, when the number of remaining times is one, the bowling chance game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the big hit game. The result of the special figure fluctuation game that was decided to play the big hit game here is a big hit without probability change, but with a probability of 53.3% it is a big hit with 100 time reductions and a probability of 46.7% It is a big hit without time saving. When the result of the special figure fluctuation game is the big hit without time saving, the bonus ends (step S519), it moves to non power support state, it moves also to non probability change state, becomes normal game state . In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 194 (g), an image of a scene where a strike can not be taken is displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a big hit with short time 100 times, it shifts to the non-probability state, but the power support state is extended until the symbol fluctuation stop display of the special figure is performed 100 times .

  In the pachinko machine 100, when the special figure suitability determination result is a big hit in the power support state, as shown in FIG. The fluctuating period of is often as short as one second. However, the probability of 500/65536 results in 120 seconds, and the probability of 35/65536 results in 360 seconds. Therefore, even if the player wins a jackpot without probability change during the bonus, the fluctuation period of the special chart may be selected to be 120 seconds or 360 seconds, which is a long time. It should be noted that the variation period of the special map may be extended for a long time only when the player wins the jackpot without probability change during the bonus. Even in the non-deterministic state, since the time reduction is attached, the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric symbol 252 is easy to open, and it is easy to determine whether the special drawing is acceptable. If the variation period of the special drawing is a short period (1 second in this case), the success / failure determination result of the special drawing is immediately notified, and for one opening of the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric symbol 252, Special figure variation game is often played only once. That is, the number of opening times of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is synchronized with the definite number of limiters. However, if the variation period of the special figure is a long period (here, 120 seconds or 360 seconds), the door member 2521 of the common figure electric symbol 252 is opened multiple times while the special figure variation game is performed once. , The payout can be made by paying out based on the winning on the special figure starting port 230 (here, 7 balls / 1 winning).

  As shown in FIG. 193, when the fluctuation period of the special drawing is a short period, the process returns to step S513, and as shown in FIG. 194 (f), “remaining 11 times” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Ru. On the other hand, when the variation period of the special figure is a long period, information representing the variation period of the special figure included in the special pattern variation start command sent from the main control unit 300 (here, information of a long period The first auxiliary control unit 400 can open the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 several times during the transition to the non-power-supply state after the transition to the power-supply state. Do some prediction calculations. The prediction calculation here is performed based on the fact that one opening period of the door member 2521 of the common drawing motor-operated accessory 252 is uniform at 5.8 seconds. When the fluctuation period of the special figure is the first long period (120 seconds in this case), the predetermined number of times is uniformly made larger than the above-mentioned specified number of times. For example, it is predicted that the door member 2521 of the common drawing motorized product 252 is opened five times in 120 seconds, and the remaining number of times is 16 times where the predicted number of times plus 5 times is added to 11 times. Displayed as an example of information). In addition, when the fluctuation period of the special figure is the second long term (here, 360 seconds) longer than the first long term, display (for example, ??? times) with a predetermined symbol etc. is performed uniformly. You may do so.

  Here, the number of times the prediction calculation is made is the number of times the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric symbol 252 can be opened before the transition to the non-electric support state, as described above. The fluctuation period in the figure is often a short period, and the special drawing fluctuation game is often performed only once for one opening of the door member 2521 of the common drawing electric symbol 252, so that The first sub-control unit 400 displays the remaining number as the remaining number on the decorative symbol display device 208, assuming that the number calculated and predicted is the number that can obtain the jackpot with probability change before shifting to the non-electric support state. (Step S520). As can be understood from this, in the pachinko machine 100, one special figure changing game and one opening of the regular drawing electric character 252 are linked if the additional chance is not taken into consideration.

  FIG. 195 is a view showing a modified example of the additional opportunity shown in FIG. 194 (c).

  FIG. 195 (a) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the jackpot game in the state where the remaining number of times that can obtain the jackpot with probability change before transitioning to the non-electric support state is five times. . On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 195 (a), a display such as "large bonus chance added when bonusing in" is displayed.

  FIG. 195 (c) is a screen displayed when the "large bonus chance" is false display, and "sorry" is displayed. That is, the “big bonus chance” shown in FIG. 6A is a screen that is displayed when the player wins a big hit without a definite change during the bonus, and the remaining number is reset. However, in the figure (c), there is no change in the remaining number, and "the remaining 5 times" is still displayed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 195 (b) is a screen displayed when the "big bonus chance" is a true display, and a display of "Congratulations" is made.

  FIG. 195 (d) is a screen displayed when the fluctuation period of the special figure is the second long period (for example, 360 seconds), and the remaining number? ? ? It has been time.

  FIG. 195 (e) is a screen displayed when the fluctuation period of the special figure is the first long period (for example, 120 seconds), and the remaining number is 120 for 120 times, which is the prescribed number. It is 16 times which added 5 times which is the number of times of prediction.

  As described above, when a long effect period (duration period of the special drawing) is reached during the bonus in the special game state, effects different from the normal effect are performed. In addition, when stop displaying the big hit symbol of the special figure in the power support state, the door member 2521 of the common figure electric symbol 252 is often opened only once for one special figure fluctuation game. As shown in FIG. 189 (a), it is 12 times for the presentation of Premier A and 36 times for the presentation of Premier B. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 described above, although the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) is opened, the game ball is increased by opening the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252. In addition, as a prize ball number, 0 ball at the time of winning in the regular drawing start gates 251 and 253, four balls at the time of winning in the variable winning opening 234 (adjacency), 7 at the time of winning in the common drawing electric combination 252 (special figure starting opening) The ball may be 10 balls when winning in the general winning opening 226. The establishment of the predetermined conditions referred to in the present invention corresponds to the entrance of the game ball to the winning opening and the starting opening, and in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the predetermined gaming value is played based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions. Game value giving means (a game medium payout means (payout device 152) for paying out game media) to be given to a player. In addition, a variable winning opening 234 (attacker) having a smaller number of winning balls is disposed downstream of the regular drawing electric symbol 252 (special figure starting port) having many winning balls. It is also conceivable to reverse the positional relationship between the common drawing motorized character 252 and the variable winning opening 234, but if this is done, the variable winning opening 234 with few winning balls will be won first. In the present embodiment, during the bonus in the special game state, the gaming ball that leaked into entering the regular game motorized role 252 is able to win the variable winning opening 234 (adjacency) and contributes to the increase in the winning ball Do.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the power support state, the intervals (intervals based on 1 second, 120 seconds, and 360 seconds) for deriving the special figure probability change big hit (specific first yes / no determination result) are different. This will improve the interest of the game. Further, the game property of the present embodiment is to increase the number of gaming balls by being a so-called limiter machine (there is an upper limit to the number of probability change units) and the common drawing motorized role 252 (electric chew). In other words, since the time between jackpots of the special figure is different, the number of opening of the electric chow between them is different, so that the amount of gaming balls to be increased can be changed. This game feature is a game feature that the player can fit in. Further, by deriving the hit of the normal symbol in a high probability and in a short time, it is possible to open the electric chew frequently, and the electric chew contributes to the game performance of the game ball increase. In addition, in the power-supply state, it is possible to provide a difference in the open frequency of the power chew by giving a change (1 second, 120 seconds, 360 seconds) to the fluctuation time of the special drawing. Furthermore, by making the derivation probability of the special figure big hit until reaching the limiter a high probability, it is possible to change the open frequency of the electric chew and the obtainable game balls based on the open frequency almost by the fluctuation time of the special figure. it can. In addition, since the limiter is reset, it is possible to make the result of the special drawing be interesting also in the game property in which the number of game balls is increased by the common drawing electric combination 252 (electric chew). In addition, it is advantageous for the player in the special game state that the fluctuation time of the special drawing is long, but it is possible to determine the long fluctuation time at the time of the limiter reset, so that the special drawing is also performed after the fluctuation ends. It becomes possible to continue the special game state until derivation per predetermined number of times. That is, it is possible to simultaneously provide two advantageous states to the player, the limiter reset and the long-term fluctuation. Furthermore, by reporting the current number of consecutive homes and the remaining number of times to the limiter, the interest of the game during the special game state may be improved. In addition, when notification is performed based on the number of times the electric chow is released, it may be linked to the ball to improve the interest more. Furthermore, although the long-term fluctuation of the special drawing is equivalent to the short-term fluctuation for the limiter, it is equivalent to the short-term fluctuation, but changing the information to be notified in association with the number of times of opening electric power May increase. The game property in this embodiment is a limiter machine, and at any timing, the addition of the special gaming state more than the number of limiters is not committed at any timing, but the game ball obtained by long-time fluctuation is a normal special feature digest 1 It is possible to notify the player as if the special gaming state equal to or more than the number of times of the limiter is provided by using more than the batch (subtraction of the limiter). That is, it is possible to link the ball with the notification. Furthermore, by setting the notification content as the remaining number of times up to the limiter, even if the notification is performed more than the specified number of times, it is possible to link the balls, so the interest of the game may be improved.

  In addition, the variation period of the special figure may be set to be a long time only when the player wins a jackpot with no probability change during the bonus. Alternatively, even in the case of a loss, a long-term fluctuation period of the special figure may be used, and in this case, a large number of gaming balls can be obtained without the prescribed number of digestions (without the limiter subtraction). It is possible.

  In addition, in the embodiment, the gaming board 200 board surface configuration is configured such that the gaming ball is induced to both of the common-playing electric combination 252 and the variable winning opening 234 when right-handed (in special gaming state) But it is not limited to this. For example, the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) may be disposed at a place where it is difficult to win with the launch strength in the special game state. In this case, it is possible to make the point where the attacker does not open during the long variation period (big bonus) of the special figure be inconspicuous.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the next big hit can be realized because the big hit probability at the special figure low probability is 1⁄4, and the number of time reductions given after the addition (after the non probability variation big hit) is 100 times. At the same time, it is possible to increase the number of game balls by opening the common drawing electric symbol 252 during this time due to the loss of the 3/4 special drawing.

  Further, the determination of the long-term fluctuation period of the special figure may correspond completely to the stop symbol of the special figure 1: 1.

Furthermore, the interval for deriving the special figure probability variation big hit (specific first pass / fail judgment result) can be different depending on the period during the big hit game as well as the variation time of the special figure (representation time). For example, the intervals can be made different by changing the time of the start effect or the end effect of the big hit game or the effect of the interval between rounds. Further, the interval can be made different by changing the stop display period of the special view.
Subsequently, characteristic points in the present invention will be described.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the winning balls are not paid out even if the gaming ball passes (winning) the regular drawing starting gates 251, 253, the regular drawing starting gates 251, 253 benefit from the payout of the winning balls. Corresponds to a non-profitable entry area in which the player is not awarded. It should be noted that, when the gaming ball passes through the regular drawing start gates 251 and 253 (winning), the player is given the benefit of being able to receive the lottery of the regular drawing fluctuation game. On the other hand, when the game ball enters (wins), a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of winning balls are paid out from the central general winning hole 226 disposed below the central blowout start gate 251, and the blowout on the right side When the game ball enters (winning) the special figure starting opening 230 where entry of the game ball becomes possible when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 arranged below the figure start gate 251 opens, the predetermined number A prize ball (for example, 7 balls) is paid out. Therefore, the central general winning opening 226 and the special figure starting opening 230 correspond to a profit giving approach area for giving the player a profit of payout of the winning balls when the game ball enters.

  In the present embodiment, a symbol fluctuation start command of a general drawing is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub control unit 400 having received the symbol variation start command of the common figure outputs a control command instructing the second sub control unit 400 to cause the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the regular pattern variation effect production, The second sub-control unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a common figure symbol variation effect. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that receives the symbol variation start command of the common figure instructs the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 181 to output a predetermined sound as the common figure symbol variation effect, and the speaker 120 outputs a predetermined sound. To be done. Here, the display of the predetermined effect image performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the predetermined sound output performed by the speaker 120 correspond to an example of the predetermined effect in the present invention.

  In addition, when the game ball enters central general winning a prize opening 226 and special figure starting mouth 230, as mentioned above, main control section 300 sets winning a prize reception information with winning a prize reception processing, the winning a prize reception information 1st secondary control It is sent to unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 having received the winning reception information outputs a control command instructing the second sub-control unit 400 to cause the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the award ball payout effect, and the second sub-control unit 400 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command, and a special effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a prize ball payout effect. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 having received the winning reception information instructs the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 181 to output a specific sound as a prize ball payout effect, and the speaker 120 performs a specific sound output. Here, the display of the specific effect image performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the specific sound output performed by the speaker 120 correspond to an example of the specific effect according to the present invention.

  FIG. 196 is a time chart of a common-design symbol variation effect and a winning ball payout effect. In FIG. 196, time passes from the left to the right of the figure, and the same applies to the subsequent time charts.

  When the ball detection sensor provided in the non-profit provision entrance area, which is the common drawing start gate 251, 253, detects the entrance of the gaming ball to the common drawing start gate 251, 253, the detection signal is not detected In the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 at the timing of (A) shown in the drawing, a common figure symbol fluctuation effect (a profit non-improved entry area entry effect) is started.

  In addition, when the game ball which has passed central drawing start gate 251 enters central general winning a prize opening 226, the ball detection sensor which is provided in central general winning a prize opening 226 detects the entrance of the gaming ball and the detection signal is non It changes from detection to detection, and at the timing of (A) shown in the figure, a prize ball payout effect (a profit giving approach area entry effect) is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120, and The prize ball payout effect ends at the timing. On the other hand, the regular pattern symbol variation effect started at the timing of (A) shown in the figure continues even after the award ball payout effect ends. That is, the execution period of the common-design symbol variation effect is longer than the execution period of the prize ball payout effect, and the execution period of the prize-ball payout effect is included in the execution period of the regular symbol variation effect.

  The main control unit 300 causes the first sub-control unit 400 to move to the first sub-control unit 400 if the number of reservations in the common drawing when the game ball passes the common drawing start gate 251 or 253 is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). Send a pending increase command. The first sub control unit 400 having received the common drawing reserve increase command causes the second sub control unit 400 to output a control command instructing the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the common drawing reserve increase effect. It is also good. In addition, the first sub control unit 400 that has received the popular drawing reserve increase command may instruct the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 181 to output a predetermined sound as the generic drawing reserve increase presentation. By doing this, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a general drawing reserve increase effect, and a predetermined sound output is performed on the speaker 120, and these predetermined effect images are displayed The predetermined sound output may be a predetermined effect according to the present invention.

  FIG. 197 is a diagram showing a specific example of a common symbol rotation effect and a winning ball payout effect.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 197 (a), a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols in a common drawing is displayed. That is, it is in the state where the common drawing fluctuation game is stopped. In this state, when the game ball passes through the central common drawing start gate 251 (corresponding to the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 196), symbol fluctuation display is started in the common drawing display device 210, and FIG. As shown in), in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display (corresponding to an example of a predetermined effect image) of a decorative symbol of a common figure is started. In addition, a speaker 120 (not shown) outputs a common drawing fluctuation sound indicating that symbol fluctuation display is being performed in the common drawing display device 210. The fluctuation display of the decorative symbol and the output of the common drawing fluctuation sound correspond to an example of the common drawing symbol fluctuation presentation. Further, the central spread start gate 251 corresponds to an example of the first entry area.

  Subsequently, when the game ball enters the central general winning opening 226 (corresponding to the timing of (A) shown in FIG. 196), as shown in FIG. In the center of the display screen of the symbol display device 208, a character image 2081 (corresponding to an example of another image) of a panda with a scary face who uttered "Jarjara" is displayed large. That is, a character image 2081 of a panda with a scary face is displayed so as to cover the middle symbol display area 208b in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the speaker 120 outputs a prize ball payout sound of "Jarrajara" that simulates a payout sound. Be done. The display of the character image 2081 of the panda with a scary face and the output of the award ball payout sound “Jarjara” correspond to an example of the award ball payout effect.

  In this specific example, a character image 2081 of a scary-faced panda character is covered with a part of the image of the variation display of the decoration symbol, and a part of the image of the variation display of the decoration symbol (here, the middle symbol display area 208b) disappears ing. In addition, the prize ball payout sound also starts to sound in the middle of the common pattern fluctuation sound, and the prize ball payout sound is heard over the common pattern fluctuation sound. As described above, the common-design symbol variation effect is changed by the winning ball payout effect. As a result, the prize ball payout effect is prioritized, and it becomes easy for the player to notice that the prize balls are being paid out, and it is thought that the ball possession is good, and the impression of the game stand may be improved. That is, since the player never notices the occurrence of the winning balls, it may be possible to make the player and the game stand have a better ball possession than in the case where he does not notice. In addition, the player is more likely to notice the generation of the winning balls because the effect of concentrating the player is changed. Furthermore, since the game ball which has passed central common drawing start gate 251 wins in central general winning a prize opening 226, because it is possible to enjoy the production where common pattern symbol variation production and common pattern design variation production changed with the same game ball The player can enjoy many effects with less investment, and may improve the impression of the game console.

  FIG. 198 is a diagram showing a specific example of a common drawing reserve increase presentation and a prize ball payout presentation in a state in which a common pattern symbol variation presentation is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (a), symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is performed in the common pattern display device 210, and according to this, the decorative symbol display device 208 has a common pattern. The variable display of the decoration pattern is performed. Further, a speaker 120 (not shown) outputs a common drawing fluctuation sound indicating that symbol fluctuation display is being performed in the common drawing display device 210. That is, a common figure symbol variation representation in the symbol variation display is performed.

  Further, in this example, the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 includes a common view hold display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the common view hold storage unit of the RAM 308; The start information is displayed in order from the left in the order in which the start information is stored (in order of winning). The normal drawing hold display is a display indicating that the start information is stored or stored in the first start information storage means (the common view hold storage unit of the RAM 308). That is, the common drawing hold display is performed for each start information of the common drawing stored in the first start information storage means, and the number of the common drawing hold display corresponds to the holding number of the common drawing. The decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the first start hold display means. Each time the first sub control unit 400 receives a general drawing reserve increase command, the second sub control unit 500 transmits a reserve increase instruction for the general drawing to the second sub control unit 500, and the second sub control unit 500, based on the instruction. , And controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to increase the number of common drawing hold display by one. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a common drawing reserve decrease signal to the second sub-control unit 500 every time it receives a common drawing symbol variation start command which is a signal of holding and digesting the common drawing, and the second sub control The section 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the common view reduction decrease signal to reduce the number of common view hold displays by one. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (a), two common drawing reserve displays are displayed. Hereinafter, a generic drawing reserve display representing the older standard drawing reserve (hereinafter referred to as generic drawing reserve 1) will be referred to as a first common drawing reserve display 291 and a newer generic drawing reserve (hereinafter referred to as generic drawing reserve 2) The common view hold display representing) is referred to as a second common view hold display 292. Here, the number of reservations for the common drawing is two.

  If the game ball passes through the central common drawing start gate 251 while the symbol fluctuation display is being performed, the symbol fluctuation display is being performed here, and the number of reserved common drawings is also a predetermined number. Since it is less than 2, start information based on the current passage of the central flat game start gate 251 of the gaming ball is stored in the common view reservation storage unit of the RAM 308, and the number of held general views increases. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 198 (b), the third common drawing reserve display 293 is additionally displayed. The third common drawing hold display 293 displayed here continues to be displayed until the common drawing hold 3 represented by the third common drawing hold display 293 is digested. Further, at the same time as the third common drawing hold display 293 is additionally displayed, a common drawing hold increase sound for notifying that the common drawing hold is increased is outputted from the speaker 120 for a predetermined period. This common view holding increase sound stops ringing before the symbol variation display ends. The additional display of the third common drawing hold display 293 and the output of the common drawing hold increase sound correspond to an example of the common drawing hold increase effect.

  Subsequently, when the game ball enters the central general winning opening 226, as in FIG. 197 (c), a voice of "Jarajarra" is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed. The character image 2081 of the panda with a scary face that utters a large is displayed, and the speaker 120 outputs a prize-ball-dispensing sound called "Jarjara" imitating a disbursed sound (see FIG. 198 (c)). The scared face portion 2081a of the panda displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the middle symbol display area 208b, and the balloon portion 2081b "Jarjara" is displayed on the effect display area 208d. Also in the example shown in FIG. 198, the display of the character image 2081 of the panda with a scary face and the output of the award ball payout sound of "Jarjara" correspond to an example of the award ball payout effect.

  In this specific example, the scary face portion 2081a of the panda is covered with a part of the image of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and a part of the image of the variation display of the decorative symbol (here, the middle symbol display area 208b) is not visible. . In addition, a balloon portion 2081 b “Jarjara” is covered with most parts of the first to third common drawing suspension display 291 to 293 displayed in the effect display area 208 d, and each general drawing suspension display 291 to 291 I can not see 293. In addition, from the middle of the common drawing fluctuation sound representing that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed, first, the common drawing holding increase sound to notify that the holding of the common drawing has increased begins to sound, and the common drawing fluctuation sound is common drawing The hold increase sound is heard over the top. Subsequently, the winning ball payout sound also starts to be emitted, and the winning ball payout sound is heard over the common drawing fluctuation sound and the common drawing holding increase sound. As described above, the common symbol symbol variation effect is changed by the winning ball payout effect, and the general drawing reserve increase effect is also changed by the winning ball payout effect. As a result, it is possible to inform the player who is concentrating on the effect that the winning balls have been generated due to the change in the effect, that is, the effect of the winning ball payout effect being performed, thereby improving the impression of the game console. There are times when you can. That is, by covering a part of the effect image that has been performed so far with the effect image by the prize ball payout effect, it is possible to visually notify that the prize ball has been generated, and the impression of the game stand is improved. There are times when you can. In addition, since the effect sound from the speaker 120 is covered, the generation of the winning balls can be aurally notified.

  In the above description, although the prize ball payout effect was covered by the common symbol symbol fluctuation effect and / or the common figure reserve increase effect, the common pattern symbol variation effect and / or the common figure reserve increase effect was awarded to the ball payout effect It may be a changing aspect.

  FIG. 199 is a time chart in which a common-design symbol variation effect changes to a winning ball payout effect.

  Also in the time chart shown in FIG. 199, when the ball detection sensor provided in the non-profit provided approach area, which is the common drawing start gate 251, 253, detects the entrance of the gaming ball to the common drawing start gate 251, 253. The detection signal changes from non-detection to detection, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 at the timing of (A) shown in the figure, a regular pattern variation effect (a profit non-improved entry area entry effect) is started Ru.

  In addition, when the game ball which has passed central drawing start gate 251 enters central general winning a prize opening 226, the ball detection sensor which is provided in central general winning a prize opening 226 detects the entrance of the gaming ball and the detection signal is non In the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 which have changed from detection to detection and are performing regular symbol symbol variation effect at the timing of (A) shown in the figure, the regular symbol symbol variation effect is ended, and instead an award is given The ball payout effect (profit giving approach area entering effect) is started. Eventually, the award ball payout effect is ended at the timing of (c) shown in the figure.

  FIG. 200 is a diagram showing a specific example of changing from a common-design symbol variation effect to a winning ball payout effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 200 (a), a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols in a common drawing is displayed. That is, it is in the state where the common drawing fluctuation game is stopped. In this state, when the gaming ball passes through the central common drawing start gate 251 (corresponding to the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 199), as shown in FIG. 200 (b) Is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208, the background screen is not patterned. Further, from the speaker 120 (not shown), a first common drawing fluctuation sound indicating that symbol fluctuation display is being performed in the common drawing display device 210 is output. The fluctuation display of the decorative symbol and the output of the first common drawing fluctuation sound correspond to an example of the common drawing symbol fluctuation presentation.

  Soon, as shown in FIG. 200 (c), the symbol of “decor 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a. The display mode of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed here is the default display mode shown in FIG. 183 (b). On the other hand, in each of the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is continued. In addition, the output of the first common fluctuation sound is continued from the speaker 120.

  Subsequently, when the game ball enters the central general winning opening 226 (corresponding to the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 199), as shown in FIG. 200 (d) The background screen of the symbol display device 208 changes from a no pattern background screen to a predetermined background screen (here, a background screen with a cross hatching pattern), and a decorative pattern ("decor 6") of the left pattern display area 208a stopped and displayed earlier. Also, the display mode of “) changes from the default display mode to a predetermined display mode (here, a display mode of black only). In addition, the display mode of the image representing that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, which is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, is also a predetermined display mode (here, a display mode of the horizontal stripe pattern Change to). In addition, the common drawing fluctuation sound outputted from the speaker 120 is also switched from the first common drawing fluctuation sound which has been outputted so far to the second common drawing fluctuation sound. The display of the predetermined display mode of the predetermined background screen and the decorative symbol and the output of the second common drawing fluctuation sound correspond to an example of the prize ball payout effect, and the common pattern symbol fluctuation production to the prize ball payout effect Is changing. In addition, this production | presentation change can also be regarded as a change of a common figure design fluctuation production itself. In any case, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the central general winning opening 226, the effect of changing the common figure symbol fluctuation effect is performed. In addition, the decorative symbol which has been changed to the predetermined display mode remains changed to the predetermined display mode until the symbol variation display in the common view display device 210 is finished, and the timing when the symbol variation display is finished, that is, the stop symbol is At the displayed timing, the display mode returns to the default display mode, or changes to another display mode. In addition, the common drawing fluctuation sound changed to the second common drawing fluctuation sound also remains changed to the second common drawing fluctuation sound until the symbol fluctuation display on the common drawing display device 210 is finished, and the symbol fluctuation display is When it is finished, the common-mode fluttering noise itself stops ringing.

  As described above, the common symbol symbol variation effect itself is changed by the establishment of the prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as the winning on the central general prize winning opening 226, and the payout of the prize ball is performed. It may be easier for the person to notice, the ball holding may be good, and the impression of the game console may be improved.

  FIG. 201 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the common drawing reserve increase presentation is changed in the state where the common design symbol variation presentation is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 201 (a), symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is performed in the common pattern display device 210, and according to this, the decorative symbol display device 208 has a common pattern. The variable display of the decoration pattern is performed. Further, a speaker 120 (not shown) outputs a common drawing fluctuation sound indicating that symbol fluctuation display is being performed in the common drawing display device 210. That is, also in the specific example shown in FIG. 201, a common figure symbol variation effect in the symbol variation display is performed. Furthermore, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 201 (a), a first common drawing reservation display 291 representing the common drawing reservation 1 and a second common drawing reservation display 292 representing the common drawing reservation 2 Is displayed.

  If the game ball passes through the central common drawing start gate 251 while the symbol variation display is being performed, the number of reserved common drawings also increases here, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 201 (b) In the effect display area 208d, a third common drawing reserve display 293 is additionally displayed. In FIG. 201 (b), three common drawing hold displays, that is, the first common drawing hold display 291 to the third common drawing hold display 293, are displayed, but any hold display is also a default display mode. And it is displayed in the display mode of only black. Further, at the same time as the third common drawing hold display 293 is additionally displayed, the speaker 120 outputs a first common drawing hold increase sound notifying that holding of the common drawing has increased for a predetermined period. The additional display of the third common drawing holding display 293 and the output of the first common drawing holding increase sound correspond to an example of the common drawing holding increase effect.

  Subsequently, when the gaming ball enters the central general winning opening 226, as shown in FIG. 6C, the display mode of the third common drawing reservation display 293, which is the default display mode, changes to a predetermined display mode. . That is, among the three common drawing reservation displays 291 to 293 displayed in the default display form, the display mode of only the third common drawing reservation display 293 increased this time is a predetermined display form (here, a horizontal stripe pattern). Change. In addition, the common view holding increase sound output from the speaker 120 also switches from the first common view holding increase sound that has been output so far to the second common view holding increase sound. The display according to the predetermined display mode in the third common drawing hold display 293 and the output of the second common drawing hold increase sound correspond to an example of the prize ball payout effect, and from the common view hold increment effect to the prize ball payout effect The production is changing. In addition, this production | presentation change can also be regarded as a change of the common drawing reservation increase production itself. In any case, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the central general winning opening 226, the effect of changing the general drawing reserve increase effect is performed. In addition, even if it has been changed to the predetermined display mode until the end of the symbol variation display, the third common drawing suspension display 293 which has been changed to the predetermined display mode is digested the hold 3 and the third common figure reservation is suspended It may be changed to a predetermined display mode until the display 293 itself disappears. Further, the common drawing holding increase sound changed to the second common drawing holding increase sound continues to sound while changing to the second common drawing hold increase sound, and stops ringing before the symbol variation display is finished.

  As described above, the establishment of the prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as the winning on the central general prize winning opening 226 causes a change in the general drawing reserve increase effect itself here, and the payout of the prize ball is performed. In particular, the player is likely to notice, the ball holding may be considered good, and the impression of the game stand may be improved.

  Next, in the specific example shown in FIG. 201, the third common drawing suspension display 293 changed to the predetermined display mode remains changed to the predetermined display mode at least until the symbol variation display ends. An example of returning to the default display mode before the end of the symbol variation display will be described.

  FIG. 202 is a diagram showing an example of returning to the popular drawing reserve increase presentation after the effect has been changed from the regular drawing reserve increase presentation to the award ball payout presentation.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 202 (a), a popular drawing reserve increase effect (a profit non-granting approach area entering effect) is started at the timing shown in (a) in the figure, and at a timing shown in (a) in the figure. The figure hold increase effect is temporarily changed to a prize ball payout effect (profit provision approach area entry effect). Then, after the award ball payout effect is performed for a predetermined period, at the timing shown in (c) in the figure, the routine returns to the general drawing reserve increase effect (effect non-entering approach area entry effect).

  The drawing of (i) in FIG. 202 (b) is a view showing the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (i) shown in FIG. 202 (a) for each layer. The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (A) shown in FIG. 202 (a) is a background image, an image indicating that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and three suspension display images. Become. Of these three pending display images, the image of the first common view pending display 291 and the image of the second common view pending display 292 are both images according to the default display mode, that is, an image of no pattern and solid black color . On the other hand, the image of the third common drawing reservation display 293 is changed to an image with black horizontal stripes on a white background due to the award ball payout effect.

  The background image is drawn on the first layer L1 which is displayed on the far side as viewed from the player, and the image showing that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed is the second layer one layer before the first layer L1. It is drawn in L2.

  The images 291 to 293 of the three common drawing suspension display are drawn on the third layer L3 that is one before the second layer L2. All of the images of the three general drawing suspension displays drawn on the third layer L3 are all non-patterned and black only images (black circle images) 290b. In the fourth layer L4, which is located one layer before the third layer L3, a black horizontal stripe is added to the white background at a position overlapping the black circle image of the third general drawing reserve display 293 drawn in the third layer L3. An image 290 w is displayed. Here, the fourth layer L4 is the layer that is displayed closest to the player as viewed from the player. In the image of the third common drawing reserve display 293, a black circle image 290b drawn on the third layer L3 is superimposed on a white background image drawn on the fourth layer L4 with a black horizontal stripe image 290w superimposed on the black circle image 290b. Can not be seen, and an image 290 w with black horizontal stripes on a white background drawn on the fourth layer L 4 can be seen.

  The drawing (b) in FIG. 202 (b) is a view showing the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (c) shown in the same drawing (a), for each layer. The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (b) shown in FIG. 202 (b) is also a background image, an image showing that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and three suspension display images. Become. The images of the three suspension displays here are all images (black circle images) according to the default display mode. That is, the image of the third common drawing reserve display 293 which has been changed by the prize ball payout effect becomes an image (black circle image) according to the default display mode by returning to the common drawing reserve increase effect. In the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (c) shown in FIG. 202 (a), the first layer L1 to the third layer L3 in the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (i) are used as they are , And only the fourth layer L4 need not be drawn. As a result, the image 290w with black horizontal stripes on a white background is hidden, and the image of the third common view hold display 293 also returns to the black circle image, that is, the default display mode. In this aspect, the addition of processing for drawing can be reduced.

  Subsequently, in the specific example so far, the prize ball payout effect has been started at the timing when the gaming ball passes through the central general winning opening 226, but an example will be described in which the prize ball payout effect is started a little later .

  FIG. 203 is a diagram showing an example in which the award ball payout effect is started slightly behind the timing when the gaming ball passes through the central general winning opening 226.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 203 (a), a general drawing reserve increase effect (a profit non-granting approach area entry effect) is started at the timing shown in FIG. It is detected that the ball has passed through the central general winning opening 226, but at this timing, the general drawing reserve increase effect does not change to the prize ball payout effect (profit provision entry area entry effect), and a predetermined period has elapsed, or Based on a predetermined trigger that occurs thereafter, the general drawing reserve increase effect is temporarily changed to a prize ball payout effect at the timing shown in FIG. Specifically, the predetermined trigger here may be that a predetermined effect (for example, a super reach or the like) is executed by the common symbol symbol variation effect. Then, after the award ball payout effect is performed for a predetermined period, the process returns to the general drawing reserve increase effect (effect non-entering approach area entry effect) at the timing shown in FIG.

  The drawing of (c) in FIG. 203 (b) is a view showing the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (c) shown in FIG. The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (c) shown in FIG. Become. Of these three pending display images, the image of the first common view pending display 291 and the image of the second common view pending display 292 are all images according to the default display mode, that is, an image without pattern and black only (black circle Image). On the other hand, in the image of the third common drawing reserve display 293, the image of the black circle is changed to an image in which white horizontal stripes are added to the black circle due to the prize ball payout effect.

  Also in this example, the background image is drawn on the first layer L1, and the image representing that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is drawn on the second layer L2.

  In addition, the images 291 to 293 of the three common drawing suspension display are drawn on the third layer L3. Also in this case, the images of the three general drawing suspension displays drawn in the third layer L3 are all non-patterned and black only images (black circle images) 290b. In the fourth layer L4, an image 290s with only white horizontal stripes is displayed at a position overlapping the black circle image of the third general drawing reserve display 293 drawn in the third layer L3. In the image of the third common drawing reserve display 293, the white circle stripe image 290s drawn in the fourth layer L4 overlaps the black circle image 290b drawn in the third layer L3 so that the white circle is added with the white circle stripe. It looks like an image. That is, although a part of the black circle image 290b is covered by the white horizontal stripe image 290s, the remaining part of the black circle image 290b is visible, and the black circle image 290b and the black circle image 290b drawn in the third layer L3 , And an image 290s of only white horizontal stripes drawn on the fourth layer L4 is an image.

  The drawing of (D) in FIG. 203 (b) is a view showing the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (D) shown in FIG. The three pending display images here are also images in the default display mode (black circle images). That is, the image of the third common drawing reserve display 293 which has been changed by the prize ball payout effect becomes an image (black circle image) according to the default display mode by returning to the common drawing reserve increase effect. Even in the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (D) shown in FIG. 203 (a), the first layer L1 to the third layer L3 in the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing of (C) are used as they are , And only the fourth layer L4 need not be drawn. As a result, the white horizontal stripe only image 290 s is hidden, and the image of the third common view retention display 293 also returns to the black circle image 290 b, that is, the default display mode. Also in this aspect, the addition of drawing processing can be reduced.

  In the state where the prize ball payout effect is being performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 197 (c), in the state where the character image 2081 of the panda character with a scary face who uttered "Jarrajara" is displayed When the game ball enters (winning) the central blowup start gate 251 and wins the hit by the passability judgment based on the winning, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect instructing to perform a right-handed hit) Is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a predetermined effect is covered in a balloon portion 2081b "Jarjara" which is a part of the award ball payout effect, and the prize ball payout effect changes.

  In addition, even when it is not done the production which directs to do the right strike, doing the common figure design fluctuation production with the decoration design display 208, by stopping and displaying the decoration design which displays the decision result of the common drawing There are cases where the player can recognize that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric symbol 252 is opened.

  Also, in the above description, the entry of the game ball into the central flat figure starting gate 251 and the central central winning hole 226 below it has been described as an example, but it is arranged on the right flat figure starting gate 251 and below The same applies to the special-figure starting opening 230 where entry of the game ball is enabled when the door member 2521 of the common-use electric symbol 252 is opened. The same is true for the other general winning opening 226 and the entry area where the winning balls are paid out, not limited to the central general winning opening 226 below the central blowup start gate 251.

  Furthermore, in the above description, the output of the effect sound (for example, the award ball payout sound) is performed using the speaker 120, but the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 152 are on the upper plate 126 or the upper plate 126. The collision sound generated by the collision with the stored game ball may be used as the effect sound (for example, a winning ball payout sound). By doing this, the player may be able to further recognize the occurrence of a profit because the collision sound is directed to the player from a direction different from that of the speaker 120.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a second example of the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the following description, items that overlap with the items described above will be described again. Further, components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as the symbols used so far.

  FIG. 204 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 of the second embodiment as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In this effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, around which a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and an ordinary symbol display device A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In the following, the normal symbol may be referred to as a "common figure", and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special symbol".

  The rendering device 206 operates the rendering movable body 224 to perform rendering, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and in the present embodiment, is configured by a liquid crystal display (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a seven-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLumine S3ence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs in this embodiment. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 in the form of enhanced effect, and the decorative symbol is displayed. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The common drawing reserve lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (generally described common fluctuation game to be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the predetermined number of common drawing fluctuation games It is possible to hold up to (for example, 4).

  The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second change games (special game change games to be described later in detail) being held. In the example, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure for a special figure variation game). The term "pending" as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (lottery process etc.) based on start information described later is suspended.

  The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for giving a notification indicating the current symbol control state. The high-probability-in-progress lamp 222 provides notification of the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on to the start of the big hit game, and thereafter is configured not to indicate the current symbol control state There is. Also, in the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state is restored immediately before the power is shut off. Although this symbol control state will be described later, the symbol control state here may be any of a normal state, a short time state (power support state), and a positive change state, and a state with special view positive change and It may be one of the states without special figure probability change.

  In this specification, the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100), but the term "control state" includes the concept of so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are disposed around the effect device 206 ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 If the player wins a prize, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 179 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as a winning ball onto the upper tray 126 shown in FIG. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning. The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize balls", and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "lending balls". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general drawing start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special drawing start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special view start opening 230 is a first start area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters is not changed. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 179 is driven to drive a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a prize ball While discharging to 126, the special figure fluctuation game by the 1st special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. The first special drawing start port 230 is one of the start areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed start area whose size does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special drawing start opening 232 is disposed below the common drawing start opening 228. That is, the second special view start port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. A pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed to the left and right by a solenoid is provided in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start opening 232 is It corresponds to a variable start means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the degree of difficulty of winning to the second special view start opening 232. That is, it is impossible to enter the second special view start port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode that is difficult to win. On the other hand, when it is elected to the common drawing fluctuating game and the common drawing display device 210 hits and displays the stop symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and to the second special drawing start opening 232 The ball can enter the ball (in a state where winning is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state in which winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special view starting opening 232 is either small size (corresponding to the first size) or large size (corresponding to the second size). This is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball is variable from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special view start port 230. When the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball entering the game area 124 is the second special feature which is a variable start area than the game ball entering the first special view start port 230 which is a fixed start area. There are more gaming balls entering the figure starting opening 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the central portion of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 which can open and close the variable winning opening by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from either one of the predetermined closed state and the open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening than the closed state, to the other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. In the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment, the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200 It is in a stationary state that matches the face. On the other hand, the open state is the predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning opening 234 in this embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 maintains the closed state until the big hit game is started, and repeats the state change between the open state and the closed state when the big hit of the special figure is won and the big hit game is started. The variable winning opening 234 corresponds to an example of a winning device according to the present invention, and winning the jackpot of the special figure corresponds to an example that the second condition according to the present invention is satisfied. In the closed state, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed, a state in which the game ball is slightly open to a substantially impossible level may be used. In addition, the variable winning opening may be any winning combination of game balls as game balls pass through or enter, etc., and is not limited to the one shown in FIG. When the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball which has not won a prize to any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

The ball contained in the upper tray 126 is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven at a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148 to the game area 124 Launch. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.
<Rendering device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling the ball discharged from the warp outlet 242 b, the ball riding up by the game nail 238, etc. The passed ball enters the first special view starting opening 230 at the center of the stage 244. There is a special route 244a that makes it easy to hit the ball.

  The effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitates the upper arm and the forearm of a human right arm in this embodiment, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) rotate the upper arm 224a to the shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a grid-like left door 246 a and a right door 246 b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are respectively fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right with the operation of a belt driven by a motor via a pulley. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 has its inner end portions overlapped, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the player can not visually recognize it. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the inner end of each slightly overlaps with the outer end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can view all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol to the extent that the player can identify which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. It is possible to shield the The left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the rear to be visible from the hole of the grid, or the shoji portion of the hole of the grid may be closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely viewed by the player, or the shoji portion of the hole of the lattice is completely blocked (blocked), and the rear decorative symbol display device 208 is not visible at all. It is also good.

  The decorative lamp such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 204, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208 is an image display means Corresponds to one example.

The circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 in the second embodiment is basically the same as the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.
<Type of symbol>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (d), the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the normal symbol display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 stop display. The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described.

  FIG. 205 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form (second symbol form) of the special view. A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball entered the first special drawing starting opening 230, and the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 is a ball A special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor which is a ball | bowl detection sensor detected that it had entered ball. When the special figure 1 variation game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of one central segment “the variation indication of the special figure 1” (special figure Play the fluctuation game). Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment “variation display of special figure 2” ( Perform special feature variation game). Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 When has passed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special view 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of this "variation display of special figure 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the fluctuation stop indication of the special figure. The variable stop display of this special view may be performed several times continuously.

  In FIG. 205 (a), six types of special views, "special view A" to "special view F", are shown as stop symbol modes in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 205 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  In the present embodiment, four types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure D") are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special view. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) special jackpot symbol, and when special figure A is stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. The "special figure B" is a 15R big hit symbol with a power support, and when the special figure B is stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes the special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. The "special figure C" is a 4R big hit symbol with a probability change, and when the special figure C is stopped and displayed, the control state then becomes a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. The "special figure D" is a 4R big hit design, and when the special figure D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state.

  The term "round" as used herein means the number of chances of acquiring a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls). In this embodiment, the number of times of operation of the variable winning opening 234 shown in FIG. 204 is represented, and 15 rounds means one or more opening and closing operations of the variable winning opening 234 one time (one operation), This means that this operation lasts 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / closed state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, this specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round is among the entry of game balls of a predetermined round end condition (for example, a predetermined number of balls (10 balls as an example), acquisition of a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls), and lapse of predetermined time from the start of the round End when one or more of In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The big hit by the special figure A and the special figure by the special figure C have a high probability of winning the big hit in the next special figure fluctuation game (special big hit or time big hit). Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In this embodiment, during the big hit game, it moves to the special figure low probability state, and when it wins the special figure A or the special figure C, the special figure high probability state is maintained until the next big hit after the big hit game end. Be done. On the other hand, when the special view B or the special view D is won, the special view low probability state remains even after the big hit game is over. The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of the first probability control state. In addition, special figure high probability state after the big hit game end may be called special figure definite change, the state where the probability of winning the big hit after the big hit game end is high (special figure high probability state) is the player The control state in which the degree of advantage of V.sub.2 is high corresponds to an example of the second probability control state. This special figure high probability state may be called a definite change state. In this specification, the term "control state" is used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100), but the term "control state" includes the concept of so-called gaming state. The transition of the probability control state is performed by the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the probability control state transition means.

  In addition, when the special figure A or special figure B is won, after the big hit game ends, it shifts to the state with electric power support (power support) (hereinafter referred to as power support state). The power support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-power support state, for example, by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. Say This power-supply state is one of the control states prepared for this pachinko machine 100, and may also be referred to as a time saving state. That is, the power support state (time saving state) is started on condition of the end of the big hit game. Strictly speaking, the "power support state" is a state of a general view, and the "time-short state" is a state of a special view or a general view and a special view. The time saving flag is also prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the time saving flag is set to ON, it is in the power support state and in the general drawing high probability state. It is easier to win the popular map fluctuating game in the popular drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state (general drawing positive change). For example, the winning probability of the common drawing fluctuation game is 1/101 in the common drawing low probability state (non-power support state), but increases to 99/101 in the common drawing high probability state (power support state). In addition, in the power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game is shorter than in the non-power support state (general drawing change short). For example, in the non-power support state, the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation game of 10 seconds is shortened to 1.2 seconds in the power support state. Further, in the power-on state, the open time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special view start port 232 tends to be longer than in the non-power-on state (power-tw open period extension). For example, in the non-electric support state, the power Chu open period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, in the power-on state, the pair of blade members 2321 is more likely to open (increase in the number of times of power-on opening) than in the non-power-on state. For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that opens only once in the non-power-sustaining state per one winning to the common drawing start port 228 opens three times in the power-sending state (for example, 3 seconds of opening for 1.7 seconds) Times repeated, the closing time between opening and closing is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special view starting opening 232 is increased by the extension of the power chewing open period and the increase in the number of power chewing open. In addition, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, during the big hit game, the non-power support state is maintained. This is the power support state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many gaming balls in the second special view starting port 232 until the game ball enters the ball There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be hit and won during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, which is to solve this. In the present embodiment, in the power-supply state (short-time state), all of the generalization probability change, generalization variation short-circuiting, power-chul open period extension, and the increase in the number of power-chul opening are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's degree of advantage is high, and may be set to the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, the electric support state (shorting state) may be set if either the electric-chu open period extension or the electric-chu open number increase is performed, which increases the probability of entering the second special view starting opening 232. . In the non-power-supply state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second special view start opening 232 than in the power-supply state. As described above, in the second special view start opening 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other. In the second special figure starting port 232, the entrance is large in size in the power-sap state for a longer period of time than in the non-power-sap state. In the present embodiment, when the special view A is displayed in a stop state, after the end of the big hit game performed thereafter, the power support state (general drawing high probability state) is maintained until the next big hit game is started. When the stop display is displayed, after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter, the power support state is maintained while the special figure fluctuation game is performed 100 times, and the 101st time is in the non power support state (general drawing low probability state) Transition. On the other hand, when the jackpot is won with no power support (special view C, special view D), it does not shift to the power support state after the end of the jackpot game. In the non-electric support state, the second special view start port 232 maintains the entrance at a small size. On the other hand, as described above, in the power-on state, the second Toku-zu start port 232 has a large-sized entrance, and the entry rate of the game balls is increased. That is, in the non-power support state, the gaming ball enters the second special view start opening 232 which is the variable start area at the first entry rate, while in the power support state, the gaming ball starts the second special view The mouth 232 is approached at a second approach rate higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-power support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the power support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the stop symbol of the special figure E is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for up to only 1.5 seconds per one operation. In the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of gaming value (predetermined number of balls) If it does, the second and subsequent opening will not be performed. During the small hit game, transition to the special figure low probability spread map low probability state. The small hit is a part whose control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the small hit game starts after the small hit game is over. In addition, you may prepare small hit symbols (for example, 2nd small hit symbols etc.) other than "special EI."

  In the big hit game and the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 performs one or more opening and closing operations, and the player's advantage is relatively high.

  Also, a special figure F shown in FIG. 205 (a) is a lost design. When this lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 does not open and close, and the player's advantage is relatively low. In addition, a missing symbol (for example, a second missing symbol etc.) other than the "special figure F" may be further prepared.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second advantage hit control state (big hit control state and small hit control state) in which the player has a high degree of advantage, and the second advantage from the second advantage. The loss control state of the first advantage degree with low degree of advantage is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 is either one of the hit control state (second control state) and the loss control state (first control state). Take control state. The transition of these control states is also performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 also corresponds to an example of a special gaming state giving unit. In the small hit control state, although the door member 2341 of the variable winning hole 234 performs the opening and closing operation, since entering the variable winning hole 234 can hardly be expected, the small hit control state is the first advantageous. It can also be regarded as a degree of control state (first control state).

  Also, the jackpot has a jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player and a jackpot that is relatively disadvantageous. In terms of the number of rounds, the 15R system big hit (special figure A, special figure B) corresponds to an advantageous big hit, and the 4R system big hit (special figure C, special figure D) corresponds to an adverse big hit. In addition, the jackpot according to the special view A and the jackpot according to the special view C correspond to the advantageous jackpot according to whether or not the definite variation is attached, and the jackpot according to the special view B and the jackpot according to the special drawing D correspond to the disadvantageous jackpot. The big hit success / failure determination result relatively advantageous to these players corresponds to an example of the specific success / failure determination result, and the big hit control state relatively advantageous to the player corresponds to one example of the special game state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "special figure A" is prepared as the big hit symbol 1, and the same applies to other symbols such as the big hit symbol 2.

  The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are notification means for notifying the success / failure determination result (lottery result), and symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after starting symbol fluctuation It corresponds to an example of the symbol display means which performs symbol variation display until the special image A to the special image F is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 205 (b) shows an example of the decorative symbol of the special view. There are ten types of "design 1" to "design 10" in the decorative design of the special view of this embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "variation display of the decoration figure of the special figure" to change the. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol of the special view separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode (effect symbol mode), which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the special drawing, is stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying a large hit (special figure A to special figure D), "combination 1 of the decorative symbols" (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative") in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop display of 1) and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". In the case of reporting a big hit other than the probability change big hit (special figure A or special figure C) in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability) or the normal gaming state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability) , "The combination 2 of the decoration pattern in which the same odd decorative pattern is arranged in three in the pattern display area 208a to 208c (for example," decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3 "or" decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7 ", etc. Stop display). When the small hit (special figure E) is to be notified, "the combination 3 of decoration symbols" (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5", etc.) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Moreover, when notifying "special figure F" which is a loss, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, other than "combination 1 of decorative symbols", "combination 2 of decorative symbols" and "combination 3 of decorative symbols" Stop and display the combination of decorative symbols (for example, loose eyes). Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, from the start of the "variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect (for example, "combination 2 of the decorative symbol") of the decorative symbol of the special figure A series of displays of may be referred to as a special stop symbol of the decorative symbol of the special figure.

  In addition, the stop symbol form (see FIG. 205 (a)) of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 and the decoration of one special figure displayed in each of the left, middle and right symbol display areas 208a to c of the decorative symbol display device 208 As for the stop symbol form of the symbol (see the same figure (b)), the decorative symbol (see the same figure (b)) of the special figure is larger.

  FIG. 205 (c) shows an example of the stop symbol form (first symbol form) of the common figure. There are three types of stop display modes of the common drawing of this embodiment, "one common drawing A" which is a hit symbol 1, "common drawing B" which is a hit symbol 2, and "common drawing C" which is a lost symbol. . The "common figure A" which is the hit symbol 1 is a common hit corresponding to an open with a relatively short opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232, and the hit symbol 2 B "is a common drawing hit where the opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 is relatively long. Based on the fact that the ball sensor has detected that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 detects that all seven segments are lit and one central segment. Repeat “Lighting” “variable display of common drawing” (common drawing fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, any one of the three types of symbols is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 205 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation stop display of the common drawing. The common view display device 210 corresponds to an example of the auxiliary symbol notification means.

  FIG. 205 (d) shows an example of a decorative symbol of a common figure. There are three types of decoration designs of common drawing of the common drawing of the present embodiment. The effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the common drawing start opening sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start opening 228, that is, the ball has entered the common drawing start opening 228. In the predetermined area, which is the central portion of, the display is changed in the order of “decoration ○” → “decoration」 ”→. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol of the common drawing separately from the common drawing display device 210. Then, the stop symbol mode (effect symbol mode) of the decorative symbol of the common figure is stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying the hit symbol 1 (common symbol A) of the common drawing, the "description ○" which is the common drawing decoration 1 is stopped and displayed on the predetermined area of the decorative symbol display device 208. When notifying the hit pattern 2 (common figure B) of the common drawing, “decoration」 ”which is the common drawing decoration 2 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the lost figure (general drawing C) of the common drawing, the "description x" which is the common drawing decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of operations from the start of the "variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect (for example, the common drawing decoration 2) of the decorative symbol of the common drawing. The display may be referred to as a floating stop display of a decorative symbol of a common figure.

In addition, the stop symbol aspect (refer to FIG. 205 (c)) of the common drawing A and the common drawing B and the stop symbol aspect (the same drawing of the decorative symbol of one common drawing displayed in the predetermined area of the decorative symbol display device 208). As for (d), the decorative symbol (see (d) in the figure) in the common figure is larger.
<Main control unit control processing>

  Next, the main control unit main processing performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the second embodiment is the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 184 performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the first embodiment. The description is omitted because it is the same.

  Subsequently, a main control unit timer interrupt process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing a flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing in the second embodiment.

  The pachinko machine 100 in the second embodiment has two types of special views such as special view 1 and special view 2, and the lottery based on the winning of the second special view start opening 232 (judgment determination of the special view 2) Priority is given to the drawing based on the winning of the first special drawing start port 230 (the determination of success or failure of the special drawing 1). In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, when the game ball enters the first special start area, the random number is stored in the first random number storage area up to the maximum holding number, and the second special start is performed. A prize storage unit that stores random numbers up to the maximum number of pending numbers in the second random number storage area when gaming balls win in the area, and both the first random number storage area and the second random number storage area Regardless of when the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area and when the random number value is stored in the second random number value storage area. While making a yes / no determination based on the random number value stored in the second random number value storage area, no random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area, and the second random number value storage When a random value is stored in the area, the second random Judgment determination is performed based on the random number value stored in the value storage area, the random number value is not stored in the second random number value storage area, and the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area In the case where it is determined, there is provided a propriety determination means for performing the propriety determination based on the random number value stored in the first random number value storage area. Further, the notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special view fluctuation game by the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 is performed by the main control unit 300, and the winning of the second special view start opening 232 Based on the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment based on the winning a prize to the first special figure starting port 230 is given priority over the notification of the result of the success or failure judgment based on winning, start information of the special figure 1 When the start information of the special figure 2 is newly stored in the state where only the start information of the special figure 1 among the start information of the special figure 2 remains, the start of the newly stored special figure 2 is newly stored. Notification of the result of the pass / fail determination based on the information is performed prior to notification of the result of the pass / fail determination based on the start information of the special view 1 that has already been stored. In addition, when the start information is stored in both of the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means, the start information acquisition means for obtaining the start information stores the second start information. In the case where the start information is acquired from the storage means and the start information is stored in one of the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means, the start information is stored. The start information is acquired from the information storage means.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process in the second embodiment, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process for the special figure 2 (special figure 2 The state update process is performed (step S 1225), and then the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S 1227). When the special figure state update processing in step S1225 and step S1227 is finished, special figure related lottery processing is performed for special figure 1 and special figure 2 respectively. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes this special drawing-related lottery process corresponds to an example of the pass / fail determination unit. Main control unit 300 first performs processing for special drawing 2 (special drawing 2 related lottery processing) (step S1229), and then performs processing for special drawing 1 (special drawing 1 related drawing processing) (step S1231) ). As described above, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process prior to the special figure 1 related lottery process, based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first special figure starting opening 230 at the same timing. Start information is obtained, and start information is obtained based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special view start opening 232, or the start condition of the special view 2 change game, and the start of the special view 1 change game Even if the conditions are satisfied at the same time, and even if both the start condition of the special figure 2 change game and the start condition of the special figure 1 change game are satisfied, the special figure 2 change game is in the process of being changed first. Figure 1 Fluctuation game does not start fluctuating.

  Further, the special drawing prefetching process is performed after the winning reception process S1217 is performed and before the special drawing state updating process is performed (step S1224).

  FIG. 207A is a flow chart showing the flow of the special view prefetching process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300.

  First, in step S1224a, whether or not there is an increase in the start information of the special view 2, that is, the start information about the special view 2 (special figure 2 winning random number, for big hit) It is determined whether the special figure 2 random number value and the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination random number value are added, and if it is increased (if it is added), prefetching the start information of the increased special figure 2 Then, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 is determined in advance (step S1224b). In step S1224b, first, the start information of the special view 2 is prefetched from the holding storage unit of the special view 2. That is, triggered by the winning of the second special drawing start port 232, the start information generated based on the winning is prefetched. Therefore, before the start information is acquired in the pass / fail determination (special drawing 2 related lottery process in step S1229 shown in FIG. 206), the start information is prefetched. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this pre-reading corresponds to an example of the start information pre-reading means. In the pre-reading here, only the winning portion (hold increase) is pre-reading, but all may be pre-reading. In addition, although pre-reading here means reading start information prior to the pass / fail judgment (the main lottery), in the following explanation, the word “pre-reading” refers to the word “pre-reading (the main judgment or the like Sometimes used in the sense of reading).

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, there are prepared a table for prior judgment of a special figure shown in FIG. 207 (b) and a table for a prior judgment of a special figure shown in FIG. 207 (c).

  When the start information is preread, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines in advance the success / failure determination result in the special drawing 2 related lottery process to be performed in the future and the symbol to be stopped based on the preread start information. More specifically, CPU 304 of main control unit 300 first refers to the probability change flag, and uses the table for the special feature predetermination shown in FIG. Based on 0 to 65535), it is possible to predetermine whether the result of the success or failure judgment is the result of the big hit, the result of the small hit, or the result of the failure. . That is, triggered by the winning of the second special view starting opening 232, whether the success or failure judgment result based on the starting information generated based on the winning is the big hit success or failure judgment result (specific success or failure judgment result) Determine in advance. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 which performs this predetermination corresponds to an example of the predetermination means, and the result of the predetermination here is treated as the special view 2 acceptance / disapproval decision result.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a special drawing suitability determination table having the same content as the content of the special feature restriction prior determination table shown in FIG. 207 (b) is stored. Whether this special drawing suitability determination table or the special character qualification prior determination table shown in FIG. 207 (b), the big hit probability is 1/320 in the special figure low probability state (non-power support state) On the other hand, it rises to 1/32 in the special figure high probability state (power support state). On the other hand, the small hit probability is 1/100 even in the special figure low probability state (non-power support state) or the special figure high probability state (power support state).

  Next, when the special figure 2 success or failure predetermination result is a big hit, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 uses the special figure predetermination table shown in FIG. Based on the special figure 2 random number value (possible numerical range is 0 to 99), prior determination of the jackpot symbol to be the stop symbol is performed. The prior determination of the special view here is also executed before the acceptance determination (special figure 2 related lottery processing) based on the start information read ahead is performed, and the result of the prior determination here is treated as the special view 2 prior determination result . The pre-judgment of the jackpot symbol in this case corresponds to predetermining which kind of jackpot among the kinds of jackpots prepared a plurality of types. In addition, in the second embodiment, only one small hit symbol and one lost symbol are prepared. Therefore, when the special figure 2 pre-decision result is a small hit or a loss, it is unique. Special figure 2 pre-judgment result is obtained.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, a special drawing determination table having the same contents as the contents of the special drawing prior determination table shown in FIG. 207 (c) is stored. If the jackpot type of the special drawing of the second embodiment is described in detail with reference to the special drawing prior determination table shown in FIG. 207 (c), the jackpot symbol 1 (special drawing A) or the big hit symbol 2 (special drawing B) In the big hit game started by stop display, one round is performed 15 times in which the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 30 seconds (however, the variable winning opening 234 is closed when 10 balls are won). In the big hit game started with the big hit symbol 3 (special symbol C) or the big hit symbol 4 (special symbol D) being stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is opened for 30 seconds (however, the variable winning opening 234 is One round will be held four times to close when 10 balls are won. In addition, the winning probability of jackpot symbol 1 (special image A) is the highest at 50%.

  In step S1224c following step S1224b, the stop symbol information (special figure 2 advance determination result) of special figure 2 obtained in step S1224b is stored in the special figure 2 preliminary determination result storage area prepared in RAM 308, and step S1224d move on.

  On the other hand, if the start information in the special view 2 does not increase in the determination in step S1224a, the process proceeds to step S1224d, and no pre-reading or prior determination of the start information in the special view 2 is performed.

  In step S1224d, this time, whether or not there is an increase in the start information of special figure 1 (special figure 1 winning random value, special figure 1 random number value for big hit, and special figure 1 fluctuation time determination random number). It is determined whether one set of random numbers has been added to the reserve storage unit of the special figure 1 provided, and if it is increased (if added), then the current control state is the power supply state Is determined with reference to the short time flag prepared in the RAM 308 (step S1224e), and if the current control state is the non-power support state (if the short time flag is in the off state), step S1224f is performed. Go to

  In step S1224f, similarly to step S1224b described above, first, the start information of the special view 1 is prefetched from the hold storage unit of the special view 1. Then, similarly to step S1224b, using the table for special judgment of FIG. 207 (b), the result of special judgment of special figure 1 is obtained based on the prefetched start information (special figure 1 winning random number value). Subsequently, when the special figure 1 success or failure predetermination result is a big hit, as in step S 1224 b, the pre-read start information (for big hit special search) using the special figure predetermination table shown in FIG. Based on (Figure 1 random number value), the special figure 1 advance decision result is acquired.

  In step S 1224 g following step S 1224 f, the stop symbol information (special figure 1 preliminary determination result) of special figure 1 obtained in step S 1224 f is stored in the special figure 1 preliminary determination result storage area prepared in RAM 308. It returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown.

  In this special view look-ahead process, only the prior determination of the stop symbol of the special view was performed, but based on the random number value for special view change time determination among the read-ahead start information, advance of the special view change time The determination may be performed, and the predetermination result of the fluctuation time (the special map fluctuation time predetermination result) may be stored in the predetermination result storage area. Moreover, it may replace with fluctuation time and may determine beforehand the production | presentation aspect (fluctuation pattern) in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. In this embodiment, the variation time of the special figure and the effect mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated with one to one, and it is considered that selecting the variation time means that the variation pattern is selected. It can also be done. Furthermore, the presentation mode may be divided into groups, and for example, only a group of “off / normal reach loss” or a group of “reach A out / reach B loss” may be drawn. Or, it belongs to the group of reach production of “per normal reach, per normal reach loss, per reach A, per reach B, per reach A, per reach B” or “very short loss, short loss, loss, chance eyes all off” It may be determined in advance whether it belongs to a group without reach.

  The prior determination information (information representing the special figure prior determination result) newly stored in the preliminary determination result storage area of the RAM 308 is command data of the special view reserve increase command as information of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 determined in advance And is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400.

  On the other hand, if the start information in the special view 1 does not increase in the determination in step S1224 d shown in FIG. 207 (a), the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. There is no pre-judgment.

  Also, even if the current control state is the power support state (time reduction flag is on) in step S1224e, the pre-reading and pre-judgment of the start information of the special view 1 are not performed, and in these cases, the increase this time The “not determined” information representing that the pass / fail determination based on the start information of the selected special figure 1 and the prior determination of the stop symbol are not performed is stored in the special figure 1 prior determination result storage area (step S1224 h), FIG. It returns to the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In addition, based on the big hit game being started, the area in which the special figure 1 preliminary determination result is stored in the special figure 1 preliminary determination result storage area is rewritten to “not determined” information. Further, in the second embodiment, if the undetermined information setting condition (during power saving state) is satisfied, the pre-reading of the start information itself is not performed but the pre-reading is performed and the pre-determination is not performed. Furthermore, although pre-reading and pre-judging are performed, the main control unit 300 may not send the result to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 obtains the special view advance determination result, but the main control unit 300 does not obtain the special view advance determination result, but the command of the start information of the special view hold increase command prefetched The data may be included in the data and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may obtain the special-figure advance determination result as necessary. However, since the main control unit 300 updates the state of the common drawing, if the first sub-control unit 400 tries to determine whether or not power supply is in progress, the state of the common drawing also becomes the first sub-control unit 400. Need to send, not efficient. Therefore, it is more efficient to execute the prior determination in the main control unit 300.

  After executing the special drawing prefetching process described above, the main control unit 300 executes the special drawing-related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231), and the same starting information as the prefetched starting information targeted by the special drawing prefetching process Based on the above, the special drawing suitability determination result using the special drawing suitability determination table described above, the special drawing determination result using the special drawing determination table described above, and the fluctuation time of the special drawing are obtained again.

  Here, a method of determining the variation time of the special figure in the special figure related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) will be described. In the following description, since it is the same whether it is the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 or the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, it demonstrates, without distinguishing both.

  In the special figure related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) shown in FIG. 206, when the special figure determination result is obtained using the special figure determination table, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the special figure determination result. , And determine a timer number representing the variation time of the special figure.

  FIG. 208A shows a table set selection table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In this table set selection table, the relationship between a special drawing determination result (special drawing stop symbol), a special drawing fluctuation number, and a timer selection table is defined. In the second embodiment, two types of tables are prepared as timer selection tables. The timer selection table is a table used to determine the variation time of the special view. An area (timer selection table information storage area) for storing information representing a timer selection table is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The RAM 308 is also provided with a special figure variation game execution number counter for counting the number of times the special figure variation game is executed. If the value of the special figure fluctuation game execution frequency counter is a value larger than 0, the fluctuation display by the special figure display device 212 ends, and the special figure fluctuation game is displayed by the CPU 304 after the determined special figure is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period The value of the execution number counter is decremented by one.

  For example, in the special view status update process (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the special figure stop symbol is big hit 15R big hit and the end effect period of the 15R big hit game is completed (steps S1227 and S1229) And the information representing the table 4 is stored in the timer selection table information storage area. In addition, in the special figure status update process (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the stop display of the special figure ends (steps S1227 and S1229), if the value of the special figure variation game execution frequency counter is greater than 0, the value of the counter is decremented by 1. Information representing Table 2 is kept stored in the timer selection table information storage area until the value of the counter becomes zero. When the value of the special figure fluctuation game execution frequency counter changes from 1 to 0, the pointer on the RAM 308 is advanced, and the value of 0 is set to the special figure fluctuation game execution frequency counter, and the timer selection table information storage area Stores information representing Table 1. Then, in the special figure status update process (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the stop display of the special figure ends (0, the special figure fluctuation game execution frequency counter continues to be set to 0 until the special figure determination result switches). The selection table information storage area continues to store information representing the table 1. As a result, when the 15R big hit game is over, unless the big hit or the small hit is won, the first 100 times of the special figure fluctuation game the timer selection table 2 is used to determine the fluctuation time of the special figure, and the timer after 101 times The variation time of the special figure is determined using selection table 1.

  FIG. 208 (b) is a diagram showing a timer number determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is defined in a timer number determination table shown in FIG. 208 (b) based on the special figure fluctuation time determination random value (possible range is 0 to 99) of the start information. Determine which timer number is present. That is, the determination of this timer number is a special figure determination result, a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for timer number determination), the number of reservations obtained by adding the number of reservations of special figure 1 and the number of reservations of special figure 2, and predetermined period information It is performed based on a table (for example, a timer selection table), and is not performed based on the pre-read result by the pre-read processing or the pre-determination result.

  The timer number is the time from when special image 1 display device 212 or special image 2 display device 214 starts changing the symbol until it displays the stop symbol representing the result of the judgment of acceptance, that is, the time for changing the special image (Symbol fluctuation display time) is expressed. The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a fluctuation time determination unit that determines the fluctuation time of the symbol. In addition, the time (time of decoration symbol fluctuation stop display) until display the stop design which indicates the result of the pass / fail judgment after the decoration symbol display device 208 starts the fluctuation of the decoration symbol of the special figure is also this pattern fluctuation display Time is adjusted.

  FIG. 208 (c) shows the relationship between the timer number and the symbol variation display time.

  In the second embodiment, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the special drawing in the decorative symbol display device 208 is determined in accordance with the symbol variation display time. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the special figure based on the timer number (symbol variation display time). The relationship between the timer number and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the special figure is also shown in FIG. 208 (c) for reference.

  The timer 1 represents that the special figure fluctuation time becomes 2 seconds, which is an extremely shortened fluctuation time, and the timer 2 represents that the special figure fluctuation time, which is 5 seconds, is a shortened fluctuation time. In addition, what is determined by timer 1 or timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure variation. The timer 3 indicates that the special pattern fluctuation time becomes a normal fluctuation time of 10 seconds (reference fluctuation time). In addition, in the timer 1 to timer 3, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the special drawing in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The timer 4 represents that the special figure fluctuation time becomes a fluctuation time of 12 seconds, and when the timer 4 is determined, the reach pattern of the decorative figure of the special figure in the decorative symbol display device 208 is selected as normal reach. The timer 5 represents that the special figure fluctuation time becomes a fluctuation time of 40 seconds, and the timer 6 represents that the special drawing fluctuation time becomes a fluctuation time of 50 seconds. When the timers 5 and 6 are determined, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the special drawing in the decorative symbol display device 208 is selected as Super Reach.

  This reach determination is that the result of the success or failure judgment (full lottery) of the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229, S1231) is a specific success / failure decision result (a predetermined result with a high degree of player's advantage). It is an advance notice effect in which the player is notified in advance before notifying the result of the success or failure judgment, and whether or not the reach is to be performed is determined after the judgment on the success or failure. The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of the advance notice control unit.

  In the second embodiment, the length of the period from when the special drawing is judged to the success / failure judgment to the time when the result of the judgment is notified (special figure fluctuation time ) To be longer.

  As shown in FIG. 208 (b), when the special figure determination result is a lost symbol ("special figure F"), if the number of reservations is 0 to 2, timer 3 with no reach has a probability of 90%. If the number of reservations is determined to be 3 to 7, the timer 2 with no reach is also determined with a 98% probability. In addition, when the table 1 is selected with the off symbol, the super reach timer 5 or 6 is determined with a probability of 1% each regardless of the number of reservations.

  In addition, when the success or failure decision result is a big hit, regardless of the type (big hit symbols 1 to 4) of the special figure, regardless of the timer selection table, moreover, regardless of the number of reservations, of normal reach The timer 4 is determined with a probability of 2%, the timer 5 for super reach 1 is determined with a probability of 32%, and the timer 6 for super reach 2 is determined with a probability of 66%. Moreover, it is also the same as when special drawing determination result is a small hit design.

  Next, the common drawing related lottery processing (step S1223) shown in FIG. 206 will be described. The start information of the common drawing in the second embodiment is the common drawing win random number value and the common common drawing random value. In the common drawing related lottery process (step S1223), a common drawing acceptance determination process is performed.

  FIG. 209A is a diagram showing a common drawing yes / no determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the regular drawing propriety judgment process, the time reduction flag is referred to, and the judgment is made based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state. The determination of the generality is made based on the common drawing winning random value (possible range: 0 to 65535) of the start information extracted from the general drawing reserve storage unit of the RAM 308. In the second embodiment, the Atari probability of the spread map is about 10% in the spread map low probability state (non-electric support state), and is 100% in the spread map high probability state (electric support state).

  When the execution of the common-practice equivalence determination processing is completed and the common-use allotment determination result is a hit, the common drawing stop symbol determination process is executed. In addition, since there is only one kind of out-of-round symbol in the common-use figure, if the common-use drawing judgment result is a loss, the stop symbol in the common-use figure is uniquely determined.

  FIG. 209 (b) is a diagram showing a common drawing determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  Here too, the short time flag is referred to, and on the basis of whether or not the current control state is the power support state, the propriety determination is made. The common drawing stop symbol determination processing is performed based on the common drawing random number value (possible range is 0 to 99) of the start information extracted from the common drawing reservation storage unit of the RAM 308. In the low probability state (non-power support state), win 90% of the symbols per symbol (symbol A) and win 10% of the probability per symbol (symbol B) . On the other hand, in the general drawing high probability state (power support state), the general drawing per pattern 2 (general drawing B) is won with a probability of 100%.

  Here, referring to the common drawing determination table shown in FIG. 209 (b), the detailed drawing of the common drawing of the second embodiment will be described in detail. When the stop display is performed, the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special view start opening 232 is opened for 1.8 seconds (but closed when 10 balls are won in the second special view start opening 232). On the other hand, when the symbol 2 (general drawing B) is stopped and displayed on the common drawing display device 210, the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special drawing start port 232 is opened for 6.0 seconds (however, the second special drawing When 10 balls are won in the starting opening 232, the ball is closed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation time is uniquely determined to a predetermined time according to the control state of the common drawing. For example, it is 10 seconds in the low probability state (non-power support state), and is 5 seconds in the high probability state (power state).
<Sub control unit side control processing>

  Next, the first sub control unit main processing and the like executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 in the second embodiment are shown in FIG. 190 executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 in the first embodiment. The processes are basically the same as the processes of the first sub control unit, and therefore the description thereof is omitted. Also, the processing in the second sub control unit 500 is basically the same as that of the first embodiment, and therefore the description thereof is omitted.

  Subsequently, the advance notice in the second embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in the second embodiment, the special view 1 reserved display area is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, that is, on the left side of the predetermined area where the decorative pattern of the common drawing is displayed. On the right side, the special view 2 reserve display area is prepared. In the special view 1 reserve display area, the reserve display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the reserve storage unit of the special view 1 provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is the reserve storage unit of the special view 1 The start information is displayed in order from the left in the order in which the start information is stored (in order of winning). The suspension display is a display indicating that the startup information is stored or stored in the startup information storage unit (the storage repository of the special view of the RAM 308). In the special view 2 reserve display area, the reserve display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the reserve storage unit of the special view 2 provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is the reserve storage unit of the special view 2 The start information is displayed in order from the left in the order in which the start information is stored (in order of winning). That is, the hold display is performed for each piece of the start information stored in the start information storage means, and the number of the hold display corresponds to the number of the hold. The decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the start hold display means. In this embodiment, the default display mode in the hold display is a mode in which a round figure is displayed without pattern and in one color, and corresponds to an example of the first mode. Each time the first sub control unit 400 receives the special view hold increase command, it transmits the hold increase command to the second sub control unit 500, and the second sub control unit 500 performs decoration based on the hold increase command. The symbol display device 208 is controlled to increase the number of pending display by one. On the other hand, each time the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command, which is a signal for holding and digesting, transmits a holding decrease signal to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 Based on the signal, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled to reduce the number of pending displays by one.

  The pre-reading advance notice in the second embodiment is an effect for giving an advance notice that there is a possibility that the result of the acceptance determination performed in the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) shown in FIG. 206 may be a big hit. More specifically, in the present embodiment, even a big hit, a big hit (for example, 15 R system big hit: special figure A, special figure B), which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. For example, 4R system big hit: special figure C, special figure D) is prepared, and the advance notice is an effect for giving notice that there is a possibility of becoming an advantageous big hit. In addition, a big hit (special figure C) with a definite change may be an advantageous big hit even in the big hit of the 4R system. Further, the advance notice in the second embodiment is a notice performed based on the start information (prestarted start information) acquired before the start information is acquired in the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231). is there. That is, the pre-reading advance notice is performed based on the pre-decision result based on the pre-reading starting information.

  Also, the pre-reading advance notice here includes a false pre-reading advance notice that falsely gives notice as if the pre-judgment result is not an advantageous jackpot as if it becomes an advantageous jackpot. That is, the advance notice indicates that the result of the pass / fail judgment may be an advantageous jackpot, the advance notice for the player, or that the result of the pass / fail judgment is an advantageous jackpot. It can be said that it is a notice to be expected.

  In the second embodiment, by changing the display mode of the hold display, it is possible to perform pre-reading notice effect using the hold display. In the pre-read notice effect using the hold display, the execution start timing is at the time of winning, and the execution area is within the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when special drawing start port 230, 232 has a prize in the state of reserve of special figure 0, the success or failure judgment of the special figure based on the said prize is performed immediately, and symbol variation display of special figure is also immediate It is conceivable that the special display based on the winning combination is not displayed on hold, but it may be performed for several seconds immediately after the symbol variation display of the special drawing based on the winning combination is started. In this case, the effect of the prefetch notice is performed during the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the prefetched start information) notifying the success / failure determination result based on the prefetched start information. The pre-reading notice using the hold display corresponds to an example of a predetermined notice form of pre-reading notice, and the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of pre-reading notice means.

  In addition, by driving the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246, it is also possible to perform preview advance notice effects by the bonus item operation. The preview advance notice effect by the bonus item operation may be at the time of winning or at the time of symbol fluctuation stop, and the execution area is an area covering the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol change stop time in the advance notice is the stop time of at least one of the symbol change display corresponding to the start information read ahead and the symbol change display before the symbol change display. More specifically, if there is a winning with the suspension being 0, the acceptance determination based on the winning is immediately performed, and the symbol variation display of the special drawing is also started immediately, so the prefetched start is The stop time of the symbol variation display corresponding to the information is the start time of the execution of the advance notice.

  Also, it is possible to perform preview advance notice effect by making a symbol such as a specific character or symbol appear in the decorative symbol display device 208. The execution start timing of the preview advance notice effect using this specific symbol may be at the time of winning, or by the symbol variation start command after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first symbol variation start command after winning is received. It may be during the started symbol variation display. Here, when there is a winning in the state of holding 0, since the pass / fail determination based on the said win is immediately performed and the symbol variation display of the special drawing is immediately started, the pass / fail based on the start information read ahead After the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the prefetched start information) for notifying the determination result is started, the symbol variation display is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. When there is a prize in the state of one or more suspension, symbol variation display performed prior to the symbol variation display is performed. Moreover, the execution area may be the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c in the decorative symbol display device 208, or the predetermined area according to the effect display area 208d It is also good.

  Furthermore, it is also possible to perform preview advance notice effects by changing the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208. The execution start timing of the previewing notice effect using the background image is at the time of winning, and the execution area is the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Note that the preview advance notice effect is not limited to a notice using an image or a feature, but may be a notice using sound or light.

  When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the special-image hold increase command, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the prefetch notice execution processing in the effect control processing in the first sub-control unit main processing. In this pre-reading notice execution processing, execution possibility lottery of pre-reading notice of each pre-reading notice which uses the reservation indication, pre-reading notice due to feature operation, pre-reading notice which uses specified design, and pre-reading notice using background image is performed. Further, in the case of pre-reading notice using the hold display, the display mode after change due to the pre-reading notice is determined by lottery from among display modes of a plurality of kinds of hold display prepared in advance. If it is the advance notice by the bonus item operation, one drive pattern is determined by lottery from among the drive patterns of the plurality of effect movable bodies 224 and the shielding device 246 prepared in advance. In the case of a preview notice using a specific symbol, a symbol to be made to appear in the prefetch notice is selected by lottery from among symbols such as a plurality of types of characters and symbols prepared in advance. In the case of a previewing notice using a background image, a background image to be used in the previewing notice is determined by lottery from among a plurality of types of background images prepared in advance.

  Also in the second embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the common symbol symbol variation start command, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the common symbol symbol variation effect. Further, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the special symbol variation start command, the special symbol variation effect is also executed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 210 is a diagram showing a specific example of a common-design symbol variation production, a special-design symbol variation production, and a preview advance presentation effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 210 (a), a combination of stop symbols of the decorative symbol of the special figure is displayed, and in the predetermined area 208x where the decorative symbol of the common figure is displayed in the effect display area 208d. The stop symbol of the common figure decorative symbol is displayed. That is, it is in the state where the special figure change game and the common figure change game are also stopped. In this state, when the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start opening 228, as shown in FIG. 210 (b), the symbol variation display is started in the common drawing display device 210 and the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the variable display of the common figure decorative symbol is started. In addition, a speaker 120 (not shown) outputs a common drawing fluctuation sound indicating that symbol fluctuation display is being performed in the common drawing display device 210. The fluctuation display of the ordinary figure decorative symbol and the output of the ordinary figure fluctuation sound correspond to an example of the ordinary figure symbol fluctuation effect, and the ordinary figure symbol fluctuation effect corresponds to an example of the predetermined effect according to the present invention.

  Subsequently, when the gaming ball enters the first special view starting opening 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as a winning ball. Also, as shown in FIG. 210 (c), the symbol variation display is started in the special view 1 display device 212, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208. In area 208c, variable display of a special figure decorative symbol is started. Further, from the speaker 120, a special figure fluctuation sound indicating that symbol variation display is being performed in the special figure 1 display device 212 is output. The variation display of the special figure decorative symbol and the output of the special figure variation sound correspond to an example of the special figure symbol variation effect. In addition, a pre-reading advance notice effect based on pre-reading of the start information stored in the special view 1 reserve storage unit of the RAM 308 is also executed by the winning of the first special view start port 230. Here, when the first special figure starting opening 230 winning a prize the advance notice effect using a specific symbol is executed, and the symbol 2082 of the princess character as the specific symbol includes the lower area including the effect display area 208d. Move from left to right. It should be noted that the pre-read advance effect sound may be output from the speaker 120 while the symbol 2082 of the princess character is moving.

  In the specific example described above, the special drawing fluctuation sound also starts to be generated in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation sound, and the special drawing fluctuation sound is heard over the common drawing fluctuation sound. In addition, the predetermined area 208x in which the variation display of the common figure decorative symbol is performed is momentarily covered by the symbol 2082 of the princess character passing by the advance notice effect, and the variation display of the common figure decorative symbol disappears for a moment. In other words, the predetermined area 208x is reduced by the design 2082 of the princess character entering the predetermined area 208x. Therefore, the common-design symbol variation effect corresponding to an example of the predetermined effect referred to in the present invention is changed by the special symbol symbol variation effect or the advance notice effect.

  In this case, the movement of the symbol 2082 of the princess character is executed as the advance notice effect, but may be executed as a special pattern variation effect.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 210 (c '), when the game ball enters the first special figure starting opening 230, the middle symbol of the special figure decorative symbol is a predetermined area in which the variation display of the common figure decorative symbol is performed. It may be a special symbol design variation presentation displaying variation on 208x. By doing this, the common figure symbol variation effect is changed by the special pattern symbol variation effect. In addition, the effect that the middle figure of the special figure decorative figure is variably displayed over the predetermined area 208x is the prefetching of the start information stored in the special figure 1 reserve storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning of the first special figure start port 230 It may be performed as an effect of pre-reading advance notice based on.

  Further, in FIG. 210 (c), the pre-reading advance notice effect based on pre-reading of start information stored in the special view 1 reserve storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning to the first special view start opening 230 is a notice using a specific symbol. Although it is performed in an aspect, as shown to the same figure (c ''), you may be performed in the warning aspect which drives the presentation movable body 224. FIG. Also in this case, the pivoted forearm portion 224b is covered with the predetermined area 208x in which the variable display of the common figure decorative symbol is performed, and the common pattern symbol fluctuation effect is changed by the advance notice effect.

  Even in the specific example in the second embodiment described above, here, a change occurs in the common pattern symbol fluctuation effect due to the establishment of the prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as the winning of the first special figure starting port 230. The player is likely to notice that the payout is being made, the ball holding seems to be good, and the impression of the game stand may be improved. The same applies to the specific examples described below. In addition, since there is a change in the regular symbol pattern fluctuation effect due to the advance notice effect, the player may have a predetermined profit (here, the payout of the winning ball), and the variable winning opening 234 may be in an advantageous state. Can be recognized at one time by the advance notice effect (specific effect), and it is possible to increase the interest of the player's game more than when each is recognized separately, and also to improve the impression of the game stand There are cases where you can

  FIG. 211 is a diagram showing a specific example of common symbol rotation effect and advance notice effect. Hereinafter, differences from the specific example shown in FIG. 210 will be mainly described.

  Also in this specific example, when the gaming ball passes through the common drawing starting opening 228, the common drawing symbol variation presentation is started. That is, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation display of the common drawing decorative symbol is started, and the common drawing fluctuation sound is outputted from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Subsequently, when the gaming ball enters the first special view starting opening 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as a winning ball. In addition, special figure design fluctuation production similar to the concrete example which is shown in Figure 210 is started, but pre-reading of the start information which is remembered in special figure 1 reservation memory section of RAM308 by winning in 1st special figure start mouth 230 Pre-reading advance notice effect based on is also executed. The notice mode of the preview notice effect based on the look-ahead here is a mode using a background image, and at the same time as symbol variation display is started on the special view 1 display device 212, as shown in FIG. The entire front screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is completely dark for a moment, and the common pattern symbol variation effect performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special symbol pattern variation effect started with the decorative symbol display device 208 also disappear momentarily . That is, the common-design symbol change effect is changed by the advance notice effect.

  In addition, although switching of a background image is performed as pre-reading advance notice production here, you may carry out as a special design symbol variation production. That is, the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched to a dark background image (blackout image) for a moment before starting the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure, and then the normal background image is restored to decorate the special image. It is also possible to perform variable display of symbols. Also in the case of common sense, the common figure symbol change effect is changed by the special figure symbol change effect. The blackout image can also be used as a scene switching image, and such switching of the background image can also be viewed as a special symbol design variation presentation that also serves as a scene switching presentation.

  Also, in FIG. 211 (c), the background image is switched to a dark image (blackout image), but as shown in FIG. 211 (c '), the background image is switched to a bright image (here, a whiteout image) It is also good.

  Further, in FIG. 211 (c), the previewing notice effect based on the prefetching of the start information stored in the special view 1 reserve storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning on the first special view start port 230 is a notice mode using a background image. (C ′ ′), it may be executed in a notice mode of closing the shielding device 246 that was open. Also in this case, the predetermined area 208x in which the fluctuation display of the common figure decorative symbol is performed is hidden by the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, and the common pattern fluctuation effect is changed by the advance notice. Note that it is also possible to view as a scene switching effect a switching to a whiteout image and a feature effect in which the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed.

  The background image may be a translucent image. By being semi-transparent, it becomes possible to visually recognize a common-design symbol variation production and a special-design symbol variation production, and therefore it may be possible to prevent a reduction in the rendering effect.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the special view reserve increase command, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the special view reserve increase presentation.

  FIG. 212 is a diagram showing a specific example of a common-design symbol variation effect and a special-image reserve increase effect.

  In FIG. 212 (a), symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as symbol variation display) is performed in the special figure 1 display device 212, and variation display of the special figure decorative symbol is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. Moreover, three special drawing reservation displays are displayed on the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 212 (a). Hereinafter, the special view reserve display representing the oldest special view reserve (hereinafter referred to as special view reserve 1) will be referred to as first special view reserve display 296, and the second oldest special view reserve (hereinafter special plan reserve 2) will be referred to. The special view reserve display representing) is referred to as a second special view reserve display 297, and the special view reserve display representing the latest special view reserve (hereinafter referred to as special view reserve 3) is referred to as a third special view reserve display 298. Here, the number of reservations for the special view is three. On the other hand, the common-diagram display device 210 is displaying a stop, and in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop design of the common-diagram decorative symbol is displayed.

  When the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start port 228 while the symbol change display is being performed, the common drawing symbol change presentation is started. That is, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation display of the common drawing decorative symbol is started, and the common drawing fluctuation sound is outputted from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Next, when the gaming ball enters the first special view starting opening 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as a winning ball. In addition, the reservation of the special figure increases. Hereinafter, the reservation of the special drawing increased here is referred to as special drawing reservation 4, and the special drawing reservation display representing the special drawing reservation 4 is referred to as a fourth special drawing reservation display 299. When the game ball enters the first special view start opening 230, the special view hold increase sound is outputted from the speaker 120 (not shown), and the fourth display of the default display mode from the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 The symbol 2991 of the truck carrying the symbol of the special view reservation display 299 appears, and the symbol 2991 of this truck moves the effect display area 208d toward the left side. As a result, as shown in FIG. 212 (c), the symbol 2991 of the track passes through the predetermined area 208x in which the variation display of the common figure decorative symbol is performed, and the common figure decorative symbol performed in the predetermined area 208x Disappears for a moment. In other words, the predetermined area 208x becomes smaller as the pattern 2991 of the track enters the predetermined area 208x. Also in this specific example, the common figure symbol fluctuation effect is changed due to the special figure reserve increase effect.

  The symbol of black circle 4th special view reservation 299, which is the default display mode placed on the truck, is carried to the right of 3rd special view reservation 298 and then taken down from the truck. The figure reserve display 299 is displayed on the right side of the third special figure reserve display 298. When fourth special view hold display 299 is displayed on the right side of third special view hold display 298, preview advance notice effect using the hold display is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 212 (d), an effect image 2992 of light aura representing the light diverging radially from the image of the black circle is added to the image of the black circle which is the default display mode. The display mode is changed. The aura effect image 2992 of the light enters the predetermined area 208x in which the variable display of the common figure decorative symbol is performed, and the predetermined area 208x also becomes smaller here. Therefore, the common-design symbol change effect is also changed by the advance notice effect. Note that the light aura effect image 2992 may be a translucent image. By being semi-transparent, since a common-design symbol variation production becomes visible, there may be cases where it is possible to prevent a reduction in the rendering effect of the common-design symbol variation presentation.

  In addition, the display mode of the 4th special figure reservation display 299 displayed on the right side of the 3rd special figure reservation display 298 may change to another display mode. In FIG. 212 (d ′), the display mode of the fourth special view reserve display 299 displayed on the right side of the third special figure reserve display 298 is changed to the character image of the scary face panda. In addition, this character image is larger than the image of the black circle of the default display mode, and a part thereof enters the predetermined area 208x, and here too, the common-pattern symbol variation effect is changed by the advance notice effect. The hold display also serving as the advance notice advertisement effect represents a hold that can be expected from the jackpot from the player's point of view, and can be easily understood by the player by making the display size larger than the default display mode. As described above, the size of the hold display may be changed according to the degree of expectation (reliability) of the pre-reading advance notice. Note that the display may be made large only during the first predetermined period of the hold display, and thereafter displayed in the same size as the size of the default display mode.

  FIG. 213 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the common-design symbol variation effect itself changes. Hereinafter, differences from the specific example shown in FIG. 210 will be mainly described.

  Also in this specific example, when the gaming ball passes through the common drawing starting opening 228, the common drawing symbol variation presentation is started. That is, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation display of the common drawing decorative symbol is started, and the common drawing fluctuation sound is outputted from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Subsequently, when the gaming ball enters the first special view starting opening 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as a winning ball also here. Also, as shown in FIG. 213 (c), the special symbol symbol variation effect similar to that of the specific example shown in FIG. 210 is started. Further, based on the start of the symbol variation display of the special drawing, the background screen of the predetermined area 208x in which the variation display of the common figure decorative symbol is performed changes, and the common figure symbol variation effect itself changes. Here, the non-patterned background image is changed to a diagonally striped background image.

  In addition, as a change of the common figure design fluctuation rendition itself based on the start of the special figure design fluctuation display, as shown in Figure 213 (d), instead of the fluctuation display of the common figure decorative design which is done in specified territory 208x The countdown display may be performed, and the display may be changed to, for example, 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → の.

  In addition, when the reserve of the special figure increases, the advance notice notice effect based on the pre-reading of the start information stored in the special view reserve storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning to the special view starter opening May be performed in the predetermined area 208x in which the In this case, as shown in FIG. 213 (e), a symbol such as a specific character or symbol (here, a character pattern of a panda with a scary face) is displayed in a predetermined area 208x instead of the variable display of the ordinary drawing decorative symbol. Is displayed.

  Further, in the above description, the variable display (common symbol symbol fluctuation presentation) of the common drawing decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 is always performed each time, but in the case of a loss in the success or failure judgment of the common drawing, predetermined It may be performed with a probability (for example, 10% or 0%). By doing this, there are cases where it is possible to increase the player's degree of expectation for the common figure symbol fluctuation effect.

  Further, the sound effects based on each effect may include silent effects. By doing this, the player can more easily notice that a profit (for example, a payout of a winning ball) has occurred. In addition, in some cases, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player does not get in the way of producing special effects, and the player is hit if the special drawing is judged to be acceptable.

  It should be noted that during the power support, it is possible not to perform the common symbol design fluctuation rendition. Since the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special view starting port 232 is easily opened during the power support and the winning balls are easily generated, the player can concentrate on the effect based on the winning balls generation. There is a case.

  Further, although an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine has been described here, the present invention can be applied to a rotary gaming machine (slot machine).

  In the above description, the game ball can enter in the gaming machine that provides the player with a predetermined game value based on the fact that the predetermined condition is established (for example, entry of the game ball into the winning opening and start opening). Starting information (for example, a common drawing winning random number and a common drawing fluctuation period determination random number based on the first entering area (for example, central common drawing starting gate 251) and the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first entering area Start information generating means (for example, a random number value storage register corresponding to a common drawing start area of random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 181); a common drawing fluctuation period determination random number counter provided in RAM 308; The main control unit 300 which performs random number processing together with the yes / no decision means (for example, main control which executes the common drawing yes / no decision processing) which performs the yes / no decision based on the start information generated by the start information generation means The CPU 304 of the unit 300, the effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) for producing effects, and the predetermined effect for the effect means (for example, common pattern symbol fluctuation effect) based on the result of the judgment Effect control means (for example, the combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500) for performing the) and the second entry area (for example, where the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball) , Central general winning opening 226), the effect control means, based on the game ball entering the second entry area during the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect to the effect means A game stand characterized by performing a changed effect (for example, a effect in which a regular symbol symbol variation effect is changed by a prize ball payout effect). The explanation is given.

  Here, the first entry area may be an area (eg, a gate or the like) through which the game ball passes. That is, the first entry area may be provided in a game area where the game ball rolls, and the game ball may further roll on the game area even if the game ball enters. In addition, the predetermined condition may not be established even if the game ball enters the first entry area.

  In addition, the second entry area may be provided in the game area, and when entering, the game ball may be led to the back side more than the game area.

  In the second entry area, entry of the game ball is easy from the first state where entry of the game ball is difficult based on the fact that the result of determination of the result of the determination by the result determining means is a specific result of determination. It may include a variable starting port that changes state to the second state.

  Furthermore, the predetermined effect may be an effect by image display, an effect by sound, or an effect by light.

  Moreover, the effect which changed the predetermined effect said here may be the effect which switched the predetermined effect itself to other effects, or is the effect which gave a change to a part of the predetermined effect, It may also be an effect in which a part or all of the predetermined effect is covered by another effect.

  Further, giving a predetermined game value to a player may be, for example, paying out game media.

  In the above description, “the effect control means causes the effect means to perform a specific effect (for example, a prize ball payout effect) that affects the predetermined effect, in order to change the predetermined effect. A game stand characterized by being The explanation is also given.

  In the above description, “the effect means includes an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) for displaying an effect image, and the effect control means is a predetermined effect image (for example, decoration of a common figure) A part or all of the predetermined effect image is displayed as the effect of causing the image display means to perform the predetermined effect by displaying the variation display of the symbol on the image display means, and changing the predetermined effect. An image (see, for example, FIG. 197 (c)) covered with a part or all of another image (for example, a panda character image 2081 of a scary face) is displayed on the image display means. Game console. The explanation is also given.

  Here, the effect control means may cause the image display means to display an effect image which is wholly or partially translucent as the specific effect.

  Further, the effect means includes sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound,

  The effect control means causes the sound output means to perform the predetermined effect by causing the sound output means to output the predetermined sound, and the specific effect is output in parallel with the predetermined sound. The sound may be output to the sound output means. By doing this, the player may be able to recognize the generation of the profit by the sound based on the specific effect.

  Further, the sound output means includes a bowl capable of storing gaming balls, and a collision based on the fact that the gaming balls paid out from the payout means for the gaming balls collided with the gaming balls stored in the bowl or the balls. A sound may be output as the specific sound. By doing this, the player may be able to further recognize the occurrence of a profit because the collision sound is directed to the player from a direction different from that of the speaker.

  In the above description, "the first entry area (for example, the central spread diagram start gate 251) is provided in a game area (for example, the game area 124) where the game balls roll, and the entered game ball is The game area is further rolled, and in the second entry area (for example, the central general winning opening 226), the game ball after entering the first entry area of the game area enters It is provided in the possible position, The game stand characterized by the above-mentioned. The explanation is also given.

  Furthermore, in the above description, the winning device (for example, the variable winning opening 234 that is in an advantageous state for the player based on the fact that the predetermined second condition is satisfied (for example, winning the big hit of the special view)) And the effect control means causes the effect means to perform an effect (for example, an effect of previewed advance notice) indicating that the predetermined second condition is likely to be satisfied as the specific effect. The game stand characterized by being. The explanation is also given.

  Hereinafter, the start information generated based on the game ball entering the first entry area is referred to as first start information, and the pass / fail determination based on the first start information is referred to as the first pass / fail determination. The first determination means is a first determination means.

  In addition, second start information (for example, a special figure) generated based on the game ball having entered the second entry area (for example, the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232). Second start information storage means (for example, RAM 308) storing the random number for winning, the special figure random number for big hit, the special figure random value for small hit, the special figure random number for losing, and the random number for special figure fluctuation time determination) The special storage 1 and the special storage 2 of the special storage 2 provided in the above, and the second start information stored in the second start information storage means, and the pass / fail based on the acquired second start information The second success or failure judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) which makes a judgment and derives the second success or failure judgment result and the fluctuation display of the symbol is performed and the second success or failure is displayed. Row of symbol variation display to stop display symbol aspect representing the judgment result The second symbol display means (for example, the first special view display device 212, the second special view display device 214) and the second symbol display means stop displaying the symbol aspect representing the specific second acceptance / rejection determination result Control state transition means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) for shifting the control state from the normal control state to the big hit control state after the completion, and the pass / fail judgment based on the predetermined second start information by the second pass / fail judgment means The second success or failure judging means predicts that there is a possibility that the result of the above will be the specific second success or failure judgment result (for example, the success or failure judgment of a big hit), the second success or failure judgment means And a previewing notice effect unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) to be executed with a predetermined execution probability based on the predetermined second start information acquired prior to acquisition of the start information. There before The presentation means may include the prefetch advance notice effect means, and the effect control means may cause the prefetch notice effect means to perform the advance notice effect as the specific effect. Good.

  In addition, variable winning means (for example, variable winning opening 234) which is released after the second symbol display means stops and displays the symbol aspect representing the specific second success / failure determination result (for example, special figure big hit determination result) And the like.

  Note that the pre-reading advance notice rendering means executes the pre-reading advance notice effect for giving notice that the result of the pass / fail judgment based on the predetermined start information by the pass / fail judgment means may become the specific pass / fail judgment result. Alternatively, pre-reading advance notice effect may be performed in which information based on the predetermined start information acquired prior to acquisition of the predetermined start information by the success / failure determination means may be notified.

  Further, the pre-read advance notice effect means may start the pre-read advance notice effect prior to the propriety determination means performing the propriety determination based on the predetermined start information.

  In addition, it has symbol display means for performing symbol fluctuation display from the start of symbol fluctuation to the stop display of the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the judgment of the acceptance or rejection for each start information stored in the start information storage means. In the aspect, the pre-read advance notice effect control means is configured to display the predetermined start information in at least one of the symbol change display corresponding to the predetermined start information and the symbol change display executed prior to the symbol change display. The preview advance notice effect may be executed to give notice that the result of the based on the result of the determination on the basis of the determination is the result of the specific determination on the basis of the result of the determination.

  Further, in the pre-read advance notice effect means, the execution decision about the notice that the result of the pass / fail judgment based on the predetermined start information by the pass / fail judgment means may become the specific pass / fail judgment result is the pass / fail judgment means The preview advance notice effect determined prior to the determination on the basis of the predetermined start information may be executed.

  Further, the pre-read advance notice effect unit may execute the pre-read advance notice effect based on the fact that the predetermined start information is stored in the start information storage means, or the pre-read advance effect is The execution may be performed based on the reception of a command representing that the predetermined start information is stored in the start information storage unit.

  In addition, a predetermined number of gaming balls are enclosed as an enclosed ball, the enclosed ball is fired to the game area to play a game, and a predetermined gaming value is given to the player based on the enclosed ball winning in a predetermined entry area. And the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won may be fired again to the gaming area to be a circulatingly usable enclosed ball type gaming machine. Further, the gaming value may be a predetermined number of game ball number data which can be shot to the game area, and the effect control means is based on the fact that the game ball number data is given to the player. The presentation means may be made to perform an effect in which the predetermined effect is changed (for example, an effect in which a common pattern symbol variation effect is changed by a prize ball payout effect). Further, the effect control means may cause the image display means to display an image indicating the predetermined number of the predetermined number of game ball number data as the specific effect.

  Subsequently, a pachinko machine of a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the following description, items that overlap with the items described above may be omitted or may be described redundantly, but the components having the same names as the names of the components described above may be used. Will be described with the same reference numerals as used above.

  FIG. 214 is a schematic front view of the gaming board 200 of the third embodiment as viewed from the front.

  The game board 200 shown in FIG. 214 is a game board that performs right strike during power support and during a big hit game. In the game board 200, a common view starting opening (gate) 228 is provided in each of the left area and the right area. The common drawing start port 228 corresponds to an example of the entry area, and the ball having passed through the common drawing start port 228 rolls on the game area 124 without being discharged to the gaming island side. The drawing start port 228 provided in the left area can aim to open the electric tube during the non-charging state (details will be described later), and the drawing start port 228 provided in the right area is It is possible to aim at the electric chow open during the electric support state.

  Also, the first special view start opening 230 and the second special view start opening 232 are provided below the central portion of the game area 124. Both the first special view start port 230 and the second special view start port 232 are start areas where game balls can enter, but the second area (right side in the game area) is rolled by arranging the game nail 238 etc. It is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the first special view start opening 232 to enter the game ball. On the other hand, even if the game ball rolls on the first area (left side in the game area), the second special figure start port (electric chew) 232 rolls on the second area (right side in the game area) Even the gaming ball is configured to be able to enter the ball. The second special view start opening 232 is provided immediately below the first special view start opening 230, and in the vicinity of the second special view start opening 232, a pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed left and right by a solenoid. It is provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special view start port 232 corresponds to a variable start means (variable start region), hereinafter referred to as electric chew (electric tulip), and the pair of blade members 2321 open. Is referred to as electric chow open. In the state (first state) in which the pair of wing members 2321 is closed, it is difficult to enter the game ball, and in the open state (second state) where the pair of wing members 2321 is open, the game ball is easily entered . The electric chew is a starting area that can be at least changed between the entry difficult state and the entry easy state. In addition, the size of the reception opening of the game ball of the electric chew in a state where the pair of wing members 2321 is open is a size less than 5 game balls.

Further, the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is provided below the electric chew, and the door member 2341 is moved to be in a possible state of winning. That is, the variable winning opening 234 is a winning area (winning means) in which at least the state can be changed between the non-winning state and the winning state. In addition, the size of the reception opening of the game ball of the attacker in the state where the door member 2341 is open is a size for five or more game balls. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 214, the game balls rolling on the first area (left side in the game area) are difficult to enter into the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 due to the arrangement of the game nails 238 etc. It is configured to be impossible, and the player needs to hit the right during the big hit game.
<Type of symbol>

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 215 (a) to (d), the first special view display 212, the second special view display 214, the decorative symbol display 208, and the normal symbol display 210 of the pachinko machine 100 stop display. The types of special drawings, common drawings, and decorative designs will be described.

  FIG. 215 (a) is an example of the stop symbol form (second symbol form) of the special view to be stop displayed after the fluctuation display of the symbols in the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214. FIG. In FIG. 215 (a), ten types of special drawings of "special drawing A" to "special drawing J" are shown. In FIG. 215 (a), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  In the present embodiment, six types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F") are prepared as stop symbol modes of the special view. "Special figure A" and "special figure B" are 15 round (R) special big hit symbols, and "special figure E" is 2R big hit symbols (suddenly definite variation). When these symbols (special drawings A, B, E) are stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes the special drawing high probability common drawing high probability state. "Special figure C" and "special figure D" are 15R big hit symbols (15R normal big hit). When the special view C or the special view D is stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes the special view low probability normal view high probability state. "Special figure F" is 2R big hit design (hidden probability change). When the special view F is stopped and displayed, then the control state becomes the special view high probability general view low probability state.

  In the present embodiment, during the big hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability state, and if it wins the special figure A, the special figure B, the special figure E, and the special figure F, after the big hit game is over, the next big hit The special figure high probability state is maintained until it does. On the other hand, when the special figure C and the special figure D are won, the special figure low probability state remains even after the big hit game is over.

  In addition, after the end of the 15R big hit game, and after the big hit game suddenly due to a definite change, it shifts to a state with a power support (power support) (hereinafter referred to as a power support state). Also in the present embodiment, in the power-supply state (short-time state), all of the expansion and contraction, the expansion and contraction period, and the increase in the number of times of electric power opening are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player's degree of advantage is high, and may be set to the power support state (time saving state). Alternatively, the electric support state (shorting state) may be set if either the electric-chu open period extension or the electric-chu open number increase is performed, which increases the probability of entering the second special view starting opening 232. . In the non-power-supply state, it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second special view start opening 232 than in the power-supply state. In the present embodiment, when the special view A, the special view B, or the special view E is stopped and displayed, after the big hit game to be performed thereafter is over, until the next big hit game is started. State is maintained, and when Special view C or Special view D is stopped and displayed, the power support state is maintained while the special view fluctuation game is performed 100 times after the big hit game performed thereafter, and the 101st time Transition to the non-power support state (generally low probability state). On the other hand, if a jackpot (special figure F) without electric support is won, it does not shift to the electric support state after the end of the jackpot game. As described later, the special figure F is a symbol which is selected in the special figure 1 but not selected in the special figure 2.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, two kinds of stop symbols are prepared as small hit symbols in addition to the big hit symbols. A special figure G shown in FIG. 215 (a) is a small hit symbol 1 and a special figure H is a small hit symbol 2. Both small hit symbols are stop symbol modes in which the amount of profit given to the player is relatively small. As will be described later, the small hit symbol is a symbol which is selected in the special view 1 but not selected in the special view 2.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of stop symbols are prepared as lost symbols. The special figure I is a lost design 1 and the special figure J is a lost design 2.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the jackpot control state of the second advantage with the player's advantage is high, and the first advantage of the first advantage with the advantage lower than the second advantage. The non-big-hit control state is prepared, and the small toy machine 100 takes one of the control states of the big-hit control state (second control state) and the non-big-hit control state (first control state). The main control unit 300 also performs transition of these control states, and the main control unit 300 also corresponds to an example of control state transition means.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the 15R special big hit symbol, a symbol other than the two types of symbols of "special image A" and "special image B" is also prepared. A symbol other than the two types of symbols of “C” and “Special image D” is also prepared, and a plurality of symbols are prepared also for the jackpot symbol of sudden variation and the jackpot symbol of hidden probability variation.

  FIG. 215 (b) is a view showing an example of the decorative symbol of the special view. There are ten types of "design 1" to "design 10" in the decorative symbols of the special drawing in the present embodiment. When the reserve digesting condition is satisfied, "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "in each symbol display area of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. “Modification display of decoration pattern” is performed in which the display is switched in the order of decoration 3 ”→. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol of the special view separately from the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) which is a combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. The variation display and stop display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing are synchronized with the variation display and stop display of the symbol in the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214.

  In the case of notifying 15R special big hit (“Special figure A” “Special figure B”) or 15R special big hit (“Special figure C” “Special figure D”), the same decorative pattern is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative patterns (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") is stopped and displayed. The combination of these decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols with a definite variation and a big hit. In addition, among combinations of these decorative designs, a combination of decorative designs in which three identical odd decorative designs are arranged (for example, "decorative 3-decorative 3-decorative 3", "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7", etc.) Is a combination of the decorative symbols of the 15R special jackpot decision that is stopped and displayed only in the case of the 15R special jackpot, which is “special drawing A” or “special drawing B”. In addition, in the case of notifying the hidden probability change (“special figure F”) or small hits (“special figure G”, “special figure H”) of 2R's big hit, “in symbol display areas 208a to 208c, Stop the display of the combination of decoration patterns such as decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3 ". Furthermore, in the case of notifying a sudden definite variation ("special figure E") of the 2R's jackpot, a combination of decorative symbols such as "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative designs such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" and a combination of decoration designs such as "decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5" may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the lost design of “special figure I” and “special figure J”, a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols explained so far (for example, loose) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Stop displaying the eyes).

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of this "variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect (combination of decorative symbols) of the decorative symbol of the special figure It may be referred to as a variable display of a decorative symbol. The variable display of the special drawing decorative symbol is performed by the control of the first sub control unit 400.

  One special figure displayed in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the left middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the stop symbol form (see FIG. 182 (a)) of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 described above As for the stop symbol form (refer to the same figure (c)) of the decorative pattern of, the special symbol (refer to the same figure (c)) is larger.

  FIG. 215 (c) is a view showing an example of the stop symbol form (first symbol form) of the common drawing to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the symbols in the common drawing display device 210. In this embodiment, two types of hit symbols ("P and A" and "P and B") and one type of out pattern ("P and C") are prepared as stop symbol forms of a common . “Pubular figure A” is a hit symbol 1 and “PloWful figure B” is a hit symbol 2. Based on the fact that the ball sensor has detected that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 detects that all seven segments are lit and one central segment. Repeat “Lighting” “variable display of common drawing” (common drawing fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, the stop symbol form of the common drawing shown in FIG. 215 (c) is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 215 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variation display of the common drawing” to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be referred to as the fluctuation display of the common drawing. The common pattern display device 210 corresponds to an example of the auxiliary symbol notification means, the first symbol display means, or a simple symbol display means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is also performed. FIG. 215 (d) is a diagram showing a stop symbol aspect of the decorative symbol of the common figure. The variation display of the decorative symbol of the common figure is described later in detail, but after the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common figure, the stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 6D is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, when the common-diagram display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol 1 ("common-diagram A") shown in the same figure (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in the same figure (d) When the decoration 1 "is stopped and displayed, and the common drawing display device 210 stops and displays the hit symbol 2 (" general drawing B ") shown in FIG. Is displayed on a stop, and in any case, the hit of a common drawing is notified. Also, when the generic display 210 stops displaying the off-set symbol ("pop C") shown in FIG. 6 (c), the decorative symbol display unit 208 displays "general sketch" shown in FIG. 4 (d). "3" is stopped and displayed, and the release of the common drawing is notified. The symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing in the common drawing display device 210 and the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing in the decorative symbol display device 208 may or may not be synchronized.

  Subsequently, the pass / fail determination of the common drawing in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the left strike is performed in the non-electric support state, and the right strike is performed in the electric support state. When the player strikes the left in the non-power-supporting state, the determination of whether the general drawing is true or false is performed based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the general drawing start port (gate) 228 provided in the left area. In the case where the right strike is performed in the power-on state, the determination on the success or failure of the common drawing is performed based on the game ball having passed through the common drawing start port (gate) 228 provided in the right region. It should be noted that, even if the game ball passes through the flat view starting port 228 provided in the right area, the player performs right-handed driving despite the non-power-sustaining state, but the left is the power-sustaining state. Even if the game ball has passed a blowout and the game ball has passed the blowout starting port 228 provided in the left area, the passability determination of the blowout is performed. However, the pass / fail judgment of the common drawing will not be performed unless the reserve digestion condition of the common drawing is established. The requirement for establishment of the reserve processing condition of the common drawing here is that when the common drawing is not in operation, the common drawing fluctuation game is not being performed, and the common drawing determination display is not in progress either. Is a requirement that holds true. In addition, when there is no suspension of the common drawing, the electric chute is not in operation, and when the common drawing fluctuation game is not performed and is not in the common drawing determination display, the common drawing starting opening (gate) 228 is played It is a requirement that holds even when the ball passes.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 in the present embodiment, a table for common-use or not determination is stored.

  FIG. 216 (a) is a diagram showing a low probability table for determining whether or not the drawing is in place, and FIG. 216 (b) is a diagram showing a high probability table for judging whether or not drawing.

  In the present embodiment, one set of random number values (starting information) is stored in the common drawing reserve storage unit provided in the RAM 308 when the common drawing random number acquisition condition is satisfied. The establishment requirement of the common drawing random number acquisition condition referred to here is a requirement that is established based on the game ball having passed the common drawing start port (gate) 228. That is, in the state where the number of reservations of the common drawing is less than the predetermined upper limit number, it is a requirement that holds when the gaming ball passes through the common drawing starting port 228, and in the state where the number of reservations of the common drawing is the predetermined upper limit number, This is a requirement that does not hold even if the game ball passes through the common drawing start port 228. In this embodiment, a common drawing winning random number value and a common drawing determination random number value are stored in the common drawing reservation storage unit as one set of random number values (starting information).

  In the regular drawing propriety judgment process, the time reduction flag is referred to, and the judgment is made based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state. If the short time flag is off (in the non-power-supply state), the low probability table shown in FIG. 216 (a) is used to determine whether the general drawing is true or false. If it is in the state), the high probability table shown in FIG. It is determined based on the common drawing win random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the start information extracted from the common drawing reserve storage unit of the RAM 308. The hit probability of the common figure is 65532/65536 in the low probability table shown in FIG. 216 (a) and 655341/65536 in the high probability table shown in FIG. 216 (b). The probability of winning per common drawing is higher in the power support state than in the non-power support state. Here, deriving "hit" or "loss" corresponds to a regular drawing hit / not determination (lottery drawing), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the common drawing hit / not determining process here is the first hit judging means. It corresponds to an example of (assistance judging means). Further, the success / failure determination result of “hit” in the common drawing corresponds to an example of the specific success / failure determination result.

  When the regular drawing success / failure determination is completed, the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing is determined. It should be noted that the generic drawing success / failure judgment and the determination of the stop symbol aspect of the common drawing may be combined to be a common drawing judgment (first success / failure judgment).

  FIG. 216 (c) is a diagram showing a low probability table for determining a common drawing, and FIG. 216 (d) is a diagram showing a high probability table for determining a common drawing.

  Also in the common drawing determination process, the common time determination flag is referred to, and the common drawing determination is performed based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state. If the short-time flag is off (in the non-power-supply state), a general drawing is determined using the low probability table shown in FIG. 216 (c), and if the short-time flag is on (in the power-supply state If there is any), the drawing determination is performed using the high probability table shown in FIG. 216 (d). The common drawing determination process is performed based on the common drawing determination random number value (possible range: 0 to 99) of the start information extracted from the common drawing reserve storage unit of the RAM 308. In the low probability state (non-power support state), it wins the symbol 1 (general drawing A) per common expression with a probability of 99% and wins the symbol 2 (general drawing B) per common drawing with the probability of 1% . On the other hand, in the general drawing high probability state (power support state), the general drawing per pattern 2 (general drawing B) is won with a probability of 100%. In addition, since the lost design is one type, the common drawing determination process based on the common drawing determination random number value may be omitted.

  The decision on success or failure of the common drawing may be to derive "hit" or "loss". Alternatively, the pass / fail determination of the common drawing may be deriving to the common drawing symbol.

  The fluctuation time is described for reference also in the common drawing determination table shown in FIG. 216 (c) and in the common drawing determination table shown in FIG. 216 (d). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the common drawing in the common drawing display device 210 is uniformly one second in the case of the power support state, and is uniformly twenty seconds in the non-power support state. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the common figure becomes a relatively short first fluctuation time in the power-supply state, and becomes a relatively long second fluctuation time in the power-supply state. In addition, when the common drawing random number acquisition condition is satisfied, the common drawing winning random number value and the common drawing determination random value are combined with the common drawing fluctuation period determination random number value to be acquired, and the fluctuation time of the common drawing is determined by lottery. It is also good.

  Next, the opening and closing operation of the pair of blade members 2321 performed by the main control unit 300, that is, the opening and closing pattern of the electric control will be described.

  FIG. 217 (a) is a figure for demonstrating the opening-and-closing pattern of the electric chow in the pachinko machine of 3rd Example.

  If the common drawing determination result is the common drawing A, after the common drawing decoration 1 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chew performs opening once for 0.3 seconds. Even in the pachinko machine in the second embodiment, the firing interval of the gaming balls by the launching device 110 is 0.6 seconds, and in the case of the hit symbol of the common figure A, one opening time of the pair of wing members 2321 is It is shorter than the firing interval of the ball, and it is virtually impossible to enter the ball into the electric tuw even if the player wins the ball in the map A, and it is almost impossible to acquire the ball. Hereinafter, the fact that the pair of wing members 232a is opened by winning the common drawing A may be referred to as electric power short open. This electric Chu-short open (corresponding to the first open pattern) stochastically becomes the open pattern of Electric Chu in the non-electric support state.

  If the common drawing determination result is the common drawing B, after the common drawing decoration 2 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chew is first opened for 0.3 seconds, After a closing time of 0.5 seconds, open for 5 seconds. That is, the electric chew performs a specific operation (opening / closing operation of the pair of blade members 232a) for 5.8 seconds. Hereinafter, the winning of the common figure B and the release of the pair of blade members 232a may be referred to as "power open". In this electric Chu-long opening (corresponding to the second opening pattern), it is highly expected that the entrance to the electric chew can be expected and the ball will be won. It should be noted that, in the electric tube long opening, the blade member 2321 may be open at least longer than the firing interval, or may be open longer than the general drawing fluctuation time in the electric support state, omitting the first 0.3 second opening Then, only the second long opening may be performed. This electric Chu-long opening is stochastically the opening pattern of the electric chew in the electric support state.

  In addition, electric Chu will be closed at that time, if there is a predetermined number of balls entering before the predetermined opening time passes.

  If the common drawing determination result is the common drawing C, after the common drawing decoration 3 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chute does not open and remains closed.

  Next, a first effect (hereinafter referred to as a spread image effect) performed on the side of the sub control unit (second sub control unit 500) will be described. The regular drawing effect in the present embodiment includes at least one of the effects during fluctuation, effects during determination, and effects during operation, or includes a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be any effect to be executed in the area. The effect during fluctuation is an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 during symbol fluctuation display of a symbol drawing by the symbol drawing display device 210, and the effect during determination is fixed the stop symbol aspect of the symbol drawing by the common symbol display device 210 It is an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 during display, and an effect during operation is an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 while the electric chew is operating. In addition to the effects (for example, prior notice per common drawing) related to the result of the success or failure judgment of the common drawing, these effects are effects to which the effects (for example Instead of the effect relating to the result of the success or failure determination of the common drawing, the effect relating to the result of the success or failure determination of the special drawing may be performed. Further, although the detailed drawing will be described later, the common drawing effect is executed in an area including a predetermined area provided between the area for displaying the reserved icon of Special Figure 1 and the area for displaying the reserved icon of Special Figure 2. .

  FIG. 217 (b) is a view for explaining several examples of the common drawing effect in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment.

  (A) to (F) are variable display patterns during the non-electric support state.

  (A) is a variation display pattern of the decorative symbol of the common figure (the above-mentioned effect during variation). In the effect shown in (A), high-speed variation is repeated in the order of the common drawing decoration 1, the common drawing decoration 2, and the common drawing decoration 3, and after three seconds, the decorative symbol of the common drawing showing the common drawing determination result is stopped and displayed.

  (A) is also a variation display pattern of the decorative symbol of the common drawing (demonstration during the variation). In the effect shown in (A), high-speed variation is repeated in the order of the ordinary drawing decoration 2, the ordinary drawing decoration 2, and the ordinary drawing decoration 3, and after 15 seconds, the decorative drawing of the ordinary drawing showing the common drawing determination result is stopped and displayed. In this effect, during the high-speed fluctuation, the common drawing decoration 2 is displayed in large numbers, so that the degree of expectation of the electric Chu-long opening is improved.

  (C) is also a variation display pattern of the decorative symbol of the common drawing (demonstration during variation above). In the effect shown in (c), the high-speed variation in which the ordinary drawing decoration 2 is displayed continuously is repeated, and the display is stopped after 10 seconds. In this effect, since only the ordinary figure decoration 2 is displayed continuously, the stop display is also the ordinary figure decoration 2. Therefore, when this rendition is started, the electric power is released.

  (E) is also a variation display pattern of the decorative symbol of the common figure (the above-mentioned effect during variation). In the effect shown in (D), the high-speed variation is repeated in the order of the decoration pattern of "super heat" representing the big hit decoration of the common drawing decoration 1, common drawing decoration 2, common drawing decoration 3 and special drawing. One of the decorative symbols will stop. Therefore, the decoration pattern of "super heat" may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the degree of expectation of the electric Chu-long opening does not increase, but the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the special figure increases and the interest of the game improves. . That is, there are cases where it is possible to expect not only electric chow open but also a big hit.

  (E) is also a variation display pattern of the decorative symbol of the common figure (the above-mentioned effect during variation). In the effect shown in this (e), the high-speed variation is repeated in the order of the decoration figure of the popular figure decoration 2 and the special design of "super heat" representing the big hit notice of the special figure, and after 10 seconds, the common figure decoration 2 or "super heat" One side of the decorative pattern is stopped. In this effect, since the big hit notice of the special figure is displayed in half during high speed fluctuation, it may be possible to expect not only the electric chow open but also the big hit of the special figure during high speed fluctuation.

  In the variation display pattern shown in (f), a decorative symbol of "Hint" that represents a notice of 2R big hit that is a latent probability change of a special figure, a decorative symbol of "probable" that represents a notice of 2R big hit that is a sudden definite change of a special figure, The high-speed variation is repeated in the order of the "big hit" decorative symbols representing the 15R big hit notice of the special figure, and after 5 seconds, any of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. When this effect is started, the opening of the variable winning opening 234 is determined.

  In the variation display pattern described above, the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed in accordance with the timing of the end of the symbol variation display of the common view by the common view display device 210. In particular, in the case of a drawing, since the electric chew is released thereafter, the timing of the end of the symbol variation display by the drawing display device 210 matches the timing of the end of the effects of (A) to (E), It is preferable to give the player a notice of opening the electric chow. On the other hand, in particular, in the case of deviation of a common figure, it is not necessary to make the timings of the two coincide with each other, and it may be performed at any timing during symbol variation display of 20 seconds by the common drawing display device 210. For example, the common drawing effect may be started before the start of the symbol variation display by the common drawing display device 210, or the common drawing effect may be continued until the end of the symbol variation display by the common drawing display device 210. Furthermore, since the effect shown in (f) is an effect relating to the result of the pass / fail determination of the special view rather than the common view, it may be performed during a period in which the symbol variation display by the common view display device 210 is not performed. In addition, the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a decorative symbol representing a result of determination of a fake drawing or may be a fake jackpot notice.

  (G) is an example of the effect during operation. In the in-operation effect shown in (f), after the symbol variation display by the common view display device 210 in the non-electric support state, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol in which a rose character is piece-signing Ru. In the non-power-supporting state, in many cases, it is elected to open the electric chow short, but during the electric chow short opening, the in-operation presentation shown in (K) is executed for an instant. Further, when the electric power tug-long opening is won, the effect during operation shown in (ii) is executed for 5.8 seconds in which the electric liquid opens and closes. In addition, the effect during operation shown in (K) may be executed only while the electric Chu is open for 5 seconds, or only while the Electric Chu is initially open for 0.3 seconds ( The in-operation presentation shown in (ii) may be executed. Hereinafter, the effect that the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol in which the character of the lord is piece-signing may be referred to as electric power chow open notification effect.

  Note that the in-operation effect shown in (f) may be executed immediately after the finalization of the fixed display of the common view B by the common view display device 210 (immediately before the power-on operation).

  In addition, not only in the non-power-supporting state, but also in the power-supporting state, the in-operation effect shown in (f) may be executed even when the player is elected to open the power channel. In this case, after the symbol variation display of 1 second is performed, in most cases, the player is elected to open the electric chulong, and during the 5.8 seconds of the electric chu opening and closing, the effect shown in (K) is executed do it. In addition, when electing the electric chew short opening, it may be executed for a moment during the 0.3 second electric chew short opening.

  In addition, the presentation time (first time) of the variable display pattern shown in (i) to (e) of FIG. 217 (b) is that of the electric chow open notification presentation pattern shown in (ki) of FIG. 217 (b). Since it is a time longer than the time (second time), and the variable display effect of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is performed in a relatively long effect time, it may be possible to improve the expectation for the release of the electric chew.

  (G) is an example of the effect of the big hit notice of the special figure fluctuation. The effect shown in (G) is executed in a region including a predetermined region in the decorative symbol display device 208 regardless of symbol variation display by the common-diagram display device 210 or regardless of power-on operation. That is, it is executed during the variation display of the symbols in the first special view display device 212 or the second special view display device 214 even if the symbol variation display by the common view display device 210 is not being performed or the power chew is not in operation. It is an effect to be performed, and it is an effect to foretell that the big hit symbol will be stopped and displayed in the relevant variable display, and an effect for giving a notice as if it is stopped and displayed even if the big hit symbol is not stopped and displayed on the relevant variable display. So-called fake announcement effects) are also included. Here, the decorative symbol of "hidden" representing the notice of 2R big hit which is the latent definite variation of the special figure, the decorative symbol of "probable" which represents the preliminary notice of 2R big hit which is the sudden definite variation of the special figure, the 15R big hit notice of special figure The high-speed variation is repeated in the order of the "big hit" decorative pattern to be represented and the "super hot" decorative pattern to represent the big hit notice of the special image, and after 8 seconds, any of the decorative patterns is stopped and displayed. In addition, it may replace with the decoration pattern of a character, and may use the decoration pattern of a pattern.

  Also, the electric chow opening notification effect of (ki) shown in FIG. 217 (b) may be executed after each of (a) to (iv) and (ku) shown in FIG. 217 (b). That is, you may perform electric Chu open notification production in combination with a change display pattern. Furthermore, the electric Chu open notification effect may not be performed when the electric Chu Short is open, but may be performed when the Electric Chu Long is open. By doing this, it is possible to perform the electric chow open notification effect only when the electric chow becomes an advantageous opening for the player, and it may be possible to increase the expectation of the player. Also, when the common drawing A is stopped and displayed, the effects (decorative symbol variation display effect) of (a) to (f) and (c) shown in FIG. In the case where the notification effect is not executed, and the common drawing B is stopped and displayed, the effects (decorative symbol variation display effect) of (a) to (f) and (g) shown in FIG. After that, the electric whistle open notification effect may also be performed. By doing this, the decorative symbol variation display effect is performed only when the electric power is released in an advantageous manner, and it may be possible to increase the player's expectation.

  Further, the common drawing effect may be an effect that displays the common drawing decorative symbol shown in FIG. 215 (d) as the effect during determination without performing the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing (in the above variation). The effect may be performed during the determination, and further, in the case of a common figure, the effect may be an effect of performing an electric thu open notification effect. In addition, even if it is per common drawing, it may be an effect that performs a power tuw open notification effect only for per common drawing B in which the electric tuong long opening is performed, or in the sense that rare display is performed in a very short time, The effect may be such that the electric chew open notification effect is performed only around the ordinary drawing A in which the electric chow short is released.

  Subsequently, a common drawing effect determination process executed by the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 218.

  FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing a flow of common drawing effect determination processing.

  A common drawing change start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. The common drawing effect determination process shown in FIG. 218 is started when the first secondary control unit 400 receives this common drawing change start command. The common drawing fluctuation start command includes information indicating the current control state (whether or not it is the power support state), and the common drawing determination result. It should be noted that the general drawing reserve increase command is also transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and when the first sub control unit 400 receives the common drawing reserve increase command, the general drawing effect determination process is started. You may

  First, based on the information representing the current control state included in the common drawing change start command, it is determined whether or not non-power support is in progress (step S601). The determination process ends. If it is in the non-power-supporting state, it is determined whether or not a regular drawing effect is to be executed (step S602). In the determination here, for example, if the common drawing determination result included in the common drawing change start command is a common drawing B, a common drawing effect is executed. Also, even if the common drawing determination result is a common drawing C, it may be executed as a false common drawing effect. Furthermore, a dedicated random number may be acquired, and a common drawing effect executability lottery may be performed, and may be executed when the lottery is won. In particular, when the common drawing determination result is the common drawing C, the execution of the false common drawing effect may be determined by the lottery process. Alternatively, if the special symbol symbol variation start command is received and the symbol variation of the special symbol is being executed, the regular drawing effect may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute a popular drawing effect including a special hit of a special hit. In addition, when the symbol variation of the special figure is under execution, and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed due to the symbol variation, the big hit announcement effect of the special figure may be executed as a popular figure effect, Even if the jackpot symbol is not stopped and displayed, a jackpot notice effect of false special characters may be executed. Also, the execution of the jackpot notice effect of the special view here may also be performed when an effective / non-performing lottery is performed and the lottery is won.

  If the common drawing effect is not performed, the common drawing effect determination process ends, and if the common drawing effect is performed, it is determined whether or not it is in a predetermined period (step S603). In the present embodiment, during the big hit game of the special figure (during the opening and closing operation of the attacker) or during the production where the expectation of the big hit of the special figure is high (for example, during super reach in the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure) (A) to (e) shown in 217 (b) and (c) refrain from executing the respective effects. The predetermined period of time referred to here is during the jackpot game of the special view and the effect of the high expectation of the jackpot of the special view. If it is not during this predetermined period, an effect pattern is selected from all the effect patterns ((A) to (G)) shown in FIG. 217 (b) (step S604), and the process proceeds to step S606. It should be noted that the electric chow opening notification effect of (ki) shown in FIG. 217 (b) may be executed after the respective effects of (a) to (e) shown in FIG. 217 (b) or FIG. 217 (b) Only the electric chew open notification effect may be performed without executing any of the effects (a) to (e) shown in 2.). In addition, if it is not during the predetermined period, the effect pattern may be selected from the effects ((a) to (e) and (f) shown in FIG. 217 (b)) other than the electric chow open notification effect.

  On the other hand, if it is during the predetermined period, the effect pattern of only the electric chew open notification effect shown in FIG. 217 (b) is selected (step S605), and the process proceeds to step S606. By doing this, during the big hit game, the decorative symbol variation display effect of (a) to (e) and (c) shown in FIG. There are cases where it is possible to concentrate the player on the big hit game, as it is only the effect time of the notification effect.

  In step S606, information representing the effect pattern selected in step S604 or step S605 is set in the spread map effect command and transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the spread pattern effect determination processing ends. The second sub-control unit 500 having received the common drawing effect command controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the information representing the effect pattern included in the common drawing effect command, and the predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208 The regular drawing effect is executed in the area including.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the current control state is the power support state, the general drawing effect is not executed by the determination in step S601. It should be noted that, when the current control state is the power support state, the regular drawing effect is not performed uniformly, but the executability lottery is performed, and the common drawing effect is performed with a predetermined probability. It is also good. As described above, in the present embodiment, the regular drawing effect is a effect that the non-electric support state is easier to be executed than the electric support state. In the non-electric support state, since it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the electric chow, it may be possible to have an expectation for the prize of the gaming ball in the electric chew. On the other hand, in the power support state, since the gaming ball is likely to be won in the power chew, there is a possibility that the expectation of the player does not improve so much even if the game drawing effect is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined period such as during a big hit game, the effect during variation or the effect during determination is not performed uniformly by the determination of step S603, but only the electric chew open notification effect is performed. It should be noted that, during the predetermined period, instead of uniformly performing the effect during the change or the effect during the determination, the executability lottery is performed to perform the effect during the change or the effect during the change with a predetermined probability. It is also good. In addition, during the predetermined period, the effect during fluctuation or the effect during determination may not be performed, and the spread-pattern effect may not be performed uniformly. Alternatively, even if it is performed, an executability lottery may be performed, and only the electric chew open notification effect may be performed with a predetermined probability. That is, the first effect may be an effect in which the non-big hit control state is more easily executed than the big hit control state. Since winning the success or failure judgment of the generic drawing is also a factor to improve the chance of the success or failure judgment (big hit lottery) of the special drawing, if the player can be expected by making the common drawing effect during the non-big hit game There is. Also, in general, there are more award balls in the attacker than in the electric cho, and in the board layout where the electric chew is located at the upper or upstream side of the attacker, the opening of the electric chew wins the attacker in the big hit game May interfere with Therefore, it may be possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction by making it difficult to perform the regular drawing effect during the big hit game.
Here, the success / failure determination of the special view is also described.

  In the present embodiment, when the special view start information acquisition condition is satisfied, the random number value (start information) for one set is stored in the special view 1 reserve storage unit or the special view 2 reserve storage unit provided in the RAM 308. The establishment requirement of the special figure random number acquisition condition referred to here is an requirement established for the special figure 1 based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first special figure start opening 230. That is, in the state where the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is less than the predetermined upper limit number, this is a requirement that is established when the gaming ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is the predetermined upper limit number. In a certain state, it is a requirement that does not hold even if the game ball enters the first special view starting opening 230. In addition, the special figure 2 is a requirement that is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special figure starting opening 232 (electric chew). That is, in the state where the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is less than the predetermined upper limit number, this is a requirement that is established when the gaming ball enters the second special figure starting port 232, and the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is the predetermined upper limit number. In a certain state, this is a requirement that does not hold even if the game ball enters the second special view start opening 232. In this embodiment, the special figure 1 winning random number value, the special figure 1 determination random number value, and the special figure 1 fluctuation time determination random number value are stored in the special figure 1 reserve storage unit as one set of random number values (starting information). Do. The special figure 2 winning random number value, the special figure 2 determination random number value, and the special figure 2 fluctuation time determination random number value are stored in the special figure 2 reserve storage unit as a random number value (starting information) for one set.

  FIG. 219 (a) is a diagram showing a high probability table for judging success or failure of a special figure, and FIG. 219 (b) is a diagram showing a low probability table for judging success or failure of the special figure. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 takes out the start information from the hold storage unit of the RAM 308, it refers to the probability change flag, and if the probability change flag is on, it is in the special figure high probability state. 1 based on which random number range in the high probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 219 (a) shown in FIG. Deriving a "big hit" or "loss". On the other hand, if the probability change flag is off, it is in the special figure low probability state, and therefore the special figure 2 winning random number value or the special figure 1 winning random number is any random number in the high probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. Based on whether it belongs to the range, "big hit" or "loss" is derived as the special figure 2 success or failure determination result.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot probability is about 1/400 in the special figure low probability state, and about 1/40 in the special figure high probability state.

  In the present embodiment, the small hit is not in the special figure 2 but only in the special figure 1. Therefore, when it is a loss as a result of performing a yes-no decision using special figure 1 election random number value, a small hit determination is performed.

  FIG. 219 (c) is a diagram showing a small hitting determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the small hit determination limited to the special figure 1, the special figure 1 winning random value is again used to perform the small hit determination.
In addition, you may provide a small hit in the special figure 2 similarly to the special figure 1.

  Thus, the "big hit", the "small hit" or the "loss" is derived as the special figure 1 success or failure determination result. Moreover, "big hit" or "loss" is derived | led-out as a special figure 2 success or failure determination result.

  Next, the symbol of the special drawing is determined based on the special drawing suitability determination result.

  FIG. 219 (d) is a diagram showing a special-image determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special drawing determination table is a stop figure pattern of the special drawing for each of the big hit (special drawing A to special drawing F), small hit (special drawing G, H), and outlier (special drawing I, J) (FIG. 215 (a A random number range corresponding to) is specified. In addition, the special figure 2 does not have a random number range corresponding to each of the special figure F to the special figure H, and in the special figure 2, the big hit is 15R special big hit (special figure A, B), 15R normal big hit (Special figure C, D), it becomes 2R big hit symbol (special figure E) which is sudden positive variation, there is no small hit.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 controls the special figure 1 random number value or special figure 2 random value among the random number values for one set acquired from the special figure 1 reserve storage unit of the RAM 308 or the special figure 2 reserve storage unit. A special figure is determined using numerical values (both possible values are 0 to 99).

  The winning probability of the 15R special big hit (special figure A, B) that is most advantageous for the game is 30% in the case of special figure 1, compared with 70% in the case of special figure 2, special figure 2 is a big hit that is more advantageous than Special Figure 1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure 2 is more likely to generate a jackpot which is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

  The decision on the special drawing may be to derive "big hit", "small hit" or "loss", or to derive "big hit" or "loss". Alternatively, the success or failure determination of the special view may be derived to a special design symbol.

  Next, a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment will be described. First, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 220 to 224. FIG. 220 is a view showing 1/5 part of a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment, FIG. 221 is a view showing 2/5 part of a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment, and FIG. Fig. 223 is a view showing a third of the specific example of the effect in Fig. 223 is a view showing a fourth of the specific example of the effect in the present example, and Fig. 224 is a specific example of the effect in the present example It is a figure showing a 5/5 part, and it is the example connected to one to FIGS. 220-224.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is shown in the figure showing each step of FIG. 220 to FIG. Further, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a general-purpose display device 210, a first special-image display device 212, and a second special-image display device 214 are shown. The common-diagram display device 210 is a 7-segment display device shown on the rightmost side, the second special-image display device 214 is a 7-segment display device shown on the left-most side, and the first special-image display device 212 is , 7-segment display shown in the center. In these seven-segment display devices, only the horizontally oriented segment at the center in the vertical direction lights up during symbol variation. Note that the black parts indicate the locations of the lit segments.

  Also, between FIGS. 220 (a) and (b), it is shown that the game ball B is about to pass through the common view starting opening 228. FIG. Furthermore, in FIGS. 220 (), (), 221 (), (), 222 (), (223), 223 (d), 224 (n) and (e), The electric chew (the second special view start port 232 and the pair of blade members 232a) is shown.

  Further, a special view 1 suspension display area 281 is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special view 2 suspension display area 282 is prepared on the right side thereof. Further, a common drawing effect area 283 corresponding to an example of the above-mentioned predetermined area is provided between the special view 1 reserve display area 281 and the special view 2 reserve display area 282. That is, a common drawing effect area 283 is provided in the central portion of the effect display area 208d.

  Even in the special view 1 reserve display area 281 or the special figure 2 reserve display area 282, the reserve icon is displayed closer to the common drawing effect area 283 (center side) as the older reserve icon. That is, the first hold icon representing the first hold with the oldest winning timing in the hold of Special Figure 1 is displayed next to the left of the regular drawing effect area 283, and in the special figure 2 hold, the first prize timing is the oldest. A second hold icon representing 2 hold is displayed on the right of the regular drawing effect area 283. In the special view 1 reserve display area 281 shown in FIG. 220 (A), one special view 1 reserve icon (first special figure 1 reserve icon) 2811 is shown, which indicates that there is one reserve of the special view 1. It is done. The default mode of the special view 1 hold icon is a black circle. The first special view 1 reservation icon 2811 is displayed on the left of the regular drawing effect area 283. Also, a special figure 2 reserve icon (first special figure 2 reserve icon) 2821 indicating that there is one reserve for the special figure 2 in the special figure 2 reserve display area 282 shown in FIG. 220 (G). It is shown. The default mode of the special view 2 hold icon is a white circle different from the default mode of the special view 1 hold icon so that it can be distinguished from the special view 1 hold icon. The first special view 2 reserve icon 2821 is displayed on the right of the regular drawing effect area 283.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is also a special figure 2 priority variable machine.

  The state shown in FIG. 220 (a) is the non-power support state, there is no hold of the special view 2, and in the state where one hold of the special view 1 is left, the first special view display device 212 displays the symbol variation display. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol of Special Figure 1 is performed. On the other hand, the common drawing display device 210 does not perform symbol variation display, and the symbol of the common drawing decoration 3 of the out which is the previous result is still displayed in the common drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 . It should be noted that there may be a case where no symbol is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 when the common drawing display device 210 does not perform symbol variation display.

  In this case, since the player is in the non-power-supporting state, the player has made a left strike, and eventually, the game ball B of one ball passes through the common drawing starting opening 228 provided in the left area. Then symbol variation display is started.

  In the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (A), variable display of the decorative pattern of the common drawing is started. The variation display pattern of the decorative symbol in the common drawing here is the variation display pattern shown in (A) of FIG. 217 (b). In addition, in this decorative symbol display device 208, as an effect of the big hit notice of the special figure 1, a character C1 of a rose flower imitating a cactus appears. The character C1 is largely displayed beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part of the foot hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283 in which the variable display is performed. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing, and the interest of the game is improved. However, the symbol variation display in the common view display device 210 can be visually recognized well. Note that the whole of the common drawing effect area 283 may be hidden by the character C1.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (c), the character C1 disappears, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 develops into reach effect. Since the character C1 disappears, the symbol variation display in the common drawing effect area 283 can be visually recognized well.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (D), the variable symbol display of the special symbol 1 develops into super reach, and the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol 1 is small at the left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 The character C2 of the maid appears as an effect of super reach. Super reach itself is a kind of big hit notice, the production of the super reach also corresponds to the big hit notice production. The character C2 is also displayed in a large size beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part of the foot hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283 in which the variable display is performed. As a result, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing becomes difficult to see again, and the interest of the game is improved. However, the symbol variation display in the common view display device 210 can be visually recognized well. Note that all of the common drawing effect area 283 may be hidden by the character C2. In addition, when developing into super reach, the hold icon (here, the first special view 1 hold icon 2811) that has been displayed so far disappears. Here, although a part of the common drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the character C2, the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing 1 is not moved to the left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, A part may be concealed by the change display of the decorative symbol of Toku-zu 1. The mode of hiding a part or all of the common drawing effect area 283 by the change display of the special figure decorative symbol is not limited to during the super reach but may be any timing during the change display of the special view.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 220 (e), a disappointing effect is given to tell that the decorative symbol to be stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b is the decoration 7 with the appearance of the female character C2 At 220 (f), the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed, and at the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6—decoration 7” which is a combination of the decorative symbols out of alignment. -"Decoration 6" is displayed stopped. On the other hand, the symbol variation display on the common drawing display device 210 is also finished, and although it is in the non-power support state, the common drawing B is stopped and displayed, and even in the common drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 The variable display is finished, and the ordinary drawing decoration 2 corresponding to the ordinary drawing B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric power is released.

  In FIG. 220 (k), the electric tuong open is started, and in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric tuw open notification effect (a character of the lord is a piece shown in FIG. 217 (b). An effect of displaying a decorative symbol being signed is executed. In addition, the reserve of the remaining one special figure 1 is digested, the symbol variation display is started in the first special view display device 212, and the variation display of the decorative symbol in the special figure 1 is started in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 220 (g), the game ball enters the electric chew in the open state for 5 seconds, and the reserve of the special figure 2 increases by one. Display of one special figure 2 reserve icon 2821 (first special figure 2 reserve icon 2821) representing that there is one reserve of special figure 2 in the special figure 2 reserve display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 Is started. Further, the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4", which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the off Stop display.

  Then, the first suspension of the special view 2 represented by the first special view 2 suspension icon 2821 shown in FIG. 220 (g) is digested, and the symbol variation display is started in the second special view display device 214, and the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 is started. In addition, in electric Chu, opening for 5 seconds is continued, two game balls enter electric Chu, the retention of Toku 2 increases by two. A first special figure 2 reserve icon 2821 and a second special figure 2 are shown in the special figure 2 reserve display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The hold icon 2822 is displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character C3 of a princess appears as an effect of the big hit notice of the special figure 2. This character C3 is also displayed in a large size beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part of the foot hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283 in which the electric Chu open notification effect is performed. . As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the electric Chu open notification effect in the decoration pattern of the common drawing, and the interest of the game is improved. That is, by the predetermined effect (big hit advance effect) of the special view 2 based on the entry of the electric chew open, the popular drawing effect (here, the electric chew open notification effect) is difficult to be recognized visually. The effect (in this case the big hit advance effect) to be performed during the symbol change (during the change of the decorative symbol of the special figure) of the special figure that occurs when winning during the electric chew is more the player than the electric chew open notification The interest of the game may be improved by making it difficult to visually recognize the other (here, the electric Chu open notification effect) by giving priority to the effect in which the player is interested. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 219 (d), in the symbol change of the special view 2 performed here, the 15R special jackpot advantageous for the player is more likely to occur than the symbol change of the special view 1. In some cases, it may be possible to make the character C3 that notices the occurrence of an advantageous big hit noticeable. Note that all of the common drawing effect area 283 may be hidden by the character C3. On the other hand, in the common drawing display device 210, although the common drawing B is stopped and displayed, the common drawing display device 210 can be visually recognized well.

  In FIG. 221 (ko), the open for 5 seconds of electric chew is finished, and the electric chew returns to the closed state. In addition, the electric chew open notification effect in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (ko) is also ended, and no symbol is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 here. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character C3 disappears, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 develops into reach effect. By the disappearance of the character C3, although no symbol is displayed, the common drawing effect area 283 can be visually recognized well.

  In the meantime, the gaming ball passes through the common drawing starting port 228 between FIGS. 220 (a) to 221 (c), and the holding of the common drawing is stored.

  While symbol variation display is started in the common view display device 210 shown in FIG. 221 (sa), any symbol is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (sa). In addition, the fluctuation display of the decoration design of the common drawing is non-execution. This is because, in the determination in step S602 shown in FIG. 218, the common drawing determination result included in the common drawing change start command is the common drawing A, and it is determined that the common drawing effect is not performed. . Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 develops into a super reach, and a maid character C2 appears as a super reach effect. This character C2 is also displayed large beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part of the foot hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283, making the common drawing effect area 283 difficult to see The interest of the game is improved. Although any symbol is not displayed in the common drawing effect area 283, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is being performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 221 (B), with the appearance of the female character C2, a big hit notification effect is given to tell that the decorative symbol to be stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b is the decoration 7, In FIG. 222 (S), the symbol variation display of the second special figure display device 214 is finished, and the special symbol A which is the 15R special big hit symbol is displaying the stop symbol and the special symbol A in the decorative symbol display device 208. “Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” which is a combination of the decorative designs corresponding to is displayed stopped. Also, the symbol variation display on the common drawing display device 210 is also finished, and the common drawing A is stopped and displayed, but in the common drawing effect area 283, the variation display of the decorative drawing of the common drawing is not performed, and the common drawing display Even if the symbol variation display on the device 210 is finished, no symbol is displayed. As a result of the stop display of the common view A on the common view display device 210, the electric chew short open is performed, but there is no ball entering during one open period of 0.3 seconds, and the special view 2 There is no change in the number of pending calls.

  Eventually, the 15R big hit game is started, and the player switches from left to right. In FIG. 222 (d), the appearance of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the 1R's eye is shown. In the central region of the decorative symbol display device 208, a jackpot effect in which a panda character appears is performed. Further, during the big hit game, the hold icon (here, the first special view 2 hold icon 2821 and the second special view 2 hold icon 2822) which have been displayed so far disappears, and a predetermined area (here, the common drawing effect area 283 is included) Then, in the lower area including the popular drawing effect area 283 and the special view 1 reserved display area 281, an effect different from that of the ordinary drawing effect (first effect) is performed. In this example, the character "one consecutive villa" is displayed in the special view 1 reservation display area 281, and the face of the character in one consecutive villa is displayed in the regular drawing effect area 283. It has been done. By doing this, the regular drawing effect area 283 can be used effectively. Further, even during the big hit game, as long as there is a hold of the common drawing (as long as there is an entry into the common drawing start port 228), the symbol variation display on the common drawing display device 210 is performed. However, in the popular drawing effect area 283, the notification effect of the number of consecutive loafings is performed, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is not performed (see step S603 shown in FIG. 218). In the common view display device 210 shown in FIG. 222 (D), symbol variation display is started. In addition, the effect different from the regular drawing effect performed in the lower area is the remaining round number notification effect, the current round (digestion round) number notification effect, the attacking ball number notification effect, the attacking open time remaining notification, the attacking open time It may be a notification effect or an effect for winning an award for an attacker. In addition, even during a big hit game, the reserve icon may be displayed without erasing, and an effect different from the regular drawing effect (e.g., a notification of the number of consecutive times in a row) may be performed only in the regular drawing effect area 283 Alternatively, this may be performed only in the area next to the regular drawing effect area 283 (for example, the hold display area). Furthermore, even during a big hit game, a common drawing effect may be performed in the common drawing effect area 283 if, for example, the common drawing effect executability lottery is won.

  A state of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the eighth R is shown in FIG. In this decorative symbol display device 208, the jackpot effect is continued and the notification of the number of consecutive units is also continued. Further, in the common drawing display device 210 shown in FIG. 222 (S), the symbol variation display which has been performed so far is ended, and the common drawing B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric power is released.

  In FIG. 222 (T), the electric chu-long opening is started, and in the popular drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chu open informing The effect of displaying a decorative symbol of which the character is piece-sign is displayed (see step S605 shown in FIG. 218). That is, since the variation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is not performed in the common drawing effect area 283, the electric chow open notification presentation is suddenly started. During the opening of the electric tube long, four game balls enter the electric tube and the holding of the special figure 2 increases by four. However, the hold icon is not displayed during the big hit game.

  FIG. 222 (ta ') is a view showing a modified example of FIG. 222 (ta), and in FIG. 222 (ta'), the electric Chu open notification effect in the common drawing effect area 283 is not performed, and the sound from the speaker 120 is The electric Chu open notification effect is performed to tell that the electric Chu is open. In the spread map effect area 283 shown in FIG. 222 (Ta ') in which the electric Chu open notification effect is not performed, the informing effect on the number of consecutive times is continued. In addition, since there is more award balls in the direction of the attacker than in the electric chow, there may be a case where it is not necessary to perform any positive electric chow open notification effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 223 (h), the end effect of the big hit game is performed, and it is notified that the jackpot is promoted to a definite change state after the end of the big hit game. The symbol variation display is also started in the common view display device 210 shown in FIG. 223 (h).

  FIG. 223 (T) shows the appearance of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the end of the big hit game. The special figure 2 reserve display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 represents the number of reserve figures of the special figure 2 that is increased by entering the electric chew at the timing of FIG. 222 (T) because the big hit game is over. The first to fourth special view 2 hold icons 2821 to 2824 are displayed.

  In the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 223 (T), a character display of “in the middle of positive variation” is performed to indicate that the state is in the positive variation state. That is, an effect of notifying game information is performed. In addition, the electric support state continues until the next big hit. Further, in FIG. 223 (T), the symbol variation display by the second special view display device 214 is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the change display of the decoration symbol of the special view 2 is started. On the other hand, the common drawing display device 210 which has been performing the symbol variation display until now performs the stop display, and the common drawing display 210 of the common drawing display 210 shown in FIG. There is. The symbol change display of the common view stopped and displayed here is a symbol change display performed over the big hit game, and is a symbol change display notifying the result of the success / failure determination of the common view in the non-electric support state during the big hit game. is there.

  Furthermore, in the regular drawing effect area 283, the normal drawing effect is not performed because it is in the power support state (see step S601 shown in FIG. 218), and the common drawing effect area 283 functions as a display area of the digestion pending icon. There is. That is, the first special view 2 reserve icon 2821 representing the first reserve of the special view 2 started here is a separate drawing area from the special view 2 reserve display area 282 together with the symbol variation display of the special view. It moves to 283 and then disappears in the popular drawing effect area 283 before the symbol variation ends. Further, in the special view 2 reserve display area 282, the reserve icon which has been the second special figure 2 reserve icon 2822 is shifted to the first special figure 2 reserve icon display position which is next to the right of the popular drawing effect area 283. The movement is performed, and the holding icon after the second special view 180 holding icon 2823 is similarly shifted to the left by one. In addition, the time (second movement completion time) to move to the common drawing effect area 283 (second area) where the digestion / retention icon which has been the first special figure 2 reserve icon 2821 until now becomes the display area of the digestion / retention icon Is a special icon 2 pending display area 282 (first area), the undigested pending icon (the pending icon which was the second to fourth special view 2 pending icon 2822-2824 so far) is the special The time to move to another position in the hold display area 282 (first movement completion time) is different. Also, in order to show the player the holding icon (digestion holding icon) corresponding to the change for a long time and strongly impress that one holding has been made, the second movement completion time is the second movement completion time. It is preferable to be longer than one transfer completion time. Furthermore, although the common drawing effect area 283 is a common destination of the digestion holding icon of Toku-zu 1 and the digestion holding icon of Toku 2, the common drawing effect area 283 is divided into two, The moving destination of the icon and the moving destination of the digest icon in Special Figure 2 may be provided separately.

  In FIG. 223 (g), the symbol variation display of the second special view display device 214 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is a combination of the decoration symbols of the off-set. -"Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the common drawing display device 210, symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing is started. The first special figure 2 reserve icon 2821 (digestion reserve icon) moved to the popular drawing effect area 283 disappears, and in the power support state, the probability figure of almost electric power tuong open is won, so the common drawing display device Even when the symbol variation display is started at 210, a common drawing effect is not performed (see step S601 shown in FIG. 218).

  Then, while the symbol variation display by the second special view display device 214 is started again, the variation display of the decoration symbol of the special view 2 is started again in the decoration symbol display device 208, and the decoration symbol shown in FIG. On the display device 208, a princess character C3 appears as an effect of the special hit of the special figure 2. The character C3 is also displayed in a large size beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part of the foot hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283, and the part of the head is called "during change". It hides part of the character display (game information notification effect). In the popular drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 223 (na), the display mode (here, the face of the panda) of the jackpot notice (including a false jackpot notice) in the variation different from the default display mode in the digest icon 2820. (Display mode), but it is difficult for the character C3 to visually recognize, and the interest of the game is improved. It should be noted that the digest reserve icon 2820 changes the display mode during the movement to the common drawing effect area 283 or after the movement is completed. Further, the game information notification effect is also difficult to visually recognize by the character C3, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, a common drawing B of the electric power tuong open is stopped and displayed on the common drawing display device 210 shown in FIG. 223 (na).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 223 (d), the character C3 disappears, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 develops into reach effect. Since the character C3 disappears, the big hit notice by the digestive reserve icon 2820 in the popular drawing effect area 283 can be visually recognized well. In FIG. 223 (D), the electric Chu-long opening is started, but in the electric support state, since the electric Chu-long opening is almost stochastically won, the electric Chu-open notification effect is not performed either (Fig. Refer to step S601 shown in 218). During the opening of the electric tube, the game ball enters the electric tube, and the reservation of the special figure 2 becomes full (four).

  In the common drawing display device 210 shown in FIG. 223 (N), symbol fluctuation display is started, but no symbol is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283, and fluctuation display of decorative symbols of common drawing is not executed. is there. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 develops into a super reach, and a maid character C2 appears as a super reach effect. This character C2 is also displayed large beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part of the foot hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283, making the common drawing effect area 283 difficult to see There is. Although any symbol is not displayed in the common drawing effect area 283, it is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is being performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 223 (N), with the appearance of the maiden character C2, a big hit notification effect is given to tell that the decorative symbol to be stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b is the decoration 6, In FIG. 224 (no), the symbol variation display of the second special view display device 214 is finished, and the special symbol D which is the 15R normal big hit symbol is displaying the stop symbol, and the special symbol D in the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. “Decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6”, which is a combination of the decorative designs corresponding to the above, is stopped and displayed. In addition, although the symbol variation display is ended in the common drawing display device 210 shown in FIG. 223 (ne) and the common drawing B is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is performed in the common drawing effect region 283. Even if the symbol variation display on the common view display device 210 ends, no symbol is displayed. As a result that the drawing B is stopped and displayed on the drawing display device 210, in FIG.

  Eventually, the 15R big hit game is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (C), the big hit game's end effect is performed, and it is informed that it is promoted to the power support state (time saving state) after the big hit game is over. ing. In the common view display device 210 shown in FIG. 224 (C), symbol variation display is performed.

  FIG. 224 (h) shows the appearance of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the end of the big hit game. Moreover, the common drawing display device 210 which has been performing the symbol variation display until now performs the stop display, and the common drawing display 210 of the common drawing display device 210 shown in FIG. There is. The symbol variation display of the common view stopped and displayed here is also a symbol variation display performed across the big hit game, and is a symbol variation display notifying the result of the success / failure determination of the common view in the non-electric support state during the big hit game. is there. The control state shown in FIG. 224 (h) is the power support state, and even when the notification of the result of the propriety determination of the common drawing in the non-power support state, the common drawing effect is not performed. However, you may perform a common drawing effect here.

  In the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (f), a character display of "time saving" is displayed to indicate that it is in the power support state. That is, an effect of notifying game information is performed. Further, in FIG. 224 (f), the symbol variation display by the second special view display device 214 is started, and the variation display of the decoration symbol of the special view 2 is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the symbol variation display is also started in the common view display device 210 shown in FIG. Furthermore, if 15R normal big hit is won, power support state is maintained until the symbol fluctuation display of special figure is performed 100 times after the big hit game end, in the state which is shown in figure 224 (f), the special figure of the first special figure Since the variable display is started, the remaining number of times the power support state is maintained is 99 times. In the regular drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 224 (f), since it is in the power support state, even when the symbol variation display of the common drawing by the common drawing display device 210 is started, the common drawing effect is not performed. The remaining number of states is displayed. That is, in the popular drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 224 (f), an effect of notifying game information is performed. Since the opening of the electric chow can occur normally during the electric support state, etc., the interest of the game may be improved by displaying the remaining number of electric support states instead of the popular drawing effect.

  In FIG. 224 (f), the symbol variation display of the second special view display device 214 is finished and the stop symbol is displayed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 4—decoration 5” which is a combination of decorative symbols out of alignment. -"Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed. Further, even in the common drawing display device 210, the symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing ends, and the common drawing B of the power long open is stopped and displayed, but in the common drawing effect region 283, the symbol fluctuation display in the common drawing display device 210 No symbol is displayed even though the is finished. As a result that the drawing B is stopped and displayed on the drawing display device 210, as shown in FIG. 224 (e), the electric telephone is opened and the special drawing 2 is full. Moreover, in FIG. 224 (e), the symbol variation display by the second special view display device 214 is started again, and the remaining number of times the power support state is maintained is 98 times. Numerals 98 are displayed in the spread diagram effect area 283 shown in FIG. 224 (e).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 224 (ma), a character C3 of a princess appears as an effect of the big hit advance notice of the special figure 2. The character C3 is also displayed in a large size beyond the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the part of the foot hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283 and the part of the head is called "time-scene-time". It hides part of the character display (game information notification effect). The game information notification effect (the numeral 98) displayed in the general drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 224 (ma) is also the game information notification effect displayed above the decorative symbol display device 208 (a character display of "time saving" ) Is also difficult to view by the character C3, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Subsequently, an example of the effect including the pre-read effect in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 225 is a diagram showing in stages an example of an effect with pre-read effect in the present embodiment.

  The state shown in FIG. 225 (a) is the non-power support state, there is no hold of the special view 2, and in the state where one hold of the special view 1 is left, the symbol variation display is displayed on the first special view display device 212. While the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 in the special symbol 1 reserve display area 281, the first special figure 1 reserve icon 2811 is shown in the default display mode. It is done. Further, symbol fluctuation display is performed in the common drawing display device 210, and in the common drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, fluctuation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is started.

  FIG. 225 (a) shows that the game ball B has entered the first special view starting opening 230, and a special view 1 reserved display area 281 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 225 (a). , A second special view 1 hold icon 2812 is additionally displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice different from the default display mode. That is, the hold icon representing the second hold of the special view 1 is being displayed in the display mode of the aged character. The pre-reading notice mentioned here is a notice which starts the notice about the result of the yes-no decision of a special figure before the symbol change start which reports the result of the yes-no decision. More specifically, the start information is prefetched before the start of symbol variation of the special drawing, the result of the success or failure judgment of the special drawing is determined in advance based on the start information, and the result of judgment of success or failure is notified based on the start information Prior to the start of symbol fluctuation, based on the preliminary judgment result, it is foretelling that the judgment result based on the start information will be a big hit, or the special view A or the special view B, and based on the start information Even in the case where the result of determination of acceptance is disapproval or special image I or J is selected, a notice (so-called false) as to whether the result of determination of acceptance based on the start information is a big hit or special image A or special image B Also includes In addition, although the prefetch notice is started from the display start (start mouth opening ball entry timing) of the display of the hold icon here, it is changed from the display mode of the default display mode to the display mode of the preview notice. The display mode may be different from the default display mode and the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, and the display mode may be changed to the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice. For example, it may be changed to the display mode of pre-reading notice at the timing when the reserve icon shifts (the symbol fluctuation start timing of the special figure), or it is changed to the display mode of pre-reading notice by pressing the chance button 136 May be

  In addition, in FIG. 225 (A), the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 5- "Decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and in Fig. 225 (c), symbol variation display by the first special view display device 212 for digesting the first suspension is started, and in the decorative pattern display device 208, the special figure 1 decoration The variable display of the symbol has been started. On the other hand, in the common drawing display device 210 shown in FIG. 225 (c), the symbol variation display which has been performed up to now is ended, the common drawing B is stopped and displayed, The variation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is finished, and the common drawing decoration 2 corresponding to the common drawing B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric power is released.

  In FIG. 225 (D), the electric chulong opening is started, and in the popular drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chu opening information effect (the decorative symbol in which the character is piece sign is displayed Production is being performed. In this electric Chu open notification effect, the character of the statue is displayed large beyond the regular drawing effect area 283, enters the special view 1 hold display area 281, and the first special view 1 hold icon 2811 (here, the display of the advance notice) Hiding part of the mode's hold icon). As a result, the first special view 1 reservation icon 2811 is difficult to view. In this manner, when the player is able to make the player interested in the trend of the regular drawing effect by daringly hiding the first special view 1 suspension icon 2811 whose display mode has changed to the preliminary notice mode. There is. Further, the pre-reading notice is a notice of a future big hit, and it may be possible to give the player an expectation of opening the electric chow by making the current progressive type public presentation stand out. In addition, you may hide all the 1st special figure 1 reservation icons 2811 by electric Chu open notification production. In addition, the character of the lord also enters the middle symbol display area 208b, and also hides part of the decorative symbol of the special figure in the middle of the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 225 (i ') is a figure which shows the modification of pre-reading advance notice. In (a) of FIG. 225, although the effect of the advance notice is performed using the display mode of the hold icon, in (b ′) of FIG. The pre-reading notice effect is performed by the letter indication that pre-reading notice is in progress. Although this preview advance notice effect enters the common drawing effect area 283, a part is hidden by the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing. Note that, on the contrary, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing may be hidden by the advance notice effect.

  FIG. 225 (U ') is a figure which shows the modification of the aspect of the common figure decorative symbol stopped-displayed. In FIG. 225 (c '), the symbol of the common drawing decoration 2 stopped and displayed is displayed larger than the common drawing effect area 283, and enters the special drawing 1 holding display area 281, and the first special drawing 1 holding icon 2811 ( Here, part of the hold icon of the display mode of the pre-reading notice is hidden. As a result, the first special view 1 reservation icon 2811 is difficult to view, and the interest of the game is improved. Note that all of the first special view 1 suspension icons 2811 may be hidden by the variation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing or the common drawing decoration symbol displayed by the stop display. In addition, the stop-displayed regular drawing decoration 2 also enters the middle symbol display area 208b, and also hides a part of the decorative symbol of the special figure in the middle of the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 225 (e ') is a figure which shows the modification of electric Chu open notification production. In the electric Chu open notification effect in FIG. 225 (D '), the character of Tonosama is displayed large beyond the regular drawing effect area 283 and enters the special view 1 suspension display area 281, but a part of this Tonosama character is displayed. Is hidden by the first special view 1 hold icon 2811 (here, the hold icon of the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice). In addition, the character of the lord enters the middle symbol display area 208b, but a part of the character of the lord is hidden by the decorative symbol of the special figure in the middle of the middle symbol display area 208b. As a result of these, it is difficult to visually recognize the electric Chu open notification effect.

  In addition, the advance notice by the hold icon is a kind of continuous notice continuously performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays. In the special figure 2 priority variable machine, while executing the continuous notice about the special figure 1, the symbol change indication of the special figure 2 may interrupt, but even with the symbol change indication of the special figure 2 which has been interrupted, the continuous notice is continued . That is, the special figure 1 reserve icon is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted even if the symbol variation indication of the special figure 2 is interrupted before the reserve digestion of the special figure 1 reserve icon. Also, the special view 1 hold icon continues to be displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice. In the example shown in FIG. 225 (D '), the first special view 1 reservation icon 2811 of the display mode of the advance notice is making it difficult to visually recognize a part of the electric Chu open notification effect, and the player's In some cases, it is possible to make the advance notice noticeable and maintain the expectation for the big hit while maintaining the expectation.

  FIG. 226 is a diagram showing in stages an example of an effect in which a big hit notice is mixed with a regular drawing effect in the present embodiment.

  The state shown in FIG. 226A is a non-electric support state, and "decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4", which is a combination of out-of-round decorative designs, is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. On the other hand, although the common drawing display device 210 performs symbol variation display, in the common drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the design of the common drawing decoration 3 of the out of the previous result is still displayed. , The variation display of the decoration figure of the common figure is not done.

  In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 226 (A), symbol variation display is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 is started. When the symbol variation display of this special drawing is started, the variation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is started also in the common drawing effect region 283. That is, according to the change of the special drawing (the change display of the decoration symbol of the special drawing), the common drawing effect (the change display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing) is started.

  In FIG. 226 (C), the variation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing in the common drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the character display effect of "super heat" which is a kind of the big hit notice effect of the special drawing. That is, the jackpot notice effect of the special view here is displayed over the lower area including the common drawing effect area 283, and the common drawing effect is difficult to see. Here, the character display effect of "super heat" is a notice before reaching, and may be an effect of giving notice that the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing develops into reach. In addition, the pattern of the variable display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing here is a character display of "super heat" which is a kind of big hit notice production of the special drawing shown in (e) of Fig. 217 (b). It is a change display pattern included in the change. In the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing, the character display of "super heat" is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 227: is a figure which shows in steps the example in which the common drawing rendition of the fluctuation display pattern shown to (f) of FIG.217 (b) is performed.

  The state shown in FIG. 227A is a non-electric support state, and "decoration 5-decoration 3-decoration 4", which is a combination of out-of-round decorative designs, is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the symbol variation display is not performed even in the common drawing display device 210, and the symbol of the common drawing decoration 3 of the previous result, which is the previous result, is displayed in the common drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. is there.

  In the first special figure display device 212 shown in FIG. 227 (A), symbol variation display is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 is started. In addition, the symbol variation display is also started in the common view display device 210 shown in FIG. 227 (a), and the variation display of the decoration symbol in the common view is started in the common view effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, a common drawing effect of the variable display pattern shown in (f) of FIG. 217 (b) is performed.

  In the general drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 227 (C), the word display of “latency” representing the advance notice of the 2R jackpot which is the latent definite change of the special drawing is made beyond the general drawing effect area 283.

  In the general drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 227 (D), the word display of “probable” indicating the notice of the 2R big hit which is a sudden definite variation of the special drawing is made beyond the general drawing effect area 283.

  In the popular drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 227 (E), the character display of "big hit" representing the 15R big hit notice of the special drawing is made beyond the common drawing effect area 283.

  In FIG. 227 (f), the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212 is ended, and the stop symbol is displayed for the second small hit symbol (special view H), and the special symbol display device 208 displays the special figure. "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" corresponding to H is stopped and displayed. Although the symbol variation display is continued in the common drawing display device 210, in the common drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is performed before the end of the symbol variation display of the special drawing. The process is finished, and the character "hidden" is stopped and displayed in the regular drawing effect area 283.

  In this example, the regular drawing effect functions as a big hit notice of the special drawing, but the regular drawing effect of this example is also the effect executed in the common drawing effect area 283.

  Here, the general drawing effect which functions as a big hit notice of the special drawing is in the special drawing 1 holding display area 281 and the special drawing 2 holding display area 282. Therefore, if the first special view hold icon whose display mode has been changed to the pre-read preview mode is displayed in the special view 1 hold display area 281 or the special view 2 hold display area 282, the first special view hold icon is displayed. , Some or all are hidden by the public map effect. The big hit notice (especially the big hit notice of the special figure fluctuation game currently being executed) is the notice that the expectation to the big hit can be ahead of the advance notice (the big hit notice of future special figure change game), and the big hit notice Since it is possible to perform the popular drawing effect including so as to stand out more than the advance notice, it may be possible to improve the player's interest.

In addition, the character display displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 may be in a mode that fits within the common drawing effect area 283. In addition, the start timing of the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is made so that the end timing of the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol of the common drawing coincides with or slightly before the end timing of the display of the symbol fluctuation of the special drawing. It may be delayed from the symbol variation display start timing of the display device 210.
FIG. 228 is a diagram showing an example of other effects.

  FIGS. 228 (a) and (b) are examples in which the jackpot notice effect is performed by the effect using the effect movable body.

  The pachinko machine in this example is a pachinko machine having the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. In the popular drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (A), the common drawing effect is performed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol of the special figure is started. Then, after the regular drawing effect is started, a big hit advance effect for giving notice of becoming a big hit in the variable display is performed by the effect movable body 224 provided beside the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 228 (a) comprises an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating an upper arm and a forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm 224a to the position of a shoulder. And a forearm motor (not shown) for pivoting the forearm 224b to the elbow position. The effect movable body 224 is an accessory capable of moving at least the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor. In FIG. 228 (a), the forearm portion 224b pivoted upward covers the spread diagram effect area 283 in which the spread diagram effect is performed, and the spread diagram effect area 283 is hidden by the forearm 224b, Figure production is difficult to see. In addition, the operation of the effect movable body 224 may be accentuated in some cases, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, three special figure 2 reserve icons 282 1-2823 are displayed in the special figure 2 reserve display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (A), but these special figure 2 reserve icons 2821 are displayed. A part or all of each of ~ 2823 is also hidden by the forearm 224b, and the special view 2 holding icons 2821-2823 are difficult to see. In addition, it is possible to use the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 largely to perform a big hit advance presentation effect by the effect movable body 224 and the effect image, and the amusement of the game is improved by the effect of the large scale.

  FIG. 228 (a) is a view showing the situation continuing from the same figure (a), in which the forearm portion 224b is further pivoted upward, and from the front of the common drawing effect area 283 in which the common drawing effect is performed. The forearm 224b disappears. However, instead, an effect image (here, an image of three falling stars) related to the movement of the effect movable body 224 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the popular drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the effect image. Is difficult to see. Moreover, although three special figure 2 reserve icons 2821-2823 are displayed also in the special figure 2 reserve display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (i), these special figure 2 reserve icons 2821 A part or all of each of ~ 2823 is also hidden by the forearm portion 224b or the effect image, and the special figure 2 retention icons 2821-2823 are difficult to see. The effect image may be an image displayed before, during or after the effect movable body 224 operates. Also, the effect movable body 224 does not necessarily have to be exposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  It should be noted that after the big hit notice is started by the effect movable body 224, the spread map effect is not executed until the big hit notice is finished. That is, in this example, the predetermined period in step S603 shown in FIG. 218 corresponds to the execution of the jackpot notice by the effect movable body 224. By doing this, it may be possible to be noticed by a big hit advance notice by the effect movable body 224.

  In addition, the effect movable body 224 may not perform the operation to the front side (the player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it may be difficult to visually recognize the common drawing effect with only the effect image.

  51 (a) is an example in which the jackpot notice effect is performed by the effect using the tutorial.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (a), tutorial display is performed so as to overlap a part of the common drawing effect area 283 in which the common drawing effect is performed. In this tutorial display, an explanation is given on a predetermined display (here, the character C1 of the big hit advance notice of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 220 (i) or the like). The common drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the tutorial display image, and the common drawing effect is difficult to see.

  FIG. 228 (I) is an example in which a plurality of effects hide the common drawing effect and the hold icon. In this example, the plurality of effects are two effects, but three or more effects may be provided.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 228 (I), the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing is performed and the common drawing effect is performed in the common drawing effect area 283, and the first special drawing 1 reservation icon 2811 is It is displayed. Further, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a character C1 (first special effect) of the big hit advance notice of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 220 (A) etc. and another new character C4 (second special effect) are displayed It is done. The other new character C4 may be, for example, a notice display of reach development, a notice display of a 15R special jackpot winning, a display prompting the user to press the chance button 136, or the like. In the example shown in FIG. 228 (I), these characters C1 and C4 hide a part of each of the common drawing effect region 283, the reserved icon, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing, It is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the hold icon and the variable display of the decoration symbol of the special drawing.
The third embodiment will be supplemented below.

  An example in which symbol variation display (second symbol variation display) on a display device (for example, the decoration symbol display device 208) controlled by the sub control means, that is, variation display of the decoration symbol (for example, common drawing effect etc.) is difficult to view In addition to hiding with other effect displays (for example, a big hit notice display, game information display, etc.), other methods are included. For example, light emission etc. may be intense around the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol (more remarkable if it is similar color), and it may be relatively difficult to visually recognize, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol and other effect display have similar color, etc. Can be difficult to view even if they do not overlap. Moreover, the apparatus in which the variation display of a decorative symbol and another presentation are performed may be separate bodies. For example, main liquid crystal and auxiliary liquid crystal may be used.

  Further, in addition to the case where the variation display of the decorative symbol becomes difficult to be recognized by the other effect display, the other effect display may be constricted visually due to the variable display of the decorative symbol. For example, a part of the advance notice may be hidden by the variable display of the common figure decorative symbol, and another effect with low reliability may be difficult to visually recognize by the variable display of the common pattern decorative symbol. If the expectation of the jackpot is low, it may be more interesting for the player to direct the electric chow release.

  In addition, it may be configured to change depending on the situation whether it is difficult to visually recognize other effects or to make the variable display of the decorative symbol difficult to visually recognize. A configuration may be adopted in which priority is given to effects that a player can expect, and the other is difficult to view, or a configuration in which priority is given to an effect whose result is derived first, and the other is difficult to view. .

  Other effects include big hit notice, advance notice, reach effect (reach change), indication of gaming state such as latency, etc., but at least a part may be a configuration that makes it difficult to view the change display of the decorative symbol. . For example, although the operation itself of the character is not a configuration that makes the variable display of the decorative symbol difficult to visually recognize by the jackpot notice by the character operation, it is difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative symbol by the simultaneously generated effect image It is also good.

  Moreover, the structure which becomes difficult to visually recognize at least one part of the electric chew open alerting | presentation effect after the fluctuation display of a decorative symbol may be sufficient.

  Furthermore, the variable display of the decorative symbol may be always performed when the power chew is released for a long time in a non-electric support state, but a matter possibility lottery may be performed and may or may not be performed.

  In addition, another effect may be configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the variation display of the decorative symbol and the hold display (hold icon) at the same time.

  In addition, it may be configured to perform variable display of the decorative symbol at the time of opening electric short.

  In addition, the variation display of the decorative symbol may not be performed during the power support state, or the variation display of the decorative symbol may be performed during the power support state.

  Moreover, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not only related to the result of the assistance pass / fail judgment (the pass / fail judgment of the drawing), but in addition to the result of the assistance pass / fail judgment, the result of the judgment It may be a variable display in which a notice is mixed.

  In addition, as for the execution frequency of the variation display of the decorative symbol, in addition to comparing in the power support state and in the non power support state, it is the configuration that is influenced by the launch strength (for example, right hit and left hit) on the game You may

  During the big hit game, only the symbol variation display (the first symbol variation display) on the display device (for example, the common view display device 210) controlled by the main control means may be performed, or in addition, the decoration symbol The variable display of may be performed. Further, during the big hit game, the variation display of the decorative symbol may not be performed, and only the electric chew open notification effect may be performed.

  In addition, it is the constitution of right hitting during the big hit game and the electric support state which is the advantageous state, but during the big hit game may be left hitting, and the combination is optional.

  In addition, although the special figure 2 priority change machine has been described so far, the special order 1 and the special figure 2 win alternately during the winning order change machine and the non-power support state, while the power support state is electric chew It may be a game console which is open and the winning of only Special Figure 2 is permitted. In particular, during power support, it will have the same effect as the priority changer. Moreover, it may be a simultaneous changer.

  A so-called tutorial notice in which a big hit notice production is performed by a production using a tutorial may make the variable display of the decorative symbol difficult to visually recognize, or vice versa. For example, the tutorial notice for explaining the decorative symbol in the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is highlighted (in this case, the variable symbol of the decorative symbol becomes difficult to see), and then the decorative symbol related to the explanation is stopped. It is also possible to give an explanation.

  Also, the advance notice may be made difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  Furthermore, among the plurality of other effects described using FIG. 228 (I), the first other effect may be configured to be concealed so that the variation display of the decorative symbol is not visible at all from the player. In addition, the first other effect may hide the first area of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the second other effect may hide the second area. The variable display of the decorative symbol may be configured to simultaneously display a plurality of characters, characters, etc., and at least one of them may be hidden by another effect. In addition, other effects may be hidden.

  Moreover, the structure which performs two or more change display of a decorative symbol simultaneously may be sufficient.

As described above, in the example described so far, when one effect hides the other effect, the other effect may hide the other effect even if it is not specifically refused . In addition, when one effect hides a part of the other effect, even if not particularly refused, one effect may hide all of the other effect.
In addition, the term “invisible” includes invisible.

  Furthermore, other effects such as a regular drawing effect and a big hit effect may be effects by sound, effects by light, or effects as shown in FIGS. 228 (a) and (i). It may be an effect by a movable body. In the case of sound effects, the sounds overlap, and one effect hides the other effect according to the volume and pitch, that is, the other effect becomes difficult to view.

  In the above description, at least the start region (e.g., electric power) in which the state can be changed between the entry easy state (e.g., the open state) and the entry difficult state (e.g., the closed state); For example, it is possible to execute at least a first success / failure determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least the success / failure determination of a common drawing and a second success / failure determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a special drawing). If the result of the second success or failure judgment result of the second success or failure judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) is the success or failure judgment of the big hit, the control status is changed from non-big hit control status to big hit control status Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that can be transferred to at least the above, and effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) that can at least execute effect display The start area is at least a state where the entry difficult state is the entry easy state when the result of the first pass / fail determination is a specific answer determination result (for example, per drawing). The first success or failure judgment means is more likely to derive the particular success or failure judgment result in the power support state than in the non-power support state, and the effect display means is The first effect is an effect (for example, a common drawing effect) including at least an effect display relating to the result of the first success or failure judgment, and the effect display means is A second effect (for example, a big hit advance effect) relating to the result of the second success / failure determination can be displayed at least, and the second effect is a part or all of the period during the execution of the first effect. , Less of the first stage In any case, it is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize a part (for example, FIG. 220 (A) or FIG. 221 (F)), and the first effect is in the non-electric support state rather than the electric support state. Is an effect that is easy to be executed (for example, step S601 shown in FIG. 218), It explained about.

  In addition, it is provided with a winning means (or winning area) (for example, an attacker) that can change at least the state between the easy winning state and the hard winning state, and the winning means (or winning area) When the result is a big hit success / failure determination result, at least the state changeable from the hard-to-win prize state to the easy-to-Prize state may be possible.

  Further, the jackpot control state may be a state in which the winning area can be at least changed from the difficult-to-win state to the easy-to-win state.

  In addition, it may be an aspect provided with an entry area which can not be changed in state (for example, a first entry area, in other words, a fixed entry area, for example, a spread gate etc.).

  Moreover, the aspect provided with the 1st symbol display means (for example, common drawing display apparatus 210) which can perform at least a 1st symbol change display may be sufficient. The first symbol display means may be capable of at least displaying a stop symbol corresponding to a result of the first yes / no determination after the first symbol variation display. Further, the first symbol display means may be such that the operation is suspended when the first suspension condition is established, and the establishment requirement of the first suspension condition is the game ball in the entry area It may be a requirement that has entered. More carefully, the establishment requirement of the first holding condition may be a requirement including at least the game ball having entered the entry area.

  In addition, the second symbol display means (for example, the second special view display device 214) capable of executing at least the second symbol variation display may be provided. The second symbol display means may be capable of at least displaying a stop symbol corresponding to a result of the second success / failure determination after the second symbol variation display is performed. Further, the second symbol display means may be such that the operation is suspended when the second suspension condition is established, and the establishment requirement of the second suspension condition is the start area (for example, It may be a requirement that the game ball has entered into the second entry area, in other words, the electric tulip which is a variable entry area). More carefully, the establishment requirement of the second holding condition may be a requirement that at least the game ball has entered the start area.

  The aspect provided with the effect display means (for example, sub control means 400, 500) which can control at least the said effect display means may be sufficient.

  The first effect may be an effect including at least a change effect and an open effect,

  The change effect is an effect to be executed during a period in which the first symbol change display is performed,

  The opening effect is an effect to be executed after the stop symbol corresponding to the specific (for example, hit) first judgment result is displayed, for example, a period during which the starting area is in the easy entry state. It may be an instruction to be executed in the included period.

  Furthermore, the first effect may include a stop display effect executed during a period in which a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the specific first yes / no determination is displayed.

  The second effect may be a jackpot notice effect or a preview notice effect.

  “The effect display means is an image display means, and the image display means can display at least the first effect in a predetermined display area (for example, a popular drawing effect area 283), The image display means can display at least a third effect in a period including at least a part of the non-execution period of the first effect, and the third effect may be the first effect as well. The second effect is also an effect different from the second effect (for example, a game information notification effect displaying the remaining number of power support conditions), and the second effect is a part or all of the period during the third effect execution A game table characterized in that it is an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the third effect (for example, FIG. 224 (ma) etc.). I also explained about.

  In addition, the third effect may be a holding icon or display of the number of times of time saving or the number of consecutive units.

  In addition, “the third effect is an effect including at least one of a jackpot notice display (for example, appearance effects of characters C1 to C3) and a game information display (for example, character display“ in the middle of a definite change ”) A game stand characterized by I also explained about.

  The jackpot notice display referred to here may be a display for giving a notice that the winning area is changed to the easy-to-win state, and includes a false display. In addition, the jackpot notice display may be a jackpot notice display in which the display is started after the second success or failure judgment is made, that is, the second symbol variation display is started, or the second It may be a pre-reading advance notice display in which display is started before judgment of a yes or no is performed, that is, before the above-mentioned second symbol variation display is started.

  In addition, the game information display referred to here is a display indicating the number of times of short time (the number of remaining times or the number of times of completion of the second symbol variation display in the power support state) It may be

  Also, “the image display means can execute at least the big hit notice display during the non-execution period of the first effect in the non-electric support state (for example, FIG. 221 (a)). Etc.), the image display means is capable of executing at least the game information display during the non-execution period of the first effect in the power support state (for example, FIG. 223 (Te), etc.) ), That the game stand characterized by. I also explained about.

  In addition, “the first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from among a plurality of types of effect patterns (for example, a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 217 (b)), and the plurality of types of effects The effect pattern of one type among the patterns includes at least an image relating to the result of the first success or failure determination (for example, a common figure decorative pattern) and an image of the big hit notice display (for example, a decorative image of "super heat") It is an effect pattern (for example, a variation display pattern shown in (E) of FIG. 217 (b)) of a variation display which sequentially displays a plurality of images including the game console. I also explained about.

  Furthermore, in the above description, “the start region (for example, electric power) that can be changed at least between the easy-to-enter state (for example, the open state) and the difficult-to-enter state (for example, the closed state); Execute at least a first success / failure determination unit (for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of at least executing a determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a common drawing) and a second success / failure determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a special drawing) If the second success or failure judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success or failure judgment indicate the success or failure of the big hit, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least transition to the control state; and effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least effect display. In the game console provided, the start area is changed from the entry difficult state to the entry easy state when the result of the first pass / fail judgment is a specific pass / fail judgment result (for example, per drawing). At least a state changeable, the effect display means can display at least a first effect, and the first effect includes at least an effect display related to the result of the first success or failure judgment. (For example, a regular drawing effect), and the effect display means can display at least a second effect (for example, a big hit advance effect) relating to the result of the second success or failure judgment, and the second effect Is an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during a part or all of the first effect execution (for example, FIG. 220 (A) or FIG. 221). (E) etc.), Effect of the big hit are demonstrations likely to be performed toward the non-jackpot controlled state than the control state (e.g., step S603 shown in FIG. 218), the amusement machine, characterized in that. It explained about.

  In addition, “the first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from among a plurality of effect patterns (a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 217 (b)), and the first effect is an effect of the plurality of effect patterns The first effect pattern among them is an effect pattern in which the non-big hit control state is easier to be executed than the big hit control state (for example, the effect pattern other than the electric Chu open notification effect: variation display effect) (FIG. 218) Step S604 and step S605) to show, a game stand characterized by the above. I also explained about.

  In addition, “the first effect pattern is an effect pattern performed over a first period of time (for example, a variation display pattern shown in (a) of FIG. 217 (b)), among the plurality of effect patterns The second effect pattern (for example, the electric chow open notification effect pattern shown in (i) of FIG. 217 (b)) is an effect pattern performed over a second time period, and the first time period (eg, 15 hours). A game console characterized in that the second) is longer than the second time (e.g., 5.8 seconds). I also explained about.

  "The starting region is an electric tulip, and the electric tulip includes at least a first opening pattern (for example, an electric tuw short opening pattern) and a second opening pattern (for example, an electric tulong opening pattern) The second opening pattern is an opening pattern that is more advantageous for the player than the first opening pattern, and the effect display means is an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the first opening pattern. A game console characterized by at least being capable of displaying the first effect when the electric tulip is opened in the second opening pattern. I also explained about.

  The open pattern advantageous to the player as referred to herein is an open pattern in which the game ball easily enters the electric tulip, in other words, an open pattern capable of acquiring a large number of balls, for example, the open time is long. In the case of a large number of times of opening, or in the case of opening a plurality of times, the opening pattern is such that the total opening time is long or one opening time is long.

  "The effect display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect in the second effect pattern during the big hit control state (step S605 shown in FIG. 218), Game console. I also explained about.

  Furthermore, in the above description, “the start region (for example, electric power) that can be changed at least between the easy-to-enter state (for example, the open state) and the difficult-to-enter state (for example, the closed state); Execute at least a first success / failure determination unit (for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of at least executing a determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a common drawing) and a second success / failure determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a special drawing) If the second success or failure judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success or failure judgment indicate the success or failure of the big hit, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least transition to the control state; and effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least effect display. In the game console provided, the start area is changed from the entry difficult state to the entry easy state when the result of the first pass / fail judgment is a specific pass / fail judgment result (for example, per drawing). At least a state changeable, the effect display means can display at least a first effect, and the first effect includes at least an effect display related to the result of the first success or failure judgment. (For example, a regular drawing effect), the effect display means can display at least the advance notice effect concerning the result of the second success or failure judgment, and the first effect is during execution of the advance notice effect A game console characterized in that it is an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the previewed announcement effect in a part or all of the period (eg, FIG. 225 (D), etc.). It explained about.

  In addition, “the first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from among a plurality of effect patterns (a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 217 (b)), and the first effect is an effect of the plurality of effect patterns One of the effect patterns includes at least an image relating to the result of the first success or failure judgment (for example, a common figure decorative pattern) and an image of a big hit notice display (for example, a decoration image of "super heat") It is an effect pattern (for example, a variation display pattern shown in (E) of FIG. 217 (b)) of a variation display for sequentially displaying images. I also explained about.

  One kind of effect pattern said here may be a first effect pattern.

  In addition, “the symbol display means (for example, the second special view display device 214) capable of displaying at least the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second success or failure determination after performing the symbol variation display, and the symbol display means At least a controllable symbol display control unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the symbol display control unit suspends the operation of the symbol display unit when the suspension condition is established. The effect display means is an image display means, and the image display means performs the first effect in a predetermined display area (for example, a popular drawing effect area 283). At least displayable, and the image display means can display at least one hold icon (for example, the first special view 1 hold icon 2811) for one hold. The image display means can display at least the hold icon in the hold display area (for example, the special view 1 hold display area 281), and the pre-reading advance notice effect is a display of the hold icon. It is an effect (for example, an example shown in FIG. 225) in which the mode is changed to display the hold icon, and the first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from among a plurality of effect patterns. There is one kind of effect pattern among the plurality of effect patterns, the effect image (for example, the effect image in which the character of the lord is piece-signing) passes the predetermined display area and the hold display area A performance capable of encroaching in and making part or all of the reserved icon displayed in the reserved display area difficult to view by part or all of the effect image Pattern (e.g., FIG. 225 (pattern of electrically movable open notification effect shown in d)) is, the amusement machine, characterized in that. I also explained about.

  One kind of effect pattern said here may be a second effect pattern or may be the first effect pattern.

  Furthermore, although the present invention is limited to the hold icon here, the pre-read advance notice effect may be an effect that does not use the hold icon, and in this case, the image display means may perform the second display in the second predetermined display area. The preview advance notice effect may be displayed at least.

  In addition, after displaying another start area different from the start area (for example, the first special view start port 230) and the symbol change display, at least the stop design corresponding to the result of the second pass / fail determination is displayed A possible symbol display means, one of the symbol display means being a first symbol display means (for example, the first special view display device 212) and one of the symbol display means The second symbol display means (for example, the second special view display device 214) and the first symbol display means can be controlled at least as the two symbol display means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) And the separate start area does not change the ease of entry of the game ball, and the symbol display control means is capable of at least controlling the second symbol display means. The above symbol display The control means can at least execute control of the first hold (for example, hold of the special view 1) for holding the operation of the first symbol display means when the first hold condition is established. And the symbol display control means controls a second hold (for example, hold of the special figure 2) to hold the operation of the second symbol display means when the second hold condition is satisfied. And the requirement for establishing the first holding condition is a requirement including at least that the gaming ball has entered the separate starting area, and the condition for establishing the second holding condition is: It is a requirement including at least that the ball has entered the start area, and the symbol display control means controls the operation of the first symbol display means to start when the first reserve digestion condition is satisfied. At least viable and before The symbol display control means is at least capable of executing control to start the operation of the second symbol display means when the second reserve digestion condition is established, and The establishment requirement is a requirement at least including that the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended, and the establishment requirement of the first reserve digestion condition is that the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended. The requirement for at least including the fact that the first reserve digest condition is established is a requirement at least including that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, and the effect display means is The image display means is an image display means, and the image display means is configured to display one first hold icon (for example, special figure 1 hold icon 2811) for a first hold icon in a first hold display area (for example, Fig. 1 Hold The image display means is configured to display at least one second holding icon (e.g., special view 2 holding icon 2821) for one second holding. The image display means is capable of displaying at least in the reserved display area (for example, the special view 2 reserved display area 282), and the image display unit The predetermined display area is an area positioned between the first hold display area and the second hold display area, and the first effect is a plurality of types. The effect pattern is one type of effect pattern selected from among the effect patterns, and one type of effect pattern among the plurality of effect patterns is an effect image (for example, the character of the lord is a piece size Effect image) is inserted into the hold display area of at least one of the first hold display area and the second hold display area, beyond the predetermined display area. It is an effect pattern (for example, a pattern of the electric Chu open notification effect shown in FIG. 225 (D)) which makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the display area, and the pre-read notice effect is the first hold It is an effect (for example, an example shown in FIG. 225) in which the display mode of the icon is changed to display the first reserved icon (the example shown in FIG. 225), and the prefetch notice effect changes the display mode of the second reserved icon It is an effect that displays a second hold icon, and any one of the first hold icon and the second hold icon is difficult to view by the effect image (e.g. , The pattern of electrically movable open notification effect shown in FIG. 225 (d)), the amusement machine, characterized in that. I also explained about.

  A game stand said here is a game stand of a so-called special figure 2 priority change machine.

  Moreover, one kind of effect pattern said here may be a second effect pattern or may be the first effect pattern.

  Further, the predetermined display area referred to here may be an area sandwiched between the first hold display area and the second hold display area, or both hold displays when viewed from the predetermined display area. The regions may be regions provided at mutually offset positions. Further, the first hold display area and the second hold display area may be provided at an interval, and the predetermined display area may be provided at the interval.

  In addition, “the effect display means can display at least a third effect, and the third effect is different from the first effect or the advance notice effect (for example, for the variation) The third effect is an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a portion of the first effect during a part or all of the period during which the first effect is being executed. A game console characterized by (for example, FIG. 220 (i) or FIG. 221 (i)). I also explained about.

  The third effect referred to here may be an effect (for example, a big hit advance effect) relating to the result of the second success or failure judgment, or an effect representing game information (for example, the number of time reductions, the number of consecutive units, etc.) It may be.

  Furthermore, in the above description, “the start region (for example, electric power) that can be changed at least between the easy-to-enter state (for example, the open state) and the difficult-to-enter state (for example, the closed state); Execute at least a first success / failure determination unit (for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of at least executing a determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a common drawing) and a second success / failure determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a special drawing) If the second success or failure judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success or failure judgment indicate the success or failure of the big hit, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least transition to the control state, and effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the effect movable body 2) capable of at least effecting 4), and the starting area is at least in the entry easy state from the entry difficult state when the result of the first yes / no determination is a specific yes / no determination result. The effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) of the effect means can be changed at least, and the effect movable means (for example, the effect means among the effect means). The effect movable body 224) is capable of at least performing a rendering operation, the effect display means is capable of displaying at least a first effect, and the first effect is the first success or failure judgment The effect moving means includes at least an effect display related to the result of the second effect (for example, a general drawing effect), and the effect movable means performs an operation of the second effect regarding the result of the second And (A)), and the effect display means is a related effect display related to the effect operation of the second effect in the effect movable means (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 228 (A)). Image display), and at least one of the rendering operation of the second rendering and the related rendering display is a part or all of the period during the execution of the first rendering. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect (for example, FIG. 228 (a) and (a)), and a game console characterized by the above-mentioned. It explained about.

  That is, at least one of the effect operation of the second effect by the effect movable device and the related effect display by the effect display device, the effect device is part or all of the first effect being executed. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect in a period.

  The related effect display may be an effect image display.

  "The effect means starts the first effect by the effect display means first, and during the execution of the first effect, the effect operation of the second effect by the effect movable means and the action of the second effect" It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect by at least one of the related effect display by the effect display means, and the effect means first performs the second effect. Starting, during execution of the second effect, the first effect by the effect display means is not performed (for example, FIG. 228 (A) and (I)), Stand. I also explained about.

  That is, the first effect is started first, and during the execution of the first effect, at least one of the effect operation of the second effect and the related effect display is of the first effect. It is possible to make at least a part difficult to see,

  The second effect is started first, and the first effect is not performed during the execution of the second effect.

  In addition, “the symbol display means (for example, the second special view display device 214) capable of displaying at least the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second success or failure determination after performing the symbol variation display, and the symbol display means At least a controllable symbol display control unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the symbol display control unit suspends the operation of the symbol display unit when the suspension condition is established. It is possible to at least execute control of (for example, the suspension of the special figure 2), the effect display means is an image display means, and the image display means is one suspension icon (for one of the suspension) For example, at least the special figure 2 reserve icon 2821) can be displayed, and the image display means is a reserve display area for the reserve icon (for example, special figure 2 reserve display area 282) , And at least one of the rendering operation of the second rendering and the related rendering display can make at least a part of the hold display area also difficult to view ( For example, FIG. 228 (a) and (a)), and a game console characterized by the above. I also explained about.

  “If the result of the second success or failure judgment is a specific second success or failure judgment result, control state transition means capable of at least transition from the non-big hit control state to the big hit control state (for example, The big hit control state of the main control unit 300 is such that the pay area can be at least changed from the entry difficult state to the easy entry state, and the first effect is the big hit control It is an effect that the non-big hit control state is easier to be executed than the state (for example, step S603 shown in FIG. 218). I also explained about.

  In addition, “the first success / failure determination means is more likely to derive the specific success / failure determination result in the power support state than in the non-power support state, and the first effect is more than the power support state. The game console is characterized in that the non-power-supporting state is more likely to be executed (for example, step S601 shown in FIG. 218). I also explained about.

  That is, the power support state may be a state in which gaming balls easily enter the start area, and the non-power support state may be a state in which gaming balls are less likely to enter the start area.

  Furthermore, in the above description, “the start region (for example, electric power) that can be changed at least between the easy-to-enter state (for example, the open state) and the difficult-to-enter state (for example, the closed state); Execute at least a first success / failure determination unit (for example, CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of at least executing a determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a common drawing) and a second success / failure determination (for example, a success / failure determination for a special drawing) If the second success or failure judgment means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success or failure judgment indicate the success or failure of the big hit, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit After performing the symbol variation display with the game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least transition to the control state, at least the stop symbols corresponding to the second judgment result A game console comprising possible symbol display means (for example, the second special view display device 214) and effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least effect display The region is capable of at least performing a specific operation when the result of the first success or failure judgment is a specific success / failure determination result, and the specific operation is the entry from the entry difficult state. An operation including an operation of changing the state to an easy state (for example, an opening and closing operation of a pair of blade members, more specifically, an electric chow short opening operation and a electric tuw long opening operation), the effect display means A first effect can be displayed at least, and the first effect includes at least an effect to be performed while the start area performs the specific operation (for example, (see FIG. 217 (b) And the effect display means can display at least a second effect, and the second effect is an effect display performed during execution of the symbol variation display (For example, the display of at least the characters C1 to C3), and the second effect is at least a portion of the first effect during a part or all of the first effect execution. It is an effect that can be made difficult to visually recognize (for example, FIG. 221 (e), etc.), It explained about.

  Here, the specific operation may be an operation in which the entry difficult state and the entry easy state are alternately repeated one or more times. Therefore, the second effect may be an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect when the start area is in the easy entry state, or the start area It may be an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect before changing the state from the entry difficult state to the entry easy state, or the start area is the entry easy state It may be an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect after changing the state to the entry difficult state.

  In addition, after performing the first symbol variation display (for example, the common figure variation display), the first symbol display means (for example, the common figure) capable of at least displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first success or failure determination. A display device 210), and the effect display means is, as a first effect, effects (for example, shown in (a) to (f) of FIG. 217 (b)) performed during the first symbol variation display The effect display means is capable of displaying at least the effect during the change, and the effect display means is an effect (for example, confirmed) which is executed during the display of the stop symbol by the first symbol display means as the first effect. The effect display means can at least display an effect (for example, an effect during operation) to be performed while the start area performs the specific operation as the first effect. Even if possible There.

  That is, the first effect may be an effect including at least one of the effect during variation, the effect during determination, and the effect during operation.

  In addition, “the first symbol display means (for example, the first symbol display means as another symbol start means other than the start region (for example, the first special view start port 230) and one of the symbol display means 1) a special symbol display device 212), a second symbol display device (for example, a second special image display device 214) as the symbol display device of one of the symbol display devices, and the first symbol display device At least the controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), the separate start area does not change the accessibility of the game ball, and the symbol display control means The second symbol display means is also at least controllable, and the symbol display control means suspends the operation of the first symbol display means when the first hold condition is established. At least one hold control The symbol display control means can execute at least the second hold control for holding the operation of the second symbol display means when the second hold condition is satisfied. The establishment requirement of the first holding condition is a requirement including at least that the gaming ball has entered the separate starting area, and the establishment requirement of the second holding condition is that the gaming ball is the starting area The second effect is an effect to be performed while the second symbol display means is performing the symbol variation display (for example, a big hit announcement effect for the variation) A game stand characterized by being. I also explained about.

  The second effect referred to herein may be an effect of variation display of a decorative symbol, which is performed while the second symbol display means is performing the symbol variation display.

  In addition, "the first symbol display means can display at least the first stop symbol (for example, special figure F) corresponding to the result of the big hit success / failure determination after symbol variation display is performed. The second symbol display means can display at least a second stop symbol (e.g., special image A) corresponding to the result of the big hit acceptance determination after the symbol variation display is performed, When the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol than when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol, it is advantageous for the player as the big hit control state. A game console characterized by having a configuration (for example, FIG. 219 (d)) in which a big hit control state is easily initiated. I also explained about.

  Here, the game control means, when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol, the control state, from the non-big hit control state to the first big hit control state (for example, 2R big hit game State), and when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol, the game control means controls the state from the non-big hit control state to the second big hit. The control state (for example, 15R special jackpot game state) may be at least transitionable, and the second jackpot control state may be a control state more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot control state. .

  In addition, the second symbol display means displayed the second stop symbol than after the first symbol display means displayed the first stop symbol in the pay area (for example, the attacker). The later one may be more likely to perform a state change operation (for example, an opening and closing operation) that is advantageous to the player. For example, an operation having a large number of opening times or an operation having a long opening time may be easily performed.

  In addition, “the symbol display control means can at least execute control to start the operation of the first symbol display means when the first reserve digest condition is established, and the symbol display control is performed. The means is capable of at least executing control to start the operation of the second symbol display means when the second reserve digest condition is established, and the establishment requirement of the second reserve digest condition is The requirement that the operation of the second symbol display means is at least suspended, and the establishment requirement of the first reserve digestion condition is that the operation of the second symbol display means is not suspended. And the establishment requirement of the first reserve consumption condition is at least inclusion that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, and the effect display means is the second Judgment of The preview display effect (for example, the effect due to the change of the display mode of the hold icon) related to the result of at least can be displayed, and the effect display means is capable of at least executing continuous preview effect as the preview advance effect. The effect display means can continue at least the continuous advance notice effect during the interrupt symbol change display, and the interrupt symbol change display is performed while the second reserve digest condition is the continuous notification effect. It is a symbol variation display that is started during the continuous notice effect by having been established, and the prefetch notice effect (for example, the first special view 1 hold icon 2811 of the display mode of the advance notice) is under execution of the first effect. It is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a portion of the first effect (for example, the electric Chu open notification effect) in a part or all of the period FIG 225 (d ')), the amusement machine, characterized in that. I also explained about.

  A game stand said here is a game stand of a so-called special figure 2 priority change machine.

  Further, the effect display means can display at least the first effect during execution of the previewed advance effect.

  Subsequently, a pachinko machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment has much in common with the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, and is the same as the pachinko machine of the third embodiment unless otherwise specified. In the following description, components having the same names as the components described so far will be described with the same reference numerals as the symbols used so far.

  FIG. 229 (a) is a diagram showing a success / failure determination table of the special view 1 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 229 (b) is a diagram showing the success / failure determination table of the special view 2. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the fourth embodiment, the winning probability of the big hit is about 1/320 in the special figure low probability state and about 1/32 in the special figure high probability state, regardless of whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is selected. Compared to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is a pachinko machine of a spec that is easy to win a jackpot.

  Also in the fourth embodiment, the small hit is not in the special view 2 but in the special view 1 only.

  The special drawing determination table is the same as that of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 219 (d), and the table set selection table is the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIG. The timer number table is also the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIG.

  Therefore, also in the fourth embodiment, the special figure 2 is more likely to generate a jackpot which is more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

  Moreover, the success or failure judgment of the special view may be to derive "big hit", "small hit" or "loss", or to derive "big hit" or "loss". Alternatively, the success or failure determination of the special view may be derived to a special design symbol.

  The preview notice is also executed in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment. Pre-reading advance notice pre-reads start information before starting symbol change of special figure, judges result of yes / no of special drawing based on the start information in advance, notifies symbol change result based on the start information concerned Prior to the start, based on the determination result in advance, it is predicted that the success or failure judgment result based on the start information becomes a big hit, or the special view A or the special view B, and the judgment result based on the start information Even in the case of a loss of appearance or even a special image I or a special image J, a notice as if the result of the judgment based on the start information is a big hit or a special image A or a special image B Also includes.

  FIG. 230 (a) is a diagram showing a special figure 1 prior determination table used for predetermining the start information of the special figure 1 in advance, and FIG. 230 (b) is a special figure 2 It is a figure which shows the table for special figure 2 good or bad prior determination used when prefetching the prior | preceding information of and making prior determination.

The special drawing 1 pass / fail judgment table shown in FIG. 230 (a) is the same as the success / failure judgment table of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 229 (a), and the special drawing 2 pass / fail judgment shown in FIG. 230 (b) The table for use is the same as the table for acceptance determination of the special view 2 shown in FIG. 229 (b). Even if the prior determination is performed using the prior determination table shown in FIG. 230, in the special drawing related lottery process, the pass / fail determination is performed again using the acceptance determination table shown in FIG. 229.
Moreover, in prior determination, it is performed to the prior determination of a special figure.

  FIG. 230 (c) is a diagram showing a special-figure prior determination table.

  The special drawing prior determination table shown in FIG. 230 (c) is also the same as the special drawing determination table (see FIG. 219 (d)) used in the special drawing related lottery process, but in the special drawing related lottery process, , A special figure determination process using a special figure determination table is performed.

  In advance determination, the advance determination of the special view may not be performed, and the change time of the special view may be determined in advance, and the advance notice may be made based on the determination result of the change time. Alternatively, instead of specifically determining in advance the fluctuation time of the special map, it is possible to predetermine the tendency of the fluctuation time, the tendency of fluctuation time, and the group of fluctuation time, and perform previewing notice based on the result of the prior judgment. May be

  In addition, the sub control unit (400, 500) determines, for example, by performing random number lottery or the like whether or not to perform pre-reading advance notice or in what manner to perform pre-reading advance notice.

  Next, the determination of whether or not the drawing in the fourth embodiment is true will be described.

  FIG. 231 (a) is a diagram showing a common drawing yes / no determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. FIG.

Also in the common-committee propriety judgment processing in the present embodiment, the time-shortening flag is referred to, and the propriety judgment is performed based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state. The general drawing control state is a low probability state if the time reduction flag is off (in the non-power-supply state), and is a high probability state if the time reduction flag is on (in the power-supply state) . It is determined based on the common drawing win random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) of the start information extracted from the common drawing reserve storage unit of the RAM 308. The Atari probability of the general drawing in the fourth embodiment is about 10% in the non-electric support state (low probability state) and 100% in the electric support state (high probability state). In the power-on state, winning may be made only on the hit.
FIG. 231 (b) is a diagram showing a common drawing determination table.

  Also in the determination of the drawing, the time reduction flag is referred to, and the determination of the drawing is performed based on whether or not the current control state is the power support state. In the non-power-supply state, the common drawing determination is performed based on the common drawing determination random value (possible range is 0 to 99) of the start information extracted from the common drawing reservation storage unit of the RAM 308. In the fourth embodiment, in the case of the non-power-supply state, the probability diagram A is determined with a probability of 90%, and the probability diagram B is determined with a probability of 10%. In the common drawing determination table shown in FIG. 231 (b), the open mode of the electric chow corresponding to the common drawing determination result is shown. When the display of the drawing A is stopped on the drawing display device 210, the electric chow is opened for a maximum of 1.8 seconds (electric chow short is open). On the other hand, when the normal view B is stopped and displayed on the normal view display device 210, the electric chew is opened for a maximum of 6 seconds (the open the electric tube long). In addition, electric chew will be closed at that time, when there is a predetermined number of balls (here 10 balls) before the predetermined opening time passes.

  Also, in the fourth embodiment, if it is in the power support state, it is always determined to be the common figure B. Therefore, the lottery based on the common drawing determination random number value is not performed. Even when the drawing B is stopped and displayed on the drawing display device 210 in the power-on state, the electric chow is opened for 6 seconds at maximum (electric tu-long open). Here, when the normal view B is stopped and displayed on the normal view display device 210 in the non-electric support state, the electric Chu is opened up to the first time (for example, 4 seconds) and the general view is displayed in the electric support state. If the display 210 is stopped and displayed on the device 210, the electric chew may be opened up to a second time (for example, 6 seconds).

  Further, if the result of the determination of the success or failure of the common drawing is out, it becomes the common drawing C, and therefore the lottery based on the common drawing determination random value is not performed.

In the fourth embodiment, only in the power support state, the general-compliance judgment will be won substantially, but even in the non-power-supply state, it may be won substantially (or without fail). In this case, in the non-power-supporting state, when the normal drawing A is stopped and displayed on the common drawing display device 210, the electric charge is opened only for a maximum of 0.1 seconds.
FIG. 231 (c) is a diagram showing a common drawing timer table.

  As shown in the common drawing timer table of FIG. 231 (c), also in the fourth embodiment, regardless of the common drawing symbol, the symbol fluctuation time of the common drawing is uniformly 20 seconds in the non-electric support state (generally It is a figure timer 1), and it is uniformly 1 second (common figure timer 2) uniformly in the power support state. As described above, since the symbol variation time of the non-power support state is longer than that of the power support state in the non-power support state, it is possible to perform long effects during the symbol variation display of the non-power support state. There are times when you can.

  A plurality of types of symbol fluctuation time of a common drawing in the non-power-supply state may be prepared, and the symbol fluctuation time of the common drawing in the non-power-supply state may be determined by random number lottery from among them. In addition, a plurality of types (two or three or more types) of symbol variation time of a drawing can be prepared in the power support state, and a common drawing in the power support state is selected by random number lottery from among them. The symbol variation time of the figure may be determined. Alternatively, the symbol variation time may be prepared for each common drawing, and furthermore, the symbol variation time longer than the common drawing A may be selected more easily for the common drawing B. By doing this, it becomes easy to perform turning effects before stop-displaying the common drawing B. On the other hand, the symbol variation time shorter than the common figure A may be selected more easily for the common figure B. By doing this, it is possible to make the player more advantageous.

  Further, in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the predetermination of the common drawing is also executed based on the satisfaction of the start information acquisition condition of the common drawing. The establishment requirement of the start information acquisition condition of the common drawing referred to herein is a requirement established based on the game ball having passed the common drawing start opening 228. That is, in the state where the number of reservations of the common drawing is less than the predetermined upper limit number, it is a requirement that holds when the gaming ball passes through the common drawing starting port 228, and in the state where the number of reservations of the common drawing is the predetermined upper limit number, This is a requirement that does not hold even if the game ball passes through the common drawing start port 228. The prior determination of the common drawing is the same process as the prior determination of the special drawing.

  FIG. 232 (a) is a diagram showing a common drawing in-advance prior determination table used when prefetching the start information of the common drawing and making a priori determination.

The common drawing preliminary decision table shown in FIG. 232 (a) is the same as the common drawing propriety check table shown in FIG. 231 (a). Even if the prior determination is performed using the prior determination table shown in FIG. 232 (a), in the common drawing related lottery process, the yes / no determination using the common drawing suitability determination table shown in FIG. 231 (a) is performed again. It will be.
In addition, in the prior determination, the prior determination of the common drawing is performed.

  FIG. 232 (b) is a diagram showing a common drawing prior determination table.

  Although the common drawing prior determination table shown in FIG. 232 (b) is the same as the common drawing determination table shown in FIG. 231 (b), the common drawing determination lottery process uses the common drawing determination table again. The common map determination process is performed.

  Subsequently, a common drawing effect determination process executed by the first auxiliary control unit 400 in the fourth embodiment will be described using FIG. 233 (a).

  FIG. 233 (a) is a flow chart showing a flow of common drawing effect determination processing in the fourth embodiment.

  The general drawing effect determination process shown in FIG. 233 (a) is also started when the first sub control unit 400 receives a common drawing change start command from the main control unit 300. The common drawing fluctuation start command includes information indicating the current control state (whether or not it is the power support state), and the common drawing determination result.

  First, it is determined whether it is in the prohibited period of the regular drawing effect (step S611). The prohibited period referred to here is a period during power support. Note that this prohibited period may include at least one execution period of the specific effects described later. If the prohibition period (during power support) is in progress, this common drawing effect determination processing is ended, and the common drawing effect (first effect) is not performed. Since the game support state is a state in which the game ball is easy to win in the electric chow, there is a possibility that the expectation of the player does not improve so much even if the game drawing effect is performed. However, if during the power support, the regular drawing effect is not uniformly performed, but even during the power support, if the lottery with the predetermined probability is won, the common effect is executed. May be

  On the other hand, if it is not during the prohibition period (if it is not during the non-power support), it is determined whether the general drawing effect execution condition is satisfied (step S612). The establishment requirement of the common drawing effect execution condition is a requirement established by being elected to the common drawing B shown in FIG. 215 (c). It should be noted that when the common drawing B is stopped and displayed on the common drawing display device 210, power-on-long opening is executed, and this common drawing effect execution condition corresponds to a true common drawing effect execution condition. In addition, it is a requirement that holds true that the player is elected to the drawing A shown in FIG. 215 (c) and is elected to the effect executability lottery of the first probability (for example, 1/10). When the common drawing A is stopped and displayed on the common drawing display device 210, the electric chow short release is executed, and this common drawing effect execution condition corresponds to the execution condition of false common drawing effect for the electric tuy long open. However, it corresponds to the execution condition of true popular drawing effect for the electric Chu open. Furthermore, this is a requirement that holds true even when the player wins the drawing C shown in FIG. 215 (c) and wins the effect executability lottery of the second probability (for example, 1/100). The first probability may be a probability equal to or higher than the second probability or may be a probability higher than the second probability. When the common drawing C is stopped and displayed on the common drawing display device 210, the electric chow is not opened but remains closed, and the common drawing effect execution condition corresponds to a false common drawing effect execution condition. It should be noted that although here the common drawing effect execution condition is always satisfied if the common drawing B is won, even if it is satisfied that the third probability (for example, 1/2) of the effect execution availability lottery is won Good. The third probability may be a probability equal to or higher than the first probability, or may be a probability higher than the first probability. If the general drawing effect execution condition described above is not satisfied, this general drawing effect determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the general drawing effect execution condition is satisfied, it is determined whether the predetermined condition is satisfied (step S613). The establishment requirement of the predetermined condition said here is the requirement established by the specific effect being executed. As specific effects, effects during the big hit game, effects with high expectation of the big hit during the symbol change of the special figure (for example, super reach, advance notice effect), forced effects that occur every predetermined time, right-handed or button pressed And the like, and effects such as those prompting the button depression of each of the plurality of buttons. The above-mentioned forced rendering is a rendering performed by moving a decorative symbol to a corner if the symbol of the special drawing is changing, and a rendering performed during the demonstration rendering if it is under demonstration. In addition, the effect of prompting the user to press the button may be, for example, an effect of informing the timing of the button pressing for each button, an effect of informing the button pressing acceptance period, or the remainder of the button pressing acceptance It may be an effect of notifying a period. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first common drawing effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 (step S614), and the common drawing effect determination process ends, and the predetermined condition is satisfied. The second common drawing effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 (step S615), and the common drawing effect determination process ends. The general drawing effect command set in the RAM 408 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S319) shown in FIG. 190 (a), and the second sub control unit 500 transmits the general drawing instruction. Based on the rendering command, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled, and a common drawing effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The common drawing effect based on the first common drawing effect command is an effect performed over a relatively long time, and the common drawing effect based on the second common drawing effect command is performed over a relatively short time It is an effect. For example, the start time of the popular drawing effect based on the second common drawing effect command is later than the start time of the popular drawing effect based on the first common drawing effect command, and the effect time becomes short. That is, the presentation time becomes shorter in the case of starting the regular drawing effect during the specific effect execution than in the case of starting the regular drawing effect during the specific effect non-execution. By doing this, it is possible to make various effects and to enhance the interest of the game in some cases. In addition, when a specific effect (for example, a big hit advance notice) is being executed, the player can be made to draw the attention of the specific effect by shortening the effect time of the regular drawing effect, and the general drawing effect including the result display In some cases, it is easy for the player to recognize the stop display of the common pattern, and it may be possible to enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, 0 second is also included in the short presentation time said here, and in the case of 0 second, a common drawing production is not performed. In the case of 0 seconds, the second common drawing effect command may not be transmitted, or the second common drawing effect command may be a cancel command. Furthermore, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first drawing-up effect command is not set uniformly, but a lottery is performed in step S614, and the second drawing-up is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20). The figure rendering command may be set.

  As described above, also in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the spread map effect is more easily performed in the non-power support state than in the power support state. In the non-electric support state, since the gaming ball is difficult to win in the electric chew, there is a case where it can be expected to win the game balls in the electronic chew by executing the common drawing effect.

  FIG. 233 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the predetermined area advance presentation effect determination process in the fourth embodiment.

  The predetermined area referred to here is a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208, and corresponds to, for example, a special-characteristic hold display area. Also in this fourth embodiment, the special view reservation display area is provided in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is the same as the third embodiment described above. However, in the third embodiment, a generic drawing effect area provided with a special drawing 1 reserved display area and a special drawing 2 reserved display area, in which a popular drawing effect is performed is referred to as a predetermined area. In the embodiment, the special view 1 reserve display area or the special view 2 reserve display area is referred to as a predetermined area. The predetermined area in the fourth embodiment is not limited to the special view reserve display area, and may be an area including a close area or an adjacent area to the area where the common drawing effect is performed.

  The predetermined area advance notice effect determining process shown in FIG. 233 (b) is also started when the first sub control unit 400 receives the special view hold increase command from the main control unit 300. The notice effect referred to here corresponds to the jackpot notice effect of the special feature. The jackpot notice effect of the special view here is the advance notice notice effect based on the prior determination result described using FIG. 230. In addition, even if the first sub control unit 400 receives any of the commands described above, such as a special symbol variation start command, a regular drawing reserve increase command, a regular drawing variation start command, a big hit effect start command, etc. You may do so. In these cases, the notice effect is not limited to the advance notice effect, but may be the notice effect on the stop symbol of the symbol change, or may be the notice effect of giving notice of development to reach. It may be an advance notice effect or the like for giving a notice of shifting to a definite change state or a power support state after the end of the big hit.

  In step S621, it is determined whether or not a prohibited period is in progress. The prohibition period in step S621 is a period in which a regular drawing effect is being performed. If it is during a prohibition period (during a general drawing effect), the process proceeds to step S624.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the prohibition period, it is determined whether or not the condition for executing the advance notice effect is satisfied (step S 622). The establishment requirement of the advance notice execution condition is a requirement established by having won the notice execution possibility lottery. If this advance presentation effect execution condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S624.

  On the other hand, if the condition for executing the advance notice effect is satisfied, the predetermined area notice effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 (step S623), and the process proceeds to step S624. The predetermined area preview effect command set in the RAM 408 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S319) shown in FIG. 190 (a), and the second sub-control unit 500 transmits the predetermined area. Based on the area advance notice command, the decoration symbol display device 208 is controlled, and a notice effect is displayed on a predetermined area of the decoration symbol display device 208.

  In step S624, another preliminary announcement effect lottery process is executed, and the predetermined area preliminary announcement effect determination process ends. The other notice effects correspond to the notice effects (including the advance notice) performed outside the predetermined area.

  Next, a specific example of the effect in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, description will be made with reference to FIG. 234 and FIG.

  FIG. 234 is a time chart showing a flow of an example of the effect in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 235 is a view showing the appearance of the decorative symbol display device etc. for each essential point in the time chart shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol display device shown in (A) to (G) of FIG. 235 corresponds to the period of (A) to (G) shown in FIG. In the time chart shown in FIG. 234, time (t) passes from the left to the right of the figure.

  Under the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235, a common drawing display device 210, a first special view display device 212, and a second special view display device 214, all of which are driven and controlled by the main control unit 300, are shown. It is done. In the diagram used for the explanation in the fourth embodiment, the positions of the first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are opposite to those used in the explanation in the third embodiment, and the first special view The display device 212 is shown on the left side, and the second special view display device 214 is shown on the right side. Also, the common drawing display device 210 is shown on the far right. Furthermore, in the figure used for explanation in the 4th example, the reservation lamp which lights only the number of the number of reservations is shown on each display. That is, four first special view holding lamps 218 are shown on the leftmost first special view display 212, and a second special display 214 on the right (middle) thereof is shown. Four figure reserve lamps 220 are shown, and four regular figure reserve lamps 216 are shown on the rightmost common figure display device 210. The main control unit 300 also controls lighting of these holding lamps. In the fourth embodiment, the maximum number of pending in the common drawing is also four, the same as the maximum number of pending in the special figure 1 and the maximum number of pending in the special figure 2. In addition, even if it is a common drawing, even if it is a special drawing, the maximum number of holdings may not be aligned, or may not be provided. In the fourth embodiment, as in the case of the third embodiment, only the horizontally oriented segment at the center in the vertical direction is lit, and the black portion is illuminated, as in the case of the symbol used in the third embodiment. Indicates the location of the segment.

  On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 is driven and controlled by the sub control means (here, the second sub control unit 500). A special view 1 suspension display area 281 is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special view 2 suspension display area 282 is prepared on the right side thereof. Further, a common drawing effect area 283 corresponding to an example of the above-mentioned predetermined area is provided between the special view 1 reserve display area 281 and the special view 2 reserve display area 282. In each reserve display area, the older the reserve icon is displayed on the side of the common drawing effect area 283 (center side), this point is the same as the decorative symbol display device 208 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. Further, the default display mode of the special view 1 suspension icon is a black circle, and when performing pre-reading advance notice effect, the default display mode is changed to a predetermined display mode. Here, the previewing effect is performed by displaying the hold icon in the display mode of the aged character. In addition, a second predetermined display mode (for example, a character different from old people) may be prepared, and may be used according to the reliability of the advance notice. For example, the preview advance notice effect may be performed by displaying the hold icon in the predetermined display mode when the reliability for winning the big hit is low, and in the second predetermined display mode when the reliability is high.

  Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235, on the left side of the left symbol display area 208a, the number display of the number of holdings and the fourth symbol are displayed in one vertical column. That is, at the top, a numeric display 284 representing the number of reservations of the special view 1 is provided, and below that, the fourth symbol 285 of the special view 1 is displayed. Beneath that, a numeric display 286 representing the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is provided, and a fourth symbol 287 of the special figure 2 is displayed below it. Beneath that, there is provided a numerical display 288 representing the number of reserved general drawings, and below that is the fourth symbol 289 of the general drawings. The fourth symbol is used to display symbol variation, and symbol variation display of the special figure is performed in the first special view display device 212 at the left end shown in FIG. 235 (a), and the other display device 214, 210 is down. The fourth pattern 285 of the special figure 1 is lit in gray, and the other fourth pattern 287, 289 is unlit. In addition, when the display devices 212, 214 and 210 stop and display the big hit symbol and the hit symbol, each fourth symbol 285, 287. 289 lights up in a predetermined color, and during the big hit game and the electric chow opening and closing operation Also, it may keep on lighting in a predetermined color.

  The state shown in FIG. 235 and FIG. 234 (a) is the non-power-supply state, in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is three, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 and the general drawing is zero. Two reserve icons are displayed in the special figure 1 reserve display area 281 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 235 (A), and the first special figure 1 reserve icon 2811 representing the first reserve for the oldest winning combination. Is displayed in the display mode of the middle-aged character, and the preview advance notice effect is executed on the left side of the popular drawing effect area 283. In addition, a default image 283a is displayed in the regular drawing effect area 283. The default image 283a is an image displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 when the common drawing effect is not performed. Furthermore, as shown in (a) of FIG. 234, the electric chew is not in operation, and the electric chew (the pair of blade members 232) is in a closed state. As described above, in the first special view display device 212 shown in FIG. 235 (a), the symbol change display of the special view is performed, and this symbol change display continues beyond the timing of FIG. 235 (g). Do.

  Here, since the player is in the non-power-supporting state, the player has made a left hit, and eventually, three game balls B pass continuously through the popular drawing start port 228 provided in the left area, The number of pendings increases to three. As shown in (A) of FIG. 234, the common drawing display device 210 starts symbol variation display of the common drawing and common drawing effect is also started. The common drawing effect here is a common drawing effect (hereinafter referred to as a first common drawing effect) based on the first common drawing effect command set in step S614 of FIG. 233 (a). The symbol variation display of the common figure is performed for 20 seconds. In the common drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 235 (A), fluctuation display (high speed fluctuation) of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is started. The variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing here is performed for 20 seconds, with the variable display pattern shown in (a) of FIG. 217 (b) (repeating the common drawing decoration 1 → common drawing decoration 2 → common drawing decoration 3) . Further, the number display 288 of the number of reservations of the common drawing shown in FIG. 235 (a) is 3 and the fourth symbol 289 of the common drawing is also lit in gray.

  Eventually, as shown in (c) of FIG. 234, the common drawing display device 210 ends the symbol variation display of the common drawing, and the confirmation display is performed. That is, the common view display device 210 displays the stop symbol of the common view C (see FIG. 215 (c)) for 0.6 seconds. The term "symbol variation display period" sometimes refers to a period from the start of symbol variation display to the end of finalized display. In the common drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 235 (c), following the variation display of the decorative design of the common drawing, the common drawing decoration 3 which is the stop design aspect (see FIG. 215 (d)) of the common drawing decorative symbol is 0. It is displayed for 6 seconds. That is, the result display effect of the common drawing is performed. In addition, the first common drawing effect here refers to the common drawing determination result in step S 612 in FIG. 233, performs variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing, and then performs the result display effect of the common drawing, relative The effect is over a long first time (20.6 seconds). Further, the fourth symbol 289 of the common drawing shown in FIG. 235 (c) is turned off when the final display of the common drawing display device 210 is being displayed.

  When the finalized display on the common drawing display device 210 is completed, the common drawing display device 210 starts again the symbol variation display of the common drawing, as shown in (E) of FIG. 234. However, the common drawing effect is not executed here . That is, by the determination in step S612 shown in FIG. 233, it is determined that the general drawing effect execution condition is not satisfied, the common drawing effect is not executed, and the false common drawing effect is not performed. A default image 283a is displayed in the spread diagram effect area 283 shown in FIG. Further, the number display 288 of the number of reservations of the common drawing shown in FIG. 235 (D) is 2, and the fourth symbol 289 of the common drawing is also lit in gray.

  Eventually, as shown in (E) of FIG. 234, the common drawing display device 210 ends the symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing, and a final display of 0.6 seconds is performed. The default image 283a is still displayed in the spread diagram effect area 283 shown in FIG. That is, the result display effect of the common drawing is not performed. In addition, the 4th pattern 289 of the common drawing shown to FIG. 235 (o) is light-extinguishing.

  When the finalized display on the common drawing display device 210 ends, the common drawing display device 210 starts again the symbol variation display of the common drawing as shown in FIG. . The symbol variation display of the common drawing here is also performed for 20 seconds. In the common drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 235 (f), the fluctuation display (high speed fluctuation) of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is started. The popular drawing effect here is also the first popular drawing effect. Further, the number display 288 of the number of reservations of the common drawing shown in FIG. 235 (A) is 1, and the fourth symbol 289 of the common drawing is also lit in gray.

  When 20 seconds have passed since the start of the symbol variation display of the common drawing, as shown in (f) of FIG. 234, the common drawing display device 210 ends the symbol variation display of the common drawing, and the determination of 0.6 seconds is completed. Display is done. The stop symbol of the common drawing B (see FIG. 215 (c)) is displayed on the common drawing display device 210 shown in FIG. 235 (f), and the fluctuation display of the decorative drawing of the common drawing is shown in the common drawing effect area 283. Subsequently, the common drawing decoration 2 (see FIG. 215 (d)) corresponding to the common drawing B is displayed, and the result display effect of the common drawing is performed. In addition, as a popular drawing effect, a rendering image (here, the effect image 283b) is also displayed so as to surround the popular drawing effect area 283. The effect image 283b enters the special view 1 suspension display area 281, and a part of the first special view 1 suspension icon 2811 of the display mode of the pre-reading notice that is the display mode of the middle aged character is hidden by the effect image 283b. ing. As a result, the first special view 1 reservation icon 2811 is difficult to view. Note that the entire first special view 1 reservation icon 2811 may be hidden by the effect image 283 b.

  Subsequently, as shown in (G) of FIG. 234, the electric tuong open is performed, and the electric chew is open for 5 seconds. In the common drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 235 (g), following to the result display effect of the common drawing with the effect image 283b, the electric Chu open notification effect is executed. In the electric cho open notification effect here, a decorative symbol is displayed in which the character of the lord with the balloon “in electric chi open” is in a peace sign. The balloon "in the open state of electric chow" indicates that the player can enter the game ball into the electric chow, and can grasp the launch timing of the game ball. In addition, the hand of the character extends beyond the regular drawing effect area 283, enters the special view 1 reserve display area 281, and the first special view 1 reserve icon 2811 (here, the prefetch warning in the part where the piece sign is made. Hiding part of the display mode hold icon). As a result, the first special view 1 reservation icon 2811 is difficult to view. This electric Chu open notification effect can also be viewed as one of the result display effects of the common drawing. In addition, you may hide all the 1st special figure 1 reservation icons 2811 by electric Chu open notification production. In addition, a balloon "deep electric chiu" is extended beyond the regular drawing effect area 283, and the balloon is in the special figure 2 reserve display area 282.

  In this way, the first special view 1 suspension icon 2811 whose display mode has changed to the advance notice is dare to hide the effect image 283 b and the general drawing effect such as the electric thu open notification effect, thereby providing the player with the general drawing effect. There are cases where you can be interested in the trend of Further, the pre-reading notice is a notice of a future big hit, and it may be possible to give the player an expectation of opening the electric chow by making the current progressive type public presentation stand out.

  Here, the first common drawing effect refers to the common drawing determination result in step S612 in FIG. 233, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing is performed, and thereafter, the result display drawing of the common drawing with the effect image 283b It will be the effect over the relatively long second time (25.6 seconds) which will be performed until the electric Chu open notification effect.

  Subsequently, although not shown in FIG. 235, as shown in (d) of FIG. 234, when the power tuong open is finished, the power chew open notification effect is finished, and the symbol variation display of the common drawing is started However, the popular drawing effect is not executed.

  FIG. 236 is a time chart showing a flow following the example shown in FIG. 234, and FIG. 237 is a view showing the appearance of the decorative symbol display device etc. for each essential point in the time chart shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol display device or the like shown in (S) to (S) of FIG. 236 corresponds to the period of (S) to (S) shown in FIG. Also in the time chart shown in FIG. 236, time (t) passes from the left to the right of the figure.

  The symbol variation display of the special figure 1 being carried out in FIG. 235 is finished, and after the stop display of the lost symbol, the first special display mode of the pre-reading advance notice which is the display mode of the middle aged character shown in FIG. The suspension of the special view 1 represented by FIG. 1 suspension icon 2811 is digested, and the symbol variation display of the special view 1 is started. In accordance with the symbol variation display of the special drawing 1, the variation display of the decoration symbol of the special drawing 1 is also started in the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is developed into a super reach. The predetermined condition shown in FIG. 236 is the predetermined condition in step S613 in FIG. 233, and is in the process of satisfying the predetermined condition during production of a super reach with a high expectation of a big hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 237 (S), a state of being developed into super reach is shown. Super reach itself is a kind of big hit notice, the production of the super reach also corresponds to the big hit notice production. In the super reach effect here, the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 in the reach state moves to the left corner and is displayed small, and the maiden character C2 Will appear. In addition, when it develops into super reach, the hold icon disappears. Note that the display control of the hold icon is performed, and even in the case where the display icon can not be seen by the player, "disappear" or "extinguish" in this specification. This is also true for "hidden" and "hidden". However, the leftmost numerals 284, 286, 286 are not erased (visible). Moreover, each 4th pattern 285,287,289 is also displayed.

  Also in this case, since the player is in the non-power-supporting state, the player has made a left hit, and the three game balls B continuously pass through the common drawing start port 228 provided in the left area. As shown in (a), the common drawing display device 210 starts symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing, and the symbol fluctuation display of this common drawing is performed for 20 seconds. On the other hand, in the popular drawing effect, since the predetermined condition is established (during super reach), the effect based on the second common drawing effect command set in step S615 of FIG. Although the generic drawing effect is to be executed), at the start of the symbol variation display of the common drawing on the common drawing display device 210, the second common drawing effect is not yet started, and the common symbol shown in FIG. A default image 283 a is displayed in the diagram effect area 283. It should be noted that the general drawing effect area 283 may be erased with the background image which is one of the effects of super reach, and when the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the default image 283a is not displayed until the general drawing effect is started. It is also good.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 237 (sa), in the character C2 of the super reach, the foot portion hides a part of the common drawing effect area 283 in which the common drawing effect is not performed. As a result, the common drawing effect area 283 is difficult to view.

  When the end of the symbol variation display of the common drawing in the common drawing display device 210 approaches (here from 1 second ago) as shown in FIG. 236 (b), the second common drawing effect is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283. Is started. In the common drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 237 (b), the fluctuation display (high speed fluctuation) of the decoration symbol of the common drawing is started. The variable display of the decorative symbol here is also the variable display pattern shown in (a) of FIG. 217 (b) (repeating the common drawing decoration 1 → common drawing decoration 2 → common drawing decoration 3), but Because the time is short, the number of repetitions is reduced.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 237 (b), when the regular drawing effect is started in the regular drawing effect area 283, this time, the common drawing effect area 283 hides the foot portion of the character C2 of the super reach. . As a result, the character C2 is difficult to view. Note that the foot portion of the super reach character C2 may continue to hide a part of the common drawing effect area 283, and the common drawing effect area 283 may be the foot part of the super reach character C2. You may not hide it.

  Eventually, as shown in (s) of FIG. 236, the common drawing display device 210 ends the symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing, and a final display of 0.6 seconds is performed. In the common drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 237 (S), the common drawing decoration 2 is displayed for 0.6 seconds following the change display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing, and the result display effect of the common drawing is performed. . Further, as a popular drawing effect, here too, a rendering image (here, an effect image 283b) is also displayed so as to surround the common drawing effect area 283. The super reach character C2 is hidden by the effect image 283b up to the part of the band. As a result, the super reach character C2 is more difficult to view. Note that all of the super reach character C2 may be hidden by the effect image 283b.

  In addition, the fluctuation display time (period length of (shi) of FIG. 236) of the decorative symbol of the common drawing in the second common drawing effect is the fixed display time (result display effect time of the common drawing: period of (s) of FIG. 236) It may be the same as long), may be shorter or longer than the definite display time.

  Subsequently, as shown in (d) of FIG. 236, the electric tuong release is performed, and the electric chew is opened for 5 seconds. In the popular drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 237 (d), following to the result display effect of the common drawing with the effect image 283b, the same effect as the electric Chu open notification effect shown in FIG. 235 is executed. In the character C2 of the super reach, the right torso portion is concealed by the balloon “in charge of electric chow open” in the electric chow open notification effect. As a result, the super reach character C2 is difficult to view. The electric Chu open notification effect here can also be viewed as one of the result display effects of the common drawing. In addition, you may hide all the characters C2 of a super reach by electric Chu open notification production.

  In addition, the second common drawing effect here refers to the common drawing determination result in step S 612 in FIG. 233, and displays a short variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing, and then displays the result of the common drawing with the effect image 283 b The effect is performed, and then the electric chow open notification effect is performed, which is an effect for a relatively short third time (for example, 6.6 seconds).

  Subsequently, although not shown in FIG. 237, as shown in FIG. 236 (Sor), when the electric power tuong open is completed, the electric electric cho open notification effect is also ended, and the symbol variation display of the common drawing is started However, the popular drawing effect is not executed.

  In addition, the start time of the second common drawing effect may be changed according to the start time of the symbol variation display of the special drawing, for example, a predetermined period including the start time of the second common drawing effect (for example, 5 seconds before and after) If there is a start of the symbol variation display of the special figure between), the start time of the second popular drawing effect may be controlled to coincide (simultaneously) with the start timing of the symbol variation display of the special figure , It may be controlled to delay from the start time of the symbol variation display of the special figure, or may be controlled to be advanced. Also, in the period of (d) of FIG. 236, an example in which the electric chew continues to open is shown, but in the period of (d) above, the opening and closing of the electric chew (pair of blade members 232a) is performed one or more times It may be performed, and at least a part of the effect display may be common or different between the opening and the opening and the closing and the closing. For example, it may be a peace sign during opening or opening, a goo's signature during closing or closing, or even if it is continued to be peace sign, it is a blue kimono during opening or opening. It may be a red kimono at the time of closing or during closing.

  FIG. 238 is a time chart showing a variation of the second popular effect, in which time (t) passes from the left to the right of the figure.

  In the variation shown in FIG. 238 (a), the second popular drawing effect is not performed during the change display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing (period of (h)), and the definite display is started (start of period of (t)) ) The second popular drawing effect is started, and even while the electric Chu Long is open (period of (T)), the electric Chu open notification effect (also the result of the common drawing is displayed as a part of the second popular drawing) Perform a kind of production). That is, the second common drawing effect in this modification is configured as only the result display effect of the common drawing, and the working time is a relatively short fourth time (here, 5.6 seconds). In addition, in the case of the common drawing being detached (general drawing C), only the result display effect of the common drawing in the definite display is shown, but since it takes a very short time of 0.6 seconds, the common drawing is broken (general drawing In the case of FIG. C), the second popular drawing effect may not be performed.

  In the second common drawing effect in the modification shown in FIG. 238 (b), the second during the final display (period of (n)) even during the variation display of the decorative symbol of the common drawing (period of (d)). When the public figure effect is not performed and the electric Chu-long opening is started (start of the period of (N)), the second normal figure effect is started. The effect time of the second popular drawing effect in this modification is a relatively short fifth time (here, 5 seconds). In the case where the common drawing is removed (general drawing C), the second common drawing effect is not executed.

  In step S615 in FIG. 233, any of the second common drawing effect of the third time, the second common drawing effect of the fourth time, and the second common drawing effect of the fifth time. It may be determined by lottery whether the second popular drawing effect of time is to be executed. Moreover, you may prepare the thing of presentation time other than said 3rd time-the said 5th time as a 2nd common drawing effect.

  Moreover, all of the said 3rd time-the said 5th time are shorter than the symbol fluctuation time (here 20 second) of the common figure in a non-power support state. By doing this, it is possible to make various effects and to enhance the interest of the game in some cases. In addition, while it is possible to make the attention of the player pay attention to other effects during the symbol fluctuation display which does not do the common drawing effect, by the fact that the common drawing effect including the result indication is done May be easier to recognize, and may enhance the interest of the game.

  FIG. 239 is a time chart showing an example in which the predetermined condition is changed from the satisfied condition to the unqualified condition, and time (t) elapses from the left to the right of the figure.

  In the example shown in FIG. 239 (a), even if the state (for example, super reach execution) is not satisfied (for example, the super reach end) from the state where the predetermined condition is satisfied, the symbol fluctuation display of the common figure starts It is an example which performs the second popular drawing effect decided at time. That is, the same second common drawing effect as the second common drawing effect shown in FIG. 236 is executed (period of (f) to (e)).

  The example shown in FIG. 239 (b) is an example in which the spread map effect is started from the time when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. In this example, the predetermined condition is satisfied at the start of the symbol variation display of the common drawing, so the second common drawing effect (the second common drawing effect shown in FIG. 236 to start the presentation from the beginning of the period of (v)) The same as in the However, the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol of the common figure, and the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common figure is started from the middle of the variable display of the decorative symbol of the common figure. Continue the variation display of the decoration pattern of the common figure in the period of (re), then perform the result display effect of the common figure with the effect image 283b (period of (b)), then the electric chow open notification effect Perform (period of (W)).

  In addition, you may add the variation display of the decoration figure of the common figure for the period of (ru), and the display control of the variation display of the decoration figure of the common figure starts from the beginning of the period of (ri), While the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display may not be displayed, and may be displayed when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

  FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example of a common view prefetch notice. This generic drawing pre-reading advance notice effect may be executed when there is a common drawing hit in the holding of the common drawing, or in the holding of the common drawing, a hit symbol of a specific symbol (for example, the common drawing B ) May be executed, or may be executed when there is a loss in holding the common drawing and a lottery with a predetermined probability is won (false common drawing advance notice effect). In addition, even if there is a hit in the holding of the common drawing, even if there is a hit symbol of the specific symbol in the holding of the common drawing, it may not be executed unless the lottery with the predetermined probability is won.

  In the common drawing pre-reading advance notice effect shown in FIG. 240, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a rendering image (here, the effect image 283b) is displayed so as to surround the common drawing effect area 283. The effect image 283b shown in FIG. 240 also enters the special view 1 suspension display area 281, and a part of the first special view 1 suspension icon 2811 is hidden by the effect image 283b. Further, a part of the decorative symbol of the special figure in the middle symbol display area 208b is also hidden by the effect image 283b.

  In this popular drawing pre-reading advance notice effect, when there is a plurality of pending general drawing reservations and when the last common drawing suspension is hit, a notice display is performed over the symbol variation display of a plurality of common drawings, and continuous It becomes a notice.

  In addition, you may start after receiving the common drawing reserve increase command (immediately after the common drawing reserve increase), but the above specific effect (for example, the big hit notice of the special figure or the super reach of the special figure) Etc.) may be started from the point when the specific effect is finished, or when the specific effect is started from the middle, the pre-production advance notice effect is hidden. May be

  FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example in which a big hit notice effect of a special view is performed in the regular drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 241 (a), the special figure 1, the special figure 2, and the common figure both stop symbol variation. In addition, a default image 283a is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 and the map is zero. The state shown in FIG. 241 is a non-power-supply state.

  In FIG. 241 (b), the first special view display device 212 starts the symbol variation display of the special view, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variation display of the special view decorative symbol. In addition, the common drawing display device 210 remains stopped. In this example, when the first common drawing effect is executed in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation display pattern shown in (E) of FIG. 217 (b) is a symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle.

  When the symbol variation display of the special drawing 1 is started, if the number of reservations of the drawing is 0, the jackpot announcement effect of the drawing may be started in the drawing drawing effect area 283. The big hit advance notice effect of the special figure in this popular figure effect area 283 is the case where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol fluctuation display, or the case where the big hit symbol is stopped and the lottery of the first predetermined probability is won, Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is executed when a lottery with a second predetermined probability is won (false big hit advance presentation effect). In addition, it may be performed as advance notice of special view. When the big hit notice production of the special drawing is started in the common drawing effect area 283, the high speed fluctuation is first started in the common drawing effect area 283, and the common drawing effect area 283 before reach development as shown in FIG. The decoration character pattern of "super heat" is displayed on stop. The decorative character pattern of "super heat" shown in FIG. 241 (c) is displayed beyond the regular drawing effect area 283, and overlaps with a part of the first special figure 1 reserved icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 reserved icon 2811 is difficult to see. It should be noted that the decorative character pattern of "super heat" may be displayed in the common drawing effect area 283. Further, in the case of a fake jackpot notice effect, the decorative character pattern of "sorry" may be stopped and displayed instead of the decorative character pattern of "super heat".

  Soon, as shown in FIG. 241 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing develops into reach effect. Even after development to reach production, the decorative character design of "super heat" is stopped and displayed in the popular drawing effect area 283, but after the development of reach production, the decorative character design of "super heat" should be erased The default image 283a may be displayed in the regular drawing effect area 283 as well.

  FIG. 242 is a diagram showing an example in which a development notice to a specific effect of a special drawing is performed in a regular drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The differences from the example shown in FIG. 241 will be mainly described, and items not particularly described are the same as the example shown in FIG.

  The specific effect referred to here is, for example, super reach effect in the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing. In addition, the advance notice presentation to the special effect of the special figure can also be viewed as the big hit advance notice of the special figure.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 242, as in the example shown in FIG. 241, when the number of reserved general drawings is 0 when the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started Then, high-speed fluctuation is started in the regular drawing effect area 283 (see FIG. 242 (b)).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 242 (c), after the normal reach occurs, the decorative character pattern of "super hot" is stopped and displayed in the regular drawing effect area 283 before the development of the super reach effect. The decorative character pattern of "super heat" shown in FIG. 242 (c) is also displayed beyond the regular drawing effect area 283, and overlaps with a part of the first special figure 1 reserved icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 reserved icon 2811 is difficult to see.

  Soon, as shown in FIG. 241 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing develops into super reach effect. After the super reach production development, the decorative character pattern of "super heat" disappears, and the default image 283a is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283. In addition, a part of the foot of the character C2 of the super reach is overlapped with a part of the common drawing effect area 283, and the common drawing effect area 283 is difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example in which a big hit notice effect of a special view is performed in the regular drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 241 (a), the special figure 1, the special figure 2, and the common figure both stop symbol variation. In addition, a default image 283a is displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 and the map is zero. The state shown in FIG. 241 is a non-power-supply state.

  In FIG. 241 (b), the first special view display device 212 starts the symbol variation display of the special view, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variation display of the special view decorative symbol. In addition, the common drawing display device 210 remains stopped. In this example, when the first common drawing effect is executed in the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fluctuation display pattern shown in (E) of FIG. 217 (b) is a symbol fluctuation display of the common drawing. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle.

  When the symbol variation display of the special drawing 1 is started, if the number of reservations of the drawing is 0, the jackpot announcement effect of the drawing may be started in the drawing drawing effect area 283. The big hit advance notice effect of the special figure in this popular figure effect area 283 is the case where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol fluctuation display, or the case where the big hit symbol is stopped and the lottery of the first predetermined probability is won, Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is executed when a lottery with a second predetermined probability is won (false big hit advance presentation effect). In addition, it may be performed as advance notice of special view. When the big hit notice production of the special drawing is started in the common drawing effect area 283, the high speed fluctuation is first started in the common drawing effect area 283, and the common drawing effect area 283 before reach development as shown in FIG. The decoration character pattern of "super heat" is displayed on stop. The decorative character pattern of "super heat" shown in FIG. 241 (c) is displayed beyond the regular drawing effect area 283, and overlaps with a part of the first special figure 1 reserved icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 reserved icon 2811 is difficult to see. It should be noted that the decorative character pattern of "super heat" may be displayed in the common drawing effect area 283. Further, in the case of a fake jackpot notice effect, the decorative character pattern of "sorry" may be stopped and displayed instead of the decorative character pattern of "super heat".

  Soon, as shown in FIG. 241 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of the special drawing develops into reach effect. Even after development to reach production, the decorative character design of "super heat" is stopped and displayed in the popular drawing effect area 283, but after the development of reach production, the decorative character design of "super heat" should be erased The default image 283a may be displayed in the regular drawing effect area 283 as well.

  FIG. 243 is a diagram showing an example in which the common drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a display area of the hold digest effect.

  In the popular drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 243 (a), the electric chew open notification effect is performed, and the electric tune long open is performed. As a result, there are 4 balls in the electric chew.

  In FIG. 243 (b), four special view 2 reserve icons 282-1 to 2824 are displayed in the special view 2 reserve display area 282. A part of each of the four special figure 2 suspension icons 2821 to 2824 is hidden by the electric chow open notification effect and is difficult to be recognized.

  In FIG. 243 (c), the symbol variation display of the special view 1 which has been performed up to this point is ended. In addition, the electric Chu Long opening is completed, the electric Chu is closed, and the popular drawing effect is ended. However, in the spread map effect area 283 shown in FIG. 243 (c), a character of the lord is displayed. The pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment is also a special figure 2 priority change machine, and in this example, when the special figure 2 is reserved, a character of the statue continues to be displayed in the spread map effect area 283. That is, in the regular drawing effect area 283, when the suspension of the special drawing 2 is completely absorbed, the character of the lord disappears, and the default image 283a shown in FIG. 242 (a) is displayed. If the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start port 228 before the suspension of the special figure 2 is lost, the character of the lord disappears in the common drawing effect area 283, and the common drawing effect is prioritized and executed. You may do so.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 243 (d), the second special view display device 214 starts the symbol variation display of the special view. The display manner of the character of the statue displayed in the common drawing effect area 283 may be changed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special view 2. For example, in the case of a display mode in which the default Tonosama character has a habit in both hands, but it is predicted that the big hit symbol will be stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display of digested suspension, the symbol variation display It changes to the display mode which raised the eyelids held in both hands with the start. In addition, you may change from the lord to another character. Further, the display in the common drawing effect area 283 may be changed each time the symbol variation display of the special view 2 is started.

  In addition, when one production hides the other production as described above, even if it is not particularly refused, the other production may hide the one production on the contrary. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 237 (D), the electric whistle open notification effect hides a part of the character C2 of the super reach, but conversely, the character C2 of the super reach is one of the electric whistle open notification effect It may be made to hide a part and to make it difficult to visually recognize the electric Chu open notification effect. Furthermore, when one effect hides the other effect, it may be concealed over the entire effect period of the other effect, or may be concealed only for a part of the entire effect period. In addition, when one effect hides a part of the other effect, even if not particularly refused, one effect may hide all of the other effect. In addition, the term “invisible” includes invisible.

  Furthermore, the other effects such as the common drawing effect described above and the jackpot effect may be effects by sound or effects by light, and are shown in FIGS. 228 (a) and (i). An effect by such an effect movable body may be used. In the case of sound effects, the sounds overlap, and one effect hides the other effect according to the volume and pitch, that is, the other effect becomes difficult to view.

  In the above description, “a start area (for example, electric power) which can at least change the state between the easy entry state (for example, the open state) and the entry difficult state (for example, the closed state) The symbol can be displayed at least the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the above-mentioned decision after performing the variation display of the symbol and the variation judgment of the symbol (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300). A game console comprising display means (for example, a common view display device 210) and effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least executing effects, wherein the starting area is the one for the judgment of acceptance or rejection. In the case where the result is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per common drawing), at least a specific operation (for example, an opening / closing operation) can be performed, and the specific operation is It is an operation including an operation of changing the state from the entry difficulty state to the entry easy state, the effect means is at least capable of executing a first effect (for example, a common drawing effect), and the first effect is And the start area includes at least an effect (for example, electric chow open notification effect) performed during execution of the specific operation, and the first effect is a first effect time (for example, a third effect time). It is an effect performed over a time (for example, 6.6 seconds), a fourth time (5.6 seconds), and a fifth time (for example, 5 seconds), and the first effect time is the effect of the symbol A game console characterized in that the time may be shorter than the variable display time (for example, 20 seconds). It explained about.

  Here, the first effect may be an effect by display, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by a movable object. Further, the effect means may be, for example, effect display means.

  Further, the specific operation may be an operation of alternately repeating the entry difficult state and the entry easy state one or more times. Therefore, the second effect may be an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect when the start area is in the easy entry state, or the start area It may be an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect before changing the state from the entry difficult state to the entry easy state, or the start area is the entry easy state It may be an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect after changing the state to the entry difficult state.

  In addition, “the acceptance determination means is more likely to derive the specific determination result in the power support state than in the non-power support state, and the first effect is the non-power support state in the non-power support state. A game stand characterized in that the power support state is more likely to be executed (step S611 shown in FIG. 233). I also explained about.

  In addition, “the symbol display means often performs the variable display of the symbol for a long time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (FIG. 231 (c)), Characterized by the game stand. I also explained about.

  In addition, “the first effect is an enterable notification effect (for example, a diagram showing that the game ball can enter the start area when the result of the success or failure judgment is a specific success or failure judgment result) A game console characterized by at least including a balloon "in the open state of electric chow" shown in 235 (g) and the like. I also explained about.

  In addition, the second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least executing the second success / failure determination (for example, the success / failure determination of the special drawing) and the result of the second success / failure determination A game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting the control state from the non-big hit control state to the big hit control state when the result of the judgment is It is possible to execute at least a second effect (for example, a big hit advance effect (including a advance notice) of the special view) relating to the result of the second success / failure determination, and the second effect is the first effect It is an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a portion of the first effect during a part or all of the running period. I also explained about.

  Furthermore, in the above description, “a start area (for example, electric power) which can at least change the state between the easy entry state (for example, the open state) and the entry difficult state (for example, the closed state) After performing the variation display of the symbol and the variation judgment of the symbol (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), it is possible to at least display the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the determination. A game console provided with various symbol display means (e.g., common-mode display device 210) and effect means (e.g., decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least performing effects, wherein the starting area is the above-mentioned pass / fail A specific operation (for example, an opening / closing operation) can be performed at least when the result of the determination is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per common drawing), and the specific operation An operation including a state change from the entry difficult state to the entry easy state, wherein the effect means is at least capable of executing a first effect (for example, a common figure effect); The effect is an effect including at least one of an effect during fluctuation, an effect during decision, and an operation during operation, and the effect during fluctuation is an effect performed during the symbol fluctuation display (for example, as shown in FIG. 234). The effect in the period of (f) shown) is the effect during the determination that is performed during the display of the stop symbol by the symbol display means (for example, the effect in the period of (f) shown in FIG. 234) The in-operation effect is an effect (for example, an effect in a period of (G) shown in FIG. 234) in which the start area performs the specific operation (for example, the effect means includes the first effect. Different from the production At least a second effect (for example, a big hit notice effect (including advance notice) of a special drawing) can be performed, and the effect means at least performs the first effect during the second effect execution. It is possible to start (for example, FIG. 237 (C) to (C)), and the effect means can at least start the first effect even during the second effect non-execution. (For example, FIG. 235 (I) to (U)), rather than the effect time of the first effect started during the second effect non-execution (for example, first time (20.6 seconds)) A game stand characterized in that the presentation time (third time (for example, 6.6 seconds) of the first presentation) started during the second presentation is likely to be shorter. It explained about.

  Here, the first effect and the second effect may be effects by display, effects by sound, effects by light, effects by movable objects, etc. It may be Further, the effect means may be, for example, effect display means.

  The second effect may be an effect that is started every predetermined time, or an effect that is started during the large enough game state. In addition, it may be an effect that urges the player's operation such as a right-handed hit or a button pressed. Furthermore, it may be an effect that urges button pressing of each of the plurality of buttons. For example, it may be an effect of notifying the button pressing timing for each button, an effect of notifying the button pressing acceptance period, or an effect of alerting the button remaining acceptance period. Good.

  In addition, the second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least executing the second success / failure determination (for example, the success / failure determination of the special drawing) and the result of the second success / failure determination Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least transitioning the control state from the non-big hit control state to the big hit control state when it is the success or failure judgment result of Is an effect (for example, a super reach effect shown in FIG. 237) including at least an effect related to the result of the second success / failure determination. In addition, “If the result of the second success or failure judgment is a big hit success or failure judgment result, the second effect indicates that the result of the second success or failure judgment is a large hit success or failure judgment It is an effect including an effect (for example, super reach effect shown in FIG. 237) to be foretelled, and the second effect is the case where the result of the second success or failure judgment is not the result of the big hit judgment. It is an effect including an effect (a so-called false big hit advance effect) for giving a notice as if the result of the second success or failure judgment is the result of a big hit. I also explained about.

  In addition, “the first symbol display means (for example, the first symbol display means as another symbol start means other than the start region (for example, the first special view start port 230) and one of the symbol display means 1) a special symbol display device 212), a second symbol display device (for example, a second special image display device 214) as the symbol display device of one of the symbol display devices, and the first symbol display device At least the controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), the separate start area does not change the accessibility of the game ball, and the symbol display control means The second symbol display means is also at least controllable, and the symbol display control means suspends the operation of the first symbol display means when the first hold condition is established. At least one hold control The symbol display control means can execute at least the second hold control for holding the operation of the second symbol display means when the second hold condition is satisfied. The establishment requirement of the first holding condition is a requirement including at least that the gaming ball has entered the separate starting area, and the establishment requirement of the second holding condition is that the gaming ball is the starting area The second effect is an effect to be performed while the second symbol display means is performing the symbol variation display (for example, a big hit announcement effect for the variation) A game stand characterized by being. I also explained about.

  The second effect referred to herein may be an effect (for example, super reach effect) of the variable display of the decorative symbol, which is performed while the second symbol display means is executing the symbol change display.

  In addition, "the first symbol display means can display at least the first stop symbol (for example, special figure F) corresponding to the result of the big hit success / failure determination after symbol variation display is performed. The second symbol display means can display at least a second stop symbol (e.g., special image A) corresponding to the result of the big hit acceptance determination after the symbol variation display is performed, When the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol than when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol, it is advantageous for the player as the big hit control state. A game console characterized by having a configuration (for example, FIG. 219 (d)) in which a big hit control state is easily initiated. I also explained about.

  Here, the game control means, when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol, the control state, from the non-big hit control state to the first big hit control state (for example, 2R big hit game State), and when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol, the game control means controls the state from the non-big hit control state to the second big hit. The control state (for example, 15R special jackpot game state) may be at least transitionable, and the second jackpot control state may be a control state more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot control state. .

  In addition, the second symbol display means displayed the second stop symbol than after the first symbol display means displayed the first stop symbol in the pay area (for example, the attacker). The later one may be more likely to perform a state change operation (for example, an opening and closing operation) that is advantageous to the player. For example, an operation having a large number of opening times or an operation having a long opening time may be easily performed.

  In addition, “the symbol display control means can at least execute control to start the operation of the first symbol display means when the first reserve digest condition is established, and the symbol display control is performed. The means is capable of at least executing control to start the operation of the second symbol display means when the second reserve digest condition is established, and the establishment requirement of the second reserve digest condition is The requirement that the operation of the second symbol display means is at least suspended, and the establishment requirement of the first reserve digestion condition is that the operation of the second symbol display means is not suspended. And the establishment requirement of the first reserve consumption condition is at least inclusion that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, and the effect display means is the second Judgment of The preview display effect (for example, the effect due to the change of the display mode of the hold icon) related to the result of at least can be displayed, and the effect display means is capable of at least executing continuous preview effect as the preview advance effect. The effect display means can continue at least the continuous advance notice effect during the interrupt symbol change display, and the interrupt symbol change display is performed while the second reserve digest condition is the continuous notification effect. It is a symbol variation display that is started during the continuous notice effect by having been established, and the prefetch notice effect (for example, the first special view 1 hold icon 2811 of the display mode of the advance notice) is under execution of the first effect. It is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a portion of the first effect (for example, the electric Chu open notification effect) in a part or all of the period FIG 225 (d ')), the amusement machine, characterized in that. I also explained about.

  A game stand said here is a game stand of a so-called special figure 2 priority change machine. Further, the effect display means can display at least the first effect during execution of the previewed advance effect.

  In addition, “the second effect is an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during a part or all of the first effect being executed. Characterized by the game stand. I also explained about.

The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine. FIG. 244 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. In the enclosed type pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 244, a predetermined number of gaming media (for example, gaming balls) are circulated inside the gaming machine. That is, the game medium ejected from the launching means 901 to the playing area 902 is ejected from the playing area 902 and can be supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize ball, lent ball, total number of balls held, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game console. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 are not provided.
Seventh Embodiment

Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail. Incidentally, the symbols shown in FIG. 245 to FIG. 281 are basically used only for the description of the seventh embodiment, and the description of the present embodiment is made even when the overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings. In this case, the codes shown in FIG. 245 to FIG. 281 have priority. On the other hand, in the following description, the same reference numerals as those in the first to sixth embodiments are used for the reference numerals not shown in FIGS. 245 to 281. In addition, when there is a drawing showing the same timing in a plurality of drawings, the overlapping description may be omitted.
<Type of symbol>

  First, with reference to FIG. 245, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment stop displaying. The types of figures and figures will be described.

  The figure (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the figure (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention.

  Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol change stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In the same figure (a), five types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure E” are shown as stop symbol modes in special figure 1 in the symbol variation stop display, and white outlines in the figure are shown. The part of indicates the location of the segment to be extinguished, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be illuminated. In addition, in the figure (b), four types of special figures from "special figure a" to "special figure d" are shown as stop symbol modes in special figure 2 symbol variation stop display, and white in the figure The unmarked portion indicates the location of the extinguished segment, and the black portion indicates the location of the lit segment.

  As shown to the same figure (a), "special figure A" is 15 round (15R) special big hit symbols, and "special figure B" is 15R big hit symbols. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game and after the end of the 15R big hit game, it shifts to the time saving state. The state transitioning to the short time state is referred to as a map-high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the time-short state is referred to as a map-low probability state. "Special figure A" which is 15R special big hit design is special figure high probability spread figure high probability state, "special figure B" which is 15R big hit design is special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. The “special figure A” and the “special figure B” are symbols that make the amount of profit given to the player relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R big hit design called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. "Special figure D" is a small hit symbol, and if the gaming state before winning the small hit is the special figure high probability figure high definite state, (after winning the small hit) special figure high probability figure high If the game state before winning the small hit is the state of special view low probability drawing high certainty, it is the special drawing low certainty high certain state (after the small hit winning). In addition, “special figure E” is a symbol of out-of-shape, and is a symbol that the amount of profit given to the player becomes a relatively small amount of profit.

  As shown in the same figure (b), “Special figure a” is a special character with 16R special jackpot, and “special figure b” is a special character with 8R special jackpot, both of which are special figure high probability spread figure high probability states. In addition, “special figure c” is an 8R big hit design, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state. In addition, “special figure d” is an out-of-order symbol, and is a symbol that the amount of profit given to the player becomes a relatively small amount of profit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "special image A" is also prepared as the 15R special big hit symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R big hit symbol.

  FIG. 245 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won in the first special view start opening 230 or the second special view start opening 232, that is, the first start opening sensor has detected that the ball has entered the first special view start opening 230, or The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the second special drawing start aperture 232. Displayed in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each symbol display area of the area 208c. Change the "display of variation of decoration pattern".

  For example, in the case of notifying the special character A of 15R special big hit, the special character B of 15 R big hit, the special character b of 8R special big hit, or the special character c of 8R big hit, the symbol display area Stop the pattern combination (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2") corresponding to 15R big hit or 8R big hit on 208a to 208c. indicate. When notifying 15R special big hit of "Special figure A" or 16R special big hit of "Special figure a", the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3") where the same odd decoration pattern is lined up is arranged And "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" etc.). Moreover, when notifying a small hit of "special figure D" or a sudden definite change of "special figure C", a symbol combination other than the symbol combination other than the above in symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration" Stop display of 2-decoration 3 "or" decoration 1-decoration 3-decoration 5 "or the like. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the release of the "special figure E" and the "special figure d", the symbol display areas 208a to 208c stop display symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG.

FIG. 245 (d) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a disjointed pattern. Based on the fact that the gate sensor described above detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment repeatedly. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in this figure (d), the white part in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.
<Another Example of Display Regarding Operation of Operation Means by Display Means>

Next, another example will be described in which the display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) performs a display regarding the operation of the operation means in response to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136). In the following description, as another example, another example of the operation means image display for performing the display regarding the operation of the operation means by the same processing as the operation means image display processing described in the fourth embodiment will be described.
<Example 20 of image display of operation means>

  246. FIG. 246 shows image display of operation means of Example 20 in chronological order. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208f are displayed, for example, at the upper right end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is provided. This special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e displays the success or failure result of the special figure 1 variation game, and during the special figure 1 variation game (during the special figure 1 variation), it is round shaped as the fourth figure 217 of the special figure 1 Blink the figure of. The special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208f is an area for displaying the success or failure result of the special figure 2 change game, and during the special figure 2 change game (during the change of the special figure 2) as the fourth figure 218 of the special figure 2 Blinking the triangle shape. In the seventh embodiment, the case of performing the special figure 1 fluctuation game will be described as an example of the fluctuation game, but the special figure 2 fluctuation game can be implemented similarly.

  A hold display area 700 is provided, for example, below the left end in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the right end of the hold display area 700 is secured as a variation icon display area 702. Here, pending icons PI1 and PI2 are displayed, which indicate that there are two pending special views. In the following description, although the case where one hold display area 700 is provided is shown as an example, the special view 1 hold display area 281 and the special view 2 hold display area 282 may be separately provided as shown in FIG. 220. Good.

  At the timing shown in (b) of the figure, the reserve of Special Figure 1 is digested, the reserve of Special Figure 1 fluctuation game decreases from 2 to 1, and the symbol variation display is started in the first Special Figure display device 212 In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of Special Figure 1 is started. In the variation icon display area 702, the digested hold is displayed as a variation icon CI, and in the hold display area 700, a hold icon PI1 indicating that there is one hold of the special view 1 is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, after the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212 (or the second special view display device 214) is started, the flashing display of the fourth symbol 217 and the decrease of the retention icons PI1 and PI2 The animation and the variation display of the decoration pattern are started in the order. In addition, the order of the start timing of the blinking display of the fourth symbol, the decrease animation (display) of the hold icon, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is not limited to the above, and the display may be started in any order. The display start may be started, and the order of the display start timings is the same as in the following embodiments.

  The timing shown to the same figure (c) is the character display of the effect display 704 (For example, "Yoshimune is general Yatsushiro".) In the lower right of the display area of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 during the change display of the decoration symbol. And an image corresponding to the notice effect for displaying the character image (princess). Here, although the effect display 704 makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize part of the variation display of the decorative symbol, it is also possible to allow the player to visually recognize part of the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure indicates a state in which the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 (this In the example, the image simulating the chance button is displayed on the front surface of the decorative symbol (the front surface of the layer (player side)) and the rear surface of the effect display 704.

  Further, a first for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 below the first operation means image BG1 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed in a first color (in this example, blue). The display position of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is also the front surface of the decorative symbol and the rear surface of the effect display 704. Also, the character image (殿) is displayed on the front of the decorative pattern at almost the same timing as these displays.

  This timing is the start time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and in fact, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color. However, a portion of the first operation means image BG1 and the first operation means image BG1 are displayed by a portion of the effect display 704 (here, a character display of a balloon saying "Yoshimune is Yatsushiro.") At the timing of FIG. A portion of the elapsed time notification image TG1 (here, a portion including the right end portion) is hidden, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize (impossible to visually recognize).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a part of the first display (the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is preferentially overlapped (that is, earlier in time and The first display is hidden by the second display (part of the effect display 704) displayed on the front as a layer, and not hidden by the second display (FIG. (J) The visibility of the first display is lower than that of. Here, the first display in the present embodiment refers to a display in which the display mode of the first display can be changed at least when the change condition is satisfied. Further, establishment of the change condition includes, for example, when the time from the display start of the first display has passed, or when the operation of the operation means determined in advance (one or more operations, long press, etc.) And say. Further, the change condition may be established once during the display period of the first display, or may be plural. For example, in the case where the change condition is, for example, a lapse of time every one second from the display start time of the first display and this is satisfied a plurality of times, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed every one second Aspects change. Specifically, as described later, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is an image in which the filled portion of the first color decreases (or increases) with time (for example, every second). Display Note that the second display may not be displayed temporally prior to the first display.

  The timings shown in (e) and (f) of the figure show a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is the acceptance period) has elapsed from the start of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 (FIG. (D)). ing. As described above, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is a meter display, and the scale (filled portion) of the meter (also referred to as a gauge hereinafter) corresponds to the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. Display an image that gradually decreases. Then, even while the scale of the meter gradually decreases, the effect display 704 continues to be displayed, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. In other words, the first display (the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is hidden by the second display (part of the effect display 704), so that the display is not hidden by the second display (the same figure (j)). Even in the state where the visibility is lower compared to, the change in the display mode of the first display (the first elapsed time notification image TG1) (the display in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases) is continued ing. In this example, the display mode and the display position of the effect display 704 do not change with the passage of time.

  Timings shown in (g) to (i) of the figure show a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has further passed from (f) of the figure. At these timings, the meter's scale (filled portion) actually displays an image that gradually decreases (reduces), but the meter's scale is hidden behind the effect display 704, and the meter's scale decreases The display mode of the display is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible). In other words, while the scale of the meter is hidden by the effect display 704, the decrease display of the scale continues.

  Note that the first display (here, the second display (here, the effect display 704 which is the advance notice) becomes non-display by overlapping (hidden in the effect display 704) and becomes invisible to the player (here) Then, if there is an image that the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases), the first display (that is, the non-displayed image) of the portion that becomes invisible can not be drawn actually You may control. By doing this, the control burden of the drawing process can be reduced. This is the same in all the embodiments of the present specification. Note that the first display of the portion that is invisible to the player (non-displayed) may be drawn.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure shows a state in which the effect display 704 becomes non-displayed (immediately before) the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 ends (immediately before). As a result, before the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 ends, the whole of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 including the right end portion can be visually recognized by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter is displayed by overlapping and displaying the second display (here, the effect display 704) in the area including the left end portion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1. The start position of the reduced display of the scale of) and the display mode of the reduced display may be difficult for the player to visually recognize (the same applies to the following embodiments).

  As mentioned above, although an example in case a button operation is not performed during the reception period of operation of the chance button 136 was shown in the same figure (d)-(j), button operation was performed during the reception period of operation of the chance button 136 A display example of the case is shown below.

  The figure (g-1) is a display example at the time of operating the chance button 136 at the timing shown to the figure (g). At this timing, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased based on the operation of the chance button 136, the effect display previously displayed (first An image 730 (an image corresponding to a second preview effect, in this example, a character display of “chance!”) Different from the image corresponding to the preview effect 704 and corresponding to the preview effect is a decorative pattern It is displayed in the display area of the display device 208. However, even in this state, a part of the image 730 corresponding to the second preview effect has a reduced visibility for the player due to the effect display 704 (the image corresponding to the first preview effect) overlapping. (It is considered difficult for the player to see).

In this example, although a case in which it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 by the effect display 704 which is an image corresponding to the advance notice effect has been described as an example, other effect images or other images A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 may be made difficult to visually recognize by this, and the same applies to the following embodiments.
<Example 21 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 247 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the working example 21 in time series.

  Although the timings shown in FIGS. (B) to (e) are the same as the explanation of the timings shown in (b) to (e) in FIG. 246, in the present embodiment, the first operation means image BG1 is a chance button The image corresponding to the first operation of 136 is an image, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is an image for displaying the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has passed further than the timing of FIG. 247 (e). At this timing, a second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 and a downward arrow are displayed on a part of the effect display 704 (here, in the balloon). On the other hand, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 for displaying the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed. In this example, part of the effect display 704 (second operation) while decreasing the visibility of the image in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases (while making it difficult for the player to see). An effect of prompting the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed by the means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow.

  Note that the second elapsed time notification image TG2 may be displayed on part of the effect display 704 (here, in the balloon). Further, the second operation means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow are not displayed when the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is ended, and the timing thereof is the first time of the chance button 136 It may be set to the same timing as the timing of the end of the operation acceptance period (the timing of the non-display of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1), or may be the timing earlier than that. , May be after the timing. Further, in the present embodiment, the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is a period whose time is shorter than the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, but the time may be the same period. May be a long period of time.

  The timings shown in (g) to (j) of the figure are the same as the timings shown in (g) to (j) of FIG.

  FIGS. 247 (b) to (j) show an example when the button operation is not performed during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, but when the button operation is performed during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 A display example is shown below.

  The figure (g-1) is a display example at the time of performing the 2nd operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown to the figure (g). At this timing, based on the second operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the effect display previously displayed ( An image 730 corresponding to the preliminary announcement effect different from the first preliminary announcement effect 704) (an image corresponding to the second preliminary announcement effect, and in this example, the character display "CHANNEL!") Are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, even in this state, a part of the image 730 corresponding to the second preview effect is considered as difficult to be recognized by the player by the effect display 704 (image corresponding to the first preview effect). In addition, part of the effect display 704 is changed. Specifically, based on the fact that the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the second operation means image BG2 in the balloon is erased, and it is a kind of the big hit notice effect of the special figure, "super hot! "" Is displayed.

  The figure (g-2) is another display example at the time of performing the 2nd operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown to the figure (g). At this timing, based on the second operation of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the effect display previously displayed ( An image 730 corresponding to the preliminary announcement effect different from the first preliminary announcement effect 704) (an image corresponding to the second preliminary announcement effect, and in this example, the character display "CHANNEL!") Are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. However, even in this state, a part of the image 730 corresponding to the second preview effect is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display (image corresponding to the first preview effect) 704. In this example, the display mode of the effect display 704 is not changed, and the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow is continued. In this case, the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the image of the downward arrow may prompt the third operation of the chance button 136, and the third operation of the chance button 136 is performed accordingly. In this case, it may be changed to the effect display 704 shown in FIG. Also, in practice, the third operation of the chance button 136 may not be accepted (restricted).

  FIG. 11 (g-3) is another display example when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a part of the effect display 704 is changed based on the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed. Specifically, based on the fact that the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, the second operation means image BG2 in the balloon is erased, and the text "super hot!" Is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 continues, and a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is viewed by the player by a part of the effect display 704. It is difficult. In this case, an image in which the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases is displayed.

  The timing shown to the figure (f-1) is another display example at the time of performing the 1st operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown to the figure (e). At this timing, based on the fact that the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the effect display displayed earlier ( An image 730 corresponding to the preliminary announcement effect different from the first preliminary announcement effect 704) (an image corresponding to the second preliminary announcement effect, and in this example, the character display "CHANNEL!") Are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in (f-1), a second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 and a downward arrow are displayed on part of the effect display 704 (here, in the balloon). There is.

In the present embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated, each of the effect display (image corresponding to the first preview effect) 704 and the image 730 corresponding to the second preview effect is of the chance button 136. An image corresponding to the operation may be displayed, or one of the images may be displayed. In addition, when there is an operation of the chance button 136, this is not accepted, and both of the effect display (image corresponding to the first preview effect) 704 and the image 730 corresponding to the second preview effect are displayed. It does not matter if it is not changed.
<Example 22 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 248 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the twenty-second embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, the first operation means image BG1 is an image corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136. The second operation means image BG2 is an image corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in FIG. 246 (b) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 246 (b).

  The timing shown to the same figure (c) has shown the state which the reception period of the 2nd operation of the chance button 136 started in the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol, and the lower right of the display area of the decoration symbol display 208 , Effect display 704 (for example, in the balloon, the second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136, the image of the character of "long press!", And the character image (princess) are displayed It is in the state of displaying an image corresponding to the advance notice effect). In this example, as a second operation of the chance button 136, a display prompting to press and hold the chance button 136 is displayed.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure indicates a state in which the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 (this In the example, an image imitating a chance button is displayed on the front of the decorative symbol and on the rear of the effect display 704.

  Further, a first elapsed time notification for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 below the first operation means image BG1 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The image TG1 is displayed in a first color (in this example, blue). The display position of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is also the front surface of the decorative symbol and the rear surface of the effect display 704. Also, the character image (殿) is displayed on the front of the decorative pattern at almost the same timing as these displays.

  At this timing, at the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is actually filled in with the first color. A part of the first operation means image BG1 and a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (a part of the effect display 704 (here, an image of a balloon displaying the second operation means image BG2) Here, the portion including the right end portion is in a hidden state, and the visibility of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is reduced (it is difficult for the player to see (not visible)).

  In the timing shown in (e) of the figure, the second operation (long) of the chance button 136 is performed in a state where a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is the reception period) has elapsed from the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. It shows the state where the pressing operation has been started. At this timing, an image is displayed in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) gradually decreases, and the effect display 704 continues to display even during that period, and the first elapsed time is displayed. A part of the notification image TG1 is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize. Further, in this example, in response to the start of the second operation (long press operation) of the chance button 136, the effect display 704 is changed. Specifically, the display position of the effect display 704 does not change, but the display mode of the effect display 704 (here, the filling color of the second operation means image BG2) is changed from the first color (for example, white) to the second It is changed to a color (for example, red).

  The timing shown to the figure (f) is a state which the 2nd operation (operation of long press) is continuing. Is shown. At this timing, an image is displayed in which the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) gradually decreases, and the effect display 704 continues to display even during that period, and the first elapsed time is displayed. A part of the notification image TG1 is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, the effect display 704 maintains the state after the change of the display mode (filling with the second color), and reports that the second operation (long press operation) is continuing. As described above, the display mode after the change of the effect display 704 is maintained for a period during which the second operation (long press operation) continues, but the second operation (long press operation) continues. May return to the original first color. Further, the display mode after the change of the effect display 704 is the same as the display mode before (or immediately before) being interrupted even when the player interrupts the second operation (long press operation). When the player interrupts the second operation (long press operation), the original first color may be restored.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has further passed from (f) of the figure. At these timings, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) actually displays an image in which the scale gradually decreases, but the scale (filled portion) of the meter is hidden behind the effect display 704. The display mode of the reduced display of the meter is difficult for the player to visually recognize. In this case, control may be performed so as not to actually draw an image in which the scale gradually decreases. By doing this, the control burden of the drawing process can be reduced. In addition, the effect display 704 maintains the state after the change of the display mode (filling with the second color), and reports that the second operation (long press operation) is continuing. Further, in the above case, control may be performed to draw an image in which the scale gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has further passed from (f) of the figure. At this timing, the second operation means image BG2 is erased based on the result of the second operation (long press) of the chance button 136 (for example, when the long press period (for example, about 3 seconds has elapsed), It displays the text "It's very hot!"

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure shows a state where the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 has ended. In the present embodiment, even at the end of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (even after the end), the display of the effect display 704 continues, and the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (meter) Is considered difficult for the player to view.

  In the timing shown in (k) of the figure, the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the character image (display) are not displayed (erased), and the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed to the player. It is in a state of being visible. However, also in this case, the display of the effect display 704 is continued, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize part of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The figure (e-1) is another display example in the timing of the figure (e). At this timing, in conjunction with the start of the second operation (long press operation) of the chance button 136, the display mode (here, filled color) of the effect display 704 is from the first color (for example, white). The second color (for example, red) is changed, but the second operation of the chance button 136 is determined to be the first operation of the chance button 136 in control, and corresponds to the first operation of the chance button 136 It shows a state in which the advance presentation has been started. That is, after deleting the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the notice effect image 730 (here, the character of "chance") corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed. . Also in this case, a part of the notice effect image 730 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704.

  The figure (h-1) is another display example in the timing of the figure (h). At this timing, the character of "super heat!" Displayed based on the result of the second operation (long press) of the chance button 136 (for example, the long press (for example, about 3 seconds) has elapsed). At substantially the same timing as the display, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and the notice effect image 730 corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 (here, characters of "chance" Display).

Note that if there is a further operation on the chance button 136 (third operation (long press, press of a period shorter than long press, etc.) at the timing shown in FIG. (I), the same diagram (e-1) Alternatively, the display shown in (h-1) may be performed, and when the operation of the chance button 136 (third operation) is further performed at the timing shown in (j) of FIG. The display shown in FIG. (E-1) or FIG. (H-1) may be performed.
<Example 23 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 249 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the twenty-third embodiment in time series. The timing shown in FIG. 246 (b) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 246 (b).

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure shows a state where the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 has been started during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. (In this example, an image imitating a chance button), a first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a character image (donor) are displayed on the front of the decorative symbol. At this timing, the entire first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows a state in which a pre-reading advance notice effect to change the hold icon PI1 has been started during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. As an example, the pre-read advance notice effect of the present embodiment is to perform effect display (animation display) 704 by animation. In the animation display 704, for example, a star connected to a balloon from above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 executes display start animation to start display, descends toward the hold display area 700, and stars near the hold icon PI1. Is separated from the balloon, and the balloon icon PI1 is changed or not changed, and the balloon alone is raised again to perform the moving animation and the erasing animation to be erased.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure shows a state where a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has elapsed from the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image An image is displayed in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter which is TG1 gradually decreases. In addition, the animation display 704 continues, displaying an image in which the balloons and the stars are falling.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has further elapsed from the state of (e) in the same figure. An image is displayed in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases. In addition, the animation display 704 continues, and the balloons and the stars descend while overlapping the front surfaces of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. At this timing, part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by a part (star) of the animation display 704, and the visibility of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is reduced (to the player). It is considered difficult to see). In addition, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is also covered by a part (balloon) of the animation display 704 and is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timing shown in (g) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has further elapsed from the state of (f) in the same figure. An image is displayed in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases. Also, the animation display 704 continues, and the front of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 while the stars and balloons move from right to left along the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Overlap. At this timing, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered by a part (star) of the animation display 704, which is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is also covered by a part (balloon) of the animation display 704 and is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a part of the first display (here, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the moving second display (here, the animation display 704). ing. In addition, the position (position where it becomes difficult for the player to see) of the first display (here, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) to be covered by the moving second display (the animation display 704 in this case) It changes with. The first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image which gradually decreases even in a period in which the animation display 704 partially covers and makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timings shown in (i) to (l) of the figure show a state in which the change display of the hold icon PI1 has succeeded by the animation display 704. That is, when the change display of the holding icon is successful, the balloon and the star approach the holding display area 700 ((i) in the same figure), the star leaves the balloon ((j) in the same drawing) And the star are combined, and the display icon changes with the display icon PI1 ′ displayed (the change display succeeds) and the balloon rises (the same figure (k)), the balloon from the display area of the decorative symbol display area 208 Is erased (the same figure (l)), the animation display 704 is performed.

  FIGS. (I-1) to (j-1) are states after the timing shown in FIG. 6 (g), showing a state in which the change display of the hold icon has failed. That is, when the change display of the holding icon fails, even if the star and the balloon approach the holding display area 700, the star does not leave the balloon (the same figure (i-1)) and moves, for example, to the left Then, the animation display 704 which leaves the hold icon PI is executed.

  In this embodiment, the animation display performed when the change display of the hold icon succeeds and the animation display performed when it fails fail are described as different animation displays, but the same animation display is performed, and as a result, hold The change display may be successful by changing only the display mode of the icon, or the change display may fail by changing only the display mode of the hold icon. Also, the execution time of the animation display performed when the change display of the hold icon succeeds and the execution time of the animation display performed when it fails may be the same period (length), for example, the period when it is successful. The period may be different, such as becoming longer.

The timing shown in (f-1) of the figure is a state after the timing shown in (e) of the figure, and shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated during the reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 based on the operation of the chance button 136, an image 730 corresponding to the advance presentation effect (in this example, The character display “CHANNEL!” Is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Also in this case, a part of the image 730 (first display) corresponding to the advance notice effect is covered by the animation display 704 (second display), making it difficult for the player to visually recognize.
<Example 24 of image display of operation means>

  250 to 154 are diagrams showing the image display of the operation means of the twenty-fourth embodiment in time series. In the twenty-fourth embodiment, as a premise of the description of the twenty-fifth to twenty-eighth embodiments, an example of image display of operation means in the case of performing normal operation means image display will be described.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 250 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed, and at the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 “Decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7”, which is a combination of designs, is stopped and displayed. Further, in the pending display area 700, here, two pending icons PI1 and PI2 of the special drawing 1 are shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 6B, the suspension of Special Figure 1 is digested, and the suspension of Special Figure 1 fluctuation game is reduced from 2 to 1, and symbol variation display is performed in the first Special Display 212. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol of Special Figure 1 is started. In the hold display area 700, the digested hold is displayed as a fluctuation icon CI in the variable icon display area 702, and a hold icon PI1 indicating that there is one hold of the special figure 1 is displayed.

  The timing shown in (c) of the figure shows a state in which the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 has started, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. (In this example, an image imitating a chance button) is displayed.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1 has a first color ( In the example, it is displayed in blue below the first operation means image BG1. This timing is the start time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color.

  The timing shown in (d) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has elapsed from the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, and the first elapsed time notification image The TG 1 displays an image in which the scale of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure is that (for example, 6 seconds which is the reception period) elapses before the time (for example 6 seconds which is the reception period) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 In the state of (before) (after the timing of (d) of the figure), the state where operation of the chance button 136 was performed is shown. At this timing, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 based on the operation of the chance button 136, an image 730 corresponding to the advance presentation effect (in this example, A character display of “CHANNEL!” And a character image (殿) are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that this advance notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed. Moreover, although the case where a notice production | presentation production is displayed is demonstrated to an example in this embodiment, another production | generation display may be sufficient.

  The timing shown in (f) and (g) in the figure is a state in which, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the effect corresponding to the result of the judgment of success or failure, the fluctuation time and the notice effect for winning is started. The figure (f) (g) has shown an example of the reach display in the change display of a decorative symbol.

  The timing shown in the figure (h) is a state of effect start state of super reach, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white (white back), and the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed as the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, a small display (a reduced display of a decorative symbol) is displayed on the upper right side of the display area of. Further, the hold display area 700, the hold icon PI1, and the change icon CI are hidden (erased). Note that when the hold display area 700 and the hold icon PI1, the erase timing of the variation icon CI, the timing of becoming the white back, and the timing of the reduction display of the decorative symbol are sequentially executed, whichever may come first It may be performed in order. Also, at least a portion may be performed simultaneously.

  The timings shown in (i) and (j) of the figure are, for example, a state in which execution of a sword strike reach presentation in which a sword aura character is confronted with a sword is started as a super reach effect. Here, after displaying the characters of the swordsman character and "VS swordsman" as an example (the same figure (i)), the confrontation scene of the character (tendon) and the swordsman character is displayed (the same figure (j)).

  In the timing shown in (k) of the figure, a second operation means image BG2 (in this example, the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is used to temporarily delete the confrontation scene between the character and the swordsman character. Image that imitates). In addition, a second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying an elapsed time of a reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the second operation means image BG2 has a first color In the example, it is displayed below the second operation means image BG2 in blue). This timing is a point in time immediately before the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and all the second elapsed time notification image TG2 (from the left end to the right end) is filled with the first color There is. The fill color of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 may be a second color (for example, white) different from the first color. Furthermore, at this timing, for example, an image prompting the operation of the chance button 136 (for example, the characters “Press the button to stop the feeling meter!”) Is displayed above the second operation means image BG2. Furthermore, the first status notification image SG1 is displayed at, for example, the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first state notification image SG1 is a meter display, and refers to a display in which the display mode can be changed at least when the change condition is satisfied. The establishment of the change condition is, for example, when the time from the display start time of the first display has elapsed, or when there is an operation of the predetermined operation means (one or more operations, long press, etc.) Say. Further, the change condition may be established once during the display period of the first display, or may be plural. For example, if it is assumed that the change condition is, for example, a lapse of time every one second from the start of display of the first state notification image SG1 and this is satisfied multiple times, the first state notification image SG1 is every one second The display mode changes to. Specifically, as described later, the first status notification image SG1 displays an image in which the filled portion increases (or decreases) with time (for example, every second). In addition, when the first state notification image SG1 changes the display mode with the passage of time, the change of the display mode is stopped according to the operation of the operation means (chance button 136) during the change period of the display mode. It may be (or ended). For example, in the first status notification image SG1 of this embodiment, the scales (filled portions) of a plurality of stages (for example, 10 stages) gradually increase from the lowermost stage (perform the increase display of the scales) with the passage of time. It is a meter which reaches the upper stage, and is an image which terminates (or stops) the increase display of the scale when the chance button 136 is operated during the increase display of the scale. Here, with the elapse of time, the first status notification image SG1 is not filled in any stages as the initial status at the timing shown in FIG. 6K, or in the first color (such as white). Displayed in full fill.

  In the timing shown in (l) of the figure, the same display as (k) in the figure is performed, but the time has elapsed from the timing shown in (k) in the figure, and a state where the acceptance period of the chance button 136 is started It shows.

  The timing shown in (m) of the figure indicates that time has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display an image. Further, at this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the first status notification image SG1 is sequentially filled with the second color different from the first color in a stepwise manner from the lowermost stage, and the filled portion gradually increases. Display an image. At this time, the filling color (second color) of the first status notification image SG1 changes stepwise, but may be the same color.

  The timing shown in (n) of the figure indicates that the time has further elapsed from the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display an image. Further, at this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the first status notification image SG1 gradually increases, and the image reaching the top is displayed.

  The timing shown in (o) of the figure shows a state in which the chance button 138 is operated in a state where time has elapsed from the state of (n) in the figure. At this timing, the image in which the scale (filled portion) of the first status notification image SG1 has reached the top is displayed, and the character of "spirit MAX" is displayed above the first status notification image SG1. In addition, after the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the characters "Stop pressing the button and stop the feeling meter!" Are deleted after the chance button 136 is operated ( Alternatively, on the front of these images, an image (in this example, characters “in the case of slaying!” And a character image (殿) in the example) corresponding to the notice effect is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the present embodiment, the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter-) gradually decreases with time after reaching the top, and increases during the acceptance of the chance button 136. Repeat the display and decrease display. Then, at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated, the change (increase or decrease) in the display mode of the scale is stopped, and different effects are performed depending on the position of the scale.

  That is, in the timing shown in FIG. 10 (o), the timing at which the scale reaches the top is expected in anticipation of an increase in the scale of the first status notification image SG1 in which the display mode changes with time (the scale increases). By operating the chance button 136 in, the scale of the first status notification image SG1 is stopped at the top, indicating that the advance notice effect (“hot” effect) advantageous to the player is being executed. .

  Note that the stop position of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 may be determined in advance by the effect lottery regardless of the timing at which the chance button 136 is operated. In this case, when the player operates the chance button 136, the scale stops at a predetermined position.

  Further, the upper limit of the stop position of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 may be determined in advance by the effect lottery. That is, the scale increases or decreases with the passage of time, but during the reception period of the chance button 136, the position (for example, the eighth row) determined in advance by the effect drawing is the upper limit, and does not reach the uppermost row. Good. In this case, the upper limit of the stop position of the scale may be determined at the timing when the player operates the chance button 136.

  FIG. 251 is a diagram showing the image display of the operation means after FIG. 250 (o) in time series. The timing shown in FIG. 251 (p) is shown in FIG. 250 (j) by deleting the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, the first state display image SG1, the image of the notice effect. It shows the confrontation scene between the character (Toen) and the swordsman character after the timing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 251 (q) (r) shows a scene where the character (dono) has won the swordsman character, and in FIG. 251 (r) the symbol of the big hit (probable variation big hit) in the reduced display of the decorative symbol. The fluctuation variation display of the combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7") is performed.

  The timing shown in the figure (s) changes the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to white, and the timing shown in the figure (t) hits the symbol display areas 208a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display device 208 After the symbol combination (for example, "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7") of the probability variation big hit is displayed fluctuatingly, the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed at the timing shown in FIG. Furthermore, at the timing shown in the figure (w), the stop display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased, and the characters of "probable variation big hit" for notifying the start of the big hit are displayed.

  As described above, in FIGS. 250 to 251, the display example in the case where the chance button 136 is operated in the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (after FIG. 250 (k)) has been described.

  FIG. 252 shows a display example in the case where the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed in the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (after FIG. 250 (k)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 252 (k) indicates the same state as the timing shown in FIG. 250 (k).

  The timing shown in FIG. 252 (l) indicates that time has elapsed since the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display an image. Further, at this timing, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the first status notification image SG1 gradually increases from the lowermost stage is displayed.

  The timing shown in (m) of the figure indicates that the time has further elapsed since the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display an image. Further, at this timing, the scale (filled portion) of the first status notification image SG1 gradually increases, and the image reaching the top is displayed.

  In the timings shown in (n) and (o) in the figure, when time elapses from the state in (m) in the figure, the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Display In addition, after the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) reaches the top, an image whose number decreases gradually is displayed.

  Further, in the timing shown in (p) of the figure, when time has elapsed from the state of (o) in the figure, the scale (filled portion) of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 disappears, and the acceptance period of the chance button 136 Indicates an elapsed state. At this timing, the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) displays an image that increases again.

  At the timing shown in (q) of the figure, no operation is performed during the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, so the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to white and the second operation means The image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the first status notification image SG1 are deleted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 250 (r), the confrontation scene of the sword character and the character after the timing shown in FIG. 250 (j) is displayed as in the case of FIG. 251 (p).

  As described above, when the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed during the period from the start to the end of the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 ((k) to (p) in FIG. The scale of the image SG1 (meter-) repeatedly increases and decreases.

  FIG. 253 shows another example of notice effect displayed at the timing of FIG. 250 (o).

  In FIG. 253 (o-1), the first status notification image SG 1 is being raised before the scale (filled portion) of the first status notification image SG1 reaches the top row (for example, the tenth row), or in the middle of falling after the top row is reached This is an example of the notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the upper stage (for example, the eighth stage) is reached. In this case, an image 730 (in this example, a character display of "sneaking!" And a character image (ten) in this example) corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 253 (o-2) shows the preview effect when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the middle stage (for example, the fourth stage) is reached during rising or falling of the scale of the first status notification image SG1. It is an example. In this case, an image 730 (in this example, a character display of "cut-in!" And a character image (ten) in this example) corresponding to the notice effect is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 253 (o-3) shows the preview effect when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing when the lower end (for example, the first step) is reached during rising or falling of the scale of the first status notification image SG1. It is an example. In this case, an image 730 (in this example, a character display of “weakly!” And a character image (ten) in this example) corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As described above, the advance notice effect may be made different depending on the size of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated. In this example, when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 is large, a notice effect with high degree of advantage for the player is displayed, and when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 is small, the state for the player It displays a low-interest notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same effect may be performed regardless of the stop position of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter).

  FIG. 254 is an example of displaying a shift in super reach effect, and is a diagram showing operation means image display after FIG. 250 (o) in time series.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 254 (p) and (q) are displaying a scene where the character (dono) lost to the swordsman character as a confrontation scene between the temple and the swordsman character after the timing shown in FIG. 250 (j), In FIG. 254 (q), the fluctuation display of the symbol combination (for example, "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7") of the shift is performed in the reduction display of the decorative symbol.

  The timing shown in the same figure (r) changes the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to white, and the timing shown in the same figure (s) deviates from the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 The state in which the symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”) is displayed in a fluctuating manner is shown. Note that in (s) of FIG. , Remaining icon PI1 indicating the remaining number of reservations, and the fluctuation icon CI of the fluctuation game is re-displayed.

  At the timing shown in the figure (t), the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed. Thereby, since the said variable game is complete | finished, the round figure is displayed on the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e for preparation of the start of the next special figure 1 variable game.

The period shown in the figure (u) to the figure (w) shows the state from the figure (t) to the start of the next special figure 1 fluctuation game. During this period, an erasure animation is executed to erase the fluctuation icon CI indicating the reserve that has been digested by the special figure 1 fluctuation game until the figure (t). That is, in this example, after the stop display of the decorative symbol shown in the figure (t), the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon CI indicating the digested hold is executed.
<Example 25 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 255 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the twenty-fifth embodiment in chronological order. The timing shown in the figure (A) is the timing corresponding to the figure 250 (k), and the timing shown in the figure (D) is the timing corresponding to the figure 250 (l). That is, in the present embodiment, before the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 in the normal operation means image display described in the twenty-fourth embodiment (between FIG. 250 (k) and FIG. 250 (l). Is a display example in the case where the effect display 704 is performed in the period).

  The timing shown to the figure (B) has shown the state which is performing the presentation display 704 before the start of the reception period of operation of the chance button 136. FIG. The effect display 704 is, for example, a display of advance notice effects relating to the change, and displays (cuts in) a band-shaped image of the character (tendon) in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, at least a part of the first display (a part of the first status notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the first operation means image BG1, and the “button The part of the characters "Press and stop the feeling meter!" Has lower visibility than before the effect display 704 is displayed (the same figure (A)). As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the effect display 704 is covered, a part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the second operation means image BG1 and the “press the button to stop the feeling meter Some of the characters “!” Are considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 6C, the effect display 704 displayed in FIG. 6B becomes non-displayed (erased), and as shown in FIG. 6D, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. The display indicating the start of the reception period is continued.

  In addition, the display position of the effect display 704 in a present Example is a position which makes visual recognition difficult at least a part of 1st status alerting | reporting image SG1 (meter) not only what is shown to the figure (B). In this case, the vicinity of the top of the first state notification image SG1 may be covered, or the vicinity of the bottom of the first state notification image SG1 may be covered. In addition, the entire first state notification image SG1 may be covered.

  The same figure (B-1) to the same figure (B-4) are other display examples of the effect display 704 shown to the figure (B).

  As shown in FIG. 6 (B-1), the effect display 704 displays the first status notification image SG1 (meter-) and a part of the characters "Press the button to stop the feeling meter!" Although it is difficult, the reduced display of the decorative symbol 708, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 208f may not be difficult to visually recognize. That is, the effect display 704 is the first state notification image SG1 and the front of the character "press the button and stop the feeling meter!", And the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol, the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e and the special feature It is displayed on the rear surface side of FIG. 2 fourth symbol display area 208f.

  Further, as shown in (B-2) of the figure, the effect display 704 makes the first status notification image SG1, the first operation means image BG1, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 difficult to view. May be

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6 (B-3), the effect display 704 is an image in which it is difficult to visually recognize only a part of the first status notification image SG1 (here, a character having a placard of "super heat" (Image of) may be displayed.

Further, as shown in (B-4) of the figure, the effect display 704 moves so that the whole (or substantially all) of the first status notification image SG1 becomes difficult to visually recognize or become visible as time passes. An image may be displayed. In this example, the effect display 704 is an image in which the character “super heat” is displayed on a background image having substantially the same area as the entire first status notification image SG1. This is an animation in which a slide movement is made from the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display area 208 (cut in) to slide left and right.
<Example 26 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 256 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the twenty-sixth embodiment in time series. In this embodiment, the display example in the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (period after FIG. 250 (l)) of the normal operation means image display described in the 24th embodiment. is there.

  The timing shown in the figure (A) is the timing corresponding to the figure 250 (l), and the timing shown in the figure (B) is the timing corresponding to the figure 250 (m).

  The timing shown to the figure (C) has shown the state which is performing the presentation display 704 at the timing corresponding to FIG. 250 (n). The effect display 704 is, for example, a display of advance notice effects relating to the change, and displays (cuts in) an image of a character in a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. By this effect display 704, a part of the first status notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the first operation means image BG1 and a part of the characters "Press the button to stop the feeling meter!" The visibility is reduced compared to before the display 704 is displayed ((A) and (B) in the same figure). On the other hand, in the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, the visibility is not lowered (it becomes visible to the player), the chance An image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the button 136 is displayed.

  The timing shown in the figure (D) shows a state where time has further elapsed (the reception period has progressed) from the timing shown in the figure (C), and the effect display 704 is continued. Further, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter is smaller than the state shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a part of the first state notification image SG1, a part of the first operation means image BG1, and a part of the characters "Stop pressing the button and stop the feeling meter!" A change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (a change in which the filled portion gradually decreases) continues to be visible to the player while being difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, as shown in (E) of the figure, the effect display 704 displayed in (C) and (D) of the figure becomes non-displayed (erased). The figures (F) and (G) are respectively similar to the states shown in FIGS. 252 (p) and (q).

  In this embodiment, the first state notification image SG1 is difficult to visually recognize in the effect display 704 during the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136, so the player operates the chance button 136 depending on the display position of the effect display 704. It is difficult to understand the timing of Since the player may refrain from the operation when the timing of the operation is unclear, the operation display of the chance button 136 of the player may be able to be derived by the effect display 704. For example, when it is unlikely that the player will have an advantageous result by operating the chance button 136 when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is at the lower position (if the feeling meter is not sufficiently accumulated), By hiding the lower part of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) in the effect display 704, it may be difficult for the player to operate the chance button 136. By doing this, it may be possible to lead to an operation at a timing that is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is in the upper row, it is difficult for the player to know the optimal timing while thinking that the chance button 136 is to be operated. There is a case.

In addition, also in the figure (C) (D) of a present Example, the display example of the effect display 704 shown to FIG. 255 (B-1)-(B-4) is applicable.
<Example 27 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 257 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 27 in time series. In the present embodiment, during super reach (period after FIG. 250 (j)) of the normal operation means image display described in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the success / failure of the common drawing fluctuation display and the common drawing fluctuation display as the effect display 704. It is configured to display a notice effect based on the determination.

  Timings shown in FIGS. (A) to (C) are the timings corresponding to FIG. 250 (j), and a generic drawing fluctuation display is shown during super reach production (during displaying of a confrontation scene between a character and a swordsman character). Has been started, and the effect accompanying the said common view fluctuation display has been started. Specifically, the effect display 704 of this timing is, for example, the character (Chibi princess) in the common drawing variation display area 208s, the display start animation of the Chibi princess roulette (character (Chibi princess), the Chibi princess roulette display, and “「 The animation which displays the balloon of "electric chew open" is executed when it stops at (Figures (A) and (B)), and it is the effect that the decorative symbol variation display of the common drawing is started (the same figure (C)).

  FIGS. (D) to (G) show the same timing as in (k) to (m) in FIG. 250, and the explanation of the image display of the operation means is omitted, but it is displayed in (D) onwards. In the front of the first state notification image SG1, the effect display 704 (decorative symbol variation display of the common drawing) continues, and at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is the effect display It is considered that the player has difficulty in visual recognition by the user 704.

  (H) of the figure shows the same timing as that of FIG. 250 (n), and the explanation about the operation means image display is omitted, but the effect display 704 (generally shown in FIG. The stop display of the decorative symbol ((display per common drawing) is continued, and at least a part of the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is regarded as difficult to be recognized by the player by the effect display 704 .

  FIGS. (I) and (J) show the same timing as FIG. 250 (o) (p), and the description of the operation means image display is omitted, but effects are displayed on the front of the first status notification image SG1. The display 704 (a stop display of the decoration symbol ◎ of a common drawing and a display of a balloon of “in the electric chow open state”) continues. In particular, in the figure (I), at least a part of the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704.

  The same figures (K) and (L) show the same timing as FIG. 250 (p) (q), and the explanation about the operation means image display is omitted, but the effect display 704 (decorative symbol ◎ The stop display of continues (in the figure (K)), and by the end of the effect display 704, an erase animation of the princess Chibi roulette and the character (Chibi princess) is executed (figure (L)).

  The same figure (M) is in a state where the effect display 704 is finished, and shows the same timing as FIG. 250 (q).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, while at least the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is displayed (from the start of display of the first status notification image SG1 shown in FIGS. Until the display end time), at least a part of the first status notification image SG1 is considered to be low in visibility by the effect display 704 (regarded as difficult to be recognized by the player). On the other hand, even while the effect display 704 is being executed, the change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continuously visible to the player ((D) in the figure). ~ (H)).

  In the present embodiment, although the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reach effect is described as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and all game characters (during the reach effect) and the big hit etc. For example, at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (c) or FIG. 250 (d) or the like, the second display (effect display 704) can be performed to reduce the visibility of the first display.

  The timing shown to the same figure (H-1) is the state in which the production | presentation display 704 (The stop display of the decoration symbol * of the common drawing * (disappearance display of the common drawing)) is continued. Also, the timing shown in FIG. (I-1) is the state after (H-1) in the figure, and the deletion animation of Chibi princess roulette and the character (Chibi princess) is executed by the end of the effect display 704. Ru. As described above, the execution period of the effect display 704 may be different depending on whether the regular drawing fluctuation display is determined to be the success or failure judgment or not. In addition, the execution period of the effect display 704 may be made to be the same in the case where it corresponds to the propriety judgment of the common drawing fluctuation display and the case where it deviates to the judgment of the general drawing fluctuation display.

The execution (including the execution time) of the effect display 704 based on the propriety determination of the common drawing fluctuation display as described above is also applicable to the following embodiments.
<Example 28 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 258 is a diagram chronologically showing an operation means image display of a working example 28. In the present embodiment, during super reach (period after FIG. 250 (j)) of the normal operation means image display described in the twenty-fourth embodiment, two types of effect display 704 (first effect display 7041 and second Is configured to perform the effect display 7042). The first effect display 7041 is, for example, a display of notice effects based on the regularity variation display of the twenty-seventh embodiment and the judgment of the regularity of the general pattern variation display, and the second effect display 7042 is, for example, the variation of the twenty-fifth embodiment It is a display of the notice effect about.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as those in FIGS. 257 (A) to (K), but in the present embodiment, a notice based on the determination of success or failure of the common drawing fluctuation display and the common drawing fluctuation display The display of the effect (the first effect display 7041) is executed, and at the timing of FIG. 6D, the first effect display 7041 (the second display) is the first state notification image SG1 (the first display) By displaying on the front of the), at least a part of the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timing shown to the figure (E) has shown the state after the timing shown to the figure (D). At this timing, the first effect display 7041 continues, and in addition to this, the display (the second effect display 7042) of the advance notice effect relating to the change is started. Then, at least a part of the scale of the first state notification image SG1 (meter) is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the first effect display 7041 and the second effect display 7042. Further, at least a part of the first effect display 7041 and the second effect display 7042 are displayed overlapping (superimposed). On the other hand, even in this state, the change in the display mode of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously visible to the player. In addition, control which does not draw only a meter may be performed about the area | region currently displayed redundantly, control which does not draw only the 2nd presentation display 7092 may be performed, and control which does not draw both may be performed. Also, control may be performed to draw all.

  In this example, the first effect display 7041 is displayed in front of (in front of) the second effect display 7042, but the second effect display 7042 has priority over the first effect display 7041. It may be displayed (on the front). In addition, the first effect display 7041 may be displayed in time priority over the second effect display 7042, or the second effect display 7042 may be displayed in time priority over the first effect display 7041. Or they may be displayed simultaneously.

  The timing shown to the figure (F) has shown the state after the timing shown to the figure (E). At this timing, the first effect display 7041 continues to lower the visibility of part of the first state notification image SG1, but the second effect display 7042 ends.

  The timing shown in (G) of the figure is the same as the timing shown in (E) of FIG. 250, and shows a state in which the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has started.

  The timings shown in (H) to (O) in the figure are the same as the timings shown in (G) to (M) in FIG. 250, but at least during the period when the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is displayed. In (the timings of (H) to (K) in the figure, it is assumed that the visibility is low due to the first effect display 7041 in which at least a part of the first status notification image SG1 is continuously displayed ( It is considered difficult for the player to see). On the other hand, even during the period when the first effect display 7041 is being executed, the change of the display mode of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously visible to the player (see FIG. (H) to (J)).

In the present embodiment, although the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reach effect is described as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and all game characters (during the reach effect) and the big hit etc. For example, at the timing shown in FIG. 250 (c) or FIG. 250 (d) or the like, the second display (effect display 704) can be performed to reduce the visibility of the first display.
<Example 29 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 259 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 29 in chronological order. In the twenty-ninth embodiment, as a premise of the description of the thirtieth embodiment, an example of the operation means image display in the case of performing the normal operation means image display will be described. The present embodiment has a configuration in which the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is accumulated in response to the continuous hit of the chance button 136.

  Similarly to the timing shown in FIG. 250 (k), the timing shown in the figure (A) shows a state before the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, for example. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second operation means image BG2, a second elapsed time notification image TG2 and a first status notification image SG1 are displayed, and above the second operation means image BG2 An image prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 (e.g., a letter such as "Please store the feeling meter by pressing the button continuously!") Is displayed.

  The timing shown in the figure (B) shows a state in which the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has been started, and the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 and the first While displaying the status notification image SG1 of the above, an image (for example, characters of "continuous hit!") Prompting the operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136 is displayed above the second operation means image BG2.

  The timing shown in (C) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has elapsed (the reception period has progressed) from the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. The second elapsed time notification image TG2 displays an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the notification image TG2 gradually decreases. Further, at this timing, the chance button 136 is hit continuously, and the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is increased according to the number of hits (the feeling meter is accumulated). . That is, in this case, the change condition is one or more operations of the chance button 136, and the change condition is satisfied a plurality of times. Specifically, the first status notification image SG1 displays an image in which the filled portion increases with an increase in the number of times the chance button 136 is continuously hit.

  The timing shown in (D) of the figure shows a state in which a time (for example, a time shorter than 6 seconds which is a reception period) has further elapsed from the timing of (C) in the same figure. An image is displayed in which the scale of the mark (filled portion) gradually decreases. Further, at this timing, the chance button 136 is continuously hit continuously, and the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) is increased from the timing of FIG. Indicates a state of accumulation.

  The timing shown in (E) of the figure shows a state in which the scale of the first status notification image SG1 (meter) has accumulated to the maximum (uppermost stage) within the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136. . That is, while displaying the image in which the scale (filled portion) of the first status notification image SG1 has reached the top, the character of "spirit MAX" is displayed above the first status notification image SG1, and the first status notification image SG1 is displayed. It is informed that the scale of the state notification image SG1 (meter) has accumulated to the maximum (uppermost stage). In addition, after deleting the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2, and the characters of "continuous hit" based on the first status notification image SG1 (meter) being accumulated to the maximum (or In the front of the image, an image 730 (in this example, the characters “Desperous!” And a character image (殿) in this example) corresponding to the notice effect are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The timing shown in the figure (F) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 251 (q). In the same figure (F) and thereafter, the same "big hit" operation means image display as in the case of (r) and the following figures is executed. In the present embodiment, the maximum position where the meters are accumulated may be determined in advance by lottery. That is, even if the chance button 136 is repeatedly hit repeatedly, the maximum value (for example, the eighth stage) determined by the lottery may not increase. In addition, even if the result of the pass / fail determination is “losing”, an effect of increasing to the maximum value (for example, the tenth stage) may be performed. In addition, even when the result of the pass / fail determination is "big hit", effects may be performed that do not increase to the maximum value (for example, the tenth stage) (for example, only increase to the eighth stage).

  The same figure (D ')-the same figure (G') are the example of a display in which the operation means image display of "the removal" is performed in a present Example.

  If the result of the success or failure judgment is “dropout” and the effect of “dropout” is selected in the effect drawing, as shown in (D ′) and (E ′) in the figure, the second operation acceptance of the chance button 136 is received. Within the period (up to the end of the reception period), even if the chance button 136 is hit repeatedly, the first status notification image SG1 (meter) does not accumulate to the maximum (the scale does not change after it has accumulated halfway). indicate.

  At the timing shown in the figure (F '), the entire display area of the decoration symbol display device 208 is changed to white (white back), and at the timing shown in the figure (G') Shows a scene in which the player lost the swordsman character.

From this point onward, the operation screen image display of “off” similar to FIG. 254 (q) and later is executed.
<Example 30 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 260 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 30 in time series. The figure shows a state corresponding to the timing shown in FIGS. 259 (A)-(C). That is, the present embodiment is a display example in the case where the effect display 704 is performed during the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 of the normal operation means image display described in the twenty-ninth embodiment.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 2A to 2C are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 259A to 2C. The figure (D) shows the state where time further passed from the figure (C), and with the increase in the number of consecutive hits of the chance button 136, the state where the first status notification image SG1 is further increased It shows. Further, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases.

  The timing shown to the same figure (E) has shown the state which is performing the presentation display 704 during the reception period of operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136. FIG. The effect display 704 is, for example, a display of advance notice effects relating to the change, and displays (cuts in) a band-shaped image of the character (tendon) in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. By this effect display 704, a part of the first status notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the second operation means image BG1, and a part of the characters "Press the button to stop the feeling meter!" The visibility is reduced compared to before the display 704 is displayed (the same figure (A)). As described above, in the present embodiment, by being covered by the effect display 704, a part of the first status notification image SG1 (meter), a part of the second operation means image BG1, and characters of "continuous hit!" Some are considered difficult for the player to view. On the other hand, the change in the display mode of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 (the change in which the filled portion gradually decreases) continues the display so as to be visible to the player.

  The timing shown to the figure (F) has shown the state which is performing presentation display 704 during the reception period of operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136 continuously. In this example, continuously hitting the chance button 136 even during the execution of the effect display 704 (even during a period in which a part of the first status notification image SG1 is difficult to be recognized by the effect display 704). Then, the scale of the first state notification image SG1 is increased (the meter is accumulated) to display the image, and the change of the display mode of the meter (change of the increase display) is continued.

  Note that the effect display 704 that makes the first state notification image SG1 difficult to view (hides) may determine the position to be displayed based on the result of the determination of success or failure, or the operation of the chance button 136 ( It may be determined according to the number of times of continuous hitting or the like, or may be displayed when the scale reaches the top of the first status notification image SG1. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  The timing shown to the same figure (G) has shown the state in which the effect display 704 was complete | finished during the reception period of operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136. FIG. The effect display 704 is not displayed (erased), and the second operation means image BG2, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 and the first status notification image SG1 are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time, the display of an image (for example, characters of “continuous hit!”) Prompting the operation (continuous hit) of the chance button 136 is continued above the second operation means image BG2.

Also in the present embodiment, each effect display 704 of FIG. 255 (Embodiment 25) to FIG. 258 (Embodiment 26) is applicable.
<Example 31 of image display of operation means>

  FIGS. 261 to 262 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the working example 31 in time series. In this embodiment, it is made difficult for the player to visually recognize the first status notification image SG1 with at least one of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 261 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special view display device 212 is finished, and the stop symbol is displayed, and in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 “Decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7”, which is a combination of designs, is stopped and displayed. Further, in the pending display area 700, here, two pending icons PI1 and PI2 of the special drawing 1 are shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 6B, the suspension of Special Figure 1 is digested, and the suspension of Special Figure 1 fluctuation game is reduced from 2 to 1, and symbol variation display is performed in the first Special Display 212. Is started, and a special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e blinks a circular figure.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, in the hold display area 700, a moving animation in which the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the digested hold is moved to the variable icon display area 702 has started.

  In the timing shown to the figure (d), the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 is started in the symbol display area 208a-208c of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. Further, in the hold display area 700, the movement animation is completed, and the hold icon PI1 corresponding to the remaining hold is displayed, and the change icon CI corresponding to the change game is displayed in the change icon display area 702.

  The timing shown in (e) of the figure indicates that the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 is in the state before the start, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced, for example, to the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. State notification image SG (first state notification image SG1, second state notification image SG2, third state) in such a manner that the substantially entire surface of the display area is divided into a plurality of (here, three) in the vertical direction. The notification image SG3) is displayed. The status notification image SG in this example is also a meter whose scale increases from the lower level to the upper level with the passage of time (or the operating state of the chance button 136), etc., and here the whole is filled with the same color (for example, white). It is done. In addition, characters such as “Press and hold the button and decide the character!” Are displayed on the upper end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, for example. At this timing, for example, the third state notification image SG3 on the right side is displayed on the rear surface of the special view fourth symbol display area 208e, the special view second symbol display area 208f, and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol. , The fourth state notification image SG3 (first display) by the fourth pattern 217, 218 (round figure (flashing of the circle shape, triangle figure) and the reduced display 708 of the decoration pattern (both are the second display) The visibility of at least a part of) is reduced (the player is considered to be difficult to see).

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows a state in which the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (here, the operation of the long press) has started. For example, on the front of the second state notification image SG2 in the center, A notification display 706 prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed. The notification display 706 for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 in the present embodiment is, for example, the display of the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the characters “long press!”. Further, since it is at the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, the entire first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state of being completely filled.

  That is, at this timing, in the second status notification image SG2 (first display), the visibility of at least a part of the second status notification image SG2 is lowered by the notification display 706 (second display). (It is considered difficult for the player to see). In addition, the third status notification image SG3 (first display) continues to be at least a part of the third status notification image SG3 by the fourth symbol 217 and 218 and the reduced display of the decorative symbol (second display). The visibility is reduced (the player has made it difficult to see).

  The timings shown in (g) and (h) of the figure show a state in which the time (reception period) has progressed from the start of the reception period of the chance button 136, and the first state notification image SG1 and the second state notification In each of the image SG2 and the third status notification image SG3, for example, an image in which the scale is sequentially increased from the lower side to the upper side is displayed. In this example, the scale is a divided image of a character (爺), a character (princess), and a character (殿). That is, in the first status notification image SG1, the character (爺), the second status notification image SG2 In the third state notification image SG3, the scale (divided image) of the character (SG) in the third state notification image SG3 is sequentially increased, and an image approaching the completed image is displayed. Also, in the first status notification image SG1, the second status notification image SG2, and the third status notification image SG3, the speed at which the scale increases is different, and the speed at which the scale increases in the middle changes (for example, the same) Although the increase of the scale of the third status notification image SG3 is fast in FIG. 6G, the increase of the scale of the first status notification image SG1 is fast in FIG. Not limited to this, at least one of the state notification images SG may be scaled at the same speed, or the speed may not be switched halfway. Further, with the progress of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image in which the filled portion gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure indicates that the acceptance period of the chance button 136 has further progressed, and the first status notification image SG1, the second status notification image SG2, and the third status notification image SG3 are shown. In each of them, an image in which the scale gradually increases is displayed. Here, the scale of the second status notification image SG2 (character (princess)) is larger than the first status notification image SG1 (character (爺)) and the third status notification image SG3 (character (殿)). The upper row is reached, and the character (princess) approaches the completed image. Further, with the progress of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 displays an image in which the filled portion gradually decreases.

  The timing shown in (j) of the figure further indicates the state at the end time of the reception period of the chance button 136. Here, in the first status notification image SG1 and the third status notification image SG3, the scale does not reach the uppermost end, and the completed images of the character (爺) and the character (殿) are not displayed, but the second state In the notification image SG2, the scale has reached the top, and the completed image of the character (princess) is displayed. In addition, with the end of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 has no filled portion of the first color, and an image filled with the entire second color (for example, white) is displayed It is done.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second status notification image SG2 (first display) is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706 (second display). The change in the display mode of the elapsed time notification image TG1 (the change in which the filled portion decreases) can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the third state notification image SG3 (first display) is also made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the reduced display (second display) of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol. In this example, the first state notification image SG1 (a part of the first display) does not overlap the second display at any timing, and is visible to the player. .

  The timing shown in (k) of the figure further shows the state after the end of the acceptance period of the chance button 136, and the notification display 706 (first operation means displayed on the front of the second state notification image SG2 The image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the display of the characters “long press!” Are erased, and the selection of the character (princess) is determined.

  The timings shown in the same figure (l) to the same figure (m) are in a state in which an effect indicating that the selection of the character (princess) is determined is being executed, and shown in the figures (n) to (o) The timing is a state in which the super reach effect by the determined character (princess) is performed.

  262 (p) (q) shows the state of the result of the yes or no judgment being detached at the timing after FIG. 261 (o), and the symbols of the symbol display areas 208a to 208 c of the decorative symbol display area 208 are shifted. The combination (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 5-decoration 6") is displayed in a fluctuating manner (the same figure (p)), and the stop display of the ornamental pattern is performed (the same figure (q)).

On the other hand, FIG. 262 (p ′) (q ′) shows that the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit at the timing after FIG. 261 (o), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display area 208. The symbol combination of the big hit (for example, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6") is displayed in a fluctuating manner (the same figure (p ')), and the stop display of the ornamental pattern is performed (the same figure (q')).
<Example 32 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 263 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 32 in time series. This embodiment has a configuration in which the scales of the meters of the first status notification image SG1, the second status notification image SG2 and the third status notification image SG3 are respectively increased similarly to the 32nd embodiment. There is.

  The timing shown in the figure (A) shows the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 261 (e), and shows the state before the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136.

  The timing shown to the figure (B) is the timing after the figure (A), and has shown the state in which the presentation display 704 is started before the start of the reception period of operation of the chance button 136. FIG. The effect display 704 is displayed with priority (on the front) over the first status notification image SG1, the second status notification image SG2, and the third status notification image SG3. In this example, the effect display 704 performs display (animation display) of group notice effect which is a kind of big hit notice effect of the special figure in the variation game, and the leading character is shown at the timing shown in FIG. (Hani) appears and executes moving animation moving from the right to the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A part of the third status notification image SG3 is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704 (character (Hani)), the fourth symbol, and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol.

  The timing shown in (C) of the figure is the same timing as the timing shown in (f) of FIG. 261 and shows a state where a reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (here, the operation of long press) has started. That is, on the front of the second state notification image SG2 at the center, a notification display 706 prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 (a first operation means image BG1, a first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a character of "long press!" Display). Also, the effect display 704 (an animation display of group notices) is continued, and a moving animation in which a plurality of characters (Hani) appear is executed following the leading character (Hani). Further, since it is at the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, the entire first elapsed time notification image TG1 is in a state of being completely filled. A part of the second status notification image SG2 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706 and the effect display 704 (character (Hani)), and a part of the third status notification image SG3 is the effect display 704. The (character (Hani)), the fourth symbol, and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol make it difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timing shown in (D) of the figure is the same timing as the timing shown in (g) of FIG. 261, and the notification display 706 continues on the front of the second status notification image SG2. In addition, the effect display 704 is also continued, and a large number of characters (Hani) appear one after another following the leading character (Hani) and execute moving animation from the right to the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 Do. The effect display 704 is executed prior to (in front of) the notification display 706. That is, a part of the second status notification image SG2 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706 displayed on the front, and the notification display 706 is displayed on the front to the player It is considered difficult to see. In addition, it is made difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the first status notification image SG3 by the effect display 704 (character (Hani)), and a portion of the third status notification image SG3 is the effect display 704 (character ( It is considered difficult for the player to visually recognize by the reduced display 708 of Hani), the fourth symbol, and the decorative symbol.

  The timing shown in (E) of the figure is the same timing as the timing shown in (h) of FIG. 261, and the notification display 706 continues on the front of the second status notification image SG2. Although the effect display 704 is also continued, the effect display 704 ends on the front of the third status notification image SG3 and the second status notification image SG2 because of the moving animation display. That is, a part of the third status notification image SG3 is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the reduced display 708 of the fourth symbol and the decoration symbol, and a part of the second status notification image SG2 is displayed by the notification display 706 Although it is considered difficult for the player to visually recognize, the notification display 706 can be visually recognized by the player because the animation moving on the front surface is finished. Further, a part of the first state notification image SG3 is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize by the effect display 704 (character (Hani)).

  The timing shown in (F) of the figure is the same timing as the timing shown in (i) of FIG. 261, and shows a state in which the effect display 704 is finished.

In the present embodiment, the notification display 706 for reducing the visibility of the second status notification image SG2 (first display) is considered to be difficult for the player to view by the effect display 704 displayed on the front. In addition, the effect display 704 (animation display) has a period in which changes in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 (changes in which the filled portion decreases) may be difficult for the player to visually recognize (FIG. There are also periods when it becomes visible (the same figure (C), (E), (F)). In this case, the effect display 704 is also an animation (image) that allows the player to visually recognize the change in the display mode of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 over the entire reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. Good.
<Example 33 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 264 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 33 in time series. In the present embodiment, a tutorial display (tutorial preview) 710 is performed in place of the effect display 704 (group preview display) of the embodiment 32 (FIG. 263).

  The timings shown in FIGS. (A) and (B) are the same as the timings shown in FIG. 261 (e), but in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. There is also an image of a tutorial display 710 (here, an image of a balloon and a pattern in which the meter suddenly accumulates) at a timing before the start of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 (here, the long press operation). The display of the character "" is performed. The tutorial display 710 is displayed on the front of the first status notification image SG1 and the second status notification image SG2 to reduce their visibility.

  The timing shown in FIG. 26C is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 261 (f), and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the notification display 706 displayed on the front of the second status notification image SG2 by the tutorial display 710. It is assumed.

The timing shown in the figure (D) is the same timing as the timing shown in the figure 261 (g), and the state where the tutorial display 710 is erased is shown. The tutorial display 710 in this embodiment can also be referred to as the effect display 704 or the notification display 706. Here, the tutorial display may indicate a display for explaining an effect (a notice, a character, or the like) performed on the gaming machine.
<Example 34 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 265 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the working example 34 in time series. In the present embodiment, the visibility of at least a part of the status notification image SG is reduced by the prefetch suspension icon 712.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (A) and (B) are the same timings as the timing shown in FIG. 261 (e), but the moving animation of the prefetch suspension icon 712 starts at the timing shown in FIG. It shows the state.

  The timings shown in FIGS. 26C and 26D are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 261F and 261G, but the moving animation of the prefetch suspension icon 712 continues, and FIG. At the timing, the prefetch suspension icon 712 is displayed on the front of a part of the first status notification image SG1, and it is considered that the player can not visually recognize a part of the first status notification image SG1.

The timing shown in (E) of the figure is the same timing as the timing shown in (h) of FIG. 261, but the standby animation of the prefetch suspension icon 712 continues and the first status notification image is displayed by the prefetch suspension icon 712 It is considered that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize part of SG1. In the same figure (D) and the same figure (E), the area for the first status notification image SG1 in which the readiness declines (is hidden) by the readiness hold icon 712 because the readiness hold icon 712 moves during standby. Is changing. The pre-reading suspension icon 712 in the present embodiment can also be referred to as the effect display 704 or the notification display 706.
<Example 35 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 266 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 35 in time series. In the present embodiment, the error display 714 reduces the visibility of at least a part of the status notification image SG.

  The timings shown in FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 261 (e) to (g) and (m), respectively. Here, as an example, a door open error is detected at the timing shown in FIG. 6A, and an error display 714 (for example, “error: door open!” Is displayed) is shown. . The error display 714 is displayed, for example, over the first status notification image SG1, the second status notification image SG2, and the third status notification image SG3.

The error display 714 is continuously displayed, for example, as long as the state of the door open error is not released as shown in FIG. The error display 714 in this embodiment can also be referred to as the effect display 704 or the notification display 706.
<Example 36 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 267 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the thirty-sixth embodiment in time series. In this embodiment, the alert notification display 718 reduces the visibility of at least a part of the status notification image SG.

  The timing shown in the figure (a) is a state in which the big hit end screen is displayed, and the timing shown in (b) is a display in which the decorative symbol is stopped before the game of the first variation after the definite variation big end is started. It shows the condition that has been

  The timing shown to the figure (c) is the state which is performing the alerting | reporting alerting | reporting display 718 on the front surface of the decorative symbol (here the symbol combination of "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" which is stopped and displayed). It shows. The alert notification display 718 is, for example, configured to move and display a character string for alerting the band-like background image.

  The timing shown in (d) and (e) of the figure indicates that the suspension game has been reduced to one (the number of suspension is reduced from 4 to 3), and the variation game of the special diagram 1 has started. In addition, the alert notification display 718 continues. At these timings, a warning notification display 718 is superimposed on the strip-shaped background image, and the characters “Please note that the prepaid card has been removed” are moved and displayed.

  The timing shown in (f) of the figure shows the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 261 (e) as the operation means image display, although the number of reservations is different. An alert notification display 718 is displayed on the front of the first status notification image SG1, the second status notification image SG2 and the third status notification image SG3, and the first status notification image SG1 and the second status notification image SG2 A part of the third state notification image SG3 is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize. In addition, a reduced display of the fourth symbol and the decorative symbol makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the third state notification image SG3.

  Although the number of reservations is different, the timing shown in (g) of the figure shows the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 261 (f) as the operation means image display. A notification display 706 is displayed on the front of the second status notification image SG2, and a warning notification display 718 is displayed on the front. A part of the second status notification image SG2 (eg, the characters "long press!") Is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706, and a part of the notification display 706 is the player by the alert notification display 718. It is considered difficult to see The first state notification image SG1 and the third state notification image SG3 are considered to be difficult to view, as in the case of FIG.

  Timings shown in (i) and (j) of the figure indicate the same state as the timings shown in (i) and (j) of FIG. A notification display 706 is displayed on the front of the second status notification image SG2, and a warning notification display 718 is displayed on the front. A part of the second status notification image SG2 (eg, the characters "long press!") Is made difficult for the player to visually recognize by the notification display 706, and a part of the notification display 706 is the player by the alert notification display 718. It is considered difficult to see The first state notification image SG1 and the third state notification image SG3 are considered to be difficult to view, as in the case of FIG.

  The timing shown in (k) of the figure shows a state in which the alert notification display 718 has been deleted, and the notification display 706 displayed on the front of the second status notification image SG2 becomes visible to the player. There is.

The alert notification display 718 in this embodiment can also be referred to as the effect display 704 or the notification display 706. In addition, the alert notification display 718 of the present embodiment repeatedly displays the movement display of “please be careful to forget the prepaid card” a predetermined number of times (for example, display until the movement display makes two turns) Control is continued, but may be displayed for a fixed time (for example, 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation). Although the alert notification display 718 in the present embodiment is performed before the start of fluctuation of the special drawing, it may be performed after the start of fluctuation of the special drawing. In the alert notification display 718, the gaming state before the big hit start is the special figure low certainty state, and the gaming state after the big hit end is shifted to the special figure high certainty high certainty state (certain change state). Only when the special figure high probability figure low certainty state (time reduction state) to the special figure low certainty figure low certainty state (normal state) when transitioning (ie 1st change after time reduction end) It may only be done. In addition, regardless of the gaming state, it may be performed after the big hit end.
Example 37 of Image Display of Operation Means

  FIGS. 268 to 269 are diagrams showing the display of the operation means of the embodiment 37 in time series. In the thirty-seventh embodiment, as a premise of the description of the thirty-eighth to forty-first embodiments, an example of image display of operation means in the case of performing normal operation means image display will be described. In the present embodiment, a reach effect of causing the player to operate the chance button 136 once to a plurality of times is executed. For example, the state notification image (here, the first state notification) is generated by plural operations of the chance button 136 The scale of the meter of the image SG1 and the second status notification image SG2) is changed.

  The timings shown in the figures (A) and (B) are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 250 (h) (i) although the position of the reduced display of the decorative symbol is different.

  The timing shown in the figure (C) is a first state notification image SG1 which displays the confrontation scene between the character (殿) and the sword australia character, and at the same time, indicates with the meter the degree of damage of the character (殿And a state in which the second state notification image SG2 is displayed. In addition, the characters “YOSHIMUNE” and “KENGOU” are displayed above the first status notification image SG1 and above the second status notification image SG2.

  The timing shown to the figure (D) shows the state which has displayed the operation alerting | reporting display 720 which alert | reports the operation timing of the chance button 136, etc. FIG. Here, in order to notify the number of times of operation of the chance button 136, the operation notification display 720 displays the characters "Chance is three times!" On the belt-like background image.

  The timing shown in (E) of the figure shows a state in which an operation notification display 720 is displayed to notify that the first operation of the chance button 136 corresponds to the attack of the character.

  The timing shown in (F) of the figure shows the state before the start of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and the first corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 on the front of the operation notification display 720. The first elapsed time notification image TG1 corresponding to the operation means image BG1 and the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed.

  The timing shown in (G) of the figure shows a state after the start of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 (during the reception period), and the scale of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 gradually decreases. Image is displayed.

  The timing shown in the figure (H) shows a state in which the first operation of the chance button 136 (attack of the character) has been performed. While temporarily erasing the operation notification display 720, the first operation means image BG1, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the second status notification image SG2 displays an image with a reduced scale (filled portion), Informing the decrease of the damage of the character.

  The respective timings shown in (I) to (L) of the figure are operation means image display corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136. The second operation of the chance button 136 is an operation corresponding to the counterattack of the sword character, with the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 displayed, as in FIG. The description is omitted because it is similar to FIG.

  The respective timings shown in (M) to (O) of the figure are states in which operation means image display corresponding to the third operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In the third operation of the chance button 136, the third operation means image BG3 and the third elapsed time notification image TG3 are displayed ((O) in the figure).

Each timing shown in FIGS. 269 (P) to (R) shows a state after the timing shown in FIG. 268 (O). The third operation is performed during the reception period of the third operation of the chance button 136 (FIG. (P)), and the character (() thereby wins (FIG. (Q) (R)), and the reduction display is performed. The displayed decorative symbols stop and display symbol combinations (for example, "decoration 7"-"decoration 7"-"decoration 7") that will be a big hit (the same figure (R)). In the present embodiment, it can be said that the operation notification display 720 is the effect display 704 or the notification display 706.
<Example 38 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 270 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means of the working example 38 in time series. This embodiment makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the first status notification image SG1 or the second status notification image SG2 of the normal operation means image display described in the 37th embodiment. It is a display example.

  The timing shown in the figure (C) is the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 268 (C).

  The timing shown to the figure (D) has shown the state as which the presentation display 704 was displayed on the front of 1st status alerting | reporting image SG1 of the figure (C). The effect display 704 in this example is a mission achievement display, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize a part of the first state notification image SG1 (a meter for displaying the damage of the character).

The timing shown in the figure (E) shows the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 268 (D), and the timing shown in the figure (F) shows a state where the effect display 704 is erased.
<Example 39 of Display of Operation Means Image>

  FIG. 271 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the working example 39 in time series. This embodiment makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the first status notification image SG1 or the second status notification image SG2 of the normal operation means image display described in the 37th embodiment. This is a display example, and the effect display 704 here is a hitting indication.

  The timing shown in the figure (C) is the same timing as the timing shown in FIG. 268 (C).

  The timing shown to the figure (D) has shown the state by which the effect display (strike method alerting | reporting display) 704 was displayed on the front surface of 1st status alerting | reporting image SG1 of the figure (C). Thereby, a part of the first status notification image SG1 (a meter for displaying the damage of the character (殿)) and a part of the second status notification image SG2 (a meter for displaying the damage of the character (殿)) It is considered difficult to be recognized by people.

  The timing shown in (E) of the figure shows the same timing as the timing shown in (D) of FIG. 268, and the timing shown in (R) of the figure shows the same timing as the timing shown in (R) of FIG. It is a thing. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the reach effect is finished, the effect display (the strike notification display) 704 is continued. The effect display (strike indication display) 704 is a predetermined time from the last sensor detection (for example, detection of passage of the game ball by the sensor of the common view starting opening 228) by the game ball hit in the area on the right side of the board The display is terminated (the display is erased), for example, when.

Note that the beating notification display may be displayed when the player operates (turns) the steering wheel to a certain position (a position where the game ball is hit to the right area). In that case, the display may be ended when the player operates the steering wheel to a certain position (a position where the game ball is hit to the left area). In addition, not only the effect display but also notification by sound may be performed simultaneously with the effect display.
<Example 40 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 272 is a diagram in which control unit image display of the working example 40 is shown in time series; In the present embodiment, at least a part of the first status notification image SG1 or the second status notification image SG2 of the normal operation means image display described in the thirty-seventh embodiment is lowered in visibility by the effect display 704 (game This is a display example that makes it difficult for the person to view. Although the display example in the case where the chance button 136 is operated three times has been described in the example 37, the present embodiment is a display example in the case where the chance button 136 is operated twice.

  The timing shown to the same figure (G) has shown the same state as the timing shown to FIG. 268 (G).

  The timing shown to the figure (H) has shown the state in which the chance button 136 was operated during the reception period of the 1st operation of the chance button 136, and, thereby, the presentation display 704 was displayed. The effect display 704 is, for example, a notice effect, and is displayed (cut in) so that the image of the panda is inserted into the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 here. As a result, at least a part of the first status notification image SG1 and the second status notification image SG2 is considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Further, the timing shown in (I) of the figure shows a state in which the effect display 704 is displayed on the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect display 704 is displayed on the rear surface of the special view 1 symbol display area 208e, the special view 2 symbol display area 208f, and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol, whereby the first status notification image SG1 and the second status notification image All of the state notification images SG2 are considered to be difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The timing shown to the same figure (J) shows the state by which the presentation display 704 was erase | eliminated (it complete | finished). In this state, the character (panda) is added next to the character (殿), and the display above the first status notification image SG1 (representation display) is also from "YOSHIMUNE" (see (G) in the figure) from "YOSHIMUNE & PANDA". Has changed.

  The timing shown in the figure (K) shows a state before the start (direct) of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and corresponds to the second operation of the chance button 136 on the front of the operation notification display 720. The second operation means image BG2 to be displayed and a second elapsed time notification image TG2 corresponding to the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  The timing shown in the figure (L) shows the state after the start of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (during the reception period), and the scale of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 gradually decreases Image is displayed.

The respective timings shown in (M) to (O) in the same figure show a state in which the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, and are shown in FIGS. 269 (Q) to (R) as the operation means image display. Since this is the same as the state of each timing, the description is omitted.
<Example 41 of image display of operation means>

  FIG. 273 is a diagram showing the display of the operation means according to the forty-first embodiment in time series. The present embodiment has a configuration for executing a rewind effect in addition to the normal operation means image display described in the thirty-seventh embodiment, and the first status notification image is displayed by a part of the rewind effect display. It is an example of a display which makes the visibility of at least one part of SG1 or 2nd status alerting | reporting image SG2 fall (it makes a player hard to recognize visually).

  The respective timings shown in the same figure (L) to the same figure (P) are in the same state as the respective timings shown in the figures 268 (L) to 268 (P).

  The timing shown in the figure (P) shows a state (state at the time of start of execution) in which the rewind effect is started to be executed based on, for example, the third operation of the chance button 136. At this timing, the pause mark and the characters "pause" are displayed as the effect display 704 above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the same image is displayed for a predetermined time, and the image is stopped. It looks like it's Even in this case, the variation display of the decorative symbol and the blinking of the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208e are continued.

  The timing shown to the same figure (Q) has shown the state in execution of rewind production | presentation. At this timing, the rewind mark and the characters "rewind" are displayed above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the effect display 704, and an image displayed at an earlier timing (image several frames earlier) It looks like it is displaying the rewind display. Here, the image displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 6O is redisplayed, and the third elapsed time notification image TG3 also displays an image that is entirely filled.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6R indicates a state in which the rewind effect is being performed, and the image displayed at the timing shown in FIG. In the timing (L) of the figure, the first status notification image SG1 and the second status notification image SG2 are displayed, and by the effect display 704 of the rewind effect, the entire first status notification image SG1 and A part of the second state notification image SG2 is hidden, and it is considered difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  In each of the timings shown in (S) to (V) in the figure, a rewind effect is subsequently executed, and as shown in (S) and (T) in the figure, the second operation means image BG2 and the second progress It shows a state in which the time notification image TG2 is displayed. Note that although the meter (scale) of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 is also displayed as being rewound in (S) and (T) in the same figure, it is actually outside the reception period of the chance button 136. Also in the period (S) to (V) of the same figure, the entire first state notification image SG1 and a part of the second state notification image SG2 are hidden by the effect display 704 of the rewind effect, and the game It is considered difficult to be recognized by people.

  The timing shown in the figure (W) shows the state at the end of the rewind effect, and the image displayed at the timing of FIG. 268 (B) is redisplayed, and the effect display 704 of the rewind display is displayed. It is displayed. The timing shown in the figure (X) shows the state after the end of the rewind effect. After this, the operation means image display of FIG. 268 (B) and thereafter is executed again.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which an image several frames before is re-displayed as a rewind effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a rewind movie (reverse playback movie) may be prepared and played back. Reproduction may be performed using a control movie which actually rewinds and reproduces a movie used in the operation means image display. During the rewinding effect, the operation means image and / or the elapsed time notification image may be hidden.

In the above embodiment, the effect display 704 may be changed to the notification display 706, or the notification display 706 may be changed to the effect display 704.
<Example 42 of image display of operation means>

  The outline and the other modification of the seventh embodiment will be described as a working example 42 with reference to FIGS. 274 to 281.

  FIG. 274 is a diagram for describing an overview of the seventh embodiment. The game console of the seventh embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100) is provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) as shown in the figure, and the display means is a first display (for example, first Means for displaying at least the state notification image SG1). The first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, a display according to the operation timing, a display according to the number of consecutive strokes, etc.), and the first display corresponds to the operation of the operation means Accordingly, the display mode of the first display is at least changeable (for example, increase display or decrease display capable of increasing the scale of the meter is possible) display, and the first display indicates the second state (for example, the player In the case where the advance notice effect display 704 is executed (at a time when it is advantageous) (eg, the state where the advance notice effect display 704 is not executed), the visibility is at least It is the display which becomes low.

  FIG. 275 is a schematic diagram for explaining the first display in FIG. (A) to (h) of the figure are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. In the first display, as shown in display A-0 ′ of FIG. 5C to display AN of FIG. 5F, the operation means is operated during a period such as an operation reception period. It is a display (effect display) in which a display mode changes. The display A-0 in FIG. 6 (b) shows an image etc. to be the first display, but shows a state in which the reception period of the operation has not started, and the display A in FIG. -N 'indicates a state in which the image or the like that was the first display is displayed but the operation acceptance period has ended. That is, the time here is, for example, after the start of the reception period of the operation means (chance button 136) (the same figure (c)) to the end of the reception period (except the end time) (the same figure (f)). It is a period, and when the operation means is operated during this period, the display in which the display mode changes is taken as the first display.

  In addition, the operation of the operation means is a single operation, a plurality of operations, a continuous hit, a long press, a noncontact operation detected by a proximity sensor etc. and a flick operation detected by a touch sensor etc. . In addition, the period during which the operation means is operated is the time from display A to display until it is deleted (before the start of the reception period shown in FIG. The time until the end may be set as the first display including the display before the start of the reception period shown in FIG. 6B and the display after the end of the reception period shown in FIG. It is also good.

  FIG. 276 is a diagram for describing the outline of the seventh embodiment from another viewpoint. The game console of the seventh embodiment (for example, the pachinko machine 100) is provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) as shown in the figure, and the display means is a first display (for example, first Means for displaying at least the elapsed time notification image TG1 and the first state notification image SG1). The first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136), and the first display is the establishment of a change condition (for example, the progress of the reception period of the operation for the chance button 136). Or, when there is a continuous hit of the chance button 136, the display mode of the first display is at least changeable (for example, the reduction display capable of reducing the scale of the meter can be displayed), and the first display is From the first state (e.g., a state in which the advance notice effect is not performed) in the second state (e.g., a state in which the advance notice effect that is advantageous to the player is performed) Is also a display at which the visibility is at least low, and the first display is a display that at least continues the change of the display mode of the first display when in the second state.

  FIG. 277 is a schematic diagram for explaining the first display in FIG. (A) to (h) of the figure are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The first display is a display (effect display) in which the display mode changes with the passage of time, as shown by display B-0 ′ in FIG. 5C to display BN in FIG. is there. The display b-0 in (b) in the figure shows a state in which the image or the like to be the first display is displayed, but the reception period of the operation has not started, and the display B in FIG. -N 'indicates a state in which the image or the like that was the first display is displayed but the operation acceptance period has ended. That is, the time here is, for example, after the start of the reception period of the operation means (chance button 136) (the same figure (c)) to the end of the reception period (except the end time) (the same figure (f)). A display in which the display mode changes according to the passage of time during this period is taken as a first display.

  In addition, the time is not limited to the period in which the operation means can be accepted, but the total time during which the operation means is actually operated (for example, the operation time when the chance button 136 is operated a plurality of times (including continuous hitting)) And the time during which the operation means is continuously operated (for example, long press). Also, the time from display B to display B may be taken as the time from the start of the reception period shown in (b) to the time after the end of the reception period shown in (g) in the figure). That is, the display before the start of the reception period shown in (b) in the figure and the display after the end of the reception period shown in (g) in the figure may be made as the first display.

  FIG. 278 is a diagram for describing a second display. (A) to (h) of the figure (A) are display examples of the operation means image display at a plurality of timings of the pachinko machine 100. In the figure, the second display is represented as display C, and the first display is represented as display A (see FIG. 275) or display B (see FIG. 276). Further, FIG. 7B is a view in which the display start timing of the second display (display C) is displayed as time elapses.

  In addition, the second display (display C) is, for example, effect display 704 (animation display, strike effect display, rewind effect display, tutorial display, pre-reading hold icon, error display, big hit finalized display, probability change state or time saving state And the like, the notification display 706, the fourth symbol, and the reduced display 708 of the decorative symbol.

  The display timing of the second display (display C) may be a period before the start of the first display (display A, display B) as shown in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6B, it may be simultaneously with the start of the display of the first display or after the start of the display of the first display. After the display start of the first display is a period immediately after the display start of the first display or a period of, for example, about 10 seconds at the longest after the display start of the first display. Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), it may be before the start of the reception period of the operation of the operation means (FIG. 275 (b), FIG. 277 (b)). Moreover, as shown to the figure (d)-(f), it may be during the reception period of operation of the operation means (during the period when the display mode of 1st display is changing). In addition, as shown in FIG. 27 (g), it may be after the reception period of the operation of the operation means is completed (FIG. 275 (g), FIG. 277 (g)). Alternatively, as shown in (h) of the figure, it may be after (or immediately after) erasing the first display. Further, the start timing of the second display is not limited to the same timing at all times, and one or more timings of (a) to (h) in the same drawing may be combined.

  On the other hand, the deletion timing of the second display may be a period before the start of the first display (display A, display B) as shown in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6B, it may be simultaneously with the start of the display of the first display or after the start of the display of the first display. After the display start of the first display is a period immediately after the display start of the first display or a period of, for example, about 10 seconds at the longest after the display start of the first display. Further, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), it may be before the start of the reception period of the operation of the operation means (FIG. 275 (b), FIG. 277 (b)). Moreover, as shown to the figure (d)-(f), it may be during the reception period of operation of the operation means (during the period when the display mode of 1st display is changing). In addition, as shown in FIG. 27 (g), it may be after the reception period of the operation of the operation means is completed (FIG. 275 (g), FIG. 277 (g)). Alternatively, as shown in (h) of the figure, it may be after (or immediately after) erasing the first display. Further, the erasing timing of the second display is not limited to the same timing at all times, and one or more timings of (a) to (h) in FIG.

  FIG. 279 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of the second display. In the second display, the display mode and the display position may not change during the display period, or at least one of the display mode and the display position may change.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the second display (display C) hides the entire first display (display A or display B) (the first display is difficult for the player to see). It may be

  Further, as shown in (b) of the figure, the second display (display C) hides at least a part of the first display (display A or display B) while the size (area) of the second display By changing (reducing), the area of the region hiding the first display may change (reduce).

  Further, as shown in (c) of the figure, the second display (display C) hides at least a part of the first display (display A or display B) while the size (area) of the second display By changing (expanding), the area of the region hiding the first display may be changed (expanded).

  Further, as shown in (d) of the figure, in the second display (display C), the display position of the second display moves while hiding at least a part of the first display (display A or display B). Thus, the position of the area for hiding the first display may change (move).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, the second display (display C) is a display position (or display of the second display) while hiding at least a part of the first display (display A or display B). The direction of movement may change (move) the area of the area to hide the first display, the area to hide, or the position to hide depending on the shape of the second display.

  Further, as shown in (f) of the figure, the second display (display C) changes its shape, and while hiding at least a part of the first display (display A or display B), The change in the shape of the second display may change (move) the area of the area to hide the first display, the area to hide, or the position to hide.

  The second display may be composed of any one of the combinations of (a) to (f), and one or more or all of the combinations of (a) to (f) of the same. It may be configured. Also, for example, in the combination of two or more or all of the figures (a) to (f), the change in the figure (c) after the change in the left figure → the middle figure → the right figure. In addition, the left figure of the figure (b) → figure (a) → the constitution which changes with the middle figure of the figure (b) is also included (the figure (a) The same applies to (f) of FIG.

  FIG. 280 is a diagram for explaining the first state and the second state of the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, in the second state, the first display (display A or display B) overlaps the second display (display C) (by being superimposed on the front surface), the first display In the second state, the visibility of the first display is lower than in the second state.

  That is, as shown in the left figure of the figure (a), in the first state, only the first display (Display A or Display B) is displayed, and the second display (Display C) is not displayed. In the second state, as shown in the middle view of the figure (a), superimposed on (in front of) the first display (Display A or Display B), the second display (Display C) is transparent. It is in the state displayed at a rate of 0%. Alternatively, the second state may be superimposed on (on the front of) the first display (Display A or Display B) as shown in the right of FIG. The display is made with less than 100% (e.g., 50% transmittance).

  Also, as shown in the left figure of the same figure (b), the first state is superimposed on (in front of) only the first display (Display A or Display B), and the second display (Display C) is The state is displayed small (for example, smaller than the first display), and the second state is superimposed on the first display as shown in FIG. The display is larger than the left in FIG.

  Also, as shown in the left figure of the figure (c), the first state is superimposed on (on the front of) the first display (Display A or Display B) and the second display (Display C) is The second state is a state in which a large transmittance (for example, a transmittance of 80%) is displayed, and the second state is a first display (display A or display B) as shown in FIG. And the second display (display C) is displayed with a small transmittance (for example, 30% or 50% of transmittance).

  Also, as shown in the left figure of the figure (d), the first state is a state in which the first display (display A or display B) and the second display (display C) do not overlap. In the second state, the second display (display C) is displayed superimposed on (on the front of) the first display (display A or display B) as shown in FIG. It is in the state of In this case, the transmittance of the second display in the second state is 0% or more (including the case where there is only a frame and no filling), and is less than 100%.

  Moreover, as shown in the left figure of the figure (e), the first state is a state in which only the first display (display A or display B) is displayed, and the second state is the same as e) A second display (display C) is displayed on the rear surface of the first display (display A or display B) as shown in the right figure, and the second display is the first display This is the case of similar colors. Even when the second display is displayed on the rear side of the first display, in the case where these are similar colors, the first display has low visibility.

  Also, as shown in the left figure of the figure (f), the first state is a state in which the second display (display C) is displayed on the rear surface of the first display (display A or display B). The second display is not the same color as the first display, and the second state is the back surface of the first display (Display A or Display B) as shown in the right of the figure (f). The second display (display C) is displayed on the second display, and the second display has the same color as the first display.

  It is to be noted that only one of (the change of) the display mode of the second display shown in FIGS. 279 (a) to (f) or a plurality of combinations of FIGS. 279 (a) to (f) can be shown in FIG. Only one of the first state and the second state shown in) to (f), or a plurality of combinations of FIGS. 280 (a) to (f) may be applied to each other.

  FIG. 281 shows the first status notification image SG1, the second status notification image SG2, the third status notification image SG3, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, which are described as meters (gauges) in the above embodiment. It is a figure which shows other forms, such as 2nd elapsed time alerting | reporting image TG2, and 3rd elapsed time alerting | reporting image TG3.

  As shown in the figures (a) to (a ′ ′), the meter is not limited to an image consisting of one continuous region, but is composed of a plurality of images (ticks M) separated from each other, and the scale group MG 1 It may constitute two meters. In that case, as shown in FIG. 6A, all the divisions M may have the same shape, or as shown in FIG. 6B, the divisions M may have only the same shape. All the graduations M may have different shapes as shown in FIG. In the meter, the maximum number of graduations is simultaneously displayed as a graduation group MG, and the display mode (for example, the filling color etc.) of each graduation M sequentially changes (is filled) over time. The configuration may be such that each scale M is sequentially displayed as time passes (the number of scale M increases).

  The figure (b) is an example of the meter which the number of the graduations M increases. In this example, the scale M drops from above as time passes, and is accumulated in the meter. However, as shown in FIG. 280, due to a change in transmittance of each scale, the meter May be filled in.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6C, the meter is not limited to a configuration in which the length and the area are stacked and increased (having a shape as a so-called meter or gauge), and may be increased from the inner side to the outer side. It is sufficient that the configuration of the entire meter can be visually recognized so as to expand, contract, or expand by the change.

  Moreover, although the case where a meter increases was demonstrated to the example here, it is applicable similarly about the structure which a meter reduces.

  In conventional gaming machines, it has been desired to further enhance the interest of games.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a game console capable of improving the interest of a player, and to provide a game console according to the present invention. According to this, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  That is, as described above, the game console (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the above embodiment includes display means (for example, decoration symbol display device 208) and operation means (for example, chance button 136) The display unit is capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, the first status notification image SG1), and the first display relates to the operation of the operation unit. The display (for example, the display according to the operated timing, the display according to the number of consecutive strokes, etc.), the first display indicates that the display mode of the first display is at least according to the operation of the operation means A changeable indication (e.g. a decreasing indication or an increasing indication of the scale of the meter), said first indication being in a second state (e.g. a state of execution of a "hot" effect) ,first State (e.g., "HOT" non-execution state of the effect) visibility than is at least lower display, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by the display. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to urge the player to operate the operation means (chance button 136) (operation at a timing that is advantageous to the player, continuous hitting, etc.). In addition, as the visibility of the first display may be lowered, the line of sight of the player may be able to be concentrated on the display means. Also, in some cases, it is possible to direct the player's line of sight around the first display, and to urge the player to operate the operation means.

  The "display regarding the operation of the operation means" means the following display.

(A) It may be a "display including a display prompting the operation of the operation means".

(B) It may be a “display including a display indicating that the operation of the operation means is received”.

(C) It may be a “display including a display indicating that the effect to operate the operation means is performed (or performed)”.

(D) It may be a display of only one of the above (a) to (c) or a combination of two or more (two or all).

(E) It may be a display that does not include the display of one or two or more combinations (two or all) of the above ((a) to (c).

  In addition, “the visibility is at least lowered” may indicate that “at least a part or all of the first display is at least difficult to be viewed in the second state”. . Alternatively, it may indicate that "when in the second state, at least a part or all of the first display is at least invisible."

  Also, "in the case where the first display is in the second state, the visibility is at least lower than that in the first state" means "at least a part or all of the first display. It may indicate that the visibility is at least low. Alternatively, it may indicate that "the visibility of at least part or all of two or more of the plurality of displays is lowered". The “two or more displays” may indicate “two or more displays including the first display”.

  In addition, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, effect display 704), and in the second state, at least a part of the second display is the first display. It may be in a state of overlapping at least a part of

  According to such a configuration, the second display may be made noticeable.

  The “state in which at least a part of the second display overlaps at least a part of the first display” means the following state.

(A) It may indicate that "at least a part of the second display is displayed prior to at least a part of the first display".

(B) “at least a part of the second display is displayed on the front side (front side) than at least a part of the first display” (for example, “on the layer front side where the first display is displayed It may indicate "displayed on a layer" or "displayed before the first display in the same layer". Here, the “front side” may indicate the “player (closer to) side”.

(C) It may indicate that "at least a part of the second display is displayed overlapping (overlapping) with at least a part of the first display".

(D) The state of only one of the above (a) to (c) or a combination of two or more (two or all) may be indicated.

(E) It may be a state which does not include the display of one or two or more combinations (two or all) of the above (a) to (c).

  In addition, the first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, the player may feel discomfort and be able to concentrate more on the game because the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display. is there.

  Note that the state in which the second display is not displayed and the second display are displayed in the state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap with at least a part of the first display. But includes any of the states in which the first display is not hidden. That is, "a state where at least a part of the second display does not overlap at least a part of the first display" means the following state.

(A) "a state in which the second display is not displayed on the display means" may be shown.

(B) "a part of the second display may be displayed in a position not overlapping with a part or all of the first display".

(C) "a state in which all of the second display is displayed so as not to overlap with part or all of the first state" may be shown.

(D) One or two or more (two or all) of the above (a) to (c) may not be shown.

  Further, the first display is a display including at least a meter display (for example, the first state notification image SG1), and the meter display has at least a display mode of the meter display according to the operation of the operation means. It may be a changeable display.

  According to such a configuration, by lowering the visibility of the meter display, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the operating condition of the operating means and to prompt the operation of the operating means.

  The game console may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the second display may be an effect display (for example, effect display 704).

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to make the effect display noticeable.

  Further, at least a part of the first display overlapping the second display may be an image to be non-displayed, and the display means may not draw the image to be non-displayed.

  Such a configuration may reduce the processing load of drawing.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the above embodiment is a game console provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) and operation means (for example, chance button 136) The display unit is a unit capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1, a first status notification image SG1), and the first display is the operation unit The display related to the operation of (for example, the reception period of the operation, the display regarding the state of the operation), the first display is the establishment of the change condition (for example, the start of the reception period of the operation, the reception period of the operation The display mode of the first display is at least changeable display (for example, decrease display or increase display of the scale of the meter) when there is operation of the operation means, continuous hitting or long press of the operation means, etc. Previous When the first display is in the second state (for example, the execution state of the “hot” effect), the first display is more visible than the first state (eg, the non-execution state of the “hot” effect). The first display is a display for at least continuing the change of the display mode of the first display when in the second state. It is a stand.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by the display. Further, in some cases, it is possible to cause the player to not miss the fact that the line of sight is induced to a hot notice and the reception time of the operation of the operation means is short. In addition, as the visibility of the first display may be lowered, the line of sight of the player may be able to be concentrated on the display means. Also, in some cases, it is possible to direct the player's line of sight around the first display, and to urge the player to operate the operation means.

  Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, an effect display 704, a notification display 706, etc.), and the second state means at least a part of the second display. May be in a state of overlapping at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, the second display may be made noticeable.

  In addition, the first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display does not overlap at least a part of the first display.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and concentrate more on the game because there is a state in which the second displays do not overlap.

  Further, the first display may be a display including at least meter display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the first state notification image SG1).

  According to such a configuration, by lowering the visibility of the meter display, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the changing state of the meter display and to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  The second display may be an effect display (for example, the effect display 704, the notification display 706, and the like).

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to make the effect display noticeable.

  Further, the game console is a pachinko machine or a slot machine, and the display mode of the first display is a display mode which can be at least changed from the first mode to the second mode, and the requirement that the change condition is satisfied. The term may be a requirement including at least a lapse of a first time from the display of the first aspect.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to make the progress of the reception time of the operation incomprehensible and to urge the operation of the operation means more by lowering the visibility of the change of the change mode due to the passage of time.

  Further, at least a part of the first display overlapping the second display may be an image to be non-displayed, and the display means may not draw the image to be non-displayed.

  Such a configuration may reduce the processing load of drawing.

  In addition, the first region in the first display may be a region having lower visibility than the first state when in the second state.

  In addition, the second region in the first display may be a region having higher visibility than the first region when in the second state.

  The first area and the second area described above may be the following areas.

(A) The first area may be an area including a part (for example, a part of a meter display) or the whole of the area in which the display mode changes according to the operation of the operation means. Here, the meter (display) refers to a display (for example, the first status notification image SG1 or the first elapsed time notification image TG1) in which the scale is increased or decreased depending on the elapsed time or the change of the state.

(B) The first area may be an area that does not include part or all of the area in which the display mode changes according to the operation of the operation means.

(C) The first area may be an area including a part (for example, a part of a button image) or the whole of the area in which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation means. Here, the button image means an operation means (an image imitating the chance button 136 (for example, the first operation means image BG1 or the like).

(D) The first area may be an area that does not include part or all of the area in which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation means.

(E) The first region may have a combination of two or more of the above (a) to (d). For example, (a) and (c), (a) and (d), (b) and (c) can be combined.

(A ′) The second area may be an area including a part (for example, a part of a meter display) or the whole of the area in which the display mode changes according to the operation of the operation means.

(B ') The second area may be an area which does not include part or all of the area in which the display mode changes in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

(C ') The second area may be an area including a part (for example, a part of a button image) or the whole of the area in which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation means.

(D ') The second area may be an area that does not include part or all of the area in which the display mode does not change according to the operation of the operation means.

(E ') The second region may have a configuration in which two or more (or all) of the above (a') to (d ') are combined. For example, (a ') and (c'), (a ') and (d'), (b ') and (c') can be combined.

  The second display may be a display relating to a game. In addition, as an example of “display regarding game”, error display, operation request notification, alert display, effect display, notice display, original mode display (menu display, mission display, volume / brightness adjustment display), demonstration display, power on Display (power on, power on, etc.), etc. may be mentioned.

  Further, the display unit may not display at least a part of the first display (for example, a button image) at least when the reception of the operation of the operation unit is finished.

  The display means may be means for not displaying a part of the first display when the operation of the operation means has been accepted. Here, the “part of the first display” may have the following configuration.

(A) It may be a display showing all or part of a button image (such as the first operation means image BG1).

(B) A display showing all or part of the meter display (such as the first status notification image SG1 or the first elapsed time notification image TG1) may be displayed.

(C) It may be a display showing all or part of a display prompting an operation (for example, character display etc.).

(D) It may be a combination of two or more or all of the above (a) to (c).

(E) Only one display of the above (a) to (c) may be shown.

  Further, the display means may be means for not displaying the entire first display when acceptance of the operation of the operation means is completed. Here, “the entire first display” may have the following configuration.

(A) A display indicating a meter display (such as the first status notification image SG1 or the first elapsed time notification image TG1) may be used.

(B) A plurality of displays including a meter display (for example, a button image or a display prompting an operation (for example, character display)) may be shown.

  In addition, the display means is means for not displaying at least a part of the first display (for example, a button image or the like) at least when the second time has elapsed since the reception of the operation of the operation means is started. May be

  Further, the display means may continuously display part or all of the first display when the acceptance of the operation means is finished.

  Further, the display means may be means for continuously displaying the meter display when the reception of the operation of the operation means is finished. The display means continues to display the meter display when the acceptance of the operation means is finished, and the meter display is performed when the deletion condition of the meter display is satisfied (for example, the end of the effect display). The display of may be terminated.

  In addition, the display mode of the first display may be changeable from the first mode to the second mode. The first display aspect may be changed from the first aspect to the third aspect, and may be changeable from the third aspect to the second aspect. That is, the invention is not limited to the change from the first aspect to the second aspect, and may be one that changes from the first aspect to the second aspect via other plural aspects (third aspect). .

  Moreover, the following are mentioned as "effect display" in the above-mentioned embodiment. For example, effect display of notice display system (prefetching (hold icon, notice effect, decoration pattern, etc.) effect display, effect display of the variation (hold icon, notice effect, decoration pattern, etc.), non notice system (tutorial, demo, user mode, It is an effect indication of the hold indication, the fourth symbol, the indication about the big hit, the decoration symbol etc. Also, other notice effect indication, the indication indication about the big hit, the user mode indication, the demonstration display, the tutorial indication, the effect using the decoration symbol The display may be an effect display using a hold icon or the like.

  In addition, with regard to the transmittance of the second display described using FIG. 280, the transmittance of at least part or all of the second display may not be 100%.

  Also, the transmittance of at least part or all of the second display may not be 0% (may be transmitted).

  Moreover, the transmittance of at least part or all of the second display may be 0% (may not be transmitted).

  Further, the transmittance of at least a part of the second display may be a first value, and the “first value” may be more than 0% and less than 100%.

  In addition, the transmittance of at least part or all of the second display may change stepwise, and the “gradient change” means that the transmittance has a first value, a second value, and a third value. The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different values.

  Also, the transmittance of at least part or all of the second display may change continuously, and the “continuous change” means that the transmittance passes from the first value to the second value. Change to a third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value may be different values.

  Also, the transmittance of at least part or all of the second display may be changed only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  In addition, regarding the transmittance of the first display described using FIG. 280, the transmittance of at least part or all of the first display may not be 100%.

  In addition, the transmittance of at least part or all of the first display may not be 0% (may be transmitted).

  Also, the transmittance of at least part or all of the first display may be 0% (may not be transmitted).

  In addition, the transmittance of at least a part of the first display may be a first value, and the “first value” may be more than 0% and less than 100%.

  In addition, the transmittance of at least part or all of the first display may change stepwise, and the “gradient change” means that the transmittance has a first value, a second value, and a third value. The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different values.

  Also, the transmittance of at least part or all of the first display may change continuously, and the “continuous change” means that the transmittance passes from the first value to the second value. Change to a third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value may be different values.

  Also, the transmittance of at least part or all of the first display may be changed only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.

  In the above embodiment, the first display (or the second display) may at least include a display imitating the operation means. Here, “the one that at least includes the display imitating the operation means” may indicate only the display imitating the operation means (for example, the first operation means image BG1 or the like). In addition, the term “display at least including a display imitating an operation means” refers to a display displayed in a period overlapping with a period in which a display imitating the operation means and a display imitating the operation means are displayed (for example, a first Both a meter (or a gauge) indicating a reception period of an operation such as the elapsed time notification image TG1 or the like, a display by characters such as “press a button!”, An effect, etc. may be shown.

  Also, the first display (or the second display) may at least include a notification prompting the user to operate the operation means. Here, "the notification at least including a notice prompting the operation of the operation means" is only a notice prompting the operation of the operation means (for example, a character such as "press a button!" Or a display by an image or animation for operating a button) May be indicated. In addition, a period overlapping a period in which a notification prompting the operation of the operation means (for example, a character such as "press a button!" Or an image or animation display for operating the button or the like) and a notification prompting the operation of the operation means are displayed May indicate both of the display (background image, effect, meter (gauge), etc.) displayed on the screen.

  The first display (or the second display) may be displayable when at least display control is performed. Here, "display control" may be executed at least when a condition including operation of the operation means is satisfied. Moreover, "display control" may be displayed when a command is transmitted from the second control means (the first sub control unit or the second sub control unit).

  Further, in the above embodiment, an example described as "display with high visibility" may be applied to "display with low visibility", and an example described as "display with low visibility" is " The present invention may be applied to “display with high visibility”.

  Further, in the above embodiment, "at least a part" means that it may be only a part or whole (all).

  Further, the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments can be combined with other embodiments for each configuration in each of the embodiments.

  In the seventh embodiment, the requirement that the change condition is satisfied is a requirement including at least the operation of the operating means. Here, the “operation of the operating means” may have the following configuration.

(A) "It may be indicated that the operation means has been operated by the detection means (the sensor of the operation means)."

(B) It may indicate that "the command has been transmitted to the first (second) secondary control unit by the detection unit".

(C) It may indicate that the first (second) secondary control unit has received the command transmitted by the detection means.

(D) Any one or two or more (two or all) of the above (a) to (c) may be shown.

  Further, the change of the first display mode may have the following configuration. That is, it may be changed from the first aspect to the second aspect by one operation of the operation means. Moreover, it may change from a 1st aspect to a 2nd aspect by having operated the operation means in multiple times. In addition, it may be changed from the first mode to the second mode depending on the total time during which the operating means is continuously operated (the operating means may release the hand one time). In addition, it may be changed from the first mode to the second mode depending on the time during which the operating means is operated continuously (it ends when the hand is released from the operating means).

  In the first display, the display mode of the first display may be at least changeable according to the operation of the operation means, and the first display may be changed only when the change condition of the display mode is satisfied. The display mode of one display may be changed, or the display mode of the first display may not be changed when the change condition of the display mode is not satisfied.

  The first display may include a portion that does not change the display mode of the first display according to the operation of the operation means.

  In addition, the first display or the second display indicates the start display or the end display of the benefit game (for example, AT), the remaining number display of the benefit game (for example, the remaining number display that is always displayed, A game in which a bonus game is performed by displaying one or more character displays such as 20G, for example, by adding the number of bonus games (for example, displaying the number of bonus games when the number of remaining games is reduced) It may be an effect indicating that the number has increased, or the like, or may be a pressing order notification etc. that notifies the pressing order of the stop button. Here, the AT indicates an AT (assist time) gaming state, and may be a period during which a notification (for example, pressing order notification) for assisting the operation of the player is executed.

  In addition, the display means may be configured by the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the display means may execute the first display only when the first display condition is satisfied, and the second display may be performed only when the second display condition is satisfied. The first display may be displayed, the second display may always be displayed, or the first display and the second display may be displayed. . In addition, the operation means may be configured by the chance button 136.

  Note that a plurality of display means may be provided. In that case, the first display means of the plurality of display means may be a special symbol display device, and the second display means may be a decorative symbol display device.

  The first display means may be a first decorative symbol display device, and the second display means may be a second decorative symbol display device. In that case, the first decorative symbol display device or the second decorative symbol display device may correspond to the decorative symbol display device 208.

At least one or both of the first display means and the second display means may be provided on the movable means, and only one may be provided on the movable means.

The first display means may be provided on the front side of the second display means.

  Further, the first display means displays a first display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 etc.), and the second display means displays a second display (for example, effect display 704 etc.) In the present embodiment, the first display displayed on the first display means is overlapped by the second display displayed on the second display means and the visibility is lowered. Is applicable.

  In addition, it overlaps with (on the front surface of) a third display (for example, a background image or an effect display (including a second display)), and the first display (first operation means image BG1 and / or the first The first display is erased according to the operation of the chance button 136 when the third display is difficult for the player to visually recognize by displaying the elapsed time notification image TG1 etc. of 1). And the third display may be visible to the player.

  In addition, during display of the operation means image and the elapsed time notification image (during the reception period of the operation means), when the operation means is operated by the player, the elapsed time notification image is the same image as the reception period end time (remaining time It may be deleted after displaying 0 seconds). Alternatively, the operation means image may be deleted after the progress notification image is deleted first.

  In addition, the game console (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the above embodiment is a game console provided with an operating means (for example, chance button 136) and a display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) The display unit can display at least a first display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in FIGS. 132 and 133, the elapsed time notification image in FIG. 144, or the remaining time notification image). The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, an effect accompanying the spread map display of FIG. 132, a reserved icon PI3 of FIG. 133, etc.); Is a display related to the operation means, and the first display is a display capable of at least changing the display mode according to the passage of time, and the display mode in the first display The change is a change in which in the second state, the visibility is at least lower than in the first state, the second state means that at least a part of the second display is the first state. It is a state in which at least a part of the display is overlapped.

  Further, the first state may be a state in which at least the second display is not displayed on the display means.

  The first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display is displayed at a position overlapping with at least a part of the first display.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to focus on the game by causing the player to focus on the overlapping first display and second display. Further, there are cases where it is possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, in some cases, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display regarding the operation means whose display mode changes as time passes, and to further urge the player to operate the game means. In addition, it is possible to make the player look carefully at the display means and to concentrate on the game, and it may be possible to judge the necessity of the operation and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the first display is a display including at least a first image (for example, the first operation means image BG1 of FIG. 133), and the first display is a third image (for example, FIG. 133 is a display including at least a first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the second display is a display including at least a second image (for example, the hold icon PI3 in FIG. 133), The third image is a display capable of at least changing the display mode according to the passage of time, and the second state is a state in which the second image overlaps the third image. It may be

  Such a configuration may allow the player to focus on the game by focusing on the overlapping second and third images. Further, there are cases where it is possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In addition, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the third image related to the operating means whose display mode changes as time passes, and to further urge the player to operate the gaming means. In addition, it is possible to make the player look carefully at the display means and to concentrate on the game, and it may be possible to judge the necessity of the operation and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the second image may be an image that overlaps at least a part of the third image when in the second state.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the third image relating to the operation means whose display mode changes particularly as time passes, in comparison with the first image, and the player can play the game It may be possible to further prompt the operation of the means. In addition, it is possible to make the player carefully look at the display means from the difference in the visual aspect of the first image and the third image, to concentrate on the game, and to judge the necessity of the operation. It may be possible to improve the interest.

  In addition, the second display may be a display that overlaps only a part of the first display when in the second state.

  Further, at least a part of the first display may be a display which is at least difficult to visually recognize in the second state.

  With such a configuration, the player is made to differ in the visual aspect of a part of the first display (overlapping area) and the other area (the non-overlapping area), and It may be possible to prompt the operation. In addition, it is possible to make the player look carefully at the display means from the difference in the first display visual mode, to concentrate on the game, and to judge the necessity of the operation, thereby improving the interest of the game. There are times when you can.

  Further, the display means may be means for not displaying at least the first display when acceptance of the operation of the operation means is finished.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the above embodiment can execute at least a plurality of types of displays and operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate. A game console provided with various display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), at least one of the plurality of types of display being a first type of display (for example, the first of FIG. 130) An operation means image BG1 and a first elapsed time notification image TG1), and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a display of a second type (for example, the fluctuation icon CI of FIG. 130), The first type of display is a display related to the operation means, and the first type of display is configured to be at least displayable when the operation of the operation means is received. The first type of display is a display including at least a first display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 of FIG. 130), and the first type of display is a second display For example, it is a display including at least the first elapsed time notification image TG1) in FIG. 130, and the second display can change the display mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time. The second type of display is a display including at least a third display (for example, the fluctuation icon CI of FIG. 130), and the second type of display is a presentation of effect, The third display is displayed prior to the first display, and the third display is displayed prior to the second display, and the second display is displayed. The start position of the display of The third display is displayed preferentially, which makes it more difficult for the player to visually recognize the display than the third display is not displayed, and the change of the display mode of the second display is the third display. The third display is displayed with priority over the second display, which makes it more difficult for the player to visually recognize the third display, and the first type of display is the second display. And the second type of display may be at least capable of being displayed on the display means prior to the first type of display. Good.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying at least one of the first type of display and the second type of display.

  Further, the first display may include a display imitating the operation means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In the case where the second display (part of the elapsed time notification image TG1) notifies the remaining time of the reception period of the operation means by the decrease display from the start position, the second display start position is The third display (effect display) is displayed with priority over the display of the second display, which makes it more difficult for the player to visually recognize the third display than when the third display is not displayed. By making the change of the display mode toward the end position preferentially displayed by the third display over the second display, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display than the third display. In some cases, it may be difficult to visually recognize that the user is in the reception period of the operation of the operation means, and the player may be further urged to operate the game means. In addition, there are cases where it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the display mode hidden and to concentrate on the game. In addition, to make it difficult to visually recognize in the third display the display mode of the second display start position (at the start of receiving the operation) and the change in the display mode from the second display start position to the end position. In addition to being able to make the player look carefully at the display means and concentrating on the game, it may be possible to judge the necessity of the operation and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the effect display may include at least a big hit notice.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player look carefully at the display means in case of big hit advance notice, to concentrate on the game, and to judge the necessity of the operation, and to improve the interest of the game. There are times when you can.

  Further, the display unit may not display at least the display of the first type when the reception of the operation of the operation unit is finished.

The following is a supplementary note including the above description. The following description can be appropriately applied to the game consoles described in this specification including the first to seventh embodiments.
(Appendix H1)

A first entrance through which game balls can enter, start information deriving means for deriving start information based on the game ball entering the first entrance, and start information acquired by the start information acquisition means The second entrance where the predetermined profit is generated based on the entrance of the game ball, the effect means which performs the predetermined effect according to the success or failure judgment result of the success or failure judgment means which performs the success or failure judgment based on And the effect means changes the predetermined effect based on the game ball entering the second entrance during the predetermined effect.
(Appendix H2)

A game stand according to claim H1, further comprising: a profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player based on the game ball having entered the second entrance, wherein the effect means comprises: A game console characterized by performing a specific effect affecting the predetermined effect based on the game ball entering the second entrance during the effect of.
(Appendix H3)

The game stand according to claim H1 or H2, wherein the effect means includes display means for performing a predetermined display, and the display means is for the game ball to enter the second entrance during the predetermined effect. A game console characterized by covering a part of a display effect based on the predetermined effect with a part of a display effect based on the specific effect based on the predetermined effect.
(Appendix H4)

The game console according to any one of appendices H1 to H3, wherein the first entrance and the second entrance are the second entry of the game ball having entered the first entry. A game console characterized in that it is disposed at a position where it can enter the mouth.
(Appendix H5)

It is a game stand according to appendix H2, and provided with a winning device that is advantageous to a player based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, and the specific effect is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition. A game console characterized in that it is an effect that suggests that.
(Appendix H6)

A game value giving means for giving a game value to a player when there is a fulfillment of a game value giving condition, a first approach area where the game value giving condition is not satisfied even if a game ball passes, and a game ball A second entry area in which the game value giving condition is established based on the entry of the ball, and a propriety determination means capable of executing a propriety determination when there is a formation of a propriety determination condition; At least including notification means capable of stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result after performing variable display of symbols, and image display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and configured separately from the notification means In the gaming table provided with a rendering means and a rendering control means capable of controlling the rendering means, the acceptance determination condition includes at least the passage of the gaming ball to the first entry area. Yes, the effect The control means is capable of causing the image display means to display a symbol variation display for stopping display of a symbol corresponding to the result of the acceptance or rejection determination by the acceptance or rejection determination means after starting the variation display of the symbol. In the case of the second entering area, at least the game ball can be entered when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result, and the effect control means generates a big hit It is possible to make the effect means execute at least a jackpot notice for notifying the player whether or not the jackpot is generated under at least one condition that the game ball enters the second entry area. The effect control means is configured to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the symbol variation display while the symbol variation display is displayed by the image display means. The big hit notice can be made at least by the effect means, and at least a part of the symbol change display by the image display means is difficult for the player to visually recognize the symbol change display by the notification means. A game console characterized by being easily visible to the player during the period.
(Appendix H7)

The gaming table according to appendix H6, wherein the effect control means is configured to make the big hit advance notice so that at least a part of the symbol becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the player while the symbol display is stopped by the image display means. It is possible to make the effect means perform at least, and the stop display of the symbol by the notification means is the player even if at least a part of the stop display of the symbol by the image display means is difficult to see from the player, It is an easy-to-see thing from, The game stand characterized by the above.
(Appendix H8)

It is a game stand according to supplementary note H6 or H7, and the effect control means is a symbol when the game ball enters the second entry area while the image display means is displaying the symbol variation display. It is possible to cause the effect means to at least produce effects in which the player does not make it difficult to view the variable display, and the big hit advance is a game characterized in that the effect does not make it difficult for the player to see the effects. Stand.
(Appendix H9)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H6 to H8, wherein the judgment result includes the first judgment result and the second judgment result, and the notification means is the judgment result. If the first judgment result is the first judgment result, the first symbol form can be stopped and displayed, and if the second judgment result shows the second judgment result, the first symbol form A game console characterized by being able to stop and display different second symbol modes.
(Appendix H10)

  A game stand according to any one of appendices H6 to H9, wherein the effect means is at least one of a first position not covering the symbol variation display by the image display means from the front, and the symbol variation display. The movable body is movable to a plurality of positions including a second position covering the unit from the front, and the effect control means moves the movable body from the first position to the second position. A game console characterized in that the movable body can be made to give a big hit notice.

Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the gaming machines described in the other appendices and the gaming machines described in this specification.
(Appendix H11)

  If the game ball enters a predetermined entry area including at least a first entry area among a plurality of entry areas into which the game ball can enter and the plurality of entry areas, at least a hit / fail judgment can be made. When the gaming ball enters a second entry area different from the predetermined entry area among the plurality of entry areas, at least the auxiliary hit determination means capable of performing the auxiliary hit / nondetermination, and the variation of the symbol After performing the display, after performing the first notification means capable of executing at least the first symbol variation display for stopping and displaying the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the above-mentioned assistance propriety determination and after performing the symbol variation display, A second notification means capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the auxiliary success or failure determination, a rendering means at least including the second notification means, and A game console comprising effect control means capable of controlling an exit means, and time shortening control means capable of controlling at least a short time state and a non-time short state in which the game ball easily enters at least the first entry area, The first entry area is a game ball after the first symbol variation display is performed and the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the specific assistance propriety determination among the results of the qualification determination is stopped and displayed. Is capable of entering, and the effect control means is capable of causing the effect means to at least execute a predetermined effect relating to the result of the pass / fail determination and the second symbol variation display. The effect control means executes at least the predetermined effect on the effect means so that at least a part of the second symbol change indication becomes difficult to visually recognize during the predetermined period of execution of the second symbol change indication. Let it go The first symbol variation display is easy to see even during the predetermined period, and the second symbol variation display is executed in the non-short time state rather than the short time state. A game stand characterized by being easy to be played.

The first approach area referred to here is, for example, electric chew, and the predetermined approach area is, for example, the second special view start port 232 (electric chew) and the first special view start port 230. The area is, for example, a common drawing start port 228, and the first symbol variation display is, for example, a symbol fluctuation display of a common drawing performed by the common drawing display device 210 controlled by the main control unit 300, the second symbol variation The display is, for example, a decorative symbol variation display of a common drawing performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub control units 400 and 500.
(Appendix H12)

  The game stand according to appendix H11, wherein the second notification means is an image display means, and the predetermined effect is executable at least by the image display means, the image display means Is at least a predetermined display area capable of executing the second symbol variation display, and the effect control means is configured to at least perform at least a non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the predetermined display area. A game console characterized in that it is possible to execute a display effect different from the second symbol variation display in a period including a part.

Here, the effect control means may be capable of at least causing the effect means to execute the predetermined effect so that at least a part of the different display effects is difficult to view.
(Appendix H13)

  The game stand according to claim H12, wherein the different display effects executable in the predetermined display area include at least one of a big hit notice display and a game information display.

The big hit notice display referred to here includes so-called pre-reading notices. In addition, the game information display includes, for example, the number of times of time saving, the number of times of continuous play, the number of acquired game balls, the number of times of pseudo running, and the like.
(Appendix H14)

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H13, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing at least the big hit notice in the non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the non-time-short state, A game console characterized in that at least the game information display can be executed in the non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the time saving state. (Appendix H15)

  It is a game stand according to appendix H14, wherein the specific second symbol variation display of the second symbol variation display includes a symbol relating to the result of the subsidy determination and a symbol relating to the big hit advance. A game console characterized by being capable of executing the second symbol variation display.

  The predetermined period in the gaming machine described in Supplementary Notes H11 to H15 may be a period including at least a part of the second symbol variation display being executed. Further, the predetermined effect may include at least a big hit notice that can give notice of whether a big hit will occur. Further, the effect control means may not execute the second symbol variation display in the non-time-short state. Further, in the predetermined display area, at least a notice regarding the symbol variation display of the special view 2 in the display different from the second symbol variation display may be made executable. Even during the execution of the second symbol variation display, even if the special figure 2 is interrupted and the different display is possible, the second symbol variation display can be executed with priority. Good. The notification during the power chew operation can be performed, and the notification during the power chew operation may differ depending on whether or not the second symbol variation display is performed. For example, the lamp control near the electric chow may be different with or without the second symbol variation display. Specifically, the second symbol variation display may make the notification flashy. The term “informing flashy” as used herein also includes that the rendering period is long. Further, the second symbol variation display may be capable of varying only the symbol relating to the result of the above-mentioned auxiliary success or failure determination. In addition, it is the game stand which does the right hitting and the left hitting, when the left hitting it is good to execute the 2nd design fluctuation indication. Furthermore, the game console may be a game console that performs a left strike in the non-power support state and a right strike in the power support state. In addition, the opening pattern of electric chew includes at least the first opening pattern and the second opening pattern, and the second opening pattern is more advantageous than the first opening pattern, and the second pattern The variable display may be performed at least in the case of the second opening pattern.

Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the gaming machines described in the other appendices and the gaming machines described in this specification.
(Appendix H16)

It has the electric chew, the success / failure judgment means (special figure), the auxiliary success / failure judgment means (general drawing), and the big hit game control means, and the main common drawing fluctuation display (first symbol fluctuation display) and the sub common drawing fluctuation display (The second symbol variation display) can be performed, the sub-popular variation is difficult to see by the second effect, the main-general variation is the sub-general variation A game table characterized in that even if it is difficult to visually recognize by the second effect, it is easy to visually recognize, and the sub-popularity fluctuation is more likely to be performed other than during a big hit game than during a big hit game.
(Appendix H17)

A game stand according to appendix H16, characterized in that a specific sub-popularity variation of the sub-general-scale variation is more likely to be performed outside of a big hit game than during a big hit game. Game console.
(Appendix H18)

The gaming table according to appendix H17, wherein the sub-general fluctuation is executable with at least a first fluctuation time and a second fluctuation time, and the second fluctuation time is more than the second fluctuation time. The game machine is characterized in that the fluctuation time of is longer, and the particular sub-general fluctuation is executable at a fluctuation time including at least the second fluctuation time.
(Appendix H19)

The game console according to any one of Appendix H16 to Appendix H18, wherein the opening pattern of the electric chow includes at least a first opening pattern and a second opening pattern, and the first opening The second opening pattern is more advantageous for the player than the opening pattern (for example, it is easier for the game ball to enter), and the sub-popular variation is at least opened by the electric opening in the second opening pattern. A game console characterized by being executable in case.
(Appendix H20)

  The game stand according to claim H18 or H19, wherein the sub-common-figure fluctuation is executable during the big hit game in a fluctuation time including at least the first fluctuation time. Stand.

  The specific sub-general-pattern fluctuation in the gaming machine described in Supplementary Notes H16 to H20 may not be performed in the first fluctuation time. In addition, the sub-general fluctuation except the specific sub-common fluctuation may not be performed in the second fluctuation time. In addition, the sub-general drawing change performed in the first change time may be capable of executing an effect of notifying only the result of the auxiliary success or failure judgment. In addition, the sub-general fluctuation may not be performed during the big hit game. In addition, at least a part of the sub-common-figure variations may be able to execute symbol variation display including a big hit notice. Furthermore, during the big hit game, only the open notification effect of the electric chew may be executable. In addition, the game console may perform right-handed and left-handed game, and a predetermined firing intensity (for example, right-handed game) may be more likely to execute the sub-common-figure fluctuation. Furthermore, it may be a game console that can be played with the predetermined firing strength (right strike) at least during a big hit game.

Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the gaming machines described in the other appendices and the gaming machines described in this specification.
(Appendix H21)

The main common drawing includes a success / failure determination unit (special drawing), an auxiliary success / failure determination unit (general drawing), a presentation unit capable of at least giving advance notice, and a presentation control unit capable of at least controlling the presentation unit. The game console is capable of performing variable display (first symbol fluctuation display) and sub-common-pattern fluctuation display (second symbol fluctuation display), wherein the effect control means is configured to receive the advance notice and the sub-general drawing. The variation display can be performed at least by the rendering means, and when the sub-general drawing fluctuation is performed during the execution of the pre-reading advance notice, the sub-general drawing fluctuation is at least one of the pre-reading advance notice. A game console characterized by making it difficult to visually identify the unit.
(Appendix H22)

The game stand according to appendix H21, wherein at least a part of the sub-common-figure changes is capable of executing symbol change display including a big hit notice.
(Appendix H23)

  The game stand according to appendix H21 or H22, wherein the effect means includes at least an image display means, and at least the image display means is capable of executing the sub-general drawing change and the advance notice, and the image The display means has a predetermined display area capable of executing the sub-common variation, and the image display means has a pre-read advance notice display region, and a predetermined sub-general variation of the sub-general variation is set. In the case where a figure fluctuation is performed, the sub-popularity change can be displayed beyond the predetermined display area, and enters the pre-reading advance notice display area, making at least a part of the pre-reading advance notice difficult to view Characterized by the game stand.

It is to be noted that the pre-reading notice is a pending change notice, the image display means has a pending display area, and if a predetermined sub-general change among the sub-general change is performed, the sub-general change is performed. It may be possible to display a figure fluctuation beyond the predetermined display area, enter the hold display area, and make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the hold prefetch notice.
(Appendix H24)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H21 to H23, wherein the gaming machine is a special view 2 priority variable machine, and the special display 1 reserve display area and the special view 2 reserve display area And both reserve display areas are provided with a predetermined display area in between, and it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of both reserve display areas. A game table characterized in that it is difficult to visually recognize only either one of the pre-reading notice of FIG. 1 and the pre-reading notice of the special view 2.
(Appendix H25)

  A game stand according to any one of appendices H21 to H24, characterized in that an effect can be executed such that at least a part of the sub-general-plot variation becomes difficult to see. To play with.

  The sub-common variation in the game stand described in Supplementary Notes H21 to H25 is at least a part of a plurality of pending display areas (for example, a first pending display area with the oldest winning timing) among the plurality of pending display areas. Some may be difficult to view. Further, the first hold of the special view 1 and the special view 2 hold display area may be difficult to visually recognize. Furthermore, other reservations such as the second suspension may be difficult to view. In addition, when the electric chow is opened during the non-electric support state and the special figure 2 cuts in, at least a part of the hold of the special figure 2 may be made difficult to be recognized by the electric thu opening notification effect. In addition, it is possible to make the reservation pre-reading notice of special figure 1 difficult (at least) in the non-power-supplying state, and while the power-supplying state is pending It may be possible to Moreover, it is a game stand of a winning a prize change, and it is possible to perform a reserve display of a special figure 1 and a reserve display of a special figure 2 in the specific reserve display area made difficult to be recognized by the sub common figure fluctuation. , The function may be able to be switched at each special figure fluctuation (during non power saving state). In addition, when the effect (for example, super reach etc.) is started during the decoration symbol change display of the special figure while the pre-reading suspension display and the sub common drawing change are being performed at the same time, the sub common change May be left as an aspect that hides the pre-reading hold display, or it may be an aspect where non-display of the sub-general drawing change and the pre-reading hold display is left, or the pre-reading hold display is left. The variation may be in a non-display mode.

In addition, even if it is the component contained only in each description of each embodiment or supplementary note demonstrated above, the constituent requirement may be applied to another embodiment or supplementary note.
(Appendix H26)

The main common drawing fluctuation display (first symbol fluctuation display (first symbol fluctuation display) is provided with a success / failure judgment unit (special drawing), an auxiliary success / failure judgment unit (general drawing), a presentation unit, and a presentation control unit capable of at least controlling the presentation unit ) And a sub common drawing fluctuation display (second symbol fluctuation display), and it is possible to execute an effect such that at least a part of the sub common drawing fluctuation is difficult to see. The image display means and the effect movable means, wherein the effect movable means is at least operable as the effect, and the sub-popularity change is at least performed by the image display means In the image display means, the effect can display at least an image related to the operation of the effect movable means, and at least one of the effect movable means operated as the effect and the image Amusement machine wherein a sub Hiroshizu difficult viewing the variation, characterized in that the.
(Appendix H27)

In the game console according to appendix H26, in the case where the sub-general drawing change is performed first, the sub-general-use drawing fluctuation is made difficult to visually recognize by the effect, and the effect is performed first. The game stand characterized by not performing the sub-general-use fluctuation using the image display means.
(Appendix H28)

It is a game stand according to supplementary note H26 or H27, wherein the image display means has a hold display area, and the effect makes at least a part of the hold display area difficult to view. Characterized by the game stand.
(Appendix H29)

A game stand according to any one of appendices H26 to H28, wherein the sub-popularity fluctuation is more likely to be played during a non-big hit game than during a big hit game. Stand.
(Appendix H30)

  The game stand according to any one of appendices H26 to H29, wherein the sub-general-pattern change is more likely to be performed in a non-power-sustaining state than in the power-sending state.

  The presentation on the gaming table described in Supplementary Notes H21 to H25 may include at least a big hit notice. Further, the effect movable means may be operable at least as a big hit notice. Furthermore, the effect movable means may be capable of at least an operation to the front side (player side) of the image display means as the effect.

In addition, even if it is the component contained only in each description of each embodiment or supplementary note demonstrated above, the constituent requirement may be applied to another embodiment or supplementary note.
(Appendix H31)

The main common drawing fluctuation display (first display) is provided with a power chew, a judging unit (special drawing), a subsidiary judging unit (general drawing), a presentation unit, and a presentation control unit capable of at least controlling the presentation unit. A second game variation display (a second game variation display), wherein the effect control means performs at least the effects on the presentation means and the second game variation. It is possible to execute, and it is possible to execute the effect such that at least a part of the electric thu open notification effect after the sub-general drawing change becomes difficult to visually recognize, the electric thu open notification effect It is in the state where entering the electric Chu is allowed during execution, and making it difficult to visually recognize the electric Chu open notification effect being executed by the effect in the special view fluctuation display based on entering the electric Chu. , Said May Hiroshizu variation is easy viewing, amusement machine, characterized in that.
(Appendix H32)

It is a game stand according to appendix H31, and special figure 1 symbol fluctuation display means capable of at least executing symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 symbol fluctuation display capable of at least executing symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 A game console characterized by having means, and making it difficult to visually recognize the electric chow open notification effect being executed by the effect during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2;
(Appendix H33)

The gaming machine according to the supplementary note H31 or H32, wherein special figure 2 is more likely to be awarded a big hit.
(Appendix H34)

  This gaming table is a special drawing 2 priority variable machine, and comprises a prefetch notice means capable of executing at least a prefetch notice of the special drawing 1, and at least executing the sub-general drawing fluctuation display during the prefetch notice execution of the special drawing 1 It is possible, even if the general drawing fluctuation is won, the electric chew is released, and even if the fluctuation of the symbol fluctuation display of the special drawing 2 is interrupted, the prefetching notice is given, and the visual tuw opening notice effect is visually recognized by the preliminary display notice. A game table characterized by difficulty.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 priority change machine, it is good also as visual difficulty in the electric Chu open information production under execution by the production in the symbol change display of the special figure 2 according to the ball according to entering electric Chu. In addition, in the winning order change machine, the state of the special figure is less than a predetermined number (less or 0) and the state of symbol change display of the special figure is stopped, the electric Chu open notification effect under execution, It is good also as visual recognition in the effect in the symbol variation display of the special figure according to entering the ball into the chew. In addition, special figures 189 can be won almost alternately during non-electric support, and during the auxiliary state, game consoles that can be continuously prized in special figure 2 by opening electric power via common figures change are in progress. The electric chew-opening notification effect may be difficult to visually recognize by the effect in the symbol variation display of the special view 2 corresponding to the winning. By doing this, it may be possible to notify that there is a possibility that the symbol variation display of the advantageous special drawing 2 may be continuously performed by the electric Chu open notification. In addition, it has a first jackpot (unfavorable jackpot) with a relatively short opening time of the attacker and a second jackpot (advantage jackpot) with a relatively long time. The second big hit may be more likely to appear than the first big hit, or the first big hit may not be present.

In addition, even if it is the component contained only in each description of each embodiment or supplementary note demonstrated above, the constituent requirement may be applied to another embodiment or supplementary note.
(Appendix H35)

  A first entry area in which the game ball can enter, a second entry area in which the game ball can enter, and a first entry possibility judgment that can be made if the first condition is satisfied. After the start of the variation display of the symbol and the second success or failure judgment means capable of executing the second success or failure judgment when the second condition is satisfied, the first success or failure judgment means A game console comprising notification means capable of executing symbol variation display for stopping display of a symbol corresponding to the first success / failure determination result, and effect means including at least display means capable of executing display, At least one of the establishment requirements of the first condition includes at least the entry of the game ball into the first entry area, and the second entry area is the result of the first success or failure judgment. Entry time is limited if the A game ball is allowed to enter, and at least one of the establishment requirements of the second condition at least includes the entry of the game ball into the second entry area, and the display The means can display at least the effect display when the third condition is satisfied, and the effect display includes at least the result display regarding the result of the first success / failure determination, The display means can display the effect display while the symbol variation display is being performed, and the display means can display the result display while the symbol stop display is being performed. The effect display is displayed over the effect time more than the first effect time, and the first effect time is shorter than the display time of the symbol variation display Feature Gaming table.

The first entry area is, for example, the common view starting port 228, the second entry area is, for example, the electric chow, and the first pass / fail judgment is, for example, the pass / fail judgment of the common view (common drawing lottery), The second pass / fail determination is, for example, a pass / fail determination of a special figure (special figure lottery).
(Appendix H36)

The gaming stand according to appendix H35, wherein the gaming state can be transitioned to any one of a plurality of states, the plurality of states including at least a first state, and the plurality of states are: The second state includes at least a second state, and the second state has a higher probability that the first judgment result is the specific judgment result than the first state, and the display A game console characterized in that the means is more likely to display the effect display during the first state than the second state.
(Appendix H37)

The gaming machine according to appendix H36, wherein the symbol variation display is performed over any one of a plurality of display times, and the plurality of display times are at least a first display time. The plurality of display times include at least a second display time, the second display time is longer than the first display time, and the first state is A game console characterized in that the display time is likely to be the second display time than the second state.
(Appendix H38)

The game console according to any one of Appendix H35 to Appendix H37, wherein the result display is the second entry area when the first determination result is a specific determination result. A game table including at least an enterable indication indicating that the game ball can enter.
(Appendix H39)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H35 to H38, wherein the effect means is capable of at least executing a big hit notice for giving notice whether or not a big hit will occur, and the big hit is It is generated under at least one condition that the game ball enters the second entry area, and the effect means is at least a part of the effect indication while the effect indication is displayed by the display means. It is possible to execute at least the big hit advance notice so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize from the player, and at least a part of the effect display by the display means is difficult to visually recognize from the player A game console characterized by being easily visible to the player during the period.
(Appendix H40)

  A first entry area in which the game ball can enter, a second entry area in which the game ball can enter, and a first entry possibility judgment that can be made if the first condition is satisfied. After the start of the variation display of the symbol and the second success or failure judgment means capable of executing the second success or failure judgment when the second condition is satisfied, the first success or failure judgment means A game console comprising notification means capable of executing symbol variation display for stopping display of a symbol corresponding to the first success / failure determination result, and effect means including at least display means capable of executing display, At least one of the establishment requirements of the first condition includes at least the entry of the game ball into the first entry area, and the second entry area is the result of the first success or failure judgment. Entry time is limited if the A game ball is allowed to enter, and at least one of the establishment requirements of the second condition at least includes the entry of the game ball into the second entry area, and the display The means can display at least the effect display when the third condition is satisfied, and the effect display includes at least the result display regarding the result of the first success / failure determination, The rendering means is at least capable of executing a big hit notice to give notice whether or not a big hit will occur, and the big hit is generated under at least one condition that the game ball has entered the second entry area. The effect display started when the big hit advance is being executed is better than the effect display started when the big hit advance is not executed. Serial in which production time tends to be shorter, the amusement machine, characterized in that.

Also here, the first entry area is, for example, a common drawing start port 228, the second entry area is, for example, electric power, and the first judgment of success is, for example, a judgment of common drawing (general drawing lottery The second success or failure judgment is, for example, a success or failure judgment on a special drawing (special drawing lottery).
(Appendix H41)

  The gaming table according to appendix H40, wherein the effect means at least performs the big hit advance notice so that at least a part of the effect indication becomes difficult to be recognized by the player while the effect indication is displayed by the display means. It is possible to execute, and the variable display of the symbol by the notification means is easy for the player to visually recognize even during a period when at least a part of the effect display by the display means is difficult for the player to visually recognize. A game stand characterized by

  Note that the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H35 to Supplementary note H41 may be a gaming table where it is easy to select an open time for which the power Chu has a shorter duration than during the non-power support. That is, the accessible time of the second approach area is any one of a plurality of times including at least a first time and a second time longer than the first time, and the first time In the second state, the accessible time may be more likely to be the first time than the second state. By doing this, it may be possible to have an expectation that time other than the first time will be in the first state.

  In addition, the popular figure production may be easier to perform the electric tube long opening than the electric tube short opening. That is, the display means can easily perform the effect display when the second time is reached as compared with the case where the enterable time is the first time. In this case, it may be possible to have expectations for the second time.

  In addition, the time of the short common drawing effect may be longer than the time of the short common change display. That is, in the second state, the display time is likely to be the first display time than in the first state, and the first effect time is longer than the first display time. It may be. In addition, the entry possible indication may be displayed during the entry possible time.

  Further, the display means has at least a display area capable of performing display, the display area includes at least a first display area, and the display means is configured to perform the first effect display. It may be displayable in at least a part of the display area of

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing advance notice regarding the result of the second success or failure judgment in at least a part of the first display area (example shown in FIG. 241). Further, at least a part of the effect display and at least a part of the advance notice may be common. For example, the relationship between the variable display pattern shown in (A) of FIG. 217 (b) and the variable display pattern shown in (D) can be mentioned.

  In addition, when the special figure production is performed when the special figure is not changed, the big hit notice (for example, "super heat") may not be stopped and displayed, or even when the special figure is generated when the special figure is not changed, The variable display may be displayed including a big hit notice (for example, "super heat").

  Furthermore, the regular drawing effect may be performed only during the non-electric support, or may be performed only during the non-big hit state.

  Further, the effect display includes at least a first display (for example, variable display), and the effect display includes at least a second display (for example, may include a result display or an effect image display). The effect display may include at least a third display (for example, an enterable display). Here, the third display may have a display area larger than the first display, or may have a display area larger than the second display. The display area may be larger than the display.

In addition, even if it is the component contained only in each description of each embodiment or supplementary note demonstrated above, the constituent requirement may be applied to another embodiment or supplementary note.
(Appendix H42)

  Symbol display means capable of performing at least symbol fluctuation display; pending display means capable of performing display of a pending icon; first control means capable of at least performing display control of the symbol display means And second control means capable of performing at least display control of the hold icon by the hold display means, wherein the symbol variation display performs symbol variation display. The symbol pattern corresponding to the result of the judgment is displayed in a stopped state, and the first symbol display means of the symbol display means changes the symbol pattern when the first symbol fluctuation condition is satisfied. The second symbol display means of the symbol display means can at least perform the symbol change display when the second symbol change condition is satisfied. The first symbol variation condition at least includes that there is a ball entering the first starting region of the starting region, and the second symbol variation condition is the starting symbol. At least including the fact that the second starting area of the area has entered the ball, the suspension display means is a suspension icon corresponding to the symbol variation display in relation to the start of the symbol variation display. It is possible to perform at least a first display regarding a certain digestion reserve icon, and the reserve display means is an undigested icon which is a reserve icon not corresponding to the symbol variation display in relation to the start of the symbol variation display. It is possible to at least perform a second display on the hold icon, and the hold display means is capable of at least display the undigested hold icon equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit number. The hold display means can at least display a plurality of undigested hold icons, and the first control means sends a command signal to the second control means in relation to the start of the symbol variation display. The second control means is capable of at least starting the first display in response to the reception of the command signal. The control means is capable of at least starting the second display in response to the reception of the command signal, and the hold display means at least includes a first display area. The hold display means includes at least a second display area, and the first display includes the digest reserve icon from the first display area to the second display area. A move (hereinafter referred to as the first move). And the second display area is configured to delete the display position of the undigested retention icon in the first display area. The hold display means moves the first hold icon as the hold icon when the first hold increase condition is satisfied. It is possible to at least increase display, and the hold display means can at least increase display the second hold icon as the hold icon when the second hold increase condition is satisfied. The first suspension increase condition at least includes the presence of a ball entry in the first start region, and the second suspension increase condition is an entry in the second start region. There is a ball In the case where the first pending icon is the undivided pending icon, the first pending icon is displayed in the first symbol display means display region of the first display region. In the case where the second reserve icon is the undivided reserve icon, the second reserve icon is displayed in a display area for the second symbol display means in the first display area, and The display area for one symbol display means is a display area different from the display area for the second symbol display means, and the display area in which the deletion is performed for the first reserved icon is the second reserved icon The same as the display area where the deletion is performed, the first display is completed in a longer time than the second display, and the hold display means displays the effect by the undigested hold icon. It is possible to perform, the retention display means is also capable of performing effect display by the digestion retention icon, and at least all the undigested in the display area for the second symbol display means The hold icon is for completing the second movement at a second time, and the at least one digestion retention icon in the display area for the second symbol display means is the first movement at a first time. And the first time is a time different from the second time. In addition, even if it is the component contained only in each description of each embodiment or supplementary note demonstrated above, the constituent requirement may be applied to another embodiment or supplementary note.

  The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to seventh embodiments. For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is limited to the pachinko machine For example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and corresponding reels are provided to individually stop the rotation of the reels. A stop button for causing the player to make a decision, lottery means for determining whether or not the internal winnings of a plurality of types of winnings are made by drawing, reel stop control means for performing stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel based on the drawing result of the drawing means Determining means for determining whether or not the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the means is a symbol combination predetermined corresponding to the internally winning combination, and the symbol If stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, it is also suitable, such as a slot machine and a dispensing control means for paying out game media payout processing game media corresponding to a predetermined winning mode.

Eighth Embodiment
Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. The configuration and the like of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment are the same as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment shown in FIGS.

  First, the game effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration shown in each of FIGS. 282 to 304 will be described.

  In each figure, as shown in FIG. 282 (a), a decorative symbol display device 208, a special figure 1 display device 212, and a special figure 2 display device which constitute a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 214, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and a special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are schematically shown. The special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 display 214, the special view 1 hold lamp 218, and the special view 2 hold lamp 220 are shown below the decorative symbol display unit 208, and the special view 2 display 214 is special view 1 The special view 1 retention lamp 218 is shown on the right side of the display 212, the special view 1 display 212 is shown on the upper side, and the special view 2 reserve lamp 220 is shown on the upper side of the special view 2 display 214. Also, the off portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218, and the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lit part is shown in black. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 is displayed in white in this embodiment, but in fact, the special figure change is in progress by repeating the blinking of the segments in a predetermined order. It can be recognized.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 282 (a), the chance button 136 is schematically shown on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 (downward right of the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 284 (f) etc. There is.

  In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display area is provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left side in the fourth symbol display area is a fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1 and the right side is a fourth symbol display area t2 for special figure 2. When the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a release, an image representing "x" is displayed as a fourth symbol, and in the case of a hit, an image representing "A" is displayed. In addition, during execution of the special figure fluctuation game, the picture which displays “-” as a 4th design is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 282 (g) and (h), the state in which all segments are shown in white on the special view 1 display device 212 indicates that the special view 1 variation display is being performed. There is. The same applies to the special view 2 display device 214.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 282 (h), the variation display of each decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c during the special figure variation game is represented by a downward arrow.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a setting operation unit 137 (direction key 137) (see FIG. 71) in addition to the chance button 136 as an operation means. The setting operation unit 137 is disposed, for example, on the right side of the chance button 136 of the door 108 with a ball storage tray so that the player can operate. The setting operation unit 137 is used to select a desired option in a selection effect or various settings displayed in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The setting operation unit 137 includes an OK button, an upper button located above the OK button, a lower button located below the OK button, a right button located to the right of the OK button, and a left of the OK button. It has a left button located and a cancel (C) button located further to the right of the right button.

  In addition, the special figure change game and presentation shown in each example of the present embodiment are executed by the same control operation as that described in the first embodiment unless otherwise described. In the example of this embodiment, the demonstration effect when the special figure change game is not executed, and the effect performed in the special figure change game will be specifically described, and the control is performed only when particularly necessary. It should also refer to the operation.

(Example 8-1)
First, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 282 (a) to 282 (h) (except for FIG. 282 (f)) show, in this order, effects by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. In addition, in the figure which shows production in a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 282 (a) shows a state (demonstration screen state) in which a special effect variation game is not executed and a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is being executed. The special figure I display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 both stop and display the first special symbol "special figure I". An “x” image is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for special drawing 1 indicating that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is lost, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t2 for special drawing 2 An "x" image is displayed indicating that the result of the game is out. Further, the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218 and the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220 are all turned off, and it is informed that the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are not held. Further, during the demonstration effect, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c is erased, and the entire decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d.

  A character string indicating the model name of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment (in the present example, "CR Yoshimune") is displayed substantially at the center of the effect display area 208d, and the text "Call menu with OK button" is displayed below it. The columns are displayed. During the demonstration effect, the operation effective period of the setting operation unit 137 is valid, and when the OK button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed (operated), it is possible to call a menu in which the pachinko machine 100 can be customized. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 282 (a), the state (operation mode) of the chance button 136 is a normal state (see FIG. 23 (a)) in which vibration, rotation and the like are not performed.

  FIG. 282 (b) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. In this embodiment, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the demonstration effect. Further, in the present embodiment, as the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the operation valid period of the back button (hidden button) is started. Although the operation of the chance button 136 is valid during the operation period of the back button operation, the operation request image of the chance button 136 (for example, an image simulating the chance button 136 or an image of a character string such as "press") is displayed I will not. As described above, during the operation valid period of the back button, an image or the like regarding the operation means whose operation is valid is not displayed, and the operation request notification of the operation means is not executed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. Further, a predetermined effect (effect on the back button) is executed in association with the chance button 136 being operated during the operation period of the back button.

  FIG. 282 (c) shows the state during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. FIG. In the present embodiment, the operation request image etc. is not displayed in the effect display area 208d because it is in the operation effective period as the back button, and the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 is the figure before the operation effective period starts. Same as 282 (a).

  In FIG. 282 (d), the state of the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibrating and rotating state (hereinafter referred to as "vibration + rotating state") during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Is shown. The chance button 136 is an operation means capable of changing the state during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The state change of the chance button 136 of this example occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. As described above, the chance button 136 is a means capable of changing the state from the normal state (first state) to the vibration + rotational state (second state) in the operation valid period even when the player does not operate it. .

  FIGS. 282 (e) and (f) show a state in which one game ball enters the special figure 1 start opening 230 during the demonstration effect. Thereby, the main control unit 300 controls the special view 1 display device 212 to start the special view 1 change game (change display of the special view 1), and transmits the symbol change start command to the first sub control unit 400. Do. In addition, the state of the chance button 136 at the time of game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230 is vibration + rotation state.

  FIG. 282 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. A special figure variation display is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that a special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area t1 for special figure 1. In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to end the demonstration effect, and starts the variation display of the decorative symbol. As shown in FIG. 282 (g), after the demonstration effect is completed, the decoration in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, which is the nearest stop symbol "decor 4-decor 1-decor 6," is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is started.

  Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the operation valid period of the setting operation unit 137. As shown in FIG. 282 (g), the chance button 136 changes its state from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state with the end of the operation effective period, and returns to the original state.

  FIG. 282 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. Also, the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above is provided with the chance button 136 as an operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate. The chance button 136 is a means capable of taking one of a plurality of states. At least one of the plurality of states is the normal state as the first state, and at least one of the plurality of states is the vibration + rotation state as the second state. The chance button 136 is a means capable of changing the state from the normal state as the first state to the vibration + rotation state as the second state in the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, the chance button 136 is a means capable of changing the state from the normal state as the first state to the vibration + rotation state as the second state in the operation valid period even when the player does not operate. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player may be given unexpectedness by the change of the operation means to the second state even though the player does not operate the operation means.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, although the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is forcibly terminated (forced termination by the start winning) in response to the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting opening 230, It is not limited. For example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 may be continued until a predetermined period or a period determined by a predetermined lottery elapses, or even if the chance button 136 is forcibly terminated at the time the button is operated. Good. In this manner, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is not always constant but variable. In the present embodiment, since the chance button 136 is not operated during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, the effect on the back button is not executed. In addition, even if another operation means (for example, the OK button of the setting operation unit 137 or the like) is operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, effects relating to the back button (for example The presentation using the presentation movable body is not performed. Note that, even if the other operation means (for example, the OK button of the setting operation unit 137 or the like) is operated during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, an effect relating to the back button is executed. Good.

(Example 8-2)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 283. 283 (a) to 283 (i) (except for FIG. 283 (g)) sequentially show the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 283 (a) shows a state in which the special effect variation game is not executed and the demonstration effect is executed. During the demonstration effect, the operation effective period of the setting operation unit 137 is valid, and when the OK button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed (operated), it is possible to call a menu in which the pachinko machine 100 can be customized. Also, the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state.

  FIG. 283 (b) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. In this embodiment, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the demonstration effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the operation valid period of the back button is started as the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In the operation valid period of the back button of the present embodiment, the operation request notification that an image (operation request image) or the like that imitates the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208d is not displayed, but shows the remaining time of the operation valid period. The valid period image is displayed to notify the remaining time of the operation valid period. As described above, the back button includes one in which the operation request image is not displayed during the operation valid period and the valid period image is displayed. It is not necessary to include in the back button the one on which the operation valid period image is displayed. In addition, when the effective period image is displayed without the operation request image being displayed, the effective period image indicates which of the operation effective period of the setting operation unit 137 or the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is shown Can not recognize. Therefore, in some cases, it may be possible to prompt the player to perform some operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137.

  As shown in FIG. 283 (b), the effective period image has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape, and initially, the entire period of the operation effective period in the frame shape is indicated by a bar of a predetermined color, and the progress of the period At the same time, the bar-like portion of the predetermined color is displayed so as to be gradually shortened in the left direction. More specifically, the valid period image is a gauge image, and the display of the gauge image is a display capable of suggesting the remaining period of the operation valid period by the animation of reducing the length of the gauge being performed. The display of the gauge image is a display that can notify that the operation valid period ends when the length of the gauge becomes zero.

  FIG. 283 (c) shows a state in which the player operates (presses) the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. FIG. The state when the chance button 136 is operated is the normal state. The operation of the chance button 136 by the player is shown with the player's finger placed on the chance button 136 in the figure. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 283 (d) shows a state in which the effect on the back button is started based on the chance button 136 being operated. The effect on the back button in the present embodiment is an effect of fortune telling. Prior to the effect relating to the back button, the character strings “CR Yoshimune” and “call the menu with the OK button” are deleted to end the demonstration effect, and after the demonstration effect ends, the effect relating to the back button is started. Further, along with the end of the demonstration effect, the operation effective period of the setting operation unit 137 ends. The operation effective period of the setting operation unit 137 may be continued even after the demonstration effect is ended. In this case, when the OK button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during execution of the effect on the back button, the effect on the back button is ended or interrupted, and a menu allowing customization and the like is displayed in the effect display area 208d. It may be like that. Further, in the present embodiment, although the valid period image is also erased based on the chance button 136 being operated, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is continued. Further, as shown in FIG. 283 (d), when the fortune telling effect starts, the character image of the panda is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and the character string “Today's fortune is ...” is displayed on the right side. Be done. Next, as shown in FIG. 283 (e), the character string of "Today's fortune is ..." is displayed, and a character string of "Daikichi!" Indicating the result of fortune telling is displayed.

  FIG. 283 (f) shows a state in which the chance button 136 has changed from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In this embodiment, the chance button 136 changes its state at a timing that is not related to the start timing of the effect on the back button and the display switching timing in the effect display area 208d at the time of the effect.

  FIG. 283 (g) shows a state in which one gaming ball enters the special figure 1 start opening 230 during fortune telling effect as an effect relating to the back button. Thereby, the main control unit 300 controls the special view 1 display device 212 to start the special view 1 change game (change display of the special view 1), and transmits the symbol change start command to the first sub control unit 400. Do.

  FIG. 283 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. A special figure variation display is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that a special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area t1 for special figure 1. In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command, the operation valid period of the back button ends and the fortune telling effect as the effect on the back button ends. The first sub control unit 400 ends the operation valid period of the back button, controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to erase the character image of the panda and the character string of "Daikichi", and ends the fortune telling effect, Start the variation display of the decoration pattern. As shown in FIG. 283 (h), after “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 6” which is the stop symbol closest to the left is displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed. It is started.

  Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation valid period of the chance button 136. As shown in FIG. 283 (h), the chance button 136 changes its state from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state with the end of the operation effective period, and returns to the original state.

  FIG. 283 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. Also, the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above is provided with the decorative symbol display device 208 as an effect means capable of at least performing a plurality of effects. At least one of the multiple types of effects is a first effect, and at least one of the multiple types of effects is a second effect. The second effect is an effect (in the present embodiment, a fortune telling effect) that can be performed at least in relation to the chance button 136 being operated. The first effect is an effect including at least information (hereinafter referred to as “operation information”) relating to the operation of the chance button 136 for performing the effect on the back button as the second effect. The operation information is, for example, the remaining time of the operation effective period, and the first effect is an effect executed by displaying the effective period image. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the start timing of the effect on the back button is different depending on the timing at which the chance button 136 is operated, so that the player may be given unexpectedness.

  In addition, during the operation valid period of the back button, only the valid period image may be displayed as a display regarding the operation means. Further, when the chance button 136 is operated in the normal state (first state), a fortune telling effect is executed as a effect on the back button. The fortune telling effect is continued until the end of the operation valid period of the back button, and is ended in relation to the end of the operation valid period. Thereby, there are cases where it is possible to change the execution time of the effect accompanying the operation of the operation means.

(Example 8-3)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 284 (a)-FIG. 284 (k) (except FIG. 284 (h)) have shown the presentation in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example in time series in this order.

  FIG. 284 (a) shows the state in which the special effect variation game is not executed and the demonstration effect is executed. During the demonstration effect, the operation effective period of the setting operation unit 137 is valid, and when the OK button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed (operated), it is possible to call a menu in which the pachinko machine 100 can be customized. Also, the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state.

  FIG. 284 (b) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. In this embodiment, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the demonstration effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the operation valid period of the back button is started as the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Therefore, in the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the present embodiment, an image relating to the chance button 136 such as an image imitating the chance button 136 (operation request image) and an effective period image is not displayed. In addition, an effective period image may be displayed during the operation effective period of the back button.

  FIG. 284 (c) shows a state where a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The state of the chance button 136 is maintained in the normal state.

  FIG. 284 (d) shows a state where a predetermined time has passed since the start of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 284 (e) shows a state where the player operates (presses) the chance button 136 when the chance button 136 is in the vibration + rotation state. When the chance button 136 in the vibration and rotation state is operated during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, an effect different from the fortune telling effect is executed as an effect on the back button.

  As shown in FIG. 284 (f), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an effect movable body imitating an arm disposed on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 as viewed from the player side. In the present embodiment, an effect using the effect movable body is executed as an effect on the back button. In the effect movable body, the forearm of the arm is rotatable in the front of the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. The forearm of the effect movable body can move the front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that at least a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be hidden from the player There is. Before turning, the forearm of the effect movable body is stopped at a position (initial position) overlapping the upper arm of the arm in the front-rear direction as seen from the player. In the effect relating to the back button of this embodiment, the forearm of the effect movable body rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position, and then, the operation of rotating 90 degrees clockwise and returning to the initial position is performed twice. Ru. In FIG. 284 (f), the forearm portion of the effect movable body is stopped at a position (moving position) rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the initial position. A part of the character string "CR Yoshimune" displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden in the forearm portion of the effect movable body.

  FIG. 284 (g) shows a state in which the forearm of the effect movable body is turned 90 degrees clockwise and stopped at the initial position.

  FIG. 284 (h) shows a state in which one gaming ball enters the special figure 1 start opening 230 during the effect on the back button using the effect movable body. Thereby, the main control unit 300 controls the special view 1 display device 212 to start the special view 1 change game (change display of the special view 1), and transmits the symbol change start command to the first sub control unit 400. Do.

  FIG. 284 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game has been started. A special figure variation display is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that a special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area t1 for special figure 1. In addition, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command, it ends the operation valid period of the setting operation unit 137 and the operation valid period of the chance button 136. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect on the back button is continued. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 284 (i), the forearm portion of the effect movable body is moved to the movement position rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the initial position. Thus, in the present embodiment, even after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 ends, the effect on the back button is continued. In the effect relating to the back button of the present embodiment, the forearm portion of the effect movable body reciprocates between the initial position and the movement position twice. For this reason, the effect relating to the back button of the present embodiment ends after the forearm portion of the effect movable body reciprocates between the initial position and the movement position twice. As described above, the effects relating to the back button of the present embodiment continue until the symbol variation display starts after the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136 ends and is executed until the end.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 284 (i), the chance button 136 changes from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state. Thus, the chance button 136 changes its state to the original normal state with the end of the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 284 (i), after “decorative 4-decorative 1-decorative 6” which is the stop design closest to the left is displayed on the left middle right-pattern display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the decorative symbol changes Display starts. In addition, most of the "decor 6" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c at the forearm of the effect movable body is hidden.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 284 (i) to (k), the forearm of the effect movable body is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the movement position, and in FIG. 284 (k), the effect movable body is at the initial position. Have returned to Further, since the movement of the forearm of the effect movable body shown in FIGS. 284 (i) to (k) is the second reciprocation, after the forearm of the effect movable body returns to the initial position, the effect on the back button is finish.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment operates as the second effect, ie, the back button, when the chance button 136 is operated in the second state (vibration + rotation) which is the second state during the effective operation period of the chance button 136. The effect using the effect movable body imitating the arm is executed (see FIG. 284 (e) to FIG. 284 (k)). On the other hand, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes fortune telling as an effect on the back button when the chance button 136 is operated in the normal state where the chance button 136 is in the first state during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 (FIG. 283 (c) to FIG. 283 (f)). As described above, by changing the effect to be executed in relation to the operation of the chance button 136 depending on the state at the time of operation of the chance button 136, it may be possible to provide the player with unexpectedness. The same type of effect may be performed depending on whether the chance button 136 is operated in the first state or in the second state during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, or the same type of effect may be performed. Effects of different types and different results may be executed. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated in the first state during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the result of fortune telling is Kokichi, and the chance button 136 is secondly operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 When it is operated in the state of, the result of the fortune telling may become Daikichi. In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated in the first state during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the number of reciprocations of the forearm part of the effect movable body is one, and during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 When the chance button 136 is operated in the second state, the number of reciprocations of the forearm of the effect movable body may be two.

Example 8-4
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 4 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 285. FIGS. 285 (a) to 285 (m) (except for FIG. 285 (k)) sequentially show the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 285 (a) shows a state in which the special effect variation game is not executed and the demonstration effect is executed. During the demonstration effect, the operation effective period of the setting operation unit 137 is valid, and when the OK button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed (operated), it is possible to call a menu in which the pachinko machine 100 can be customized. Also, the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state.

  FIG. 285 (b) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. In this embodiment, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the demonstration effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the operation valid period of the back button is started as the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In the operation valid period of the back button of the present embodiment, an image relating to the operation means such as an image (operation request image) imitating the chance button 136 and a valid period image is not displayed.

  FIG. 285 (c) shows a state where the player has pressed (operated) the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The state when the chance button 136 is operated is the normal state.

  FIG. 285 (d) shows a state in which the effect on the back button is started in association with the chance button 136 being operated in the normal state. In the present embodiment, the effect on the back button executed in association with the normal operation of the chance button 136 is a fortune telling effect. Prior to the effect relating to the back button, the character strings “CR Yoshimune” and “call the menu with the OK button” are deleted to end the demonstration effect, and after the demonstration effect ends, the effect relating to the back button is started. Further, along with the end of the demonstration effect, the operation effective period of the setting operation unit 137 ends. The operation effective period of the setting operation unit 137 may be continued even after the demonstration effect is ended. In this case, when the OK button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the effect on the back button, the effect on the back button is ended or interrupted, and a menu that allows customization and the like is displayed in the effect display area 208d. It may be done. Further, in the present embodiment, the character image of the panda is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d in relation to the chance button 136 being operated, and the character string of "Today's fortune is ..." is displayed on the right side. Is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 285 (e), the character string "Okichi!" Indicating the result of fortune telling is displayed instead of the character string "Today's fortune is ...".

  FIG. 285 (f) shows a state in which the chance button 136 has changed from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In this embodiment, the chance button 136 changes its state at a timing that is not related to the start timing of the effect on the back button and the display switching timing in the effect display area 208d at the time of the effect.

  FIG. 285 (g) shows a state where the player has pressed (operated) the chance button 136 when the state of the chance button 136 is the vibration + rotation state during the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 285 (h) shows a state in which the effect on the back button has been developed (the first effect has been developed) in relation to the chance button 136 being operated. As shown in FIG. 285 (h), a character string "Nakakichi!" Is displayed in the effect display area 208d instead of "Okichi!", And a fortune telling effect is developed. In the present example, although the first effect development is executed in relation to being operated when the chance button 136 is in the vibration + rotation state, it is operated when the chance button 136 is in the normal state. The first rendering development may be performed in relation to the event.

  FIG. 285 (i) shows a state where the player has pressed (operated) the chance button 136 when the chance button 136 is in the vibration + rotation state during the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 285 (j) shows a state in which the effect on the back button is developed (the second effect development) in relation to the chance button 136 being operated. As shown in FIG. 285 (j), a character string of "Daikichi!" Is displayed in the effect display area 208d instead of "Nakakichi!", And a fortune telling effect is developed. In this example, although the second rendering development is executed in relation to the operation when the chance button 136 is in the vibration + rotation state, the operation is performed when the chance button 136 is in the normal state. A second rendering development may be performed in connection with the event.

  FIG. 285 (k) shows a state in which one gaming ball is inserted into the special view 1 start opening 230. Thereby, the main control unit 300 controls the special view 1 display device 212 to start the special view 1 change game (change display of the special view 1), and transmits the symbol change start command to the first sub control unit 400. Do.

  FIG. 285 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. A special figure variation display is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, and a "-" image indicating that a special figure 1 variation game is being executed is displayed in the fourth figure display area t1 for special figure 1. Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command, the operation valid period of the back button ends and the fortune telling effect as the effect on the back button ends. The first sub-control unit 400 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 to erase the character image of the panda and the character string of "Daikichi!", To finish the fortune telling effect, and to start the variation display of the decorative symbol. As shown in Fig. 285 (l), after "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 6", which is the stop design closest to the left, is displayed in the left middle right design display area 208a, 208b, 208c It is started.

  Further, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command, the first sub-control unit 400 ends the operation valid period of the chance button 136. As shown in FIG. 285 (l), the chance button 136 changes its state from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state with the end of the operation effective period, and returns to the original state.

  FIG. 285 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b and 208c, variable display of decorative symbols is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the chance button 136 is validated a plurality of times (for example, three times) during the operation valid period as the back button of the chance button 136. As a result, the variation of the effect on the back button may be increased, and the player may be given unexpectedness by developing the effect on the back button in relation to the chance button 136 being operated.

(Example 8-5)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 5 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 286. FIGS. 286 (a) to 286 (l) (except for FIG. 286 (j)) sequentially show the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 286 (a) to 286 (h) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 285 (a) to 285 (h) described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 286 (i) shows that during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, the player operates the chance button 136 in the vibration + rotation state during the first stage development of the effect (fortune telling effect) on the back button. It shows the state.

  When the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 286 (i), as shown in FIG. 286 (j '), the effect on the back button is developed (the second effect development), and the effect display area 208d The character string "Daikichi!" Is displayed instead of "!". However, in this example, as shown in FIG. 286 (j), immediately after the operation of the chance button 136, one gaming ball is inserted in the special view 1 start opening 230 and the special view variation game is started and the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. The effective period is over, and the effect on the back button is also forcibly terminated. As a result, the fortune telling effect, which is the effect on the back button, ends, and the special figure change game is started as shown in FIG. 286 (k). Note that FIG. 286 (l) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 285 (m), so the description thereof is omitted.

  The fortune telling effect, which is the effect on the back button, can be developed until the character string “Daikichi!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In this example, when the chance button 136 is operated during the first stage development and the game ball enters the special figure 1 start opening 230 immediately after that (when the start information increases), the fortune telling effect is cut off halfway And the special figure variation game is started. As described above, in this example, although the effect related to the button operation is not completed to the end, the effect is forcibly ended in relation to the end of the operation valid period. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can provide the player with unexpectedness by aborting the effect (fortune telling effect) on the back button as the second effect that should have developed. There is a case.

Example 8-6
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 287 (a) to 287 (m) (excluding FIG. 287 (k)) sequentially show the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIGS. 287 (a) to 287 (c) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 285 (a) to 285 (c) described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 287 (d) shows a state in which the chance button 136 has changed from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state in relation to the player operating the chance button 136 during the effective operation period of the chance button 136. ing. Thus, the chance button 136 is a means capable of changing the state in connection with the operation by the player in the operation valid period. Further, as shown in FIG. 287 (d), a fortune telling effect is started as an effect relating to the back button in relation to the chance button 136 being operated during the operation valid period of the back button.

  FIGS. 287 (e) and (f) show a state where a fortune telling effect is being executed as an effect on the back button. The state of the chance button 136 continues in the vibration + rotation state.

  FIG. 287 (g) shows a state in which the player operates the chance button 136 when it is in the vibration + rotation state. As a result, the fortune telling development develops (the first development of the rendering), and as shown in FIG. 287 (h), the character display string of "Nakayoshi!" Is displayed in the effect display area 208d instead of "Okoshi!" Ru.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 287 (h), the chance button 136 changes from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state in relation to the player operating the chance button 136 in the vibration + rotation state. doing. Thus, by operating the chance button 136, the state can be changed from the second state (in the present embodiment, vibration + rotational state) to the third state (in the present embodiment, the normal state). . The third state may be a state different from the first state and the second state, may be the same state as the first state, and may be a state different from the second state.

  FIG. 287 (i) shows a state in which the player operates the chance button 136 in the normal state. By the operation of the chance button 136, as shown in FIG. 287 (j), the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state. Further, by the operation of the chance button 136, a character string of "Daikichi!" Is displayed in the effect display area 208d instead of "Nakakichi!", And a fortune telling effect is developed. In addition, since the state shown to FIG. 287 (k)-(m) is the same as FIG. 285 (k)-(m), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As in the present embodiment, the chance button 136 is operated during the operation effective period, whereby the first state (in the present embodiment, the normal state) to the second state (in the present embodiment, the vibration + rotation state). You may change the state to). In addition, the chance button 136 changes its state from the second state (in the present embodiment, vibration + rotation state) to the third state (in the present embodiment, normal state) by being operated during the operation effective period. May be The third state may be the same as or different from the first state. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to promote the operation of the chance button 136 by the player by changing the state of the chance button 136 in association with the operation of the chance button 136.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 287 (d), (h) and (f), in this example, the state of the chance button 136 changes three times during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136. As described above, the state of the chance button 136 may change a plurality of times (two or more times) within one operation effective period.

  Moreover, the pachinko machine 100 by the said Example 1-6 is equipped with the special figure 1 display apparatus 212 and the special figure 2 display apparatus 214 as a symbol display means which can perform at least a symbol fluctuation display. The chance button 136 is a period which can be set at least in a period in which the symbol variation display is not executed (FIGS. 282 (b) to (e), 283 (b) to (f), 284 (b) to (284). g), Figures 285 (b)-(j), Figures 286 (b)-(i), Figures 287 (b)-(j)). The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs an effect to be executed in relation to a state change of the chance button 136 or the fact that the chance button 136 is operated, a probability change notification during the jackpot game in which the symbol variation display is not executed, There are cases where it can be functioned as a notice of an advantageous notification such as a pending in-line notification. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment makes the demonstration effect the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, and gives notice of the effect to be executed in relation to the state change of the chance button 136 and the chance button 136 being operated. It may be used for effects other than the effects (effects using fortune telling or effects using movable objects). Note that a fortune telling effect or an effect using a movable object may be used as a demonstration effect.

(Example 8-7)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 288. FIG. 288 is a table showing patterns of states which can be taken by the chance button 136 as an operation means by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The table shown in FIG. 288 includes items of “pattern”, “first state”, “second state”, and “third state” from the left column.

  As a state which can be taken by the chance button 136 of this embodiment, normal (normal state) (see FIG. 23 (a)), vibration (vibration state) (see FIG. 23 (b)), and vibration + rotation (vibration) There are three types of states: + rotation state (see FIG. 23C). The big hit reliability of the notice effect using the state of the chance button 136 at the time of the button effect execution with the operation of the chance button 136 during execution of the special figure fluctuation game is usually set to become higher in the order of vibration, vibration + rotation It is done. For this reason, the player's expectation for the jackpot usually increases in the order of vibration and vibration + rotation.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the “pattern” column of the table in FIG. 288, ten patterns “1” to “10” are provided in the patterns which can be taken by the chance button 136. In the pattern "1", the "first state" is "normal", and the "second state" and the "third state" are not provided (indicated by "-" in the figure). In the pattern “2”, the “first state” is “vibration” and the “second state” and the “third state” are not provided (in the pattern “3”, the “first state” Is “vibration + rotation” and “second state” and “third state” are not provided. In the patterns “1”, “2” and “3”, the chance button 136 has an operation effective period During the first state is not to change the state.

  In the pattern "4", the "first state" is "normal", the "second state" is "vibration", and the "third state" is not provided. In pattern “5”, the first state is “normal”, the “second state” is “vibration + rotation”, and the “third state” is not provided. In the patterns “4” and “5”, the chance button 136 changes state from the first state to the second state during the operation effective period. In the patterns “4” and “5”, the chance button 136 changes only once to a state where a big hit can be expected during the operation valid period.

  Further, in the pattern “6”, the “first state” is “normal”, the “second state” is “vibration”, and the third state is “vibration + rotation”. In the pattern “6”, the chance button 136 changes state from the first state to the second state during the operation effective period, and then changes from the second state to the third state during the operation effective period. In the pattern "6", the chance button 136 changes twice to a state where a big hit can be expected during the operation valid period. The first state in the pattern "6" is a state different from the third state.

  Further, in the pattern “7”, the “first state” is “vibration”, the “second state” is “vibration + rotation”, and the “third state” is not provided. The pattern “7” is a chance system in which the degree of expectation to the jackpot from the first state is large. In the pattern “7”, the chance button 136 changes from the first state to the second state during the operation valid period. In the pattern "7", the chance button 136 changes only once to a state where a big hit can be expected during the operation valid period.

  In the pattern "8", the "first state" is "vibration", the "second state" is "normal", and the "third state" is not provided. In the pattern “8”, the chance button 136 changes state from the first state to the second state during the operation effective period. In the pattern "8", the chance button 136 changes its state only once to a state where the big hit reliability becomes low during the operation effective period. The pattern "8" is a downgrade system in which the player can expect a big hit in the first state than in the second state, and therefore the big hit is expected to become smaller due to the state change.

  Further, in the pattern “9”, the “first state” is “vibration + rotation”, the “second state” is “vibration”, and the “third state” is “normal”. In pattern “9”, the chance button 136 changes state from the first state to the second state during the operation effective period, and then changes from the second state to the third state during the operation effective period. In the pattern "9", the chance button 136 is changed twice so as to reduce the expectation of the big hit during the operation effective period. In the pattern "9", the player can expect a big hit in the second state than in the third state, and the player can expect a big hit in the first state than the second state. This is a downgrade system in which the expectation of becomes smaller due to the state change. The first state in the pattern "9" is a state different from the third state.

  Further, in the pattern "10", the "first state" is "vibration + rotation", the "second state" is "normal", and the "third state" is "vibration + rotation" . In the pattern “10”, the chance button 136 changes state from the first state to the second state during the operation effective period, and then changes from the second state to the third state during the operation effective period. Pattern “10” is a downgrade system in which the change in state from the first state to the second state reduces the expectation of the big hit, and the change in state from the second state to the third state is highly successful. It is an upgrade system of change where the degree of expectation of The first state in the pattern "10" is the same as the third state. Thus, the first state and the third state may be the same.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs a predetermined lottery process for button effect in the first sub-control unit 400 prior to the start of the special figure change game, and executes the button effect, the state of the chance button 136 The pattern of is determined as one of patterns “1” to “10”. The jackpot reliability is set to increase in order of pattern number. The pattern "1" is the lowest and the pattern "10" is the highest.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the normal state, the vibration state, and the vibration + rotational state are mentioned as the states that can be taken by the chance button 136, but the states that can be taken by the chance button 136 are not limited to these. . The chance button 136 is capable of indenting movement (see FIG. 375 described later), and the first state in which the chance button 136 is positioned at the initial position before indenting movement is the first state, and the indenting state is the second state It may be Also, the chance button 136 may be capable of performing the up and down movement (see FIG. 375 described later). For example, the state where the chance button 136 is positioned at the initial position before the up and down movement is the first state. The upward operating state may be the second state, and the downward operating state may be the third state. The chance button 136 capable of the indenting operation may be capable of indenting operation as the predetermined time of the operation effective period elapses. As a result, when the player performs an operation in which the chance button 136 is depressed at the timing when the player tries to operate the chance button 136, the player can cause the player to idle the chance button 136 and fail the operation to give unexpectedness. There is. In addition, the chance button 136 in the recessed state moves upward and changes its state with the passage of a predetermined time of the operation effective period, and moves upward to the hand of the player who did not intend to operate the chance button 136 When the chance button 136 collides, it may be possible to cause the player to unexpectedly operate the chance button 136 and to give unexpectedness.

  In addition, as a state in which the chance button 136 can be taken, there may be a non-emission state, a light emission state, a state in which the button becomes hard (a state in which a force necessary for pressing is increased), and the like. Further, as the operation means, not only the push button type chance button 136 but also a lever type operation means, a touch panel type operation means, a proximity sensor type operation means and the like can be mentioned. For example, the normal state may be the first state, or the vibration + rotation state may be the second state. In addition, these operation means may be changeable to the state shown in FIG.

  In addition, the setting operation unit 137 may be the operation means capable of changing the state during the operation valid period. The setting operation unit 137 may be capable of taking the same state as the chance button 136. For example, the setting operation unit 137 may be capable of taking the state shown in FIG. 288, the recessed state, the light emitting state, and the state in which the button is hardened.

  In addition, the operating means may change state after a predetermined time of the operation effective period of the operating means, or may change state by one operation of the operating means. The state may be changed when another condition (for example, a predetermined number of operations of the operation means or a predetermined time after one or a predetermined number of operations has elapsed) is satisfied.

  Further, any of the states shown above may be the first state, the second state or the third state. The first state and the third state may be the same state. Also, the first state may be different from the second state. Also, the second state may be different from the third state.

Example 8-8
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 and 290. FIG. 289 (a) to FIG. 290 (e) show, in this order, the effects of the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 289 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first special symbol "special figure I" in a stopped state, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area t1 shows that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out. "X" image is displayed, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 8" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is out It is informed that there is.

  Further, a special LED 1 on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 is turned on to notify that the special view 1 has a single reserve. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. The special figure 1 pending icon a1 corresponding to the pending with the first place is displayed in the special figure 1 pending icon display area provided at the lower left of the effect display area 208d, and the special figure 1 pending icon a1 is shown in FIG. This is a display mode of normal hold shown in (a). Also, the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state.

  FIG. 289 (b) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variation game is started and the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. The special view variation display is being executed in the special view 1 display device 212, and it is informed that the special view 1 variation game is being executed in the fourth special symbol display area t1. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed.

  Further, with the start of the special view 1 change game, the reserve is digested, and all the LEDs of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned off, and it is informed that the special view 1 is not reserve. Further, since the special view 1 suspension icon a1 is erased, the special view 1 suspension icon is not displayed in the special view 1 suspension icon display area.

  FIG. 289 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a during execution of the special view 1 change game.

  In FIG. 289 (d), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c during execution of the special figure 1 change game, and the character of "reach" is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. It shows the started condition.

  FIG. 289 (k) to FIG. 290 (c) show a state in which the button effect of this embodiment is performed during the reach effect in the special figure 1 fluctuation game. In the button effect of the present embodiment, prior to the start of the special figure variation game, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a predetermined lottery process for the button effect, and various effects for promoting the pressing of the chance button 136 according to the lottery result. I do. In the present embodiment, the case where the button effect is performed after the start of the reach effect is shown.

  FIG. 289 (e) shows a state in which reach effect develops into super reach effect (SP reach), and button effect as SP reach effect is started. In the button effect of the present embodiment, first, an explanatory display (a tutorial display) of the button effect is performed. The left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c is reduced in size from the center of the initial display area to the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. In the explanation display of the button effect, the character image of the bancho character is displayed on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and the character string of "If you break the clothes with button continuous hit! Explanation display is executed.

  FIG. 289 (f) shows a state in which the button effect is started. A character string of "REDY" is displayed on the center right side of the effect display area 208d, and an image of a display mode imitating the chance button 136 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "button image") is displayed below it. ing. The button image is included in the operation request image.

  FIG. 289 (g) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. In the effect display area 208d, instead of "REDY", character strings "GO!" And "bumps" are displayed. The strings “GO!” And “double hit” may also be included in the operation request image. Thus, the player can recognize that the operation request notification has been executed and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. Further, the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state, and the display mode of the button image is “normal” shown in FIG. The button image of the “normal” display mode is a display corresponding to the normal state of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 289 (h) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 twice during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. When the player twice presses the chance button 136, two chance buttons 136 are arranged side by side in the figure, and the player's finger is shown on each chance button 136.

  FIG. 289 (i) shows a state in which the display mode of the button image displayed in the effect display area 208d has changed from “normal” shown in FIG. 22 (a) to “vibration + rotation” shown in FIG. 22 (c) It shows. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 289 (i), the chance button 136 is maintained in the normal state. Thus, when the chance button 136 is in the normal state as the first state, the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image of the display mode of “vibration + rotation” as the second display. It is at least a displayable means. In addition, the fact that the state of the chance button 136 and the button image do not correspond to each other may be referred to as "rule breaking". Further, as shown in FIG. 289 (i), the player has pressed the chance button 136 twice during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 289 (j), the character string of "five more seconds" is displayed instead of the character string of "GO!" Displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the countdown of the remaining time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is performed. It shows that the display has been executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 289 (j), the player has pressed the chance button 136 twice during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136. In addition, after the first press shown in FIG. 289 (j), the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state. On the other hand, in the effect display area 208d, a button image of a display mode of "vibration + rotation" is displayed. For this reason, the state of the chance button 136 catches up with the change of the display mode of the button image generated in FIG. 289 (i), the state of the chance button 136 corresponds to the button image, and the law is broken in FIG. Is eliminated. The state of the chance button 136 may change with the elapse of a predetermined time of the operation effective period, or may change state by a predetermined number of operations of the chance button 136. In addition, the breaking of the law may be resolved by the lapse of a predetermined time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 or may be resolved by pressing the chance button 136 a predetermined number of times.

  FIG. 289 (k) shows a state in which a character string of "3 seconds after" is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In addition, the chance button 136 is pressed twice by the player during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 289 (l) shows a state in which an effect (second effect) is being executed in relation to the chance button 136 being operated. In this embodiment, an animation in which the Bancho breaks the clothes is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and a character string of "super hot" is displayed on the right of the Bancho character image, and the effect is executed. In addition, the button image displayed in the effect display area 208d is deleted. Further, in FIG. 289 (l), since the display of the remaining time of the countdown display of the operation effective period becomes 0 seconds and the button image is also erased, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 for the player is It looks like it was finished. However, in the present embodiment, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is continued as the operation valid period of the back button. Also, the state of the chance button 136 is maintained in the vibration + rotation state.

  FIG. 289 (m) shows a state where the player has pressed the chance button 136 during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136. Since the operation effective period is the operation effective period as the back button, the effect on the back button is executed after the chance button 136 is pressed.

  FIG. 289 (n) shows a state in which the effect on the back button is executed and the SP reach effect develops. In the effect display area 208d, a character string of "big hit" is displayed in place of "super hot", and effects related to the back button are executed. The effect relating to the back button in the present embodiment is a premium effect notifying of a big hit confirmation. Further, the operation valid period of the back button is ended based on the fact that the chance button 136 is pressed once in FIG. 289 (m).

  FIGS. 289 (o) to 290 (c) show a state in which the SP reach effect is developed and the defeat reach effect is being executed. FIG. 289 (o) shows a state in which the subversive reach effect has been started, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c reduced and displayed in the upper left corner of the effect display area 208d. . At the top of the effect display area 208d, a character string of "punitive reach" is displayed. In the center of the effect display area 208d, an image in which two warriors face each other is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 289 (o), the state of the chance button 136 changes to the normal state in synchronization with the end of the operation effective period of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 289 (p) shows a state in which a deca-button image, which is a button image having a relatively large display size, is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208 d during the punitive reach effect. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started along with the start of display of the big button image. Further, the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state, and the display mode of the big button image is “normal”. The deca-button image of the “normal” display mode may be another mode of the first display.

  FIG. 289 (q) shows a state in which the display mode of the deca-button image is changed from “normal” to “vibration + rotation”. On the other hand, the state of the chance button 136 is the normal state. For this reason, a rule collapse occurs in which the state of the chance button 136 and the button image do not correspond.

  FIG. 289 (r) shows the state of the chance button 136 changed from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state. The state change of the chance button 136 is due to the passage of a predetermined time during the operation effective period. Thereby, the breaking of the law which arose in FIG. 289 (q) is eliminated.

  In FIG. 290 (a) continuing from FIG. 289 (r), the chance button 136 is pressed, and then in FIG. 290 (b), the deduction reach production proceeds to the next scene, and the notice production by the cut-in image is executed. The cut-in image is an image in which a samurai shouts "is fighting!", A circle of a predetermined color (for example, green) displayed so as to overlap near the mouth of the samurai on the front side of the image, and "in" And an image including the The notice effect by the cut-in image is executed when the chance button 136 is pressed in the second state (in the present embodiment, the vibration + rotation state). The notice effect by the cut-in image may be executed when the chance button 136 is pressed in the first state (in the present embodiment, the normal state). FIG. 290 (c) shows that the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed at the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who won the right and the figure of the warrior who lost it are displayed on the left. At the top of the screen, the word "win" is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 290 (d), the SP reach is completed and the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c is enlarged from the reduction display to the central part of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and displayed normally. Is shown. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 290 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the big hit symbol "special figure A" in a stopped state, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area t1 shows that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit "A" An image is displayed, and "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit Is reported.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above has a chance button 136 as an operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate, and a button image of a display mode of "vibration + rotation" as a second display. And a decorative symbol display device 208 as display means capable of displaying at least the display of. The chance button 136 is a means capable of taking one of a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a normal state as the first state, and the plurality of states. Is at least one of vibration and rotation as a second state. The chance button 136 is a means capable of changing the state from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state in the operation effective period of the chance button 136. The decorative symbol display device 208 is a means capable of at least displaying a button image of the display mode of “vibration + rotation” when the chance button 136 is in the normal state (see FIG. 289 (i)). The display of the button image of the display mode of “vibration + rotation” is a display that at least corresponds to the vibration + rotation state of the chance button 136. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there are cases where the operation means can be characterized.

  Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 is a means capable of continuing the display of the button image of the display mode of "vibration + rotation" even when the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state. (Refer to FIG. 289 (j) and (k)). Since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can be changed to a state corresponding to the display of the button image of the display mode of “vibration + rotation” in which the chance button 136 was previously displayed, the chance button 136 in the normal state is changed. In some cases, it may be possible for the player to select whether to operate or to operate the chance button 136 in the vibration + rotation state.

  Moreover, the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example is provided with the special figure 1 display apparatus as a symbol display means which can perform at least a symbol change display. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 is at least a period that can be set in one symbol variation display (in the present embodiment, in the reach effect). According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there are cases where it is possible to cause the state of the operation means to function as a notice by associating the currently-executed symbol variation display with the state of the operation means.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as effect means capable of at least executing a plurality of types of effects. At least one of a plurality of types of effects is an effect using the button image shown in FIGS. 289 (g) to (k) as the first effect and the character string (operation request image) of "continuous hit", At least one of the plurality of types of effects is an effect using an animation in which the Bancho shown in FIG. 289 (I) as the second effect breaks the clothes and a character string of "super hot". The second effect is at least an effect that can be performed in relation to the chance button 136 being operated, and the first effect is information on the operation of the chance button 136 for the second effect to be performed. It is an effect that includes at least. The information related to the operation is information for at least notifying that the operation of the chance button 136 is performed a plurality of times (in the present embodiment, a continuous hit). According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the player may be given unexpectedness by changing the second effect depending on the timing at which the chance button 136 is operated. In some cases, it is possible to select the timing for operating the

(Examples 8-9)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 9 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 291. 291 (a) to 291 (h) show, in this order, the effects of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 291 (a) shows the effect following FIG. 289 (o), and is the same as FIGS. 289 (a) to 289 (o) up to FIG. 291 (a).

  FIG. 291 (a) shows a state in which the deca-button image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d during the punitive reach effect. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started along with the start of display of the big button image. Further, the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state, and the display mode of the big button image is “normal”.

  FIG. 291 (b) shows a state where the display mode of the deca-button image is changed from “normal” to “vibration + rotation”. On the other hand, the state of the chance button 136 is the normal state. For this reason, a rule collapse occurs in which the state of the chance button 136 and the big button image do not correspond.

  FIG. 291 (c) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated when the state of the chance button 136 is in the normal state. In FIG. 291 (c), the state of the chance button 136 and the button image do not correspond to each other in the broken state, and the chance button 136 is changed to the “vibration + rotation” state. Is being operated by the player.

  FIG. 291 (d) shows a state in which the notice effect is started in relation to the chance button 136 being operated in the normal state. At approximately the center of the effect display area 208d, the character string of "chance" and the character image of Echigoya are displayed below the character string of "chance" instead of the decabutton image of the display mode of "vibration + rotation". It is running. The advance notice effect is executed when the chance button 136 is pressed in the first state (in the present embodiment, the normal state). On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is operated in the second state (in the present embodiment, the vibration + rotation state), the notice effect by the cut-in image shown in FIG. 290 (b) is executed. As described above, the effects to be performed may be different depending on the state when the chance button 136 is operated. Note that the same effect may be performed regardless of the state when the chance button 136 is operated.

  FIG. 291 (e) shows a state in which a scene in which the samurai who is displayed on the left of the deca-button image in FIGS. 291 (a) to (d) has won the battle is displayed. "Decoration 3" is displayed at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the figure of the samurai who has won the right and the figure of the warrior who has lost to the left are displayed. The character string of "win" is displayed in the upper part of the screen, and the subversive reach effect ends, and the SP reach effect ends.

  Further, in FIG. 291 (e), the operation effective period of the chance button 136 has ended. In this example, as shown in FIG. 291 (c), since the chance button 136 is operated by the player before the chance button 136 changes to the second state (vibration + rotation state in this embodiment), The operation valid period has ended without the chance button 136 changing to the second state.

  FIG. 291 (f) shows a state in which SP reach is completed and the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c is enlarged from the reduction display to the central part of the image display area of the decoration symbol display device 208 and displayed normally. Is shown. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 291 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c. In this example, as shown in FIG. 291 (c), since the player operates the chance button 136 before the chance button 136 changes to the second state, as shown in FIG. 289 (r) to FIG. 290 (b). The effect shown is not executed, and the SP reach is ended in the state where the fluctuation time is left. For this reason, the time of temporary stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the decorative symbol is made relatively long, and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the decoration symbol is matched with the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special figure 1.

  FIG. 291 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure A of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1 displays an "A" image indicating that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is hit, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, of the decorative symbol display device 208 "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on 208c, and it is notified that the special view 1 variation game is a big hit.

  In the present embodiment, during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 is operated in the first state (see FIGS. 291 (c) and (d)), and the chance button 136 is the second. The effects performed in the case of being operated in the state (see FIGS. 290 (a) and (b)) are different. As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment varies the content of the effect to be performed in relation to the operation of the chance button 136 according to the operation timing of the chance button 136 by the player, and the variation of the effect Can be increased.

(Examples 8-10)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 10 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIGS. 292 (a) to 292 (j) show, in this order, the effects of the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 292 (a) shows the effect following on from FIG. 289 (o), and is the same as FIG. 289 (a) to FIG. 289 (o) up to FIG. 292 (a). Moreover, since the state shown to FIG. 292 (a)-FIG. 292 (c) is the same as FIG. 291 (a)-FIG. 291 (c), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 292 (d) shows a state in which the notice effect is started in relation to the chance button 136 being operated in the normal state (first state) during the operation valid period. At approximately the center of the effect display area 208d, the character string of "chance" and the character image of Echigoya are displayed below the character string of "chance" instead of the decabutton image of the display mode of "vibration + rotation", and the notice effect of the variation is executed. It is done. The notice effect is an effect to be executed when the chance button 136 in the normal state is operated. The advance notice effect shown in FIG. 292 (d) is the same as the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 291 (d), but in the present embodiment, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 continues in FIG. Be done.

  FIG. 292 (e) shows a state in which a button image of a display mode of "normal" is displayed instead of the character string "chance?" And the character image of Echigoya. In addition, the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state. As a result, the rule collapse occurs in which the state of the chance button 136 and the button image do not correspond. The broken law shown in FIG. 292 (e) is a broken law in which the chance button 136 is in the vibration + rotation state and the display mode of the button image is “normal”. On the other hand, the broken law shown in FIG. 292 (b) is a broken law in which the chance button 136 is in the normal state and the display mode of the deca-button image is “vibration + rotation”. For this reason, in FIG. 292 (e), it is shifted to another rule collapse as shown in FIG. 292 (b).

  FIG. 292 (f) shows a state in which the player operates the chance button 136 when the chance button 136 is in the vibration + rotation state (second state) during the operation valid period.

  FIG. 292 (g) shows a state in which the cut-in image is displayed and the advance effect is performed. The notice effect using the cut-in image is performed when the chance button 136 is pressed in the second state (in the present embodiment, the vibration + rotation state).

  FIG. 292 (h) shows that the samurai has won the battle. "Decoration 3" is displayed at the center of the screen, and the figure of the samurai who won the right and the figure of the warrior who lost it are displayed on the left. At the top of the screen, the word "win" is displayed. In addition, when the operation effective period of the chance button 136 ends, the chance button 136 changes from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 292 (i), SP reach is completed and the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c is enlarged from the reduction display to the central part of the image display area of the decoration symbol display device 208 and displayed normally. Is shown. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 292 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. On the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure "special figure A" of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1, an "A" image is displayed which indicates that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a hit. "Decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right-hand symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is reported that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit .

  The decorative symbol display device 208 (display means) is a means capable of displaying at least a button image of the "normal" display mode shown in FIGS. 292 (e) and (f) as the first display. The decorative symbol display device 208 is a means capable of displaying at least a button image of the “normal” display mode when the chance button 136 is in the vibration + rotation state. Further, the button image of the “normal” display mode is a display corresponding at least to the normal state of the chance button 136. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the rule breaking that the state of the chance button 136 and the display regarding the chance button 136 do not correspond.

(Examples 8-11)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 11 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 293 (a) to FIG. 293 (o) show, in this order, the effects of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 293 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. In the special view 1 display device 212, the special view variation display is being executed, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is being executed. Further, a special LED 1 on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 is turned on to notify that the special view 1 has a single reserve. It is reported that the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220 is all turned off and there is no reserve of special figure 2. Also, the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 293 (a), a fourth symbol display area is provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper side in the fourth symbol display area is the fourth symbol display area u1 for the special figure 1 and the lower side is the fourth symbol display area u2 for the special figure 2. When the result of the special figure fluctuation game is a release, an image representing "Δ" is displayed as a fourth symbol, and in the case of a hit, an image representing "o" is displayed. In addition, while the special figure fluctuation game is being executed, a white background image is displayed in the corresponding fourth symbol display area u1, u2. In FIG. 293 (a), since the special figure 1 variation game is being executed, a white background image is displayed in the fourth figure display area u1 for special figure 1, and the last in the fourth figure display area u2 for special figure 2 The "△" image representing the result of the special figure 2 variation game of is displayed stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 293 (a), the area surrounded by a square frame in the lower center of the effect display area 208d is provided with a change icon display area B capable of displaying a change icon. The fluctuation icon is an icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area B when the suspension is digested and the special figure fluctuation game is started. By changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon in the fluctuation icon display area B, notification of the success or failure of the special figure fluctuation game can be made with a predetermined reliability (the fluctuation advance notice). In FIG. 293 (a), the variation icon b1 having the same display manner as the normal hold display manner (default display manner) shown in FIG. 15 (a) is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area B.

  Note that the frame-shaped image on the outer periphery of the fluctuation icon display area B may be displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the fluctuation icon is not displayed in the fluctuation icon display area B) , May be always displayed, or may not always be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 293 (a), a special-image 1 reserved icon display area A having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided adjacent to the variable icon display area B at the lower left side in the effect display area 208d. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area A, the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 etc. of the number according to the number of reserve is displayed. In addition, whether the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game related to the hold is notified or not can be notified (predictive notice) with a predetermined reliability by the display mode of the special figure 1 reserve icon. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four special drawing 1 holding icons can be displayed in the special drawing 1 holding icon display area A. The plurality of special view 1 hold icons are displayed in order from right to left in the special view 1 hold icon display area as the hold order becomes lower. In FIG. 293 (a), the hold icon a1 of the display mode of normal hold shown in FIG. 15 (a) is displayed in the special view 1 hold icon display area A.

  In the present embodiment, only the special view 1 reserve icon display area is displayed, but the special view 2 reserve icon display area may be displayed together. In that case, for example, a special-figure 2 reserved icon display area with a vertically long rectangular shape may be provided adjacent to the right side surface of the effect display area 208d. The special figure 2 reserve icon display area is not displayed when there is no reserve for special figure 2 and is displayed only when the reserve for special figure 2 is accumulated, but it may be always displayed .

  FIG. 293 (b) shows a state in which one game ball enters the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the reserve of the special figure 1 increases by one. The second LED from the left of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 is turned on, and a reserve icon a 2 is newly displayed in the special view 1 reserve icon display area A. The hold icon a 2 is a button hold icon in a display mode imitating the chance button 136. Further, the display mode of the hold icon a2 is a display mode of “normal” shown in FIG. 22A, and the hold icon a2 corresponds to the normal state of the chance button 136. Further, the chance button 136, which is a button hold icon, has a function as a prefetch notice as to whether or not the special figure 1 change game with the hold order is second. Also, the button hold icon is an example of a button image. Further, in synchronization with the display start of the hold icon a2 which is the button hold icon, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  FIG. 293 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In addition, the fluctuation icon b1 is erased near the start of temporary stop display of the left symbol.

  FIG. 293 (d) shows a state in which “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c. FIG. 293 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first off symbol "special figure I" in the stop display, and the left middle right pattern display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c displays the "decoration 3-decoration 1-decor 8" in the stop display. An “Δ” image is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1 to notify that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been released. Further, during execution of the special figure 1 variation game (first symbol variation display) shown in FIGS. 293 (a) to 293 (e), the state of the chance button 136 is maintained in the normal state.

  FIG. 293 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. The start order of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, in this example, one LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off and the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display, and further the fourth symbol display for the special figure 1 The fourth symbol in the area t1 starts the variable display, and then the special animation 1 icon reduction icon animation is executed, and then the decorative symbol variable display is started. Note that the order of the start points of these operations may be reversed.

  In the display of the reduction animation of the special figure 1 reserve icon, the special figure 1 reserve icon being displayed starts moving simultaneously in the right direction, and the special figure 1 reserve icon a1 with the first place of reserve order is special figure 1 reserve While entering the variable icon display area B beyond the icon display area A, the hold icon a2 moves to a position one position to the right of the original position and raises the hold order by one and stops. In the figure, the moving direction of the hold icon is indicated by an arrow pointing to the right. Thus, the movement of the button hold icon may be animated. Also, the icon image entering the variation icon display area B is referred to as a variation icon.

  In addition, in relation to the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation game (the second symbol fluctuation display) shown in Figure 293 (f), the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state. Thus, the chance button 136 may change in state with the start of symbol variation display. Further, as shown in FIG. 293 (f), the state of the chance button 136 is vibration + rotation, and the display mode of the button holding icon is “normal”, so that the rule is broken.

  FIG. 293G shows a state in which the special view 1 suspension icon reduction animation is ended and the special view 1 suspension icon change animation is started. In the special figure 1 pending icon display area A, an effect image is displayed so as to hide the pending icon a2.

  FIG. 293 (h) shows a state in which the special view 1 suspension icon change animation has ended. The display mode of the hold icon a2 which is the button hold icon is changed from "normal" to "vibration + rotation". Thereby, the breaking of the law which arose in FIG. 293 (f) is eliminated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 293 (i), “decoration 2” is displayed on the left symbol display area 208a temporarily, and then, as shown in FIG. 293 (j), “decoration 1” is displayed on the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed temporarily, and after that, the special figure 1 fluctuation game ends. FIG. 293 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first off symbol "special figure I" in a stopped state, and the left middle right figure display area 208a, 208b, 208c displays a "decorative 2-decorative 6-decorative 1" in a stopped state. An “Δ” image is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1 to notify that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been released. In addition, during execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation game (second symbol fluctuation display) shown in Figure 293 (f)-(k), the state of the chance button 136 is maintained in the vibration + rotation state.

  FIG. 293 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. After the special figure 1 fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 212 starts, the special figure 1 hold icon decrease animation is started, and the hold icon a2 which is a button hold icon starts moving toward the change icon display area B, As shown in 293 (m), the hold icon a2 becomes a fluctuation icon and stops in the fluctuation icon display area B. The hold icon a2 that has become a variation icon has a function as a notice of a symbol variation display being executed.

  FIG. 293 (n) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In addition, the hold icon a2 that has become a fluctuation icon near the start of temporary stop display of the left symbol is erased. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends in synchronization with the deletion of the hold icon a2, which is the button hold icon.

  FIG. 293 (o) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208 c and reach effect is started. Although illustration after this is omitted, after the start of the reach effect, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 289 (e) to FIG. 290 (c) is executed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above is provided with a special figure 1 display device 212 as symbol display means capable of at least performing symbol variation display. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 is at least a settable period in a plurality of symbol variation displays. The special figure 1 display device 212 executes the first symbol variation display shown in FIG. 293 (a) to FIG. 293 (e) and then the second symbol variation display shown in FIG. 293 (f) to (k) It is at least a startable means. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 is the period (hereinafter referred to as the “first operation effective period”) shown in FIGS. 293 (b) to 293 (e) during execution of the first symbol variation display. This is a period including the periods shown in FIG. 293 (f) to FIG. 293 (k) during execution of the second symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation effective period”). The first operation valid period and the second operation valid period may be continuous periods. Also, the operation valid period may be interrupted once between the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period. The period in which the operation effective period is temporarily interrupted may be during symbol variation stop display (FIG. 293 (e)). Thus, the operation effective period may be intermittent.

  Further, the chance button 136 is a means capable of at least taking a normal state in the first operation effective period (see FIGS. 293 (b) to 293 (e)), and in the second operation effective period. Is a means capable of changing from the vibration to the rotational state. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to execute a notice in a long period over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with the decorative symbol display device 208 as a display means capable of displaying at least plural types of reserved icons. At least one of the plurality of types of holding icons is the holding icon a2 of the display mode of “normal” shown in FIG. 293 (b) to FIG. 293 (f) as the first holding icon, and plural types of holding At least one of the icons is the hold icon a2 of the display mode of "vibration + rotation" shown in FIG. 293 (h) to FIG. 293 (m) as a second hold icon. The first hold icon is a button hold icon in a display mode imitating the chance button 136, and the second hold icon is a button hold icon in a display mode imitating the chance button 136. According to this embodiment, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the pre-reading notice by the hold icon or to enhance the unexpectedness of the pre-reading notice.

(Examples 8-12)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 294. FIGS. 294 (a) to 294 (d) show, in this order, the effects of the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series. FIG. 294 (a) shows the effect following on from FIG. 293 (j), and is the same as FIGS. 293 (a) to (j) up to FIG. 294 (a).

  FIG. 294 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first off symbol "special figure I" in a stopped state, and the left middle right figure display area 208a, 208b, 208c displays a "decorative 2-decorative 6-decorative 1" in a stopped state. An “Δ” image is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1 to notify that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been released. Further, a special icon 1 holding icon display area A displays a holding icon a2 which is a button holding icon. The display mode of the hold icon a2 is "vibration + rotation", and the chance button 136 is a vibration + rotation state. Further, in the present embodiment, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 ends with the completion of the special view 1 change game.

  FIG. 294 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. The special figure 1 hold icon decrease animation is started after the start of the special figure 1 change display on the special view 1 display device 212, and the hold icon a2, which is a button hold icon, starts moving toward the change icon display area B . In addition, since the chance button 136 has changed from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state due to the end of the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the rule is broken.

  FIG. 294 (c) is a variation in which the display mode of the suspension icon a2 that has become a variation icon is changed after the special icon 1 variation icon movement animation ends and the suspension icon a2 has completely moved to the variation icon display area B. It shows a state in which the icon change animation has been started. The effect image is displayed to hide the fluctuation icon.

  FIG. 294 (d) shows a state in which the variation icon change animation has ended. The display mode of the fluctuation icon is changed from the display mode of "vibration + rotation" to the display mode of the character pattern of the key long.

  As described above, in this example, when the chance button 136 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the display mode of the button holding icon that has become the fluctuating icon after the end of the operation valid period is changed, and the chance is basically An announcement effect (an announcement effect by a third hold icon, see FIGS. 295 (d) to (f) described later) to be started when the button 136 is operated is forcibly executed.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not operate the chance button 136 during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 is normally done after the end of the effective period of operation. In some cases, the player may be given unexpectedness by forcibly executing the notice effect by the third hold icon which is started when the is operated.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 294 (b ′) continuing from FIG. 294 (a), the state of the chance button 136 is maintained in the vibration + rotation state even though the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has ended. In FIG. 294 (c ') continuing from FIG. 294 (b'), the chance button 136 is maintained in the vibration + rotation state, and the variation icon change animation is executed in the variation icon display area B of the decorative symbol display device 208 There is. According to this example, by maintaining the state of the chance button 136 after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 ends in the vibration + rotation state, a button of the display mode of “vibration + rotation” corresponding to the state of the chance button 136 In some cases, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the hold icon so that the player does not miss the effect of the change icon change animation. The chance button 136 may change from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state in synchronization with the end of the variation icon change animation.

(Examples 8-13)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. Fig. 295 (a) to Fig. 295 (i) show, in this order, effects of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 295 (a) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is being executed, which is the same state as shown in FIG. 293 (a).

  FIG. 295 (b) shows a state in which one game ball is inserted into the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the reserve of the special figure 1 is increased by one. The second LED from the left of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 is turned on, and a reserve icon a 2 is newly displayed in the special view 1 reserve icon display area A. The hold icon a2 is a button hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon a2 is "vibration + rotation". Further, the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state, and the rule is broken. Further, in synchronization with the display start of the hold icon a2 which is the button hold icon, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  FIG. 295C shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In addition, the fluctuation icon b1 is erased near the start of temporary stop display of the left symbol.

  FIG. 295 (d) shows a state in which the player operates the chance button 136 in the normal state during the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 295 (e) shows a state in which the special view 1 hold icon change animation has been started in which the display mode of the hold icon a2, which is a button hold icon, is changed in association with the chance button 136 being operated. There is. In the special figure 1 pending icon display area A, an effect image is displayed so as to hide the pending icon a2.

  FIG. 295F shows a state in which the special view 1 suspension icon change animation has ended. The display mode of the hold icon a2, which is a button hold icon, is changed from "normal" to a character pattern of a key-length. The hold icon a2 of the display pattern of the character pattern of the sergeant has a function as a prefetch notice for the special figure fluctuation game with the second hold order. Further, in FIG. 295 (f), "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 295 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first off symbol "special figure I" in the stop display, and the left middle right pattern display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c displays the "decoration 3-decoration 1-decor 8" in the stop display. An “Δ” image is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1 to notify that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been released.

  FIG. 295 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. Special figure 1 hold icon reduction animation is started after the start of the special figure 1 change display on the special view 1 display 212, the hold icon a1 starts to move toward the change icon display area B, and hold of the character pattern of the bancho character The icon a2 moves to a position one position to the right of the original position, raises the hold order by one, and stops. In addition, the special figure fluctuation game which relates to the retention which is shown with the retention icon a2 which was the button retention icon at the beginning of display start is started, movement of the retention icon a2 to the variation icon display area B is an operation of the chance button 136 It is considered as the effective period (see FIG. 293 (m)). However, in the present embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 295 (d), an effect is performed in which the display mode of the hold icon a2 is changed from "vibration + rotation" to the character pattern of the bancho. . In this embodiment, even if the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 295 (e) or later, no new effect is executed, so there is no need to further prompt the operation of the chance button 136, and the chance button is in the operation valid period. The state of 136 has not changed. On the other hand, when the chance button 136 has not been operated by FIG. 295 (h), the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state when the holding order of the special view 1 indicated by the holding icon a2 becomes first. By changing the state, the operation of the chance button 136 is prompted (see FIG. 293 (f)).

  FIG. 295 (i) shows a state in which the special icon 1 suspension icon reduction animation has ended.

  Further, FIGS. 295 (h ') and (i') show a modification of the present embodiment which follows from FIG. 295 (g) in this order. As shown in FIG. 295 (h ′) and (i ′), in the present embodiment, even if the chance button 136 is operated after FIG. 295 (e), no new effect is executed, but the chance button 136 is in the normal state The state may be changed from vibration to rotation + rotation.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, there are cases where it is possible to enhance variations and unexpectedness as pre-reading advance notice by the hold icon.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of holding icons. At least one of the plurality of types of holding icons is a holding icon a2 of a character pattern of a group leader shown in FIG. 295 (f) to FIG. 295 (i) as a third holding icon. The third hold icon is at least a hold icon that can be displayed when the chance button 136 is operated (see FIGS. 295D to 295F). According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the pre-reading notice by the hold icon or to enhance the unexpectedness of the pre-reading notice.

(Examples 8-14)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourteenth example of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 296. FIGS. 296 (a) to 296 (g) show, in this order, the effects of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 296 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed, which is the same state as shown in FIG. 293 (a).

  FIG. 296 (b) shows a state in which one game ball enters the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the reserve of the special figure 1 increases by one. The second LED from the left of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 is turned on, and a reserve icon a 2 is newly displayed in the special view 1 reserve icon display area A. The hold icon a2 is a button hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon a2 is a display mode that simulates a state in which the chance button 136 protrudes upward. In the present embodiment, it is impossible for the chance button 136 to change to a state in which it protrudes upward. Therefore, the hold icon a2 shown in FIG. 296 (b) is a display corresponding to a state where the chance button 136 can not be taken. Further, since the state of the chance button is a normal state and the hold icon a2 which is a button hold icon is a display mode imitating a state where the chance button 136 protrudes upward, the state of the chance button 136 and the display of the button hold icon There is a breakdown of the law that does not correspond to Further, in synchronization with the display start of the hold icon a2 which is the button hold icon, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  FIG. 296 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In addition, the fluctuation icon b1 is erased near the start of temporary stop display of the left symbol.

  FIG. 296 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In addition, regardless of the switching of the symbol variation display (temporary stop display of "decoration 8"), the chance button 136 changes its state from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state, and the rule collapse that occurred in FIG. 296 (b) It has shifted to another law breakdown.

  FIG. 296 (e) shows a state where the player operates the chance button 136.

  FIG. 296 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first off symbol "special figure I" in the stop display, and the left middle right pattern display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c displays the "decoration 3-decoration 1-decor 8" in the stop display. An “Δ” image is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1 to notify that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been released. In addition, the special figure 1 suspension icon change animation is executed in association with the chance button 136 being operated (see FIG. 295 (e)), and the suspension icon a2 is changed to the display mode of the bancho character image. In the present embodiment, from the display start of the hold icon a2 to the display mode change of the hold icon a2 is included in one symbol variation display.

  FIG. 296 (g) shows a state in which the special view 1 change game is started, which is the same state as shown in FIG. 295 (h). In this embodiment, even if the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 296 (f) or later, no new effect is executed, so the chance button 136 changes its state from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state although it is in the operation valid period. ing.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above can at least display the hold icon a2 shown in FIG. 296 (b) to FIG. 296 (e) as the third display. The third display is a display not corresponding to the first state (normal state) of the chance button 136, and the third display is a display at least corresponding to a state where the chance button 136 protrudes above. The third state is a state in which the chance button 136 can not be taken. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to provide the player with unexpectedness.

  The third display is a display that does not correspond to the second state (vibration + rotational state) of the chance button 136. Moreover, the button image of the display mode of "vibration + rotation" as a 2nd display is displayed in FIG. 296 (a), and it synchronizes with the display start of pending | holding icon a2 shown in FIG. 296 (b) as 3rd display. Then, the chance button 136 may change from the first state to the second state. In other words, the decorative symbol display device 208 may display a third display instead of the second display in relation to the state change of the chance button 136 from the first state to the second state. . As a result, there is a case where it is possible to continue the breaking of the law and maintain the player's expectation for the breaking of the law. In addition, the third display may be used for a premiere effect informing a big hit decision.

(Examples 8-15)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 297 (a) to 297 (q) show, in this order, the effects of the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. The states shown in FIGS. 297 (a) to (h) are the same as those in FIGS. 293 (a) to (h), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 297 (i) shows a state in which the player has operated when the chance button 136 is in the operation valid period and the chance button 136 is in the vibration + rotation state.

  FIG. 297 (j) shows a state in which the hold icon a2 is changed from the display mode of “vibration + rotation state” to the display mode of the character of “heat” in relation to the chance button 136 being operated. There is. As in the present example, when the chance button 136 is operated in the vibration + rotation state, the hold icon a2 is changed to the display mode of the character of “Heat”. On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is operated in a state different from the vibration + rotation state (for example, the normal state), a display mode different from the character of “Heat” (for example, the length shown in FIG. 295 (f) It may be changed to the display mode of the character pattern. As described above, the button hold icon may be changed to a different display mode depending on the state (operation timing) when the chance button 136 is operated.

  In addition, the hold icon of the display mode of the character of "Heat" has a function of prefetching notice for the special figure fluctuation game with the first hold order. As described above, the hold icon of the character display mode is also displayed as the advance notice.

  FIG. 297 (k) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In addition, the chance button 136 changes from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state. The state of the chance button 136 is maintained in the vibration + rotation state until the holding icon a2 is completely moved to the fluctuation icon display area B (FIG. 297 (o)), and then changes to the normal state. It is also good.

  FIG. 297 (l) shows a state in which "decoration 1" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. FIG. 297 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first off symbol "special figure I" in a stopped state, and the left middle right figure display area 208a, 208b, 208c displays a "decorative 2-decorative 6-decorative 1" in a stopped state. An “Δ” image is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1 to notify that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been released.

  FIG. 297 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. After the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 212, the special figure 1 hold icon decrease animation is started, and the hold icon a2 of the display mode of the character of "heat" moves toward the change icon display area B As shown in FIG. 297 (o), the hold icon a2 is stopped in the variation icon display area B.

  FIG. 297 (p) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Moreover, the fluctuation icon of the display mode of the character of "heat" is eliminated near the temporary stop display start of the left symbol. Next, as shown in FIG. 297 (q), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c, and reach effect is started. Although illustration after this is omitted, after the start of the reach effect, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 289 (e) to FIG. 290 (c) is executed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above displays at least the hold icon a2 of the display mode of the character of "heat" shown in FIG. 297 (j) as the third hold icon. It is possible. The third hold icon is a hold icon that can be displayed at least when the chance button 136 is operated (see FIGS. 297 (i) and (j)). According to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the pre-reading notice by the hold icon or to enhance the unexpectedness of the pre-reading notice.

(Examples 8-16)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 16 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 298. FIGS. 298 (a) to 298 (o) show, in this order, the effects of the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 298 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 change game is being executed, which is the same state as shown in FIG. 293 (a).

  FIG. 298 (b) shows a state in which one game ball enters the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the reserve of the special figure 1 increases by one. The second LED from the left of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 is turned on, and a reserve icon a 2 is newly displayed in the special view 1 reserve icon display area A. The hold icon a 2 is a button hold icon in a display mode imitating the chance button 136. Further, the display mode of the reserve icon a2 is a display mode of "vibration + rotation state", and the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state, so that the rule is broken. Further, in synchronization with the display start of the hold icon a2 which is the button hold icon, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  FIG. 298 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In addition, the fluctuation icon b1 is erased near the start of temporary stop display of the left symbol.

  FIG. 298 (d) shows a state in which the player operates the chance button 136 in the normal state during the operation valid period.

  In FIG. 298 (e), the display mode of the hold icon a2 is changed to the default display mode (the display mode of “normal hold” shown in FIG. 15 (a)) in association with the chance button 136 being operated. Show the situation. In the present embodiment, a so-called "gasse effect" is performed in which the pending icon a2 is changed to a default display mode by showing that the reserved icon a2 is changed to a display pattern of a character pattern or a character "Heat".

  FIG. 298 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 298 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 136 has changed from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state. In addition, the state of the chance button 136 may be changed at a timing unrelated to the timing at which the variation display of the decoration symbol is switched (one of the left, middle, and right decoration symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed). Alternatively, the state of the chance button 136 may be configured to change in response to the chance button 136 being operated.

  In FIG. 298 (h), a button image of a display mode of "vibration + rotation" is displayed at the top of the hold icon a2 in the effect display area 208d, and the character string of "Press once more!" It shows the displayed state. By this effect, the player is informed that the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is continuing, and the display mode of the hold icon a2 below the button image is related to the chance button 136 being operated. Can be changed, and the player can be expected to change the hold icon a2. Further, the button image that suggests that the display mode of the hold icon is changed in association with the chance button 136 being operated is an example of the button hold icon.

  FIG. 298 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first off symbol "special figure I" in the stop display, and the left middle right pattern display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c displays the "decoration 3-decoration 1-decor 8" in the stop display. An “Δ” image is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1 to notify that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been released. In addition, the button image displayed in the effect display area 208 d and the character string “Press once more!” Are deleted.

  FIG. 298 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. Along with the decrease of the reserve of the special figure 1 accompanying the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the display of the decrease animation of the special figure 1 reserve icon is executed.

  In addition, with the start of the reduction animation of the special figure 1 reservation icon, the display of the button image of the display mode of "vibration + rotation" is resumed at the upper part of the reservation icon a2, and next to that right is "Press once more!" The display of the string has been resumed. The button image and the character string move to the right with the hold icon a2.

  FIG. 298 (k) shows a state in which the special icon 1 suspension icon reduction animation has ended. In addition, the movement of the button image displayed in the effect display area 208 d and the character string “Press once more!” Is ended.

  FIG. 298 (l) shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 136 in a vibrating + rotating state.

  FIG. 298 (m) shows a state in which the special view 1 suspension icon change animation has been started in association with the chance button 136 being operated. In the special figure 1 pending icon display area A, an effect image is displayed so as to hide the pending icon a2.

  FIG. 298 (n) shows a state in which the special view 1 suspension icon change animation has ended. The display mode of the hold icon a2 of the default display is changed from the default to the display mode of the Bancho character pattern. In addition, the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136 ends in synchronization with the end of the special view 1 suspension icon change animation end.

  FIG. 298 (o) shows a state where the chance button 136 has changed from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state after the end of the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The state of the chance button 136 may be returned to the normal state in association with the operation of the chance button 136 before the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136. In this case, the state of the chance button 136 may be configured to return to the normal state based on the chance button 136 being operated, or a predetermined command from the liquid crystal control unit (described in FIG. And the command of (9) in FIG. 308 may be received so that the state of the chance button 136 returns to the normal state.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above executes the garbled effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon a2 to the default, and then changes the hold icon a2 of the default display mode to the display mode of the character pattern of the bancho . According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there are cases where it is possible to enhance the variation and the unexpectedness of the advance notice by the hold icon.

(Examples 8-17)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 17 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 299. FIGS. 299 (a) to 299 (o) show, in this order, the effects of the special figure variation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 299 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game is being executed, which is the same state as shown in FIG. 293 (a).

  FIG. 299 (b) shows a state in which one game ball enters the special figure 1 start opening 230 and the reserve of the special figure 1 increases by one. The second LED from the left of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 is turned on, and a reserve icon a 2 is newly displayed in the special view 1 reserve icon display area A. The hold icon a 2 is a button hold icon in a display mode imitating the chance button 136. Further, the display mode of the hold icon a2 is the “normal” display mode. On the other hand, the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state. For this reason, the hold icon a2 does not correspond to the state of the chance button 136, and the rule collapse (the first rule collapse) has occurred. Further, in synchronization with the display start of the hold icon a2 which is the button hold icon, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

  FIG. 299 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In addition, the fluctuation icon b1 is erased near the start of temporary stop display of the left symbol.

  FIG. 299 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 8" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 299 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first off symbol "special figure I" in the stop display, and the left middle right pattern display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c displays the "decoration 3-decoration 1-decor 8" in the stop display. An “Δ” image is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1 to notify that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been released. In addition, during execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation game shown in Figure 299 (b)-Figure 299 (e), the state of the chance button 136 is maintained in the vibration + rotation state.

  FIG. 299 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. Further, with the decrease in reserve of special figure 1 accompanying the start of the special figure 1 variation game, the display of the decrease animation of the special figure 1 reserve icon is executed.

  Moreover, before the decrease animation of the special view 1 reserved icon ends, the chance button 136 changes from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state. It should be noted that the chance button 136 may change from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state after the reduction animation of the special view 1 reserved icon is finished. As a result, the breaking of the law is eliminated between the first breaking of the law produced in FIG. 299 (b) and the second breaking of the law occurring in FIG. 299 (h) described later, and the state of the chance button 136 and the button A period corresponding to the image can be provided.

  FIG. 299 (g) shows a state in which the special view 1 suspension icon change animation is started after the reduction animation of the special view 1 suspension icon is finished. In the special figure 1 pending icon display area A, an effect image is displayed so as to hide the pending icon a2.

  FIG. 299 (h) shows a state in which the special view 1 suspension icon change animation has ended. The display mode of the hold icon a2 which is the button hold icon is changed from "normal" to "vibration + rotation". Further, since the state of the chance button 136 is maintained in the normal state, the breaking of the law (the second breaking of the law) occurs.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 299 (i), “decoration 2” is temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then, as shown in FIG. 299 (j), “decoration 1” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed temporarily, and after that, the special figure 1 fluctuation game ends. FIG. 299 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has ended. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the first off symbol "special figure I" in a stopped state, and the left middle right figure display area 208a, 208b, 208c displays a "decorative 2-decorative 6-decorative 1" in a stopped state. An “Δ” image is displayed in the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1 to notify that the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been released. In addition, during execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation game shown in Figure 299 (f)-(k), the state of the chance button 136 is maintained in the normal state.

  FIG. 299 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. The special figure 1 hold icon decrease animation is started after the start of the special figure 1 change display on the special view 1 display device 212, and the hold icon a2, which is a button hold icon, starts moving toward the change icon display area B . In addition, the chance button 136 changes its state from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state as the third state. For this reason, the breaking of the law which arose in FIG. 299 (h) is eliminated. The first state of the chance button 136 is the vibration + rotation state (see FIG. 299 (b)), the second state is the normal state (see FIG. 299 (f)), and the third state is the vibration + rotation It is in the state (see FIG. 299 (l)). Thus, the chance button 136 may be able to change three or more times during the operation valid period. Also, the first state may be the same as or different from the third state.

  FIG. 299 (m) shows a state in which the reserve icon a2 is stopped in the variation icon display area B and the special view 1 reserve icon decrease animation is finished.

  FIG. 299 (n) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In addition, the hold icon a2 that has become a fluctuation icon near the start of temporary stop display of the left symbol is erased. The operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends in synchronization with the deletion of the hold icon a2, which is the button hold icon.

  FIG. 299 (o) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208 c and reach effect is started. Although illustration after this is omitted, after the start of the reach effect, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 289 (e) to FIG. 290 (c) is executed.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, during the effective period of operation of the chance button 136, the state of the chance button 136 and the button hold icon do not correspond to cause the rule breaking to occur a plurality of times (twice). In some cases, it may be possible to give

(Examples 8-18)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In each of FIG. 300 and each of FIGS. 301 to 304 described later, the setting operation unit 137 is schematically shown on the right side of the chance button 136.

  First, an effect example 1 of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 300 (a) to 300 (e). FIGS. 300 (a) to 300 (e) show, in this order, the effect example 1 of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example in time series.

  FIG. 300 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variation game is being executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left corner of the display area, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area. In addition, two LEDs on the left side of the special view 1 reserve lamp 218 are turned on to notify that the special view 1 has two reservations. Further, in the special view 1 pending icon display area A, two pending icons a1 and a2 are displayed. The display mode of the hold icons a1 and a2 is a display mode of normal hold (default). Further, in the variation icon display area B, a variation icon b1 is displayed. The display mode of the variation icon b1 is the same as the display mode of the hold icons a1 and a2.

  Further, FIG. 300 (a) shows a state in which the button effect is started. In the button effect of the present example, a character image of a bancho is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and an image (button image) imitating the chance button 136 on the right from the center of the effect display area 208d. An image resembling (in the following, sometimes referred to as "the operation unit image") is displayed side by side from this left, a character string "press the button twice" is displayed above it, and below it An effective period image representing the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed. The operation request notification of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is executed by displaying the button image, the operation unit image, and the character string. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 300 (a), the operation effective period of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is started, and the whole is displayed in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the rectangular frame shape of the effective period image. In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the operation valid period of the setting operation unit 137 are simultaneously started. Note that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the operation valid period of the setting operation unit 137 may be started at different timings.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300A, the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state, and the display mode of the button image is "vibration + rotation". For this reason, a rule collapse occurs in which the state of the chance button 136 and the button image do not correspond.

  FIG. 300 (b) shows the state during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported. Further, in FIG. 300 (b), the OK button of the setting operation unit 137 is operated (pressed) by the player. The operation of the setting operation unit 137 by the player is shown in a state where the finger of the player is placed on the setting operation unit 137 in the drawing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300 (b), the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state. The state change of the chance button 136 occurs after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the operation effective period. Thereby, the breaking of the law which arose in FIG. 300 (a) is eliminated. The state change of the chance button 136 may occur simultaneously with the start of the operation effective period.

  FIG. 300 (c) shows a state in which the player operates the chance button 136 during the operation valid period. Further, in the effective period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is approximately 2/5.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 300 (a) to 300 (c), the character string "press the button twice" is displayed, and an operation request to press the button of the operation means twice is executed. The operation of the setting operation unit 137 shown in FIG. 300 (b) is pressing of the first button from the start of the operation effective period, and the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 300 (c) is 2 from the start of the operation effective period. It is the second press of the button. When the operation request is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 300 (d), the character string "press button twice", the button image, the operation unit image, and the valid period image are erased, and in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d. A character string of "super heat" is displayed, and a notice effect for a special figure 1 change game in progress is executed.

  FIG. 300 (e) shows a state where the operation effective period has ended. In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the operation valid period of the setting operation unit 137 simultaneously end. Further, in synchronization with the end of the operation effective period, the chance button 136 changes from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state.

  In this example, an image imitating two operation means such as the chance button 136 which is made effective and the setting operation unit 137 is displayed in the effect display area 208 d. The law is broken in at least one of the two operation means (in this example, the chance button 136). The setting operation unit 137 may be changeable to a plurality of states as in the case of the chance button 136, and the rule may be broken between the setting operation unit 137 and the operation unit image.

  Next, an effect example 2 of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 300 (f) to 300 (j). FIGS. 300 (f) to 300 (j) show, in this order, the effect example 2 of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example in time series.

  FIG. 300 (f) shows a state in which the button effect is started during execution of the special view 1 change game. In the button effect of this example, a character image of a bancho is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and a decabutton image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed near the center of the effect display area 208d. The character string of "Please press twice" is displayed, and an effective period image representing the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed below it. An operation request notification of the chance button 136 is executed by displaying the large button image and the character string. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 300 (f), the operation effective period of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is started, and the whole is displayed in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the rectangular frame shape of the effective period image. In this example, only the deca-button image imitating the chance button 136 is displayed in the effect display area 208 d as an image imitating the operation means, and the operation unit image is not displayed. Therefore, the operation valid period of the setting operation unit 137 is started as the operation valid period as the back button (hidden button). Further, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the operation valid period of the setting operation unit 137 are simultaneously started.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300 (f), the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state, and the display mode of the deca-button image is "vibration + rotation". For this reason, a rule collapse occurs in which the state of the chance button 136 and the big button image do not correspond.

  FIG. 300 (g) shows the state during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137. Further, in the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is notified. Further, in FIG. 300 (g), the OK button of the setting operation unit 137 is operated (pressed) by the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300 (g), the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state. The state change of the chance button 136 occurs after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the operation effective period. Thereby, the breaking of the law which arose in FIG. 300 (f) is eliminated.

  In this example, the deca-button image and the character string “press button twice” are displayed, and the operation request to press the chance button 136 twice is executed, but the operation request is not displayed in the effect display area 208 d. It is also determined that the operation of the setting operation unit 137 not being executed is valid and counted. For this reason, after one operation of the setting operation unit 137 shown in FIG. 300 (g), as shown in FIG. 300 (h), it is changed to “press button twice” and “push one time later” A string is displayed, and an operation request indicating the number of remaining operations has been executed. In this manner, the operation request image may be switched to the display of the remaining number of operations in accordance with the operation of the operation means of the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300 (h), a button image of a "normal" display mode is displayed in place of the deca-button image of the "vibration + rotation" display mode. This display switching may be based on the elapse of a predetermined time of the operation valid period, or may be due to the setting operation unit 137 being operated. Also, as shown in FIG. 300 (h), the player operates the chance button 136 during the operation valid period.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 300 (f) and 300 (g), the character string "press the button twice" is displayed, and the operation request to press the chance button 136 twice is executed. The operation of the operation unit 137 is also determined to be valid, and the operation is also counted. The operation of the setting operation unit 137 shown in FIG. 300 (g) is pressing of the first button from the start of the operation effective period, and the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 300 (h) is 2 from the start of the operation effective period. It is the second press of the button. When the operation request is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 300 (i), the character string "press once again", the button image, and the valid period image are erased, and "super heat" is displayed approximately at the center of the effect display area 208d. The character string of is displayed, and the notice effect for the special figure 1 fluctuation game being executed is executed. In addition, since the state shown to FIG. 300 (j) is the same as FIG. 300 (e), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, an image imitating one of the two operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) among the two operation means considered to be operation effective is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the example, an image imitating the setting operation unit 137) is not displayed in the effect display area 208d. However, the operation of the other operation means is also validated and counted.

  Next, an effect example 3 of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 300 (k) to 300 (o). FIGS. 300 (k) to 300 (o) show, in this order, the effect example 3 of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 300 (k) shows a state in which the button effect is started during execution of the special view 1 change game. In the button effect of the present example, a character image of a bancho is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d, and a button image and an operation unit image are displayed in this order from the left from the center to the right of the center of the effect display area 208d. Above it, a character string of “press the button twice” is displayed, and below it, an effective period image representing the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed. The operation request notification of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is executed by displaying the button image, the operation unit image, and the character string. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 300 (k), the operation effective period of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137 is started, and the whole is displayed in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the rectangular frame shape of the effective period image. In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the operation valid period of the setting operation unit 137 are simultaneously started.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 300 (k), the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state, and the display mode of the button image is "vibration + rotation". For this reason, a rule collapse occurs in which the state of the chance button 136 and the button image do not correspond.

  FIG. 300 (l) shows the state during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137. Further, in FIG. 300 (l), the OK button of the setting operation unit 137 is operated by the player.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 300 (l), the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state. The state change of the chance button 136 occurs simultaneously with the start of the operation effective period. Thereby, the breaking of the law which arose in FIG. 300 (k) is eliminated.

  In the present example, a button image, an operation unit image, and a character string “press button twice” are displayed, and an operation request to press the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 twice is executed. Since the operation of the setting operation unit 137 in FIG. 300 (l) is the first depression of the button after the start of the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 300 (j), the “display Instead of the "press twice", the character string "press one more time" is displayed, and an operation request representing the number of remaining operations is executed. In this manner, the operation request image may be switched to the display of the remaining number of operations in accordance with the operation of the operation means of the player.

  FIG. 300 (m) shows a state in which the button image is erased. In this example, the setting operation unit 137 is operated in FIG. 300 (l), and the image relating to the operation means not operated is deleted. Thus, the image simulating the operation means may be erased in the order determined in advance according to the operation of any operation means, regardless of the operated operation means.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 300 (m), the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation effective period. Further, in the effective period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is approximately 2/5.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 300 (k) and 300 (l), the character string "press button twice" is displayed, and an operation request to press the button of the operation means twice is executed. The operation of the setting operation unit 137 shown in FIG. 300 (l) is pressing of the first button from the start of the operation effective period, and the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 300 (m) is 2 from the start of the operation effective period. It is the second press of the button. When the operation request is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 300 (n), the character string “press once again”, the operation unit image, and the valid period image are erased, and “super heat” is displayed at about the center of the effect display area 208d. The character string “” is displayed, and the notice effect for the special figure 1 floating game in progress is executed. In addition, since the state shown to FIG. 300 (o) is the same as FIG. 300 (e), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above includes the decorative symbol display device 208 as an effect means capable of at least performing a plurality of effects. At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect. At least one of the plurality of effects is a second effect. The first effect is the effect shown in FIG. 300 (b), (c), FIG. 300 (g), (h) or 300 (l), (m). The second effect is the effect shown in FIGS. 300 (d), (i) and (n). The first effect is an effect including at least information on the operation of the operation means for the second effect to be executed, and the information on the operation of the operation means requires one or more operations of the operation means Information (at least two depressions in this example) notifying at least that. According to this embodiment, the player may be able to select which operation means to operate.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate. At least one of the plurality of operation means is the chance button 136 as the first operation means, and at least one of the plurality of operation means is the setting operation unit 137 as the second operation means. . The chance button 136 is a means that can be accepted at least in the operation valid period, and the setting operation unit 137 is a means that can be accepted at least in the operation valid period. The chance button 136 is a means capable of taking one of a plurality of states, and at least one of the plurality of states is a normal state as the first state, and the plurality of states. Is at least one of vibration and rotation as a second state. The chance button 136 is a means capable of at least changing from the first state to the second state in the operation effective period (see FIGS. 300 (b), (g), (g)). According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a game console characterized by a plurality of operation means.

  Further, the setting operation unit 137 as the second operation means may be a means capable of taking any one of a plurality of states. In this case, the setting operation unit 137 may be means capable of at least changing the state from the first state to the second state in the operation valid period. The state changeable operation means may be only the chance button 136 as the first operation means, or may be only the setting operation unit 137 as the second operation means.

(Examples 8-19)
Next, the effects of a pachinko machine 100 according to a nineteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, an effect example 1 of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 301 (a) to 301 (e). FIG. 301 (a)-FIG. 301 (e) have shown the presentation of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 by this example in time series in this order.

  FIG. 301 (a) shows a state in which a button effect is started as one aspect of the reach effect of the special view 1 change game. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c is reduced in size at the upper left corner of the display area, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed at 208c, the variation display of the decoration symbol is executed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area.

  Further, in the button effect of this example, a character image of a bancho is displayed on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and an image (button image) imitating the chance button 136 and the upper side on the center right side of the effect display area 208d. A character string of “long press” is displayed, and an effective period image representing the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed below the button image. By displaying the button image and the character string, the operation request notification of the chance button 136 is executed. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 301 (a), the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started, and the whole is displayed in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the rectangular frame shape of the effective period image. Note that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 may be started after the start of the operation request notification.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 301 (a), the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state, and the display mode of the button image is "vibration + rotation". For this reason, a rule collapse occurs in which the state of the chance button 136 and the button image do not correspond.

  FIG. 301 (b) shows the state during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported. Further, in FIG. 301 (b), the chance button 136 is operated by the player for a long time.

  FIG. 301 (c) continues to FIG. 301 (b) and shows the state in which the player long-presses the chance button 136 during the operation effective period. Also, in the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation valid period is approximately 2/5. Also, the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state, and the breaking of the law is resolved. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed for a predetermined time or longer in the normal state, the chance button 136 is configured to change from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state, but the operation of the chance button 136 is effective. The state of the chance button 136 may be configured to change from the normal state to the vibration + rotational state in accordance with the passage of a predetermined time period.

  FIG. 301 (d) shows a state where the player long-presses the chance button 136 during the operation effective period, following FIG. 301 (c). Further, in the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation valid period is short.

  FIG. 301 (e) shows a state where the operation effective period has ended. The long press operation of the chance button 136 by the player is ended. Further, in relation to the operation of long pressing the chance button 136 performed across FIGS. 301 (b) to 301 (d), an animation in which the Bancho breaks the clothes is displayed on the center left side of the effect display area 208d. In addition, the “long press” character string, the button image, and the valid period image displayed on the center right side of the effect display area 208 d are deleted and the “super hot” character string is displayed in place. Further, in synchronization with the end of the operation effective period, the chance button 136 changes from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state.

  As in the present example, the state of the chance button 136 may change in association with the long press operation of the chance button 136, and the change in the state may eliminate the breakdown of the rule. Further, the state of the chance button 136 may change in association with the long press operation of the chance button 136, and the state change may cause a breakdown of the law.

  Next, an effect example 2 of the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 301 (f) to 301 (j). FIG. 301 (f) to FIG. 301 (j) show, in this order, the effect example 2 of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 301 (f) shows the state following FIG. 301 (a).

  FIG. 301 (f) shows a state where the player does not operate the chance button 136, unlike FIG. 301 (b). As described above, in the present production example, compared with the production example 1, the operation start of the chance button 136 by the player is delayed, and the period in which the chance button 136 is pressed and held becomes shorter compared to the production example 1 .

  FIG. 301 (g) shows a state in which the player has started the long press operation of the chance button 136 in the normal state when the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is reduced by about 1/2.

  FIG. 301 (h) shows a state in which the player long-presses the chance button 136 during the operation effective period, following FIG. 301 (g). Further, in the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation valid period is approximately 2/3. Also, the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state, and the breaking of the law is resolved. In the present example, when the chance button 136 is pressed for a predetermined time or longer in the normal state, the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state. In this example, since the start of the long press operation of the chance button 136 is delayed as compared with the effect example 1, the state change of the chance button 136 is delayed by the delay.

  FIG. 301 (i) shows a state where the player long-presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period, following FIG. 301 (h). Further, in the valid period image, the rod-like portion is further shortened in the left direction, and the operation valid period is short.

  FIG. 301 (j) shows a state where the operation effective period has ended. The long press operation of the chance button 136 by the player is ended. Also, in relation to the operation (long press) of the chance button 136 performed across FIGS. 301 (g) to 301 (i), the character string of “long press” displayed on the center right side of the effect display area 208d. , The button image, and the valid period image are deleted, and instead, the text "chance" is displayed. Further, in synchronization with the end of the operation effective period, the chance button 136 changes from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the effect (second effect) to be executed in relation to the operation of the chance button 136 is different according to the period when the chance button 136 is actually operated. It is done. In addition, when the period when the chance button 136 was actually operated is still shorter, it may be comprised so that the presentation relevant to operation of the chance button 136 may not be performed, and the period when the chance button was actually operated The effects to be performed may be configured to be different regardless of whether or not the chance button 136 is operated, or the effects may be configured to be the same.

  Also, the effects shown in FIGS. 301 (a) to 301 (d) and 301 (f) to 301 (i) are effects as the first effect, and the first effect is that of the chance button 136. It contains at least information that requires a long press operation. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player may be given unexpectedness by changing the second effect depending on the timing when the long press operation of the chance button 136 is started.

(Example 8-20)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 20 of the present embodiment will be described using FIG. FIG. 302 (a)-FIG. 302 (h) have shown in this order the production example of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 by a present Example by a time series.

  FIG. 302 (a) shows a state in which the button effect is started as one aspect of the reach effect of the special figure 1 fluctuation game (hereinafter, the button effect in FIG. 302 to FIG. 304 is referred to as timing press effect is there). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c is reduced in size at the upper left corner of the display area, and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed at 208c, the variation display of the decoration symbol is executed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the effect display area 208d is enlarged at the center of the display area.

  Further, in the timing press effect of this example, a character image of a bancho is displayed on the center left side of the effect display area 208d, and a character string of "press at a good timing" is displayed above the center right side of the effect display area 208d. ing. Further, below the character string, a downward arrow image and an image (button image) imitating the chance button 136 are displayed in this order from the left. The display mode of the button image is "vibration + rotation state". Furthermore, below the downward arrow image and the button image, an effective period image representing the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed. In addition, the effective period image is displayed as a rod shape of a predetermined color in the entire rectangular frame shape, and a partial area (operation optimum period display area) in the rectangular frame shape is displayed in a color different from the predetermined color. ing. Further, the downward arrow image is displayed to indicate the center of the operation optimum period display area.

  Further, the operation request notification of the chance button 136 is executed by displaying the button image and the character string. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 302 (a), the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started, and the whole is displayed in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the rectangular frame shape of the effective period image.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 302 (a), the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state, and the display mode of the button image is "vibration + rotation state". For this reason, a rule collapse occurs in which the state of the chance button 136 and the button image do not correspond.

  FIG. 302 (b) shows the state during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In the valid period image, the rod-like portion is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period is slightly shortened is reported.

  FIG. 302C shows a state in which the rod-like portion is shortened in the left direction in the valid period image and the operation valid period immediately before the chance button 136 has entered the operation optimal period.

  FIG. 302 (d) shows a state where the operation effective period has entered the operation optimum period of the chance button 136 and the operation optimum period has been digested by about 1/2. In addition, the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state at a predetermined timing during the optimum operation period of the chance button 136, and the rule breakdown generated in FIG. 302A is resolved.

  FIG. 302 (e) shows a state immediately before the operation optimum period of the chance button 136 ends. Also, during the optimum operation period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 is maintained in the vibration + rotation state.

  FIG. 302 (f) shows a state where the operation optimum period of the chance button 136 has ended. The operation optimum period display area of the effective period image is erased. Further, in synchronization with the end of the operation optimum period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 changes its state from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state, and the rule collapse occurs again.

  FIG. 302 (g) shows a state in which the rod-like portion of the effective period image disappears and it is notified that the operation effective period of the chance button 136 has ended.

  In FIG. 302 (h), the character string "Press with good timing", the downward arrow image, the button image, and the valid period image are deleted, and the character string "chance" is changed and displayed. It shows a state where the advance notice effect for the variable game has been executed. The advance notice effect is an effect that is executed when the chance button 136 is not operated in the operation optimum period of the operation valid period.

  FIG. 302 (h ') is a modified example of FIG. 302 (h), and shows the state continuing from FIG. 302 (g). When the operation is not performed in the operation optimum period of the operation valid period, the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 302 (h) may not be performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above can execute an effect including the notification of the operation optimum period shown in FIGS. 302 (a) to 302 (g) as the first effect. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to accurately notify the player of the timing of operating the chance button 136.

(Examples 8-21)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 21 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, an effect example 1 of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 303 (a) to 303 (e). FIG. 303 (a) to FIG. 303 (e) show, in this order, effect example 1 of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  Since FIG. 303 (a)-FIG. 303 (c) are the same as the state shown to FIG. 302 (a)-FIG. 302 (c), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 303 (d) shows a state in which the operation optimum period has been digested by about 1/2 after the operation optimum period of the chance button 136 has been entered. The chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state during the optimum operation period of the chance button 136. Also, the chance button 136 is operated by the player during the operation optimum period.

  FIG. 303 (e) shows a state where the operation effective period has ended. Further, in relation to the player operating the chance button 136 in the optimal operation period of the chance button 136, an animation in which the Bancho breaks the clothes is displayed on the center left side of the effect display area 208d. In addition, the character string "Press well" displayed at the center right of the effect display area 208d, the downward arrow image, the button image, and the valid period image are erased, and the character string "super heat" is displayed. ing. Further, in synchronization with the end of the operation effective period, the chance button 136 changes from the vibration + rotation state to the normal state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, an effect of notifying the operation optimum period of the chance button 136 in the button effect is performed, and in relation to the chance button 136 being operated by the player during the operation optimum period, FIG. A notice effect (second effect) for the special figure 1 change game in progress shown in e) is executed. For this reason, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. In the case where the chance button 136 functions as an auto button, even when the player does not operate the chance button 136, the notice effect may be executed, and the operation other than the optimum operation period of the chance button 136 may be performed. An effect when the chance button 136 is operated (for example, an effect shown in FIG. 302 (h)) may be executed.

  Next, production example 2 of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 303 (f) to 303 (h). FIG. 303 (f) to FIG. 303 (h) show, in this order, effect example 2 of the special figure fluctuation game with the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Since FIG. 303 (f) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 302 (a), the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 303 (g) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. In addition, the chance button 136 in the normal state is operated by the player outside the operation optimum period of the operation valid period.

  FIG. 303 (h) shows that “timing” was displayed on the center right side of the effect display area 208d in relation to the player operating the chance button 136 in the normal state outside the optimal operation period of the chance button 136. The character string of "push well", the downward arrow image, the button image, and the validity period image are deleted and the character string of "is a chance" is displayed, and the notice effect for the special figure 1 fluctuation game in progress is executed. There is. Further, in synchronization with the start of the advance notice effect, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is ended.

  As described above, in this example, since the operation of the chance button 136 is performed at an inappropriate timing outside the operation optimum period, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the operation optimum period shown in FIG. 303 (e). In comparison with the preliminary production of, the preliminary production (premature presentation with a low jackpot reliability) with a low degree of expectation to the jackpot is executed.

  Next, an effect example 3 of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 303 (i) to 303 (n). FIG. 303 (i) to FIG. 303 (n) show, in this order, effect example 3 of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series. Note that FIG. 303 (i) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 302 (a), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 303 (j) shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 136 outside the optimum operation period of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 303 (k), the character string "Press well" is displayed at the center right of the effect display area 208d in relation to the chance button 136 being operated outside the optimum operation period of the chance button 136. It is erased and the text "The timing is different !!" is displayed. In addition, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is continued. As described above, in this example, it is informed that the chance button 136 has been operated at an inappropriate timing outside the operation optimum period. Even when the chance button 136 is operated by the player outside the optimal operation period, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is continued.

  FIG. 303 (l) shows a state immediately before the operation optimum period of the chance button 136 is entered, in place of the character string “The timing is different !!” and the character string “Press with good timing” is displayed. It shows. As described above, in this example, the operation in the optimum operation period of the chance button 136 is prompted again.

  FIG. 303 (m) shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 136 in the optimum operation period of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 303 (n) shows a state in which a notice effect related to the player's operation of the chance button 136 in the optimum operation period of the chance button 136 is performed.

  As described above, in this example, it is informed that the chance button 136 has been operated at an inappropriate timing outside the optimal operation period, and even if the chance button 136 is operated at an inappropriate timing, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 The timing is allowed again and again. A player who is not accustomed to the operation of the chance button 136 may be able to operate the chance button 136 in the operation optimum period to enjoy the game.

(Examples 8-22)
Next, the effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 22 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the effects of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 304 (a) to 304 (e). FIG. 304 (a) to FIG. 304 (e) show, in this order, effects of the special figure fluctuation game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 304 (a) shows a state in which the button effect is started. A character image of a bancho is displayed on the center left of the effect display area 208d, and an image (button image) imitating the chance button 136 on the center right of the effect display area 208d and characters of a character string of "long press" above it A column is displayed, and an effective period image representing the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed below the button image. By displaying the button image and the character string, the operation request notification of the chance button 136 is executed. Further, at the time point shown in FIG. 304 (a), the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is started, and the whole is displayed in a rod shape of a predetermined color within the rectangular frame shape of the effective period image.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 304 (a), the state of the chance button 136 is a normal state, and the display mode of the button image is "vibration + rotation". Further, in the present embodiment, the effective period image is displayed in a display mode in which the image vibrates (in the figure, the vibration of the effective period image is represented by a dashed line above and below the effective period image). The valid period image is included in the display related to the operation means. As described above, the case where the state of the chance button 136 does not correspond to the effective period image which is the display according to the operation means may be included in the broken law.

  FIG. 304 (b) shows a state where the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. The display mode of the button image is maintained at "vibration + rotation", the effective period image changes to a non-oscillating state, and the rod-like portion is slightly shortened leftward, and the operation effective period is slightly shortened. It has been informed. Also, the chance button 136 is maintained in the normal state, and the rule collapse between the chance button 136 and the valid period image is eliminated. Since the button image is a display mode of "vibration + rotation" and the display mode of the valid period image is in the normal state, the display mode of the button image does not correspond to the display mode of the valid period image. The case where the correspondence between the displays related to such operation means can not be taken may also be included in the rule breakdown. In addition, the player has begun to press and hold the chance button 136. In addition, since FIG. 304 (c)-FIG. 304 (e) are the same as the state shown to FIG. 301 (c)-FIG. 301 (e), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 304 (b ') shows a state following from FIG. 304 (a), and unlike the case of FIG. 304 (b), the button image changes from the display mode of "vibration + rotation" to the display mode of "normal" In the display mode of the valid period image, the vibration is maintained, and the chance button 136 changes from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state. The valid period image of the display mode of vibration may function as a notice as to whether the chance button 136 shifts from the normal state to the vibration + rotation state.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means of the present example, the chance button 136 is in the state from the first state (in the present example, normal state) to the second state (in the present example, vibration + rotation state). In place of the second display (in the present embodiment, the button image of the display mode of “vibration + rotation” shown in FIG. 304 (a)) in relation to the change, the first display (in the present embodiment, the display It is a means capable of displaying at least a button image of the “normal” display mode shown in 304 (b ′) (see, for example, FIG. 304 (b ′)). According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the rule breaking can be continued even when the chance button 136 changes state, and the player may be able to maintain a sense of expectation for the rule breaking.

(Examples 8-23)
Next, command transmission in effect control of a pachinko machine 100 according to a twenty-third embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIGS. 305 to 308. FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a control system shown in FIG. 305 to 308, command transmission and reception between the liquid crystal control unit and the first sub control unit 400 and command transmission and reception between the first sub control unit 400 and the effect button sensor 426 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 performs effect lottery processing in the effect control process (step S309) of the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 190, and performs the second sub control so as to perform each effect according to the result. Send a control command to the unit 500. The liquid crystal control unit shown in FIGS. 305 to 308 is included in the second sub control unit 500. A liquid crystal control unit may be provided separately from the second auxiliary control unit 500. In this case, the liquid crystal control unit is connected to the first sub-control unit 400 to control the decorative symbol display device 208.

  First, command transmission example 1 in effect control of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 305 is a schematic diagram showing the timing of command transmission in the effect control of this embodiment. FIG. 305 illustrates an example of each command to be transmitted with the passage of time indicated by an arrow from the left to the right. Further, on the bottom of FIG. 305, ON and OFF of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are shown in time series. The level OFF indicates a state in which the chance button 136 is not operated and the level ON indicates a state in which the chance button 136 is operated.

  The liquid crystal control unit transmits a command including information indicating the start of the display of the button image and the valid period image to the first sub control unit 400 when starting the button effect accompanied by the operation of the chance button 136 (1) . When the first sub control unit 400 receives the command, the first sub control unit 400 starts an operation valid period of the chance button 136. By the command, consistency in timing between the display start of the button image and the valid period image in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the start of the operation valid period is obtained.

  Then, when the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the first sub control unit 400 receives a command including information that the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed from the effect button sensor 426 (2) . Next, the first sub-control unit transmits a command including information that the chance button 136 has been operated to the liquid crystal control unit (3). Thus, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fortune telling effect shown in FIG. 283 (d) to FIG. 283 (f), the cut-in image shown in FIG. 290 (b), and the special view 1 reserved icon shown in FIG. A change animation or the like is displayed and an effect is executed. The effect is an example of a second effect.

  Then, when the chance button 136 is operated again during the operation effective period, the first sub control unit 400 receives a command including information that the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed from the effect button sensor 426 (4 ). Next, the first sub-control unit transmits a command including information that the chance button 136 has been operated to the liquid crystal control unit (5). However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fortune telling effect shown in FIG. 283 (d) to FIG. 283 (f), the cut-in image shown in FIG. 290 (b), and the special view 1 icon change shown in FIG. Since the animation and the like are displayed and the second effect is performed, no new effect is performed. Next, the liquid crystal control unit erases the button image, the valid period image, and the like, and transmits a command including information on the termination of the button effect to the first sub control unit 400 (6). The first sub control unit 400 ends the operation valid period of the chance button 136 at the timing when the command is received.

  As in the present example, when operation of one chance button 136 is required during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, a predetermined time period elapses even after the chance button 136 is operated once. The operation effective period may be continued. The operation effective period may be a period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective in order to execute the second effect.

  Next, command transmission example 2 in effect control of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 306 is a schematic diagram showing the timing of command transmission in the effect control of this embodiment. In FIG. 306, an example of each command to be transmitted is illustrated as time passes indicated by an arrow from the left to the right. In the lowermost part of FIG. 306, ON and OFF of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 are shown in time series. The level OFF indicates a state in which the chance button 136 is not operated and the level ON indicates a state in which the chance button 136 is operated.

  The liquid crystal control unit transmits a command including information indicating the start of the display of the button image and the valid period image to the first sub control unit 400 when starting the button effect accompanied by the operation of the chance button 136 (1) . When the first sub control unit 400 receives the command, the first sub control unit 400 starts an operation valid period of the chance button 136. By the command, consistency in timing between the display start of the button image and the valid period image in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the start of the operation valid period is obtained.

  Then, when the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period, the first sub control unit 400 receives a command including information that the operation of the chance button 136 has been performed from the effect button sensor 426 (2) . Next, the first sub-control unit transmits a command including information that the chance button 136 has been operated to the liquid crystal control unit (3). Thus, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fortune telling effect shown in FIG. 283 (d) to FIG. 283 (f), the cut-in image shown in FIG. 290 (b), and the special view 1 reserved icon shown in FIG. A change animation or the like is displayed and an effect is executed. The effect is an example of a second effect.

  In this example, one operation of the chance button 136 is required during the operation effective period, and the liquid crystal control unit erases the button image and the effective period image when the chance button 136 is operated, and ends the button effect The command including the information to be transmitted is transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 (4). The first sub control unit 400 ends the operation valid period of the chance button 136 at the timing when the command is received.

  As in the present example, when the operation of one chance button 136 is requested during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the operation valid period may be ended when the chance button 136 is operated once. . Thus, the operation validity period may be shorter than the originally scheduled period. The operation effective period may be a period in which the operation of the chance button 136 is effective in order to execute the second effect. In addition, when the operation of the chance button 136 is required a plurality of times during the effective period of the operation of the chance button 136, the first secondary control unit 400 counts the number of times of operating the chance button 136 and reaches a predetermined number of times. In this case, the first sub control unit 400 may transmit a command including information to the effect that the chance button 136 has been operated a predetermined number of times to the liquid crystal control unit, or the first sub control each time the chan button 136 is operated. The unit 400 may transmit a command to the liquid crystal control unit, and the liquid crystal control unit may count the number of times the chance button 136 is operated.

  Next, command transmission example 3 in effect control of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 307 is a schematic diagram showing the timing of command transmission in the effect control of this embodiment. FIG. 307 illustrates an example of each command transmitted with the passage of time indicated by an arrow from the left to the right. In the second to the lowest part of FIG. 307, ON and OFF of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are shown in time series. The level OFF indicates a state in which the chance button 136 is not operated and the level ON indicates a state in which the chance button 136 is operated. Further, at the bottom of FIG. 307, the state of the chance button 136 is shown.

  The liquid crystal control unit transmits a command including information indicating the start of the display of the button image and the valid period image to the first sub control unit 400 when starting the button effect accompanied by the operation of the chance button 136 (1) . When the first sub control unit 400 receives the command, the first sub control unit 400 starts an operation valid period of the chance button 136. By the command, consistency in timing between the display start of the button image and the valid period image in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the start of the operation valid period is obtained.

  In this example, the state of the chance button 136 changes from the default state to the first state in synchronization with the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136. In this example, the default state is the normal state and the first state is, for example, the vibration state. The first state is the normal state, and may be the same as the default state.

  Further, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 changes its state from the first state to the second state. The second state of this example is, for example, vibration plus rotation. Prior to the state change of the chance button 136, the liquid crystal control unit transmits a predetermined command to the first sub control unit 400 (2). The first sub control unit 400 having received the command changes the chance button 136 from the first state to the second state. Further, the command includes information in which the button image changes from the display mode corresponding to the first state to the display mode corresponding to the second display mode. When receiving the command, the first sub control unit 400 changes the state of the chance button 136 from the first state to the second state. Thereby, consistency between the state of the chance button 136 and the display mode of the button image is obtained. When only the chance button 136 is changed and the display mode of the button image is not changed, the liquid crystal control unit does not have to transmit the command to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub The control unit 400 may change the state of the chance button 136 from the first state to the second state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the operation effective period.

  Next, the liquid crystal control unit erases the button image, the valid period image, and the like, and transmits a command including information that the button effect ends to the first sub control unit 400 (3). The first auxiliary control unit 400 ends the operation valid period of the chance button 136 at the timing when the command is received, and changes the chance button 136 from the second state to the default state.

  Next, command transmission example 4 in effect control of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 308 is a schematic diagram showing the timing of command transmission in the effect control of this embodiment. FIG. 308 illustrates an example of each command transmitted with the passage of time indicated by an arrow from the left to the right. In the second place from the bottom of FIG. 308, ON and OFF of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are shown in time series. The level OFF indicates a state in which the chance button 136 is not operated and the level ON indicates a state in which the chance button 136 is operated. Further, at the bottom of FIG. 308, the state of the chance button 136 is shown.

  The liquid crystal control unit transmits a command including information indicating the start of the display of the button image and the valid period image to the first sub control unit 400 when starting the button effect accompanied by the operation of the chance button 136 (1) . When the first sub control unit 400 receives the command, the first sub control unit 400 starts an operation valid period of the chance button 136. By the command, consistency in timing between the display start of the button image and the valid period image in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the start of the operation valid period is obtained.

  In this example, the state of the chance button 136 changes from the default state to the first state in synchronization with the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136. In this example, the default state is the normal state and the first state is, for example, the vibration state. The first state is the normal state, and may be the same as the default state.

  Then, when the chance button 136 is operated in the first state during the operation valid period, the first secondary control unit 400 receives a command including information that the chance button 136 has been operated from the effect button sensor 426. (2). Next, the first sub-control unit transmits a command including information that the chance button 136 is operated in the first state to the liquid crystal control unit (3). Thereby, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect when the chance button 136 is operated in the first state (effect corresponding to the first state) (for example, the advance effect shown in FIG. 292 (d)) is executed Do.

  Then, when the chance button 136 is operated again in the first state during the operation valid period, the first sub control unit 400 receives a command including information that the chance button 136 has been operated from the effect button sensor 426 To do (4). Next, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command including information that the chance button 136 has been operated in the first state to the liquid crystal control unit (5). However, since the effect (effect corresponding to the first state) is already performed in the decorative symbol display device 208 when the chance button 136 is operated in the first state, no new effect is performed.

  Further, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136, the chance button 136 changes its state from the first state to the second state. The second state of this example is, for example, vibration plus rotation. Prior to the state change of the chance button 136, the liquid crystal control unit transmits a predetermined command to the first sub control unit 400 (6). As a result, the liquid crystal control unit may control the timing at which the state of the chance button 136 changes, and the effect when the chance button 136 is operated in the second state may be surely performed. The first sub control unit 400 having received the command changes the chance button 136 from the first state to the second state.

  Then, when the chance button 136 is operated in the second state during the operation valid period, the first secondary control unit 400 receives from the effect button sensor 426 a command including information that the chance button 136 has been operated. (7). Next, the first auxiliary control unit 400 transmits a command including information that the chance button 136 has been operated in the second state to the liquid crystal control unit (8). Thereby, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect when the chance button 136 is operated in the second state (an effect corresponding to the second state) (for example, a notice of the cut-in image shown in FIG. 292 (g) Perform the production).

  Next, the liquid crystal control unit erases the button image, the valid period image, and the like, and transmits a command including information on the termination of the button effect to the first sub control unit 400 (9). The first auxiliary control unit 400 ends the operation valid period of the chance button 136 at the timing when the command is received, and changes the chance button 136 from the second state to the default state.

  As in the present example, different effects may be executed for each state at the time of operation of the chance button 136. The effect may be performed once in connection with one operation of the chance button 136 or may be performed multiple times in connection with multiple operations.

(Examples 8-24)
Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, a slot machine (turning game machine) as a game machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention is described. First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 1000 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 309 includes a main body 1001, and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 309) are stored inside the center of the main body 1001. It is configured to be able to rotate internally. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by drive means such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of each symbol are printed on the belt-like members at equal intervals, and the belt-like members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute the respective reels 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed approximately three vertically from the symbol display window 1013, and a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of the symbols seen by the player is changed. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as display means for variably displaying combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reels, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be adopted as such display means. Further, although three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000 in the present embodiment, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  On the back of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel back light (not shown) for illuminating the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded by each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light emitter and a light receiver is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012. The light emitter and the light receiver of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the two. The position in the rotational direction of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of the sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbols are displayed on the pay lines.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a pay line 1014 to be activated. The pay lines to be activated are determined in advance by the number of medals betted as game media. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line becomes effective, and when two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. When three medals are valid and three medals are bet, five lines to which the right down pay line and the upper right pay line are added become valid as the pay lines. The number of pay lines 1014 is not limited to five, and for example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line, the upper horizontal pay line, the lower horizontal pay line, and the right are selected. Five lines of the down pay line and the top right pay line may be made effective as a pay line. Hereinafter, a pay line to be valid may be called a valid line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp for notifying the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The re-playing lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is possible to be re-played (the insertion of medals is unnecessary) when winning in the re-playing which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is a lamp for effect.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. In the present embodiment, up to three sheets are inserted one by one each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, two sheets are inserted when the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, and the medal insertion button 1032 is pressed 3 It is supposed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 1029 lights a lamp of the number according to the inserted medal number, and when there is a specified number of medals inserted, the game start is informed that it is possible to start the game. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically by using the medal input buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted from the medal insertion port 1041 (insertion operation). It is. The stored sheet number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical values. The payout amount display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the number-of-payouts display 1027 are formed of seven-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated to operate the start lever 1035, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. An operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 whose rotation has been started by the operation of the start lever 1035, and are associated with the respective reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, a reel to be subjected to a first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, a reel to be subjected to a second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and a reel to be subjected to a third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitter may be provided inside each stop button 1037 to 1039, and when the operation of the stop button 1037 to 1039 is possible, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing and removing the medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1034 is a button for settling the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  A chance button 1100 is provided on the right side of the medal insertion button 1032. The chance button 1100 can perform an operation related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012 or can perform an operation related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states similarly to the chance button 136 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may be changeable during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting gaming history information of an individual player), and is composed of a plurality of buttons. Since the information display button 1046 is a characteristic component in the present embodiment, its configuration and operation will be described later.

  At the lower part of the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying a model name and pasting various kinds of vouchers is provided, and a title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. At the lower part of the title panel 1062, a medal payout port 1055 and a medal receiver 1061 are provided.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for boosting the game. A rendering device 1060 is disposed above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the rendering device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063 a and a left shutter 1063 b which can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1063. , The effect image display device), and when the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b open outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) It has a structure that appears on the

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information, for example, multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the whole can be viewed by the player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration so that the display screen looks like an odd shape. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

<Information display button>
FIG. 310 (a) is an external perspective view of the information display button 1046, and FIG. 310 (b) is a top view of the information display button 1046. As shown in FIG. 310, the information display button 1046 has a plurality of buttons on a substantially rectangular plane of the information display button unit 1050. That is, the information display button 1046 is a generic name of a plurality of buttons provided in the information display button unit 1050, and more specifically, the determination (call) button 1046O provided in the approximate center of the information display button unit 1050 Call up) An upper selection button 1046 U, a lower selection button 1046 D, a left selection button 1046 L, a right selection button 1046 R provided separately on the left side of the button 1046 O, and a cancel provided separately on the right of the decision (call) button 1046 O And a button 1046C.

  Next, effects of the slot machine 1000 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 311 (a) to 313 (d). First, the configurations shown in FIGS. 311 to 313 and later-described FIGS. 314 to 316 will be described.

  In each drawing, as shown in FIG. 311 (a), the liquid crystal display device 1057, the reels 1010 to 1012 and the chance button 1100 arranged on the front side of the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. A pay line 1014 is shown on the reels 1010 to 1012 that is shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 311 (b), the state in which the reels 1010 to 1012 are rotating is indicated by the outlined arrows.

  FIGS. 311 (a) to 313 (d) show, in this order, the effects of the AT in the slot machine 1000 according to the present embodiment in time series. In addition, AT is an abbreviation for assist time, and AT has a relatively high probability of winning a small winning combination (for example, bell), and when the small winning combination is won, the operating order of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 Is the chance time to be notified to the player.

  FIG. 311 (a) shows a state in which effects of the AT game are being executed. A character string "at AT" indicating that the AT game is in progress is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1057, and a "ban-long" character image is displayed in the center portion. The character string "789G" indicating the number of games digested in the AT game is displayed, the character string "LAST 43G" indicating the number of remaining AT games is displayed at the bottom, and the AT game is displayed at the lower right of the display area. The text "2330 get" indicating the number of medals acquired in is displayed.

  Moreover, FIG. 311 (a) has shown the state which rotation of the reels 1010-1012 stopped. On the reel 1010, a so-called cherry symbol (red) of a special part, a so-called bell symbol (yellow) of a small part, and a so-called replay symbol (blue) of replay are displayed stopped from the top. In addition, on the reel 1011, a bell symbol, a replay symbol, and a cherry symbol are stopped and displayed from the top. Also, on the reel 1012, from the top, a bell symbol, a replay symbol, and a so-called watermelon symbol (green color) of a special part are stopped and displayed. The right up pay line is in a state in which three replay symbols of replay are aligned, and a state in which a replay is won is shown. Also, the chance button 1100 is in the normal state (first state).

  FIG. 311 (b) shows a state where the player operates the start lever 1035 and rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012 is started. In addition, since the game in AT is digested once, “790G” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1057 instead of the character string “789G”, and the character string “LAST 43G” is changed to “LAST "42G" is displayed. Also, the chance button 1100 is maintained in the normal state.

  FIG. 311 (c) shows a state in which the player is notified that the chance to add the number of remaining AT games has arrived. On the liquid crystal display device 1057, the character image of "bancho" is erased, the girl character image is displayed below the character string of "at AT", and the character string of "superposition chance" is displayed below it. .

  FIG. 311 (d) shows a state in which the character string "button hit" is displayed in place of the character string "over chance".

  FIG. 311 (e) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 1100 is started. On the liquid crystal display device 1057, a character image of a girl is reduced and displayed, and an image (button image) imitating the chance button 1100, which is an operation request image of the chance button 1100, is displayed below it. , An effective period image showing an operation effective period of the chance button 1100 is displayed. Further, the effective period image is the same as that shown in FIG. 283 (b) or the like.

  In addition, the chance button 1100 changes in state from the normal state to the vibration state (second state) in synchronization with the start of the operation effective period. For this reason, a rule collapse occurs in which the state of the chance button 1100 and the display mode of the button image do not correspond.

  In (f) of FIG. 311, the bar-like portion of the valid period image is slightly shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period has slightly passed is reported. In addition, the chance button 1100 in the vibration state is operated by the player. Also, the girl character image is displayed above the button image, and the button image and the girl character image are displayed integrally, but the button image represents the chance button 1100. A button image that can be recognized and in this state is also included in the operation request image. As described above, the button image includes not only the one imitating the chance button 1100 as it is but also one partially different from the chance button 1100.

  In FIG. 312 (a) continued from FIG. 311 (f), “+1” is displayed on the left side of the button image in the liquid crystal display device 1057 based on the operation of the chance button 1100 in FIG. 311 (f). It is informed that the number of remaining AT games will be added to one game. In addition, the chance button 1100 in the vibration state is operated by the player three times. Further, the rod-like portion of the valid period image is somewhat shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period has slightly passed is reported.

  In FIG. 312 (b), based on the fact that the chance button 1100 has been operated three times in FIG. 312 (a), the liquid crystal display device 1057 has “+5”, “+1”, which are the number of AT overlays around the button image. , And the character string of "+3" is displayed, and it is informed that the number of remaining AT games is increased by 9 games. In this example, the number of ATs added is notified each time the chance button 1100 is operated. Further, the rod-like portion of the valid period image is somewhat shortened in the left direction, and a state in which the operation valid period has slightly passed is reported.

  In FIG. 312 (c), the character string of "chance" in the button image is changed to the character string of "one blow". The character string of "one blow" is a display prompting one operation of the chance button 1100, and the necessary number of times of operation of the chance button 1100 is notified by the character string. In addition, the character string of "chance" is changed to the character string of "striking", and a part of the button image is different from the state imitating the chance button 1100, but the outline of the button image is identical to the outline of the chance button 1100. As a result, the player can recognize that the button image including the character string of “one strike” represents the chance button 1100.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 312 (c), the button image is changed to the display mode of "vibration state" and displayed. Further, the chance button 1100 changes to a state (hereinafter referred to as “vibration + emission state”) (third state) of emitting light in a predetermined color (for example, blue) while vibrating. For this reason, it has shifted to another law collapse from the law collapse which arose in Drawing 311 (e). Thus, the chance button 1100 may be changeable to the light emission state. In addition, it is reported that the rod-like portion of the effective period image is somewhat shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is digested about 2/5.

  In FIG. 312 (d), it is reported that the rod-like portion of the effective period image is somewhat shortened in the left direction, and the operation effective period is digested about 2/3. In addition, the chance button 1100 of the vibration + emission state is operated once by the player.

  FIG. 312 (e) shows a state in which the girl character image, the button image, and the validity period image are erased in the liquid crystal display device 1057, and the "bancho" displays an animation that breaks the clothes. Moreover, in FIG. 312 (e), the operation effective period of the chance button 1100 is complete | finished. Also, in the upper right part of the character image of the Bancho, a character string of "+250", which is the AT overlay number, is displayed based on the operation of the chance button 1100 in FIG. 312 (d). It is informed that the number is additionally 250 games. In addition, the chance button 1100 is maintained in the vibration + emission state.

  FIG. 312 (f) shows a state in which the total number of additions by the AT addition effect performed in FIGS. 312 (a) to 312 (e) is notified. The character image of the Bancho breaking the clothes displayed at the center of the display area is moved to the left and displayed, and the characters "+1", "+5", "+1", "+3", and "+250" The column is erased and instead the string "Total + 260" is displayed. Also, the chance button 1100 changes from the vibration + light emission state to the normal state.

  FIG. 313 (a) continuing from FIG. 312 (f) shows a state in which the animation in which the display image of the number of remaining games of AT changes is started. On the liquid crystal display device 1057, an effect image is displayed so as to hide the character string portion of "42G" that displays the number of remaining AT games.

  FIG. 313 (b) shows a state in which the animation in which the display image of the number of remaining games of AT changes is ended. The character string "302 G" is displayed in place of the character string "42 G" that indicates the number of remaining AT games of the liquid crystal display device 1057. In addition, the rotation of the reel 1010 is stopped based on the fact that the player operates the stop button 1037. The stop symbols of the reel 1010 are, from the top, the special replay symbol of the jackpot, the cherry symbol, and the watermelon symbol.

  FIG. 313 (c) shows a state in which the rotation of the reel 1011 is stopped based on the fact that the player operates the stop button 1038. The stop symbols of the reel 1011 are, from the top, a replay symbol, a watermelon symbol, and a bell symbol.

  FIG. 313 (d) shows a state in which the reel 1012 has stopped rotating based on the player operating the stop button 1039. The stop symbols of the reel 1012 are, from the top, a watermelon symbol, a cherry symbol, and a special replay symbol. As a result, the cherry pattern of the special part is stopped in the middle of the reel 1010 and the cherry pattern is won, and three watermelon patterns of the special part are aligned on the upper right winning line and the watermelon pattern is won. As described above, when winning the special role cherry pattern and watermelon pattern, the number of remaining AT games is added.

  The slot machine 1100 according to the present embodiment described above includes a plurality of operation means such as a chance button 1100, stop buttons 1037 to 1039, and a start lever 1035. According to the slot machine 1000 of the present embodiment, there may be a case where a plurality of operation means can be characterized.

(Examples 8-25)
Next, effects of the slot machine 1000 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 314 (a) to 315 (f). FIGS. 314 (a) to 315 (f) show, in this order, the effects of the AT in the slot machine 1000 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 314 (a) shows a state where effects of the AT game are being executed, which is the same as the state shown in FIG. 311 (a).

  FIG. 314 (b) shows a state in which the reels 1010 to 1012 are short frozen without the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012 being started although the player operated the start lever 1035 (in the figure, the reels 1010 to 1010). The state where 1012 is short frozen is represented by a dashed line). Also, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, the operation valid period as the back button of the chance button 1100 is started. During the operation valid period as the back button of the chance button 1100, the button image and the valid period image are not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1057.

  FIG. 314 (c) shows a state in which the player operates the chance button 1100 in the normal state while the reels 1010 to 1012 continue the short freeze.

  FIG. 314 (d) shows that, on the liquid crystal display device 1057, the character image of the key long moves to the left and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1057 based on the chance button 1100 being operated, and the number of remaining AT games is increased. The suggested “overlay” character string is displayed in black in the center of the display area. In addition, rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012 that have been short frozen has been started.

  Further, in FIG. 314 (d), the chance button 1100 is operated three times. In the first and second operations, the chance button 1100 is in the normal state, and in the third operation, the chance button 1100 is changed to the vibrating state. In this example, the chance button 1100 changes from the normal state to the vibrating state based on the second operation. Thus, the chance button 1100 may be changed in state when operated.

  FIG. 314 (e) shows a state in which the character string of "overlay" is changed from black to blue based on the fact that the chance button 1100 in the vibration state is operated. This causes the player to expect additional ATs to be added.

  Also, it shows that the rotation of the reel 1010 is stopped based on the fact that the player operates the stop button 1037. The stop symbols of the reel 1010 are, from the top, a special replay symbol, a cherry symbol, and a watermelon symbol. In addition, the chance button 1100 is maintained in a vibrating state. Further, in the present example, after the operation of the stop button 1037, the operation valid period of the chance button 1100 is continued.

  FIG. 314 (f) shows a state in which the chance button 1100 in the vibration state is operated by the player.

  From FIG. 314 (f), FIG. 315 (a) shows that the character string of “overlay” changes from blue to green based on the player operating the chance button 1100 in the vibrating state in FIG. 314 (f). It shows the changed and displayed state. By this effect, the player is expected to perform additional AT remaining times. In addition, the chance button 1100 is maintained in a vibrating state.

  FIG. 315 (b) shows a state in which the reel 1012 has stopped rotating based on the player operating the stop button 1039. The stop symbols of the reel 1012 are, from the top, a watermelon symbol, a cherry symbol, and a special replay symbol. Further, in this example, after the stop button 1039 is operated, the operation valid period of the chance button 1100 is continued. In addition, the chance button 1100 changes from the vibration state to the normal state, and the player operates the chance button 1100 in the normal state. In the present embodiment, the chance button 1100 changes its state from the first state (in the present embodiment, the normal state) to the second state (in the present embodiment, the vibration state) in FIG. The state is changed from the second state to the first state in (b).

  In FIG. 315 (c), the character string of “supercharge” is substituted for the green “superimpose” character string based on the fact that the chance button 1100 in the normal state is operated by the player in FIG. 315 (b). It shows the state displayed in red. By this effect, the player is expected to perform additional AT remaining times.

  FIG. 315 (d) shows a state in which the rotation of the reel 1011 is stopped based on the player operating the stop button 1038. The stop symbols of the reel 1011 are, from the top, a replay symbol, a watermelon symbol, and a bell symbol. As a result, the cherry pattern of the special part is stopped in the middle of the reel 1010, and the cherry pattern is won, and three watermelon patterns of the special part are aligned on the winning line in the upper right and the watermelon pattern is won. Number 260 games are finalized. Also, based on the operation of the stop button 1038 (in synchronization with the stop of the reel 1011), the operation valid period of the chance button 1100 ends. As described above, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 may be set across the operations of the plurality of operation means (in the present embodiment, the stop buttons 1037 and 1039).

  FIG. 315 (e) shows a state in which it has been notified that the additional number of AT is 260. On the liquid crystal display device 1057, an animation of a Bancho breaking clothes and a character string of "+260" indicating the number of ATs in place of the character string of "intensified" are displayed in red.

  In FIG. 315 (f), since the AT overlay number is 260, “302 G”, the AT game count after overlay, is displayed instead of the “42 G” character string representing the AT remaining game count. It shows the state. In addition, by returning to the display mode in which the character image of the Bancho is wearing clothes, it is notified that the AT addition effect has ended.

  The stock machine 1000 according to the embodiment described above is provided with the chance button 1100 as a first operation means. In addition, the slot machine 1000 is provided with a plurality of operation means (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of other operation means") separately from the first operation means at a position where the player can operate, and a plurality of other operation means At least one of them is a start lever 1035 as a second operating means, and at least one of the plurality of other operating means is a stop button 1038 as a third operating means. The operation valid period of the chance button 1100 is at least a part of a period until the stop button 1038 is operated after the start lever 1035 is operated (see FIG. 314 (b)). It is a period that includes. According to the slot machine 1000 of the present embodiment, there are cases in which the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, as the operation means that may be used as the second operation means or the third operation means described above, 1 BET button (medal insertion button 1030), 2 BET button (medal insertion button 1031), MAX BET button (medal insertion button 1032), Various kinds of start lever (start lever 1035), left stop button (stop button 1037), middle stop button (stop button 1038), right stop button (stop button 1039), effect button (chance button 1100), information display button 1046, etc. An operation means is mentioned.

  The first operation means is the chance button 1100, the second operation means is the left stop button (stop button 1037), and the third operation means is the middle stop button (stop button 1038). The operation means of may be the right stop button (stop button 1039). The operation effective period of the first operation means is a partial period from the operation of the left stop button to the operation of the middle stop button, but the operation effective period of the first operation means is the operation from the left stop button to the right stop button It may be a partial period at the operation point of, and in this case, the operation effective period is the same length in any case. Depending on whether the middle stop button or the right stop button is operated after the left reel 1010 is stopped, the operation effective period of the first operation means remains unchanged in any case.

Examples 8 to 26
The effects of the slot machine 1000 according to the twenty-sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 316 (a) to 316 (f). FIGS. 316 (a) to 316 (f) show, in this order, the effects of the AT in the slot machine 1000 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  FIG. 316 (a) shows a state in which effects of the AT game are being executed, which is the same as the state shown in FIG. 316 (a).

  FIG. 316 (b) shows a state where the player operates the start lever 1035, but the reels 1010 to 1012 are short frozen and the rotation is not started. In addition, since the game in AT is digested once in the liquid crystal display device 1057, “790G” is displayed instead of the character string “789G”, and “LAST 43G” is substituted for the character string “LAST "42G" is displayed. Further, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, the operation valid period of the chance button 1100 is started. In addition, it is informed that the Bancho character image is erased and the girl character image and the button image including the character string of "one blow" are displayed at the lower part, and the operation valid period of the chance button 1100 is started. . The display mode of the button image is "vibration state". Further, since the chance button 1100 is maintained in the normal state, a rule collapse occurs in which the state of the chance button 1100 and the display mode of the button image do not correspond.

  FIG. 316 (c) shows a state in which rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012 that had been short frozen has been started.

  FIG. 316 (d) shows a state in which the chance button 1100 has changed from the normal state to the vibrating state. Since the state of the chance button 1100 and the display mode of the button image correspond to each other, the breaking of the rule that occurred in FIG. 316 (b) is resolved.

  FIG. 316 (e) shows a state in which the rotation of the reel 1010 is stopped based on the player operating the stop button 1037. The stop symbols of the reel 1010 are, from the top, a super replay symbol, a cherry symbol, and a watermelon symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, based on the operation of the stop button 1037 (in synchronization with the stop of the rotation of the reel 1010), the operation valid period of the chance button 1100 ends.

  In FIG. 316 (e), the girl character image, the button image, and the image for the effective period are deleted, and an animation in which "bancho" breaks clothes at the left of the display area of the liquid crystal display 1057 A character string of "+260" is displayed, and it is informed that the number of remaining AT games is to be added to 260 games. This notification is forcibly executed based on the end of the operation valid period of the chance button 1100. In addition, the chance button 1100 is maintained in a vibrating state.

  FIG. 316 (f) shows a state in which “302 G”, the number of remaining AT games after the addition, is displayed instead of the character string “42 G” in which the number AT of the remaining games before the addition is displayed. There is. In addition, by returning to the display mode in which the character image of the Bancho is wearing clothes, it is notified that the AT addition effect has ended. In addition, the chance button 1100 changes from the vibration state to the normal state.

  The stock machine 1000 according to the embodiment described above is provided with the chance button 1100 as a first operation means. In addition, the slot machine 1000 is provided with a plurality of operation means (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of other operation means") separately from the first operation means at a position where the player can operate, and a plurality of other operation means At least one of them is the start lever 1035 as the second operating means, and at least one of the plurality of other operating means is the stop button 1037 as the third operating means. The operation valid period of the chance button 1100 is at least a part of a period until the stop button 1037 is operated (see FIG. 316 (e)) after the start lever 1035 is operated (see FIG. 316 (b)) It is a period that includes. According to the slot machine 1000 of the present embodiment, there are cases in which the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, as the operation means which may be used as the first operation means, the second operation means or the third operation means described above, the medal insertion button 1030 (1 BET button), the medal insertion button 1031 (2 BET button), the medal insertion button Various arrows of 1032 (MAX BET button), start lever 1035, stop button 1037 (left stop button), stop button 1038 (middle stop button), stop button 1039 (right stop button), medal return button 1033, information display button 1046, OK, C button etc. may be mentioned. Further, since the medal insertion slot 1041 also has the same function as the medal insertion button 1030, it can be mentioned as the first operation means, the second operation means or the third operation means described above. In the present embodiment, the title panel 1062 is configured to be able to perform light emission effect by the title panel lamp 1064, but the title panel 1062 itself is made to function as a button unit that pushes in, for example, the back direction. In this case, the title panel 1062 itself may function as the first operating means, the second operating means, or the third operating means.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS.

(1)
A game console (for example, pachinko machine 100, slot machine 1000) provided with operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137, chance button 1100) provided at least at a position where the player can operate.
The operation means is a means capable of taking one of a plurality of states (see, for example, FIG. 288).
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state (e.g., a normal state),
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state (eg, vibration + rotational state),
The second state is a state in which at least the first state can be changed (for example, FIG. 282) in a period in which acceptance of the operation of the operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as “operation effective period”). (D), 283 (f), 284 (d), 285 (f), 286 (f), 287 (d), 289 (j), 289 (r), 292 (e) Fig. 293 (f), Fig. 295 (h '), Fig. 296 (d), Fig. 297 (f), Fig. 299 (b), Fig. 300 (b), Fig. 300 (g) and Fig. 300 (l) 301 (c), 301 (h), 302 (d), 303 (d), 303 (m), 304 (d) and 304 (b ')),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (1), there are cases where the player can be given unexpectedness by changing the operation means to the second state.

(2)
It is the gaming machine described in (1),
The second state is a state in which at least the first state can be changed in the operation effective period even when the operation means is not operated (for example, FIG. 282 (d), 293 (f) , FIG. 299 (b) and FIG. 302 (d)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming stand described in (2) above, there is a case where unexpectedness can be given to the player by the operation means changing to the second state even though the player does not operate the operation means. is there. Further, according to the gaming table described in (2) above, there are cases where it is possible to realize an effect or a notice by changing the state of the operation means within the operation effective period. Further, the operating means may change from the first state to the second state in association with the operation by the player.

(3)
It is a game console according to (1) or (2),
It is provided with rendering means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the rendering display area 208d, the first sub control unit 400) capable of at least executing a plurality of types of renderings,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects may be a first effect (for example, an effect using a button image shown in FIGS. 289 (g) to (k) and a character string (operation request image) of "continuous hit", Effects shown in FIG. 300 (b), (c), effects shown in FIG. 300 (g), (h), effects shown in FIG. 300 (l), (m), FIG. 301 (a) to (d), 301 (f) to (i)),
At least one of the plurality of types of effects may be a second effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 289 (l), the effect shown in FIG. 300 (d), the effect shown in FIG. n) and effects shown in FIGS. 300 (e) and (j)),
The second effect is at least an effect that can be performed in relation to the operation of the operation means (for example, FIG. 289 (h) to FIG. 289 (k), FIG. 300 (b), and (c) 300 (g), (h), 300 (l), (m), 300 (b) to 300 (d), 300 (g) to 300 (i)),
The first effect is an effect including at least information on the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation information”) for the second effect to be performed,
The operation information is information that at least suggests that one or more operations of the operation means are required.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (3), the player may be given unexpectedness by changing the second effect depending on the timing at which the operation means is operated. Further, according to the gaming table described in the above (3), there are cases where it is possible to allow the player to select the timing for operating the operation means. The operation information also includes one operation of the operation means, a plurality of operations, and a long press operation. The plurality of operations include mere continuous hitting, designation of the number of times of operation, and a combination of a plurality of operations and a long press operation (for example, long press operation after 5 consecutive hits).

(4)
It is the gaming machine described in (3),
The operation effective period is a period in which the operation of the operation means is effective to execute the second effect (for example, see FIGS. 305 to 308).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in (4) above, there are cases where it is possible to reliably control the second effect.

(5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), wherein
The operation valid period is at least a period that can be set in a period in which the symbol variation display is not performed (for example, FIG. 282 (b) to FIG. 282 (e), FIG. 283 (b) to FIG. Figures 284 (b) to 284 (g), 285 (b) to 285 (j), 286 (b) to 286 (i), 287 (b) to 287 (j)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (5), the second effect executed in connection with the state change of the operation means or the operation of the operation means is a probability change notification during the big hit game when the symbol variation display is not executed. In some cases, it may be possible to function as an advance notice of an advantageous notification such as a pending in-line notification or a demonstration effect.

(6)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), wherein
The operation valid period is at least a settable period in a period in which one symbol variation display is being executed (see, for example, FIG. 289 (g) to FIG. 290 (b)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (6), there are cases where it is possible to cause the operation means to function as a notice of the symbol variation display by associating the symbol variation display currently being executed and the state of the operation means.

(7)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), wherein
It is provided with symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) which can execute at least symbol variation display,
The operation valid period is at least a settable period in a period in which a plurality of times of symbol variation display is being executed (see, for example, FIG. 293 (b) to FIG. 293 (m)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (7), the operation means can be made to function as a prefetch notice by correlating the state of the operation means with the symbol variation display to be executed in the future (the start is suspended). There is a possibility.

(8)
It is the gaming machine described in (7),
It is provided with symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) which can execute at least symbol variation display,
After the symbol display means executes symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "first symbol fluctuation display") (for example, after executing special figure 1 fluctuation display shown in FIG. 293 (a) to FIG. 293 (e)) It is a means capable of at least starting symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol fluctuation display”) (for example, special figure 1 fluctuation display shown in FIG. 293 (f) to FIG. 293 (k))
The operation effective period is a period including at least a part during execution of the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first operation effective period”) (for example, FIG. 293 (b) to FIG. 293 (E)),
The operation effective period is a period including at least a part during execution of the second symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation effective period”) (for example, FIG. 293 (f) to FIG. 293) See (k)),
The operation means is a means capable of at least taking the first state in the first operation effective period (see, for example, FIGS. 293 (b) to 293 (e)).
The operation means is a means capable of changing from the first state to the second state in the second operation effective period (see, for example, FIGS. 293 (f) to 293 (k)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (8), it may be possible to execute a notice in a long period over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

(9)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8), wherein
A display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of hold icons;
At least one of the plurality of types of holding icons is a first holding icon (for example, a holding icon a2 of the display mode of “normal” shown in FIG. 293 (b) to FIG. 293 (f), FIG. 297 (b ) To 297 (f), and the hold icon a2) of the display mode of “normal”, as shown in FIG.
At least one of the plurality of types of suspension icons is a second suspension icon (for example, a suspension icon a2 of a display mode of “vibration + rotation” shown in FIG. 293 (h) to FIG. 293 (m), FIG. (H), hold icon a2 of the display mode of "vibration + rotation" shown in (i),
At least one of the plurality of types of holding icons may be a third holding icon (for example, a holding icon a2 of a character pattern of a long note shown in FIG. 295 (f) to FIG. 295 (i), FIG. 297 (j) Fig. 297 (o) shows a pending icon a2) of the display mode of the character of "Heat",
The first hold icon is a button hold icon,
The first holding icon is a holding icon corresponding at least to the first state of the operating means,
The second hold icon is a button hold icon,
The second holding icon is a functional holding icon corresponding at least to the second state of the operating means,
The third hold icon is a hold icon that can be displayed at least when the operation means is operated (see, for example, FIGS. 295 (d) to 295 (f) and 297 (i) and (j). ),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming machine described in the above (9), there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the pre-reading notice by the hold icon or to enhance the unexpectedness of the pre-reading notice.

(10)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (eg, pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(11)
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9), wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

(12)
It is a game stand described in (11),
The operation means is a first operation means (for example, a chance button 1100),
A plurality of operation means (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of other operation means") are provided separately from the first operation means at a position where the player can operate.
At least one of the plurality of other operating means is a second operating means (for example, start lever 1035),
At least one of the plurality of other operating means is a third operating means (for example, stop button 1038, stop button 1037),
The operation valid period of the first operation means is a period from when the second operation means is operated to when the third operation means is operated (for example, FIG. 314 (b) to FIG. 315 (d A period including at least a part of the period shown in FIG. 316 (b) to FIG. 316 (e)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming machine described in the above (12), there are cases where it is possible to improve the rendering in the slot machine.

(13)
A game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100, slot machine 1000) provided with a plurality of operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate.
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (e.g., chance button 136),
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, setting operation unit 137),
The first operation means is a means that can be received at least in the operation valid period,
The second operation means is a means that can be received at least in the operation valid period,
The first operation means is a means capable of taking one of a plurality of states;
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state (e.g., a normal state),
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state (eg, vibration + rotational state),
The second state is a state in which at least the first state can be changed in the operation effective period (see, for example, FIGS. 300 (b), (c), and (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming machine described in the above (13), it is possible to provide a gaming machine which is characterized by a plurality of operation means.

(13 ')
A game console (for example, pachinko machine 100, slot machine 1000) provided with a plurality of operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137, chance button 1100) provided at least at a position where the player can operate. ,
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (e.g., chance button 136),
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, setting operation unit 137),
The first operation means is a means that can be received at least in the operation valid period,
The second operation means is a means that can be received at least in the operation valid period,
The second operation means is a means capable of taking any one of a plurality of states;
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state (e.g., a normal state),
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state (eg, vibration + rotational state),
The second state is a state in which at least the first state can be changed in the operation effective period (see, for example, FIGS. 300 (b), (c), and (g)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (13 '), it is possible to provide a gaming table having a plurality of operation means.

  As the operation means provided in the game console, the above-mentioned chance buttons 136 and 1100, the setting operation unit 137, or a touch panel type or lever type operation means may be mentioned. In addition, a proximity sensor that allows a player to grasp the difference in state is also mentioned as the operation means. The 1 BET button, 2 BET button, MAX BET button, start lever, left stop button, middle stop button, right stop button, etc. of the slot machine may also be mentioned as the operation means.

(14)
Operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least displaying a second display (for example, display of a button image of the display mode of "vibration + rotation" shown in FIGS. 289 (i) to 289 (k)) When,
A game console equipped with
The operation means is means capable of taking any one of a plurality of states (see, for example, FIG. 288).
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state (e.g., a normal state),
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state (eg, vibration + rotational state),
The second state is a state in which at least a change from the first state can be made in a period in which acceptance of the operation of the operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as “operation effective period”) (for example, FIG. 289). (J), (r), see FIG. 292 (e)),
The display means is a means that may at least display the second display when the operation means is in the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 289 (i) and (q)).
The second display is a display at least corresponding to the operation means being in the second state.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming machine described in the above (14), it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a feature in the operation means.

(15)
It is a game stand described in (14),
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, a display of a button image of the “normal” display mode shown in FIGS. 292 (e) and (f)),
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display when the operation means is in the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 292 (e) and (f)).
The first display is a display at least corresponding to the operation means being in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

According to the gaming table described in the above (15), there are cases where it is possible to increase variations of the rule breaking that the state of the operation means does not correspond to the display regarding the operation means. As an example of the display corresponding to the first state, when the first state is the normal state and the second state is the rotation + vibration,
This is a normal display mode (non-emission mode display), a display of a button image showing the first state as it is, a display in which an effect image is displayed around the button image, a deca button display of a normal display mode, a button image And a display in which another display such as a character image is integrated. The display of the effect image and the character image is the display of the chance-up notice, and the button image itself suggests the first state.

(14 ')
Operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least displaying a first display (for example, display of a button image of the "normal" display mode shown in FIG. 292 (e));
A game console equipped with
The operation means is means capable of taking any one of a plurality of states (see, for example, FIG. 288).
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state (e.g., a normal state),
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state (eg, vibration + rotational state),
The second state is a state in which at least a change from the first state can be made in a period in which acceptance of the operation of the operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as “operation effective period”) (for example, FIG. 289). (J), (r), see FIG. 292 (e)),
The display means may be means for displaying at least the first display when the operation means is in the second state (for example, FIGS. 289 (j), (r), 292 (e). )reference),
The first display is a display at least corresponding to the operation means being in the first state.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming machine described in the above (14 '), it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a feature in the operation means.

(15 ')
It is the gaming machine described in (14 '),
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, display of a button image of a display mode of “vibration + rotation” shown in FIG. 289 (i)).
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the second display when the operation means is in the first state (see, for example, FIG. 289 (i)).
The second display is a display at least corresponding to the operation means being in the second state.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (15 '), it may be possible to increase the variation of the rule breaking that the state of the operation means does not correspond to the display concerning the operation means.

(16)
(14) or (15).
The display means is means capable of continuing the second display even when the operation means changes from the first state to the second state (for example, FIG. 289 (j)). , (K)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (16), since the operating means can be changed to the state corresponding to the second display previously displayed, the operating means in the first state is operated or not The player may be able to select whether to operate the operation means in the state of.

(17)
It is a game stand according to (15),
The display means displays the second display (for example, "vibration + rotation" shown in FIG. 304 (a) in relation to the state change of the operation means from the first state to the second state). Means for displaying at least the first display (for example, the button image of the “normal” display mode shown in FIG. 304 (b ′)) in place of the button image of the display mode of (for example, FIG. b ')),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (17), there are cases where the rule breaking that first occurred can be continued even when the state of the operation means changes. Further, according to the gaming table described in the above 17, the player may be able to maintain a sense of expectation for the breaking of the law.

(18)
It is a game stand according to (15),
The display means at least displays a third display (for example, a display of a Deca button image of the “normal” display mode shown in FIG. 289 (q), a reserved icon a2 shown in FIG. 296 (b) to FIG. 296 (e)). It is a means that can be displayed,
The third display is a display not corresponding to the second state of the operation means (see, for example, FIG. 289 (p)).
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the third display in place of the second display in relation to the state change of the operation means from the first state to the second state. is there,
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (18), even when the state of the operation means changes, it may be possible to continue the rule deviation that first occurred. Further, according to the gaming table described in the above (18), there may be a case where the player's sense of expectation for the breaking of the rule can be maintained.

(19)
It is the game stand described in (18),
The third display (for example, a display of a deca-button image) is a display at least corresponding to the first state of the operation means,
The third display is a display different from the first display (e.g., the size of the Deca button image and the display of the button image are different),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (19), there may be a case where it is possible to boost the notice about the button effect by the variation of the third display.

(20)
It is the game stand described in (18),
The third display is a display that does not correspond to the first state of the operation means (for example, the hold icon a2 shown in FIG. 296 (b) to FIG. 296 (e)),
The third display is a display corresponding at least to a third state (for example, a state of projecting upward) of the operation means,
The third state is a state in which the operating means can not be taken.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (20), it may be possible to provide the player with unexpectedness. As the third display, an animation in which the button is rotated, an animation in which the button is vibrated, etc. may be mentioned when the operation means does not take the rotation or vibration state. In addition, since the chance button n136 itself does not increase in size, there is also a case where it can be included in the third display. Such a third display is used for, for example, the presentation of chance-up and the presentation of a premier for notifying a big hit.

(21)
It is a game console according to any one of (14) to (20),
The operation valid period is at least a period that can be set in a period in which the symbol variation display is not performed (for example, FIG. 282 (b) to FIG. 282 (e), FIG. 283 (b) to FIG. Figures 284 (b) to 284 (g), 285 (b) to 285 (j), 286 (b) to 286 (i), 287 (b) to 287 (j)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in (21), the second effect executed in connection with the state change of the operation means or the operation of the operation means is a probability change notification during the big hit game in which the symbol variation display is not executed. In some cases, it may be possible to function as an advance notice of an advantageous notification such as a pending in-line notification or a demonstration effect.

(22)
It is a game console according to any one of (14) to (20),
The operation valid period is at least a settable period in a period in which one symbol variation display is being executed (see, for example, FIG. 289 (g) to FIG. 290 (b)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (22), there are cases where it is possible to cause the state of the operation means to function as a notice by associating the symbol variation display currently being executed and the state of the operation means.

(23)
It is a game console according to any one of (14) to (20),
The operation valid period is at least a settable period in a period in which a plurality of times of symbol variation display is being executed (see, for example, FIG. 293 (b) to FIG. 293 (m)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (23), the operation means can be made to function as a prefetch notice by associating the state of the operation means with the symbol variation display to be executed in the future (the start is suspended). There is a possibility.

(24)
It is a game stand described in (23),
It is provided with symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) which can execute at least symbol variation display,
After the symbol display means executes symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "first symbol fluctuation display") (for example, after executing special figure 1 fluctuation display shown in FIG. 293 (a) to FIG. 293 (e)) It is a means capable of at least starting symbol fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol fluctuation display”) (for example, special figure 1 fluctuation display shown in FIG. 293 (f) to FIG. 293 (k))
The operation effective period is a period including at least a part during execution of the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first operation effective period”) (for example, FIG. 293 (b) to FIG. 293 (E)),
The operation effective period is a period including at least a part during execution of the second symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation effective period”) (for example, FIG. 293 (f) to FIG. 293) See (k)),
The operation means is a means capable of at least taking the first state in the first operation effective period (see, for example, FIGS. 293 (b) to 293 (e)).
The operation means is a means capable of changing from the first state to the second state in the second operation effective period (see, for example, FIGS. 293 (f) to 293 (k)).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (24), it may be possible to execute a notice in a long period over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

(25)
It is a game console according to any one of (14) to (24),
A display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of hold icons;
At least one of the plurality of types of holding icons is a first holding icon (for example, a holding icon a2 of the display mode of “normal” shown in FIG. 293 (b) to FIG. 293 (f), FIG. 297 (b ) To 297 (f), and the hold icon a2) of the display mode of “normal”, as shown in FIG.
At least one of the plurality of types of suspension icons is a second suspension icon (for example, a suspension icon a2 of a display mode of “vibration + rotation” shown in FIG. 293 (h) to FIG. 293 (m), FIG. (H), hold icon a2 of the display mode of "vibration + rotation" shown in (i),
At least one of the plurality of types of holding icons may be a third holding icon (for example, a holding icon a2 of a character pattern of a long note shown in FIG. 295 (f) to FIG. 295 (i), FIG. 297 (j) Fig. 297 (o) shows a pending icon a2) of the display mode of the character of "Heat",
The first hold icon is a button hold icon,
The first holding icon is a holding icon corresponding at least to the first state of the operating means,
The second hold icon is a button hold icon,
The second holding icon is a functional holding icon corresponding at least to the second state of the operating means,
The third hold icon is a hold icon that can be displayed at least when the operation means is operated (see, for example, FIGS. 295 (d) to 295 (f) and 297 (i) and (j). ),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming machine described in the above (25), there are cases where it is possible to increase the variation of the pre-reading notice by the hold icon or to enhance the unexpectedness of the pre-reading notice.

(26)
It is a game console according to any one of (14) to (25),
It is provided with rendering means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the rendering display area 208d, the first sub control unit 400) capable of at least executing a plurality of types of renderings,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects may be a first effect (for example, an effect using a button image shown in FIGS. 289 (g) to (k) and a character string (operation request image) of "continuous hit", Effects shown in FIG. 300 (b), (c), effects shown in FIG. 300 (g), (h), effects shown in FIG. 300 (l), (m), FIG. 301 (a) to (d), 301 (f) to (i)),
At least one of the plurality of types of effects may be a second effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 289 (l), the effect shown in FIG. 300 (d), the effect shown in FIG. n) and effects shown in FIGS. 300 (e) and (j)),
The second effect is at least an effect that can be performed in relation to the operation of the operation means (for example, FIG. 289 (h) to FIG. 289 (k), FIG. 300 (b), and (c) 300 (g), (h), 300 (l), (m), 300 (b) to 300 (d), 300 (g) to 300 (i)),
The first effect is an effect including at least information on the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation information”) for the second effect to be performed,
The operation information is information that at least suggests that one or more operations of the operation means are required.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (26), there may be a case where the player can be given unexpectedness by changing the second effect depending on the timing at which the operation means is operated. Further, according to the gaming table described in the above (26), there are cases where it is possible to allow the player to select the timing for operating the operation means. The operation information also includes one operation of the operation means, a plurality of operations, and a long press operation. The plurality of operations include mere continuous hitting, designation of the number of times of operation, and a combination of a plurality of operations and a long press operation (for example, long press operation after 5 consecutive hits).

(27)
It is a game stand described in (26),
The operation effective period is a period in which the operation of the operation means is effective to execute the second effect (for example, see FIGS. 305 to 308).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in (27) above, there are cases where it is possible to reliably control the second effect.

(28)
It is a game console according to any one of (14) to (27),
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (eg, pachinko machine 100),
A game stand characterized by

(29)
It is a game console according to any one of (14) to (27),
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000),
A game stand characterized by

(30)
It is the gaming machine described in (29),
The operation means is a first operation means (for example, a chance button 1100),
A plurality of operation means (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of other operation means") are provided separately from the first operation means at a position where the player can operate.
At least one of the plurality of other operating means is a second operating means (for example, start lever 1035),
At least one of the plurality of other operating means is a third operating means (for example, stop button 1038, stop button 1037),
The operation valid period of the first operation means is a period from when the second operation means is operated to when the third operation means is operated (for example, FIG. 314 (b) to FIG. 315 (d A period including at least a part of the period shown in FIG. 316 (b) to FIG. 316 (e)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the gaming table described in the above (30), there are cases where it is possible to improve the rendering in the slot machine. The operation valid period may be a so-called back button (hidden button) operation valid period. As an effect to operate the operation means, for example, it is general to perform a request effect to display a character string such as “PUSH”, “press”, “double hit” in the display means, but these are notified However, the state change of the operation means may occur during the operation valid period of the back button where the effect is performed when the operation means is actually operated. The operation effective period of various operation means of the slot machine may also be the operation effective period as the back button.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include a main liquid crystal display device and a sub liquid crystal display device. The main liquid crystal display device may be, for example, a decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a plurality of (two or more) sub liquid crystal display devices may be provided. The first effect described above may be performed on the main liquid crystal display device, and the second effect described above may be performed on the sub liquid crystal display device, or vice versa. Also, the hold icon may be displayed on either the main liquid crystal display device or the sub liquid crystal display device. The sub liquid crystal display device may be movable.

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is expressed, for example, as follows.
(Appendix I1)
It is a game console provided with operation means provided at least at a position where a player can operate,
The operation means is a means capable of taking any one of a plurality of states,
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state,
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state,
The second state is a state in which at least a change from the first state is possible in a period in which acceptance of the operation of the operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as “operation effective period”).
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I2)
The game console described in Appendix I1,
The second state is a state in which at least the first state can be changed in the operation valid period even when the operation means is not operated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I3)
It is a game console described in Appendix I1 or I2, and
It has a production means capable of at least a plurality of types of effects,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is at least executable in relation to the operation of the operation means,
The first effect is an effect including at least information on the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation information”) for the second effect to be performed,
The operation information is information that at least suggests that one or more operations of the operation means are required.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I4)
It is a game console described in Appendix I3,
The operation effective period is a period in which the operation of the operation means is effective to execute the second effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I5)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices I1 to I4,
The operation valid period is at least a settable period in a period in which the symbol variation display is not performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I6)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices I1 to I4,
The operation valid period is at least a settable period in a period in which one symbol variation display is performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices I1 to I4,
The operation valid period is at least a settable period in a period in which a plurality of symbol variation displays are performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I8)
It is the gaming machine described in Appendix I7,
It has symbol display means capable of at least performing symbol variation display,
The symbol display means can perform at least the start of symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") after executing symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "first symbol variation display"). It is a means,
The operation effective period is a period including at least a part during execution of the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "first operation effective period"),
The operation effective period is a period including at least a part during execution of the second symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation effective period"),
The operating means is means capable of at least taking the first state in the first operation effective period,
The operation means is a means capable of changing from the first state to the second state in the second operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I9)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices I1 to I8,
It has display means capable of displaying at least multiple types of hold icons,
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon,
The first hold icon is a button hold icon,
The first hold icon is a hold icon corresponding at least to the operation means being in the first state,
The second hold icon is a button hold icon,
The second hold icon is a hold icon corresponding at least to the operation means being in the second state,
The third hold icon is a hold icon that can be displayed at least when the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I9, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I9, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I12)
It is a game console described in Appendix I11,
The operation means is a first operation means,
A plurality of operation means (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of other operation means") are provided separately from the first operation means at a position where the player can operate.
At least one of the plurality of other operating means is a second operating means,
At least one of the plurality of other operating means is a third operating means,
The operation effective period of the first operation means is a period including at least a part of a period from when the second operation means is operated to when the third operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix I13)
A game console comprising a plurality of operation means provided at least at a position where a player can operate,
At least one of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means,
At least one of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means,
The first operation means is a means that can be received at least in the operation valid period,
The second operation means is a means that can be received at least in the operation valid period,
The first operation means is a means capable of taking one of a plurality of states;
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state,
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state,
The second state is a state at least changeable from the first state in the operation effective period,
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix K1)
Operation means provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of at least displaying the second display;
A game console equipped with
The operation means is a means capable of taking any one of a plurality of states,
At least one of the plurality of states is a first state,
At least one of the plurality of states is a second state,
The second state is a state in which at least a change from the first state is possible in a period in which acceptance of the operation of the operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as “operation effective period”),
The display means is a means that may at least display the second display when the operation means is in the first state,
The second display is a display at least corresponding to the operation means being in the second state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K2)
It is a game console described in appendix K1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a first display,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the first display when the operation means is in the second state,
The first display is a display at least corresponding to the operation means being in the first state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K3)
It is a game console as described in Supplementary Note K1 or K2,
The display means is means capable of continuing the second display even when the operation means changes from the first state to the second state.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K4)
The game console described in Appendix K2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the first display in place of the second display in relation to the state change of the operation means from the first state to the second state. is there,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K5)
The game console described in Appendix K2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a third display,
The third display is a display that does not correspond to the operation unit being in the second state,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least the third display in place of the second display in relation to the state change of the operation means from the first state to the second state. is there,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K6)
The game console described in Appendix K5,
The third display is a display at least corresponding to the operation means being in the first state,
The third display is a display different from the first display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K7)
The game console described in Appendix K5,
The third display is a display which does not correspond to the fact that the operation means is in the first state,
The third display is a display corresponding to the state of the operation means being the third state,
The third state is a state in which the operating means can not be taken.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K7, wherein
The operation valid period is at least a settable period in a period in which the symbol variation display is not performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K7, wherein
The operation valid period is at least a settable period in a period in which one symbol variation display is performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K7, wherein
The operation valid period is at least a settable period in a period in which a plurality of symbol variation displays are performed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K11)
The gaming machine described in appendix K10,
It has symbol display means capable of at least performing symbol variation display,
The symbol display means can perform at least the start of symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "second symbol variation display") after executing symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "first symbol variation display"). It is a means,
The operation effective period is a period including at least a part during execution of the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "first operation effective period"),
The operation effective period is a period including at least a part during execution of the second symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as "second operation effective period"),
The operating means is means capable of at least taking the first state in the first operation effective period,
The operation means is a means capable of changing from the first state to the second state in the second operation effective period.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1 to K11, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of hold icons;
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon,
The first hold icon is a button hold icon,
The first hold icon is a hold icon corresponding at least to the operation means being in the first state,
The second hold icon is a button hold icon,
The second hold icon is a hold icon corresponding at least to the operation means being in the second state,
The third hold icon is a hold icon that can be displayed at least when the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K13)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices K1 to K12,
It has a production means capable of at least a plurality of types of effects,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect,
At least one of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is at least executable in relation to the operation of the operation means,
The first effect is an effect including at least information on the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation information”) for the second effect to be performed,
The operation information is information that at least suggests that one or more operations of the operation means are required.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K14)
The game console described in Appendix K13,
The operation effective period is a period in which the operation of the operation means is effective to execute the second effect.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K15)
The game console according to any one of appendices K1 to K14, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K16)
The game console according to any one of appendices K1 to K14, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix K17)
The game console described in Appendix K16,
The operation means is a first operation means,
A plurality of operation means (hereinafter referred to as "a plurality of other operation means") are provided separately from the first operation means at a position where the player can operate.
At least one of the plurality of other operating means is a second operating means,
At least one of the plurality of other operating means is a third operating means,
The operation effective period of the first operation means is a period including at least a part of a period from when the second operation means is operated to when the third operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by

[Ninth embodiment]
A game console according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 336 and 392. FIG. The configuration and operation of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 317 to 336 show Examples 1 to 10 of the present embodiment. First, among the configurations illustrated in the drawings used in the subsequent embodiments, configurations that are used in common will be mainly described with reference to FIGS. 317 (a) and 317 (g). In FIG. 317 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 which constitutes a part of the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 3, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, and the common view display device 210, a special figure 1 reserve lamp 218, a special figure 2 reserve lamp 220, and a common view reserve lamp 216 are schematically shown. Special drawing 1 display 212, special drawing 2 display 214, general drawing display 210, special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, and common drawing holding lamp 216 are shown below decorative symbol display 208 The special view 2 display 214 is shown on the right of the special view 1 display 212, and the general view display 210 is shown on the right of the special view 2 display 214. The special view 1 reserve lamp 218 is shown on the upper side of the special view 1 display 212, the special view 2 reserve lamp 220 is shown on the upper side of the special view 2 display 214, and the common view hold lamp 216 is of the common view display 210. It is shown on the upper side. Also, the off portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the generic view display device 210, the special figure 1 reserve lamp 218, the special figure 2 reserve lamp 220, and the generic view reserve lamp 216 are shown in white. , The lit part is shown in black. In addition, since the reservation of the common drawing in the present embodiment can be stored up to four, four LEDs of the common drawing reservation lamp 216 are provided.

  In FIG. 317 (a), symbol display areas 208a to 208c are assigned to the central portion of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 for performing variable display and stop display of the decorative symbol. When a predetermined effect is executed by enlarging the effect display area 208d, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in an area other than the center of the image display area, for example, the lower right corner, as necessary. In some cases.

  A fourth symbol display area is provided on the upper right side in the effect display area 208d. The upper side in the fourth symbol display area is the fourth symbol display area t3 for common use figure, the middle side is the fourth symbol display area t1 for special figure 1, and the lower side is the fourth symbol display area t2 for special figure 2 It is. While the special figure 1 variation game is not in operation, an image representing "o" is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area t1 as the special figure 1 fourth symbol. While the special figure 2 variation game is not in operation, an image representing "△" is displayed in the fourth figure display area t2 for the special figure 2 as the special figure 2 fourth symbol. While the regular game variation game is not in operation, an image representing "3" is displayed in the regular game fourth symbol display area t3 as the common figure fourth symbol. A white background image is displayed in each of the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 as the fourth symbol during the special figure variation game or the common figure variation game.

  An area surrounded by a square frame in the lower center of the effect display area 208d is a change icon display area C capable of displaying a change icon. The fluctuation icon is an icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area C when the suspension is digested and the special figure fluctuation game is started. By changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon in the fluctuation icon display area C, notification of success or failure of the special figure fluctuation game can be made with a predetermined reliability (the fluctuation advance notice). Note that the frame-shaped image on the outer periphery of the fluctuation icon display area C may be displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the fluctuation icon is not displayed in the fluctuation icon display area C). , May be always displayed, or may not always be displayed. Further, only the hold icon may be displayed without displaying the change icon.

  Adjacent to the variation icon display area C on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, a special-figure 1 reserved icon display area A of a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area A, a number of special figure 1 reserve icons a1, a2, etc. corresponding to the number of reservations are displayed. In addition, whether the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game related to the hold is notified or not can be notified (predictive notice) with a predetermined reliability by the display mode of the special figure 1 reserve icon. In this example, a white circular hold icon is displayed as the least reliable display mode. In the present embodiment, a maximum of four special drawing 1 holding icons can be displayed in the special drawing 1 holding icon display area A. The plurality of special view 1 hold icons are displayed in order from right to left in the special view 1 hold icon display area as the hold order becomes lower. In this example, only the special view 1 suspension icon display area is displayed, but the special view 2 suspension icon display area may be displayed together as a matter of course. In that case, for example, a special-figure 2 reserved icon display area B having a vertically-long rectangular shape is provided adjacent to the right side surface of the effect display area 208d. The special figure 2 reserve icon display area B is not displayed when there is no reserve for the special figure 2 and is displayed only when the reserve for the special figure 2 is accumulated, but it may be always displayed Good. In addition, since the game ball can be easily entered into the special view 2 start-up port 232 during the positive transformation support, the player can easily visually recognize the special view 2 reserve icon displayed in the special view 2 reserve icon display area B As described above, the display position of the special view 1 reserve icon display area A and the display position of the special view 2 reserve icon display area B are interchanged.

  Further, the state in which all the segments are shown in white in the special view 1 display device 212 indicates that the special view 1 variation display is being performed (see FIG. 317 (b)). The same applies to the special view 2 display device 214 and the common view display device 210. Moreover, the variation display of each decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c during the special figure variation game is represented by a downward arrow (see FIG. 317 (f)).

  FIG. 317 (g) shows a state in which a button effect is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the display means. The display of the button effect includes the display of the chance button 136. There is a button display as a display regarding the chance button 136. The button display includes an operation request image in a display form imitating the chance button 136 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “button image”) and a button operation acceptance valid period (hereinafter referred to as “operation valid period”) At least one of an effective period image indicating the rest of the item (a) and a display prompting other button operations is included. In addition, the display of the button effect can include an effect display such as a notice of advance notice executed in conjunction with the button display. The display of the button effect is performed by any one or a combination of still image display and animation display. Although the effective period image in the present embodiment is an image (for example, a meter (gauge) image) that changes the display mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time, an image imitating a numeral, a clock, etc. It may be a countdown display.

  The special figure change game and the big hit game shown in each of the following embodiments are executed by the same control operation as that described in the above embodiments. In the following embodiments, effects to be performed in the special figure variation game and the big hit game will be specifically described, and the control operation will be referred to only when the necessity arises.

  Next, the special figure fluctuation game and the big hit game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 319. First, an example of the flow of a series of effects when the result of the special figure fluctuation game becomes a big hit will be described using FIG. 317 and FIG. 318. FIG. 317 (a)-FIG. 318 (h) have shown the special figure fluctuation game in time series in this order. In addition, in the figure which shows a special figure change game by a time series, the time progress between a certain figure and the following figure does not necessarily correspond between each figure.

  FIG. 317 (a) shows a state in which the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is inoperative and the common drawing fluctuation game is also inoperative. The special figure 1 display device 212 has stopped and displayed the "special figure J" of the removal symbol. The special figure 2 display device 214 displays the "special figure I" of the removal symbol in a stop state. The common-diagram display device 210 stops and displays the "generally-used drawing B" of the removal symbol. The fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 stop and display the fourth symbol indicating that the game is not in operation. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7" is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols, and it is informed that the success / failure determination result of the special figure fluctuation game immediately before was disapproval There is.

  Special drawing 1 holding lamp 218 reports that there are two holdings of special drawing 1. In the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, it is notified that the special figure 2 is not held. It is reported that the common drawing holding lamp 216 does not hold the common drawing. In the special figure 1 reserve icon display area A, two special figure 1 reserve icons a1 and a2 are displayed in a white circular display mode.

  FIGS. 317 (b) to (f) show the state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation game has been started. The start order of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, in this example, one LED of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 is turned off and the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display, and further the fourth symbol display for the special figure 1 The fourth symbol in the area t1 starts the variable display (see FIG. 317 (b)), and then the special animation 1 icon for displaying the decrease animation of the icon is executed (see FIG. 317 (c) to (e)). , The variation display of the decorative symbol is started (see FIG. 317 (f)). Note that the order of the start points of these operations may be reversed.

  In the display of the reduction animation of the special figure 1 reserve icon, the special figure 1 reserve icon being displayed starts moving simultaneously to the right (see FIG. 317 (c)), and the special figure 1 with the first place for reserve order. While the reserve icon a1 enters the variation icon display area C beyond the special figure 1 reserve icon display area A, the remaining reserve icons are moved to the position one position to the right of the original position, and the hold order is raised by one. Stop (see FIG. 317 (c) to (e)). The icon image entering the variation icon display area C is referred to as a variation icon.

  FIG. 317 (g) shows a state in which the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. A horizontally long rectangular button effect area is secured at the center of the effect display area 208d, and the character image is displayed in the left quarter area in the button effect area, and the button image is displayed in the remaining three quarter areas. The button display in which the and the effective period image are displayed is executed. The valid period image is displayed at the bottom of the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set to be higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. For this reason, by the image of the button effect area, the symbol variation display of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden and can not be visually recognized. Although the player knows that the button effect has been started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 317 (g), since the button operation can not be received at this stage, the chance button can not be received. Even if the user presses the button 136, the pressing operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 317 (h) shows a button operation acceptance permission state where a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 317 (g) starts. Although the display in the button effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation effective period is started at this stage, the pressing operation is accepted when the chance button 136 is pressed.

  FIG. 317 (i) shows a state in which the rod-like portion of the display of the effective period image has become somewhat short in the right direction since the acceptance effective period of the button operation has passed a little.

  FIG. 317 (j) exemplifies a display of a button effect which is performed when the player presses the chance button 136 and the pressing is received. The button image and the validity period image are deleted, and the image of the character string "chance is !!" is displayed in the right three quarters of the area in the button effect area. The display of the character string image may be notice notification of the result of the special figure change game. In addition, it may be an advance notice of the possibility of developing into SP (super) reach production. In this example, the display of the button effect is ended by the display of the character string image.

  FIG. 317 (k) shows a state in which the button effect area disappears and the variable display of the decorative pattern in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c becomes visible.

  In FIG. 317 (l), “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in a swing fluctuation state in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the variation display of the decoration symbol is continued in the middle symbol display area 208b. It shows a state where the reach effect has been started.

  FIG. 317 (m) shows a state in which the image display of the reach effect is gradually changed to the entire white display by the fade-out process. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c are moved to the lower right corner of the image display area to reduce and display the decorative symbol variation. The special figure 1 reserve icon display area A, the special figure 1 reserve icon, the change icon display area C, and the change icon are in the SP reach effect shown in FIG. 317 (m) and FIG. 318 (n) to FIG. Will be hidden.

  FIGS. 317 (n) to 318 (a) show a state in which SP reach production with a scene where two warriors fight is being performed. Figure 318 (b) ~ (d) is a continuation of the SP reach effect, and the effect that one samurai is won is made, and it is notified that the possibility of the judgment result of the change being a hit is high. doing. Moreover, in FIG. 318 (d), the state in which the combination of a decoration symbol is temporarily stopped by "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" in the symbol display area 208a-208c currently displayed by reduction is shown.

  FIG. 318 (e) shows a state in which the image display of the SP reach effect is gradually changed to the entire white display by the fade-out process. Although the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 are displayed, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed.

  In FIG. 318 (f), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to the original position at the center of the image display area, and "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" is temporarily displayed as a combination of decorative designs. It shows the state.

  FIG. 318 (g) shows a state in which “special drawing A” of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special drawing 1 display device 212. In the fourth symbol display area t1 for the special figure 1 of the image display area, the fourth figure showing that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is not in operation is stopped and displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decorative 7-decorative 7-decorative 7" indicating stop as a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 318 (h) is a big hit start display, showing a state in which a character string image of “probable variation big hit” is displayed on almost the entire surface of the image display area and it is notified that 15R special big hit is won. In the present embodiment, the big hit start display is displayed as “probable variation big hit” when the success or failure determination result is a special figure A and the decorative symbol is a combination for a big variation big hit, the success or failure determination result is a special figure A or special It is the figure B, when the decoration design is the combination for the big hit, it displays the big hit start indication as “big hit”.

  Figures 318 (f ') to (h') are the same as in Figure 317 (l) when reach effect of "deco 6" is started in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, In place of the effects shown in FIGS. 318 (f) to (h), the effects when the 15R jackpot is won are illustrated. FIG. 318 (f ') continues from FIG. 318 (e). In FIG. 318 (f '), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to the original position in the center of the image display area, and "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" is temporarily displayed as a combination of decorative symbols. Show the condition.

  FIG. 318 (g ′) shows a state in which the “special figure B” of the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the image display area, a fourth symbol indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is not in operation is stopped and displayed in the fourth figure display region t1 for special figure 1. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6" showing stop as a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 318 (h ') shows a state in which the character string image of "big hit" is displayed on almost the entire surface of the image display area and it is notified that the 15R big hit has been won.

  FIGS. 319 (a) and (b) illustrate the continuation of another SP reach effect continuing from FIG. 318 (a), and an effect in which one samurai loses is performed, and the judgment of the change is made It warns that the result is likely to be lost. The special figure 1 pending icon display area A and the special figure 1 pending icon are hidden during the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 319 (a) to (c). Moreover, in FIG. 319 (b), the state in which the combination of a decoration symbol is temporarily stopped by "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" in the symbol display area 208a-208c currently displayed by reduction is shown.

  FIG. 319 (c) shows a state in which the image display of the SP reach effect is gradually changed to display of the entire surface white by the fade-out process. Although the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 are displayed, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed.

  In FIG. 319 (d), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged to the original position at the center of the image display area, and "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative designs. It shows the state. In this state, the display of the special figure 1 reserve icon display area A, the special figure 1 reserve icon, the change icon display area C, and the change icon is resumed, and is displayed until the end of the special figure 1 change game shown in FIG. Ru.

  FIG. 319 (e) shows a state in which the “special figure J” of the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the image display area, a fourth symbol indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation game is not in operation is stopped and displayed in the fourth figure display region t1 for special figure 1. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decorative 7-decorative 6-decorative 7" indicating stoppage as a combination of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  FIGS. 319 (f) to (h) show the display of the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon. In this example, the display of the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the special figure fluctuation game. The display of the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon may be performed at another timing. FIG. 319 (f) shows a state where the fluctuation icon starts moving downward from the fluctuation icon display area C and the lower third of the circular outline of the fluctuation icon disappears out of the image display area. There is. FIG. 319 (g) shows a state where the fluctuation icon has moved further downward and the fluctuation icon has disappeared outside the image display area to such an extent that the upper part of the circular outline can be slightly recognized. FIG. 319 (h) shows a state in which the variation icon completely disappears from the variation icon display area C and the display of the deletion animation of the variation icon is finished. In addition, the deletion animation of the variation icon may be performed during symbol variation, for example, it may be the timing before one decoration symbol (for example, left decoration symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed, one decoration The timing after the temporary stop display of the symbol (for example, the left decorative symbol) may be displayed, or the timing before or after the plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped may be displayed, and the decorative symbol sways and fluctuates It may be timing before or after being displayed.

Example 1
FIG. 320 shows the temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in the first embodiment according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis in FIG. 320 indicates a time series, and time passes from left to right. 0 to t6 in the upper part of FIG. 320 indicate points of time such as start and end of various periods. The middle part of FIG. 320 shows the display periods of the first display to the second display. The lower part shows the operation accepting period of the second operation means. Here, the first operation means is, for example, a chance button 136, and the second operation means is, for example, a pat button or a lever (not shown). Further, the first display is a display related to the first operation means, and is a display of a button image imitating the chance button 136 in this example. The second display is a display relating to the second operation means, and in this example is a display of a pato button image imitating a pato button and a lever image imitating a lever.

  In addition, the first display is displayed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device (display means) 208, whereby the first period is started. In this example, since the first display is displayed at time t1, time t1 is the start time of the first period. In addition, after the first display is displayed in the image display area, the second display is displayed. In this example, the second display starts to be displayed at time t3 after the first display starts to be displayed at time t1 and the display is ended at time t2.

  Also, the second display is displayed during the first period. In this example, the end time point of the first period is later than time point t3 which is at least the display start time point of the second display (for example, time points t4, t5, t6, etc.). In addition, the first period is before the period in which the operation of the second operation means can be received (hereinafter, may be referred to as "the second period following the first period" or "the third period"). To be started. The second period (operation accepting period of the second operation means) following the first period starts from time t4 and ends at time t5. In this example, the start of the first period is at time t1, which is earlier than the time t4 of the start of the second period following the first period. In addition, after the first display is displayed (for example, at time t3 after time t2), the change display of changing from the first display to the second display is started. Here, in the "change display", of course, the animation display which gradually changes from the first display to the second display, as well as after the first display is displayed, the first display is temporarily erased and then the second display is displayed. The case of displaying the display is also included.

  Although the second display is displayed during the period from time t3 to time t4 and the period from time t5 to time t6, it is outside the operation reception period. Time t3 to t4 is a period after the second display is started and before the start of the operation reception period, and time t5 to t6 is a period during which the second display is displayed and the operation reception period Period after the end of the In addition, the length of the period of time t3-time t4 and the period of time t5-time t6 may be the same, and either one period may be longer than the other period. Further, one or both of the period from time t3 to time t4 and the period from time t5 to time t6 may be zero.

  In this example, the length of the display period of the second display (time t3 to time t6) is longer than the length of the display period of the first display (time t1 to time t2), and the display period of the first display The length of is longer than the length of the transition period from the first display to the second display (time t2 to time t3). However, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may be the same, and the display period of the first display is the length of the display period of the second display. It may be longer. The transition period may be longer than the display period of the first display, and the transition period may be longer than the display period of the second display. Further, the length of the transition period may be equal to the length of the display period of the first display, or the length of the transition period may be equal to the length of the display period of the second display. Moreover, these combinations may be sufficient.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 321 and 322, the button effect in the special view changing game according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 321 (a) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 317 (l), and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped in the swing fluctuation state in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. An area 208 b shows a state in which the reach effect in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is continued is started.

  FIGS. 321 (b) to (f) show from the start to the end of the display of the button display animation (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as “button display animation”). The display of the button display animation corresponds to the “first display” of FIG. The point immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 321 (b) corresponds to the time point t1 in FIG. In the button display animation, a chance button (an image simulating the chance button 136 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "chance button image") and a flying carpet carrying a child appear from the left end of the effect display area 208d and a display area Flying across the display area and disappearing to the upper right corner of the display area. Immediately after the start of the button display animation display in FIG. 321 (b), only one end of the carpet image is viewed. In the display of the button display animation in this example, the chance button image is rendered in the center of the display area and disappears together with the child image without going. Immediately after the time point shown in FIG. 321 (f) corresponds to time point t2 in FIG.

  FIG. 321 (g) shows a state in which the display of the lever display animation (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "lever display animation") is started after the display of the button display animation in FIG. 321 (f) is finished. ing. The display of the lever display animation corresponds to the “second display” of FIG. Further, a period between the state shown in FIG. 321 (f) and the state shown in FIG. 321 (g) is a transition period shown in FIG. Immediately after the time shown in FIG. 321 (f) corresponds to time t2 in FIG. 320, and immediately before the time shown in FIG. 321 (g) corresponds to time t3 in FIG. In the lever display animation, an image of a carpet carrying an image resembling a lever (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "lever image") appears from the left end of the effect display area 208d and flies across the display area to display the image. It has an effect aspect which disappears to the right end. The button display animation and the lever display animation may be one animation or different animations. Further, for example, the display timing of the carpet image displayed in FIG. 321 (b) and the display timing of the carpet image displayed in FIG. 321 (g) may be the same or different.

  In FIG. 321 (i) which has passed the state shown in FIG. 321 (h), the state in which the lever image is displayed so that the carpet image on which the lever image is placed moves to the center of the display area and hides the middle symbol display area 208b. Is shown.

  FIG. 321 (j) shows an effect in which the lever image is placed at the center of the display area to hide the middle symbol display area 208b and only the carpet image is about to disappear at the right end of the display area.

  FIG. 321 (k) shows a state in which the lever image is placed at the center of the display area so that only the carpet image disappears and the middle symbol display area 208b is hidden.

  In FIG. 321 (l), the display of the lever display animation ends, and the display of the stationary lever image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "lever display") is performed, and the display of the effective period image (meter image) Indicates that the has been started. The point immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 321 (l) corresponds to the time point t4 in FIG. Although the player knows that the lever effect has been started by the display of the valid period image, since the lever operation can not be received at this stage because the countdown of the operation valid period has not started, it is accepted even if the lever is operated. Absent.

  FIG. 321 (m) shows a lever operation reception permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the lever effect and the operation reception period starts. Although the display in the lever effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation effective period is started at this stage, the lever operation for operating the lever is accepted.

  FIG. 321 (n) shows a state in which the reception valid period of the lever operation has passed a little and the bar-like portion of the display of the valid period image is somewhat shortened rightward.

  FIG. 321 (o) shows a state where the player has operated the lever (second operation means) or the operation reception period is over and a display corresponding to the lever operation is displayed. A point in time t5 in FIG. 320 exists between the points in time shown in FIGS. 321 (n) and 321 (o). Although different images (for example, effect display) may be displayed between FIG. 321 (n) and FIG. 321 (o), they may not be displayed. The point in time immediately before the point in time shown in FIG. 321 (o) corresponds to the point in time t6 in FIG. In FIG. 321 (o), an image of a symbol (a symbol obtained by combining a character and a “continuation” character string) showing a pseudo run is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b. In addition, the operation means (the operation means for displaying an image on the display means) in which the reception period becomes effective may be changed by the pseudo connection number. Further, regardless of the number of times of pseudo run, the operation accepting period of the same operation means as the operation means operated at the first pseudo run may be effective. From the state shown in FIG. 321 (o), the fade-out process of FIG. 317 (m) is executed after the end of the pseudo connected effect, and then a hit effect or an off effect of SP reach effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the same display as the display corresponding to the lever operation is displayed even when the lever (second operation means) is not operated, but the lever operation is supported when the lever is not operated. A display different from the displayed one may be displayed, and it is a display different from that when the lever is operated (for example, it is changed to a symbol showing a pseudo-link after displaying “decoration 6” temporarily stopped, etc.) May be

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the button display animation (the first display) regarding the chance button (the first operation means) 136 is displayed, the lever display animation (the second operation means) regarding the lever (the second operation means) Since the second display is displayed, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by the display. In addition, by performing various displays, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the button display animation and the lever display animation are displayed before the operation reception period, the lever display animation is displayed after the button display animation is displayed before the lever operation reception period. In some cases, the player can be surprised by the effect of operating the chance button and the player. In addition, it may be possible to surprise the player who was trying to press the chance button and to deepen interest in the lever.

  Further, according to this embodiment, since the button display animation is changed to the lever display animation, the player who is looking at the decorative symbol display device 208 may be surprised and may be able to deepen interest in the lever.

The button effect in the present embodiment can be variously modified.
For example,
(1): Execute FIG. 321 (a)-(c) to execute the effect that the child character drops the chance button in FIG. 321 (d), then display the effective period image, and It may be made to develop to SP reach production or normal reach production later.
(2): without displaying the button display animation of FIGS. 321 (c) to (f), the lever display animation of FIGS. 321 (g) to (o) after FIGS. 321 (a) and (b) The display may be performed to perform a pseudo-series effect.
(3): After executing FIGS. 321 (a), (b) and (g), an image without anything on the carpet shown in FIG. 322 (a) is displayed, and then the image of the carpet is erased after the SP You may make it develop into reach production or normal reach production.
(4): A character string of "SP" indicating that the character and SP reach are shifted on the carpet shown in FIG. 322 (b) after the execution of FIGS. 321 (a), (b) and (g) The image on which the image is mounted may be displayed, and then the carpet image and the character image may be erased and then developed into SP reach effect.
(5): Effects of carrying out FIGS. 321 (a) to (f) and further carrying out FIGS. 321 (b) to (d) and causing the child character to drop the chance button in the second drawing 321 (d) Then, the effective period image may be displayed, and after the chance button depression effect, the SP reach effect or the normal reach effect may be developed.
(6): The image shown in FIG. 322 (a) is displayed after executing FIGS. 321 (a) to (g), and then the image of the carpet is erased and then it is developed into SP reach effect or normal reach effect It is also good.
(7): After executing FIGS. 321 (a) to (g), the image shown in FIG. 322 (b) is displayed, and then the carpet image and character image are erased and then developed into SP reach effect. It is also good.

  FIGS. 322 (c) and (d) show effects that can be executed in place of the state shown in FIG. 321 (o). FIG. 322 (c) shows that the lever operation is performed after the state shown in FIG. 321 (n) to shift to "Yoshimune" reach. In FIG. 322 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 321 (n), the lever operation is performed, and "decoration 6" is swayed and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the result of the special figure fluctuation game may be released. It shows a state informing that it is high.

  In this embodiment, the display period (scale) of the button display animation in FIGS. 321 (b) to (f) is the same length as the lever display animation in FIGS. 321 (g) to (l). The length of one animation may be longer than the other animation. In addition, the length of the button display animation of the pattern of modification (1) is longer than the length of the button display animation of the pattern shown in FIG. 321, but may be the same length, or the pattern of deformation (1) is reversed. The measure of the button display animation of may be shorter than the measure of the button display animation of the pattern shown in FIG. As described above, the length of the button (lever) display animation may be made different between the effect when the operation is accepted and the effect when the operation is not accepted.

(Example 2)
FIG. 323 shows the temporal operation of the pachinko machine 100 in the second embodiment according to the present embodiment. The horizontal axis in FIG. 323 indicates a time series, and time passes from left to right. 0 to t6 at the top of FIG. 323 indicate time points such as the start and end of various periods. Group A at the top of FIG. 323 shows the same temporal operation as FIG. 320 of the first embodiment. The upper side of the group A indicates the display period of the first display to the second display. The lower side shows the operation accepting period of the second operation means. Group B at the bottom of FIG. 323 shows temporal behavior different from group A. The upper side of the group B indicates the display period of the first display. The lower side shows the operation reception period of the first operation means. The group A and the group B are not simultaneously executed during the special figure change game, but either one of the group A or B is executed, or the group B is executed after the execution of the group A, or After execution of group B, group A is executed. Here, the first operation means is, for example, a chance button 136, and the second operation means is, for example, a pat button or a lever (not shown). Further, the first display is a display related to the first operation means, and is a display of a button image imitating the chance button 136 in this example. The second display is a display relating to the second operation means, and in this example is a display of a pato button image imitating a pato button and a lever image imitating a lever. The group B may be executed partially or entirely overlapping with the group A, or vice versa.

  The first period shown in group A is a period during which the first display is displayed on the image display area of the decorative symbol display device (display means) 208. In this example, the first period is a period from time 0 when the first display starts to time t2 when the first display disappears. The second period shown in group B is also a period during which the first display is displayed on the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the second period is a period from time t1 when the first display starts to time t6 when the first display disappears. The length of the first period is shorter than the length of the second period.

  Further, the first period does not include the first operation reception period (operation valid period of the chance button 136) for receiving the operation of the first operation means (depression of the chance button 136). On the other hand, the second period includes the first operation reception period. Specifically, when the first operation acceptance period is from time t4 to time t5, the second period starts at time t1 before time t4 and ends at time t6 after time t5.

  The third period is a period starting after the first period (at time t3 after time t2) and displaying the second display. The third period includes a second operation reception period (operation valid period of the pato button or lever) for receiving the operation of the second operation means (pato button or lever operation). Specifically, when the second operation acceptance period is from time t4 to time t5, the third period starts at time t3 before time t4 and ends at time t6 after time t5. In addition, after the first display is displayed (for example, at time t3 after time t2), the change display of changing from the first display to the second display is started. Although the second display is displayed during the period from time t3 to time t4 and the period from time t5 to time t6, it is outside the operation reception period. Time t3 to t4 is a period after the second display is started and before the start of the operation reception period, and time t5 to t6 is a period during which the second display is displayed and the operation reception period Period after the end of the In addition, the length of the period of time t3-time t4 and the period of time t5-time t6 may be the same, and either one period may be longer than the other period. Further, one or both of the period from time t3 to time t4 and the period from time t5 to time t6 may be zero.

  The first period may be a period from the start of display of the first display to the end of display of the first display. In addition, the first period may be a period before the start of the transition period from the first display to the second display from the display start of the first display. Further, in the present embodiment, the length of the operation accepting period of the second operating means and the length of the operation accepting period of the first operating means are the same, but the length of the operation accepting period of one of the operating means is It may be made longer than the length of the operation reception period of the other operation means.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display period of the first display and the second display of the group A is an example longer than the display period of the first display of the group B. Specifically, the period from time point 0 to time point t1 is longer than the time period from time point t2 to time point t3. However, these display periods may be the same, and conversely, the display period of the first display of group B may be longer than the display periods of the first display and the second display of group A.

  Next, button effects and the like in the special view changing game according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 324 to 327. FIG. Since FIG. 324 (a) is the same as the state shown to FIG. 317 (o) in SP reach production, the description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 324 (b) shows a state in which a dark transition effect display (effect display such as the monitor (display screen) has disappeared) has been executed in the SP reach effect. The fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed in a visually recognizable manner even during the darkening effect.

  FIGS. 324 (c) to (g) show from the start to the end of button display at the time of darkening effect. The button display corresponds to the “first display” in FIG. Immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 324 (c) is the start time point of the first period, and corresponds to time point 0 in FIG. In the button display, a chance button image is displayed at the center of the image display area at the time shown in FIG. 324 (c), a meter image of the valid period image at the lower portion, and "chance?" Although the player recognizes that the button effect is started by the display of the effective period image, the first period of this example does not include the operation effective period of the chance button 136 for accepting the pressing of the chance button 136, so the effective period The image is a false display, and even if the player presses the chance button 136, the pressing operation is not accepted.

  Next, at the time point shown in FIG. 324 (d), the character string image at the top disappears, and a character string image of “No!” Is displayed large in the center and in front of the chance button image. Next, the character string image of "No!" Displayed in front of the center chance button image at the time shown in FIG. 324 (e) disappears, and "too hot?" Of the character string image is displayed at the top. Be done. Next, the character string image at the top disappears at the time point shown in FIG. 324 (f), and the character string image of “No!” Is displayed again at the center largely before the chance button image. After that, the character string image of “No!” Displayed before the central chance button image at the time shown in FIG. 324 (g), the chance button image, and the valid period image disappear, and the effect of the button display is ended. . Immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 324 (g) is the end time point of the first period, and corresponds to time point t2 in FIG.

  FIG. 324 (h) shows a state in which a character string image of "one blow !!" is displayed largely at the center of the image display area after the end of the button display during the darkening effect.

  FIG. 324 (i) shows a state in which the character string image of "one strike!" Has been deleted and the put button display has been started. The pat button display corresponds to the “second display” in FIG. A period from the state shown in FIG. 324 (g) to the state shown in FIG. 324 (i) through the state shown in FIG. 324 (h) is the transition period shown in FIG. Immediately after the time point shown in FIG. 324 (g) corresponds to time point t2 in FIG. 323, and immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 324 (i) corresponds to time point t3 (the start time of the second display) in FIG. In the pat button display, an image simulating the pat button (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "pat button image") and an effective period image are displayed. Although the player knows that the button effect has been started by the display of the effective period image, since the button operation can not be accepted at this stage since the countdown of the effective period of operation is not started, Operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 324 (j) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the button effect and the operation acceptance period has started. The point immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 324 (j) corresponds to the time point t4 shown in FIG. A downward arrow image is displayed above the pat button image in the button effect area to urge pressing of the pat button. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the pat button is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 324 (k) shows a state in which the rod-like portion of the display of the effective period image is slightly shortened rightward because the acceptance effective period of the button operation has passed a little.

  FIG. 324 (l) shows a state where the player has operated the lever (second operation means) or the operation reception period is over and a display corresponding to the lever operation is displayed. In this example, a character image of "holiday" and a character image of "Yoshimune" are displayed. The point immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 324 (l) corresponds to the time point t6 in FIG. Further, a point in time t5 of FIG. 323 exists in front of that. In the present embodiment, the same display as the display corresponding to the lever operation is displayed even when the lever (second operation means) is not operated, but the lever operation is supported when the lever is not operated. A display different from the displayed one may be displayed, and a display different only in part from when the lever is operated (for example, after temporary stop display of "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7") After the effect (resurrection effect) of changing the decorative pattern being displayed, “decorative 7—decorative 7—decorative 7” may be displayed).

  FIG. 324 (m) shows a state in which "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed due to fluctuation in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. After that, as shown in FIG. 318 (g), “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208 c, and then the big hit game shown in FIG. 318 (h) is started.

  FIGS. 324 (l ') and (m') show effects that can be executed instead of the states shown in FIGS. 324 (l) and (m). FIG. 324 (l ') shows a state in which the player operates the lever (second operation means) or the operation reception period ends and a display corresponding to the lever operation is displayed. In this example, a character image of "Sorry" is displayed. The point immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 324 (l ′) corresponds to the time point t6 in FIG. Further, a point in time t5 of FIG. 323 exists in front of that.

  FIG. 324 (m ') shows a state in which "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed due to fluctuation in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. After that, as shown in FIG. 319 (e), “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special figure fluctuation game is out.

In the state shown in FIG. 324 (c), the meter display of the effective period image is performed, but since the button operation can not be received, the length of the rod portion of the meter is not shortened. Note that the length of the rod-like portion of the meter may be shortened even outside the operation reception period of the button. Below, the modification of the change of the length of the rod-shaped part of a meter is shown.
(1): The length of the rod portion of the meter goes from full to 0 in FIGS. 324 (c) to (d), and then recovers to full between FIGS. 324 (d) to (e), Further, in FIG. 324 (e) to (f), the state of full is changed to 0, and the effective period image is erased. The color of the rod portion of the meter before and after recovery of the operation effective period may be the same or different.
(2): The length of the rod portion of the meter is reduced from full to 0 or to 0 in FIG. 324 (c) to (d), and then recovers to full between FIG. 324 (d) to (e), Further, in FIG. 324 (e) to (f), the state becomes full or 0 from full. The amount by which the length is shortened may be the same as or different from FIGS. 324 (c) to (d) and FIGS. 324 (e) to (f).
(3): The length of the rod-like portion of the meter goes from full to 0 in FIGS. 324 (c) to (f), and then continues to decrease between FIGS. 324 (d) to (e). In addition, you may have a role as operation effective period display until a button display is complete | finished.
(4): The length of the rod-like portion of the meter is in the state of 0 from the full tank in FIGS. 324 (c) to (f), and stops between FIG. 324 (d) to (e); Resume from the continuation with).
(5): The length of the rod portion of the meter is in the state from full to the middle in FIGS. 324 (c) to (f), and continues to decrease as it is in FIGS. 324 (d) to (e).
(6): The length of the rod-like portion of the meter is in the state from full to midway in FIGS. 324 (c) to (f), and stops between FIG. 324 (d) to (e); Resume from the continuation in e).

  Note that the effect display (for example, effect display) between FIGS. 324 (d) to (e) is the same as the effect display (for example, effect display) between FIGS. 324 (f) to (g). It is also good. Also, the effect display (for example, effect display) between FIG. 324 (d) to (e) is different from the effect display (for example, effect display) between FIG. 324 (k) to (l) but is the same It is also good. In the present embodiment, the meter display of the effective period image is displayed even outside the operation reception period of the button, but the meter may not be displayed outside the operation reception period of the button.

  FIG. 325 (a) shows an image to be displayed instead of FIG. 324 (c) in the special figure variation game shown in FIG. In FIG. 325 (a), a character string image of "is a chance?" And a pat button image in place of the chance button image are displayed. In this case, the chance button image shown in FIG. 325 (d) is also changed to a pat button image. Therefore, the display period of the button display is a period including FIGS. 324 (e) to (f). On the other hand, the display period of the Pato button display is a period including FIGS. 324 (c) to (d) and 324 (i) to (k).

  FIG. 325 (b) shows an image displayed instead of FIG. 324 (e) in the special figure variation game shown in FIG. In FIG. 325 (b), a character string image of "too hot?" And a pato button image are displayed instead of the chance button image. In this case, the chance button image shown in FIG. 325 (f) is also changed to a pat button image. Therefore, the display period of the button display is a period including FIGS. 324 (c) to (d). On the other hand, the display period of the Pato button display is a period including FIGS. 324 (e) to (k).

  Further, by combining FIGS. 325 (a) and 325 (b), it is possible to execute a button effect of only the pat button display. Assuming that the Pato button display is the first display of FIG. 323, the button effect of the group B shown in FIG. 323 can be realized in the special figure changing game shown in FIG.

  FIG. 326 (a) shows a state in which a dark transition effect display is performed in the SP reach effect. The fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed in a visually recognizable manner even during the darkening effect.

  Fig. 326 (b) to (e) show from the start to the end of button display at the time of darkening effect. The button display corresponds to the “first display” of group B in FIG. The point immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 326 (b) corresponds to the time point t1 in FIG. In the button display, a chance button image is displayed at the center of the image display area at the time shown in FIG. 326 (b), a meter image of the effective period image at the lower portion, and "is it a chance?" Although the player knows that the button effect has been started by the display of the valid period image, since the button operation can not be accepted without counting down the valid period of the operation at this stage, even if the chance button 136 is pressed. The pressing operation is not accepted.

  Next, at the time point shown in FIG. 326 (c), the character string image at the top disappears, and the character string image of "Yes!" Is displayed in front of the chance button image largely at the center. Next, the character string image of “Yes!” Displayed in front of the center chance button image at the time shown in FIG. 326 (d) disappears. FIG. 324 (d) shows the button operation acceptance permission state in which the operation acceptance period has started. The point immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 324 (d) corresponds to the time point t4 shown in FIG. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted. FIG. 326 (e) shows a state in which the rod-like portion of the display of the effective period image has become somewhat short in the right direction since the acceptance effective period of the button operation has passed a little. In the present embodiment, the timing when the character string “Yes!” Disappears and the timing when the button operation is permitted are simultaneous, but after the character string “Yes!” Disappears, the button operation is permitted Or vice versa. Here, the operation acceptance permission state may indicate a state in which the operation acceptance period of the operation means (button, lever, pate button, etc.) has been started. The same applies to the following embodiments.

  FIG. 326 (f) shows a state in which the player has operated the chance button 136 (first operating means) or the operation reception period is ended and a display corresponding to the operation of the chance button is displayed. In this example, a character image of "holiday" and a character image of "Yoshimune" are displayed. The point immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 326 (f) corresponds to the time point t6 in FIG. Also, the point immediately before the point shown in FIG. 326 (c) corresponds to the point t4 in FIG. 323, and the point immediately before the point shown in FIG. 326 (f) corresponds to the point t5 in FIG.

  Although the length of the period in which the chance button shown in FIG. 324 is displayed is longer than the period in which the chance button shown in FIG. 326 is displayed, it may be the same. It may be longer than the length shown in 324. The period in which the chance button shown in FIG. 326 is displayed is not constant because the button image disappears when the button is operated within the period of the operation reception period. The period of an ailing effect (for example, up to FIG. 326 (c)) starting from the display of “is it a chance?” Shown in FIG. 326 (b), the operation reception period, and the period until the button image is deleted (FIG. The length of the period from) to the front of (f) is the maximum length of the button display period. While the period in which the chance button shown in FIG. 326 is displayed indicates the maximum period, it may be shorter, longer, or the same as the button display period shown in FIG. 324 depending on the timing when the chance button 136 is pressed. There may be cases.

  In FIG. 326 (b ') and (c'), instead of the character string image of "Chance? Is it a chance?" Shown in Figs. 326 (b) and (c), the characters of "too hot?" It shows a state in which a column image is displayed.

  FIGS. 326 (b ′ ′) to (d ′ ′) show modifications of FIGS. 326 (b) to (d). FIG. 326 (b ′ ′) shows a state in which a character string image of “one strike !!” is largely displayed at the center of the image display area in the dark effect, instead of FIG. 326 (b).

  FIG. 326 (c ′ ′) shows a state in which the character string image of “one blow !!” has been deleted and the patrol button display has been started. The pat button display corresponds to the “first display” of group B in FIG. Immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 326 (c ′ ′) corresponds to the time point t1 in FIG. In the pat button display, a pat button image and a valid period image are displayed. Although the player knows that the button effect has been started by the display of the effective period image, since the button operation can not be accepted at this stage since the countdown of the effective period of operation is not started, Operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 326 (d ′ ′) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the button effect and the operation acceptance period has started. A downward arrow image is displayed above the pat button image in the button effect area to urge pressing of the pat button. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the pat button is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 327 shows a modification of this embodiment. The button effects shown in FIGS. 327 (a) to (e) are executed instead of the ones shown in (b) to (f) in the special figure changing game shown in FIG. FIG. 327 (a) shows a state in which a dark transition effect display is executed in the SP reach effect. The fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed in a visually recognizable manner even during the darkening effect.

  FIG. 327 (b) to (e) show from the start to the end of the button display at the time of darkening effect. The button display corresponds to the “first display” in FIG. Immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 327 (b) is the start time point of the first period, and corresponds to time point 0 in FIG. In the button display, at the time shown in FIG. 327 (b), the chance button image is displayed at the center of the image display area, the meter image of the effective period image at the lower portion, and "is it a chance?" Although the player recognizes that the button effect is started by the display of the effective period image, the first period of this example does not include the operation effective period of the chance button 136 for accepting the pressing of the chance button 136, so the effective period The image is a false display, and even if the player presses the chance button 136, the pressing operation is not accepted.

  Next, at the time point shown in FIG. 327 (c), the character string image at the top disappears, and the character string image of "No!" Next, the character string image of "No!" Displayed in front of the center chance button image at the time shown in FIG. 327 (d) disappears, and "too hot?" Of the character string image is displayed at the top. Be done. Next, at the point shown in FIG. 327 (e), the character string image at the top disappears, and the character string image of "Yes!" Thereafter, following the time point shown in FIG. 326 (d), the character string “Yes!” Is erased, the operation acceptance period starts, and the process continues from FIG. 326 (e). In addition, after the screen shown in FIG. 327 (e), the character string image of “Yes!” Which was displayed in front of the central chance button image at the time shown in FIG. The effect of the button display may be ended. In that case, the point immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 324 (g) is the end time point of the first period and corresponds to the time point t2 in FIG.

  The button effects shown in FIGS. 327 (b ') to (e') are executed in place of the views (c) to (i) in the special figure changing game shown in FIG. In the button display, the chance button image is displayed at the center of the image display area at the time shown in FIG. 327 (b '), the meter image of the effective period image at the bottom, and "too hot?" .

  Next, at the time point shown in FIG. 327 (c ′), the character string image at the top disappears, and the character string image of “No!” Is displayed large at the center of the chance button image. Next, the character string image of "No!" Displayed in front of the center chance button image at the time shown in FIG. 327 (d ') disappears, and instead, the character string image of "One Shot !!" is displayed. Ru. Next, in FIG. 327 (e ′), the character string image of “one blow !!” is erased, and the patrol button display is started.

  The button effects shown in FIG. 327 (b ′ ′) to (e ′ ′) are executed instead of the one shown in FIG. 324 (c) to (i) in the special figure changing game shown in FIG. In the button display, the chance button image is displayed at the center of the image display area at the time point shown in FIG. 327 (b ′ ′), the meter image of the effective period image at the bottom, and “Can you see a chance?” .

  Next, at the point shown in FIG. 327 (c ′ ′), the character string image at the top disappears, and the character string image of “No!” Is displayed large at the center and in front of the chance button image. Next, the character string image of "No!" Displayed in front of the central chance button image at the time shown in FIG. 327 (d ′ ′) disappears, and instead, the character string image of “One Shot !!” is displayed Be done. Next, in FIG. 327 (e ′ ′), the character string image of “one shot !!” is erased, and the PAT button display is started.

  As described above, the effect pattern that changes from the button display to the lever display or the effect pattern of only the button display can be variously modified. That is, the period during which the button image and the lever image are displayed may be the same or different.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the period in which the button display related to the chance button 136 is displayed is different, it is possible to realize a game console having a display. Moreover, when the length of the 1st period and the length of the period of the 2nd period differ, the variation of a production | presentation may be able to be increased.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the first period is a period not including the reception period, and the second period is a period including the reception period, the first operation reception period is a period in which the button display is displayed. It may be possible to distinguish in advance whether to operate the chance button 136 or not by providing the case where it is included and the case where it is not included. Also, in some cases, it may be possible to give a sense of superiority to a player who has noticed in advance whether or not the chance button 136 is operated.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the third period includes the operation reception period, it may be possible to surprise the player who was about to press the chance button 136 and to deepen interest in the pat button or the lever.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the display is changed from the button display to the lever display or the Pato button display, it is possible to surprise the player looking at the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and deepen interest in the Pato button or lever. There is a possibility.

(Example 3)
FIG. 328 shows the effects displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention. The present embodiment shows a button change animation (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as “button change animation”) executed in the SP reach effect shown in FIGS. 317 (o) to 318 (c). FIGS. 328 (a) and (b) show the same state as FIG. 317 (o) and FIG. 318 (a), and FIG. 328 (m) shows the same state as FIG. 318 (c).

  FIG. 328 (c) shows a state where button display has been started. While the SP reach effect is continued, the chance button image and the effective period image are displayed. At this stage, although the meter image is displayed, it is outside the operation reception period of the chance button 136, and the lever is also outside the operation reception period. In the present embodiment, the meter image indicating the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is displayed even outside the operation reception period of the chance button 136, but the meter image may not be displayed.

  FIG. 328 (d) shows a state in which a character string image of “press the button!” Is displayed above the button image and the button change animation is started. In the button change animation, a small smoke image is displayed in the area imitating the pressed surface of the chance button image.

  FIG. 328 (e) shows a display in which the smoke image produced in the area imitating the pressed surface of the chance button image becomes gradually larger.

  FIG. 328 (f) shows a state where the smoke image is further enlarged and most of the chance button image is hidden.

  FIG. 328 (g) shows that the smoke image is larger and both the chance button image and the meter image are completely hidden.

  In FIG. 328 (h), while the character string image of “press the button!” Is erased, the transmittance of the smoke image gradually increases, and the lever image that replaces the button image is displayed behind the smoke image display. Indicates a state where it is visible.

  FIG. 328 (i) shows a lever display state in which the smoke image disappears and the button change animation ends and the lever image becomes completely visible. Moreover, the state in which the display of the effective period image (meter image) was started is shown with the display of a lever image. Although the player knows that the lever effect has been started by the display of the validity period image, the lever operation can not be accepted because the countdown of the operation validity period is not started at this stage, so even if the lever is pulled, the operation is accepted. I can not.

  FIG. 328 (j) shows a state in which the character string image "close" has been displayed. FIG. 328 (k) shows a lever operation reception permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the lever effect and the operation reception period starts. Although the display in the lever effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation effective period is started at this stage, the operation is accepted when the lever is pulled.

  FIG. 328 (l) shows a state in which the reception valid period of the lever operation has passed a little and the bar-like portion of the display of the valid period image is somewhat shortened rightward.

  FIG. 328 (m) shows a state in which the player operated the lever or the operation reception period is ended and a display corresponding to the lever operation is displayed. In the present embodiment, the same state as shown in FIG. 318 (c) is shown. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 318 (d) and the subsequent steps are performed.

FIG. 328 (m ′) shows a state in which the effect by the effect means such as the effect movable object etc. and the effect for displaying the effect image corresponding to the effect means are combined instead of the effect shown in FIG. 328 (m). For example, even if the effect is a jackpot, if the button image does not change to a lever image in the button change animation described later, the effect shown in FIG. 328 (m) is executed, and the button image is a lever image by the button change animation When it changes to, the effect for the same big hit (or loss) may be made different depending on the operation means that accepts the operation, such as performing the effect shown in FIG. 328 (m ′). When the lever operation is not performed until the end of the operation reception period, the effect of FIG. 328 (m ') may be executed after the display of the lever image is erased, but the lever image is displayed. The effect of FIG. 328 (m ′) may be performed before the deletion, or the effect of FIG. 328 (m ′) may be performed simultaneously with the deletion of the display of the lever image.
The meter displayed on the display means may be displayed decreasingly until the end of the operation reception period of FIG. 328 (e) to the lever (in this case, the lever image is erased after the chance button image is started to be displayed). It is a meter that shows the time until it is In addition, the interval decreases from FIG. 328 (e) to FIG. 328 (f), and after the meter disappears in FIG. 328 (g), the meter recovers to the maximum in FIG. 328 (h), (k ) And the operation acceptance period of the lever may be displayed by a meter.

  FIG. 329 shows a modification of this embodiment. In the special figure variation game shown in FIG. 329, the button change animation as shown in FIG. 328 is not executed, and FIGS. 329 (a), (b) are in the same state as in FIGS. 328 (a), (b). FIG. 329 (f) shows the same state as FIG. 328 (m). Moreover, FIGS. 329 (c) to (e) show button effects. FIG. 329 (e) shows a state where acceptance of button operation has been started. The display period of the button effect according to the present modification is longer than the display period of the button effect according to the embodiment, but may be shorter or the same.

(Example 4)
FIG. 330 shows the effects displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 330 (a) shows a state in which the display of the button effect is started in the effect display area 208d. In the effect display area 208d, a horizontally long rectangular button effect area is secured at the center of the front of the background image imitating a mansion fence, and a character image is displayed in the left quarter area within the button effect area. The button display in which the button image and the valid period image are displayed in the remaining three quarters of the area is executed. The valid period image is displayed at the bottom of the button image. The display priority of the button effect area is set to be higher than the display priority of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. For this reason, by the image of the button effect area, the symbol variation display of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c on the rear side of the button effect area is hidden and can not be visually recognized. Further, the display priority of the symbol display area is higher than that of the background image. The player knows that the button effect has been started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 330 (g), but at this stage, since the button operation can not be received, the chance button can not be received. Even if the user presses the button 136, the pressing operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 330 (b) shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time has elapsed since the button display shown in FIG. 330 (a) is started. The acceptance effective period of the button operation has passed a little, and the bar image of the effective period image has a somewhat shortened bar portion. Since the countdown of the operation valid period has already started, pressing the chance button 136 accepts the pressing operation.

  In (c) of FIG. 330, the acceptance effective period of the button operation has further elapsed, and the bar image of the effective period image has a further shortened rod portion. In addition, in the period between FIG. 330 (b) to (c), the suspension of Special Figure 1 is increased by one, and in the special diagram 1 suspension lamp 218, it is informed that the number of suspension of Special Figure 1 is two. It is done. Further, in the special figure 1 reserve icon display area A, two special figure 1 reserve icons a1 and a2 are displayed in a white circular display mode.

  FIG. 330D shows the display priority of an image identical to or similar to the background image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “background similar image”) higher than the background image and the button effect area, and displaying them in front of them. It shows the state. However, the variation display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed in a reduced size and the fourth symbols of the fourth symbol display areas t1 to t3 are displayed. As a result, the button effect area, the special view 1 reserved icon display area A, and the variation icon display area C are visually erased, and the background image changes from the state shown in FIG. 330 (c) to a freeze display state. The freeze display is a type of pending preview notification effect. In addition, the special figure 1 suspension icon display area A and the fluctuation icon display area C may be displayed as it is even during the freeze effect. Since the background similar image is displayed in front of the button effect area, the chance button effect appears to be erased. In addition, although the operation reception period is continuing and the operation itself of the chance button is received, nothing is displayed. Further, when the background similar image is displayed in the foreground, the subsequent effects of FIG. 330 (c) may be continuously displayed on the back of the background similar image, but may not be displayed. Further, when the freeze effect is performed, the operation reception period may be forcibly ended.

  FIG. 330 (e) shows a state in which the operation reception period has ended. FIG. 330 (f) shows a state in which "special 5-modification 2-decorative 1" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c when the special effect variation game is detached while the freeze effect is being executed. FIG. 330 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 5-decoration 2-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c because the next figure fluctuation game is out while the freeze effect is being executed. The suspension of the special drawing 1 is reduced by one, and the special drawing 1 suspension lamp 218 reports that the number of reservations of the special drawing 1 is one.

  FIG. 330 (h) shows a state in which the next figure variation game is started with the freeze effect being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. Moreover, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In addition, the number of reservations is decreased by one, and it is reported that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 0 in Special Figure 1 reservation lamp 218. In the effect display area 208d of FIG. 330 (h), an effect is performed as if a screen displaying a background similar image is broken.

  FIG. 330 (i) shows a state in which only one fragment of the broken screen is displayed. FIG. 330 (j) shows a state in which the display of the lever image is started. A lever image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, an image of a white treasure box is displayed on the right side thereof, and an image of a black treasure box is displayed on the left side thereof. Further, a character string image of "Select a treasure box!" Is displayed above the lever image, and an image indicating that the lever is to be pushed to the left or right is displayed near the left and right of the lever image. An effective period image is displayed below the lever image. In addition, the special figure 1 reserved icon display area A and the variable icon display area C are redisplayed. The player knows that the lever effect has been started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 330 (j), but at this stage, the lever is not accepted because the countdown of the operation valid period has not been started. It is not accepted even if it operates.

  FIG. 330 (k) shows a lever operation reception permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the effect of the lever display and the operation reception period has started. Although the display in the lever effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation effective period is started at this stage, the operation is accepted when the lever is operated.

  FIG. 330 (l) shows a state in which the rod-like portion of the display of the effective period image has become somewhat short in the right direction since the acceptance effective period of the button operation has passed a little.

  In FIG. 330 (m), the player has operated the lever to the left or the operation acceptance period is over, and the black treasure box displayed on the left is selected and blacked in the center of the effect display area 208d. The image of the treasure box is shown.

  FIG. 330 (n) shows a state in which a character string image of "superheat" is displayed together with an image in which a plurality of characters appear from the inside of the black treasure box lid.

(Example 5)
FIG. 331 shows an effect displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIGS. 331 (a) to (h) show effects to be executed instead of FIGS. 330 (d) to (k) between FIGS. 330 (a) to (c) and FIGS. 330 (l) to (n) ing.

  In FIG. 331 (a), the display is frozen at a timing when the appearance shown in FIG. 330 (c) is frozen. In the freeze display state, the button image of the button effect area and the operation effective period image are displayed in front of the background image, and the image display state in which the overall contrast is lowered is obtained. The operation effective period image is stopped and displayed before (or immediately before) the freeze display is started. The freeze display is a type of pending preview notification effect. The special icon 1 reserved icon display area A and the variable icon display area C are erased during the periods shown in FIGS. 331 (a) to (g). In addition, illustration of a background image is abbreviate | omitted in the display of FIG. 331 (a)-(g). The operation valid period image may be stopped and displayed at the same time as the freeze display is started, or may be stopped and displayed after (or immediately after) the freeze display is started.

  FIG. 331 (b) shows a state in which the operation reception period has ended. In FIG. 331 (c), a button image is displayed in which freeze effect is performed in a state of execution, and the special figure fluctuation game is removed, and "decorative 5-decorative 2-decorative 1" in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the stop display state. FIG. 331 (d) shows a state in which “deterior 5-decoration 2-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c as the next drawing variation game is detached while the freeze effect is being executed. The suspension of the special drawing 1 is reduced by one, and the special drawing 1 suspension lamp 218 reports that the number of reservations of the special drawing 1 is one. The operation valid period image may be changed and displayed (for example, reduced) while the freeze display is being performed according to the elapsed time of the operation reception period.

  FIG. 331 (e) shows a state in which the next figure variation game is started with the freeze effect being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, variable display of decorative symbols is executed. Moreover, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area t1. In addition, the number of reservations is decreased by one, and it is reported that the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 0 in Special Figure 1 reservation lamp 218. In the effect display area 208d of FIG. 331 (e), the freeze display is cut in the upper and lower oblique straight line at almost the center, and the effect that the left and right images are shifted up and down is executed. Also, there is an effect that a part of the effect to be performed next is visible from the shifted portion.

  FIG. 331 (f) shows a state in which the display of the lever image is started. The vertical shift of the left and right images is gradually enlarged, and the display of the lever image is gradually seen. Although the player knows that the lever effect has been started by looking at the image shown in FIG. 331 (f), the lever operation is not permitted at this stage because the countdown of the operation effective period has not been started. It is not accepted even if it operates.

  FIG. 331 (g) shows a lever operation acceptance permission state where a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the effect of the lever display and the operation acceptance period starts. Although the display in the lever effect area has not changed, since the countdown of the operation effective period is started at this stage, the operation is accepted when the lever is operated.

  In FIG. 331 (h), a lever image is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d, an image of a white treasure box is displayed on the right side thereof, and an image of a black treasure box is displayed on the left side thereof. Further, a character string image of "Select a treasure box!" Is displayed above the lever image, and an image indicating that the lever is to be pushed to the left or right is displayed near the left and right of the lever image. An effective period image is displayed below the lever image. In addition, the special figure 1 reserved icon display area A and the variable icon display area C are redisplayed.

(Example 6)
Next, the effects displayed on the display means of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. Since FIG. 332 (a) is the same as the state shown to FIG. 317 (o) in SP reach production, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Fig. 332 (b) to (e) show from the start to the end of the chance button display. The button display corresponds to the “first display” in FIG. The point immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 332 (b) corresponds to time point 0 in FIG. In the button display, at the time shown in FIG. 332 (b), the chance button image is at the center of the image display area, the meter image of the effective period image is at the bottom, and Is displayed. In addition, the image of the spirit meter is displayed on the left side of the button image. Although the player knows that the button effect has been started by the display of the effective period image, since the button operation can not be accepted without counting down the effective period at this stage, even if the chance button 136 is continuously hit. The pressing operation is not accepted.

  Next, in FIGS. 332 (c) to 332 (e), the display image is gradually flipped from the lower left end like a sheet, and an effect is produced in which a part of the image notifying the advance notice is visible on the exposed surface. At the time point shown in FIG. 332 (e), the effect of the button display ends. Immediately after the time point shown in FIG. 332 (e) corresponds to time point t2 in FIG.

  FIG. 332 (f) shows a state in which a character string image of "chance to strike" is displayed in two stages in the image display area after the end of the button display. The said character string image has notified that the result of the said special figure change game becomes a big hit beforehand.

  FIG. 332 (g) shows a state in which the character string image of "one shot chance" has been erased and display of the PAT button is started. The pat button display corresponds to the “second display” in FIG. A period from the state shown in FIG. 332 (e) to the state shown in FIG. 332 (g) through the state shown in FIG. 332 (f) is a transition period shown in FIG. Immediately after the time shown in FIG. 332 (e) corresponds to time t2 in FIG. 323, and immediately before the time shown in FIG. 332 (g) corresponds to time t3 in FIG. In the pat button display, a pat button image, a valid period image, and a character string image of "one blow" are displayed. The character image of "a blow" is a tutorial display that suggests pressing one press instead of hitting the pat button. Although the player knows that the button effect has been started by the display of the effective period image, since the button operation can not be accepted at this stage since the countdown of the effective period of operation is not started, Operation is not accepted.

  FIG. 332H shows a button operation acceptance permission state in which a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the button effect and the operation acceptance period has started. At this stage, since the countdown of the operation valid period is started, when the pat button is pressed, the pressing operation is accepted.

  FIG. 332 (i) shows a state in which the rod-like portion of the display of the effective period image has become somewhat short in the right direction since the acceptance effective period of the button operation has passed a little.

  FIG. 332 (j) shows a state in which the player has pressed the PATO button or the operation reception period has ended and a display corresponding to the button operation has been made. The point immediately before the time point shown in FIG. 332 (j) corresponds to the time point t6 in FIG. The point in time shown in FIG. 332 (h) corresponds to the point in time t4 in FIG. 323, and the point immediately before the point in time shown in FIG. 332 (j) corresponds to the point in time t5 in FIG. FIG. 332 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed due to fluctuation in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. After that, as shown in FIG. 318 (g), “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208 c, and then the big hit game shown in FIG. 318 (h) is started. As described above, the present embodiment is characterized in that the operation mode of the chance button 136 is a continuous hit while the operation mode of the pat button is a single press.

  FIG. 332 (c ') shows a modified example of the effect at a time point corresponding to FIG. 332 (c). In this modified example, the effect is that the display image is not flipped.

  FIGS. 332 (c ′ ′) and (d ′ ′) show modified examples of the effects at times corresponding to FIGS. 332 (c) and (d). In this modification, after the display image is flipped and displayed at the time of FIG. 332 (c ′ ′), the effect is such that the portion that is flipped at the time of FIG. 332 (d ′ ′) is returned to the original state.

  FIG. 332 (j ′) shows a modified example of the effect at a time point corresponding to FIG. 332 (j). In this modification, a state in which "decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed due to fluctuation is shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. After this, as shown in FIG. 319 (e), “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is informed that the result of the special view fluctuation game is off. .

(Example 7)
The animation example at the time of the button image used by the special figure change game in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of this embodiment appearing in an image display area is demonstrated using FIG. In FIG. 333 (a), a small effect image is displayed first in the image display area, the effect image is gradually enlarged, and then a button image is displayed in the center of the front of the effect image, and the effective period is below it. It shows a state in which an image is displayed. After that, the effect image disappears, and the button effect of the button image and the effective period image is started.

  FIG. 333 (b) shows a state in which the button image and the valid period image are simultaneously displayed in the fade-in process.

  In FIG. 333 (c), first of all, the right side of the button image appears with a predetermined transmittance from the center of the left end of the image display area indicated by the dashed rectangle, and from the center of the right end of the image display area. The left side of the button image shows a state of appearing at a predetermined transmittance. Next, the left button image moves to the right in the horizontal direction, and the button image on the right moves to the left in the horizontal direction, so that both overlap almost at the center of the screen, and finally they become one button image. Stop. Then, the transmittance of the button image becomes zero, and then the valid period image is displayed below the button image.

  FIG. 333 (d) is characterized in that while the effective period image appears at the end of the animation display in FIG. 333 (c), the effective period image appears with the button image from the beginning of the animation display; The point of is the same animation display as FIG. 333 (c).

  The animation for deleting these button images and valid period images may be a rewind effect in which the animation at the time of appearance is reversed. In addition, an erasure animation different from the animation at the time of appearance may be performed. In addition, when the button is erased, the animation may not be displayed but may be erased.

(Example 8)
A standby animation example of a button image or the like displayed in the special figure changing game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The standby animation may be an animation indicating that the operation is possible.

  FIG. 334 (a) is a display example of standby animation of a lever image. (I) on the left side of the figure is a display of a lever image in a state where the lever is inclined backward. (Ii) on the right side of the figure is a display of a lever image in a state where the lever is tilted to the front. The standby animation display in which the lever moves forward and backward is displayed in the order of (i), (ii), (i) and (ii).

  FIG. 334 (b) is a display example of a standby animation of a pato button image. (Iii) on the left side of the figure is a display of a pat button image in a state where the pat button protrudes upward. (Iv) on the right side of the figure is a display of a pat button image in a state where the pat button is slightly buried downward. (Iii), (iv), (iii) and (iv) are displayed in order, and a standby animation display in which the PAT button moves up and down is performed.

  FIG. 334 (c) is a display example of standby animation of a button image. (V) on the left side of the figure is a display of a button image in a state in which the chance button protrudes upward. (Vi) on the right side of the figure is a display of a button image in a state where the chance button is slightly buried downward. The standby animation is displayed in the order of (v), (vi), (v) and (vi) and the chance button moves up and down.

  The standby animation may be performed from the start to the end of the operation reception period, in which case an animation or a still image different from the standby animation (for example, if it is displayed as a lever (i ) May be displayed. In addition, the waiting animation may be displayed between the time the button image is displayed and the time it is deleted. In that case, during the operation reception period and outside the operation reception period (for example, in the case of the example of FIG. 334 (a), both during the operation reception period and outside the operation reception period (i), (ii), (i), It may be displayed in the order of (ii), and different animations (for example, in the case of the example of FIG. 334 (a), outside the operation acceptance period is stopped and displayed in (i) or (ii), the operation acceptance period The inside may be displayed in the order of (i), (ii), (i) and (ii)).

(Example 9)
A button change animation displayed in the special figure changing game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In the button change animation shown in FIG. 335 (a), a small smoke image is displayed in the area imitating the pressed surface of the chance button image while the chance button image and the valid period image are displayed first. Then, from the state where the smoke image is gradually enlarged and most of the chance button image is hidden, both the chance button image and the meter image are completely hidden by the finally enlarged smoke image. Thereafter, the transmittance of the smoke image gradually increases, and a lever image appears in place of the button image behind the display of the smoke image. Then, the smoke image disappears and the button change animation ends, and the lever image becomes completely visible.

  In the button change animation shown in FIG. 335 (b), a small smoke image is displayed in the area imitating the pressed surface of the chance button image, with the chance button image and the valid period image being displayed first. Then, from the state where the smoke image is gradually enlarged and most of the chance button image is hidden, both the chance button image and the meter image are completely hidden by the finally enlarged smoke image. Thereafter, the transmittance of the smoke image gradually increases, and a button image appears behind the display of the smoke image. Subsequently, the smoke image disappears and the button change animation ends, and the button image becomes completely visible. After all, in this example, the button image does not change before and after being hidden by the smoke image (that is, it is a button change animation in which the button image does not change to a lever image).

  In the button change animation shown in FIG. 335 (c), the displayed chance button image and valid period image gradually disappear, and at the same time, the button image and valid period image display position is valid for the lever image and lever. An effect is produced in which the period image gradually appears. Since the chance button image and the valid period image can be viewed first and the lever image and the valid period image for the lever can not be viewed, the chance button image and the valid period image can not be viewed last and the lever image and The valid period image for the lever becomes visible.

(Example 10)
A button image and an effective period image used in the special figure changing game in the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 336 (a) shows an example in which the chance button image and the validity period image are combined in an integrated manner. In this example, effective period images are arranged in a ring around the chance button image. The valid period image is composed of a character string image of "PUSH" displayed in the ring image, and six arrow images arranged in a line in the ring with the arrowhead directed to "PUSH". When it is not the operation effective period, the character string image of "PUSH" is displayed in the non-lighting state (indicated by white in the figure), and is displayed in the lighted state (indicated by black in the figure) during the operation effective period. . In addition, all six arrow images before the start of the operation effective period are displayed in the lit state. First, when the button image and the ring-shaped effective period image are displayed, the character string image of "PUSH" is displayed in the non-lighting state and the six arrow images are in the lighted state because the operation is not performed initially. Is displayed on.

  Next, when the operation effective period starts, the character string image of "PUSH" is displayed in a lit state. The display changes from the lighting state to the non-lighting state sequentially from the arrow image at a position far from the character string image of "PUSH" among the six arrow images as time passes. When the arrow image closest to the character string image of "PUSH" is turned off, then the character string image of "PUSH" is turned off and it is informed that the operation effective period has ended. Note that the character string image of "PUSH" may be displayed in a lit state even outside the operation effective period.

  FIG. 336 (b) shows an effect example in which the remaining time of the operation effective period is notified only by the chance button image. In this example, the valid period image is not specified. First, a character string image of "press!" Is displayed on the button image and the upper part thereof. Then, a downward arrow image is displayed at the upper right of the button image to notify that the operation valid period has started. Then, as time passes, the button image is gradually erased from the left end of the button image to the right. In the present example, the erasing end is in the form of a straight line. When the straight line at the erase end reaches the position of the arrow image, the arrow image is also synchronously erased from the left side. Note that the character string image of "Press!" Is not deleted. As described above, in the present example, the remaining time of the operation effective period is notified by the decrease degree of the display area of the button image.

  FIG. 336 (c) shows an example of the combination of the chance button image and the special effective period image. At the top of the chance button image, a "match" character string image is displayed. The text is drawn with a thick line, and when the operation effective period is 100%, the inside of the thick line of the character string is displayed in full black, and when the operation effective period is 0%, the inside of the thick line of the character is completely white Is displayed. If the operation effective period is longer than 0% and shorter than 100%, the upper part of the character string gradually changes from the blacked state to the white state, corresponding to the amount of time remaining. In this example, the boundary between the blacked portion and the white portion is in the form of a straight line. As described above, in this example, the remaining time of the operation valid period is notified on the basis of the degree of the display change amount of the character string image.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 317 to 336 and 392.
(A1) The game console according to the present embodiment is:
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol device 208);
A game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100 or slot machine 1000) provided with a plurality of operation means (for example, the chance button 136 and a pat button or lever not shown)
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (e.g., chance button 136),
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (e.g., a pat button or lever not shown),
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a plurality of displays (for example, a display of a button image imitating a chance button 136 and a display of a button image imitating a patrol button or a lever),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, display of a button image imitating the chance button 136),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, display of a button image imitating a put button or a lever),
The first display is a display related to the first operation means,
The second display is a display related to the second operation means,
The second display may be displayed after the first display is displayed on the display means (for example, at time t3 after time t2 shown in FIG. 320).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since the second display about the second operation means is displayed after the first display about the first operation means is displayed, it is possible to realize the game stand having a feature in the display . In addition, by performing various displays, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, "a plurality of operation means" may indicate that only two of the first operation means and the second operation means are provided, and three or more operation means are provided. May be indicated. The first display indicates only the display relating to the first operation means, and the display including the display relating to the second operation means is not included, but the display relating to the second operation means is at least Even if it is partially included, it may be the first display as long as the display related to the first operation means is displayed. The same applies to the second display, and the second display indicates only the display related to the second operation means, and the display including the display related to the first operation means is included. Although it is not included, even if the display related to the first operation means is at least partially included, the second display may be displayed as long as the display related to the second operation means is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first display is a display related to the first operation means, but the change to the second display may be included in the first display. The period in which the first display is displayed on the display means may at least partially overlap with the period in which the second display is displayed on the display means, but after the first display is erased Only the second display may be displayed.

The first display may be displayed after the second display is displayed on the display means (for example, at time t3 after time t2 shown in FIG. 320). In this case, during the period in which the second display is displayed, the operation of the second operation means is invalid, and the operation acceptance period of the first operation means is started after the first display is displayed. You may In addition, a change display that changes from the third display to at least one of the first display and the second display, which is an aspect in which whether the first display or the second display is not specified (for example, an image of a bag) After (the third display) is displayed, an animation in which at least one of the button image (the first display) and the lever image (the second display) comes out of the bag is displayed. It is also good.
Also, from at least one of the first display and the second display to the fourth display (for example, an image such as a character or character display unrelated to an image related to the operation means such as a button image or a lever image) A changing change indication (eg, an animation in which the character is displayed after the button image is displayed) may be displayed.

(A2)
It is a game console described in (A1),
By displaying the first display on the display means, a first period (for example, a period starting from time t1 shown in FIG. 320) is started.
During the first period (for example, the period from time t1 to time t6 shown in FIG. 320), the second display is displayed on the display means;
In a second period (for example, a period from time point t4 to time point t5 shown in FIG. 320), at least operation of the second operation means (for example, operation of a pat button or a lever) can be received.
The first period is a period starting before the second period (for example, time t1 before time t4 shown in FIG. 320).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since the first display and the second display are displayed before the operation reception period, after the first display is displayed before the operation reception period of the second operation means, the second By displaying the display, the player may be surprised by the effect of operating the first operation means and the player. Also, in some cases, it may be possible to surprise the player who was trying to press the first operation means and to deepen the interest in the second operation means.

  The second period may be an operation reception period of the second operation means. Here, the operation reception period may be an operation valid period. The first period indicates the period during which the first display is displayed on the display means, and the period from when the display of the first display is started until the first display is erased A period may be indicated. In addition, part or all of the second period may not be included in the first period, but part or all may be included in the first period. Also, the first period is a period started before the second period, but may be a period started simultaneously with the second period, and a period started after the second period It may be

Further, the first period is a period included in one variation time from the start of symbol variation to the stop, and may be a period shorter than one variation time. In addition, in the first period, during the period in which the first display is displayed, the image (for example, meter display) that can be changed according to the passage of time included in the first display does not change. During a period in which the display of is displayed, an image (for example, a meter display) that can be changed may be changed according to the passage of time included in the second display.
Also, the first period may be any of the following.
(1) A period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol to the temporary stop display of one or more symbols of the decorative symbol.
(2) A period from when one or two or more of the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped until the SP reach display starts.
(3) A period from one or two or more of the decorative symbols being temporarily stopped to being displayed until a temporary stop or stop being displayed on the decorative symbol.
(4) A period from the start of the SP reach display to the end of the SP reach display.
(5) A period from the end of the SP reach display to the temporary stop display or stop display of the decorative pattern.
(6) The period from the big hit start to the big hit end.
(7) A period from the start of one of the big hit rounds to the end thereof.
Here, the start timing of the SP reach display may indicate a timing at which a display different from that during the change display of the decorative symbol is started when two or more decorative symbols serving as a reach aspect are temporarily stopped. .

  Here, the inter-round interval will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 392 (a) is a time chart showing the start timing and the end timing of the big hit game. In FIG. 392 (a), the special symbol change signal, the condition device operation signal, the character continuous operation device operation signal, the special electric character opening signal, the special electric character operating signal, the attacker 234, sequentially from the top An attacker solenoid signal is shown.

  The special symbol in motion signal, the condition device operation signal, the character continuous operation device operation signal, the special electric character opening signal, the special electric character in operation signal are the signals seen from the game rules, the special symbol fluctuation signal is If it is on, the special symbol display device is in operation, and if it is off, it is in non-operation (during stop). If the condition device activation signal is on, the attacker 234 is in operation (open operation, open condition maintenance, closed operation, closed condition maintenance), and if off, it is non-operational (closing procedure) . Also, if the utility continuous actuation device activation signal is on, the special electric utility is operating multiple times. The special motor combination release signal is a signal for maintaining the special motor combination open. When the special motorized product in-operation signal is on, the attacker 234 is in the opening operation, in the opening state, or in the closing operation, and when it is off, the attacker 234 is in the closing state. In addition, the special symbol change in progress signal, the condition device operation signal, the item continuous operation device operation signal, the special electric combination open signal, the special movement combination in-operation signal are signals output to the external device (for example, hall computer) It is.

  The "opening" of the attacker 234 shown in FIG. 392 (a) corresponds to the opening operation or the maintaining of the opening state, and the "closing" of the attacker 234 corresponds to the closing operation or the maintaining of the closed state. Further, the attacker solenoid signal shown in FIG. 392 (a) is a signal that is transmitted to the solenoid that opens and closes the attacker 234 and that maintains the open state. Arrow A in FIG. 392 (a) corresponds to the confirmation display time of the stop symbol of the special view. Arrow B corresponds to the jackpot game start presentation time (big hit start display time). The arrow C corresponds to the closing operation time of the attacker 234. The arrow D corresponds to the big hit game end presentation time (big hit end display time). The arrow E corresponds to the variation display start waiting time of the special figure, and when there is a suspension of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the symbol variation of the special figure starts after this variation display start waiting time elapses (during special symbol variation) (Refer to the dotted part of the signal).

  The start timing of the jackpot game may be the timing when the signal during the special figure fluctuation is turned off, it may be the timing when the condition device activation signal is turned on, or the bonus continuous operation device activation signal is It may be the timing when it is turned on, it may be the timing when the special motorized symbol release signal is first turned on, or it may be the timing when the special motorized symbol operating signal is first turned on. It may be the timing when the attacker 234 starts the first opening, or the timing when the attacker solenoid signal is first turned on.

  On the other hand, the end timing of the big hit game may be the timing when the condition device activation signal is turned off, or it may be the timing when the character continuous operation device activation signal is turned off, or the condition device activation signal And / or the character continuous actuator activation signal may be turned on, it may be the timing at which the special electric character part opening signal was turned off from the last, the condition device activation signal and / or the character continuation. When the actuator activation signal is on, it may be the timing at which the special electric part in-operation signal was finally turned off from on, or the condition device activation signal and / or the character continuous activation device activation signal are In the case of being on, it may be the timing when the attacker 234 finally changes from "open" to "close", the condition device activation signal and / or the item. When the continuous actuator activation signal is on, it may be the timing at which the attacker solenoid signal last turned off, or the condition device activation signal and / or the character continuous actuator activation signal are off. It may be the timing when the fluctuation waiting time has elapsed since then.

  FIG. 392 (b) is an enlarged view of a portion surrounded by an ellipse indicated by a dashed dotted line in FIG. 39 (a). Even when the special motor-operated part release signal is turned off, the special-motor operated part operating signal is in an on state for a while (here, a period of arrow a). In the period of the arrow a, the attacker 234 performs a closing operation and an opening end effect (for example, display effect) of the attacker 234 is performed. Note that the period of arrow a may be only a period in which the attacker 234 performs the closing operation. The period of arrow b elapses from the time when the special motor-operated product operating signal is turned off to the time when it is turned on. The interval between rounds corresponding to a round and a round may be a period of an arrow b shown in FIG. 392 (b) or a period in which an arrow a and an arrow b shown in FIG. 39 (b) are combined. May be

  The opening period (opening state maintenance period) of the attacker 234 shown in FIG. 392 corresponds to a period (long period) in which entry of the game ball is easy, and hereinafter, the opening of the attacker 234 in this period may be called a packer is there. On the other hand, the opening period of the attacker 234 may be a period (short period) in which entry of the game ball is difficult, and hereinafter, the opening of the attacker 234 in this period may be referred to as a paka.

  The start timing of one round may be when the special electric symbol release signal is turned on, or when the special electric symbol during signal activation is on, and the attacker 234 is opened. It may be a case where it is not the case, or it may be a case where the attacker solenoid signal is turned on.

  The end timing of one round may be when the special electric symbol release signal is turned off, or may be when the special electric symbol is in operation, and the attacker 234 is closed. It may be a case where it is not the case, or it may be a case where the attacker solenoid signal is turned off.

(A3)
The gaming machine according to (A1) or (A2), wherein
After the first display is displayed on the display means (for example, at time t3 after time t2 shown in FIG. 320), a change display for changing from the first display to the second display is started Games that are characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since the display is changed from the first display to the second display, it may be possible to surprise the player looking at the display means and deepen interest in the second operation means.

  Note that "the change display changing from the first display to the second display" indicates that the animation display changes from the first display to the second display, but the first display to the second display The display may be switched to the display (not the animation, but the display to be switched from the first display to the second display in an instant). In addition, “the change display changing from the first display to the second display” indicates a display different from the first display and the second display while changing from the first display to the second display. May be shown.

(A4)
The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A3), wherein
The second display is a display including at least an image (for example, a meter image or a gauge image) that can change with the passage of time.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since the second display includes an image which can be changed according to the passage of time, the variation of the effect may be able to be increased.

  The “image which can be changed according to the passage of time” may be an image regarding the operation reception period of the operation means, and the second display is an image regarding the operation reception period of the second operation means May be a display including at least Here, "an image that can change with the passage of time" may indicate an image in which a part or the whole of the image changes with the passage of time. The “image that can change with the passage of time” may be a meter or a gauge. Also, the second display may be a display that does not include an image that can change with the passage of time. The first display may include an image that can change over time. Further, the first display may be a display including an image regarding an operation reception period of the first operation means. The first display may include an image that can change over time. The first display may be a display that does not include an image that can change over time. Also, the “image that can change with the passage of time” may not change. For example, it does not change when outside the operation reception period of the operation means, and may change only during the operation reception period of the operation means. Moreover, even if it is outside the operation reception period of an operation means, it may be changeable according to progress of time. Further, the “image that can be changed according to the passage of time” may have the same change mode outside the operation reception period of the operation means and the operation reception period, but the change mode may be different.

(A5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4), wherein
The first display is a display including an image imitating the first operation means (for example, a button image imitating the chance button 136),
The second display is a display including an image simulating the second operation means (for example, a button image imitating a pat button or a lever not shown).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since it is a display imitating the operation means, by displaying an image imitating the second operation means after the image imitating the first operation means, the interest in the second operation means It may be possible to have it.

  Note that the first display may be a display configured to include at least an image imitating the first operation means and an image changeable according to the passage of time. Note that the first display may be made up of only an image imitating the first operation means and an image changeable according to the passage of time, and an image imitating the first operation means and the passage of time In addition to the image that can be changed depending on the image, one or more images other than the image imitating the first operation means and the image that can be changed according to the passage of time may be included. The second display may be a display configured to include at least an image simulating the second operation means and an image changeable in accordance with the passage of time. The second display may be composed of only an image imitating the first operation means and an image changeable according to the passage of time, and an image imitating the second operation means and the passage of time In addition to the image that can be changed according to the above, the image imitating the second operation means and one or more images other than the image that can be changed according to the passage of time may be included.

(A6)
The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A5), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by

(A7)
The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A5), wherein
The game console is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).

  Here, the priority of the button effect will be described. The priority is set according to the type of button effect, and when part or all of the operation acceptance period of button effects with different priorities overlap, the button effects are executed in descending order of priority according to one operation. (For example, the highest priority button effect is executed in the first operation, and the second highest priority button effect is performed in the second operation), but without setting the priority. Alternatively, all of the button effects overlapping in part or all of the operation reception period may be performed in one operation. Here, the priority of the button effect may be determined by the type of the button effect, or the priority may be determined in the order in which the button effect is started. Moreover, although (A) pre-reading effect, (B) the effect of the said fluctuation | variation, and (C) hidden button effect are mentioned as an example of the kind of button effect, type classification is not restricted to this. Further, among (A), (B) and (C), the priority may be set in more detail.

  Also, "hidden button effect" means an effect that does not indicate that it is an operation acceptance period of the operation means by the display means (such as a liquid crystal display device), but it is an operation acceptance period of the operation means by the display means Even if it does not display, it may notify that it is an operation reception period by other rendering means (for example, a lamp etc.). Further, it may be notified that it is the operation reception period of the operation means by all the effect means including the display means.

  Next, overlapping with the hidden button effect will be described. Hereinafter, an example in which the operation reception period of the same operation means is overlapped will be described. When the second display is displayed, the operation reception period of the second operation means for the second display and the operation reception period of the second operation means for the second display are hidden when the operation reception period of the second operation means is started for the hidden button effect When part or all of the operation reception period of the second operation means overlap for button effect, an effect according to the second display operation than an effect according to the hidden button effect operation (Display) may be executed preferentially. To execute preferentially indicates that the effect display according to the second display operation is displayed on the display means as the appearance, and the effect display according to the operation for the hidden button effect is not displayed on the display means Alternatively, it may indicate that the effect display corresponding to the second display operation is displayed in front of the effect display corresponding to the operation for the hidden button effect. Here, when the display area of a part or all of the effect display according to the second display operation overlaps the display area of a part or all of the effect display according to the operation for the hidden button effect , Part or all of the effect display according to the second display operation is displayed in a state of overlapping (or overlapping) with part or all of the effect display according to the operation for the hidden button effect Be done. In addition, data is managed in layers, high-order presentation data is placed in the upper layer, low-priority data is placed in the lower layer, and the upper layer is prioritized by combining the data And the underlying layer may not be executed. The same may be applied to the case where a part or all of the operation reception period of the first operation means for the first display and the operation reception period of the first operation means for the hidden button effect overlap.

  Next, an example in the case where the operation reception periods of different operation means overlap with respect to overlapping with the hidden button effect will be described. When the second display is displayed, and the operation reception period of the first operation means is started for the hidden button effect, the operation reception period and the second operation of the second operation means for the second display are hidden When part or all of the operation reception period of the first operation means overlap for button effect, the effect according to the effect according to the operation for the hidden button effect and the operation for the second display ( Although both of the display) may be performed, the operation reception period for the hidden button effect may be forcibly ended. The same may be applied to the case where the operation acceptance period of the second operation means is started for the hidden button effect when the first display is displayed. Here, after the change display from the first display to the second display, when the operation reception period of the second operation means is started, the period during which the first display is displayed and for the hidden button effect It is conceivable that the first operation reception period of the second time period overlaps, but this case is excluded in this embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, even if different operation means, the length of the operation reception period is the same, but the operation reception period may be different according to the operation means. For example, the operation reception period of the first operation means may be different from the operation reception period of the operation reception period of the second operation means. Moreover, even if it is the same operation means, operation reception period may differ for every production | presentation. For example, when the operation acceptance period of the first operation means is different between SP reach A and SP reach B, or when it is from "is a chance?" To "it is !!" and "is a chance?" Then, the operation acceptance period of the first operation means may be different depending on whether it is too hot or not, and then it is! In addition, the operation acceptance period of the first operation means may be different between the button preview of the change and the button preview of the hold icon change.

  The second operation means may be at least an operation means used to notify (or display on the display means) either a big hit or a release. The second operation means may be at least an operation means used to notify (or display on the display means) either the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit, and provides notification that the number of rounds of big hit increases ( Or, it may be an operation means used at least for display on the display means.

  The second operating means is an operating means having a shape different from that of the first operating means, but may be an operating means having the same shape. Although the operation instruction (eg, one-time operation) of the effect using the second operation means may be the same as the operation instruction (eg, one-time operation) of the effect using the first operation means, It may be different from an operation instruction (for example, long press, multiple operation (continuous hit)) of an effect using one operation means.

  The period in which the first display is changed to the second display may overlap with part or all of the operation reception periods of the first operation means and the second operation means. When display animation is performed when display of at least one of the first display and the second display is started, an image that changes with the passage of time after the display animation ends changes. At the same time as the start of display of the display animation or during display of the display animation, the image changing with the passage of time may change. In that case, the operation reception period may also be started simultaneously with the start of the display animation or during display of the display animation, but may not be started.

  The display animation for displaying the first display (or the second display) may be such that the display of the image changing with the passage of time may be completed earlier than the image imitating the operation means, but the display is completed simultaneously You may do so. The image related to the operation reception period may be an animation that changes continuously as time passes from the start position to the end position, or an animation that changes intermittently as time passes from the start position to the end position. It may be. The display may be changed from the first display to the second display by the operation of the operation means. Here, the operating means may be a first operating means or a second operating means, and is a third operating means different from the first operating means and the second operating means. May be

(B1) The game console according to the present embodiment is:
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol device 208);
A game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100 or slot machine 1000) provided with a plurality of operation means (for example, the chance button 136 and a pat button or lever not shown)
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (e.g., chance button 136),
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (e.g., a pat button or lever not shown),
The display means is a means capable of at least displaying a plurality of displays (for example, a display of a button image imitating a chance button 136 and a display of a button image imitating a patrol button or a lever),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, display of a button image imitating the chance button 136),
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, display of a button image imitating a put button or a lever),
The first display is a display related to the first operation means,
The second display is a display related to the second operation means,
In the first period (for example, the period starting at time 0 shown in FIG. 323 and ending at time t2), at least the first display can be displayed on the display means,
The first period is a period during which the first display is displayed on the display means (for example, from time 0 when the first display shown in FIG. 323 is started to time t2 when the first display disappears) Period of time),
After the end of the first period (for example, a period starting at time t3 and ending at time t6 shown in FIG. 323), the second display is displayed on the display means,
In the second period (for example, the period starting at time t1 and ending at time t6 shown in FIG. 323), at least the first display can be displayed on the display means,
The second period is a period during which the first display is displayed on the display means (for example, from time t1 when the first display shown in FIG. 323 is started to time t6 when the first display disappears) Period of time),
The length of the first period is different from the length of the second period (eg, the length of the first period is shorter than the length of the second period),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since the period during which the first display concerning the first operation means is displayed is different, it is possible to realize the game stand characterized by the display. Moreover, when the length of the 1st period and the length of the period of the 2nd period differ, the variation of a production | presentation may be able to be increased.

Note that the length of the first period is shorter than the length of the second period, but may be longer than the length of the second period. Also, the length of the first period may be the same as the length of the second period.
Here, the first period starts from the start of the display of the first display (for example, when the button image is dimly displayed after one frame from the condition where no button image is displayed, the dimmed timing is Until the first display is erased (for example, when the button image is erased lightly one frame later, the erased timing is regarded as the end timing). It may be a period of In addition, the second period is started from the start of the display of the first display (for example, when the button image is dimly displayed one frame after the status is not displayed, the dimmed timing is started). The timing until the first display is deleted (for example, when the button image is lightly displayed and then deleted one frame later, the deleted timing is taken as the end timing) It may be a period.

(B2)
It is the gaming machine described in (B1),
The length of the first period is shorter than the length of the second period,
A game stand characterized by

(B3)
The gaming machine according to (B1) or (B2), wherein
The first period is a period during which an operation of the first operation means (for example, depression of the chance button 136) is received (hereinafter, "first operation reception period" (for example, operation effective period of the chance button 136) Period (for example, the period from time point 0 to time point t2 shown in FIG. 323),
The second period is a period including at least the first operation reception period (for example, when the first operation reception period shown in FIG. 323 is the time t4 to the time t5, the second period is the time t1 to t1 Time t6)),
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, the first period is a period not including the operation reception period, and the second period is a period including the operation reception period, and the first operation reception is performed in the period in which the first display is displayed. By providing the case where the period is included and the case where it is not included, it may be possible to distinguish in advance whether or not to operate the first operation means. Also, in some cases, it may be possible to give a sense of superiority to a player who has noticed in advance whether or not to operate the first operation means.

  The first period may be a period not including all the operation reception periods including the first operation reception period, that is, a period in which the operation of the operation means is not received. It may include a period for accepting the operation of the second operating means without accepting only the operation, and a period for accepting the operation of one or more operating means different from the first operating means and the second operating means. It may be done.

(B4)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B3), wherein
In the third period (for example, the period from time point t3 to time point t6 shown in FIG. 323), at least the second display can be displayed on the display means,
The third period is a period starting after the first period (for example, time t3 after time t2),
The third period is a period for receiving an operation of the second operation means (for example, an operation of a put button or a lever) (hereinafter, a “second operation reception period” (for example, an operation valid period of the put button or a lever) (For example, when the second operation reception period shown in FIG. 323 is time t4 to time t5, the third period is time t3 to time t6).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since the third period includes the operation reception period, it may be possible to surprise the player who was trying to press the first operation means and to deepen interest in the second operation means. .

  The third period is a period including only the second operation reception period, but is a period including the operation reception period of one or other operation means (including the first operation means). Good. Also, the third period is a period started after the second display is displayed, but may be started simultaneously with the display of the second display, and is started before the second display is displayed It may be a period of

(B5)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B4), wherein
After the first display is displayed on the display means (for example, at time t3 after time t2 shown in FIG. 323), the change display to change from the first display to the second display is started Games that are characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since the display is changed from the first display to the second display, it may be possible to surprise the player looking at the display means and deepen interest in the second operation means.

(B6)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B5), wherein
The second display is a display including at least an image (for example, a meter image or a gauge image) that can change with the passage of time.
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since the second display includes an image which can be changed according to the passage of time, the variation of the effect may be able to be increased.

(B7)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B6), wherein
The first display is a display including an image imitating the first operation means (for example, a button image imitating the chance button 136),
The second display is a display including an image simulating the second operation means (for example, a button image imitating a pat button or a lever not shown).
A game stand characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned game stand, since it is a display imitating the operation means, by displaying an image imitating the second operation means after the image imitating the first operation means, the interest in the second operation means It may be possible to have it.

(B8)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B7), wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by

(B9)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B7), wherein
The game console is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).

(C1)
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A plurality of operating means (e.g., chance button 136 and lever not shown);
A game console equipped with
One operation means of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (for example, chance button 136),
One operation means of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, a lever),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of effect displays (for example, see FIG. 331 and the like),
One effect display among the plurality of effect displays is referred to as a display relating to the first operation means (hereinafter, “first operation display” (for example, display of the chance button image shown in FIG. 331 (f)). ) And
One effect display among the plurality of effect displays is a display related to the second operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation display” (for example, display of a lever image shown in FIG. 331 (h)). And
A state in which all of the first operation display and a part of the second operation display are displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first state” (for example, as shown in FIG. 331 (f), the display of the chance button image When the display area of the first operation display decreases, the display area of the second operation display increases (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 331 (f) to (g), when the display area of the display of the chance button image decreases, the display area of the display of the lever image increases.
After the first state is reached, the first operation display is in a non-display state (hereinafter referred to as “second state” (for example, as shown in FIG. 331 (h), the display of the chance button image May change to))),
A game stand characterized by
(C2)
It is a game stand described in C1, and
A period (for example, a lever operation reception period) in which the operation of the second operation means is valid is started from a certain timing after the second state is reached (for example, Refer to FIG. 323 and FIG. 328 (g) and (k)),
A game stand characterized by
(C3)
The gaming machine described in C1 or C2,
In the first state, a display related to a period during which the operation of the first operation means is valid (hereinafter, “first effective period display” (for example, operation effective period of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 331 (f) An image (the same as the meter (gauge) image shown in FIG. 317 (g); referred to in paragraphs “3698” and “3704”) may be displayed,
In the first state, the change display by the first effective period display (for example, from the start position according to the passage of time) according to the passage of time of the period in which the operation of the first operation means is validated The display to change the display mode of the gauge image to the end position, paragraph “3698”, refer to “3704”) is configured to be performed,
In the second state, a display relating to a period during which the operation of the second operation means is effective (hereinafter, “second effective period display” (for example, an operation effective period image of the lever shown in FIG. The same as the meter (gauge) image shown in FIG. 317 (g), referred to in paragraphs “3698” and “3704”) may be displayed,
In the second state, the change display by the second effective period display (e.g., from the start position according to the passage of time) according to the passage of time of the period during which the operation of the second operation means is validated The display for changing the display mode of the gauge image to the end position, which is configured to perform paragraphs “3698” and “3704”),
A game stand characterized by
(C4)
It is a game stand described in C3, and
In the first state, the second effective period display is not displayed (see, for example, FIG. 331 (f)),
In the second state, the first effective period display is not displayed (see, for example, FIG. 331 (h)).
A game stand characterized by
(C5)
A game console according to any one of C1 to C4, wherein
The “state in which all of the first operation display and part of the second operation display are displayed” described in C1 is “in a state in which all of the first operation display is displayed, "A state in which another part of the second operation display is overlapped by a part of the first operation display" (see, for example, FIG. 331 (f))
A game stand characterized by
(C6)
A game console according to any one of C1 to C5, wherein
In the second state, the second operation display may be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 328 (g) and 335 (a)).
A game stand characterized by
(C7)
A game console according to any one of C1 to C5, wherein
In the second state, the second operation display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 331 (h)).
A game stand characterized by
(C8)
A game console according to any one of C1 to C7, wherein
The first operation display is a display showing an appearance of the first operation means,
The second operation display is a display showing an appearance of the second operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(C9)
A game console according to any one of C1 to C8, wherein
In the first state, even if there is an operation of the second operation means, the operation is configured to be invalidated (see, for example, FIG. 331 (f)).
A game stand characterized by
(D1)
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
First operation means (for example, chance button 136) provided at a position operable by the player ;
A second operation means (for example, a put button) provided at a position operable by the player;
A game console equipped with
The second operation means is an operation means different from the first operation means,
Wherein one of the plurality of display, the first animation display relating to the first operating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 326 (b) ~ (e), animation display including chances button images) And
One of the plurality of display, the second animation display relating to said second operating means (for example, in FIG. 324 (i) ~ (k) and FIG. 326 (c'') ~ (d'') As shown, the animation display including the display of the Pato button image, or the animation display performing the button effect of only the Pato button display in the period including FIGS. 324 (c) to (k) (FIG. 325 (a), (b), paragraph "3771"-"3773"))) ,
One of the plurality of displays is a third animation display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 324 (c) to (k)) regarding the operating means of both the first operating means and the second operating means . , An animation display including the display of the chance button image and the pato button image) ,
The first animation display, the display of the first image simulating the operation unit (hereinafter, "first display" (e.g., display of Chance button images) that.) And animation display including,
The first animation display is an animation display which does not include the display of an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second display” (for example, display of a pato button image)).
The second animation is animation display including the second display,
The second animation display is an animation display not including the first display,
The third animation display is an animation display including the first display,
The third animation display is an animation display including the second display,
The second display in the third animation is configured to be performed later than the previous SL first display (e.g., see FIG. 324 (f) ~ (i) ),
At least a portion of the period in the period in which the first animation is displayed (hereinafter, "first period" (eg. That period) shown in FIG. 326 (d) ~ (e)), the first We accept operation by one operation means,
At least a part of the period during which the second animation display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as the “second period” (for example, the period from immediately before FIG. 324 (j) to FIG. 324 (k), or FIG. In the period from immediately before (d ′ ′) to FIG. 326 (d ′ ′) )), the operation by the second operation means is accepted,
In the period in which the first display in the third animation display is displayed, the operation by the first operation means is not received (see, for example, paragraphs “3759” and “3760”)
At least a part of the period during which the second display in the third animation display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “third period” (for example, from immediately before FIG. 324 (j) to FIG. 324 (k) in the period) called.), and accepting an operation by the second operating means (for example, see paragraph "3763"),
A game stand characterized by
(D2)
It is a game stand described in D1, and
When the second display is performed, a big hit state is easier to be started than when the second display is not performed (see, for example, paragraph “0194”).
A game stand characterized by
(D3)
The gaming machine described in D1 or D2,
The first animation display includes a first meter display (for example, a meter display of the effective period image shown in FIGS. 326 (d) to (e)) whose aspect changes in the first period;
The second animation display is a second meter display whose aspect changes in the second period (for example, a meter of the effective period image shown in FIG. 324 (j) to (k) and FIG. 326 (d ′ ′) Display),
The third animation display includes a third meter display (for example, the meter display of the effective period image shown in FIGS. 324 (j) to (k)) whose aspect changes in the third period.
A game stand characterized by
(D4)
The game console described in D3,
The mode of the first meter display changes according to the passage of time (see, for example, FIGS. 326 (d) to (e)),
The mode of the second meter display changes according to the passage of time (see, for example, FIGS. 324 (j) to (k) and FIG. 326 (d ′ ′) ).
The aspect of the third meter display changes according to the passage of time (see, for example, FIGS. 324 (j) to (k)).
A game stand characterized by
(D5)
The game console described in D3 or D4,
In the period in which the first display in the third animation display is displayed (for example, the periods shown in FIGS. 324 (c) to (f) ), the third meter display is displayed without changing the mode To be
A game stand characterized by
(D6)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D5, wherein
The second display in the third animation display is configured to be performed after the first display is erased (for example, a period shown in FIG. 324 (f) to (i))
A game stand characterized by
(D7)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D6, wherein
The third animation display is a display that may be displayed while the reach display (for example, the SP reach display shown in FIGS. 324 (a) to (l)) is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(D8)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D7, wherein
During the period in which the first display is displayed in the third animation display, the first display displays a certain display (for example, the display of a character string image of "NO!" Shown in FIG. 324 (d)) To be overlapped,
A game stand characterized by
(D9)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D8, wherein
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by
(D10)
A game console according to any one of D1 to D6, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 1000).
A game stand characterized by
Conventionally, game machines represented by pachinko machines and slot machines are generally provided with functions intended to improve effects and the like.
Such a game stand is provided with an operation means (Patent Document 1).
However, conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in operation means and display.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game console characterized by operation means and display.
According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game console characterized by operation means and display.
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications are possible.
For example, the above-described embodiment is also applicable to an enclosed type gaming machine that cyclically uses gaming balls enclosed in a gaming machine. In the case of a pachinko machine, it may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which a gaming ball is enclosed and the enclosed gaming ball is circulated in the pachinko machine for use, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed gaming ball as a launch ball The game balls may be used, and the payout of the game balls may be executed by credits.

  It is possible to combine the matters described in the above detailed description, in particular the matters described in the embodiment and the modification. Further, what is called a lamp in the above embodiment is an example of the light emitting means, and any one capable of emitting light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube can be substituted.

The gaming machine of the above embodiment is expressed, for example, as follows.
(Appendix a1)
Display means,
Multiple operation means,
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means,
At least one of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of displays,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display related to the first operation means,
The second display is a display related to the second operation means,
The second display may be displayed after the first display is displayed on the display means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a2)
The gaming machine described in the appendix a1,
When the first display is displayed on the display means, a first period is started,
The second display is displayed on the display means during the first period,
In the second period, at least operation of the second operation means can be received,
The first period is a period starting before the second period,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a3)
The gaming machine according to the appendix a1 or a2
After the first display is displayed on the display means, a change display for changing from the first display to the second display is started.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a4)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices a to a3,
The second display is a display including at least an image changeable according to the passage of time.
(Appendix a5)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices a1 to a4,
The first display is a display including an image imitating the first operation means,
The second display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a5, wherein
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix a7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices a1 to a5, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by

(Appendix b1)
Display means,
Multiple operation means,
A game console equipped with
At least one of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means,
At least one of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a plurality of displays,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a first display,
At least one of the plurality of displays is a second display,
The first display is a display related to the first operation means,
The second display is a display related to the second operation means,
In the first period, at least the first display can be displayed on the display means,
The first period is a period in which the first display is displayed on the display means,
After the first period ends, the second display is displayed on the display means,
In the second period, at least the first display can be displayed on the display means,
The second period is a period in which the first display is displayed on the display means,
The length of the first period is different from the length of the second period,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note b1,
The length of the first period is shorter than the length of the second period,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b3)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note b1 or b2,
The first period is a period which does not include a period for receiving an operation of the first operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first operation reception period"),
The second period is a period including at least the first operation reception period,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b4)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
In the third period, at least the second display can be displayed on the display means,
The third period is a period starting after the first period,
The third period is a period including at least a period for receiving an operation of the second operation means (hereinafter, referred to as a “second operation reception period”).
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b5)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b4,
After the first display is displayed on the display means, a change display for changing from the first display to the second display is started.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b6)
The game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b5, wherein
The second display is a display including at least an image changeable according to the passage of time.
(Appendix b7)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b6, wherein
The first display is a display including an image imitating the first operation means,
The second display is a display including an image imitating the second operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b8)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b7, wherein
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix b9)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices b1 to b7, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c1)
Display means,
Multiple operation means,
A game console equipped with
One of the plurality of operating means is a first operating means,
One of the plurality of operating means is a second operating means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of effect displays,
One effect display among the plurality of effect displays is a display related to the first operation means (hereinafter referred to as "first operation display"),
One effect display among the plurality of effect displays is a display related to the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as "second operation display"),
When the display area of the first operation display decreases while all of the first operation display and a part of the second operation display are displayed (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), The display area of the second operation display is configured to be increased,
After being in the first state, the first operation display may change to a non-display state (hereinafter referred to as “second state”).
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c2)
The game console described in the appendix c1,
A period for validating the operation of the second operation means is started from a certain timing after the second state is reached,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c3)
The gaming machine according to the appendix c1 or c2, wherein
In the first state, a display related to a period during which the operation of the first operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as “first valid period display”) may be displayed.
In the first state, it is configured to perform the change display by the first effective period display in accordance with the passage of time of the period in which the operation of the first operation means is validated.
In the second state, a display related to a period in which the operation of the second operation means is valid (hereinafter referred to as “second effective period display”) may be displayed.
In the second state, it is configured to perform change display by the second effective period display in accordance with the passage of time of a period during which the operation of the second operation means is valid.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c4)
The game console described in appendix c3,
In the first state, the second effective period display is not displayed,
In the second state, the first validity period indication is not displayed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c5)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c4, wherein
The “state in which all of the first operation display and part of the second operation display are displayed” described in the supplementary note c1 is “while all of the first operation display is displayed, A state in which another part of the second operation display is overlapped by a part of the first operation display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c6)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c5, wherein
In the second state, the second operation display may be displayed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c7)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c5, wherein
In the second state, the second operation display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c8)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c7, wherein
The first operation display is a display showing an appearance of the first operation means,
The second operation display is a display showing an appearance of the second operation means.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix c9)
The game console according to any one of appendices c1 to c8, wherein
In the first state, even if the operation of the second operation means is performed, the operation is configured to be invalidated.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d1)
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
First operation means provided at a position operable by the player ;
Second operation means provided at a position operable by the player;
A game console equipped with
The second operation means is an operation means different from the first operation means,
Wherein one of the plurality of display is a first animation display relating to the first operating means,
Wherein one of the plurality of display is a second animation display relating to said second operating means,
One of the plurality of displays is a third animation display relating to the operating means of both the first operating means and the second operating means,
The first animation display, the display of image simulating said first operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first display".) Is an animation display including,
The first animation display is an animation display not including a display of an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The second animation is animation display including the second display,
The second animation display is an animation display not including the first display,
The third animation display is an animation display including the first display,
The third animation display is an animation display including the second display,
Wherein the second display in the third animation is configured to be performed later than the previous SL first display,
An operation by the first operation means is received in at least a partial period (hereinafter, referred to as a “first period”) in a period in which the first animation display is displayed,
The operation by the second operation means is received in at least a partial period (hereinafter referred to as a “second period”) in the period in which the second animation display is displayed,
While the first display in the third animation display is being displayed, the operation by the first operation means is not accepted,
An operation by the second operation means is received in at least a partial period (hereinafter, referred to as a “third period”) in a period in which the second display in the third animation display is displayed. ,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d2)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d1,
When the second display is performed, a big hit state is easier to be started than when the second display is not performed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d3)
The gaming machine according to the supplementary note d1 or d2, wherein
The first animation display includes a first meter display whose aspect changes in the first period;
The second animation display includes a second meter display whose aspect changes in the second period;
The third animation display includes a third meter display whose aspect changes in the third period.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d4)
The gaming machine described in Appendix d3,
The aspect of the first meter display changes according to the passage of time,
The mode of the second meter display changes according to the passage of time,
The mode of the third meter display changes according to the passage of time,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d5)
The gaming machine described in the supplementary note d3 or d4,
The third meter display is displayed without changing the mode during the period in which the first display in the third animation display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d5, wherein
The second display in the third animation display is configured to be performed after erasing the first display,
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d6, wherein
The third animation display is a display that may be displayed while the reach display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d7, wherein
While the first display in the third animation display is displayed, the first display is overlapped with a display.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d9)
It is a game console according to any one of appendices d1 to d8,
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game stand characterized by
(Appendix d10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices d1 to d6, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by

Tenth Embodiment
Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 337 to 391 are basically used only for the description of the tenth embodiment, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, this embodiment can be used. In the description of FIG. 37, the symbols shown in FIGS. 337 to 391 have priority.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 337. In addition, the same figure is an external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launcher 110, and a game board 200 on its front surface as an external structure.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (such as an island facility) provided in a game machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a member provided inside the outer frame 102 and serving as a vertical rectangular gaming machine base shaft rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 through the hinge portion 112. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 inside.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape to form an inner side thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. In the front frame door 106, a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin is provided in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached on the front side. The game area 124 is defined by the rear face of the front frame door 106 and the front face of the game board 200.

The ball storage plate-attached door 108 is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be able to open and close with a lock function. The ball storage plate-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of gaming balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as "balls") and is provided with an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the gaming balls to the launch device 110. A lower plate 128 for storing game balls that can not be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball extraction button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player, A ball discharging lever 132 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 128 into a gaming ball collecting container (commonly referred to as a dollar box) by the operation, and a gaming ball guided to the launcher 110 by the operation of the player A ball emission handle 134 for striking the game area 124 of the game board 200, a chance button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 339) by the operation of the player, and the chance button The ball button operation light 138 for emitting light 136, the ball lending operation button 140 for instructing to lend a ball to a card unit (CR unit) (not shown) installed in the game arcade, and the balance of the player with respect to the card unit. A return operation button 142 for giving a return instruction, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. The chance button 136 is movable by being driven by a drive circuit as described later in detail. Further, the peripheral portion of the chance button 136 of the door 108 with a ball storage tray is referred to as a peripheral portion 108 a.
The chance button 136 is pressed by the player, and the pressed surface (operation surface) is inclined so that the side closer to the player is lower.

  The launcher 110 is mounted below the main body 104 and is pivoted by the player operating the ball launch handle 134, and the launch stick 148 which strikes the gaming ball at the tip of the launch stick 146. And.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front, and is detachably mounted on the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space portion 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

  FIG. 338 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 337 as viewed from the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 338, a ball tank 150 for storing a game ball temporarily and a ball tank 150 are disposed below the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game ball, having an opening opened upward at the upper back of the pachinko machine 100. A tank rail 154 is disposed for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150 to the dispensing device 152 located on the back right side.

  The tank rail 154 is also referred to as a twin rail, and is disposed, for example, such that at least a portion thereof overlaps with the first sub substrate 160 in the front-rear direction. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a tank rail 154 which may give noise to the control board is arranged so as to be superimposed on the first sub board 160 in order to save the arrangement area of the members. However, in the case of the pachinko machine 100, even if the tank rail 154 and the first sub substrate 160 are disposed in an overlapping manner when noise countermeasures are taken on the tank rail 154, the noise due to the noise of the first sub substrate 160 is There are cases where it can be mitigated. Further, since the tank rail 154 is provided with a noise countermeasure, the side surface of the tank rail 154 can be formed of an insulating transparent member. Thereby, when the tank rail 154 is installed in the pachinko machine 100, it passes through the side surface of the tank rail 154 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and visually checks the flow of the gaming ball in the tank rail 154 visually. There are times when you can do it.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a tubular member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily holds the gaming ball that has flowed through the tank rail 154 and flowed into the payout device 152, and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the game balls temporarily accumulated are configured to be sent one by one below the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the gaming ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the gaming ball is passing, either high or low signal is not passed, when the gaming ball is not passing. The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit (delivery substrate 170). The gaming ball having passed through the payout sensor is discharged from the discharge port 152a of the payout device 152, passes through the later described payout passage unit 300 and the discharge port unit 400, and is disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. It is comprised so that the upper plate 126 may be reached from (refer FIG. 337), and the pachinko machine 100 pays out a ball with respect to a player by this structure.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 that constitutes a main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and control related to rendering based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 The first sub-board case 162 which houses the first sub-substrate 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-control processing that is based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 The second sub-board case 166 which houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control section 500, and the payout control section 600 that performs control processing regarding the payout of gaming balls, and an error release switch that clears an error by the operation of a game clerk 168. A discharge base case 172 for storing a discharge base 170 including a discharge base, and a launch base configuring a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing on launch of a gaming ball. 174 and a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power by the operation of a game clerk A power supply board case 184 housing a power supply board 182 having an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit ing. The CR interface unit 186 includes a CR unit connection unit 186 a configured by, for example, a D-sub (D-subminiature) connector. The CR interface unit 186 is configured to transmit and receive signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit via the CR unit connection unit 186a.

  A sound volume adjustment switch 192 for adjusting the sound volume of the speaker 120, for example, is provided on the upper left in the drawing of the second sub substrate case 166 for housing the second sub substrate 164. The volume adjustment switch 192 is configured of, for example, a rotary switch.

  The pachinko machine 100 has a relay board 196 on the right side of the ball tank 150 and above the tank rail 154 when viewed from the rear side. The relay board 196 is used to electrically connect the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer. Since it is not necessary to change the wiring between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer when replacing the gaming board 200, the gaming board 200 is exchanged with the main body 104 and the hall computer connected via the relay board 196. Ru. However, since it is necessary to change the type of signal to be transmitted from the pachinko machine 100 to the hall computer depending on the model, the pachinko machine 100 starts the relay board 196 from the front (front side) side of the pachinko machine 100 when the gaming board 200 is removed. It may be configured to be able to grasp the connection status of.

  Similarly, it is preferable that the main body 104 be provided with other configurations (for example, a power cord not shown) that need to be connected to the outside.

  The pachinko machine 100 has a power supply connector 191 on the right side of the relay board 196 as viewed from the rear side. A power cord (not shown) is connected to the power connector 191.

  When changing the model of the pachinko machine 100, the game board 200 is replaced, but at this time the main board 156, the first sub board 160 and the second sub control unit 500 may also be replaced. The substrate 156, the first sub substrate 160 and the second sub control unit 500 may be provided on the game board 200.

  Moreover, even when changing the model of the pachinko machine 100, the main body 104 may not be replaced and may be used as it is, in which case the dispensing board 170, the firing board 174 and the power supply board 182 also need to be replaced. The discharge substrate 170, the firing substrate 174 and the power supply substrate 182 may be provided on the main body 104 because they may not be present.

  FIG. 339 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are disposed on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which game balls can roll is defined.

  At approximately the center of the game area 124, a rendering device 206 is disposed. In the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 (liquid crystal display device 208) is disposed substantially at the center, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects, and is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in this embodiment, but the present invention is limited to this. Alternatively, a display device using an EL or the like may be used. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display regions of a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c and an effect display region 208d, and the left symbol display region 208a and the middle symbol display region 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative symbol display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information without being a liquid crystal display device, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  In the upper right portion of the game board 200, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, an ordinary symbol holding lamp 216, and a first special symbol holding lamp 218, A second special symbol hold lamp 220 and a high-probability middle lamp 222 are provided. In addition, an ordinary symbol may be hereinafter referred to as a "common figure" and a special symbol as a "special symbol".

  Further, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol is provided as a fourth decorative symbol following the decorative symbol displayed in each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. This fourth pattern is provided with two special pattern 1 for the special figure 1 fourth pattern 219 for special figure 2 and the special figure 2 for the special figure 2 fourth pattern 221, the effect display area 208d (for example, for example Display on the bottom). The fourth pattern is to indicate fluctuation / stop, for example, black indicates stop display, and gray indicates variable display.

  The common drawing display device 210 is a display device for displaying a common drawing, and in the present embodiment, is configured of a 7-segment LED. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special view, and are configured by seven-segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The common drawing holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding common drawing fluctuation games (details will be described later), and in this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation games are held to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special view holding lamp 218 and the second special view holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of the special view fluctuation games (details will be described later) being held, and in the present embodiment, the special view fluctuation game It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or a high probability state, and the gaming state is high from a low probability state in which a big hit hardly occurs. It lights up when it is in the probability state and it is off when it is in the low probability state from the high probability state.

  Also, around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, a common drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged. It is set up.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects the ball entering the general winning openings 226 (general winning opening 226 In the case of winning), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper tray 126 as a winning ball. The balls discharged to the upper tray 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and these configurations make it possible to pay out the winning balls to the player based on the winning.

  The ball entering the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In this embodiment, the balls to be paid out to the player as compensation for the prize may be called "prize balls", and the balls to be lent to the player may be referred to as "lending balls". And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The drawing start port 228 is configured with a device called a gate or through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124, and in the present embodiment, the right side of the game board 200 There is one in the house. Unlike the ball having entered the general winning opening 226, the ball having passed through the regular drawing start port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the common drawing start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a common drawing fluctuation game by the common drawing display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special drawing start port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry into the first special view starting opening 230, the payout device 152 is driven to eject a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as the award balls to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball entering the first special view starting opening 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The second special view start port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is disposed on the right side of the game board 200. The second special figure starting port 232 has wings 232a that can be opened and closed from side to side, and while the wings 232a are closed, it is not possible to enter a ball, and a common drawing fluctuating game is won, and the common drawing display device 210 When the hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special view start port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball entering the second special view start opening 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a special winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, one is provided below the central portion of the game board 200 and one is provided below the right. The variable winning opening 234 includes an openable door member 234a, and it is impossible to enter a ball while the door member 234a is closed, and the special view display device 212, 214 is a big hit when winning a special view variable game. When the symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time 1.5 seconds) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times).

  When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects entry of the ball into the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls as a winning ball to the upper tray 126. The ball entering the variable winning hole 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side.

  Furthermore, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and game nails 238 are disposed, and at the lowermost part of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball which has not won a prize to any winning opening or starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening 240 for discharging the ball to the gaming island side is provided.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail by the player, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 of the player, and launches The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the hook 146 and the firing rod 148 and hit into the game area 124. Then, the ball reaching the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and starting opening (1st special figure starting port 230, 2nd special figure starting port 232) Whether it wins or does not win any winning opening and starting port or only by passing through the common view starting port 228 out port 240 To reach.

The components to which the game ball can contact, such as the above-described hitting direction changing member 236 and the game nail 238, are the game components arranged in the game area and to which the launched game ball can contact.
<Rendering device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The rendering device 206 is drive-controlled by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500.

  The warp device 242 and the stage 244 are disposed in the rollable area of the game ball on the front side of the effect apparatus 206, and the effect movable body 224 is disposed in the area in which the game ball can not roll. . In addition, on the back side of the rendering device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the gaming ball, which has entered the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left of the rendering device 206, to the stage 244 below the front surface of the rendering device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  In the stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball run up by the game nail 238 of the game board 200, and the like can be rolled. The game ball entering the receiving hole 244b is released from the releasing hole 244a which is the releasing part on the stage 244 which is the rolling area, and the released ball is likely to enter the first special figure starting hole 230 easily. ing.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 moves up and down in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a motor (not shown) so as to limit the visible region of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The shielding device 246 includes left doors 246a and 246b and right doors 246c and 246d, and is disposed on the front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the upper part of the left door 246a and the right door 246c, there is provided a moving mechanism (not shown) capable of moving the left door 246a and the right door 246c in the left-right direction.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  In addition, the same figure shows the circuit block diagram of a control part. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as a "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. In accordance with the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, and the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400. It consists of a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 that controls launch of the game balls, and a power control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. There is.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and data temporarily. A RAM 308 for storing, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing are mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this also applies to a first sub control unit 400 and a second sub control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316 b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 uses a random number value generation circuit 318 (this circuit is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Two counters are built in) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, such as a sensor for detecting game balls passing through each start opening, winning opening, variable winning opening, front frame door opening sensor, inner frame A sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from the various sensors 320 including the open sensor and the bottom plate full sensor and outputting the comparison result with the amplification result and the reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302; Symbol display devices, such as a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined symbol display device, eg, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the common drawing display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, common drawing holding lamp 216, special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, high probability middle lamp 222 Etc.) and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing predetermined movable members such as the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 start port 232 and the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 etc. A drive circuit 334 is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won in the special figure 1 start opening 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 which has received this signal latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value storage corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230. Store in the register for Also, when receiving a signal indicating that the ball has won in the special figure 2 start opening 232, the random value generation circuit 318 similarly latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start opening 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. Output 100 game information (for example, gaming state).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 When the voltage is less than a predetermined value (9 V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 which outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 starts from the start signal output circuit 340. When a signal is input, game control is started (main control main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 instructs the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 The configuration is such that signals can be transmitted, but the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 can not transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. Note that the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to one-way communication from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, and signals such as commands can be bi-directionally between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400. It may be configured to be able to transmit.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 mainly includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the whole of the first sub control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by receiving a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock.

  In the basic circuit 402, a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling the various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246 A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, and a chance button detection for detecting depression of each button provided on the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 139 Based on a sensor 426, a sensor circuit 428 outputting a detection signal from the shielding device sensor 430 or the chance button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data, and a signal from the CPU 404 Image data stored in the ROM 406 And generating a display image by using the work area of VRAM436 Te and displays images on the decorative pattern display device 208 VDP434 (Video Display Processor), it is connected to. The ROM 406 may store the control program and the various effect data in separate ROMs.

  Next, the second auxiliary control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. Is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock.

  Further, in the basic circuit 502, a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored, and drive control of the effect movable body 224 A drive circuit 516, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current position of the effect movable body 224, a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, and drive control of the chance button 136 A driving circuit 522 for performing the game, a game board lamp driving circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game stand frame driving circuit 540 for controlling the game board frame lamp 542; A serial communication control circuit that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540. Is connected to the 20, the.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the emission control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and also based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It detects whether or not the payout has been completed, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal instructing discharge permission or stop output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player output from the launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the firing motor 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing rod 148, and control of the ball feeding device 634 for feeding the ball from the upper tray 126 to the launching apparatus 110 based on the control signal indicating the firing intensity according to the quantity. I do.

  The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 and the payout device 152 Supply to each device. Furthermore, power supply control unit 660 is a storage circuit (eg, for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (eg, RAM 308 of main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (eg, 10 days) even after external power is turned off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the discharge control unit from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

<Type of symbol>
Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped using FIGS. 341 (a) to (d). The types of special drawing and common drawing will be described.
FIG. 341 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 1, and FIG. 341 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special view 2. As shown in FIG.

  A special figure 1 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 1st starting opening sensor detects that a ball entered the 1st special drawing starting opening 230, and a ball is entering the 2nd special drawing starting opening 232 The special figure 2 fluctuation game is started on condition that the 2nd starting opening sensor detects. When the special figure 1 change game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “full change display of the special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all the seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Also, when the special figure 2 variation game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats “full variation display of seven segments, and lighting of one central segment,“ variation display of special figure 2 ” Do. These "variation display of special figure 1" and "variation display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the fluctuation indication of the pattern said to the present invention.

  Then, when the fluctuation time (corresponding to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) determined before the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1, and the special figure When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of 2 (this also corresponds to the fluctuation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol aspect of the special view 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 1 or the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol aspect of special drawing 2 Until the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display according to the present invention, and after this “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed A series of displays up to is referred to as a symbol change stop display. As described later, the symbol fluctuation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 341 (a), six types from “Special figure A” to “Special figure F” are shown as the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 in the symbol variation stop display, and in FIG. 341 (b) As a stop symbol aspect of the special view 2 in the symbol variation stop display, four types from “special view a” to “special view d” are shown. In addition, the white part in the drawing indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and the black part indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  Among the stop symbol forms of the special figure 1, "special figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and "special figure B" is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described later, the determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variation game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the determination of whether it is a special big hit is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a big hit and a special big hit is whether the probability of winning a big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the next special feature fluctuation game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning in the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure low probability state.

  In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game and after the end of the 15R big hit game, it shifts to the power support state (sometimes referred to as a short time state). The power support state will be described in detail later, but the state transitioning to the power support state is referred to as a map-high probability state, and the state not transitioning to the power-sap state is referred to as a map-low probability state. "Special figure A" which is 15R special big hit design is special figure high probability spread figure high probability state, "special figure B" which is 15R big hit design is special figure low probability spread figure high probability state. These "special drawing A" and "special drawing B" are symbols whose degree of advantage to the player is relatively large.

  "Special figure C" is a 2R big hit design called sudden change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure high probability state. That is, "special figure C" differs in the point which is 2R compared with "special figure A" which is 15R.

  “Special figure D” is a 2R big hit design called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability spread figure low probability state.

  In addition, "special figure D", when the state of the common drawing when the big hit is the common drawing high probability state, the gaming state of the common drawing after the big hit becomes the common drawing high probability state, by the big hit It is configured so that the power support state does not occur.

  "Special figure E" is a small hit symbol, and is a symbol that becomes a gaming state when the small hit. For example, if the gaming state when the small hit is the special figure high probability regular drawing high probability state, the special figure high probability regular drawing high probability state is also after the small hit end, the gaming state when the small hit is If the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state, even after the small hit end will be the special figure low probability spread figure low probability state. The small hit referred to here exhibits almost the same behavior as an attacker without a 2R power support big hit. That is, the "special figure E" is in the same state as the "special figure D", and the effect displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is also in the same mode, whereby the gaming state of the special figure shifts to high probability. Can be expected to be

  In addition, “special figure F” is a disappointing symbol, and is a symbol whose advantage relative to the player is relatively small. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a symbol other than "special image A" is also prepared as the 15R special big hit symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R big hit symbol.

  Moreover, if the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2 of FIG. 341 (b) is explained, "special figure a" is 16R special jackpot symbol, "special figure b" is 8R special jackpot symbol, and "special figure c" Is an 8R jackpot symbol, and the "special figure d" is an off symbol.

  Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss in the pass / fail judgment, and thereafter, based on the result of the pass / fail judgment After the symbol variation display, it is determined which one of “Special drawing A” to “Special drawing F” is to be stopped and displayed on the special drawing 1 display device 212, and any of “special drawing a” to “special drawing d” is special drawing 2 It is configured to determine whether to display a stop on the display device 214. For this reason, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment determines the symbols (stop symbols) to be stopped after the symbol variation display, thereby determining the number of rounds of big hit games and the profit status after the big hit games The presence or absence of the power supply condition is automatically determined. However, the pachinko machine 100 is not limited to this, and may be configured to, for example, determine the number of rounds of the big hit game and the profit state after the big hit game by lottery separately from the determination of the stop symbol. In addition, while the pachinko machine 100 determines the stop symbol, for example, the number of rounds of the big hit game is automatically determined, while the state of profit after the big hit game is determined by lottery, the stop symbol, the number of rounds and The profit state may be appropriately associated and configured.

  FIG. 341 (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol. There are ten types of "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" in the decorative design of the present embodiment. The fact that the ball has won the special figure 1 start port 230 or special figure 2 start port 232, that is, the first start port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, or special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is detected on condition that the second start aperture sensor detects that the ball has entered the start aperture 232. In the pattern display area, "deterioration" is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... Perform “variable display of symbols”. In the following drawings, although "variation display of a decorative symbol" may be shown by an arrow, actually, the decorative symbol to be displayed may be switched in this way.

  And, when it is reported that 15R special big hit of "special figure A", 15R big hit of "special figure B", 8R special big hit of "special figure b" or 8R big hit of "special figure c", the symbol display area 208a A symbol combination (for example, "decorative 1-decorative 1-decorative 1", "decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2", etc.) in which three same decorative designs are lined up to 208c is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying 15R special jackpot of “Special figure A” explicitly or notifying 16R special jackpot of “Special figure a”, a symbol combination in which three same odd decorative symbols are arranged (for example, Stop display of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" or "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" or the like.

  In addition, when notifying a 2R big hit called “Tokuto sure variation of“ Special figure D ”or a small hit of“ Special figure E ”,“ decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3 ”is stopped and displayed.

  Furthermore, when notifying 2R big hit called sudden definite variation of "special figure C", stop display of "decoration 1-decor 3-decor 5" is carried out.

  On the other hand, when notifying "special figure F" removal and "special figure d" removal, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c stop and display symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 341 (c).

  FIG. 341 (d) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the common figure. There are two types of stop display modes of the common drawing of the present embodiment, "common drawing A" which is a hit symbol, and "common drawing B" which is a detached symbol. Based on the fact that the above-described gate sensor detects that the ball has passed through the drawing start port 228, the drawing display device 210 repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Perform "Variable display of common map". Then, when notifying that the popular game variation game is won, the "general game A" is stopped and displayed, and when it is informed that the regular game fluctuating game is disconnected, the "general game B" is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 341 (d), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments to be extinguished, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments to be lit.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part main processing. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 which has received the start signal resets and starts due to a reset interrupt, and executes main control main processing shown in FIG. 342 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step 10101, initialization 1 is performed. In initial setting 1, setting (temporary setting) of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, WDT 314 Perform operation permission and set the initial value. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step 10103 following step 10101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step 10105 following step 10103, it is determined whether the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. If the voltage is less than 9 V (in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power is shut off), the process returns to step 10103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the shut off of the power), the step is performed. Go to 10107 Even if the predetermined value (9 V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step 10103, and step 10105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  At step 10107, initialization 2 is performed. In initialization 2, a process of setting a value for determining a cycle for periodically executing a main control unit timer interrupt process to be described later in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, 1) A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the sub control unit 400, setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step 10109 following step 10107, it is determined whether or not to restore the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and when the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step 10113). Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when a game clerk or the like operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply substrate is on (indicating that an operation has been made), that is, It is determined whether the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step 10113 to initialize the basic circuit 302. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the information of the power supply status stored in the power supply status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the information of the power supply status is information indicating suspension. It is determined whether or not. Then, if the power supply status information is not the information indicating the suspend, the process proceeds to step 10113 to put the basic circuit 302 in the initial state, and if the power supply status information is the information indicating the suspend, the predetermined area of the RAM 308 A checksum is calculated by adding all 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the result of the calculated checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) It is determined whether or not (whether the result of the checksum is normal). Then, if the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step 10111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is a specific value. If it is other than the value (for example, 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step 10113 to initialize the pachinko machine 100. Similarly, if the power supply status information indicates information other than "suspend", the process proceeds to step 10113.

  In step 10111, power recovery processing is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (set) to the stack pointer. Further, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out, and after resetting in each register, the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, the robot 100 returns to the power-off state. That is, the process is resumed from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step 10115) immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. A transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In this step 10111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. The power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been turned off, and is transmitted to the first secondary control unit 400 in step 10233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  At step 10113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, at this point, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal recovery command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step 10113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, in step 10233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 Sub control unit 400 is sent.

  In step 10115 following step 10113, after setting of interrupt prohibition is performed, basic random number initial value update processing is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, when it is determined to be a big hit by the success or failure judgment whether it is a big hit or not, a random value for special figure determination for hit is used for lottery to determine the stop symbol in the special figure fluctuation game. A random number counter for generating an initial value for generating an initial value of a random number counter for determining a winning special figure (hereinafter, referred to as "a random number counter for generating an initial value corresponding to a random number counter for determining a special figure for winning". Update). Further, an initial value generation random number counter for generating an initial value of a common drawing win random number counter for generating a common drawing win random number used for judging success or failure of common drawing fluctuation game (hereinafter, "corresponding to common drawing win random number counter Update the initial value generation random number counter. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as a random value for determining special hit for special occasions is 0 to 99, the value is stored from the random value counter storage area for initial value generation corresponding to the random number counter for special occasions determination The acquired value is added with 1 and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the common drawing winning random number counter is similarly updated. It should be noted that the random number counter for the winning special purpose drawing determination random number counter and the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to the common drawing winning random number counter are also updated in step 10207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step 10115 except while performing the timer interrupt process which starts every predetermined cycle.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 343, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. In addition, the same figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of main-control part timer interruption processing. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once in about 2 ms in this embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  At step 10201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed. In step 10203 following step 10201, the WDT is set so that the WDT interrupt does not occur because the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) (so as not to detect an abnormality in the process). Periodically (in this embodiment, once in about 2 ms, which is a cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt), restart is performed.

  In step 10205 following step 10203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower bowl full tank sensor, various ball detection sensors, and the like via the input port of I / O 310 It is input to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signal, and is stored in the signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection detected in the timer interrupt process (about 4 ms before) is performed in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately and stored in RAM 308 for the previous second detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago Information of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the above is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 by dividing each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal storage area Remember to In addition, the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step 10205, the information of the presence / absence of detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each storage area of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above-described item matches the winning determination pattern information. The main control unit timer interrupt process is activated several times while the activation is repeated at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt processing is activated, in step 10205, a detection signal indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, detection signals indicating that the same gaming ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor are stored in each of the previous-previous detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the gaming ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal. In the present embodiment, it is determined that there is a winning when the detection signal is continuously stored twice twice after the absence of the detection signal in consideration of the erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 340, winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal last time, the previous detection signal, and the current detection signal) is stored. In step 10205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, there is no detection signal for the last time, detection signal for the last time, and detection signal for this time) If there is a match with the information indicating that there is an entry into the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the special view 1 starting opening 230, and the special view 2 starting opening 232, or the passing of the common drawing starting opening 228 It is determined that there is. That is, it is determined that there is a winning on these winning openings 226, 234 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, when information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor for detecting entry into the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 has a prize. Is determined, and processing is performed in connection with the subsequent winning in the general winning opening 226, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winning Processing is branched to the subsequent processing without performing processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). Once it has been determined that a prize has been made once, it is not determined that there has been a prize until the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches with the pattern information, it will be determined from the next whether or not it matches with the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

  In step 10207 following step 10205 and in step 10209 subsequent thereto, basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing are performed. In the basic random number initial value update process of step 10207, the random number counter for initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the hit time special figure determination random number counter and the common drawing win random number counter, which were performed in step 10115 above, is updated. In the basic random number updating process of step 10209, the random number counter for special-purpose special chart determination and the common drawing winning random number counter used by the main control unit 300 are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as a random value for determining a special figure for hit is 0 to 99, a random number counter for determining a special figure for hit provided in the RAM 308 to generate a random value for determining special figure for hit. Is acquired, and 1 is added to the acquired value, and then stored in the original random number counter for on-the-day special drawing determination. At this time, if the result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is 100, 0 is stored in the original random number counter for determining the special feature for hit. In addition, as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, when it is determined that the random number counter for special-purpose special chart determination goes around, the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special-purpose special chart determination random number counter Acquire the value of and set it to the random number counter for special figure determination for hit. For example, a value is acquired from the random number counter for use for special drawing determination that fluctuates in the numerical range of 0 to 99, and the result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308 If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the special case determination special number determination random number counter. The initial value set at this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for winning use special figure determination next turns one round while setting it in the figure determination random number counter. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for winning special-purpose chart determination has made one turn next, an initial value for determining that the common-diagram random number counter has made one turn A storage area is provided in the RAM 308. The random number counter for special drawing determination for hit may be separately provided with a counter for acquiring a random number value for special figure 1 and a counter for acquiring a random number value for special figure 2 or the same. The following counters may be used.

  At step 10211 following step 10209, effect random number updating processing is performed. In this effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. Specifically, the special figure timer number determination random number counter for generating the special figure timer number determination random number value for determining the symbol variation time in the special figure variation game is updated. Also, the common drawing timer number determination random number counter for generating the common drawing timer number determination random number value for determining the symbol change time in the common drawing variation game is updated.

  In step 10213 following step 10211, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, a common drawing display symbol update timer for measuring the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the design on the common drawing display device 210, and the time to display the fluctuation / stop display of the symbol on the special drawing 1 display device 212 Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for special, 2 special figure 2 display symbol update timer for clocking time to display the fluctuation / stop display on special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined The various timers are updated, including timers for clocking the closing time, predetermined ending effect period, and the like.

  In step 10215 following step 10213, a winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when winning openings 226, 234 and starting openings 230, 232, 228 are winning, the RAM 308 stores the winning balls number storage area provided for each winning opening or for each starting opening. The value is read out, 1 is added, and it is set in the original winning sphere number storage area.

  Further, in step 10217 following step 10215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not special drawing 1 start opening 230, special drawing 2 start opening 232, common drawing start opening 228 and variable winning combination opening 234 have been won. Here, the determination is made using the determination result as to whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step 10205.

  When a special figure 1 start opening 230 has a prize, and the corresponding special figure 1 reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full (in this example, the reserve number 4 is full), the random value generation circuit (Hard random number circuit) The random determination value for hit determination generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 1 start port 230 of the (hard random number circuit) 318 is provided in the RAM 308 A random number for hitting special-image determination is obtained from the random number counter for winning-time special-figure determination and stored in the order of acquisition in the special-figure 1 random-number storage area. A combination of a random number for hit determination and a random value for hitting special drawing determination in the special figure 1 random number storage area (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 1 set of random values” or “special figure 1 start information” Is stored as many as the special figure 1 pending number stored in the special figure 1 pending number storage area. In the special figure 1 random number value storage area, each time the number of special figure 1 reservations decreases, the data of the set of special figure 1 random number values with the highest priority (first and most stored) is At the same time, the remaining data of the special figure 1 random number value set is processed so as to increase by one each time it is erased. In addition, every time the number of the Special Figure 1 suspension increases, the data of the new Special Figure 1 random number value pair is in the next pending order of the data of the special figure 1 random number value pair with the lowest retention order (last). Will be written.

  When there is a prize in special figure 2 starting opening 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 reserve number storage area provided in RAM 308 is not full (in this example, it will be full with reserve number 4), random number value generation circuit The random number value for hit determination generated by applying predetermined processing to the value stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special view 2 start port 232 of 318 is acquired, and the special feature for hit time provided in the RAM 308 A random number for hitting special-purpose chart determination is acquired from the figure-determining random number counter and stored in the order of acquisition in the special-figure 2 random number storage area. A combination of a random number for hit determination and a random value for hitting special drawing determination in the special figure 2 random number storage area (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 2 set of random values” or “special figure 2 start information” Is stored as many as the special figure 2 pending number stored in the special figure 2 pending number storage area. In the special figure 2 random number value storage area, every time the number of special figure 2 reservations decreases, the data of the special figure 2 random number value pair of the highest retention order is erased and the remaining special figure 2 random number values It is processed so that the holding order of the data of the set is advanced by one. Also, every time the number of special drawing 2 reservations increases, data of a new special drawing 2 random number value pair is written in the next holding order of the data of the special drawing 2 random number value pair of the lowest holding order.

  When the common drawing start port 228 has a prize and the corresponding number of storage areas provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the common drawing selection random number value generation random number counter is obtained as a common drawing selection random number value Store in the common map random number storage area. When there is a prize in the variable prize opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable prize opening 234 is stored in the prize storage area for the variable prize opening.

  In step 10219 following step 10217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, 1 byte, and bit 7 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bit 6 Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that it is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 The number of withdrawal requests after chemical processing is indicated.

  In step 10221 subsequent to step 10219, general drawing state update processing is performed. The common drawing state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the common drawing state. For example, in the common drawing state update process in the middle of the common drawing fluctuation display (the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the common drawing display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off Turn off drive control. By performing this control, the common drawing display device 210 performs variable display of common drawing (common drawing fluctuation game).

  Also, in the common drawing state update processing at the timing when the common drawing fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the common drawing display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the common drawing hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7 segment LED constituting the common view display device 210 is turned on / off to control the common view display mode, and when the common view hit flag is off, the common view display so as to become the display mode of the out-of-round symbol The on / off driving control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, setting areas for preparing various settings in various processes, not limited to the general drawing state update process, are prepared. Here, while performing the said lighting * extinguishing drive control, the setting which shows that common view stop display is performed to the setting area is performed. By performing this control, the common-diagram display device 210 determines either one of the hit symbol (a common-diagram A shown in FIG. 341 (c) and the out-of-cut symbol (a common-diagram B shown in FIG. 341 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating a stop period is set in a storage area of a common drawing stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 milliseconds (ms)). By this setting, the symbol which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the common drawing fluctuation game.

  Further, if the result of the common drawing change game is a hit, the common drawing hit flag is turned on as described later. When the flag for the drawing is on, the common state update processing at the time when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area, while the general drawing operation is being set, the predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), the opening and closing solenoids (parts of various solenoids 332) of the blade member 232a of the special view 2 start port 232 A signal for holding 232 a in an open state is output, and information indicating an open period is set in a storage area of a blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the general drawing state update process starting at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), the blade member A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general drawing state update processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the general drawing is set in the setting area of the RAM 308 Do. Furthermore, if the result of the common drawing change game is lost, the common drawing hit flag is turned off as described later. When the flag for the drawing is off, the drawing state updating process is also performed at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the drawing stop time changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the non-operational view is set. In the common drawing state update processing in the case where the common drawing is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step 10223 without doing anything.

  At step 10223, a common drawing related lottery process is performed. In this common drawing related lottery process, the common drawing fluctuation game and the special drawing 2 start / stop control of the starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the common drawing is not in operation), and the number of common drawing fluctuation games held. If the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the common drawing change game is to be won or not to be won by random number lottery based on the common drawing win random number stored in the above random number storage area The hit determination is performed, and if it is determined that the player wins, the flag for the map drawing provided in the RAM 308 is set to on. In the case of failure to win, the flag per common drawing is set to off. Also, regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the common drawing timer random number value described above is acquired as the common drawing timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are calculated based on the acquired common drawing timer random number value Among them, one time for fluctuating and displaying a common drawing on the common drawing display device 210 is selected, and this fluctuation display time is stored as a common drawing fluctuation display time in the common drawing fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of common drawing fluctuation games held is stored in the common drawing reservation number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of common drawing fluctuation games held each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this common drawing reserve number storage area. Also, the random number value used for hit determination is deleted.

  In step 10224 following step 10223, a special drawing prefetch process is performed. In the special view prefetching process, when there is a prize in the special view 1 start port 230 or the special view 2 start port 232, the start information relating to the suspension increased by the prize is read ahead, and the stop figure etc. It is determined in advance prior to the success or failure determination in the related lottery process.

  The special drawing prefetching process of step 10224 will be described with reference to FIGS. 344 to 349.

  FIG. 344 is a flow chart showing an example of the flow of the special view prefetch process.

  In the special view pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information (newly acquired start information) increased in each of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol prior to the success or failure determination process. The determination is made, and the preliminary determination result (the special-figure look-ahead result) is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit (see FIGS. 345 (a) to (c)) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 1 and the number of the special view 1 pre-read result stored in the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area to be stored as 1 pre-reading number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 1 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 1 pre-read result data of the highest rank (first) is deleted every time the number of special view 1 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special view 1 pre-read result It is processed so that the order of the data of is advanced one by one. Also, every time the number of special views 1 prefetching increases, data of new special views 1 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of special view 1 prefetch results with the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit for storing the pre-read result of the special view 2 and the number of special view 2 pre-read results stored in the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area to be stored as a number is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four prefetch results can be stored. In the special view 2 pre-read result storage unit, the special order 2 pre-read result data of the highest rank is erased every time the number of special view 2 pre-read decreases, and the remaining special figure 2 pre-read result data ranking Are processed one by one. Further, every time the number of special views 2 prefetching increases, data of new special views 2 prefetch results are written in the next order of the data of the special views 2 prefetch results of the lowest rank.

  In the special view prefetching process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether the start information of the special view 2 has increased (step 10251). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special view 2 has increased is, for example, the special view 2 pending number stored in the special view 2 pending count storage area and the special view 2 reserved count count storage area. Figure 2 compare with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special view 2 has increased when the special view 2 hold count is larger than the special view 2 look-ahead count, and the special view 2 hold count is equal to the special view 2 look-ahead count It is determined that the start information of Special Figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step 10252. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step 10254.

  In step 10252, the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 winning random number value and special figure 2 random number value pair) that has been increased is processed prior to the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step 10229). Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the prefetched special view 2 start information, for example, the success / failure determination table (refer to FIG. 346) and special view determination table (refer to FIG. 347) used at the pass / fail determination, the special view 2 change game related to the start information The stop symbol of is determined in advance prior to the success or failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step 10229). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step 10253 following step 10252, the stop symbol information as the special view 2 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step 10254.

  In step 10254, the main control unit 300 determines whether the start information in the special view 1 has increased. The determination as to whether the start information of the special view 1 has increased is, as in the case of the special view 2, for example, the special view 1 reserve count stored in the special view 1 reserve count storage area and the special view 1 prefetch count count storage area This is done by comparing with the special view 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step 10255. If it is determined that the start information of the special view 1 has not increased, the special view prefetching process is ended.

  In step 10255, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not the power is not being supplied. If it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state, the process proceeds to step 10256, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-power support state (it is in the power support), it proceeds to step 10258. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-power support is in progress, but it may be determined other than the power support condition whether the execution condition of the special view 1 advance warning notification is satisfied. . For example, the execution conditions of the special view 1 advance notice and notification include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-power support.

  In step 10256, the special figure 1 start information (special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random number value pair) that has been increased is processed prior to the success / failure determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step 10231). Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, and the success / failure determination table and the special figure determination table used at the time of pass / fail judgment, for example, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 fluctuation game according to the start information It is determined in advance prior to the success / failure determination process in the process (step 10231). Note that this prior determination process may be performed using a special table for the prior determination instead of the table used at the time of determination of success or failure.

  In step 10257 following step 10256, the stop symbol information as the special view 1 look-ahead result obtained in advance determination is stored in the first vacant area of the special view 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the special drawing 2 status updating process (step 10225) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  At step 10258, without pre-reading the special view 1 start information that has been increased, “not determined” information indicating that the start information is not read ahead is replaced with the stop symbol information and the special view 1 read-ahead result storage in the RAM 308 Store in the first vacant area of the department. After that, the special drawing prefetching process is ended, and the process returns to the special drawing 2 status updating process (step 10225) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and determined in advance, but all the start information may be pre-read and determined in advance. In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step 10233), only the pre-read result of the start information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or in the special view 1 and special view 2 pre-read result storage unit. All prefetched results may be sent to the first secondary control unit 400.

  Further, in the present embodiment, prefetching is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 2, and pre-reading is always performed on the increased startup information of Toku-zu 1 except during power supply. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to look forward to the start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 that have been increased. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300, for example, whether or not to execute pre-reading notification every holding may be determined by drawing. In addition, regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not it is in non-power support) etc., when start information is increased, pre-reading is always executed and pre-reading results are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit, The result may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether to execute the lottery and the effect using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 345 exemplifies a state in which prefetching result information and the like are stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308.

  FIG. 345 (a) shows an example of a state in which the special view 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 345 (a), the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of reserveable numbers of special view 1 fluctuation games . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 345 (a), the "special view F" (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "prefetch result 1", and the "special feature F" is stored as the stop symbol information in the storage area "prefetch result 2". Fig. F "(Attachment) is stored," Special map A "(15R special big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the memory area" Prefetch result 3 ", and as stop symbol information in the memory area" Prefetch result 4 " “Special figure F” (missing) is stored.

  FIG. 345 (b) shows an example of a state in which the special view 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special view 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 345 (b), the special view 2 look-ahead result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the reserve number of the special view 2 variation game . Each storage area is associated with the holding order (pending 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. The stop symbol information of the special view 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 345 (b), “special figure d” (displacement) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “prefetch result 1”, and storage areas “prefetch result 2” to “prefetch result 4” , Stop symbol information is not stored. In addition, in FIG. 345 (b), the state in which stop symbol information is not memorize | stored in the storage area is described as "none".

  FIG. 345 (c) shows an example of the special view 1 pre-reading result storage unit during power support. As shown in FIG. 345 (c), in the storage area "prefetch result 1", "not determined" information is stored instead of the stop symbol information. Neither stop symbol information nor "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "prefetch result 2" to "prefetch result 4".

  In the above description, only the stop symbol is determined in advance, and only the stop symbol information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. However, the determination result of the pass / fail and the change timer number (change time) are determined in advance. The information may be stored in the prefetch result storage unit and may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  Next, a table for judging whether to pass or not and a table for determining a special figure used in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 346 and 347. Tables shown in FIGS. 346 and 347 are stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  FIGS. 346 (a) to 346 (c) are used in the success / failure determination process of the special view 1 or the special view 2 in the special view 1 or the special view 2 related lottery process (steps 10229 and 10231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. An example of the success / failure determination table is shown.

  FIG. 346 (a) shows a table used during the special figure high probability, and FIG. 346 (b) shows a table used during the special figure low probability. Further, FIG. 346 (c) shows a small hit determination table used in the small hit determination when “lost” is selected in the lottery using FIG. 346 (a) or FIG. 346 (b).

  The qualification determination tables shown in FIG. 346 (a) and FIG. 346 (b) are the “special figure probability” in the first column from the left, the “random number range” in the second column, and the “permission determination result” in the third column. It consists of items. The “high probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 346 (a) indicates that the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination is the special figure high probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates the numerical range (0 to 65535) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number for hit determination. The “random number range” is divided into three values of numbers 0 to 10000, numbers 10001 to 11638, and numbers 11639 to 65535. In the third column, "hit / fail judgment" is assigned "high probability" and "lost" corresponding to numerical values 0 to 10000 and numerical values 11639 to 65535, and "big hit" is allocated corresponding to numerical values 10001 to 11638 ing.

  The “low probability” in the “special figure probability” in the first column shown in FIG. 346 (b) represents that the gaming state at the time of the success or failure determination is the special figure low probability state. The “random number range” in the second column indicates the numerical range (0 to 65535) of the random numbers to be compared with the acquired random number for hit determination. The “random number range” is divided into three values of numbers 0 to 10000, numbers 10001 to 10162, and numbers 10163 to 65535. In the 3rd column “Incidence result”, “Lost” is assigned corresponding to “Low probability” and numerical value 0 to 10000, numerical value 10163 to 65535, and “big hit” is allocated corresponding to numerical value 10001 to 10162 ing.

  The small hit determination table shown in FIG. 346 (c) is composed of “type of special figure” in the first column from the left, “random number range” in the second column, and “appropriate determination result” in the third column. ing. “Special figure 1” in the “special figure type” in the first column shown in FIG. 346 (c) indicates that it is a special figure 1 fluctuation game. In the present embodiment, a small hit is not provided in the success / failure determination result of the special view 2 variation game. For this reason, in the present embodiment, only in the case where it becomes "loss" in the lottery using the table of FIG. 346 (a) or FIG. A lottery for small hit determination is performed using the small hit determination table shown in 2.). In the determination of success or failure of the special figure 2 fluctuation game, when the game results in “lost” in the lottery using the table of FIG. 346 (a) or FIG. 346 (b), the result of the success or failure determination is lost.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when winning a small hit, almost no winning balls are obtained, and the gaming state does not change to the special drawing high probability state or the supplementary drawing high probability state. Be Therefore, the pachinko machine 100 performs the lottery using FIG. 346 (c) when the lottery result using FIG. 346 (a) or 346 (b) is “loss”, and the special figure 1 fluctuation game It is decided to determine whether the result of is a small hit or a drop.

  The “random number range” in the second column of the table in FIG. 346 (c) indicates the numerical range (0 to 65535) of the random number to be compared with the acquired small hit determination random number value. The “random number range” is divided into two values of 0 to 12999 and 1300 to 65535. The "small hit" is assigned corresponding to the "special figure 1" and the numerical values 0 to 12999, and the "lost" is assigned corresponding to the numerical values 1300 to 65535 for the "success / failure determination result" in the third column.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is used for the determination of the acquired hit in order to determine whether the result of the variable game in the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is to be won (big hit) or not won (not). With reference to the randomness determination table, the randomness value is judged to be acceptable. For example, when the gaming state at the time of success or failure determination is the special figure high probability state, the basic circuit 302 reads out the high probability table for success or failure determination shown in FIG. In the case of the low probability state, the low probability table for acceptance determination shown in FIG. 346 (b) is read out from the ROM 306 and referred to. Furthermore, in the determination of success or failure of the special figure 1 fluctuation game, the table for the small hit determination shown in FIG. 346 (c) when it becomes “lost” in the lottery using the table of FIG. 346 (a) or 346 (b). Draw a lot of small hit judgment using.

  FIG. 347 shows a special drawing determination table used to determine a symbol to be displayed in a stopped state after the variation of the symbol. FIG. 347 (a) shows a special drawing determination table (special drawing 1 symbol determination table) for special drawing 1, and FIG. 347 (b) shows a special drawing determination table for special drawing 2 (special drawing 2 symbol determination) Table).

  The special drawing determination table for special drawing 1 shown in FIG. 347 (a) is the item “type determination result” in the first column from the left, “type” in the second column, and “random number range” in the third column. It is configured.

  The "pass / fail judgment result" in the first column is classified into "big hit", "small hit" and "loss". The “big hit” indicates the case where the “big hit” is determined as a result of the success or failure determination using the special feature suitability determination table shown in FIG. 346 (a) or FIG. 346 (b). As a result of the success or failure judgment shown in c), it shows the case where it is judged as "small hit", and "missing" is judged as "loss" as a result of the success or failure judgment using the small hit judging table shown in FIG. The case is shown.

  The third column item “random number range” is the random number value for determining the big hit special figure 1 determined for the big hit, the small hit time special figure 1 determining random number value, or the random number value range to be compared with the random number value for off symbol design ( 0 to 99). The “random number range” is divided into four values of 0 to 49, 50 to 84, 85 to 89, and 90 to 99, corresponding to the item “big hit” of the “pass / fail judgment result” in the first column. Are assigned, numbers 0 to 99 are assigned corresponding to "small hits", and numbers 0 to 99 are assigned corresponding to "loss".

  The item "type" in the second column represents the stop symbol in the special figure fluctuation game. "Type" corresponds to "big hit" and the random number range corresponds to the numbers 0 to 49 "special figure A", to the numbers 50 to 84 "special figure B", to the numbers 85 to 89 The stop symbol aspect of "special figure D" is each allocated corresponding to "figure C" and numerical value 90-99. In addition, the “design” is assigned a stop symbol form of “special figure E” corresponding to “small hit” (random number range is a numerical value of 0 to 99). Furthermore, the "symbol" is assigned a stop symbol form of "special figure F" corresponding to "loss" (random number range is a numerical value of 0 to 99).

  The table for special figure determination for special figure 2 shown in FIG. 347 (b) is the item “type” in the first column, “type” in the second column, and “random number range” in the third column from the left. It is configured.

  The "success or failure judgment result" in the first column is classified into "big hit" and "loss". "Big hit" shows the case where it is determined as "big hit" as a result of the success or failure determination using the special figure suitability determination table shown in FIG. 346 (a) or FIG. 346 (b). 346) or 346 (b) shows the case where it is determined as “losing” as a result of the success or failure determination using the special drawing suitability determination table shown in FIG.

  The item “random number range” in the third column indicates a random number value for determination of the special hit 2 for big hit when obtained or a numerical value range (0 to 99) of random numbers to be compared with the random number value for off symbol design. The “random number range” is divided into three values of 0 to 49, 50 to 69, and 70 to 99, and assigned, corresponding to the item “big hit” of the “pass / fail judgment result” in the first column. Numbers 0 to 99 are assigned corresponding to "small hits".

  The item "type" in the second column represents the stop symbol in the special figure fluctuation game. The "type" is "big hit" and the random number range corresponds to the numbers 0 to 49 "special figure a", the number 50 to 69 corresponds to the "special figure b", the number 70 to 99 The stop symbol forms shown in Fig. C "are respectively assigned. In addition, the “design” is assigned a stop symbol form of “special figure d” corresponding to “loss” (random number range is a numerical value of 0 to 99).

  As described above, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 sets the special figure 1 display device 212 to the special figure A to the special figure 1 when the result of the success or failure judgment based on entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is a big hit. It is determined with reference to the special drawing determination table with respect to the acquired random number for determining special drawing determination for which the stop symbol aspect of D ′ ′ is to be stopped and displayed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the stop symbol in the case of the success / failure determination result based on entering the ball to the special figure 1 starting opening 230 is a small hit is one of "special figure E", the case of a small hit When there are multiple types of stop symbols, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is in the special figure 1 display device 212 when the result of the pass / fail judgment based on entering the special figure 1 start opening 230 is a small hit. It is determined with reference to the special drawing determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for special drawing determination for winning when it is determined that the stop symbol aspect is to be displayed in a stopped state.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the stop symbol in the case where the success or failure judgment result based on entering the ball to special figure 1 starting opening 230 is disengaging is one of "special drawing F", the stopping symbol in the case of disengaging In the case where there are multiple types, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 causes any stop symbol form to be displayed on the special view 1 display device 212 when the success or failure determination result based on winning in the special view 1 start opening 230 is out. Whether the stop display is to be performed is determined with reference to the special drawing determination table with respect to the acquired random number for losing symbol determination. It should be noted that the random value for determining the off symbol is obtained from the random number counter for determining off symbol provided in the RAM 308 when determining the stopping symbol for off.

  Moreover, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is "special figure a"-"special figure c" in the special figure 2 display device 214 when the success or failure judgment result based on entering the special figure 2 start opening 232 is a big hit. It is determined with reference to the special figure 2 determination table with respect to the acquired random number value for special figure determination for winning, which stop symbol aspect is to be stopped and displayed.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, although a small hit is not provided in the success or failure judgment result based on entering the special figure 2 starting opening 232, the small hitting is determined based on the ball entering the special view 2 starting opening 232 A hit may be provided.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the stop symbol in the case of the acceptance or rejection determination result based on entering the ball to the special figure 2 starting opening 232 being an example of "special figure d", the stop symbol in the case of an offset If there are multiple types, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 determines which stop symbol form is displayed on the special view 2 display device 214 when the result of the pass / fail judgment based on the winning on the special view 2 start opening 232 is disapproval. Whether the stop display is to be performed is determined with reference to the special drawing determination table with respect to the acquired random number for losing symbol determination. It should be noted that the random value for determining the off symbol is obtained from the random number counter for determining off symbol provided in the RAM 308 when determining the stopping symbol for off.

  FIG. 348 shows an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display in the special figure 1 fluctuation game.

  The special view 1 variation display time determination table is used in the special view 1 related lottery process (step 10231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 348 is stored, for example, in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 348, the special figure 1 variation display time determination table includes “stop symbol”, “variation time”, “random number selection range”, “effect mode with decorative symbol display device” and “table” from the left row. It consists of 5 items.

  The "stop symbol" in the left row is the stop symbol determined using the special drawing determination table (special drawing 1 symbol determination table) of FIG. 347 (a), and it is "special drawing A · special drawing B ( "Common with presence / absence of power support", "Special figure C (common with presence / absence of power support)", "Special figure D · Special image E (common with presence / absence of power support)", "Special figure F (with no power support: hold 3) And "special figure F (without power support: with hold 0-2 or with power support: with hold 0 to 3)" are classified into five.

  If the "stop symbol" is "special figure A · special figure B", whether the gaming state at the time of the variable time determination is the power support state (whether the power support or not) and the number of special figures 1 fluctuation game pending Instead, table "1" is selected. Further, when the “stop symbol” is “special figure C”, table “2” is selected regardless of the presence / absence of power support at the time of determination of the variation time and the number of reservations for special figure 1 variation game. If the "stop symbol" is "special figure D · special figure E", whether the gaming state at the time of the variable time determination is the power support state (whether the power support or not) and the number of special figures 1 fluctuation game pending Then, the table "3" is selected.

  When "stop symbol" is "special figure F", table "4" or table "5" is selected according to the presence / absence of power support at the time of determination of fluctuation time and the number of reserved special figure 1 fluctuation games. It has become. If the special symbol F is determined as the stop symbol, and there is no power support and the number of reserved special game 1 floating games is three, the table "4" is selected, there is no power support and the number of held is 0-2 In the case where there is power support and the number of reservations is 0 to 3, the table "5" is selected.

  The item “random number selection range” indicates the numerical range (0 to 65535) of the random number to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining the special pattern fluctuation time. For example, the random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination is acquired simultaneously with acquisition of the start information of special drawing 1, is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 308, and is read out from the predetermined storage area when special drawing 1 fluctuation display time is determined. It has become. In the table “1”, “random number selection range” is divided into three values of numbers 0 to 1000, numbers 1001 to 20000, and numbers 20001 to 65535. In the table "2", the "random number selection range" is divided into three values of numbers 0 to 30000, values 30001 to 45000, and values 45001 to 65535. In the table “3”, the “random number selection range” is divided into two values of 0 to 30000 and 30001 to 65535. In the table "4", the "random number selection range" is divided into four values of 0 to 65000, 6501 to 65400, 65401 to 65500, and 65501 to 65535. In the table “5”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four values of 0 to 50000, 50001 to 60000, 60001 to 65000, and 65001 to 65535.

  The “variation time” on the left of the “random number selection range” in the drawing indicates the variation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation game. The "variation time" is the table "1" and the random number selection range is "15000 ms" corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 1000, "45000 ms" corresponding to the numerical value 1001 to 20000, and "65000 ms" corresponding to the numerical value 20001 to 65535. Are respectively assigned. “Variation time” corresponds to table “2” and “12000 ms” corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 30000, “45000 ms” corresponding to the numbers 30001 to 45000, corresponding to the numbers 45001 to 65535. “65000 ms” is assigned to each. Further, as the "variation time", "12000 ms" is allocated to the table "3" and the random number selection range corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 30000, and "15000 ms" is allocated to the numerical values 30001 to 65535, respectively. In addition, “variation time” corresponds to table “4” and “3000 ms” corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 65000 and “10000 ms” corresponding to the numerical value 6501 to 65400, and corresponding to the numerical value 65401 to 65500. "60000 ms" is allocated corresponding to "40000 ms" and numerical values 65501 to 65535, respectively. Furthermore, “variation time” corresponds to the table “5” and “7000 ms” corresponding to the random number selection range of the numbers 0 to 50000, “10000 ms” corresponding to the numbers 50001 to 60000, and the numbers 60001 to 65000 "60000 ms" is allocated corresponding to "40000 ms" and numerical values 6500 to 65535, respectively.

  The "render aspect in the decorative symbol display device" on the right of the "random number selection range" in the figure is the first decorative symbol in the special figure 1 fluctuation game corresponding to the combination of the "stop symbol" and the selected "variation time". The effect aspect performed by the display apparatus 208 or the 2nd decorative symbol display apparatus 209 is shown. "The effect pattern in the decorative symbol display device" corresponds to "per normal reach" and "45000 ms" for "stop symbol" corresponding to "special figure A · special figure B" and fluctuation time "1500 ms". Thus, "per super reach B" is allocated corresponding to "per super reach A" and fluctuation time "65000 ms". In addition, in "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device", "stop symbol" corresponds to "special figure C" and fluctuation time "12000 ms", "chance stop", fluctuation time "45000 ms" "Super reach A loss → chance stop" and "super reach B loss → chance stop" corresponding to fluctuation time "65000 ms" are assigned respectively. Here, super reach A loss → chance eye stop is a display to stop the chance eye after the production of super reach A at the end of the time off, and super reach B loss → chance eye stop After the effect of the super reach B at the time of departure is over, the display for stopping the chance eyes is performed. In addition, in the "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device", "stop symbol" corresponds to "special image D · special image E" and fluctuation time "1 2000 ms", "chance stop", fluctuation time "1 5000 ms" "Normal reach loss → chance eye stop" corresponding to each is assigned. Here, the normal reach loss → chance stop is to display a display for stopping the chance after the effect of the normal reach at the time of the end is finished. In addition, in the "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device", the "stop symbol" corresponds to the "special figure F" and the fluctuation time "3000 ms", and the "shortened loss" corresponds to the fluctuation time "7000 ms". "Large", "Normal reach loss" corresponding to fluctuation time "10000 ms", "Super reach A loss" corresponding to fluctuation time "40000 ms", "Super reach B loss" corresponding to fluctuation time "60000 ms" It is assigned.

  FIG. 349 shows an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation display in the special figure 2 fluctuation game.

  The special view 2 variation display time determination table is used in the special view 2 related lottery process (step 10229) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The data table shown in FIG. 349 is stored, for example, in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 349, the special figure 2 variation display time determination table includes “stop symbol”, “variation time”, “random number selection range”, “effect mode with decorative symbol display device” and “table” from the left row. It consists of 5 items.

  The “stop symbol” in the left column is the stop symbol determined using the special drawing determination table (special drawing 2 symbol determination table) of FIG. 347 (b), and “special drawing a · special drawing b · Special figure c (with no support), "Special figure a · Special figure b · Special figure c (with no electronic support: Hold 1 to 3)", "Special figure a · Special figure b · Special figure c (with charge support) : Hold 0), "Tog d (Power Support: Hold 1 to 3)", "Tog d (Power Support: Hold 0)", and "T Power d (No Power: Hold 0 to 3) It is divided into six of "). If the "stop symbol" is "special figure a / special figure b / special figure c", the tables "6" to "8" according to the presence / absence of power support at the time of determination of the variation time or the number of reservations for special figure 2 variation game. "" Is selected. When the "stop symbol" is "special figure a · special figure b · special figure c (without power support)", the table "6" is selected. When the "stop symbol" is "special figure a special figure b special figure c (power support with hold: 1 to 3)", the table "7" is selected. If the "stop symbol" is "special figure a special figure b special figure c (power support with hold: 0)", the table "8" is selected.

  When the "stop symbol" is "special figure d", one of the tables "9" to "11" is selected according to the presence / absence of power support at the time of determination of the variation time and the number of reserved special figures 2 variation games. . When the “stop symbol” is “special figure d (power support: hold 1 to 3)”, table “9” is selected. When the "stop symbol" is "special figure d (power support: hold 0)", the table "10" is selected. When the "stop symbol" is "special figure d (without power support: 0 to 3 with hold)", the table "11" is selected.

  The item “random number selection range” indicates the numerical range (0 to 65535) of the random number to be compared with the acquired random number value for determining the special pattern fluctuation time. For example, the random number value for special drawing fluctuation time determination is acquired simultaneously with acquisition of the start information of special drawing 2, is stored in a predetermined storage area of RAM 308, and read out from the predetermined storage area when special drawing 2 fluctuation display time is determined. It has become. In the table “6”, the “random number selection range” is divided into three values of numbers 0 to 1000, numbers 1001 to 20000, and numbers 20001 to 65535. In the table “7”, the “random number selection range” is divided into three values of numbers 0 to 1000, numbers 1001 to 20000, and numbers 20001 to 65535. In the table "8", the "random number selection range" is divided into two values of 0 to 20000 and 20001 to 65535. In the table “9”, the “random number selection range” is divided into two values of 0 to 65500 and 6551 to 65535. In the table “10”, the “random number selection range” is divided into two values of 0 to 65500 and 6551 to 65535. In the table “11”, the “random number selection range” is divided into four values of 0 to 50000, 50001 to 60000, 60001 to 65000, and 65001 to 65535.

  The "variation time" on the left of the "random number selection range" in the figure indicates the variation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation game. The "variation time" is the table "6" and the random number selection range is "15000 ms" corresponding to the numerical value 0 to 1000, "45000 ms" corresponding to the numerical value 1001 to 20000, and "65000 ms" corresponding to the numerical value 20001 to 65535. Are respectively assigned. "Variation time" corresponds to the table "7" and "1000 ms" corresponding to the random number selection range from the numerical value 0 to 1000, "15000 ms" corresponding to the numerical value 1001 to 20000, corresponding to the numerical value 20001 to 65535. “45000 ms” is assigned to each. Further, as the “variation time”, “15000 ms” is allocated to the table “8” and the random number selection range corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 20000, and “45000 ms” is allocated to the numerical values 20001 to 65535, respectively. Further, as the “variation time”, “1000 ms” is allocated to the table “9” and the random number selection range corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 65500, and “40000 ms” is allocated to the numerical values 65501 to 65535. Further, as the “variation time”, “7000 ms” is assigned to the table “10” and the random number selection range corresponds to the numerical values 0 to 65500, and “40000 ms” is assigned to the numerical values 65501 to 65535. Furthermore, “variation time” corresponds to the table “11” and “7000 ms” corresponding to the random number selection range from the numerical value 0 to 50000, “10000 ms” corresponding to the numerical value 50001 to 60000, and the numerical value 60001 to 65000 "60000 ms" is allocated corresponding to "40000 ms" and numerical values 6500 to 65535, respectively.

  The "render aspect in the decorative symbol display device" on the right of the "random number selection range" in the figure is the first decorative symbol in the special figure 2 fluctuation game corresponding to the combination of the "stop symbol" and the selected "variation time". The effect aspect performed by the display apparatus 208 or the 2nd decorative symbol display apparatus 209 is shown. In the "representation mode with the decorative symbol display device", "stop symbol" is "special figure a · special figure b · special figure c (without power support)" and "per normal reach" corresponding to the fluctuation time of 15000 ms. "Per Super Reach A" corresponding to time 45000 ms and "Per Super Reach B" corresponding to fluctuation time 65000 ms are respectively allocated. In addition, "the stop design" corresponds to "special figure a · special figure b · special figure c (power support with hold: 1 to 3)" and "the effect mode in the decorative symbol display device" and the fluctuation time of 1000 ms. "Per emergency", "per normal reach" corresponding to fluctuation time 15000 ms, and "per super reach A" corresponding to fluctuation time 45000 ms are respectively allocated. In addition, in the "representation mode in the decorative symbol display device", "stop symbol" is "special figure a · special figure b · special figure c (power support with hold: 0)" and "corresponding to fluctuation time 15000 ms" "Normal reach" and "per reach A" are assigned corresponding to the fluctuation time of 45000 ms. In addition, “representation mode in the decorative symbol display device”, “stop symbol” is “special figure d (with power support: with hold 1 to 3)” and “very short loss” corresponding to the variation time of 1000 ms, variation time "Super reach A loss" is assigned corresponding to 40000 ms. In addition, "the effect pattern in the decorative symbol display device", "stop symbol" is "special figure d (with power support: withhold 0)" and corresponding to the fluctuation time of 7000 ms "corrupt", corresponding to the fluctuation time 40000 ms "Super reach A loss" is assigned respectively. Furthermore, the "mode of effect on the decorative symbol display device" is "stopped pattern" corresponding to "special figure d (without power support: 0 to 3 with hold)" and corresponding to the fluctuation time of 7000 ms, and the fluctuation time of 10000 ms. Corresponding to “Normal reach loss”, “Super reach A loss” corresponding to fluctuation time 40000 ms and “Super reach B loss” corresponding to fluctuation time 60000 ms are respectively allocated.

  Next, returning to the explanation of FIG. 343, special figure status update processing is performed for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, but first, special figure status update processing (special figure 2 status update process) for special figure 2 is performed. Perform (step 10225). This special view 2 state update process performs one process out of the next plurality of processes according to the state of the special view 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 status update process at the timing of the special figure 2 change start, the special figure 2 value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure 2 reserve number stored in the special figure 2 reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 Restore in the pending count storage area. At the same time, turning on / off of the special view 2 holding lamp 220 is controlled. For example, assuming that the four LEDs of the special view 2 holding lamp 220 in FIG. 339 are LED numbers 1-4 sequentially from left to right in the figure, for example, red LEDs for the special figure 2 holding number are red in order from the smaller LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 2 status update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is lit and Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special view 2 (special view 2 variation game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, flags of the 16R big hit flag, the 8R big hit flag, the out flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the common drawing probability fluctuation flag are prepared. In the special figure 2 status update process which starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time passes (the timing when the value of special figure 2 display symbol renewal timer becomes 1 from 0), 16R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is on, and the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is on, the special drawing a shown in FIG. 341 (b) shown in FIG. 341 (b) is the case where the big hit flag is on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is on, and the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is on. Is the special figure c when the 8R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability variation flag is off, the special figure probability variation flag is on, and the special figure d when the out flag is on. As described above, the 7 segment LED constituting the special view 2 display device 214 is turned on / off drive control, and the setting indicating the special view 2 stop display in the setting area of the RAM 308 is performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has 16R special big hit symbol (special figure a), 8R special big hit symbol (special figure b), 8R big hit symbol (special figure c), and off symbol (special figure) Make a finalized display of any one of d). Thereafter, in order to maintain the predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 2 that has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is notified to the player. Also, if the number of times of power assistance stored in the number of times of power assistance (details will be described later) stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of power assistance and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0 If it is not during the special map probability fluctuation (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 2 The processing is ended after the special view 2 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  In addition, if the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the special view 2 status update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period is over (the timing when the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) In addition to setting the special figure 2 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for the standby time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the solenoid for driving the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), until the variable winning opening 234 detects a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) of winning balls A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 2 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 and a timer for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating a closed period is set in the storage area. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process which starts opening and closing control of this door member a predetermined number of times (16 rounds or 8 rounds in this embodiment) and ends at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the number of times of power support (for example, 100 times) is set in the number of times of power support stored in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game. Turn on the short time flag provided in. If the common drawing probability change flag is set to OFF, the number of power support times is not set in the power support frequency storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. Here, the power support state means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. At this time, when the short flag is set to on, the drawing is in a high probability state (general drawing probability change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 tends to be long (electric Chu open and spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. A game state by these common drawing definite change, common drawing change short, electric Chu open spread is put together, and it is called electric support (starting hole prize support by electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, many game balls in the special figure 2 start port 232 until the game ball enters the ball However, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and this is to solve this. Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operational setting area Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special view 2 fluctuation game is a disconnection, as described later, a disconnection flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special value 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step 10227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, special figure status update processing (special figure 1 status update processing) for the special view 1 is performed (step 10227). This special view 1 state update process performs one process out of the next plurality of processes according to the state of the special view 1.

  For example, in the special figure 1 state update process at the timing of the special figure 1 change start, the special figure 1 value obtained by subtracting the value of the special figure 1 reserve number stored in the special figure 1 reserve number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is special figure 1 Restore in the pending count storage area. At the same time, turning on / off of the special view 1 holding lamp 218 is controlled. For example, assuming that the four LEDs of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 in FIG. 339 are LED numbers 1-4 sequentially from left to right in the figure, the LEDs for the special figure 1 holding number are for example red in order from the smaller LED number. Turn on and turn off the others.

  Also, for example, in the special figure 1 state update process in the middle of the special figure 1 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is lit Repeatedly turn off and turn on and off drive control. By performing this control, the special view 1 display device 212 performs the variable display (the special view 1 variation game) of the special view 1. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process is ended.

  Further, in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, flags of 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, small hit flag, out flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag, and common drawing probability fluctuation flag are prepared. In the special figure 1 status update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 1 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is on, and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is on, the special drawing A shown in FIG. 341 (a) shown in FIG. 341 (a) has the big hit flag on, the special drawing probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general drawing probability fluctuation flag is on. Is a special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, special figure probability variation flag is on, special figure probability variation flag is on, special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, special figure probability variation flag is on, common figure The special figure 1 display device so that the probability fluctuation flag is the special figure D when it is off, the special figure E when the small hit flag is on, and the special figure F when the outlier flag is on. 7 segments L constituting 212 Perform turning on and off the drive control and D, to set indicating that it is a special symbol 1 stop display of the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 1 display device 212 has 15R special big hit symbol (special figure A), 15R big hit symbol (special figure B), 2R big hit (suddenly positive variation) symbol (special figure C), 2R big hit (special figure C) Hidden confirmation of change) A fixed display of any one of a symbol (special figure D), a small hitting symbol (special figure E), and an off pattern (special figure F) is performed. Thereafter, in order to maintain the predetermined stop display period (for example, for 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special view 1 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. As a result of this setting, the special view 1 which has been fixedly displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game. Also, if the number of times of power assistance stored in the number of times of power assistance (details will be described later) stored in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of times of power assistance and the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0 If it is not during the special map probability fluctuation (details will be described later), the time saving flag is turned off. Furthermore, also during the big hit game (during special game state), the time saving flag is turned off. Moreover, while additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) in the above transmission information storage area, the symbol for stopping the fluctuation display is the special view 1 The processing is ended after the special view 1 identification information indicating that there is a special information is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data described later.

  Also, if the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation game is a big hit, as described later, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special view 1 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special watch 1 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In addition to setting the special figure 1 in the setting area, it waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period displaying an image notifying the player that the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a big hit. For this purpose, information indicating a winning presentation period is set in the storage area of the special view 1 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 1 status update process starting at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for waiting time management changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the solenoid for driving the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), until the variable winning opening 234 detects a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) of winning balls A signal for holding the member 234a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special view 1 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing driving of the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 and a timer for door closing time management provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating a closed period is set in the storage area. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Further, this door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), and in the special figure 1 state update process started at the end timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example 3 seconds) That is, in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for the period displaying the image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended, the effect waiting period Set the information indicating. In addition, if the common drawing probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the number of times of power support (for example, 100 times) is set in the number of times of power support stored in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game. Turn on the short time flag provided in. If the common drawing probability change flag is set to OFF, the number of power support times is not set in the power support frequency storage unit, and the time saving flag is not turned on. Here, the power support state means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variation game to the start of the next big hit. At this time, when the short flag is set to on, the drawing is in a high probability state (general drawing probability change). The probability of becoming a hit in the common drawing fluctuation game is higher in the common drawing high probability state than in the common drawing low probability state. In addition, the variation time of the general drawing fluctuation game is shorter in the general drawing high probability state than in the general drawing low probability state (general drawing change short). Furthermore, in the general drawing high probability state, compared with the general drawing low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 start port 232 tends to be long (electric Chu open and spread). In addition, in the general drawing high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is more likely to open compared to the general drawing low probability state. A game state by these common drawing definite change, common drawing change short, electric Chu open spread is put together, and it is called electric support (starting hole prize support by electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the general drawing low probability state is maintained. This is a large hit state during the big hit game, a predetermined number in the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game, a lot of game balls in the special figure 1 start port 230 until the game ball enters the ball However, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the euphorism increases, and this is to solve this. Furthermore, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step 10233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 1 status update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the production waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation area is set in the RAM 308 Set to medium. Furthermore, if the result of the special view 1 fluctuation game is a disconnection, as described later, a disconnection flag is turned on. When the out flag is on, even in the special figure 1 state update processing at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the special time the value of the stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, the special figure 2 non-operation is set. In the special figure 1 state update process in the case where the special figure 1 is not in operation, the process proceeds to the next step 10227 without doing anything.

  The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure status update process in steps 10225 and 10227 is finished, special figure related lottery processes for special figure 1 and special figure 2 are performed this time. Here too, the special figure related lottery process (special figure 2 related lottery process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step 10229), and thereafter, the special figure related lottery process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process) ) (Step 10231). With regard to these special drawing related lottery processing, the main control unit 300 performs the special drawing 2 related drawing processing prior to the special drawing 1 related drawing processing, so that the start condition of the special drawing 2 fluctuation game and the special drawing 1 fluctuation Even when the game start condition is established at the same time, the special figure 2 fluctuation game is moving first, so the special figure 1 fluctuation game does not start fluctuation. In addition, when the number of reservations of the special figure 2 fluctuation game is larger than 0, the lottery process and the fluctuation game regarding the suspension of the special figure 1 fluctuation game are not performed. The notification of the result of the big hit determination of the special figure variation game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub control unit 400, the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the special figure 2 starting opening 232 It is carried out prior to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning to the starting port 230 in FIG.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process (step 10229), the special figure 2 random number value set is acquired from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number value storage area and acquired Whether the jackpot is a big hit or not with reference to the hit / fail determination random number values for the hit determination random number values in the set of special figure 2 random number values, referring to the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 346 (a) and FIG. 346 (b) Make a decision on Next, if the success / failure determination result is a big hit, the main control unit 300 determines the special figure determination shown in FIG. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special figure 2 is determined with reference to the table (special figure 2 symbol determination table). Although the details will be described later, when the result of the determination is disapproval, a random value for determining the disappointing symbol is separately obtained, and the stopping symbol is referred to the table for determining the special figure shown in FIG. Decide.

  After extracting the set of the special figure 2 random number values from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, the storage of the set of the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number value storage area is cleared and Subtract 1 from the number of reservations. At this time, the special figure 2 random number value set is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308 with the special figure 2 random number value set extracted from the special figure 2 random number value storage area, and the special figure stored in the temporary area The above determination may be made based on a set of two random numbers.

  In the case of the special figure 1 related lottery process (step 10231), the special figure 1 random number value group is acquired from the earliest (most stored) reserved position in the special figure 1 random number value storage area, and acquired Refer to the hit / fail judgment table and the small hit judgment table shown in Fig. 346 (a), Fig. 346 (b) and Fig. 346 (c) for the hit judgment random number values in the special figure 1 random number value set. Then, a decision is made as to whether it will be a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. Next, when the determination result of the success or failure is a big hit or a small hit, the main control unit 300 compares the acquired special figure 2 random number value storage area with the random number value for determining the special occasion special figure shown in FIG. 347 (a). The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special view 1 is determined with reference to the figure determination table (special figure 1 symbol determination table). Although the details will be described later, when the result of the determination is disapproval, a random value for determining the off symbol is separately obtained, and the stop symbol is referred to the table for determining the special figure shown in FIG. Decide.

  After taking out the first set of special figure 1 random number values from the special figure 1 random number storage area, the storage of the set of special figure 1 random numbers in the special figure 1 random number storage area is cleared and Subtract 1 from the number of reservations. At this time, the special figure 1 random number value set is stored in the RAM 308 in a temporary area provided with a special figure 1 random number value set extracted from the special figure 1 random number value storage area, and the special figure stored in the temporary area The above determination may be made based on a set of one random value.

In step 10233 following step 10231, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400 is, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, prefetch result information command, symbol variation stop command, prize effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Information which can specify the type of command) and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission process. If the command type is a symbol change start command, 16R big hit flag, 15R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag values stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, as special command probability, as command data. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, including the value of the fluctuation flag, the special drawing timer number selected in the special drawing related lottery process, in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop command, the value of the 16R big hit flag, 15R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, special figure In the case of the prize effect command and the end effect start command, it includes the value of the probability variation flag, etc., the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, It is made to include the value, the number of big hit rounds, etc. If the command type indicates a basic command, the device data in the command data, presence or absence of winning in special figure 1 starting opening 230, presence or absence of winning in special figure 2 starting opening 232, presence or absence of winning in variable prize opening 234, etc. including.

  In addition, in the pre-reading result information command, the pre-reading result information (pre-read stop symbol information) stored in the pre-reading result storage unit in the command data and the pre-read stop symbol correspond to the number of pending items And pending number information indicating whether the The information on the prefetch result in the prefetch result information command and the information on the number of reservations may be only an increase or may include information on the results on prefetch for all the reservations and information on the number of reservations.

  Also, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission processing, 16R big hit flag, 15R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag and 2R big hit flag values, special drawing probability fluctuation flag values, special figure 1 stored in command data in the RAM 308 Information indicating the special drawing timer number selected in the related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game, etc. which are held are set. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, 16R big hit flag, 15R big hit flag, 8R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag value, special drawing probability fluctuation flag value, etc. stored in RAM 308 are set in command data Do. In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the RAM 308 of effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and special figure probability fluctuation flag The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, command data is stored in the command data in the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 during the effect standby period, the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120, and the special view probability fluctuation flag. The information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or the special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are reserved is set. In the above-mentioned special winning opening open setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game etc which are pending etc Set the information indicating. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of the special figure 1 fluctuation game or special figure 2 fluctuation game etc pending Set the information indicating. Also, in step 10233, general command special view reserve increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is set as command data. In the first sub-control unit 400, according to the command type included in the received output schedule information, determination of effect control according to a change in game control in the main control unit 300 becomes possible, and is included in the output schedule information The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step 10235 following step 10233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step 10237 following step 10235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step 10205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or a bottom plate full error. When the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be sent to the first sub control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the bottom plate full error. Set In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special view 2 start port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the common view display device 210 and the special view 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special view 2 display device 214, the various state display unit 328, etc. is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step 10219) is output to the first sub control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step 10239 following step 10237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power is shut off is detected), the process proceeds to step 1023, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power is not shut off), the process proceeds to step 10241. At step 10241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the respective registers temporarily saved in step 10201 are set in the original registers, and interrupt permission setting is performed, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 342 is performed. Return to On the other hand, in step 1023, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state upon power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output port is performed. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) of the first secondary control unit 400. FIG. 6C is a flowchart of timer variable update interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 6D is a flowchart of image control processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step 10301 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step 10301, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. This initialization process takes about 30 seconds, for example.

  In step 10303 following step 10301, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step 10305 . At step 10305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step 10307 following step 10305, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  At step 10309 following step 10307, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step 10307, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command is performed from the ROM 406, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step 10311 following step 10309, when pressing of the chance button is detected, processing is performed to change the effect data updated in step 10309 to effect data according to the pressing of the chance button.

  In step 10313 following step 10311, when there is an instruction to the VDP 434 in the effect data read out in the step 10309, this instruction is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step 10315 following step 10313, when there is an instruction to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read out in step 10309, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step 10317 following step 10315, if there is an instruction to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read out in step 10309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step 10319 following step 10317, when there is an instruction to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read out in step 10309, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step 10321 following step 10319, if there is a control command to be sent to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step 10309, the setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step 10303 .

  Next, command reception interrupt processing of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first secondary control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step 10401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The first secondary control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of At step 10501 of the first secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described at step 10303 in the first secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. 350A. In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step 10303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step 10503 following step 10501, transmission of control commands to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step 10321 in the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400, update processing of other effect random number values, and the like are performed.

  Next, the image control processing of step 10313 in the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described using FIG. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process.

  At step 10601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. Thereby, the image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, etc. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on an instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step 10603 following step 10601, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step 10605, otherwise transfer end division Wait for incoming signal to be input. In step 10605, parameter setting is performed based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step 10601, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 436, image size , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step 10607 following step 10605, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts image drawing in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

  In step 10609 following step 10607, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input based on the end of image drawing, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step 10611, otherwise Waits for a generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step 10611, a scene display counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts the number of images of a scene, is incremented (+1), and the process is ended.

  The processing of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 351. FIG. 8A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, various initial settings are performed in step 10701 of FIG. When power is turned on, first, in step 10701, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of storage areas in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step 10703 following step 10701, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, this process is repeated until the timer variable is 10, and when the timer variable is 10 or more, the process proceeds to step 10705. . At step 10705, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step 10707 following step 10705, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second secondary control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first secondary control unit 400.

  In step 10709 following step 10707, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step 10707, processing such as reading out effect data corresponding to this command is performed from the ROM 506, and if it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data updating process is performed.

  In step 10711 following step 10709, when there is an instruction to the game board lamp 532 or the game stand frame lamp 542 from the first sub control unit 400, this instruction is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step 10713 following step 10711, when there is a command from the first sub control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step 10703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second secondary control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second secondary control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first secondary control unit 400. In step 10801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first secondary control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, a second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described using FIG. The second secondary control unit 500 is provided with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once in 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle of In step 10901 of the second secondary control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step 10703 in the second secondary control unit main process shown in FIG. 351 (a). In the timer variable storage area of Therefore, in step 10703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). At step 10903 of the second auxiliary control unit timer interrupt process, update process or the like of the effect random number value is performed.

<Specific example of the effect by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208>
352 (a) to (o) are diagrams showing a specific example of the effect by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in order.

  353 (p) to (D) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in order following FIGS. 352 (a) to (o).

FIGS. 354 (E) to (H) are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in order following FIGS. 353 (p) to (D).
This example is an example of “per super reach A” in which the result of the judgment is a definite variation big hit (special figure A) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms.

  The display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d. In the upper right portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a fourth symbol region 731a for special figure 1 and a fourth symbol region 731b for special figure 2 are provided. The special symbol 1 for the fourth design area 731a displays a circle while the special figure 1 is stopped changing and a special symbol 1 blinks while the special figure 1 is changing (However, in the figure, the circle is not displayed. The display shows a blinking display.) The special symbol 2 for the fourth symbol area 731b displays a triangle Δ while the special figure 2 is stopped changing, and displays a blinking triangle Δ while the special figure 2 is fluctuating (However, in the figure, the triangle Δ is not displayed. The display shows a blinking display.) On the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732a for displaying icons is displayed as many as the number of the special figure 1 floating game being held, and the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 In the center of the right part of the icon, a special icon 2 reserved icon display area 732 b is provided to display the icons as many as the number of the special figure 2 floating game pending. The special icon 2 reserved icon display area 732 b is not displayed when the special icon 2 is not held, and is displayed when the special icon 2 is repaired. On the right side of the special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732a, a variation icon display area 734 for displaying an icon related to the present variation is provided.

  In each drawing, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the first special symbol hold lamp 218, and the second special symbol hold lamp 220 are at the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is illustrated. The first special view display device 212 and the second special view display device 214 blink the LED of the central horizontal bar among the seven segment LEDs while the respective special view fluctuation game changes, and the other LEDs turn off. Let

  In FIG. 352 (a), the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, and the result of the previous special figure 1 fluctuation game is the special figure F (displaced symbol). Yes, it shows the case where the number of reservations of special figure 1 fluctuation game is two.

  Subsequent to FIG. 352 (a), in FIG. 352 (b), the special figure 1 change game which has been suspended is started, and the first special symbol display device 212 performs display indicating that the change is being made. That is, in the first special symbol display device 212, the LED of the central horizontal bar of the 7-segment LEDs is blinked, and the other LEDs are turned off to indicate that the variation is being made.

In Fig. 352 (c) following Fig. 352 (b), Fig. 352 (d) following Fig. 352 (c), and Fig. 352 (e) following Fig. 352 (d), the special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732a Move the displayed pending icons 732aa and 732ab to the right, move the pending icon 732aa displayed on the rightmost side of the special icon 1 pending icon display area 732a into the variation icon display area 734, and The hold icon 732ab displayed immediately to the left of the hold icon 732aa is displayed on the rightmost side of the special icon 1 hold icon display area 732a.
In the present embodiment, the hold icon 732aa displayed in the area corresponding to the hold 1 is a change icon 732aa when the movement from the area corresponding to the hold 1 is started. Note that the hold icon displayed in the area corresponding to the hold 1 may be a change icon when displayed in the change icon display area. In addition, when the hold decreases, the icon displayed in the area corresponding to the hold 1 may be changed.

  Subsequent to FIG. 352 (e), in FIG. 352 (f), the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c.

  Subsequent to FIG. 352 (f), in FIG. 352 (g), a conversational effect and a button effect are performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the character (Yoshimune) 208 e is displayed in the effect display area 208 d and the remarks thereof are displayed (conversation effect), and the operation means image 208 g imitating the above-mentioned chance button 136 operable by the player and the chance button 136 An operable period image 208 h representing a period during which the user can operate is displayed (button effect). The operation means image 208g includes, for example, an image 208ga which is an image imitating a button portion of the chance button 136, and an image 208gb which is an image imitating an edge portion of an area around the chance button 136.

  The operation means image 208g may simply display a part that can be pressed or may be displayed as the part that can be pressed up and down, or may display an arrow. You may also indicate that it is possible to operate with characters. At the display start timing, it is not necessary to perform the moving operation such that the part capable of pressing operation moves up and down, and then, the moving operation such that the portion capable of pressing operation gradually moves up and down is displayed while shaking. May be In addition, an image (for example, a movie (moving image, video) may be displayed) in which a portion that can be pressed can be illuminated. In addition, it is possible not to display the image which is shining.

  The operable period image 208 h executes an animation that changes the display mode from the start position to the end position. In the present embodiment, an image in which the entire width is initially blacked out is displayed, and the width of blacking is reduced as the period during which the chance button 136 can be operated decreases. The black coating may be painted in a color other than black, and may be any image as long as the operable period can be identified.

  The operable period image 208 h is not limited to a horizontal bar, and may be displayed by a meter, a gauge, characters (numbers), the number of images according to the remaining time or elapsed time, the color of the image, or the like.

  Subsequent to FIG. 352 (g), in FIG. 352 (h), acceptance of button operation of the chance button 136 is started, and from this time point, the black filling of the horizontal width of the operable period image 208h starts to decrease.

  Subsequent to FIG. 352 (h), in FIG. 352 (i), the period during which the chance button 136 can be operated is reduced, and the operable period image 208h has a reduced width of black compared to FIG. 352 (h). doing.

  Following FIG. 352 (i), FIG. 352 (j) shows a display when a button operation of the chance button 136 is received after FIG. 352 (i). In this case, characters are displayed in the effect display area 208d. It displays "It's a chance!" As the message 208k of 208e. In this case, the display of FIG. 352 (k) is performed after the display of FIG. 352 (j). When the button operation is not received during the period in which the chance button 136 can be operated, the display of FIG. 352 (j) is not performed, and the display of FIG. 352 (k) is performed. It should be noted that even if the button operation is not received during the period in which the chance button 136 can be operated, the display of FIG. 352 (j) may be performed at the end of the reception period of the button operation.

  The reception period of the button operation is ended, and in the subsequent FIG. 352 (k), the display of the effect display area 208 d is ended, and the same display as in FIG. 352 (f) is performed.

  Subsequent to FIG. 352 (k), in FIG. 352 (l), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. FIG. 352 (l) shows the reach state, in which “7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed one by one in order of left, right and middle, but the left and right decorative symbols may be stopped and displayed simultaneously.

  Subsequent to FIG. 352 (l), in FIG. 352 (m), the variation display or stop display of the decorative symbol displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c is a decorative symbol It moves to the corner 733 of the display device 208 and displays it. The corner 733 is located at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be provided at another position.

  The display of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c is erased (erased of the decorative symbol), and the display of the special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732a is also erased (erased of the icon). The deletion of the decorative symbol and the deletion of the icon may be performed simultaneously, or either one may be deleted first.

  In FIG. 352 (m), although the fourth symbol area 731a for the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol area 731b for the special figure 2 are displayed, the fourth symbol area 731a for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol area 731 b may also be erased.

  Following FIG. 352 (m), after FIG. 352 (n), the duel of the character (a duel between Yoshimune and Ken-ou) is sequentially displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  The display of FIG. 352 (n) is performed following FIG. 352 (m), the display of FIG. 352 (o) is performed following FIG. 352 (n), and the display of FIG. 353 (p) is subsequent to FIG. Display. In FIG. 353 (p), the sights of Yoshimune and the swordsman collide with each other at point 208l, and in FIG. 353 (q) following FIG.

  Following FIG. 353 (q), in FIG. 353 (r), the rupture point 208m is erased and the operation means image 208i and the operable period image 208j are displayed, whereby the visual appearance that the button appears due to the rupture Produce an effect. The operation means image 208i and the operable period image 208j have the same configuration as the operation means image 208g and the operable period image 208h described above. Note that the operating point image 208i and the operable period image 208j may be displayed together with the rupture point 208m without erasing the rupture point 208m.

  Subsequent to FIG. 353 (r), in FIG. 353 (s), a display for prompting the player's operation “Please hit the button continuously!” Is performed in the effect display area 208 d.

  Subsequently to FIG. 353 (s), in FIG. 353 (t), acceptance of button operation of the chance button 136 is started, and from this time point, the black filling of the horizontal width of the operable period image 208 j starts to decrease.

  Figure 353 (u) following Figure 353 (t) Figure 353 (v) following Figure 353 (u) Figure 353 (w) following Figure 353 (v) Figure 353 (x) following Figure 353 (w) In the), when the operation of the chance button 136 is detected, a continuous hit effect (a effect that displays a state in which Yoshimune is gradually pushing the sword player) is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the present embodiment, the display (the pressing condition of the swordsman of Yoshimune) changes in accordance with the number of times the chance button 136 is operated. For example, FIG. 353 (u) is displayed when the chance button 136 is operated three times, FIG. 353 (v) is displayed when the chance button 136 is operated six times, and FIG. 353 (w) is nine times the chance button 136. FIG. 353 (x) is displayed when the chance button 136 is operated 12 times. In this embodiment, the display mode of the continuous hitting effect continuously changes corresponding to the operation of one chance button 136, but the display mode of the continuous hitting effect changes according to the predetermined number of operations. (In the case of the present embodiment, the state of FIG. 353 (u) is displayed when operated three times from the display of the unoperated state (FIG. 353 (t)), and the operation is performed six times In this case, the display of FIG. 353 (v) may be displayed).

  Subsequent to FIG. 353 (x), in FIG. 353 (y), the reception period of the button operation is ended, and in the following FIG. 353 (z), the display of “drop button continuously!”, The operation means image 208i and the operable period Erase the image 208 j.

  Following FIG. 353 (z), in FIG. 353 (A), a display is made where Yoshimune cuts in the effect display area 208 d, and in the subsequent FIGS. 353 (B), 353 (C) and 353 (D) Display how to win. In addition, in FIG. 353 (D), the fluctuation | variation display in which the decorative symbol currently displayed on the corner part 733 is displayed shaking is performed. In this embodiment, since it is determined that the display after FIG. 353A is executed by the effect lottery, the operation of the chance button 136 is determined in advance before the reception period of the button operation ends. Even when the number of times (for example, 20 times) is not detected, the effects after FIG. 353A are executed. In addition, when the number of times determined in advance is not detected, an effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 353A or later may be performed.

  Subsequent to FIG. 353 (D), in FIG. 354 (E), the display in the effect display area 208 d, the fluctuation variation display of the decorative symbol in the corner portion 733 is erased, and thereafter, in the subsequent FIG. In the area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the fluctuation variation display of the decorative symbol is performed.

  Following FIG. 354 (F), in FIG. 354 (G), stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c, and the fourth symbol region for special drawing 1 is displayed. At 731a, the fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed, and at the first special symbol display device 212, the special figure A shown in FIG. 341 (a) is displayed. After that, in the following FIG. 354 (H), “probable variation big hit” is displayed in the effect display area 208 d.

FIGS. 355 (C) ′ to (J) ′ are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in order following FIG. 353 (B).
This example is an example of “super reach A loss” in which the success / failure determination result is out (special image F) and the variation time is 40000 ms.

  Here, an example will be described in which, from the state shown in FIG. 353 (B), the process proceeds to FIG. 355 (C) ′ without advancing to the state shown in FIG. 353 (C). This example is an example when Yoshimune loses.

  Following FIG. 355 (C) ′, FIG. 355 (D) ′ shows a state in which Yoshimune defeated. In FIG. 355 (D) ′, a swing fluctuation display is performed in which the decorative symbol displayed in the corner portion 733 is displayed while swinging.

  Subsequent to FIG. 355 (D) ′, the display in the effect display area 208 d and the display in the corner portion 733 are erased in FIG. 355 (E) ′, and then the left symbol display area 208 a in FIG. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the fluctuation variation display of the decorative symbol is performed.

  Further, although not shown in FIG. 354 (F), in FIG. 355 (F) ′, a special icon 1 reserved icon display area 732 a and a variation icon display area 734 displaying an icon are displayed, and FIG. Similar icons 732aa and 732ab are displayed.

  Following FIG. 355 (F) ′, in FIG. 355 (G) ′, the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed in the left symbol display region 208 a, the middle symbol display region 208 b and the right symbol display region 208 c. The stop display of the fourth symbol for special drawing 1 is performed in the symbol area 731a, and the special symbol display shown in FIG. 341 (a) is displayed in the first special symbol display device 212.

  In FIG. 355 (H) ′ following FIG. 355 (G) ′, FIG. 355 (I) ′ following FIG. 355 (H) ′, and FIG. 355 (J) ′ following FIG. The icon 732aa, which is an icon indicating a game, is gradually erased. In FIG. 355 (H) ′, the icon 732aa starts to fall, and in FIG. 355 (I) ′, most of the icon 732aa is lowered and disappears, and in FIG. 355 (J) ′ all the icons 732aa are completely deleted. Be done.

  FIGS. 356 (t) ′ ′ to (H) ′ ′ are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in order following FIG. 353 (s).

FIG. 357 (I) ′ ′ is a view showing a specific example of the effect by the display in the decorative symbol display device 208 subsequent to FIG. 356 (H) ′ ′.
This example is an example of “per super reach B” in which the success / failure determination result is a probability variation big hit (special figure A) and the variation time is 65000 ms.

  Here, an example will be described in which, from the state shown in FIG. 353 (s), the process proceeds to FIG. 356 (t) ′ ′ without advancing to the state shown in FIG. 353 (t). This example is an example of a case where Yoshimune wins a counter attack after being attacked by a swordsman.

  Subsequent to FIG. 353 (s), in FIG. 356 (t) ′ ′, acceptance of button operation of the chance button 136 is started, and from this point on, blackening of the horizontal width of the operable period image 208j starts to decrease.

  In FIG. 356 (u) ′ ′ continued to FIG. 356 (t) ′ ′, and in FIG. 356 (v) ′ ′ continued to FIG. 356 (u) ′ ′, Yoshimune gradually pushes the sword in the effect display area 208 d indicate.

  In FIG. 356 (w) ′ ′ continued to FIG. 356 (v) ′ ′, and in FIG. 356 (x) ′ ′ continued to FIG. 356 (w) ′ ′, how the swordsman gradually pushed back Yoshimune in the effect display area 208 d indicate.

  Subsequent to FIG. 356 (x) ′ ′, the reception period of the button operation ends in FIG. 356 (y) ′ ′, and the operation means image 208i and the operable period image 208 j are erased in the subsequent FIG. 356 (z) ′ ′ .

Subsequent to FIG. 356 (z) ′ ′, in FIG. 356 (A) ′ ′, the swordsman makes a cutting display in the effect display area 208d.
In the present embodiment, it is determined that the display after FIG. 356 (A) ′ ′ is to be executed by the effect lottery, so the operation of the chance button 136 is one or until the reception period of the button operation is ended. The effects in FIG. 356 (A) ′ ′ and subsequent steps are also executed when a plurality of times are not detected. In addition, when the number of times determined in advance is not detected, an effect different from the effect shown in FIG. 356 (A) ′ ′ may be performed.

  Following FIG. 356 (A) ′ ′, in FIG. 356 (B) ′ ′, “Yoshimune” is displayed in the effect display area 208 d and a display prompting the player's operation “Press the button and have a counter attack!” Is displayed. Do. In FIG. 356 (C) ′ ′ continued to FIG. 356 (B) ′ ′, the operation means image 208i and the operable period image 208j are displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  Subsequent to FIG. 356 (C) ′ ′, in FIG. 356 (D) ′ ′, acceptance of the button operation of the chance button 136 is started, and from this point on, the black filling of the horizontal width of the operable period image 208j starts to decrease. In FIG. 356 (E) ′ ′ continued to FIG. 356 (D) ′ ′, the decrease in black of the horizontal width of the operable period image 208j continues.

Subsequent to FIG. 356 (E) ′ ′, in FIG. 356 (F) ′ ′, the operation of the chance button 136 is detected, and the jackpot production is started. In the effect display area 208d, the effect for the jackpot is displayed as "killing" and a display in which Yoshimune is cutting is performed, followed by FIG. 356 (G) '', FIG. 356 (H) '', FIG. 357 (I) ''. 'Shows how Yoshimune wins. In FIG. 357 (I) ′ ′, a swing fluctuation display is performed in which the decorative symbol displayed in the corner portion 733 is displayed while swinging. The subsequent steps are the same as in FIG. 354 (E) and thereafter.
In this embodiment, it is determined that the display after FIG. 356 (F) ′ ′ is executed by the effect lottery, and when the operation of the chance button 136 is detected during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, Alternatively, after the acceptance period of the operation of the chance button 136 is over, the jackpot effect is started. When the operation of the chance button 136 is not detected during the reception period of the chance button 136, a display different from that shown in FIG. 356 (F) ′ ′ (for example, the effect for the loss of FIG. 358 (F) ′ ′ After that, an effect (resurrection effect) to be a big hit may be displayed.

  FIG. 358 (E) ′ ′ ′ ′ to (G) ′ ′ ′ are diagrams showing specific examples of effects by the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in order following FIG. 356 (D) ′ ′.

Here, an example will be described in which the state shown in FIG. 356 (D) ′ ′ is advanced to FIG. 358 (E) ′ ′ without advancing to the state shown in FIG. 356 (E) ′. This example is an example of a case in which Yoshimune loses under attack by a swordsman.
This example is an example of “super reach B loss” in which the success / failure determination result is a loss (special figure F) and the variation time is 60000 ms.

  Subsequent to FIG. 356 (D) ′ ′, in FIG. 358 (E) ′ ′ ′, the decrease in black of the horizontal width of the operable period image 208j continues.

Subsequently to FIG. 358 (E) ′ ′ ′, in FIG. 358 (F) ′ ′ ′, the operation of the chance button 136 is detected, and the operation means image 208 i and the operable period image 208 j are erased; Following ́ ′ ′, FIG. 358 (G) ′ ′ ′ shows how Yoshimune defeated. In FIG. 358 (G) ′ ′ ′, a fluctuation variation display is performed in which the decorative symbol displayed in the corner portion 733 is displayed while being shaken. The subsequent steps are the same as in FIG. 355 (E) ′ and thereafter.
In the present embodiment, it is determined that the display after FIG. 358 (F) ′ ′ is executed by the effect lottery, and the operation of the chance button 136 is detected during the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 Or, after the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 is ended, the effect for the loss is started.

  359 (t)-(B) are figures which show the example of the effect by the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in order following on FIG. 353 (s).

  Here, an example will be described in which, from the state shown in FIG. 353 (s), the process proceeds to FIG. 359 (t) without advancing to the state shown in FIG. 353 (t). This example is an example when the player does not operate the button.

  Subsequently to FIG. 353 (s), in FIG. 359 (t), acceptance of button operation of the chance button 136 is started, and from this time point, the black filling of the horizontal width of the operable period image 208 j starts to decrease.

  Figure 359 (u) following Figure 359 (t) Figure 359 (v) following Figure 359 (u), Figure 359 (w) following Figure 359 (v) Figure 359 (x) following Figure 359 (x) In the case of), the time elapses without accepting the button operation, and in the effect display area 208d, Yoshimune and the swordsman continue to meet each other at the central position. Note that even if there is no button operation by the player, it may be displayed that Yoshimune is gradually pushing the swordsman.

  Subsequent to FIG. 359 (x), in FIG. 359 (y), the acceptance period of the button operation is ended, and in the subsequent FIG. 359 (z), the display of “drop button continuously!”, The operation means image 208i and the operable period Erase the image 208 j.

  Subsequent to FIG. 359 (z), in FIG. 359 (A), in the effect display area 208 d, display is performed in which Yoshimune pushes out the swordsman.

  Subsequent to FIG. 359 (A), in FIG. 359 (B), a display is made where Yoshimune cuts in the effect display area 208 d, and thereafter, the same as in FIG. 353 (B) or later. In addition, following to FIG. 359 (z), you may advance to FIG. 359 (B), without performing the display of FIG. 359 (A).

  <Specific example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and effect by the chance button 136>

  FIGS. 360 (a) to 360 (f) are diagrams showing a specific example of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect by the chance button 136 in order. This example is an example of effecting that the player can not operate the chance button 136 during the period from the beginning to the middle of the period for accepting the button operation.

  As shown in FIG. 360 (a), the chance button 136 has a button portion 136a operated by the player and an edge 136b of the surrounding area of the chance button 136.

  In FIG. 360 (a), the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 is in a state of projecting beyond the edge portion 136b.

  In FIG. 360 (b) following FIG. 360 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a conversational effect and a button effect. For example, the character (Yoshimune) 208 e is displayed in the effect display area 208 d and the remarks thereof are displayed (conversation effect), and the operation means image 208 g imitating the above-mentioned chance button 136 operable by the player and the chance button 136 An operable period image 208 h representing a period during which the user can operate is displayed (button effect). The operation means image 208g includes, for example, an image 208ga which is an image imitating the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 and an image 208gb which is an image imitating an edge portion 136b of the surrounding area of the chance button 136.

  The operable period image 208 h initially displays an image in which the entire width is blacked out, and decreases the width of blacking as the period in which the chance button 136 can be operated decreases.

  Subsequently to FIG. 360 (b), in FIG. 360 (c), acceptance of button operation of the chance button 136 is started, and from this time point, the black filling of the horizontal width of the operable period image 208 h starts to decrease. Here, the flip-flop 100 drives the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 by the drive circuit 522 to make the button portion 136a concave than the edge portion 136b, thereby generating a state in which the player can not operate. Since the player is depressed when trying to operate the button portion 136a, the player may be more interested in the effect. In the present embodiment, after acceptance of the button operation is started, the button portion 136a is driven to be recessed from the edge portion 136b, but the button portion 136a may be driven simultaneously with the acceptance of the button operation. . In addition, while the button portion 136a is driven, the operation of the chance button may not be received, but the operation may be received.

  Subsequently to FIG. 360 (c), in FIG. 360 (d), the period during which the chance button 136 can be operated is reduced, and the operable period image 208h has a reduced width of black compared to FIG. 360 (c). doing. Also at this time, the button portion 136a is still recessed from the edge portion 136b, and the player can not operate it.

  Subsequent to FIG. 360 (d), in FIG. 360 (e), the pachinko machine 100 drives the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 to project the button portion 136a beyond the edge portion 136b so that the player can operate it. Generate a state. The player may look at this and operate the button portion 136a more positively. When the button operation of the chance button 136 is received, as shown in FIG. 360 (f), "a chance is !!" is displayed as a speech 208k of the character 208e in the effect display area 208d. After that, the same effect as in FIG. 352 (k) or later is performed.

  361 (a)-(e) are figures which show the example in the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the effect by the chance button 136 in order. This example is an example of effecting that the player can not operate the chance button 136 in the period from the middle to the end of the period for accepting the button operation.

  In FIG. 361 (a), acceptance of button operation of the chance button 136 is started, and from this time point, the black filling of the horizontal width of the operable period image 208h starts to decrease. In this example, at this point in time, the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 protrudes beyond the edge 136b, and the player can operate.

  Subsequently to FIG. 361 (a), in FIG. 361 (b), the period during which the chance button 136 can be operated is reduced, and the operable period image 208 h has a reduced width of black compared to FIG. 361 (a) doing. Thereafter, if the player does not yet perform the button operation, the process proceeds to FIG. 361 (c).

  In FIG. 361 (c), the pachinko machine 100 drives the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 to make the button portion 136a recessed relative to the edge portion 136b, causing the player to make the state inoperable.

Continuing to FIG. 361 (c), in FIG. 361 (d), the button operation acceptance period ends with the button portion 136a recessed below the edge 136b and the player can not operate, and the left symbol In the display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol is variably displayed. At this time, the pachinko machine 100 drives the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 so that the button portion 136a protrudes beyond the edge portion 136b.
In this embodiment, the operation of the chance button is received from the start of receiving the operation of the button until the button portion 136a is driven, and the button effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, the character 208e in the effect display area 208d). The effect of displaying "CHANNEL !!" is displayed as the remark 208k. Further, while the button portion 136a is driven, the operation of the chance button is not accepted. Note that the operation of the chance button may not be accepted during a period from when the button operation acceptance is started to when the button unit 136a is driven. In addition, the operation of the chance button may be received while the button unit 136 is being driven.

  FIG. 362 (a)-(f) is a figure which shows the specific example of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, and the presentation by the chance button 136 in order. This example is an example of effecting that the player can not operate the chance button 136 in the middle of the period of accepting the button operation. FIG. 362 (g) is a diagram showing an example of presentation when a button operation is accepted from the beginning until a state in which the chance button 136 can not be operated is started in a period of accepting the button operation. . FIG. 362 (g) 'is a diagram showing an example of effects when a button operation is accepted after the state in which the chance button 136 can not be operated is ended within the period of accepting the button operation until the end. is there.

  In FIG. 362 (a), the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 is in a state of projecting beyond the edge portion 136b.

  In FIG. 362 (b) following FIG. 362 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a conversational effect and a button effect. For example, the character (Yoshimune) 208 e is displayed in the effect display area 208 d and the remarks thereof are displayed (conversation effect), and the operation means image 208 g imitating the above-mentioned chance button 136 operable by the player and the chance button 136 An operable period image 208 h representing a period during which the user can operate is displayed (button effect). The operation means image 208g includes, for example, an image 208ga which is an image imitating the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 and an image 208gb which is an image imitating an edge portion 136b of the surrounding area of the chance button 136.

  The operable period image 208 h initially displays an image in which the entire width is blacked out, and decreases the width of blacking as the period in which the chance button 136 can be operated decreases.

  In FIG. 362 (b), acceptance of the button operation of the chance button 136 is started, and from this point on, the black filling of the horizontal width of the operable period image 208h starts to decrease. In this example, at this point in time, the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 protrudes beyond the edge 136b, and the player can operate.

  Subsequently to FIG. 362 (b), in FIG. 362 (c), the period during which the chance button 136 can be operated is reduced, and the operable period image 208 h has a reduced width of black compared to FIG. 362 (b) doing. Thereafter, when the player does not yet perform the button operation, the process proceeds to FIG. 362 (d).

  In FIG. 362 (d), the pachinko machine 100 drives the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 to make the button portion 136a recessed relative to the edge portion 136b, generating a state in which the player can not operate.

  Subsequently to FIG. 362 (d), in FIG. 362 (e), a period in which the chance button 136 can be operated while the button portion 136a is recessed from the edge 136 b and the player is unable to operate. Is reduced, and the operable period image 208 h has a reduced width of black compared to FIG. 362 (d).

  Following FIG. 362 (e), in FIG. 362 (f), the pachinko machine 100 drives the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 to project the button portion 136a beyond the edge portion 136b so that the player can operate. Generate a state.

  If the button operation is accepted from the beginning of the period for accepting the button operation until the state where the chance button 136 can not be operated is started (period before the FIG. 362 (d)), As shown in g), in the effect display area 208d, the message 208k of the character 208e is displayed as "chance is !!". After that, the same effect as in FIG. 352 (k) or later is performed.

  In addition, when the button operation is accepted during the period from the end of the state in which the chance button 136 can not be operated within the period for accepting the button operation to the end (period after FIG. 362 (e)), As shown in 362 (g) ', in the effect display area 208d, the message 208k of the character 208e is displayed as "super hot!" After that, the same effect as in FIG. 352 (k) or later is performed.

  The effect when a button operation is received in a period before FIG. 362 (d) is more reliable than the effect when a button operation is received in a period after FIG. 362 (e) (for example, a big hit is won) The degree of reliability is low. The reliabilities may be reversed and the reliabilities may be the same.

  In this example, different effects are performed in the case where the button operation is received in the period before FIG. 362 (d) and in the case where the button operation is received in the period after FIG. 362 (e) However, the same effect may be performed without making the effect different. Further, while the button portion 136a is being driven, the operation of the chance button 136 may not be received, but the operation of the chance button 136 may be received while the button portion 136a is being driven.

  FIGS. 363 (a) to 363 (h) are diagrams showing a specific example of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect by the chance button 136 in order. This example is an example of effecting that the player keeps the chance button 136 in a depressed state during the continuous hitting of the chance button 136 so that the player can not operate.

  FIG. 363 (a) is a state corresponding to FIG. 353 (t) shown above. In FIG. 363 (a), acceptance of the button operation of the chance button 136 is started, and from this time point, the black painting of the horizontal width of the operable period image 208j starts to decrease. Further, at this time, in the pachinko machine 100, the button portion 136a is made to project beyond the edge portion 136b, and a state in which the player can operate is generated.

  In FIG. 363 (b) following FIG. 363 (a) and FIG. 363 (c) following FIG. 363 (b), the effect display area 208 d displays a state where Yoshimune is gradually pushing the sword player, and the player A continuous hit is performed by pressing the unit 136a continuously.

  In FIG. 363 (d) following FIG. 363 (c), the number of times the player has pressed the button portion 136a (the number of button operations) has reached a predetermined number of times (N times, for example 10 times) The pachinko machine 100 drives the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 and keeps the button portion 136a recessed from the edge portion 136b when a predetermined time (N seconds, for example 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start). Cause the player to be inoperable. Since the player remains depressed in the middle of hitting the button portion 136a continuously, the player may be more interested in the effect.

  In FIG. 363 (e) following FIG. 363 (d), FIG. 363 (f) following FIG. 363 (e), and FIG. 363 (g) following FIG. 363 (f), the button portion 136a is concave than the edge portion 136b. Leave it as it is and Yoshimune gradually approaches the swordsman side in the effect display area 208d.

  In FIG. 363 (h) continued from FIG. 363 (g), the button operation acceptance period ends, and thereafter, the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 is driven to make the button portion 136a project beyond the edge portion 136b.

The button portion 136a may be recessed relative to the edge portion 136b when the player has operated the button one or more times (when a button operation has been received).
In addition, when the number of button operations by the player reaches N times, the button portion 136a is recessed from the edge 136b, and when the number of button operations by the player does not reach N times, the button portion 136a May be recessed from the edge 136b.
When the player does not perform the button operation, the button portion 136a may not be recessed from the edge 136b.
Even when the player does not operate the button, the button portion 136a is recessed relative to the edge 136b when a predetermined time (N seconds, for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the reception period of the button operation. You may do so.
In the present embodiment, the control for recessing is performed at any one of a plurality of triggers (in the present embodiment, the number of depressions and the passage of time), but only one trigger is set. It may be made to be carried out, and it may be made to perform control to dent when two or more of a plurality of motives are satisfied.

  FIGS. 364 (e) ′ to (f) ′ are diagrams showing specific examples of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect by the chance button 136 in order subsequently to FIG. 363 (d). In this example, the chance button 136 is depressed while the player is continuously hitting the chance button 136, and the effect that the reception period of the button operation is ended while the depression is kept is performed.

  Following FIG. 363 (d), in FIG. 364 (e) ', in the effect display area 208 d, Yoshimune gradually pushes in the sword but does not lead to pushing, and the button portion 136a remains recessed from the edge 136b, In FIG. 364 (f) following FIG. 364 (e) ', the reception period of the button operation is ended while the button portion 136a is recessed from the edge 136b.

  FIGS. 364 (f) ′ ′ to (g) ′ ′ are diagrams showing specific examples of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect by the chance button 136 in order subsequently to FIG. 364 (e) ′. In this example, the chance button 136 is depressed while the player is repeatedly hitting the chance button 136, and then the chance button 136 is returned, so that the player can hit again and again.

  In FIG. 364 (f) ′ ′ in FIG. 364 (e) ′, in the effect display area 208d, Yoshimune gradually depresses the sword and drives the button portion 136a of the chance button 136, and the button portion 136a Is protruded more than the edge 136 b. In FIG. 364 (g) ′ ′ continued to FIG. 364 (f) ′ ′, Yoshimune gradually pushes the sword in the effect display area 208d, returns to the state before indenting the button portion 136a, and can be continuously hit again It becomes a state and continues production.

  FIGS. 365 (a) to (i) are diagrams showing a specific example of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect by the chance button 136 in order following FIG. 356 (z) ′ ′. In this example, for example, a proximity sensor (not shown) is provided in the vicinity of the chance button 136, and a configuration capable of detecting that the player brings the hand close to the chance button 136 is employed. This is an example of performing an effect.

  FIG. 365 (a) is a state corresponding to FIG. 356 (A) ′ ′, and in this state, the button portion 136a protrudes further than the edge portion 136b.

  Continuing to FIG. 365 (a), in FIG. 365 (b), the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 is driven to make the button portion 136a recessed relative to the edge 136b.

  Continuing to FIG. 365 (b), in FIG. 365 (c), with the button part 136a recessed from the edge 136b, in the effect display area 208d, "Please hold your hand over the button and take out the recessed button!" Display to prompt the player's operation. In FIG. 365 (d) following FIG. 365 (c), FIG. 365 (e) following FIG. 365 (d), and FIG. 365 (f) following FIG. 365 (e), the button portion 136a is recessed relative to the edge portion 136b. In the effect display area 208d, the display of "Please put your hand over the button and take out the recessed button!" Is erased, and instead "3", "2", "1" is displayed, and the countdown is performed. .

  Subsequent to FIG. 365 (f), in FIG. 365 (g), the proximity sensor detects that the player holds his hand, and drives the button 136a of the chance button 136 as a trigger to trigger the button 136a. Is protruded more than the edge 136 b. Note that the button portion 136a may be projected beyond the edge portion 136b when the predetermined period elapses without detecting that the player holds his hand with the proximity sensor. In this case, the proximity sensor may not be provided.

  Following (g) in FIG. 365, in (h) in FIG. 365, in the effect display area 208d, “counterattack start” is displayed, and the process proceeds to FIG. 365 (i). FIG. 365 (i) corresponds to FIG. 356 (C) ′ ′, and thereafter proceeds in the same manner as FIG. 356 (C) ′ ′ and later.

  FIGS. 366 (f) 'to (l)' are diagrams showing a specific example of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect by the chance button 136 in order subsequently to FIG. 365 (e). In this example, for example, a proximity sensor (not shown) is provided in the vicinity of the chance button 136, and a configuration capable of detecting that the player brings the hand close to the chance button 136 is employed. This is an example of performing an effect. This example is an example in the case of failing without being able to fight back, and the player may hold this hand when the proximity sensor can not detect this because the player did not hold his hand. Even if the proximity sensor can detect the object, this effect may be performed, or the effect may be performed without providing the proximity sensor.

  FIG. 366 (f) 'is a state corresponding to FIG. 365 (f). In this state, the button portion 136a is recessed from the edge portion 136b.

  Subsequent to FIG. 366 (f) ′, in FIG. 366 (g) ′, the countdown in the effect display area 208d ends, and the button portion 136a remains recessed from the edge 136b.

  Subsequent to FIG. 366 (g) ', in FIG. 366 (h)', in the effect display area 208d, "Sorry ..." and a display indicating that Yoshimune lost or did not win the jackpot do. At this time, the button portion 136a remains recessed from the edge 136b. At this point in time, the button portion 136a may be returned and projected beyond the edge portion 136b.

  Subsequent to FIG. 366 (h) ′, in FIG. 366 (i) ′, the fluctuation variation display of the decorative symbol is performed at the corner 733 of the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the button portion 136a remains recessed from the edge 136b. At this point in time, the button portion 136a may be returned and projected beyond the edge portion 136b.

  366 (j) 'following FIG. 366 (i)' corresponds to FIG. 355 (E) '. At this time, the button portion 136a is returned and made to project beyond the edge 136b. Thereafter, FIG. 366 (k) ′ continued to FIG. 366 (j) ′ corresponds to FIG. 355 (F) ′, and FIG. 366 (l) ′ continued to FIG. 366 (k) ′ corresponds to FIG. It corresponds to At this time, the button portion 136a remains protruded more than the edge portion 136b. Note that the timing of returning the button portion 136a may be after (or immediately after) the symbol stop ((3661 ') in FIG. 366), or may be simultaneous with the symbol stop.

  367 (c) to (g) are diagrams showing a specific example of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect by the chance button 136 in order subsequently to FIG. 365 (b). This example is an example of an effect that displays in the effect display area 208 d in accordance with the state of the chance button 136.

  FIG. 367 (c) is a state following FIG. 365 (b). In FIG. 367 (c), in the effect display area 208d, in addition to the display in FIG. 365 (c), an image 208na which is an image imitating the button portion 136a and an image 208nb which is an image imitating the edge portion 136b are displayed Do. In FIG. 367 (c), the button portion 136a is recessed from the edge portion 136b, and the image 208na is displayed in a recessed state relative to the image 208nb in the effect display area 208d according to the state of the chance button 136 .

In FIG. 367 (d) following FIG. 367 (c), FIG. 367 (e) following FIG. 367 (d), and FIG. 367 (f) following FIG. 367 (e), the button portion 136a is recessed from the edge portion 136b. In the effect display area 208d, the display of "Please put your hand over the button and take out the recessed button!" Is erased, and instead "3", "2", "1" is displayed, and the countdown is performed. . In the effect display area 208d, the image 208na is displayed in a state of being recessed from the image 208nb.
In the effect display area 208d, the operable period image 208h may be displayed while the image 208na and the image 208nb are displayed. Here, the display mode of the operable period image 208 may not be changed, for example, all blacked (a state where the meter is not decreased, that is, the same display as the start of the reception period or the start time) It may be all white (in the state where the meter has decreased completely, that is, the same display as when the reception period is over).
The same image as the operable period image 208 may be displayed in parallel with the countdown display, and the display mode may be changed in accordance with the countdown effect. The display mode may be changed according to the countdown effect by an image different from the operable period image 208.
Note that the countdown may be performed with the same image as the operable period 208 or a different image.

  Following FIG. 367 (f), in FIG. 367 (g), the proximity sensor detects that the player holds his hand up, and drives the button portion 136a of the chance button 136 as a trigger to trigger the button portion 136a. Is protruded more than the edge 136 b. In response to this, in the effect display area 208d, the image 208na is displayed in a state of being projected more than the image 208nb.

  367 (d) 'to (f)' are diagrams showing a specific example of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect by the chance button 136 in order subsequently to FIG. 367 (c). In this example, the button portion 136a is gradually protruded as the countdown is performed, and an effect simulating the state of the button portion 136a is performed so that the image 208na is also protruded accordingly.

  FIG. 367 (d) ′ is a state following FIG. 367 (c). In FIG. 367 (d) ', the button portion 136a is recessed deeper than the edge portion 136b, and in accordance with the state of the chance button 136, the effect display area 208d is displayed with the image 208na recessed deeper than the image 208nb. doing.

  FIG. 367 (e) ′ is a state following FIG. 367 (d) ′. In FIG. 367 (e) ′, the button portion 136a is raised stepwise than that in FIG. 367 (d) ′, and the image 208na is shown in FIG. 367 (d) in the effect display area 208d according to the state of the chance button 136. It is displayed in the state raised above '.

  FIG. 367 (f) ′ is a state following FIG. 367 (e) ′. In FIG. 367 (f) ′, the button portion 136a is raised stepwise than that in FIG. 367 (e) ′, and the image 208na is shown in FIG. 367 (e) in the effect display area 208d according to the state of the chance button 136. It is displayed in the state raised above '. After FIG. 367 (f) ′, the process proceeds to FIG. 367 (g).

  FIG. 367 (g) 'is a view showing a specific example of the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect by the chance button 136 following FIG. 367 (f). In this example, the chance button 136 remains depressed even after the countdown is completed.

  FIG. 367 (g) 'is a state following FIG. 367 (f).

Following FIG. 367 (f), in FIG. 367 (g) ', the proximity sensor does not detect that the player holds his hand, and keeps the button 136a recessed from the edge 136b. In response to this, in the effect display area 208d, the image 208na is displayed in a state of being recessed from the image 208nb. Even when the proximity sensor detects that the player holds the hand, the button portion 136a is kept recessed from the edge 136b, and the image 208na is recessed from the image 208nb in the effect display area 208d. You may display it.
The state of FIG. 367 (g) ′ may be obtained after the state of FIG. 367 (f) ′. In this case, the button portion 136a performs an operation of returning from the raised state of FIG. 367 (f) to the same recessed state as FIG. 367 (c).

The image 208na and the image 208nb may be displayed in a state different from that of the button portion 136a and the edge portion 136b. For example, while the button portion 136a is raised stepwise as shown in FIG. 367 (d) 'to (f)', the image 208na continues to display the image in the recessed state of FIG. 367 (d). Or vice versa.
As for the position of the button portion 136a, FIG. 367 (d) 'is the first position (recessed state), FIG. 367 (e)' is the second position, and FIG. 367 (f) 'is the third position. 367 (g) is the fourth position (default position), the movement from the first position to the fourth position is controlled to be performed stepwise as in this embodiment. It may be In this case, the button portion 136a may be stopped at the second position and / or the third position. Further, control may be performed so as to move continuously from the first position to the fourth position. In this case, the second position and the third position are arbitrary positions between the first position and the fourth position, and pass when the button portion 136a moves from the first position to the fourth position. Position.

<Operation of operation means and first part>
Next, the operation of the operation means and the first component according to the present invention will be described. It should be noted that even if the operations of the operation means and the first part are the same action, the operation which makes the player follow by operation by the player and the operation means and the first part itself by the drive means (not shown) Both of the actions to be performed.

  FIG. 368 is a front view showing an example of the operation of the operation means and the first part according to the present invention, wherein (a) to (b) show the order of movement of each part when the operation means is pressed It is an example.

  The operation unit 1700 is, for example, a unit including operation means that plays the same role as the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1, and in this first embodiment, the operation means 1701 and parts around the operation means 1701. And a first part 1702. The top of the first part 1702 is a first portion 1702a, and the top of the operating means 1701 is a second portion 1701a.

  As shown in FIG. 368 (a), when the operation means 1701 is not operated (for example, pressed), the second portion 1701a is at a higher position than the first portion 1702a.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 368 (a), when the operation means 1701 is operated in the first case, the second portion 1701a is positioned higher than the first portion 1702a.

  In the first case, when the operation means 1701 is operated, the second portion 1701a may be at the same position (the same height) as the first portion 1702a, and the first portion 1702a It may be at a lower position than that.

  FIG. 369 is a front view showing an example of the operation of the operation means and the first part according to the present invention, wherein (a) to (c) are examples showing the movement order of the operation means and the first part is there.

  From the state shown in FIG. 369 (a), the operation part 1701 may not move, and the first component 1702 may move up continuously to shift to the state shown in FIG. 369 (b). In FIG. 369 (a), the second portion 1701a is located higher than the first portion 1702a. In FIG. 369 (b), the second portion 1701a is at a lower position than the first portion 1702a.

  There is also a pattern that moves stepwise, and as the first step, from the state shown in FIG. 369 (a), the operation unit 1701 does not move, and the first part 1702 moves continuously upward; Move to the state shown in c). In FIG. 369 (c), the second portion 1701a is at the same height as the first portion 1702a. As a second step, the operation part 1701 does not move from the state shown in FIG. 369 (c), and the first component 1702 moves up continuously to shift to the state shown in FIG. 369 (b).

  In the first stage, the first portion 1702a may be higher than the second portion 1701a, and the second portion 1701a is at a lower position than the first portion 1702a (FIG. 369 (b)). It may be lower than).

  Also, the stepwise movement is not limited to two stages, and may be three or more stages.

  FIG. 370 is a front view showing an example of the operation of the operation means and the first part according to the present invention, and (a1) to (a6), (b1) to (b13), (c1) to (a6) Is an example showing an order of movement of each part. Here, an example is shown in which the first part 1702 returns to its original position after movement.

First, examples of FIGS. 370 (a1) to (a6) will be described.
When the player operates (presses down) the operation means 1701, the operation means 1701 is lowered to be in the states shown in FIG. 370 (a1) and FIG. 370 (a2). After that, in a state where the player does not release the operation means 1701 (Fig. 370 (a3)), the operation means 1701 remains at the position where the hand is put.
After that, when the player releases the hand from the operation means 1701 (Fig. 370 (a4)), as shown in Fig. 370 (a5), the operation means 1701 ascends to the same height as the first part 1702 and then One part 1702 is lowered, and the operation surface of the operation means 1701 is positioned higher than the first part 1702 as shown in FIG. 370 (a6).

Next, examples of FIGS. 370 (b1) to (b5) will be described.
When the player operates (depresses) the operation means 1701, the operation means 1701 is lowered to be in the states shown in FIG. 370 (b1) and FIG. 370 (b2). After that, even when the player does not release the operation means 1701, the operation means 1701 ascends to the same height as the first component 1702 as shown in FIG. 370 (b3).
Thereafter, when the player releases the hand from the operation means 1701 (FIG. 370 (b4)), the operation means 1701 is slightly raised, and the operation surface of the operation means 1701 is positioned higher than the first part 1702. Thereafter, the first part 1702 descends, and as shown in FIG. 370 (b5), the operation surface of the operation means 1701 becomes higher than the first part 1702.

Next, examples of FIGS. 370 (b1), (b2), and (b6) to (b9) will be described.
When the player operates (depresses) the operation means 1701, the operation means 1701 is lowered to be in the states shown in FIG. 370 (b1) and FIG. 370 (b2). After that, even if the player does not release his hand from the operation means 1701, the operation means 1701 is slightly raised to such an extent that it does not go as high as the first component 1702, as shown in FIG. 370 (b6).
Thereafter, when the player releases the hand from the operation means 1701 (FIG. 370 (b7)), the operation means 1701 is slightly raised, and the operation surface of the operation means 1701 becomes the same height as the first component 1702. After that, the first part 1702 descends, and the operation surface of the operation means 1701 becomes higher than the first part 1702 as shown in FIGS. 370 (b8) and 370 (b9) in order.

Next, examples of FIGS. 370 (b1), (b2), (b10) to (b13) will be described.
When the player operates (depresses) the operation means 1701, the operation means 1701 is lowered to be in the states shown in FIG. 370 (b1) and FIG. 370 (b2). After that, even if the player does not release his hand from the operation means 1701, the operation means 1701 is slightly raised to such an extent that it does not go as high as the first component 1702, as shown in FIG. 370 (b6).
Thereafter, the player releases the hand from the operation means 1701 (FIG. 370 (b11)), the operation means 1701 and the first part 1702 are raised by the same amount, and then the first part 1702 is lowered, The operation surface of the operation means 1701 is at the same height as the first part 1702 (FIG. 370 (b12)). The first part 1702 is further lowered, and the operation surface of the operation means 1701 becomes higher than the first part 1702, as shown in FIG. 370 (b13).

Next, examples of FIGS. 370 (c1) to (c6) will be described.
In FIG. 370 (c1) to (c4), the operation surface of the operation means 1701 is lower than the first part 1702. Thereafter, in FIG. 370 (c5), the first part 1702 descends, and the operation surface of the operation means 1701 becomes the same height as the first part 1702. Subsequently, the first part 1702 is further lowered, and the operation surface of the operation means 1701 is positioned higher than the first part 1702, as shown in FIG. 370 (c6).

  FIG. 371 is a front view showing an example of the operation of the operation means according to the present invention, and (a1) to (a6) and (b1) to (b3) are examples showing the movement order of the operation means.

First, examples of FIGS. 371 (a1) to (a3) will be described.
When the player operates (presses down) the operating means 1701, the operating means 1701 is lowered, and the states shown in FIGS. 371 (a1), 371 (a2) and 371 (a3) are in order. The operation means 1701 may be temporarily stopped at each stage of FIG. 371 (a1), FIG. 371 (a2) and FIG. 371 (a3), or may be lowered smoothly.

Next, examples of FIGS. 371 (a1), (a2), (a4), and (a3) will be described.
When the player operates (presses) the operating means 1701, the operating means 1701 is lowered, and the states shown in FIGS. 371 (a1), 371 (a2), 371 (a4), and 371 (a3) are in order. The operation means 1701 may be temporarily stopped at each stage of FIG. 371 (a1), FIG. 371 (a2), FIG. 371 (a4) and FIG. 371 (a3) or may be lowered smoothly.

Next, examples of FIGS. 371 (a1), (a2), (a5), and (a6) will be described.
When the player operates (depresses) the operation means 1701, the operation means 1701 is lowered, and the states shown in FIG. 371 (a1) and FIG. 371 (a2) are in order. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 371 (a5), when the player releases the operation means 1701, the operation means 1701 is further lowered as shown in FIG. 371 (a6).

Next, examples of FIGS. 371 (b1) and (b2) will be described.
371 (b1) (The operation surface of the operating means 1701 is higher than the first part 1702) in the state where the player does not operate, the operating means 1701 is lowered, FIG. 371 (b2) (operating the operating means 1701) The surface is lower than the first part 1702).

Next, examples of FIGS. 371 (b1), (b3) and (b2) will be described.
371 (b1) (The operation surface of the operating means 1701 is higher than the first part 1702) in the state where the player does not operate, the operating means 1701 is lowered, FIG. 371 (b3) (operating the operating means 1701) 371 (b2) (the operation surface of the operating means 1701 is lower than the first part 1702).

  FIG. 372 is a front view showing an example of the operation of the operation means according to the present invention, and (a1) to (a6) and (b1) to (b3) are examples showing the movement order of the operation means.

First, examples of FIGS. 372 (a1) and (a2) will be described.
When the player operates (presses down) the operation means 1701, the operation means 1701 is lowered and is in the state shown in FIG. 372 (a1) (the operation surface of the operation means 1701 is lower than the first part 1702). After that, the operating means 1701 is raised by the driving means even if the player is touching the hand, and the state shown in FIG. 372 (a2) (the operating surface of the operating means 1701 is higher than the first part 1702) is obtained. .

Next, examples of FIGS. 372 (a1), (a3), and (a2) will be described.
When the player operates (presses down) the operation means 1701, the operation means 1701 is lowered and is in the state shown in FIG. 372 (a1) (the operation surface of the operation means 1701 is lower than the first part 1702). Thereafter, the operating means 1701 is raised by the driving means even if the player is touching the hand, and the state shown in FIG. 372 (a3) (the operating surface of the operating means 1701 and the first part 1702 have the same height) become. After that, the operating means 1701 is raised by the driving means even if the player is touching the hand, and the state shown in FIG. 372 (a2) (the operating surface of the operating means 1701 is higher than the first part 1702) is obtained. .

Next, examples of FIGS. 372 (a1), (a4), and (a5) will be described.
When the player operates (presses down) the operation means 1701, the operation means 1701 is lowered and is in the state shown in FIG. 372 (a1) (the operation surface of the operation means 1701 is lower than the first part 1702). After that, even if the player releases the hand, the operation means 1701 does not move as it is, and the state shown in FIG. 372 (a4) (the operation surface of the operation means 1701 and the first part 1702 have the same height) Become. After that, the operating means 1701 is lifted by the driving means, and is in the state shown in FIG. 372 (a5) (the operating surface of the operating means 1701 is higher than the first part 1702).

Next, examples of FIGS. 372 (a1), (a4), (a6), and (a5) will be described.
When the player operates (presses down) the operation means 1701, the operation means 1701 is lowered and is in the state shown in FIG. 372 (a1) (the operation surface of the operation means 1701 is lower than the first part 1702). After that, even if the player releases the hand, the operation means 1701 does not move as it is, and the state shown in FIG. 372 (a4) (the operation surface of the operation means 1701 and the first part 1702 have the same height) Become. Thereafter, the operation means 1701 is lifted by the drive means, and is in a state shown in FIG. 372 (a6) (the operation surface of the operation means 1701 and the first component 1702 have the same height). After that, the operating means 1701 is lifted by the driving means, and is in the state shown in FIG. 372 (a5) (the operating surface of the operating means 1701 is higher than the first part 1702).

Next, examples of FIGS. 372 (b1) and (b2) will be described.
372 (b1) (the operation surface of the operating means 1701 is lower than the first part 1702), the operation means 1701 goes up, and the operation of the operating means 1701 is performed. The face is shown as being higher than the first part 1702).

Next, examples of FIGS. 372 (b1), (b3) and (b2) will be described.
372 (b1) (the operation surface of the operating means 1701 is lower than the first part 1702), the operation means 1701 is raised, and the operation of the operating means 1701 is performed. The surface and the first part 1702 are at the same height, as shown in FIG. 372 (b2) (the operation surface of the operation means 1701 is higher than the first part 1702).
In addition, it may be made to control as follows in relation to the operation of the operation means and the first part.
(1) In the case where the operation means (for example, the button portion 136a) is automatically recessed (when the operation surface of the operation means is lowered below the first part by the drive means) The lamp (for example, the chance button lamp 138) in the operating means emits light when transitioning from the operating plane higher than the first part to the recessed state (the operating plane of the operating means higher than the first part) It may be controlled to In this case, the luminescent color may be the same as in the normal state, or may be a different color. Also, the luminance may be the same as that in the normal state, or may be different.
When changing from the normal state to the recessed state, the lamp in the operation means may be controlled not to emit light (turned off).
(2) Power on operation (initial operation)
When the power is turned on, the operation unit (for example, the button section 136a) may perform the power on operation. Also, the operation means may not perform the power on operation.
For example, the power-on operation of the button unit 136a may include an origin return operation for returning the position of the button unit 136a to the initial position, and sensor detection for confirming that the position of the button unit 136a is detected by a sensor A confirmation operation may be included, and an operation (full stroke operation) may be included in which the button portion 136a is moved to the maximum movable position. Also, the power-on operation may indicate the above three operations, or any one or two operations, or any one or more of the above three and others. One or more actions may be indicated. The power-on operation may indicate one or more operations other than the above three operations.
When the sensor does not detect that the button portion 136a has been operated during the power-on operation, the operation of recessing may be performed again (hereinafter referred to as "retry operation"). Although the retry operation may be performed one or more times, the retry operation may not be performed when there is a sensor non-detection of the button portion 136a during the power-on operation. In addition, if the sensor does not detect the operation of the button portion 136a even after performing the specified number of times (one or more times) of retry operations during the power on operation, the power is turned off and the button is turned on unless the power is turned on again. The 136a may not be operated. If the sensor non-detection of the button portion 136a is detected during the power-on operation, the power may be turned off and the button 136a may not be operated unless the power is turned on again (in this case, the control of the retry operation is performed). It may not be performed, and control to execute the retry operation may not be installed). In addition, even when the sensor non-detection of the button portion 136a due to the power on operation is performed, the control to operate at the next operation timing may be executed.
· A state in which the button unit 136a does not operate (for example, when the sensor is not detected in the button unit 136a during the power-on operation, or when the sensor is not detected after the retry operation has been performed a specified number of times) In the case where effects are generated when the means for driving is broken etc.), when the effect that the button portion 136a is depressed is executed, the same display as when the button portion 136a is operated in the effect display area 208d (for example, “image The display of the state in which 208na is more recessed than the image 208nb may be performed. In addition, when the effect that the button portion 136a is depressed is executed when the button portion 136a is not in operation, the display different from that when the button portion 136a is operated is displayed in the effect display area 208d ( Display a display to notify that there is a “display different from the button display” or “display with the image 208na recessed from the image 208nb” larger or smaller, or lighter or darker than when the button portion 136a operates ) May be performed. In addition, when the button portion 136a is not in operation, the effect that the button portion 136a is depressed may not be performed.
(3) When the operation means (for example, the button portion 136a) is recessed after passing through a plurality of steps (when the operation surface of the operation means is lowered below the first part by the drive means)
The third position (e.g., the button portion 136a is recessed) through the second position from the first position (e.g., the first position (e.g., the initial position of the button portion 136a)). When recessed to the position), the distance from the first position to the second position and the distance from the second position to the third position may be equally spaced. Further, the distance from the first position to the second position may be longer or shorter than the distance from the second position to the third position. Note that there may be two or more stages between the first position and the third position. Also in this case, the distances between the respective positions may be equal intervals or non-equal intervals. When the button portion 136a is recessed through a plurality of steps, all of the plurality of steps may be in the depression detection state, a part of the plurality of steps may be in the depression detection state, and the remaining may be in the depression non detection state . When the button portion 136a is in a recessed state, a command indicating that a sensor is detected may be discarded.
(4) If the control means discards the command detected when the operation means (for example, the button portion 136a) is in a recessed state, but the control means has input the command, The same process as when the button portion 136a is pressed (for example, the effect after the button operation is performed) may be performed. In addition, when the control for indenting the button portion 136a is performed, the command by the sensor detection of the chance button 136 may be not received but discarded.
(5) Multiple chance buttons 136
Although only one chance button 136 may be provided, a plurality of chance buttons may be provided.
The first chance button of the plurality of chance buttons may be a button that performs an operation that is recessed relative to the edge 136b, and the second chance button may be a button that does not perform an operation that is recessed relative to the edge 136b . The first chance button and the second chance button may perform the same operation (for example, the chance button pressing effect) regardless of which button is pressed. For example, when the first chance button is in a dented state when the effect A (for example, the effect display after button operation and the light emission of the LED) which is the chance button pressing effect is executed, the second chance button When A is pressed, the effect A may be executed, but the effect A may not be executed, and effects other than the effect A may be executed. An effect corresponding to only one of the first chance button and the second chance button may be executed.
An image imitating the first chance button on the display means (hereinafter referred to as the first chance button image) in a period in which the second chance button operation is received (hereinafter referred to as the second chance button operation reception period) ) May be displayed before the start of the operation acceptance period of the second chance button, and then an image resembling a second chance button (hereinafter, a second chance button image) may be displayed. At this time, the second chance button image may be displayed after the first chance button image is deleted, and the first chance button image may be erased (fade out) and the second chance button image may be displayed. (Fade in) may partially overlap. Also, although the first chance button image may be depressed after the first chance button image is displayed, it may be depressed before the first chance button image is displayed, You may make it dent simultaneously with the display of a chance button. In such a case, even if the first chance button is pressed, it is actually depressed and can not be pressed, so it may be possible to surprise the player who operated the first chance button.
The first chance button and / or the second chance button pops out to a position projecting beyond the normal position (initial position), and the first chance button performs a recessed motion relative to the edge 136 b It is also good. During the transition to the recessed state and / or the protruding state, the operation of the chance button may not be accepted, but the operation of the chance button may be accepted. Also, the second chance button may be depressed. In addition, at this time, for each movement of the first chance button and / or the second chance button, “opportunity button depression effect shown in the second itemized list of“ (5) multiple chance buttons 136 ”in this section The implementation of "is applicable.
(6) When the door is in the open state before the power on operation by the retry operation / power on operation / operation means of the operation means (for example, the button portion 136a) in the door open state is started, the power on operation is performed You may not do. In this case, the power-on operation of the operation means may be performed after the door is closed, but the power-on operation of the operation means may not be performed. In addition, the other effect means provided on the part (for example, game board) which the player can not touch when the door is closed may execute the power on operation even while the door is open, but the power is turned on while the door is open. It is possible not to operate. In addition, the other effect means provided on the part (for example, the door) to which the player can touch when the door is closed may not perform the power on operation while the door is open, but the power on operation is performed while the door is open. You may
The same applies to the retry operation.
(7) Summary of Button Effects In the case where the effect is drawn from the initial position of the chance button by the effect lottery, it may be as follows.
-When the operation reception period of the chance button is started before the chance button becomes depressed, the display according to the operation (for example, 208 k in FIG. 352 (j)) when the operation is performed before the depression. ("Chance is !!"), 208k in Fig. 360 (f) ("Chance is !!"), 208k in Fig. 362 (g) ("Chance is !!"), 208k in Fig. 362 (g) "It's super hot!", Double shot effect in Figure 353 (u)-(y), Double shot effect in Figure 356 (u) '-(y)', Figure 356 (F) '~ Figure 357 (I ) Display of effects for the big hit including 'sussatsu' of '', effects for the loss of FIG. 358 (E) '' to (G) '', and battering effects of FIG. 363 (a) to (c)) Although it may be done, it may not be displayed.
-When the operation reception period of the chance button is invalid in the state where the chance button is depressed, if the operation is performed before the depression, the display corresponding to the operation (for example, 208 k in FIG. The chance is !! ”), 208k in Figure 360 (f) (“ Chance is !! ”), 208k in Figure 362 (g) (“ Chance is !! ”), 208k in Figure 362 (g) It is!!), Continuous hitting effect in Figure 353 (u) ~ (y), continuous hitting effect in Figure 356 (u) '~ (y)', Figure 356 (F) '~ Figure 357 (I)' The effects for the big hit including the 'skilled' of ', the effects for the loss in FIGS. 358 (E) ′ ′ ′ to (G) ′ ′ ′ and the continuous hit effects in FIGS. 363 (a) to (c) are not displayed.
-If there is an operation before the chance button is depressed, the chance button may be depressed. Here, when the chance button is in a depressed state and during the operation reception period, the effective period of the chance button may be continued, but the operation reception period is interrupted and the operation of the chance button is invalidated. The operation reception period may be resumed when the chance button returns to the initial position. In addition, in the case of executing the depression effect of the chance button, the operation of the chance button may be invalidated.
-If there is an operation before the chance button is depressed, the chance button may not be depressed.
If the operation is performed before the chance button is depressed, the chance button may not be returned from the depressed condition (the condition operated by the player), and the continuation may be depressed.
If the operation is performed before the chance button is depressed, the chance button may be depressed after being returned from the depressed condition (the condition operated by the player).
In the case where the effect drawn from the initial position of the chance button is not executed by the effect drawing,
・ If the operation was performed before the operation reception period, the display corresponding to the operation (for example, 208 k (“Chance is !!” in FIG. 352 (j), 208 k (“Chance !!) in FIG. 360 (f) "), 208k in Fig. 362 (g) (" Chance is !! "), 208k in Fig. 362 (g) (" Extremely! "), And in Fig. 353 (u) to (y), Fig. 356 (U) Continuous-hit effects from '' to (y) '', effects for big hit including 'dead' from FIG. 356 (F) 'to FIG. 357 (I)', FIG. 358 (E) 'from' (G) The effect for the loss of '', the continuous hitting effect of FIG. 363 (a) to (c)) is not displayed.
・ If the operation was performed during the operation reception period, the display corresponding to the operation (for example, 208 k (“Chance is !!” in FIG. 352 (j), 208 k (“Chance !!) in FIG. 360 (f) "), 208k in Fig. 362 (g) (" Chance is !! "), 208k in Fig. 362 (g) (" Extremely! "), And in Fig. 353 (u) to (y), Fig. 356 (U) Continuous-hit effects from '' to (y) '', effects for big hit including 'dead' from FIG. 356 (F) 'to FIG. 357 (I)', FIG. 358 (E) 'from' (G) The effect for the loss of '', the continuous hitting effect of FIG. 363 (a) to (c) is displayed.
-If there is no operation during the operation reception period, a display according to the operation after the end of the operation reception period (for example, 208k ("Chance is !!" in FIG. 352 (j), and 36 208k ("Chance is !!"), 208k in Fig. 362 (g) ("Chance is !!"), 208k in Fig. 362 (g) ("Extremely!"), Fig. 353 (u) ~ (y) 356 (u) '' to (y) '', 356 (F) '' to FIG. 357 (I) ''. (E) '' to '' (G) '' for the loss of the '' for the loss of Figure 363 (a)-(c) continuous hit production) is not displayed, but the same as the display according to the operation after the end of the operation reception period Indication (for example, 208k ("Chance is !!" in FIG. 352 (j), 208k in Fig. 360 (f) ("Chance! !), 208k in Fig. 362 (g) ("Chance is !!"), 208k in Fig. 362 (g) ("Extremely!"), In Fig. 353 (u) to (y) 356 (u) ′ ′-(y) ′ ′ continuous-stroke effects, FIG. 356 (E) ′ ′ ′ ′ ′ ′ s. ~ (G) '' for loss for effect, continuous shot effect of Figure 363 (a) ~ (c) may be displayed, and a display different from the display according to the operation is displayed May be
-Here, the operation reception period may be the operation valid period or the operable period.
(8) The operation means image and the operation reception period / operation means image (operation means image 208i) changes from an image simulating an initial state to an image imitating a dented state when the operation means is in a recessed state You may In addition, the change of two images may be performed by animation, and may be performed by switching of two images. In the operation means image (operation means image 208i), when the operation means is in a recessed state, an image imitating an initial state may be displayed as it is.
-The operation means image may also serve as a display of the operation acceptance period (operable period image 208j), for example, a display mode (for example, changing a color, gradually erasing, etc.) of a part of the operation means image The acceptance period of the operation means may be displayed by changing it.
The display for prompting the operation (for example, the display of “Please hit the button continuously in FIG. 353 (s)”) may also be the display of the operation reception period (operable period image 208 j). The reception period of the operation means may be displayed by changing the mode (for example, changing the color, gradually erasing, etc.).

<Structure of chance button unit and chance button mounting unit>
FIG. 373 is an exploded perspective view of the chance button 136 according to the present invention.
In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned chance button 136 is the chance button unit 700 of FIG.
The mounting unit 701 in FIG. 373 is mounted to the front frame door 106 described above, and the chance button unit 700 can be mounted to the mounting unit 701.
A harness 716 described later is for connection to a connector of a substrate provided on the front frame door 106.
The chance button 136 includes a chance button unit 700, a chance button attachment unit 701, and a harness 716 described later.
The chance button unit 700 includes a frame member 702, a button cover 703, a button member 704, a lens member 705, an LED substrate 706, a base member 707, a driven member 708, a pedestal member 709, and a trunk member 710. And.
The chance button attachment unit 701 includes a cover member 711, an LED substrate 712, a body member 713, a fixing member 714, and a bottom member 715.
FIG. 374 is a perspective view of the chance button unit 700 shown in FIG. The structure of the chance button unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 373 and 374.
The chance button unit 700 is formed by screwing the lower portion of the frame member 702 and the upper portion of the body member 710, and the button cover 703, the button member 704, the lens member 705, and the LED substrate 706 are formed therein. A base member 707, a driven member 708, and a pedestal member 709 are accommodated.
The frame member 702 is a cylindrical member which is made of, for example, a resin, and has an edge portion 702a protruding to the inner diameter side at the upper portion thereof.
The button cover 703 is made of, for example, a transparent resin, and has a shape in which the cup is inverted. The button cover 703 has an edge portion 703 a projecting to the outer diameter side at the lower portion thereof. By accommodating the button cover 703 from the lower side of the frame member 702, the edge portion 703a is caught on the edge portion 702a, and the button cover 703 does not come off above the frame member 702.
The button member 704 is made of, for example, a transparent resin, and has a shape in which the cup is inverted similarly to the button cover 703, and the button cover 703 is put on the upper portion.
Since the player can directly touch the button cover 703, the player may grab the button cover 703 and forcibly move it up and down. Even if this is done, in order to prevent the internal mechanism of the chance button unit 700 from being affected, in the present embodiment, the button cover 703 is not interlocked with other members (only other components are placed. And fixing members such as screws, etc.) are configured to be able to move up and down alone. At this time, if there is no path for air to flow in and out between the button cover 703 and the button member 704, the button cover 703 and the button member 704 are in close contact and it is difficult for the button cover 703 to move up and down alone. Become. In the present embodiment, the button member 704 is provided with a through hole 704a, and air can flow in and out between the button cover 703 and the button member 704 through the through hole 704a. Although the through holes 704 a are provided at four positions at 90 ° intervals on the upper portion of the button member 704, more through holes may be provided, or less through holes may be provided. It is not necessary to provide a through hole. Further, the shape of the button cover 703 and the shape of the button member 704 may be made different, and by making the shape different, smooth operation may be possible.
The lens member 705 is made of, for example, transparent resin, and has a lens 705a to change the optical path. The lens member 705 may be integrally formed with the button member 704.
The LED substrate 706 is, for example, a resin substrate, and a plurality of LEDs 706 a are mounted on the upper surface (surface, mounting surface). On the lower surface (rear surface), an IC 706e described later for driving the LED 706a and a connector 706ba described later for connecting a harness 706b described later for supplying power and instructing operation are provided.
The base member 707 is made of, for example, transparent resin, and holds the LED substrate 706. In the present embodiment, the lens member 705, the LED substrate 706, and the base member 707 are screwed and fixed. The base member 707 has a passage frame 707a forming a passage of the harness 706b.
The driven member 708 is, for example, a ring-shaped member made of resin and having a through hole 708a. The driven member 708 has a convex portion 708 b that protrudes (inwardly) in the through hole 708 a. The convex portions 708 b are provided in two places at an interval of 180 °. The lower surface of the driven member 708 has a cylindrical sliding concave bar 708c having a hole in the central axial direction. The sliding concave bars 708c are provided at two intervals of 180 °. Further, on the lower surface of the driven member 708, convex pieces 708d having convex pieces 708d are provided at two intervals of 180 °. In the driven member 708, the passage frame 707a of the base member 707 penetrates, and a through hole 708e which can move up and down is provided.
The pedestal member 709 is made of, for example, a resin, and has a rotational drive mechanism. The pedestal member 709 is provided with a motor 709d which is, for example, a stepping motor, and the rotation of the motor 709d is transmitted through a gear mechanism described later, and the shaft 709a provided on the upper surface of the pedestal member 709 is arbitrary in any direction. Rotate around the vertical direction by an angle. It is also possible to operate the chance button unit 700 to vibrate by the rotation of the motor 709d.
On the upper surface of the base member 709, at a position facing the sliding concave bar 708c of the driven member 708, a sliding convex bar 709b inserted into the hole of the sliding concave bar 708c is provided. The sliding convex rods 709 b are provided at two intervals of 180 °. The driven member 708 is configured to be vertically movable relative to the pedestal member 709 in a state where the sliding convex rod 709 is inserted into the hole of the sliding concave rod 708c. The sliding convex rod 709b is provided with a spring member 709c which is a spiral spring having a diameter larger than the hole of the sliding concave rod 708c and a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the sliding concave rod 708c. The driven member 708 is pushed up against the pedestal member 709.
On the upper surface of the base member 709, there is a passage frame 709e which forms a passage of the harness 706b which has come down through the passage frame 707a. The passage frame 707a and the passage frame 709e are disposed with a gap so as not to collide with each other. This gap is secured, for example, by mounting the base member 707 on the shaft portion 709a which penetrates the through hole 708.
A sensor 709f is provided on the upper surface of the pedestal member 709. The sensor 709f detects the vertical position of the convex piece 708d.
The body member 710 is, for example, a resin-made tubular member having a groove 710a at its lower portion, which will be described in detail later. The pedestal member 709 is screwed and fixed to the lower side of the body member 710.
Subsequently, the structure of the chance button attachment unit 701 will be described.
The cover member 711 is, for example, a flat member made of metal (having conductivity), and has a plurality of through holes 711 a and a clip portion 711 b extending downward.
The LED substrate 712 is, for example, a resin substrate and has a flat ring shape.
A plurality of LEDs 712 a are mounted on the upper surface (surface, mounting surface) of the LED substrate 712. The through hole 711 a of the cover member 711 is provided opposite to the position of the LED 712 a.
The body member 713 is, for example, a cylindrical member made of resin. A chance button unit 700 is accommodated in the body member 713 as described in detail later.
The fixing member 714 is a cylindrical member made of, for example, a resin. The fixing member 714 is a member for fixing the chance button unit 700 to the chance button mounting unit 701. The fixing member 714 has a lever member 714a facing outward in the circumferential direction, and the fixing member 714 is rotatable in the circumferential direction by operating the lever member 714a. By this rotation, the fixed state or the non-fixed state of the chance button unit 700 can be selected.
The fixing member 714 has, on the inner wall thereof, a convex portion 714 b that protrudes to the inner diameter side. The convex portions 714 b are provided at two intervals of 180 °. The convex portion 714 b is fitted into the groove 710 a of the trunk member 710 to fix the chance button unit 700 as described later in detail.
The fixing member 714 has on the outer wall thereof a convex portion 714c that protrudes to the outer diameter side. The convex portions 714 b are provided at one place.
The bottom member 715 is made of, for example, a resin, and has a tubular member provided with a bottom 715a. At the center of the bottom portion 715a, there is provided a cylindrical convex portion 715aa projecting upward.
At the top of the cylindrical portion of the bottom member 715, a notch 715b is provided in which the projection 714c fits when the fixing member 714 is accommodated. If the direction of the fixing member 714 is mistaken and the chance button mounting unit 701 is assembled, the fixing member 714 can not be accommodated well without the convex portion 714c being fitted in the notch portion 715b, so that an assembly error can be prevented. .
The cylindrical portion of the bottom member 715 is provided with a notch 715c for the lever member 714a of the fixing member 714 to be exposed from the outside when the fixing member 714 is accommodated in the bottom member 715. Further, from the cutout portion 715c, a cutout portion 715d for bringing out a harness 716 which will be described later in detail from the inside of the chance button attachment unit 701 is provided. In the vicinity of the cutout portion 715d, binding portions 718a and 718b for fixing the harness 716 or another harness are provided.

<Operation of the chance button unit>
FIG. 375 is a side view in which each state of the chance button unit 700 is viewed from the side, and FIG. 375A shows a state where no button operation (operation by the player) and button driving (driving by motor) (B) shows a state in which the player has pressed the button, and (c) shows a state in which the button is lowered to the lowermost position by the button drive.
FIG. 376 is a side view of each state of the chance button unit 700 viewed from the side, and (a) is a view showing a state in which the shaft 709a is slightly rotated from the default state, (b) is It is a figure which shows the state further rotated from (a), (c) is a figure which shows the state further rotated from (b), (d) is the state which lowered the button to the lowest position by button drive. FIG.
FIGS. 375 and 376 show a state in which the frame member 702, the button cover 703 and the body member 710 are removed. Further, the spring member 709 c is not shown.
The shaft portion 709a of the pedestal member 709 is composed of an upper shaft portion 709aa and a lower shaft portion 709ab which have different diameters. The upper shaft portion 709aa has an upper shaft portion central axis aab and a spiral step portion 709aaa having a large step diameter with a spiral step with respect to the upper shaft portion central axis aab. The lower shaft portion 709ab is larger in diameter than the upper shaft portion 709aa. The lower shaft portion 709ab has a lower shaft portion central axis abb and a helical step portion 709aba having a large step diameter with a helical step with respect to the lower shaft portion central axis abb. The upper side of the spiral step portion 709aaa has a large diameter step, and the lower side of the spiral step portion 709aba has a large diameter step. The outer periphery of the helical step portion 709aaa is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the lower shaft central axis abb.
The convex portion 708b of the driven member 708 is located below the step of the spiral step portion 709aaa. The convex piece 708d of the driven member 708 is located outside the outer periphery of the lower shaft central axis abb, and is located inside the outer periphery of the helical step portion 709aba.
When the player presses the button from the default state shown in FIG. 375 (a), the convex piece 708d contacts the spiral step portion 709aba, and the further pressing is inhibited. By this pressing, the button member 704 is moved down (recessed) by the distance α (see FIG. 375 (b)).
When the shaft portion 709a is rotated by the motor 709d from the default state of FIG. 375 (a), the spiral step portion 709aaa pushes down the projection 708b, and the projection 708d is such that the spiral step portion 709aba is spirally lowered. Because of this, it becomes possible to lower along the step of the spiral step portion 709aba. The convex piece 708d contacts the root of the shaft 709a, and any further drop is inhibited. This lowering causes the button member 704 to move downward (concave) by the distance γ (see FIG. 375 (c)).
Here, when the player performs a button operation in the state of FIG. 375 (a) (FIG. 375 (b)), the movement distance (distance α) is the state where the button is lowered to the lowermost position by button driving (FIG. 375). The distance β is shorter than the moving distance (distance γ) of (c). That is, the distance α <the distance γ, and the distance α <the distance β.
In addition, if the distance δ or more is moved from the default state of FIG. 375 (a), the sensor 709f can detect that the button has moved (or has been operated). Here, the distance δ <the distance α, the distance δ <the distance β, and the distance δ <the distance γ, but the distance α may be the distance δ. Also, two sensors are provided, and the distance α is smaller than the distance δ for one sensor, and the other sensor is set to the distance α> distance δ ′ (δ ′ is the distance detected by the other sensor). It is possible that the button operation is not detected by one of the sensors in the button operation, but can be detected by only the other sensor. Thereby, sensor detection by button operation and button drive can be made to differ, and the variation of production may be able to be increased.
When the shaft 709a is rotated by the motor 709d from the default state shown in FIG. 375 (a), the state shown in FIG. 376 (a) is obtained. In the state shown in FIG. 376 (a), the button member 704 is moved downward (recessed) by the same distance α as in FIG. 375 (b).
In the state of FIG. 376 (b), it can be seen that the convex piece 708d is guided to the step of the spiral step portion 709aba.
In the state of FIG. 376 (c), the induction by the step of the spiral step portion 709aba of the convex piece 708d is finished, and thereafter, the state of FIG. 376 (d) is reached.
FIG. 377 is a cross-sectional view of the chance button unit 700, (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 375 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. (C) is CC sectional drawing of FIG. 376 (b), (d) is DD sectional drawing of FIG. 376 (d).
When the convex piece 708d is lowered, the position of the sensor 709f on the upper surface of the pedestal member 709 is reached. Here, since reception of the button operation is invalid during a period in which the button is depressed due to the drive by the motor, it is not determined that the button operation is performed even if the convex piece 708d reaches the position of the sensor 709f. Further, the lowering degree of the convex piece 708d, that is, the lowering degree of the driven member 708 may be detected by the sensor 709f.
The reception of the button operation may be effective even during a period in which the button is depressed by the drive of the motor, and in this case, the button may be used as an automatic button. For example, in the case of detecting as a single operation, the button may be in a recessed state by driving with a motor, and return to the initial position in a predetermined period (for example, one second after the recessed state). The detection of the button operation by the operation of the button by the motor drive and the display of the detection result of the button operation by the manual operation (for example, the operation of the player) may be the same or different. The present invention is also applicable to other operations (e.g., long press and continuous hit operations). In addition, even when the operation is detected by driving by the same motor, an operation method (for example, a single press and a long press), an effect means for performing an effect, an effect (effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 ( When the same effect as manual operation is executed by the liquid crystal display device 208), effect movable body 224, speaker 120, frame lamp 122 (game stand frame lamp), chance button lamp 138, game board lamp 532 etc.) There may be a case where an effect different from the one described above may be executed. Thereby, there are cases where it is possible to increase variations of effects.
Also, when returning from the state of FIG. 376 (d) to the state of FIG. 376 (a), the state of the sensor 709 f is monitored, and due to some cause (for example, the player presses the chance button in the recessed state). If the state of FIG. 376 (a) is not returned, the retry operation (for example, the current position is returned to the recessed state (state of FIG. 376 (d)), and the default position (FIG. 376 (a)) An operation to return to) may be performed. Note that the retry operation may be repeatedly performed until it returns to the normal position (default position), and the number of repetitions may be limited times (one or more times) or may be infinite times. . In addition, the start timing of the retry operation is not limited to the timing when it is detected that the position has not returned to the normal position, but may be the start timing or the end timing of one or a plurality of predetermined changes. State (when the demo timer is started internally), or when the ball release handle 134 is released (in this case, it is detected that the ball release handle 134 is touched) It may be equipped with a sensor), or may be implemented by a combination of these. Also, the retry operation may be performed again at these timings after the retry operation failure or a combination of these timings.

<Arrangement of harness>
FIG. 378 is a view for explaining the arrangement of the harness, in which (a) is a side view of the chance button unit 700 in which the button is in a default state as viewed from the harness side; It is E sectional drawing and (c) is a figure corresponded to (b) in the state which the button fell.
In FIG. 378, a state in which the frame member 702, the button cover 703, and the body member 710 are removed is shown. Further, the spring member 709 c is not shown.
A connector 706ba is provided on the back surface of the LED substrate 706, and a connector 706bb provided at one end of the harness 706b is connected to the connector 706ba. The harness 706b extends downward along the passages in the passage frame 707a and the passage frame 709e. The passage frame 709e has walls in four directions and surrounds the four directions to form a passage, but the passage frame 707a does not have an outer wall but has a window. As a result, there is a possibility that the chance button unit 700 can be miniaturized (small in diameter) by avoiding collision with the wall of the passage frame 707a when the driven member 708 descends (see FIG. 378 (c)). . In the state shown in FIG. 378 (c), all the windows of the passage frame 707a are covered by the button member 704. The passage frame 707a may also have walls in four directions and surround the four directions to form a passage. Further, in the state of FIG. 378 (c), only a part of the passage frame 707a may be covered by the button member 704.

<Drive mechanism of shaft part>
FIG. 379 is a view for explaining the mechanism for rotationally driving the shaft portion 709a, and is a cross-sectional plan view of the pedestal member 709.
The motor 709d rotates the shaft 709g and rotates a gear 709j coaxial with the gear 709i via the gears 709h and 709i. The gear 709 j meshes with the gear 709 k and rotates the shaft 709 a provided on the shaft of the gear 709 k. The gear 709k and the shaft 709a may be integrally formed.

<Arrangement of LED>
FIG. 380 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement of the LEDs 706 a provided on the LED substrate 706, where (a) is a plan view in a state where the LED substrate 706 is fixed to the base member 707, and (b) is an LED substrate 706. FIG. 7C is a bottom view of the state in which the LED substrate 706 is fixed to the base member 707, and FIG. 7D is a bottom view of the LED substrate 706.
FIG. 381 is a perspective view showing how the base member 707 and the driven member 708 are combined.
Positioning of the base member 707 and the LED substrate 706 is performed by inserting a positioning projection 707c provided on the base member 707 into a positioning recess 706c (for example, a through hole) provided on the LED substrate 706.
The base member 707 and the LED substrate 706 are fixed by screwing with a screw hole 707 d at the position of the notch 706 d provided in the LED substrate 706.
In the LED substrate 706, the arrangement position of the LED 706a may be near the screw hole 707d. Moreover, the arrangement position of the LED 706a may be near the positioning recess 706c.
As shown in FIG. 381, in the driven member 708, the convex portion 708b is fixed by a screw 708b1. The base member 707 is provided with a through hole 707 b in order to avoid the projection of the screw 708 b 1. The base member 707 may be provided with one or more holes for avoiding other components such as the through holes 707 b. Also, a hole for avoiding other parts may not be provided in the base member 707. In the LED substrate 706, a hole may not be provided at a position facing the hole of the base member 707.
As shown in FIG. 380 (c), the IC 706e on the back surface of the LED substrate 706 may be visible from the through hole 707b.
FIG. 382 is a side sectional view for explaining the relationship between the through hole 707 b and the screw 708 b 1, in which (a) shows a default state and (b) shows a state in which the button is lowered by button drive. is there.
As shown in FIG. 382 (a), the upper end of the screw 708b1 may pierce through the through hole 707b, and the upper end of the screw 708b1 may reach above the surface of the through hole 707b, or the upper end of the screw 708b1 may penetrate It may be below the surface of the hole 707b.

<Accommodating Chance Button Unit 700 in Chance Button Mounting Unit 701>
FIG. 383 is a perspective view showing that the chance button unit 700 is accommodated in the chance button attachment unit 701. FIG.
In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned chance button 136 is the chance button unit 700 of FIG.
The mounting unit 701 in FIG. 373 is mounted to the front frame door 106 described above, and the chance button unit 700 can be mounted to the mounting unit 701.
A harness 716 described later is for connection to a connector of a substrate provided on the front frame door 106.
The chance button 136 includes a chance button unit 700, a chance button attachment unit 701, and a harness 716 described later.
The harness 716 may include, in addition to the harness 706 b connected to the LED substrate 706, a harness 709 m for driving the motor 709 and other harnesses.
The harness 716 passes through the inside of the chance button mounting unit 701 and exits from the notch 715 d. Further, the harness 716 is bundled and fixed by the binding portion 718a in the vicinity of the notch portion 715d. When the chance button unit 700 is accommodated in the chance button mounting unit 701, the harness 716 is slackened. By doing this, when the chance button unit 700 housed in the chance button mounting unit 701 is taken out, the harness 716 does not get in the way and can be easily taken out.
When the chance button unit 700 is housed in the chance button mounting unit 701, the slack harness 716 is guided to surround the convex portion 715aa at the bottom 715a of the bottom member 715 of the chance button mounting unit 701. This guidance is performed, for example, by the inner wall of the bottom member 715. That is, the harness 716 is guided to be stored downward along the inner wall of the bottom member 715.
Although the binding portion 718b can be used as one for collectively fixing other harnesses, it can also be used as a reserve for collectively fixing the harness 716. In addition, the binding portions 718a and 718b can be used as a combination of only the harness 716, but can also be used as a combination of the harness 716 and the other harnesses.

<Structure of Chance Button Mounting Unit 701>
FIG. 384 is a side view of the chance button mounting unit 701. FIG.
The chance button mounting unit 701 is fixed to the upper tray 126. As can be seen with reference to FIG. 1, the chance button 136 is inclined so that the player side is low and the island side is high. In response to this, the chance button mounting unit 701 is disposed so that the lever member 714a is on the island side, and at this time, the lever member 714a side is formed to be high and the other side is inclined to be low. This inclination may make it easier to take out the chance button unit 700 housed in the chance button attachment unit 701.
FIG. 385 is a plan view looking at the bottom 715 a of the chance button mounting unit 701.
The bottom 715a of the chance button mounting unit 701 is provided with a central convex portion 715aa of the bottom 715a, and the presence of the convex portion 715aa determines the destination of the slack harness 716, which is a space of the bottom 715a. In the form of a spiral. That is, the harness 716 is accommodated in the space created by the presence of the convex portion 715aa. If this space is not provided in the chance button attachment unit 701, the harness 716 may not be aligned and may be in a miscellaneous state, and the harness 716 may be damaged. In addition, when the harness 716 is not accommodated in the chance button attachment unit 701 and the harness 716 is assembled outside the chance button attachment unit 701, there is a possibility that the harness 716 may be damaged by contact with other parts.
In the present embodiment, the slack harness 716 is accommodated in a state in which the convex portion 715aa rotates one round, but is not limited to one round and may be less than a half round, may be a half round or more and less than one round, one round or more It may be The central convex portion 715aa of the bottom portion 715a can be formed of, for example, a shock absorbing member such as a sponge, and the shock absorbing member can absorb, for example, the vibration of the motor 709d.

<Fixing mechanism of chance button unit 700>
FIG. 386 is a plan sectional view for explaining the mechanism for fixing the chance button unit 700 housed in the chance button mounting unit 701, in which (a) shows the non-fixed state and (b) shows the fixed state. FIG.
In the state shown in FIG. 386 (a), the convex portion 714b of the fixing member 714 does not fit in the groove 710a of the trunk member 710, and the chance button unit 700 can be detached from the chance button attachment unit 701.
When the lever member 714a is operated and the fixing member 714 is rotated clockwise in the figure, the convex portion 714b is fitted in the groove portion 710a, and the chance button unit 700 can not be detached from the chance button attachment unit 701.
The lever member 714a can not be moved by attaching a fixing part (not shown), and the chance button attachment unit 701 is fixed to the chance button unit 700.

<Antistatic measures>
FIG. 387 is an enlarged perspective view showing the upper part of the chance button attachment unit 701. FIG.
The cover member 711 is, for example, a sheet metal member, and has clip portions 711 b extending downward at the corners thereof. The clip portion 711b has an elastic bent shape, and is pressed against a sheet metal (a sheet metal on the back side of the upper sheet 126) provided on the door 108 with a ball storage plate to electrically connect and remove the influence of static electricity. To be able to

<Fixing the chance button mounting unit 701>
FIG. 388 is a side view of FIG. 384 seen from the right.
The chance button mounting unit 701 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 717, and the screw (not shown) is inserted into the screw holes 717 so that the chance button mounting unit 701 is fixed to the upper plate 126.

Another Embodiment 1
FIG. 389 is a view showing another embodiment according to the present invention, in which (a) is a schematic side sectional view and (b) is a schematic plan sectional view of a second part 2702 of (a).
The present embodiment shows a game console provided with a first part 2701, a second part 2702 and a harness 2704 which is a connection part.
The first part 2701 is a part that is at least attachable (accommodatable) to the second part 2702, and the end 2704 a side of the harness 2704 is a side that can be at least arranged on the first part 2701, and the harness 2704 The end 2704 b side is a side that can be disposed at least on the second part 2702, and the end 2704 a side is when the first part 2701 is attached to the second part 2702 (when housed). The second component 2702 is a component at least provided with a wall portion 2703 which is a guiding portion, which is a side disposed at least at a position close to the end portion 2704b (hereinafter referred to as “first position”). is there.
When the first part 2701 is attached to the second part 2702 (when it is stored), the harness 2704 is slack, and the slack harness 2704 is guided to the wall 2703 of the second part 2702 to be stored.
Another Embodiment 2
FIG. 390 is a schematic side sectional view showing another embodiment according to the present invention.
In this embodiment, a game console comprising a first part 3701, a second part 3702, a harness 3704 as a connection part, and a third part 3705 connected to the first part 3701 by the harness 3704. Is an indicator of
The first part 3701 is a part that is at least attachable (accommodatable) to the second part 3702, and the connector 3704a at one end of the harness 3704 is at least locatable to the connector 3701a of the first part 3701 (connectable) And the connector 3704 b on the other end side of the harness 3704 is at least the side that can be placed (connectable) to the connector 3705 a of the third component 3705.
The harness 3704 passes through the second part 3702 after its one end (connector 3704a) is connected to the first part 3701 and then the other end (connector 3704b) is connected to the third part 3705 Be done.
The connector 3704a side is at least disposed at a position near the connector 3704b side (hereinafter referred to as a "first position") when the first part 3701 is attached to (stored in) the second part 3702. The second part 3702 is a part provided with at least a wall 3703 which is a guiding part.
When the first part 3701 is attached to the second part 3702 (when it is stored), the harness 3704 is slack, and the slack harness 3704 is guided to the wall 3703 of the second part 3702 to be stored.

<Application to slot machine>
The gaming machine according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 391 and corresponds to “a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of symbols and are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel Provided to stop the rotation of the reel individually, and based on the lottery result of the lottery means (lottery lottery internal lottery) to determine the success or failure of the internal winning of multiple types of winning combination by lottery Reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for performing stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination Determination means for determining whether or not the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination (prize determination processing), and when the stop mode of And dispensing control means for the game medium performs paying out game media payout processing of (medal payout process 1008), are also suitable for the slot machine 1000, "comprising.
The slot machine 1000 may be provided with an effect means 1010 for performing an effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means.
In addition, the effect means 1010 has entered the launcher 1014 for launching a ball into a predetermined game area 1012, the winning opening 1016 configured to be capable of entering the ball launched from the launching device, and the winning opening 1016. A detection means 1018 for detecting a ball, a payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a variable display device 1022 The variable display device 1022 has the symbol changed in response to the game ball entering the winning opening for winning by having the shutter 1024 movable to the shielding position and the movable body 1026 operating in the predetermined operation mode. It may be stopped and displayed later, and may be a rendering device that produces a game.
The slot machine 1000 may be provided with a chance button unit. The present invention is applicable to this chance button unit.
Note that the slot machine 1000 may be provided with a title panel. Here, the title panel may indicate a panel on which a model name is displayed and various kinds of certificate labels are attached. The title panel may be provided below the stop button 1006 (stop button unit). In this title panel, at least a part or all of the title panel may be a chance button unit, to which the present invention is applicable.
The present invention is applicable to the bet button unit of the slot machine 1000. Here, the bet button is a button for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as a credit) electronically stored in the slot machine 1010.

<Application to enclosed game machine>
The gaming machine according to the present invention is also applicable to an enclosed type gaming machine which cyclically uses gaming balls enclosed in a gaming machine.
For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and uses the enclosed sphere in circulation in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The payout of the ball may be made by credit.

<Supplementary Note 1>
In the present invention described above,
1.
Operation means (for example, button section 136a, button cover 703);
A first part (e.g., a chance button 136, a chance button unit 700, a door 108 with a ball storage tray);
A game console equipped with
The first part is a part provided with at least the operation means,
In the first case, the second portion (for example, the operation surface of the button portion 136a, the operation surface of the button cover 703) in the operation means is the first portion (for example, the edge portion 136b, At least higher than the edge 702a and the periphery 108a),
The second site is a site at least lower than the first site in the second case.
Because it was the game stand which was characterized,
It is possible to provide a game console characterized by an operation means.
Also, in some cases, the presence of parts having different positions may make it easier for the player to notice the surroundings of the operation means.
Note that
-"The site | part which exists in a position higher than the 1st site | part in said 1st components at least" may point out either of the site | parts as described in following (1)-(3).
(1) The first part has a plurality of parts including the first part,
· A site located higher than all sites including the first site in the first part,
· A region higher than the first region of the plurality of regions in the first part and lower than the third region of the plurality of regions in the first part,
(2) The first part is provided with only the first part,
・ A part located higher than only the first part in the first part,
(3) Other parts different from the first part are provided,
A site which is at a higher position than the first site of the first part and which is higher than the other sites of the other parts,
· A site which is at a higher position than the first site in the first part and which is at a lower position than the other sites in the other parts,
A site located higher than the first site of the first part, and located higher than the highest site of the plurality of parts including other parts
A site located higher than the first site in the first part and located lower than the highest site among the plurality of parts including other parts.
Note that
-"The site | part in a position lower than the 1st site | part in said 1st components at least" may refer to the site | part as described in following (1)-(3).
(1) The first part has a plurality of parts including the first part,
· A site located lower than all sites including the first site in the first part,
· A region higher than the first region of the plurality of regions in the first part, higher than the third region of the plurality of regions in the first region,
(2) The first part is provided with only the first part,
· A site located lower than only the first site in the first part,
(3) Other parts different from the first part are provided,
A site located lower than the first site in the first part and located lower than the other site in the other parts
A site located lower than the first site in the first part and located higher than the other sites in the other parts,
A site located lower than the first site in the first part, and located lower than the lowest site among the plurality of parts including other parts
A site located lower than the first site in the first part, and located higher than the lowest site among the plurality of parts including other parts.
Note that "at least lower than the first part" may be lower in the vertical direction, or may be rear (back) in the front-rear direction, with respect to the left-right direction It may be a position opposite to the initial position (for example, when the initial position is right, it slides to the left).
The second portion may be a portion lower than the other operation means provided at the periphery of the upper tray in the second case.
The second part may be a part located higher than other operation means provided around the upper tray in the first case, or a part located lower.
The second site may be a relatively higher site in the first case than in the second case, or vice versa.
The operation means is not limited to the chance button, but may be a lever, a handle, a touch panel or the like.
The present invention
2.
1. The game console described in,
At least a part of the operating means is at least movable.
The second case is a case where at least a part of the operating means has at least moved.
Because it was the game stand which was characterized,
The player may be made to pay attention to the operation means because a part of the operation means is configured to be movable.
・ It may be possible to surprise the player.
Note that
-"The at least one part of the said operation means" may be a thing as described in following (1)-(2).
(1)
・ "Only a part of the operation means",
(2)
・ "All of the operation means",
Note that
The “means configured to be movable at least” may be those described in the following (1).
(1)
A means provided with movable means (movable means, moving means) to the operation means.
The present invention
3.
1. Or 2. The game console described in,
At least a portion of the first part is a part configured to at least not move in the second case,
Because it was the game stand which was characterized,
In some cases, the presence of parts having different positions may make it possible for the player to easily notice the surroundings of the operation means.
Note that
-"The at least one part of the said 1st components" may be a thing as described in following (1)-(2).
(1)
・ "All of the first parts",
(2)
・ "Only part of the first part",
Note that
-The "part configured not to move at least" may be one described in the following (1) to (2).
(1)
・ "A part that can be fixed at least to any part"
(2)
· “At least not move” means, for example, screwed and unable to move, or movable but not moving (eg movable by rotation of motor but motor is stopped) Including the case).
The first part may be a part that does not move in the second case.
The present invention
4.
1. To 3. The game console according to any one of
The operation means is provided with an operation unit,
The operation unit is provided at least at a position where it can be operated by a player,.
The second portion is at least a part of the operation unit.
Because it was the game stand which was characterized,
The player may be surprised by the fact that the part operated by the player is movable.
Note that
The operating unit may be configured such that at least the operating unit is movable when operated by the player.
-"The at least one part of an operation part" may be a thing as described in following (1)-(4). (1)
・ "All of the operation part",
(2)
"A part on the side closer to the player (closest to the player) of the parts accessible to the player in the operation unit"
(3)
・ "Only a part of the operation unit",
(4)
-"A part where the player can contact in the operation unit".
The present invention
5.
1. To 4. The game console according to any one of
The second part in the first case is a part located at least higher than the first part when the operation means is operated by the player.
Because it was the game stand which was characterized,
The fact that the second part may be higher than the first part may make the player more surprised when the second part is lower than the first part. There are times when you can.
-There is a variation in the position of the second part, and it may be possible to prevent the player from getting bored.
Note that
-"The said 2nd site | part is at a position higher at least than a 1st site | part" may be a thing as described in following (1)-(3).
(1) The first part has a plurality of parts including the first part,
· Higher than all the parts including the first part in the first part,
Greater than the first of the plurality of parts of the first part and less than the third of the parts of the first part,
(2) The first part is provided with only the first part,
· Higher than only the first part of the first part,
(3) Other parts different from the first part are provided,
· A site located higher than the first site in the first part, and located higher than the other sites in the other parts
A site located higher than the first site in the first part and located lower than the other sites in the other parts
A site located higher than the first site in the first part, and located higher than the highest site of the plurality of parts including other parts
The site is located higher than the first site of the first part, and is located lower than the highest site of the plurality of parts including other parts.
The present invention
6.
1. To 5. The game console according to any one of
The operating means is a means provided with a driving means,
The second part of the operation means can be moved to a lower position than the first part of the first part by operating the driving means.
The game console, which is characterized by
The present invention
7.
6. The game console described in,
The second portion of the operating means is movable to a first distance by operating the operating means,
The second portion of the operation means is movable to a second distance by the operation of the drive means,
The second distance is a distance longer than the first distance,
The game console, which is characterized by
The present invention
8.
1. To 7. The game console according to any one of
The gaming machine is a pachinko machine,
The game console, which is characterized by
The present invention
9.
1. To 7. The game console according to any one of
The gaming machine is a slot machine,
The game console, which is characterized by
<< Others >>
Hereinafter, the configuration according to the present invention will be described. The present invention may have the configurations described below.
<<<< 1 >>> In the first case, the operation means is not moved.
-At least a part of the operating means is at least movable.
In the first case, at least a part of the operating means is not moved.
Note that
-"When at least one part of the said operation means is not moved" may be a thing as described in following (1)-(2).
(1)
"When only part of the operating means is not moved, and the other part of the operating means is moved"
(2)
・ When "the whole operation means is not moved".
Note that
Even in the first case, when the player operates at least a part of the operation means, at least a part of the operation means may be configured to be movable.
-At least a part (or all) of the first part may be configured to be at least movable in the first case.
-In any case, the first part may not move.
<<< part 2 >>> The first part is movable.
-At least a part of the first part is at least movable.
Note that
-"At least a part of the first part is configured to be at least movable" may be one described in the following (1) to (2).
(1)
"Only a part of the first part is configured to be movable, and the other part of the first part is configured to be immovable"
(2)
"All the first parts are configured to be movable".
Note that
-At least a part of the operation means may be configured not to move.
Here, "a structure so that at least one part of an operation means can not move" may be a thing as described in following (1)-(2).
(1)
・ "Composition so that the whole operation means can not move",
(2)
"A part of the operation means is configured so as not to move, and another part of the operation means is configured to be movable".
<<< 3 >>> The operation means is a button unit (for example, the chance button unit 700).
The operation means is a button unit,
・ The operation surface is the pressed surface of the button cover,
The second part is at least a part of the pressing surface of the button cover.
Note that
The "at least part of the pressed surface of the button cover" may be those described in the following (1) to (3).
(1)
・ "Whole of the pressing surface of the button cover",
(2)
・ "The part on the side closest to the player (close to the player) on the pressed surface of the button cover",
(3)
-"Only part of the pressing surface of the button cover".
Note that
-Of the button units, at least the button cover may be configured to be movable. The button unit may be provided with movable means, and the button cover may be at least movable by operation of the movable means.
<<< part 4 >>> The operating means is provided at a position adjacent to the first part.
· The operating means is provided adjacent to the first part (there may be other parts between the first part and the operating means, and the first part and the operating means are not in contact There is a case.).
Note that
The operating means may be provided at a position adjacent to the first part (the first part may be in contact with the operating means).
<<< part 5 >>> The operating means is attached to the first part.
The operating means is configured to be at least attachable to the first part.
Note that
The operating means may be configured to be at least fixable to the first part.
The first part is a part provided with a hole, and the operation means may be configured to be at least able to be stored in the hole of the first part.
The first part may be configured to surround the periphery of the operation means when the operation means is attached.
<<< 6 >>> The step of recessing is a plurality of steps.
The second part is in the first position in the first case.
The second part is, in the second case, in a second position lower than the first position.
The second part is in the third position in the third case.
The third position is a position between the first position and the second position.
Note that
The second part may move to the second position via the third position in the second case (moving continuously).
The second part may move to the third position in the third case. Also, it may be moved from the third position (in the standby state) to another position (for example, the second position).
The movable position of the second part may be a plurality of places (for example, three or more places).
The movable position of the second part may be only one (only the second position).
According to the invention
・ It may be possible to surprise the player.
-There are cases where it is possible to increase variations of effects and prevent the player from getting bored.

<Supplementary Note 2>
In the present invention described above,
1.
A first part (e.g., chance button unit 700, first part 2701, first part 3701);
A second part (e.g., a chance button mounting unit 701, a second part 2702, a second part 3702);
A harness (for example, a harness 716, a harness 2704, a harness 3704),
A game console equipped with
The first part is a part that can be accommodated at least in the second part,
The harness is housed below the first part of the second part,
One end side of the harness (for example, the connector 706bb side, the end 2704a side, the connector 3704a side) is a side that can be disposed at least on the first component,
The other end (for example, the binding portion 718a side, the end 2704b side, the connector 3704b side) of the harness is a side that can be disposed at least in the second component,
The second component is a component provided with at least a guiding portion (for example, the inner wall of the bottom member 715, the convex portion 715aa, the wall portion 2703 and the connector 3703),
The guiding portion is capable of at least guiding the harness.
The harness is guided to the guiding portion, and the harness is slackened and accommodated in the second part.
Because it was the game stand which was characterized,
A game console characterized by the mounting structure of parts can be realized.
-In addition, there are cases where the mounting of parts can be made smooth.
Note that
The one end side is a side at least disposed at a position near the other end side (hereinafter referred to as “first position”) when the first part is attached to the second part There may be
-The said induction | guidance | derivation part is provided in 2nd position,
There is a case.
The harness is, for example, a connection part.
Note that
The first part may be at least an attachable part adjacent to the second part.
The first part may be at least an attachable part adjacent to the second part.
-At least a part of the first part may be configured to be in contact with at least a part of the second part.
The harness may be a flexible cable.
The present invention
2.
1. The game console described in,
The length of the harness is longer than the height of the guiding portion,
Because it was the game stand which was characterized,
-By increasing the length of the connection part, it may be possible to easily guide the connection part to the guiding part when the part is attached.
Note that
The “length of connection part” may be “a length from one end of the connection part to the other end”.
"The length of the induction portion" may be "the length from one end of the induction portion to the other end".
The present invention
3.
1. Or 2. The game console described in,
The second part is a part provided with at least a wall,
The wall portion is a wall portion formed at least in a tubular shape,
The guiding portion is at least a part of the wall portion.
Because it was the game stand which was characterized,
-It may be possible to facilitate the installation of parts.
Note that
The first part may be configured to be surrounded by the cylindrical wall of the second part when the first part is attached to the second part. Although the wall portion may be further provided in the cylindrical wall portion, the present invention is not limited to this structure, and only the cylindrical wall portion may be provided.
The present invention
4.
1. Or 3. The game console according to any one of
The said induction | guidance | derivation part is a 1st induction | guidance | derivation part,
The second part is a part provided with at least a second guiding portion,
The second portion in the second guiding portion is a portion provided at least at a position facing at least the first portion in the first guiding portion.
Because it was the game stand which was characterized,
-It may be easy to guide connecting parts and it may be possible to mount parts smoothly.
-It may be possible to make it easy to guide the connecting parts and to prevent the connecting parts from being damaged when the parts are attached.
The present invention
5.
1. Or 4. The game console according to any one of
The second part is configured to be able to at least fix the first part,
Because it was the game stand which was characterized,
Fixing the part may prevent the unintentional removal of the first part and the connection part in some cases.
<< Others >>
Hereinafter, the configuration according to the present invention will be described. The present invention may have the configurations described below.
<<< part 1 >>> About connection with the first part.
The first part is a part connectable at least to one end of the connection part.
Note that
The first part may be a part that can not be connected at least to one end of the connection part.
The second component may be a component connectable at least to the other end of the connection component.
The second component may be a component that can not be connected at least to the other end of the connection component.
The first part may be a part connectable at least to the other end of the connection part.
The first part may be a part connectable to only one end of the connection part.
The first part may be a part connectable to both one end and the other end of the connection part.
The second part may be a part connectable at least to one end of the connection part.
The second part may be a part connectable only to the other end of the connection part.
The second part may be a part connectable to both one end and the other end of the connection part.
<<< part 2 >>> Connection parts are configured by a harness and a connector.
-Connection parts are harnesses.
The first connector is provided at one end of the harness.
A second connector is provided at the other end of the harness.
Note that
The first part may be a part that can at least connect the first connector.
The first part may be a part provided with a third connector capable of connecting at least the first connector.
The second component may be a component capable of at least connecting the second connector.
The second component may be a component provided with a fourth connector capable of at least connecting the second connector.
The first part may be a part provided with a hole capable of guiding the harness.
The second part may be a part provided with a hole capable of guiding the harness.
The first part may be a part that can not connect at least the first connector.
The first part may be a part not provided with a connector capable of connecting at least the first connector.
The second component may be a component that can not at least connect the second connector.
The second part may be a part not provided with a connector capable of at least connecting the second connector.
The first connector may have the same shape as the second connector.
The first connector may have a different shape than the second connector.
<<< part 3 >>> About the third part.
The first part is a part connectable to one end of the connection part.
The third part is a part connectable to the other end of the connection part.
The second part is a part capable of guiding the connecting part to the third part.
Note that
The third part may be a part to which at least the second connector can be connected.
The third component may be a component provided with a fifth connector capable of at least connecting the second connector.
The third part may be a part to which at least the first connector can be connected.
The third part may be a part provided with no connector capable of connecting at least the first connector.
The third part may be a part capable of guiding the connection part to another part (for example, a fourth part).
Note that
The "part" in the present embodiment may indicate "a unit formed of a plurality of parts".

  The aspects of the present embodiment are not limited to the above-described individual examples, but any combination of the individual elements of the individual examples is included in the present invention, and various modifications that can be conceived by those skilled in the art are also possible. The effects of the present embodiment are not limited to the contents described above. That is, various additions, modifications and partial deletions can be made without departing from the conceptual idea and spirit of the present invention derived from the contents defined in the claims and the equivalents thereof.

  It is possible to combine the matters described in the above detailed description, in particular the matters described in the embodiment and the modification.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed type game machine" is used to circulate and use the game balls enclosed in the game machine. That is, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine in which a sphere is enclosed and the enclosed sphere is circulated in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The payout of the ball may be made by credit.

  Also, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured in one chip, or even if the main control unit and the first sub-control unit allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bi-directional communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication. Moreover, what was called "a lamp" above is an example of a light emission means, and the "lamp" can substitute what light-emits lights, such as LED and a cold cathode publication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiment of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiment of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, the scope of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment to the other configuration.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball and ball gaming machine (pachinko machine).

100 Pachinko machine 136 chance button 208 decoration symbol display device 208a left symbol display area 208b middle symbol display area 208c right symbol display area 208d effect display area 208d1 special figure 1 reserve display area 208d 2 special figure 2 reserve display area 209 sub liquid crystal display 222 Status display lamp 226 General winning opening 228 General drawing starting opening 230 Special drawing 1 starting opening 232 Special drawing 2 starting opening 234 Variable winning opening 300 Main control unit 400 First sub control unit 500 Second sub control unit

Claims (10)

Display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays;
First operation means provided at a position operable by the player ;
Second operation means provided at a position operable by the player;
A game console equipped with
The second operation means is an operation means different from the first operation means,
Wherein one of the plurality of display is a first animation display relating to the first operating means,
Wherein one of the plurality of display is a second animation display relating to said second operating means,
One of the plurality of displays is a third animation display relating to the operating means of both the first operating means and the second operating means,
The first animation display, the display of image simulating said first operation means (hereinafter, referred to as "first display".) Is an animation display including,
The first animation display is an animation display not including a display of an image imitating the second operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The second animation is animation display including the second display,
The second animation display is an animation display not including the first display,
The third animation display is an animation display including the first display,
The third animation display is an animation display including the second display,
Wherein the second display in the third animation is configured to be performed later than the previous SL first display,
An operation by the first operation means is received in at least a partial period (hereinafter, referred to as a “first period”) in a period in which the first animation display is displayed,
The operation by the second operation means is received in at least a partial period (hereinafter referred to as a “second period”) in the period in which the second animation display is displayed,
While the first display in the third animation display is being displayed, the operation by the first operation means is not accepted,
An operation by the second operation means is received in at least a partial period (hereinafter, referred to as a “third period”) in a period in which the second display in the third animation display is displayed. ,
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
When the second display is performed, a big hit state is easier to be started than when the second display is not performed.
A game stand characterized by It is a game console according to claim 1 or 2,
The first animation display includes a first meter display whose aspect changes in the first period;
The second animation display includes a second meter display whose aspect changes in the second period;
The third animation display includes a third meter display whose aspect changes in the third period.
A game stand characterized by The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein
The aspect of the first meter display changes according to the passage of time,
The mode of the second meter display changes according to the passage of time,
The mode of the third meter display changes according to the passage of time,
A game stand characterized by It is a game stand according to claim 3 or 4,
The third meter display is displayed without changing the mode during the period in which the first display in the third animation display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein
The second display in the third animation display is configured to be performed after erasing the first display,
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein
The third animation display is a display that may be displayed while the reach display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 7, which is:
While the first display in the third animation display is displayed, the first display is overlapped with a display.
A game stand characterized by A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game stand characterized by A game console according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein
The gaming machine is a slot machine.
A game stand characterized by

Images